forked from MirrorRepos/RomWBW
Wayne Warthen
9 years ago
417 changed files with 6052 additions and 77513 deletions
@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** R o m W B W *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** Z80/Z180 System Software *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
|
|||
This directory ("Binary") is part of the RomWBW System Software |
|||
distribution archive. It contains the completed binary outputs of |
|||
the build process. As described below, these files are used to |
|||
assemble a working RetroBrew Computers system. |
|||
|
|||
The files in this directory are created by the build process that is |
|||
documented in the ReadMe.txt file in the Source directory. When |
|||
released the directory is populated with the default output files. |
|||
However, the output of custom builds will be placed in this directory |
|||
as well. |
|||
|
|||
ROM Firmware Images (<plt>_<cfg>.rom) |
|||
------------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
The files with a ".rom" extension are binary images ready to program |
|||
into an appropriate PROM. These files are named with the format |
|||
<plt>_<cfg>.rom. <plt> refers to the primary platform such as Zeta, |
|||
N8, Mark IV, etc. <cfg> refers to the specific configuration. When |
|||
released, there will be a standard configuration ("std") for each |
|||
platform. So, for example, the file called MK4_std.rom is a ROM |
|||
image for the Mark IV with the standard configuration. If a custom |
|||
configuration called "custom" is created and built, a new file called |
|||
MK4_custom.rom will be added to this directory. |
|||
|
|||
Documentation of the pre-built ROM Images is contained in the |
|||
RomList.txt file. |
|||
|
|||
ROM Executable Images (<plt>_<cfg>.com) |
|||
--------------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
When a ROM image (".rom") is created, an executable version of the |
|||
ROM is also created. These files have the same naming convention as |
|||
the ROM Image files, but have the extension ".com". These files can |
|||
be copied to a working system and run like a normal application. |
|||
|
|||
When run on the target system, they install in RAM just like they had |
|||
been programmed into the ROM. This allows a new ROM build to be |
|||
tested without reprogramming the actual ROM. |
|||
|
|||
ROM Binary Images (<plt>_<cfg>.img) |
|||
----------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
Also when a ROM image is created, a third variation of the ROM is |
|||
created again with the same naming convention, but with the extension |
|||
of .img. These files are similar to the .com files in that they can |
|||
be used to test a ROM build without actually programming a new ROM. |
|||
The .img files are specifically for loading via UNA from a FAT file |
|||
system. The functionality of the UNA FAT file system loader is |
|||
beyond the scope of this document. |
|||
|
|||
VDU ROM Image (vdu.rom) |
|||
----------------------- |
|||
|
|||
The VDU video board requires a dedicated onboard ROM containing the |
|||
font data. The "vdu.rom" file contains the binary data to program |
|||
onto that chip. |
|||
|
|||
Disk Images (fd*.img, hd*.img) |
|||
------------------------------ |
|||
|
|||
RomWBW includes a mechanism for generating floppy disk and hard disk |
|||
binary images that are ready to copy directly to a floppy, hard disk, |
|||
CF Card, or SD Card which will then be ready for use in any |
|||
RomWBW-based system. |
|||
|
|||
Essentially, these files contain prepared floppy and hard disk images |
|||
with a large set of programs and related files. By copying the |
|||
contents of these files to appropriate media as described below, you |
|||
can quickly create ready-to-use media. |
|||
|
|||
The fd*.img files are floppy disk images. They are sized for 1.44MB |
|||
floppy media and can be copied to actual floppy disks using |
|||
RawWriteWin (as long as you have access to a floppy drive on your |
|||
Windows computer). The resulting floppy disks will be usable on any |
|||
RomWBW-based system with floppy drive(s). |
|||
|
|||
Likewise, the hd*.img files are hard disk images. Each file is |
|||
intended to be copied to the start of any type of hard disk media |
|||
(typically a CF Card or SD Card). The resulting media will be usable |
|||
on any RomWBW-based system that accepts the corresponding media type. |
|||
|
|||
Note that the contents of the floppy/hard disk images are created by |
|||
the BuildImages.cmd script in the Source directory. Additional |
|||
information on how to generate custom disk images is found in the |
|||
Source\Images directory. |
|||
|
|||
Propeller ROM Images (*.eeprom) |
|||
------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
The files with and extension of ".eeprom" contain the binary images |
|||
to be programmed into the Propeller-based boards. The list below |
|||
indicates which file targets each of the Propeller board variants: |
|||
|
|||
ParPortProp ParPortProp.eeprom |
|||
PropIO V1 PropIO.eeprom |
|||
PropIO V2 PropIO2.eeprom |
|||
|
|||
Refer to the board documentation of the boards for more information |
|||
on how to program the EEPROMs on these boards. |
|||
@ -1,196 +1,111 @@ |
|||
You should find the following ROM |
|||
images in the Output driectory. |
|||
Refer to the descriptions below to select |
|||
one that matches your hardware |
|||
configuration, burn it, and use it. |
|||
|
|||
All builds have the following: |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** R o m W B W *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** Z80/Z180 System Software *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
|
|||
This directory ("Binary") is part of the RomWBW System Software |
|||
distribution archive. Refer to the ReadMe.txt file in this |
|||
directory for more information on the overall contents of the |
|||
directory. |
|||
|
|||
When distributed, RomWBW contains a set of pre-built ROM images that |
|||
are ready to program onto the EEPROM of any of the Z80/Z180 based |
|||
RetroBrew Computers CPU boards. Additionally, any custom built ROM |
|||
images will be placed in this directory. |
|||
|
|||
All of the pre-built ROM images are 512KB. This size is compatible |
|||
with all of the Z80/Z180 systems. Some systems can accept different |
|||
size ROM images. Creating alternative sizes requires a custom ROM |
|||
build (see ReadMe.txt in the Source directory). |
|||
|
|||
It is critical that the right ROM Imgae be selected for the target |
|||
platform being used. The table below indicates the correct ROM |
|||
image to use for each platform: |
|||
|
|||
SBC V1/V2 SBC_std.rom |
|||
Zeta V1 ZETA_std.rom |
|||
Zeta V2 ZETA2_std.rom |
|||
N8 N8_std.rom |
|||
Mark IV MK4_std.rom |
|||
|
|||
You will find there is one additional ROM image called |
|||
"UNA_std.rom". This ROM image is an UNA-based RomWBW ROM image. As |
|||
such, this ROM image can be used on any Z80/Z180 platform supported |
|||
by John Coffman's UNA BIOS. Refer to RetroBrew Computers Wiki for |
|||
more information on UNA hardware support. |
|||
|
|||
For each of the ROM Images (".rom"), there are corresponding files |
|||
with the extensions of ".com" and ".img". The .com variant can be |
|||
copied to a functional RomWBW-based system and executed like a |
|||
normal application under CP/M or Z-System. This will load the new |
|||
ROM on-the-fly. It is an excellent way to test a ROM Image before |
|||
actually burning it. Similarly, the .img files can be loaded using |
|||
the UNA FAT loader for testing. |
|||
|
|||
All of the standard ROM Images are configured with: |
|||
- 512KB ROM Disk |
|||
- 512KB RAM Disk |
|||
- 38.4Kbps baud console |
|||
|
|||
All of the above can be modified by using |
|||
a custom build. See Build.txt in the |
|||
Doc directory. |
|||
|
|||
Note have all hard disk units are assumed to have |
|||
at least 2 slices and therefore two drive letters |
|||
are assigned per disk unit by default. However, |
|||
you can easily add/remove drive letters and slices |
|||
by using the ASSIGN command to modify drive |
|||
letter to disk/slice mapping on the fly at |
|||
the command line. |
|||
|
|||
Note that there are no longer separate |
|||
ROM images for CP/M and ZSystem. Both |
|||
OS variants are now imbedded in the ROM |
|||
image and you are given the ability to |
|||
choose the one you want to boot at |
|||
startup. |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_std.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2: |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_diskio.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + DISKIO: |
|||
- Floppy support via DISKIO |
|||
- IDE support via DISKIO |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=IDE0:00, F:=IDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_dide.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + DUAL IDE: |
|||
- Floppy support via DISKIO |
|||
- IDE support via DISKIO |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=IDE0:00, F:=IDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_diskio3.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + DISKIO3: |
|||
- Floppy support via DISKIO3 |
|||
- IDE support via DISKIO3 |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=IDE0:00, F:=IDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_diskio3+cvdu.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + DISKIO3: |
|||
- Floppy support via DISKIO3 |
|||
- IDE support via DISKIO3 |
|||
- ColorVDU board support |
|||
- Console defaults to VGA & PS/2 Keyboard. Short JP2 (CONFIG) |
|||
to use the serial port as the console. |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=IDE0:00, F:=IDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_ppide.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + PPIDE: |
|||
- PPIDE support via built-in PPI |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=PPIDE0:00, D:=PPIDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_ppisd.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + PPISD: |
|||
- PPISD support |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=SD0:00, D:=SD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_dsd.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + Dual SD: |
|||
- Dual SD support |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=SD0:00, D:=SD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_propio.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2 + PROPIO: |
|||
- SD Card support via PropIO |
|||
- VGA console support via PropIO |
|||
- PS/2 Keyboard support via PropIO |
|||
- You *MUST* use the RomWBW specific firmware |
|||
for the Propeller found in the Support directory! |
|||
- Console defaults to VGA & PS/2 Keyboard. Short JP2 (CONFIG) |
|||
to use the serial port as the console. |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=PRPSD0:00, D:=PRPSD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_mfp.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2: |
|||
- IDE support via Multifunction / PIC |
|||
- Second UART via Multifunction / PIC |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=PPIDE0:00, D:=PPIDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_ci.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2: |
|||
- Cassette Interface mapped to RDR/PUN |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_simh.rom for N8VEM SIMH Simulator: |
|||
- SIMH HDSK (simulated hard disk) support |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=HDSK0:00, D:=HDSK0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_rf.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/2 + RAM Flopppy: |
|||
- RAM Floppy support |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=RF0, D:=RF1 |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_vdu.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2: |
|||
- VDU board support |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM |
|||
- NOTE: Console defaults to CRT & PS/2 Keyboard. Short JP2 |
|||
(one bit input port) to use the serial port as the console. |
|||
|
|||
N8VEM_cvdu.rom for N8VEM Z80 SBC V1/V2: |
|||
- ColorVDU board support |
|||
- Console defaults to VGA & PS/2 Keyboard. Short JP2 (CONFIG) |
|||
to use the serial port as the console. |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM |
|||
|
|||
ZETA_std.rom for Zeta Z80 SBC: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=PPIDE00-0, F:=PPIDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
ZETA_ppide.rom for Zeta Z80 SBC + PPIDE: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- PPIDE support via built-in PPI |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=PPIDE0:00, D:=PPIDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
ZETA_ppisd.rom for Zeta Z80 SBC + PPISD: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- PPISD support |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=SD0:00, D:=SD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
ZETA_ppp.rom for Zeta Z80 SBC w/ ParPortProp: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- SD Card support via ParPortProp |
|||
- VGA console support via ParPortProp |
|||
- PS/2 Keyboard support via ParPortProp |
|||
- You *MUST* use the RomWBW specific firmware |
|||
for the Propeller found in the Support directory! |
|||
- Console defaults to VGA & PS/2 Keyboard. Short JP1 (CONFIG) |
|||
to use the serial port as the console. |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=PPPSD0:00, F:=PPPSD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
ZETA2_std.rom for Zeta 2 Z80 SBC: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- PPIDE support via built-in PPI |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=PPIDE00-0, F:=PPIDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
ZETA2_ppide.rom for Zeta 2 Z80 SBC + PPIDE: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- PPIDE support via built-in PPI |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=PPIDE0:00, D:=PPIDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
ZETA2_ppisd.rom for Zeta 2 Z80 SBC + PPISD: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- PPISD support |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=SD0:00, D:=SD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
ZETA2_ppp.rom for Zeta 2 Z80 SBC w/ ParPortProp: |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- SD Card support via ParPortProp |
|||
- VGA console support via ParPortProp |
|||
- PS/2 Keyboard support via ParPortProp |
|||
- You *MUST* use the RomWBW specific firmware |
|||
for the Propeller found in the Support directory! |
|||
- Console defaults to VGA & PS/2 Keyboard. Short JP1 (CONFIG) |
|||
to use the serial port as the console. |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=PPPSD0:00, F:=PPPSD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8_2511.rom for N8 2511 Z180: |
|||
- Assumes CPU oscillator frequency of 18.432MHz |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- SD card support via built-in SD card slot |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=SD0:00, F:=SD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
N8_2312.rom for N8 2312 Z180: |
|||
- Assumes CPU oscillator frequency of 18.432MHz |
|||
- Floppy support via built-in FDC |
|||
- SD card support via built-in SD card slot |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=SD0:00, F:=SD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
MK4_std.rom for Mark IV Z180 SBC: |
|||
- Assumes CPU oscillator frequency of 18.432MHz |
|||
- Onboard SD Card |
|||
- Onboard IDE |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=SD0-0, D:=SD0-1, E:=IDE0:00, F:=IDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
MK4_diskio3.rom for Mark IV Z180 SBC: |
|||
- Assumes CPU oscillator frequency of 18.432MHz |
|||
- Floppy support via DISKIO3 |
|||
- IDE support via DISKIO3 |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=FD0, D:=FD1, E:=IDE0:00, F:=IDE0:01 |
|||
|
|||
MK4_propio.rom for Mark IV Z180 SBC: |
|||
- Assumes CPU oscillator frequency of 18.432MHz |
|||
- SD Card support via PropIO |
|||
- VGA console support via PropIO |
|||
- PS/2 Keyboard support via PropIO |
|||
- You *MUST* use the RomWBW specific firmware |
|||
for the Propeller found in the Support directory! |
|||
- Drives A:=ROM, B:=RAM, C:=PRPSD0:00, D:=PRPSD0:01 |
|||
|
|||
UNA_std.rom for all UNA supported platforms (SBC V1/2, Zeta, Mark IV) |
|||
- Initial baud rate is 9600, but can be configured |
|||
- Resources are managed dynamically by UNA BIOS |
|||
- Refer to UNA project for more details |
|||
- Drive assignments occur dynamically based on UNA config |
|||
- 38.4Kbps baud serial console |
|||
- Auto-discovery of all serial ports |
|||
|
|||
All hard disk type devices (IDE, PPIDE, CF Card, SD Card) will be |
|||
automatically assigned two drive letters per device. The drive |
|||
letters will refer to the first 2 slices of the device. The ASSIGN |
|||
command can be used to display and reassign drives to disk devices |
|||
and slices as desired. |
|||
|
|||
Standard ROM Image Notes |
|||
------------------------ |
|||
|
|||
The standard ROM images will detect and install support for certain |
|||
devices and peripherals that are on-board or frequently used with |
|||
each platform as documented below. If the device or peripheral is |
|||
not detected at boot, the ROM will simply bypass support |
|||
appropriately. |
|||
|
|||
SBC: |
|||
- Includes support for PPIDE/CF Card(s) connected to on-board |
|||
parallel port. |
|||
- Includes support for CVDU and VGA3 boards. If detected at |
|||
startup, support for video and keyboard is installed |
|||
including VT-100/ANSI terminal emulation. |
|||
- Auto-detects PropIO or PropIO V2 and installs associated |
|||
video, keyboard and SD Card support if present. |
|||
- If PropIO, PropIO V2, CVDU, or VGA hardware is detected, |
|||
initial console output is determined by JP2. If JP2 is |
|||
shorted, console will go to on-board serial port, if JP2 |
|||
is open, console will go to the detected video and keyboard |
|||
ports. |
|||
- SBC V1 has a known race condition in the bank switching |
|||
circuit which is likely to cause system instability. SBC |
|||
V2 does not have this issue. |
|||
|
|||
ZETA/ZETA2: |
|||
- Includes support for on-board floppy disk controller and |
|||
two attached floppy disks. |
|||
- Auto-detects ParPortProp and includes support for it if it |
|||
is attached. |
|||
- If ParPortProp is installed, initial console output is |
|||
determined by JP1. If JP1 is shorted, console will go to |
|||
on-board serial port, if JP1 is open, console will go to |
|||
ParPortProp video and keyboard ports. |
|||
|
|||
N8: |
|||
- Includes support for on-board floppy disk controller and |
|||
two attached floppy disks. |
|||
- Includes support for on-board TMS9918 video and keyboard |
|||
including VT-100/ANSI terminal emulation. |
|||
- Includes support for on-board SD Card as hard disk and |
|||
assumes a production level N8 board (date code >= 2312). |
|||
|
|||
MK4: |
|||
- Includes support for on-board IDE port (CF Card via adapter). |
|||
- Includes support for on-board SD Card port. |
|||
- Auto-detects PropIO or PropIO V2 and installs associated |
|||
video, keyboard and SD Card support if present. |
|||
- Includes support for CVDU and VGA3 boards. If detected at |
|||
startup, support for video and keyboard is installed |
|||
including VT-100/ANSI terminal emulation. |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,350 +0,0 @@ |
|||
Building a Custom ROM |
|||
--------------------- |
|||
|
|||
At present, the build environment assumes you are running |
|||
a current version of Microsoft Windows (either 32-bit or |
|||
64-bit). Additionally, you will need Microsoft PowerShell. |
|||
PowerShell is included in all distributions of Microsoft |
|||
Windows starting with Vista. It is available as a free |
|||
download for Windows XP from Microsoft |
|||
|
|||
Other than PowerShell, all required tools are included in |
|||
the distribution. You should not need anything other than |
|||
what comes as part of Windows or as part of the distribution. |
|||
|
|||
In summary, the process involves the 4 steps below. You must |
|||
configure PowerShell prior to these steps, but this only needs |
|||
to be done once. |
|||
|
|||
The basic steps to create a custom ROM are: |
|||
|
|||
1) Create/update configuration file |
|||
|
|||
2) Update/Add/Delete any files you want incorporated in |
|||
the ROM Disk |
|||
|
|||
3) Run the build scripts and |
|||
confirm there are no errors. |
|||
|
|||
4) Burn the resultant ROM image and try it. |
|||
|
|||
I strongly recommend that you initially SKIP steps |
|||
1 & 2. Just try steps 3 & 4 to make sure you are |
|||
able to build a ROM and test it in your hardware. |
|||
|
|||
Each of the 4 steps above is described in more detail |
|||
below. |
|||
|
|||
Acquiring the Distribution |
|||
-------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
Preparing PowerShell |
|||
-------------------- |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1. Create/Update Configuration File |
|||
----------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
The settings for a build are primarily controled by |
|||
a configuration file that is included in the build |
|||
process. In order to customize your settings, you |
|||
need to modify an existing configuration file or |
|||
create your own. |
|||
|
|||
Configuration files are found in the Source\BIOS\Config |
|||
directory. If you look in the this directory, you will see |
|||
a series of files named XXXX_yyyy.asm. Each of |
|||
them corresponds to one of the standard configurations |
|||
listed in the ROMList.txt file. |
|||
|
|||
You have two choices. You can simply modify the existing |
|||
configuration file that is closest to your situation, or |
|||
you can copy it to a new XXXX_yyyy.asm file and modify |
|||
that. I recommend that you copy one to your own name so |
|||
that you will always have the unmodified standard configuration |
|||
files left in place. So, for example, you could just |
|||
copy ZETA_std.asm to ZETA_wayne.asm. You MUST |
|||
name your config file as XXXX_yyyy.asm. The XXXX portion |
|||
must match your platform (N8VEM, ZETA, ZETA2, N8, UNA). |
|||
The yyyy portion can be whatever you want. |
|||
|
|||
The config files are simply text files with various |
|||
settings. Open your target config file with your |
|||
favorite text editor and modify the settings as desired. |
|||
|
|||
Unfortunately, I have not yet documented each of the |
|||
settings in detail; that will be a separate document |
|||
provided in the future. However, there are comments |
|||
in the config file that will probably be sufficient |
|||
for the most part. |
|||
|
|||
2. Update/Add/Delete ROM Disk Files |
|||
----------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
The files that are included on the ROM Disk of your |
|||
ROM are copied from a set of directories during the |
|||
build process. This allows you to have complete |
|||
flexibility over the files you want included in your |
|||
ROM. |
|||
|
|||
If you look at the RomDsk directory, you will see |
|||
a variety of subdirectories. These subdirectories |
|||
contain the files that will be included in the |
|||
ROM disk. The build process will determine |
|||
which subdirectories to include files from based |
|||
on the following rules: |
|||
|
|||
First, all files from either ROM_512KB or ROM_1024KB will |
|||
be included depending on on the size of the ROM you |
|||
are building. If you are building a 512KB ROM, then |
|||
all the files from ROM_512KB will be included. If you |
|||
are building a 1MB ROM, then all the files from ROM_1024KB |
|||
will be included. Essentialy, the files in ROM_1204KB are |
|||
a superset of the ones in ROM_512KB because there is more |
|||
space available for the ROM drive. |
|||
|
|||
Second, all files from the directory that corresponds to |
|||
your configuration file will be included. If you build |
|||
the "ZETA_std" configuration, all files in ZETA_std will |
|||
be added. Note that these files will be in addition |
|||
to the files from the ROM_XXXKB directory. |
|||
|
|||
If you created your own config file (like ZETA_wayne.asm |
|||
described above), you MUST create a subdirectory within |
|||
the RomDsk directory and populate it with the files |
|||
you want added. Normally, you would include the |
|||
files from the original standard config. So, if |
|||
you created ZETA_wayne.asm from ZETA_std.asm, |
|||
then you would create a subdirectory in RomDsk called |
|||
ZETA_wayne and copy all the files from ZETA_std to |
|||
ZETA_wayne. |
|||
|
|||
3. Run the Build Process |
|||
------------------------ |
|||
|
|||
NOTE: The process described here is the more commonly |
|||
used build script. If you wish to use a makefile |
|||
instead, refer to the comments in the makefile in |
|||
the Source directory as an alternative to the |
|||
process described here. |
|||
|
|||
The build involves running commands at the command |
|||
prompt. From a Command Prompt window, you will need |
|||
to change to the high level directory for the build. |
|||
Normally, you would be changing to the RomWBW directory |
|||
unless you renamed it. |
|||
|
|||
First, you will need to build the components that are |
|||
common to all configurations. These components do not |
|||
require any configuration. To build these, use the |
|||
following command and ensure it completes |
|||
without error: |
|||
|
|||
BuildCommon |
|||
|
|||
To run the configuration specific build and be prompted |
|||
for required information, just enter "Build". You will |
|||
be prompted for the information described below and the |
|||
build should run. If an error is encountered, the build |
|||
should stop and display an error in red text. |
|||
|
|||
If you immediately receive the error "the execution of |
|||
scripts is disabled on this system", then you will need to |
|||
change the PowerShell Execution-Polcy to "RemoteSigned". |
|||
To do this, you need to right-click on FixPowerShell.cmd and |
|||
choose "Run as Administrator" to make the change. It is |
|||
critical that you right-click and use "Run as Administrator" |
|||
or the change will not work (you will get an error |
|||
indicating "Access to the registry denied" if you fail to |
|||
use "Run as Administrator". |
|||
|
|||
The build script will prompt you for the following information |
|||
which you will need to provide (don't worry, it is simple): |
|||
|
|||
Platform: |
|||
|
|||
Respond with the name of the platform that you are targeting. |
|||
It must be one of N8VEM, ZETA, ZETA2, N8, or UNA. |
|||
|
|||
Configuration: |
|||
|
|||
Respond with the name of the configuration you wish to build. |
|||
A list of all available configurations is displayed for your |
|||
convenience. For example, if you are building the provided |
|||
ZETA_std configuration, just enter "std". If you have created a |
|||
custom configuration as described above, you would enter |
|||
"wayne". |
|||
|
|||
ROM Size [512|1024]: |
|||
|
|||
Respond with either "512" for a 512KB ROM build or "1024" for a |
|||
1MB ROM build. Only the two choices are possible at this time. |
|||
It is important that you choose a ROM size that is no larger than |
|||
the size of the ROM you will ultimately be burning. This is |
|||
dependant on your hardware. |
|||
|
|||
At this point, the build should run and you will see output related |
|||
to the assembler runs and some utility invocations. Just review |
|||
the output for any obvioius errors. Normally, all errors will |
|||
cause the build to stop immediately and display an error message |
|||
in red. |
|||
|
|||
You will see some lines in the output indicating the amount of |
|||
space various components have taken. You should check these |
|||
to make sure you do not see any negative numbers which would |
|||
indicate that you have included too many features/drivers for |
|||
the available memory space. Here are examples of the lines |
|||
showing the space used: |
|||
|
|||
DATA space remaining: 39 bytes. |
|||
BOOT LOADER space remaining: 3503 bytes. |
|||
CBIOS space remaining: 161 bytes. |
|||
DBGMON space remaining: 860 bytes. |
|||
ROMX space remaining: 8191 bytes. |
|||
BOOT LOADER space remaining: 3503 bytes. |
|||
|
|||
4. Deploy the ROM |
|||
----------------- |
|||
|
|||
If you look in the Output directory. You should find the following files: |
|||
|
|||
<config>.rom - binary ROM image to burn to EEPROM |
|||
<config>.com - executable version of the system image that can be |
|||
copied via xmodem to a running system to test |
|||
the build. |
|||
<config>.img - system image that can be written to an SD/CF Card |
|||
and loaded via the UNA FS FAT loader. |
|||
|
|||
The actual ROM image is the file ending in .rom. It should be exactly |
|||
512KB or 1MB depending on the ROM size you chose. Simply burn the .rom |
|||
image to your ROM and install it in your hardware. |
|||
|
|||
Specifying Build Options on Command Line |
|||
---------------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
If you don't want to be prompted for the options to the "Build" |
|||
command, you can specify the options right on the command line. |
|||
|
|||
For example: |
|||
|
|||
Build ZETA std 512 |
|||
|
|||
In this case, you will not be prompted. This is useful if you |
|||
wish to automate your build process. |
|||
|
|||
Example Build Run |
|||
----------------- |
|||
|
|||
C:\Users\WWarthen\Projects\N8VEM\Build\RomWBW>Build.cmd |
|||
Platform [N8VEM|ZETA|N8|UNA|S100]: ZETA |
|||
Configurations available: |
|||
> ppp |
|||
> std |
|||
Configuration: std |
|||
ROM Size [512|1024]: 512 |
|||
|
|||
Building ZETA_std: 512KB ROM configuration std for Z80... |
|||
|
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 ccpb03.asm cp.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 bdosb01.asm dos.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 syscfg.asm syscfg.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 -dBLD_SYS=SYS_CPM cbios.asm cbios.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
INFOLIST occupies 18 bytes. |
|||
UTIL occupies 484 bytes. |
|||
FD_DATA occupies 340 bytes. |
|||
PPIDE_DATA occupies 1116 bytes. |
|||
CBIOS space remaining: 2092 bytes. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 dbgmon.asm dbgmon.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
DBGMON space remaining: 795 bytes. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 prefix.asm prefix.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 bootrom.asm bootrom.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 bootapp.asm bootapp.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 loader.asm loader.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
LOADER space remaining: 1205 bytes. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 pgzero.asm pgzero.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 hbios.asm hbios.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
UART occupies 146 bytes. |
|||
FD occupies 2071 bytes. |
|||
PPIDE occupies 809 bytes. |
|||
HBIOS space remaining: 24428 bytes. |
|||
STACK space remaining: 145 bytes. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 hbfill.asm hbfill.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
Configuration: ZETA Z80 SBC, FLOPPY (AUTOSIZE), PPIDE (STD) |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
tasm -t80 -g3 romfill.asm romfill.bin |
|||
TASM Z80 Assembler. Version 3.2 September, 2001. |
|||
Copyright (C) 2001 Squak Valley Software |
|||
tasm: pass 1 complete. |
|||
tasm: pass 2 complete. |
|||
tasm: Number of errors = 0 |
|||
Building ZETA_std output files... |
|||
Building 512KB ZETA_std ROM disk data file... |
|||
|
|||
C:\Users\WWarthen\Projects\N8VEM\Build\RomWBW> |
|||
Binary file not shown.
Binary file not shown.
Binary file not shown.
@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** R o m W B W *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** Z80/Z180 System Software *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
|
|||
This directory ("Doc") is part of the RomWBW System Software |
|||
distribution archive. It contains documentation for components of |
|||
the system. |
|||
|
|||
CPM Manual: |
|||
|
|||
The original DRI CP/M 2.x Operating System Manual. This should be |
|||
considered the primary reference for system operation. The section |
|||
on CP/M 2 Alteration can be ignored since this work has already been |
|||
completed as part of the RomWBW distribution. |
|||
|
|||
FDisk Manual: |
|||
|
|||
The operational manual for John Coffman's hard disk partitioning |
|||
program. This program is included in RomWBW as FDISK80. |
|||
|
|||
RomWBW Architecture: |
|||
|
|||
Document describing the architecture of the RomWBW HBIOS. It |
|||
includes reference information for the HBIOS calls. |
|||
|
|||
ZCPR Manual: |
|||
|
|||
ZCPR is the command proccessor portion of Z-System. This is the |
|||
manual for ZCPR 1.x as included in RomWBW. The installation |
|||
instructions can be ignored since that work has already been |
|||
completed as part of the RomWBW distribution. |
|||
|
|||
ZSDOS Manual: |
|||
|
|||
ZSDOS is the DOS portion of Z-System. This is the manual fo ZSDOS |
|||
1.x as included in RomWBW. The installation instructions can be |
|||
ignored since that work has already been completed as part of the |
|||
RomWBW distribution. |
|||
Binary file not shown.
Binary file not shown.
Binary file not shown.
@ -0,0 +1,674 @@ |
|||
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE |
|||
Version 3, 29 June 2007 |
|||
|
|||
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> |
|||
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies |
|||
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. |
|||
|
|||
Preamble |
|||
|
|||
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for |
|||
software and other kinds of works. |
|||
|
|||
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed |
|||
to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, |
|||
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to |
|||
share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free |
|||
software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the |
|||
GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to |
|||
any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to |
|||
your programs, too. |
|||
|
|||
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not |
|||
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you |
|||
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for |
|||
them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you |
|||
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new |
|||
free programs, and that you know you can do these things. |
|||
|
|||
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you |
|||
these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have |
|||
certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if |
|||
you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. |
|||
|
|||
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether |
|||
gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same |
|||
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive |
|||
or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they |
|||
know their rights. |
|||
|
|||
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: |
|||
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License |
|||
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. |
|||
|
|||
For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains |
|||
that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and |
|||
authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as |
|||
changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to |
|||
authors of previous versions. |
|||
|
|||
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run |
|||
modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer |
|||
can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of |
|||
protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic |
|||
pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to |
|||
use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we |
|||
have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those |
|||
products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we |
|||
stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions |
|||
of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. |
|||
|
|||
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. |
|||
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of |
|||
software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to |
|||
avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could |
|||
make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that |
|||
patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. |
|||
|
|||
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and |
|||
modification follow. |
|||
|
|||
TERMS AND CONDITIONS |
|||
|
|||
0. Definitions. |
|||
|
|||
"This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. |
|||
|
|||
"Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of |
|||
works, such as semiconductor masks. |
|||
|
|||
"The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this |
|||
License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and |
|||
"recipients" may be individuals or organizations. |
|||
|
|||
To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work |
|||
in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an |
|||
exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the |
|||
earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. |
|||
|
|||
A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based |
|||
on the Program. |
|||
|
|||
To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without |
|||
permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for |
|||
infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a |
|||
computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, |
|||
distribution (with or without modification), making available to the |
|||
public, and in some countries other activities as well. |
|||
|
|||
To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other |
|||
parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through |
|||
a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. |
|||
|
|||
An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" |
|||
to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible |
|||
feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) |
|||
tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the |
|||
extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the |
|||
work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If |
|||
the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a |
|||
menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. |
|||
|
|||
1. Source Code. |
|||
|
|||
The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work |
|||
for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source |
|||
form of a work. |
|||
|
|||
A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official |
|||
standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of |
|||
interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that |
|||
is widely used among developers working in that language. |
|||
|
|||
The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other |
|||
than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of |
|||
packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major |
|||
Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that |
|||
Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an |
|||
implementation is available to the public in source code form. A |
|||
"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component |
|||
(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system |
|||
(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to |
|||
produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. |
|||
|
|||
The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all |
|||
the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable |
|||
work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to |
|||
control those activities. However, it does not include the work's |
|||
System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free |
|||
programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but |
|||
which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source |
|||
includes interface definition files associated with source files for |
|||
the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically |
|||
linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, |
|||
such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those |
|||
subprograms and other parts of the work. |
|||
|
|||
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users |
|||
can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding |
|||
Source. |
|||
|
|||
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that |
|||
same work. |
|||
|
|||
2. Basic Permissions. |
|||
|
|||
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of |
|||
copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated |
|||
conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited |
|||
permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a |
|||
covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its |
|||
content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your |
|||
rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. |
|||
|
|||
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not |
|||
convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains |
|||
in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose |
|||
of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you |
|||
with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with |
|||
the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do |
|||
not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works |
|||
for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction |
|||
and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of |
|||
your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. |
|||
|
|||
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under |
|||
the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 |
|||
makes it unnecessary. |
|||
|
|||
3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. |
|||
|
|||
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological |
|||
measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article |
|||
11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or |
|||
similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such |
|||
measures. |
|||
|
|||
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid |
|||
circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention |
|||
is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to |
|||
the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or |
|||
modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's |
|||
users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of |
|||
technological measures. |
|||
|
|||
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. |
|||
|
|||
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you |
|||
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and |
|||
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; |
|||
keep intact all notices stating that this License and any |
|||
non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; |
|||
keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all |
|||
recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. |
|||
|
|||
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, |
|||
and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. |
|||
|
|||
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. |
|||
|
|||
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to |
|||
produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the |
|||
terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: |
|||
|
|||
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified |
|||
it, and giving a relevant date. |
|||
|
|||
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is |
|||
released under this License and any conditions added under section |
|||
7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to |
|||
"keep intact all notices". |
|||
|
|||
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this |
|||
License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This |
|||
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 |
|||
additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, |
|||
regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no |
|||
permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not |
|||
invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. |
|||
|
|||
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display |
|||
Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive |
|||
interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your |
|||
work need not make them do so. |
|||
|
|||
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent |
|||
works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, |
|||
and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, |
|||
in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an |
|||
"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not |
|||
used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users |
|||
beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work |
|||
in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other |
|||
parts of the aggregate. |
|||
|
|||
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. |
|||
|
|||
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms |
|||
of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the |
|||
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, |
|||
in one of these ways: |
|||
|
|||
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product |
|||
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the |
|||
Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium |
|||
customarily used for software interchange. |
|||
|
|||
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product |
|||
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a |
|||
written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as |
|||
long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product |
|||
model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a |
|||
copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the |
|||
product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical |
|||
medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no |
|||
more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this |
|||
conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the |
|||
Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. |
|||
|
|||
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the |
|||
written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This |
|||
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and |
|||
only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord |
|||
with subsection 6b. |
|||
|
|||
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated |
|||
place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the |
|||
Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no |
|||
further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the |
|||
Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to |
|||
copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source |
|||
may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) |
|||
that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain |
|||
clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the |
|||
Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the |
|||
Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is |
|||
available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. |
|||
|
|||
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided |
|||
you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding |
|||
Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no |
|||
charge under subsection 6d. |
|||
|
|||
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded |
|||
from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be |
|||
included in conveying the object code work. |
|||
|
|||
A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any |
|||
tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, |
|||
or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation |
|||
into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, |
|||
doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular |
|||
product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a |
|||
typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status |
|||
of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user |
|||
actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product |
|||
is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial |
|||
commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent |
|||
the only significant mode of use of the product. |
|||
|
|||
"Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, |
|||
procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install |
|||
and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from |
|||
a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must |
|||
suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object |
|||
code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because |
|||
modification has been made. |
|||
|
|||
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or |
|||
specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as |
|||
part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the |
|||
User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a |
|||
fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the |
|||
Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied |
|||
by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply |
|||
if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install |
|||
modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has |
|||
been installed in ROM). |
|||
|
|||
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a |
|||
requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates |
|||
for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for |
|||
the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a |
|||
network may be denied when the modification itself materially and |
|||
adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and |
|||
protocols for communication across the network. |
|||
|
|||
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, |
|||
in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly |
|||
documented (and with an implementation available to the public in |
|||
source code form), and must require no special password or key for |
|||
unpacking, reading or copying. |
|||
|
|||
7. Additional Terms. |
|||
|
|||
"Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this |
|||
License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. |
|||
Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall |
|||
be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent |
|||
that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions |
|||
apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately |
|||
under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by |
|||
this License without regard to the additional permissions. |
|||
|
|||
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option |
|||
remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of |
|||
it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own |
|||
removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place |
|||
additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, |
|||
for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. |
|||
|
|||
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you |
|||
add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of |
|||
that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: |
|||
|
|||
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the |
|||
terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or |
|||
|
|||
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or |
|||
author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal |
|||
Notices displayed by works containing it; or |
|||
|
|||
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or |
|||
requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in |
|||
reasonable ways as different from the original version; or |
|||
|
|||
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or |
|||
authors of the material; or |
|||
|
|||
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some |
|||
trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or |
|||
|
|||
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that |
|||
material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of |
|||
it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for |
|||
any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on |
|||
those licensors and authors. |
|||
|
|||
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further |
|||
restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you |
|||
received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is |
|||
governed by this License along with a term that is a further |
|||
restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains |
|||
a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this |
|||
License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms |
|||
of that license document, provided that the further restriction does |
|||
not survive such relicensing or conveying. |
|||
|
|||
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you |
|||
must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the |
|||
additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating |
|||
where to find the applicable terms. |
|||
|
|||
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the |
|||
form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; |
|||
the above requirements apply either way. |
|||
|
|||
8. Termination. |
|||
|
|||
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly |
|||
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or |
|||
modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under |
|||
this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third |
|||
paragraph of section 11). |
|||
|
|||
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your |
|||
license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) |
|||
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and |
|||
finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright |
|||
holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means |
|||
prior to 60 days after the cessation. |
|||
|
|||
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is |
|||
reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the |
|||
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have |
|||
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that |
|||
copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after |
|||
your receipt of the notice. |
|||
|
|||
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the |
|||
licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under |
|||
this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently |
|||
reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same |
|||
material under section 10. |
|||
|
|||
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. |
|||
|
|||
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or |
|||
run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work |
|||
occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission |
|||
to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, |
|||
nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or |
|||
modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do |
|||
not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a |
|||
covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. |
|||
|
|||
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. |
|||
|
|||
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically |
|||
receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and |
|||
propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible |
|||
for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. |
|||
|
|||
An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an |
|||
organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an |
|||
organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered |
|||
work results from an entity transaction, each party to that |
|||
transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever |
|||
licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could |
|||
give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the |
|||
Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if |
|||
the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. |
|||
|
|||
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the |
|||
rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may |
|||
not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of |
|||
rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation |
|||
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that |
|||
any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for |
|||
sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. |
|||
|
|||
11. Patents. |
|||
|
|||
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this |
|||
License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The |
|||
work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". |
|||
|
|||
A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims |
|||
owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or |
|||
hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted |
|||
by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, |
|||
but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a |
|||
consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For |
|||
purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant |
|||
patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of |
|||
this License. |
|||
|
|||
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free |
|||
patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to |
|||
make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and |
|||
propagate the contents of its contributor version. |
|||
|
|||
In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express |
|||
agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent |
|||
(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to |
|||
sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a |
|||
party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a |
|||
patent against the party. |
|||
|
|||
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, |
|||
and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone |
|||
to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a |
|||
publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, |
|||
then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so |
|||
available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the |
|||
patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner |
|||
consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent |
|||
license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have |
|||
actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the |
|||
covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work |
|||
in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that |
|||
country that you have reason to believe are valid. |
|||
|
|||
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or |
|||
arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a |
|||
covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties |
|||
receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify |
|||
or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license |
|||
you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered |
|||
work and works based on it. |
|||
|
|||
A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within |
|||
the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is |
|||
conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are |
|||
specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered |
|||
work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is |
|||
in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment |
|||
to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying |
|||
the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the |
|||
parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory |
|||
patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work |
|||
conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily |
|||
for and in connection with specific products or compilations that |
|||
contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, |
|||
or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. |
|||
|
|||
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting |
|||
any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may |
|||
otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. |
|||
|
|||
12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. |
|||
|
|||
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or |
|||
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not |
|||
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a |
|||
covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this |
|||
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may |
|||
not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you |
|||
to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey |
|||
the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this |
|||
License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. |
|||
|
|||
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. |
|||
|
|||
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have |
|||
permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed |
|||
under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single |
|||
combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this |
|||
License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, |
|||
but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, |
|||
section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the |
|||
combination as such. |
|||
|
|||
14. Revised Versions of this License. |
|||
|
|||
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of |
|||
the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will |
|||
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to |
|||
address new problems or concerns. |
|||
|
|||
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the |
|||
Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General |
|||
Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the |
|||
option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered |
|||
version or of any later version published by the Free Software |
|||
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the |
|||
GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published |
|||
by the Free Software Foundation. |
|||
|
|||
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future |
|||
versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's |
|||
public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you |
|||
to choose that version for the Program. |
|||
|
|||
Later license versions may give you additional or different |
|||
permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any |
|||
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a |
|||
later version. |
|||
|
|||
15. Disclaimer of Warranty. |
|||
|
|||
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY |
|||
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT |
|||
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY |
|||
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, |
|||
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR |
|||
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM |
|||
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF |
|||
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. |
|||
|
|||
16. Limitation of Liability. |
|||
|
|||
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING |
|||
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS |
|||
THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY |
|||
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE |
|||
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF |
|||
DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD |
|||
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), |
|||
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF |
|||
SUCH DAMAGES. |
|||
|
|||
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. |
|||
|
|||
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided |
|||
above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, |
|||
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates |
|||
an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the |
|||
Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a |
|||
copy of the Program in return for a fee. |
|||
|
|||
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS |
|||
|
|||
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs |
|||
|
|||
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest |
|||
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it |
|||
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. |
|||
|
|||
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest |
|||
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively |
|||
state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least |
|||
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. |
|||
|
|||
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> |
|||
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> |
|||
|
|||
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify |
|||
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by |
|||
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or |
|||
(at your option) any later version. |
|||
|
|||
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, |
|||
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of |
|||
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the |
|||
GNU General Public License for more details. |
|||
|
|||
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
|||
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. |
|||
|
|||
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. |
|||
|
|||
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short |
|||
notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: |
|||
|
|||
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> |
|||
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. |
|||
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it |
|||
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. |
|||
|
|||
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate |
|||
parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands |
|||
might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". |
|||
|
|||
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, |
|||
if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. |
|||
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see |
|||
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. |
|||
|
|||
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program |
|||
into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you |
|||
may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with |
|||
the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General |
|||
Public License instead of this License. But first, please read |
|||
<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. |
|||
@ -1,167 +1,288 @@ |
|||
************************************************************ |
|||
*** R o m W B W *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** System Software for N8VEM Z80 Projects *** |
|||
************************************************************ |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** R o m W B W *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*** Z80/Z180 System Software *** |
|||
*** *** |
|||
*********************************************************************** |
|||
|
|||
Wayne Warthen (wwarthen@gmail.com) |
|||
Version 2.8.0, 2017-06-10 |
|||
https://www.retrobrewcomputers.org/ |
|||
|
|||
RomWBW is a ROM-based implementation of CP/M-80 2.2 and Z-System for |
|||
all RetroBrew Computers Z80/Z180 hardware platforms including SBC |
|||
1/2, Zeta 1/2, N8, and Mark IV. Virtually all RetroBrew hardware is |
|||
supported including floppy, hard disk (IDE, CF Card, SD Card), Video, |
|||
and keyboard. VT-100 terminal emulation is built-in. |
|||
|
|||
The RomWBW ROM loads and runs the built-in operating systems directly |
|||
from the ROM and includes a selection of standard/useful applications |
|||
accessed via a ROM disk drive. A RAM disk drive is also provided |
|||
to allow temporary file storage. |
|||
|
|||
Pre-built ROM images are included for all platforms. Detailed system |
|||
customization is achieved by making simple modifications to a |
|||
configuration file and running a build script to generate a custom |
|||
ROM image. All source and build tools are included in the |
|||
distribution. As distributed, the build scripts run under any modern |
|||
32 or 64 bit version of Microsoft Windows. |
|||
|
|||
John Coffman's UNA hardware BIOS is fully supported by RomWBW. In the |
|||
case of UNA, a single ROM image (pre-built) is used for all supported |
|||
platforms and is customized using a ROM-based setup program. See the |
|||
UNA section below for more information. |
|||
|
|||
Quick Start |
|||
----------- |
|||
|
|||
Builders: Wayne Warthen (wwarthen@gmail.com) |
|||
Douglas Goodall (douglas_goodall@mac.com) |
|||
David Giles (vk5dg@internode.on.net) |
|||
A pre-built ROM image is included for each of the hardware platforms |
|||
supported. These ROM images are found in the Binary directory of the |
|||
distribution and have a file extension of ".rom". Simply program the |
|||
ROM of your system with the appropriate ROM image. Please see the |
|||
RomList.txt file in the Binary directory for details on selecting the |
|||
correct ROM image for your system and platform specific information. |
|||
|
|||
Connect a serial terminal or computer with terminal emulation |
|||
software to the primary RS-232 port of your CPU board. A null-modem |
|||
connection is generally required. Set the line characteristics to |
|||
38400 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control. |
|||
Select VT-100 terminal emulation. |
|||
|
|||
Upon power-up, your terminal should display a sign-on banner within 2 |
|||
seconds followed by hardware inventory and discovery information. |
|||
When hardware initialization is completed, a boot loader prompt |
|||
allows you to choose a ROM-based operating system, system monitor, or |
|||
boot from a disk device. |
|||
|
|||
CPU Speed |
|||
--------- |
|||
|
|||
RomWBW ROM images support virtually any CPU speed your system is |
|||
running. However, there are some hardware-oriented caveats to be |
|||
aware of. |
|||
|
|||
The use of high density floppy disks requires a CPU speed of 8 MHz or |
|||
greater. |
|||
|
|||
The latest X-Modem file transfer programs (XM.COM, XM-A0.COM, and |
|||
XM-A1.COM) require a CPU speeed of 6 MHz or greater to support the |
|||
default RomWBW serial port speed of 38400 baud. Older variants of |
|||
the X-Modem programs are included (XM5.COM, XM5-A0, and XM5-A1) which |
|||
will handle 38400 baud on system running down to 4 MHz. |
|||
|
|||
Updated: 2015-04-07 |
|||
Version: 2.7.1 |
|||
Upgrading from Previous Versions |
|||
-------------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
This is an adaptation of CP/M-80 2.2 and ZSDOS/ZCPR |
|||
targeting ROMs for all N8VEM Z80 hardware variations |
|||
including SBC 1/2, Zeta 1/2, N8, and Mark IV. |
|||
Program a new ROM chip from an image in the new distribution. Install |
|||
the new ROM chip and boot your system. At the boot loader "Boot:" |
|||
prompt, select either CP/M or Z-System to load the OS from ROM. |
|||
|
|||
If you have spare rom chips for your system, it is always safest to |
|||
keep your existing, work rom chip and program a new one so that you |
|||
can return to the old one if the new one does not work properly. |
|||
|
|||
If you use a customized ROM image, it is recommended that you first |
|||
try the pre-built ROM image first and then move on to generating a |
|||
custom image. |
|||
|
|||
It is entirely possible to reprogram your system ROM using the FLASH |
|||
utility from Will Sowerbutts on your ROM drive (B:). In this case, |
|||
you would need to transfer the new ROM image to your system using |
|||
X-Modem. Obviously, there is some risk to this approach since any |
|||
issues with the programming or ROM image could result in a |
|||
non-functional system. |
|||
|
|||
If your system has any bootable drives, then update the OS image on |
|||
each drive using SYSCOPY. For example, if C: is a bootable drive |
|||
with the Z-System OS, you would update the OS image on this drive |
|||
with the command: |
|||
|
|||
B>SYSCOPY C:=B:ZSYS.SYS |
|||
|
|||
If you have copies of any of the system utilities on drives other |
|||
than the ROM disk drive, you need to copy the latest version of the |
|||
programs from the ROM drive (B:) to any drives containing these |
|||
programs. For example, if you have a copy of the ASSIGN.COM program |
|||
on C:, you would update it from the new ROM using the COPY command: |
|||
|
|||
B>COPY B:ASSIGN.COM C: |
|||
|
|||
The following programs are maintained with the ROM images and all |
|||
copies of these programs should be updated when upgrading to a new |
|||
ROM version: |
|||
|
|||
- ASSIGN.COM |
|||
- FORMAT.COM |
|||
- OSLDR.COM |
|||
- SYSCOPY.COM |
|||
- TALK.COM |
|||
- FD.COM |
|||
- XM*.COM |
|||
|
|||
UNA Hardware BIOS |
|||
----------------- |
|||
|
|||
John Coffman has produced a new generation of hardware BIOS called |
|||
UNA. In addition to the classic ROM images, RomWBW comes with a |
|||
UNA-based image that combines the UNA BIOS with the RomWBW OS |
|||
implementations and applications. |
|||
|
|||
UNA is customized dynamically using a ROM based setup routine and the |
|||
setup is persisted in the system NVRAM of the RTC chip. This means |
|||
that a single UNA-based ROM image can be used on most of the |
|||
RetroBrew platforms and is easily customized. UNA also supports FAT |
|||
file system access that can be used for in-situ ROM programming and |
|||
loading system images. |
|||
|
|||
While John is likely to enhance UNA over time, there are currently a |
|||
few things that UNA does not support: |
|||
|
|||
- Floppy Drives |
|||
- Video/Keyboard/Terminal Emulation |
|||
- Zeta 1 and N8 Systems |
|||
- Some older support boards |
|||
|
|||
If you wish to try the UNA variant of RomWBW, then just program your |
|||
ROM with the ROM image called "UNA_std.rom" in the Binary directory. |
|||
This one image is suitable on all of the platforms and hardware UNA |
|||
supports. |
|||
|
|||
Please refer to the RetroBrew Computers Wiki for more information on |
|||
UNA. |
|||
|
|||
CP/M vs. Z-System |
|||
----------------- |
|||
|
|||
There are two OS variants included in this distribution and you may |
|||
choose which one you prefer to use. Both variants are now included |
|||
in the pre-built ROM images. You will be given the choice to boot |
|||
either CP/M or Z-System at startup. |
|||
|
|||
The traditional Digital Research (DRI) CP/M OS is the first choice. |
|||
The Doc directory contains a manual for CP/M usage ("CPM |
|||
Manual.pdf"). If you are new to the RetroBrew Computer systems, I |
|||
would currently recommend using the CP/M variant to start with simply |
|||
because it has gone through more testing and you are less likely to |
|||
encounter problems. |
|||
|
|||
The other choice is to use the most popular non-DRI CP/M "clone" |
|||
which is generally referred to as Z-System. It is intended to be |
|||
functionally equivalent to CP/M and should run all CP/M 2.2 code. It |
|||
is optimized for the Z80 CPU (as opposed to 8080 for CP/M) and has |
|||
some potentially useful improvements. Please refer to "ZSDOS |
|||
Manual.pdf" and "ZCPR Manual.pdf" in the Doc directory for more |
|||
information on Z-System usage. |
|||
|
|||
ROM Customization |
|||
----------------- |
|||
|
|||
The pre-built ROM images are configured for the basic capabilities of |
|||
each platform. If you add board(s) to your system, you will need to |
|||
customize your ROM image to include support for the added board(s). |
|||
|
|||
Essentially, the creation of a custom ROM is accomplished by updating |
|||
a small configuration file, then running a script to compile the |
|||
software and generate the custom ROM image. At this time, the build |
|||
process runs on Windows 32 or 64 bit versions. All tools (compilers, |
|||
assemblers, etc.) are included in the distribution, so it is not |
|||
necessary to setup a build environment on your computer. |
|||
|
|||
For those who are interested in more than basic system customization, |
|||
note that all source code is included (including the operating |
|||
systems). |
|||
|
|||
Note that the ROM customization process does not apply to UNA. All |
|||
UNA customization is performed within the ROM setup script. |
|||
|
|||
Complete documentation of the customization process is found in the |
|||
ReadMe.txt file in the Source directory. |
|||
|
|||
Source Code Respository |
|||
----------------------- |
|||
|
|||
NOTE: This is very much a work-in-progress. It is |
|||
severely lacking appropriate documentation. I am |
|||
happy to answer questions and provide support though. |
|||
All source code and distributions are maintained on GitHub at |
|||
"https://github.com/wwarthen/RomWBW". Code contributions are very |
|||
welcome. |
|||
|
|||
Acknowledgements |
|||
---------------- |
|||
Distribution Directory Layout |
|||
----------------------------- |
|||
|
|||
While I have heavily modified much of the code, I want |
|||
to acknowledge that much of this is derived or |
|||
copied from the work of others in the N8VEM |
|||
project including Andrew Lynch, Dan Werner, Max Scane, |
|||
David Giles, John Coffman, and probably many others |
|||
I am not clearly aware of (let me know if I omitted |
|||
someone!). |
|||
|
|||
I especially want to credit Douglas Goodall for |
|||
contributing code, time, testing, and advice. He created |
|||
an entire suite of application programs to enhance the |
|||
use of RomWBW. However, he is looking for someone to |
|||
continue the maintenance of these applications and |
|||
they have become unusable due to changes within |
|||
RomWBW. As of RomWBW 2.6, these applications are |
|||
no longer provided. |
|||
|
|||
David Giles has contributed support for building the |
|||
ROM under Linux and the CSIO support in the SD Card driver. |
|||
|
|||
Usage Instructions |
|||
------------------ |
|||
The RomWBW distribution is a compressed zip archive file organized in |
|||
a set of directories. Each of these directories has it's own |
|||
ReadMe.txt file describing the contents in detail. In summary, these |
|||
directories are: |
|||
|
|||
The distribution includes many pre-built ROM |
|||
images in the Output directory. The simplest way of |
|||
using this ROM is to simply pick the pre-built ROM |
|||
that most closely matches your preferences, burn it, |
|||
and use it. |
|||
Binary: The final output files of the build process are placed |
|||
here. Most importantly, are the ROM images with the |
|||
file names ending in ".rom". |
|||
|
|||
Refer to the file called RomList.txt for a complete |
|||
list of the ROMs that are included and the required |
|||
hardware configuration that they support. |
|||
Doc: Contains various detailed documentation including the |
|||
operating systems, RomWBW architecture, etc. |
|||
|
|||
Upgrading from Previous Versions |
|||
-------------------------------- |
|||
Source: Contains the source code files used to build the software |
|||
and ROM images. |
|||
|
|||
Tools: Contains the MS Windows programs that are used by the |
|||
build process or that may be useful in setting up your |
|||
system. |
|||
|
|||
Burn a new ROM image appropriate for your system |
|||
and boot under that new ROM. You may want to use |
|||
a different ROM chip in case the new version does |
|||
not work. |
|||
|
|||
If you are using "boot from disk", you will need |
|||
to update the OS image on all drives you boot from. |
|||
To do this, use SYSCOPY. Something like this |
|||
would make sense: |
|||
|
|||
B:SYSCOPY C:=B:ZSYS.SYS |
|||
|
|||
CPU Speed & Baud Rate |
|||
--------------------- |
|||
|
|||
The startup serial port baud rate in all pre-built |
|||
RomWBW variants is 38.4Kbps. While this speed is |
|||
nice in that it provides great display and file |
|||
transfer performance, it does push the limits of |
|||
slower hardware. Specifically, XModem v12.5 (the |
|||
default XM.COM) on the distribution is unable to |
|||
service the serial port fast enough if the CPU is |
|||
running at 4MHz. Your options are to 1) use the |
|||
old version of XModem (XM5.COM), put a faster CPU |
|||
oscillator in your system (6MHz or above), or |
|||
3) decrease the baud rate by building a custom |
|||
ROM. |
|||
|
|||
UNA Variant |
|||
----------- |
|||
Acknowledgements |
|||
---------------- |
|||
|
|||
RomWBW will now run under it's native BIOS (HBIOS) or |
|||
under UNA BIOS (UBIOS). There are pre-built ROM |
|||
images for UNA in the Output directory. |
|||
While I have heavily modified much of the code, I want to acknowledge |
|||
that much of the work is derived or copied from the work of others in |
|||
the RetroBrew Computers project including Andrew Lynch, Dan Werner, |
|||
Max Scane, David Giles, John Coffman, and probably many others I am |
|||
not clearly aware of (let me know if I omitted someone!). |
|||
|
|||
CP/M vs. ZSystem |
|||
---------------- |
|||
I especially want to credit Douglas Goodall for contributing code, |
|||
time, testing, and advice. He created an entire suite of application |
|||
programs to enhance the use of RomWBW. However, he is looking for |
|||
someone to continue the maintenance of these applications and they |
|||
have become unusable due to changes within RomWBW. As of RomWBW 2.6, |
|||
these applications are no longer provided. |
|||
|
|||
There are two OS variants included in this distribution |
|||
and you may choose which one you prefer to use. |
|||
|
|||
The traditional Digital Research (DRI) CP/M code is the first |
|||
choice. The Doc directory contains a manual for CP/M |
|||
usage (cpm22-m.pdf). If you are new to the N8VEM systems, |
|||
I would currently recommend using the CP/M variant to |
|||
start with simply because they have gone through more |
|||
testing and you are less likely to encounter problems. |
|||
|
|||
The other choice is to use the most popular non-DRI |
|||
CP/M "clone" which is generally referred to as |
|||
ZSystem. These are intended to be functionally equivalent |
|||
to CP/M and should run all CP/M 2.2 code. They are |
|||
optimized for the Z80 CPU (as opposed to 8080 for CP/M) |
|||
and have some potentially useful improvements. Please |
|||
refer to the Doc directory and look at the files for |
|||
zsdos and zcpr (zsdos.pdf & zcpr.doc as well as ZSystem.txt). |
|||
|
|||
Both variants are now included in the pre-built ROM images. |
|||
You will be given the choice to boot either CP/M or |
|||
ZSystem at startup. |
|||
|
|||
Building a Custom ROM |
|||
--------------------- |
|||
|
|||
I strongly suggest you start with burning one of the |
|||
pre-built ROMs and making sure that works first. Once |
|||
you have gotten past that hurdle, you should consider |
|||
building a custom ROM. It is very easy and the |
|||
distribution comes with everything that is needed to |
|||
run a build on a Windows 32 bit or 64 bit system -- |
|||
basically Windows XP or above. There is also a |
|||
Linux build now available. |
|||
|
|||
Creating a custom ROM allows you to customize a lot |
|||
of useful stuff like adding support for a DSKY if |
|||
you have one. |
|||
|
|||
Please refer to the Build.txt file in the Doc directory |
|||
for detailed instructions for building a custom ROM. If |
|||
you are using Linux, also read the LinuxBuild.txt file. |
|||
|
|||
Formatting Media |
|||
---------------- |
|||
David Giles has contributed support for the CSIO support in the SD |
|||
Card driver. |
|||
|
|||
<TBD> |
|||
The UNA BIOS is a product of John Coffman. |
|||
|
|||
Creating Bootable Media |
|||
----------------------- |
|||
License |
|||
------- |
|||
|
|||
<TBD> |
|||
The Tools directory contains a variety of programs that are included |
|||
for convenience. They are all subject to their own licensing |
|||
restrictions (if any) and are not considered part of RomWBW. |
|||
|
|||
Using Slices on Mass Storage Devices |
|||
------------------------------------ |
|||
With respect to RomWBW: |
|||
|
|||
<TBD> |
|||
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify |
|||
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by |
|||
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at |
|||
your option) any later version. |
|||
|
|||
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but |
|||
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of |
|||
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
|||
General Public License for more details. |
|||
|
|||
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
|||
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. |
|||
|
|||
Getting Assistance |
|||
------------------ |
|||
|
|||
Managing Console I/O |
|||
-------------------- |
|||
The best way to get assistance with RomWBW or any aspect of the |
|||
RetroBrew Computers projects is via the community forum at |
|||
"https://www.retrobrewcomputers.org/forum/". |
|||
|
|||
<TBD> |
|||
Also feel free to email Wayne Warthen at wwarthen@gmail.com. |
|||
|
|||
Notes |
|||
To Do |
|||
----- |
|||
|
|||
I realize these instructions are very minimal. I am happy to answer |
|||
questions. You will find the Google Group 'N8VEM' to be a great |
|||
source of information as well. |
|||
- Formatting Media |
|||
- Making a Disk Bootable |
|||
- Assigning disks/slices to drives |
|||
- Managing the Console |
|||
|
|||
Binary file not shown.
@ -1,13 +1,12 @@ |
|||
@echo off |
|||
setlocal |
|||
|
|||
if exist *.tmp del *.tmp |
|||
if exist *.prn del *.prn |
|||
if exist *.err del *.err |
|||
if exist *.img del *.img |
|||
if exist bp*.rel del bp*.rel |
|||
if exist zcpr33*.rel del zcpr33*.rel |
|||
if exist *.bak del *.bak |
|||
|
|||
if exist zcpr33t.rel del zcpr33t.rel |
|||
if exist zcpr33n.rel del zcpr33n.rel |
|||
|
|||
setlocal & cd ZCPR33 && call Clean.cmd & endlocal |
|||
|
|||
Binary file not shown.
@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ |
|||
@echo off |
|||
setlocal |
|||
|
|||
setlocal & cd HBIOS && Powershell .\Build.ps1 %* || exit /b 1 & endlocal |
|||
setlocal & cd HBIOS && Powershell -ExecutionPolicy Unrestricted .\Build.ps1 %* || exit /b 1 & endlocal |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,7 +1,6 @@ |
|||
@echo off |
|||
setlocal |
|||
|
|||
setlocal & cd "CPM 22 Manual" && call Build.cmd || exit /b 1 & endlocal |
|||
setlocal & cd "ZCPR Manual" && call Build.cmd || exit /b 1 & endlocal |
|||
setlocal & cd "RomWBW User Guide" && call Build.cmd || exit /b 1 & endlocal |
|||
setlocal & cd "RomWBW System Guide" && call Build.cmd || exit /b 1 & endlocal |
|||
@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ |
|||
@echo off |
|||
setlocal |
|||
|
|||
set TOOLS=..\..\..\Tools |
|||
|
|||
set PATH=%TOOLS%\zx;%PATH% |
|||
|
|||
set ZXBINDIR=%TOOLS%/cpm/bin/ |
|||
set ZXLIBDIR=%TOOLS%/cpm/lib/ |
|||
set ZXINCDIR=%TOOLS%/cpm/include/ |
|||
|
|||
set TEXOPT=-$D |
|||
|
|||
zx TEX21 PART1 %TEXOPT% |
|||
zx TEX21 PART2 %TEXOPT% |
|||
zx TEX21 PART3 %TEXOPT% |
|||
|
|||
echo Remove extraneous control codes and escape sequences |
|||
rem pause |
|||
|
|||
PowerShell .\Strip.ps1 |
|||
|
|||
call texify -p --clean "Main.ltx" |
|||
@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ |
|||
@echo off |
|||
setlocal |
|||
|
|||
if exist *.prn del *.prn |
|||
if exist *.ix del *.ix |
|||
if exist *.log del *.log |
|||
if exist part?.txt del part?.txt |
|||
if exist *.synctex.gz del *.synctex.gz |
|||
@ -1,243 +0,0 @@ |
|||
This is pdfTeX, Version 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.17 (MiKTeX 2.9 64-bit) (preloaded format=pdflatex 2016.6.18) 28 JUL 2016 12:40 |
|||
entering extended mode |
|||
**"C:/Users/WWarthen/Projects/N8VEM/Build/RomWBW/Doc/Source/CPM 22 Manual - Tes |
|||
ting/Main.ltx" |
|||
|
|||
("C:/Users/WWarthen/Projects/N8VEM/Build/RomWBW/Doc/Source/CPM 22 Manual - Test |
|||
ing/Main.ltx" |
|||
LaTeX2e <2016/03/31> |
|||
Babel <3.9r> and hyphenation patterns for 75 language(s) loaded. |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\base\book.cls" |
|||
Document Class: book 2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\base\bk10.clo" |
|||
File: bk10.clo 2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX file (size option) |
|||
) |
|||
\c@part=\count79 |
|||
\c@chapter=\count80 |
|||
\c@section=\count81 |
|||
\c@subsection=\count82 |
|||
\c@subsubsection=\count83 |
|||
\c@paragraph=\count84 |
|||
\c@subparagraph=\count85 |
|||
\c@figure=\count86 |
|||
\c@table=\count87 |
|||
\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 |
|||
\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 |
|||
\bibindent=\dimen102 |
|||
) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\base\fontenc.sty" |
|||
Package: fontenc 2005/09/27 v1.99g Standard LaTeX package |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\base\t1enc.def" |
|||
File: t1enc.def 2005/09/27 v1.99g Standard LaTeX file |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding T1 on input line 48. |
|||
)) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\bera\beramono.sty" |
|||
Package: beramono 2004/01/31 (WaS) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\graphics\keyval.sty" |
|||
Package: keyval 2014/10/28 v1.15 key=value parser (DPC) |
|||
\KV@toks@=\toks14 |
|||
)) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\fancyvrb\fancyvrb.sty" |
|||
Package: fancyvrb 2008/02/07 |
|||
|
|||
Style option: `fancyvrb' v2.7a, with DG/SPQR fixes, and firstline=lastline fix |
|||
<2008/02/07> (tvz) |
|||
\FV@CodeLineNo=\count88 |
|||
\FV@InFile=\read1 |
|||
\FV@TabBox=\box26 |
|||
\c@FancyVerbLine=\count89 |
|||
\FV@StepNumber=\count90 |
|||
\FV@OutFile=\write3 |
|||
) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\geometry\geometry.sty" |
|||
Package: geometry 2010/09/12 v5.6 Page Geometry |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\ifpdf.sty" |
|||
Package: ifpdf 2016/05/14 v3.1 Provides the ifpdf switch |
|||
) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\ifvtex.sty" |
|||
Package: ifvtex 2016/05/16 v1.6 Detect VTeX and its facilities (HO) |
|||
Package ifvtex Info: VTeX not detected. |
|||
) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\ifxetex\ifxetex.sty" |
|||
Package: ifxetex 2010/09/12 v0.6 Provides ifxetex conditional |
|||
) |
|||
\Gm@cnth=\count91 |
|||
\Gm@cntv=\count92 |
|||
\c@Gm@tempcnt=\count93 |
|||
\Gm@bindingoffset=\dimen103 |
|||
\Gm@wd@mp=\dimen104 |
|||
\Gm@odd@mp=\dimen105 |
|||
\Gm@even@mp=\dimen106 |
|||
\Gm@layoutwidth=\dimen107 |
|||
\Gm@layoutheight=\dimen108 |
|||
\Gm@layouthoffset=\dimen109 |
|||
\Gm@layoutvoffset=\dimen110 |
|||
\Gm@dimlist=\toks15 |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\geometry\geometry.cfg")) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\oberdiek\pdflscape.sty" |
|||
Package: pdflscape 2016/05/14 v0.11 Display of landscape pages in PDF (HO) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\graphics\lscape.sty" |
|||
Package: lscape 2000/10/22 v3.01 Landscape Pages (DPC) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\graphics\graphics.sty" |
|||
Package: graphics 2016/05/09 v1.0r Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\graphics\trig.sty" |
|||
Package: trig 2016/01/03 v1.10 sin cos tan (DPC) |
|||
) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\00miktex\graphics.cfg" |
|||
File: graphics.cfg 2016/01/02 v1.10 sample graphics configuration |
|||
) |
|||
Package graphics Info: Driver file: pdftex.def on input line 96. |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\pdftex-def\pdftex.def" |
|||
File: pdftex.def 2011/05/27 v0.06d Graphics/color for pdfTeX |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\infwarerr.sty" |
|||
Package: infwarerr 2016/05/16 v1.4 Providing info/warning/error messages (HO) |
|||
) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\ltxcmds.sty" |
|||
Package: ltxcmds 2016/05/16 v1.23 LaTeX kernel commands for general use (HO) |
|||
) |
|||
\Gread@gobject=\count94 |
|||
))) |
|||
Package pdflscape Info: Auto-detected driver: pdftex on input line 81. |
|||
) |
|||
No file Main.aux. |
|||
\openout1 = `Main.aux'. |
|||
|
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 22. |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 22. |
|||
*geometry* driver: auto-detecting |
|||
*geometry* detected driver: pdftex |
|||
*geometry* verbose mode - [ preamble ] result: |
|||
* driver: pdftex |
|||
* paper: letterpaper |
|||
* layout: <same size as paper> |
|||
* layoutoffset:(h,v)=(0.0pt,0.0pt) |
|||
* modes: |
|||
* h-part:(L,W,R)=(36.135pt, 542.02501pt, 36.135pt) |
|||
* v-part:(T,H,B)=(0.0pt, 794.96999pt, 0.0pt) |
|||
* \paperwidth=614.295pt |
|||
* \paperheight=794.96999pt |
|||
* \textwidth=542.02501pt |
|||
* \textheight=794.96999pt |
|||
* \oddsidemargin=-36.135pt |
|||
* \evensidemargin=-36.135pt |
|||
* \topmargin=-102.33748pt |
|||
* \headheight=12.0pt |
|||
* \headsep=18.06749pt |
|||
* \topskip=10.0pt |
|||
* \footskip=25.29494pt |
|||
* \marginparwidth=69.0pt |
|||
* \marginparsep=7.0pt |
|||
* \columnsep=10.0pt |
|||
* \skip\footins=9.0pt plus 4.0pt minus 2.0pt |
|||
* \hoffset=0.0pt |
|||
* \voffset=0.0pt |
|||
* \mag=1000 |
|||
* \@twocolumnfalse |
|||
* \@twosidefalse |
|||
* \@mparswitchfalse |
|||
* \@reversemarginfalse |
|||
* (1in=72.27pt=25.4mm, 1cm=28.453pt) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\context\base\supp-pdf.mkii" |
|||
[Loading MPS to PDF converter (version 2006.09.02).] |
|||
\scratchcounter=\count95 |
|||
\scratchdimen=\dimen111 |
|||
\scratchbox=\box27 |
|||
\nofMPsegments=\count96 |
|||
\nofMParguments=\count97 |
|||
\everyMPshowfont=\toks16 |
|||
\MPscratchCnt=\count98 |
|||
\MPscratchDim=\dimen112 |
|||
\MPnumerator=\count99 |
|||
\makeMPintoPDFobject=\count100 |
|||
\everyMPtoPDFconversion=\toks17 |
|||
) ("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\pdftexcmds.sty" |
|||
Package: pdftexcmds 2016/05/21 v0.22 Utility functions of pdfTeX for LuaTeX (HO |
|||
) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\ifluatex.sty" |
|||
Package: ifluatex 2016/05/16 v1.4 Provides the ifluatex switch (HO) |
|||
Package ifluatex Info: LuaTeX not detected. |
|||
) |
|||
Package pdftexcmds Info: LuaTeX not detected. |
|||
Package pdftexcmds Info: \pdf@primitive is available. |
|||
Package pdftexcmds Info: \pdf@ifprimitive is available. |
|||
Package pdftexcmds Info: \pdfdraftmode found. |
|||
) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\oberdiek\epstopdf-base.sty" |
|||
Package: epstopdf-base 2016/05/15 v2.6 Base part for package epstopdf |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\oberdiek\grfext.sty" |
|||
Package: grfext 2016/05/16 v1.2 Manage graphics extensions (HO) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\kvdefinekeys.sty" |
|||
Package: kvdefinekeys 2016/05/16 v1.4 Define keys (HO) |
|||
)) |
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\oberdiek\kvoptions.sty" |
|||
Package: kvoptions 2016/05/16 v3.12 Key value format for package options (HO) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\kvsetkeys.sty" |
|||
Package: kvsetkeys 2016/05/16 v1.17 Key value parser (HO) |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\generic\oberdiek\etexcmds.sty" |
|||
Package: etexcmds 2016/05/16 v1.6 Avoid name clashes with e-TeX commands (HO) |
|||
Package etexcmds Info: Could not find \expanded. |
|||
(etexcmds) That can mean that you are not using pdfTeX 1.50 or |
|||
(etexcmds) that some package has redefined \expanded. |
|||
(etexcmds) In the latter case, load this package earlier. |
|||
))) |
|||
Package grfext Info: Graphics extension search list: |
|||
(grfext) [.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPE |
|||
G,.JBIG2,.JB2,.eps] |
|||
(grfext) \AppendGraphicsExtensions on input line 456. |
|||
) |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for T1+fvm on input line 25. |
|||
|
|||
("C:\Program Files\MiKTeX 2.9\tex\latex\bera\t1fvm.fd" |
|||
File: t1fvm.fd 2004/09/07 scalable font definitions for T1/fvm. |
|||
) |
|||
LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `T1/fvm/m/n' will be |
|||
(Font) scaled to size 8.99994pt on input line 25. |
|||
|
|||
! Text line contains an invalid character. |
|||
<read 1> |
|||
C |
|||
l.25 \VerbatimInput{part1.txt} |
|||
|
|||
? |
|||
! Emergency stop. |
|||
<read 1> |
|||
C |
|||
l.25 \VerbatimInput{part1.txt} |
|||
|
|||
End of file on the terminal! |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: |
|||
2546 strings out of 493335 |
|||
35826 string characters out of 3139251 |
|||
101645 words of memory out of 3000000 |
|||
6068 multiletter control sequences out of 15000+200000 |
|||
4724 words of font info for 16 fonts, out of 3000000 for 9000 |
|||
1141 hyphenation exceptions out of 8191 |
|||
37i,3n,23p,339b,166s stack positions out of 5000i,500n,10000p,200000b,50000s |
|||
! ==> Fatal error occurred, no output PDF file produced! |
|||
@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ |
|||
\documentclass[letterpaper,10pt,oneside]{book} |
|||
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} |
|||
%\usepackage[defaultmono]{droidmono} |
|||
\usepackage[scaled]{beramono} |
|||
\usepackage{fancyvrb} |
|||
\usepackage{geometry} |
|||
\usepackage{pdflscape} |
|||
%\usepackage{showframe} % Diagnostic |
|||
|
|||
% Suppress headers and footers completely |
|||
\pagestyle{empty} |
|||
|
|||
% 66 lines per page, portrait |
|||
%\geometry{top=0.0in, bottom=0.0in, left=1.0in, right=0.5in} |
|||
\geometry{top=0.0in, bottom=0.0in, left=0.5in, right=0.5in} |
|||
|
|||
\RecustomVerbatimCommand{\VerbatimInput}{VerbatimInput}% |
|||
{ |
|||
commandchars=\\\{\} |
|||
} |
|||
|
|||
\begin{document} |
|||
|
|||
% Part 1 (main document sections) |
|||
\VerbatimInput{part1.txt} |
|||
|
|||
% 51 lines per page, landscape |
|||
%\newgeometry{top=1.0in, bottom=0.5in, left=0.0in, right=0.0in} |
|||
\newgeometry{top=0.5in, bottom=0.5in, left=0.0in, right=0.0in} |
|||
\begin{landscape} |
|||
|
|||
% Part 2 (appendices A-G, source listings) |
|||
\VerbatimInput{part2.txt} |
|||
|
|||
% back to standard geometry |
|||
\end{landscape} |
|||
\restoregeometry |
|||
|
|||
% Part 3 (appendices H-I, index) |
|||
\VerbatimInput{part3.txt} |
|||
|
|||
\end{document} |
|||
Binary file not shown.
@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ |
|||
function StripFile($Filename) |
|||
{ |
|||
$Content = Get-Content "${Filename}.prn" |
|||
$Content = $Content -replace "\0", "" |
|||
$Content = $Content -replace "\e.", "" |
|||
$Content = $Content -replace "\x1A", "" |
|||
$Content = $Content -replace "\0", "" |
|||
|
|||
#$Content = $Content -replace "\\", "\\" |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
Set-Content "${Filename}.txt" $Content[0..($Content.count - 3)] |
|||
} |
|||
|
|||
StripFile("part1") |
|||
StripFile("part2") |
|||
StripFile("part3") |
|||
|
|||
return |
|||
@ -1,716 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft A-% |
|||
Appendix A |
|||
|
|||
The Microcomputer Development System Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 ; mds-800 i/o drivers for cp/m 2.2 |
|||
2 ; (four drive single density version) |
|||
3 ; |
|||
4 ; version 2.2 february, 1980 |
|||
5 ; |
|||
6 0016 = vers equ 22 ;version 2.2 |
|||
7 ; |
|||
8 ; copyright (c) 1980 |
|||
9 ; digital research |
|||
10 ; box 579, pacific grove |
|||
11 ; california, 93950 |
|||
12 ; |
|||
13 ; |
|||
14 ffff = true equ 0fffh ;value of "true" |
|||
15 0000 = false equ not true ;"false" |
|||
16 0000 = test equ false ;true if test bios |
|||
17 ; |
|||
18 if test |
|||
19 bias equ 03400h ;base of ccp in test system |
|||
20 endif |
|||
21 if not test |
|||
22 0000 = bias equ 0000h ;generate relocatable cp/m system |
|||
23 endif |
|||
24 ; |
|||
25 1600 = patch equ 1600h |
|||
26 ; |
|||
27 1600 org patch |
|||
28 0000 = cpmb equ $-patch ;base of cpm console processor |
|||
29 0806 = bdos equ 806h+cpmb ;basic dos (resident portion) |
|||
30 1600 = cpml equ $-cpmb ;length (in bytes) of cpm system |
|||
31 002c = nsects equ cpml/128 ;number of sectors to load |
|||
32 0002 = offset equ 2 ;number of disk tracks used by cp/m |
|||
33 0004 = cdisk equ 0004h ;address of last logged disk on warm start |
|||
34 0080 = buff equ 0080h ;default buffer address |
|||
35 000a = retry equ 10 ;max retries on disk i/o before error |
|||
36 ; |
|||
37 ; perform following functions |
|||
38 ; boot cold start |
|||
39 ; wboot warm start (save i/o byte) |
|||
40 ; (boot and wboot are the same for mds) |
|||
41 ; const console status |
|||
42 ; reg-a = 00 if no character ready |
|||
43 ; reg-a = ff if character ready |
|||
44 ; conin console character in (result in reg-a) |
|||
45 ; conout console character out (char in reg-c) |
|||
46 ; list list out (char in reg-c) |
|||
47 ; punch punch out (char in reg-c) |
|||
48 ; reader paper tape reader in (result to reg-a) |
|||
49 ; home move to track 00 |
|||
50 ; |
|||
51 ; (the following calls set-up the io parameter block for the |
|||
52 ; mds, which is used to perform subsequent reads and writes) |
|||
53 ; seldsk select disk given by reg-c (0, 1, 2...) |
|||
54 ; settrk set track address (0,...76) for subsequent read-write |
|||
55 ; setsec set sector address (1,...,26) for subsequent read-write |
|||
56 ; setdma set subsequent dma address (initially 80h) |
|||
57 ; |
|||
58 ; (read and write assume previous calls to set up the io parameters) |
|||
59 ; read read track/sector to preset dma address |
|||
60 ; write track/sector from preset dma address |
|||
61 ; |
|||
62 ; jump vector for individual routines |
|||
63 1600 c3b316 jmp boot |
|||
64 1603 c3c316 wboote: jmp wboot |
|||
65 1606 c36117 jmp const |
|||
66 1609 c36417 jmp conin |
|||
67 160c c36a17 jmp conout |
|||
68 160f c36d17 jmp list |
|||
69 1612 c37217 jmp punch |
|||
70 1615 c37517 jmp reader |
|||
71 1618 c37817 jmp home |
|||
72 161b c37d17 jmp seldsk |
|||
73 161e c3a717 jmp settrk |
|||
74 1621 c3ac17 jmp setsec |
|||
75 1624 c3bb17 jmp setdma |
|||
76 1627 c3c117 jmp read |
|||
77 162a c3ca17 jmp write |
|||
78 162d c37017 jmp listst ;list status |
|||
79 1630 c3b117 jmp sectran |
|||
80 ; |
|||
81 maclib diskdef ;load the disk definition library |
|||
82 disks 4 ;four disks |
|||
83 1633+= dpbase equ $ ;base of disk parameter blocks |
|||
84 1633+82160000 dpe0: dw xlt0, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
85 1637+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
86 163b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb0 ;dir buff, parm block |
|||
87 163f+0d19ee18 dw csv0, alv0 ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
88 1643+82160000 dpe1: dw xlt1, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
89 1647+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
90 164b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb1 ;dir buff, parm block |
|||
91 164f+3c191d19 dw csv1, alv1 ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
92 1653+82160000 dpe2: dw xlt2, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
93 1657+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
94 165b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb2 ;dir buff, parm block |
|||
95 165f+6b194c19 dw csv2, alv2 ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
96 1663+82160000 dpe3: dw xlt3, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
97 1667+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
98 166b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb3 ;check, alloc block |
|||
99 166f+9a197b19 dw csv3, alv3 ;dir buff, parm vectors |
|||
100 diskdef 0, 1, 26, 6, 1024, 243, 64, 64, offset |
|||
101 1673+= dpb0 equ $ ;disk parm block |
|||
102 1673+1a00 dw 26 ;sec per track |
|||
103 1675+03 db 3 ;block shift |
|||
104 1676+07 db 7 ;block mask |
|||
105 1677+00 db 0 ;extnt mask |
|||
106 1678+f200 dw 242 ;disk size-1 |
|||
107 167a+3f00 dw 63 ;directory max |
|||
108 167c+c0 db 192 ;alloc0 |
|||
109 167d+00 db 0 ;alloc1 |
|||
110 167e+1000 dw 16 ;check size |
|||
111 1680+0200 dw 2 ;offset |
|||
112 1682+= xlt0 equ $ ;translate table |
|||
113 1682+01 db 1 |
|||
114 1683+07 db 7 |
|||
115 1684+0d db 13 |
|||
116 1685+13 db 19 |
|||
117 1686+19 db 25 |
|||
118 1687+05 db 5 |
|||
119 1688+0b db 11 |
|||
120 1689+11 db 17 |
|||
121 168a+17 db 23 |
|||
122 168b+03 db 3 |
|||
123 168c+09 db 9 |
|||
124 168d+0f db 15 |
|||
125 168e+15 db 21 |
|||
126 168f+02 db 2 |
|||
127 1690+08 db 8 |
|||
128 1691+0e db 14 |
|||
129 1692+14 db 20 |
|||
130 1693+1a db 26 |
|||
131 1694+06 db 6 |
|||
132 1695+0c db 12 |
|||
133 1696+12 db 18 |
|||
134 1697+18 db 24 |
|||
135 1698+04 db 4 |
|||
136 1699+0a db 10 |
|||
137 169a+10 db 16 |
|||
138 169b+16 db 22 |
|||
139 diskdef 1,0 |
|||
140 1673+ = dpb1 equ dpb0 ;equivalent parameters |
|||
141 001f+ = als1 equ als0 ;same allocation vector size |
|||
142 0010+ = css1 equ css0 ;same checksum vector size |
|||
143 1682+ = xlt1 equ xlt0 ;same translate table |
|||
144 diskdef 2, 0 |
|||
145 1673+ = dpb2 equ dpb0 ;equivalent parameters |
|||
146 001f+ = als2 equ als0 ;same allocation vector size |
|||
147 0010+ = css2 equ css0 ;same checksum vector size |
|||
148 1682+ = xlt2 equ xlt0 ;same translate table |
|||
149 diskdef 3, 0 |
|||
150 1673+ = dpb3 equ dpb0 ;equivalent parameters |
|||
151 001f+ = als3 equ als0 ;same allocation vector size |
|||
152 0010+ = css3 equ css0 ;same checksum vector size |
|||
153 1682+ = xlt3 equ xlt0 ;same translate table |
|||
154 ; endef occurs at end of assembly |
|||
155 ; |
|||
156 ; end of controller--independent code, the remaining subroutines |
|||
157 ; are tailored to the particular operating environment, and must |
|||
158 ; be altered for any system which differs from the intel mds. |
|||
159 ; |
|||
160 ; the following code assumes the mds monitor exists at 0f800h |
|||
161 ; and uses the i/o subroutines within the monitor |
|||
162 ; |
|||
163 ; we also assume the mds system has four disk drives |
|||
164 00fd = revrt equ 0fdh ;interrupt revert port |
|||
165 00fc = intc equ 0fch ;interrupt mask port |
|||
166 00f3 = icon equ 0f3h ;interrupt control port |
|||
167 007E = inte equ 0111$1110b ;enable rst 0 (warm boot), rst 7 (monitor) |
|||
168 ; |
|||
169 ; mds monitor equates |
|||
170 f800 = mon80 equ 0f800h ;mds monitor |
|||
171 ff0f = rmon80 equ 0ff0fh ;restart mon80 (boot error) |
|||
172 f803 = ci equ 0f803h ;console character to reg-a |
|||
173 f806 = ri equ 0f806h ;reader in to reg-a |
|||
174 f809 = co equ 0f809h ;console char from c to console out |
|||
175 f80c = po equ 0f80ch ;punch char from c to punch device |
|||
176 f80f = lo equ 0f80fh ;list from c to list device |
|||
177 f812 = csts equ 0f812h ;console status 00/ff to register a |
|||
178 ; |
|||
179 ; disk ports and commands |
|||
180 0078 = base equ 78h ;base of disk command io ports |
|||
181 0078 = dstat equ base ;disk status (input) |
|||
182 0079 = rtype equ base+1 ;result type (input) |
|||
183 007b = rbyte equ base+3 ;result byte (input) |
|||
184 ; |
|||
185 0079 = ilow equ base+1 ;iopb low address (output) |
|||
186 007a = ihigh equ base+2 ;iopb high address (output) |
|||
187 ; |
|||
188 0004 = readf equ 4h ;read function |
|||
189 0006 = writf equ 6h ;write function |
|||
190 0003 = recal equ 3h ;recalibrate drive |
|||
191 0004 = iordy equ 4h ;i/o finished mask |
|||
192 000d = cr equ 0dh ;carriage return |
|||
193 000a = lf equ 0ah ;line-feed |
|||
194 ; |
|||
195 signon: ;signon message: xxk cp/m vers y.y |
|||
196 169c 0d0a0a db cr, lf, lf |
|||
197 if test |
|||
198 db '32' ;32k example bios |
|||
199 endif |
|||
200 if not test |
|||
201 169f 3030 db '00' ;memory size filled by relocator |
|||
202 endif |
|||
203 16a1 6b2043502f db 'k cp/m vers ' |
|||
204 16ad 322e32 db ver/10+'0', ',' vers mod 10+'0' |
|||
205 16b0 0d0a00 db cr, lf, 0 |
|||
206 ; |
|||
207 boot: ;print signon message and go to ccp |
|||
208 ; (note: mds boot initialized iobyte at 0003h) |
|||
209 16b3 310001 lxi sp, buff+80h |
|||
210 16b6 219c16 lxi h, signon |
|||
211 16b9 cdd317 call prmsg ;print message |
|||
212 16bc af xra a ;clear accumulator |
|||
213 16bd 320400 sta cdisk ;set initially to disk a |
|||
214 16c0 c30f17 jmp gocpm ;go to cp/m |
|||
215 ; |
|||
216 ; |
|||
217 wboot:; loader on track 0, sector 1, which will be skipped for warm |
|||
218 ; read cp/m from disk--assuming there is a 128 byte cold start |
|||
219 ; start |
|||
220 ; |
|||
221 16c3 318000 lxi sp, buff ;using dma--thus 80 thru ff available for stack |
|||
222 ; |
|||
223 16c6 0e0a mvi c, retry ;max retries |
|||
224 16c8 c5 push b |
|||
225 wboot0: ;enter here on error retries |
|||
226 16c9 010000 lxi b, cpmb ;set dma address to start of disk system |
|||
227 16cc cdbb17 call setdma |
|||
228 16cf 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;boot from drive 0 |
|||
229 16d1 cd7d17 call seldsk |
|||
230 16d4 0e00 mvi c, 0 |
|||
231 16d6 cda717 call settrk ;start with track 0 |
|||
232 16d9 0e02 mvi c, 2 ;start reading sector 2 |
|||
233 16db cdac17 call setsec |
|||
234 ; |
|||
235 ; read sectors, count nsects to zero |
|||
236 16de c1 pop b ;10-error count |
|||
237 16df 062c mvi b, nsects |
|||
238 rdsec: ;read next sector |
|||
239 16e1 c5 push b ;save sector count |
|||
240 16e2 cdc117 call read |
|||
241 16e5 c24917 jnz booterr ;retry if errors occur |
|||
242 16e8 2a6c18 lhld iod ;increment dma address |
|||
243 16eb 118000 lxi d, 128 ;sector size |
|||
244 16ee 19 dad d ;incremented dma address in hl |
|||
245 16ef 44 mov b, h |
|||
246 16f0 4d mov c, l ;ready for call to set dma |
|||
247 16f1 cdbb17 call setdma |
|||
248 16f4 3a6b18 lda ios ;sector number just read |
|||
249 16f7 fe1a cpi 26 ;read last sector? |
|||
250 16f9 da0517 jc rd1 |
|||
251 ; must be sector 26, zero and go to next track |
|||
252 16fc 3a6a18 lda iot ;get track to register a |
|||
253 16ff 3c inr a |
|||
254 1700 4f mov c, a ;read for call |
|||
255 1701 cda717 call settrk |
|||
256 1704 af xra a ;clear sector number |
|||
257 1705 3c rd1: inr a ;to next sector |
|||
258 1706 4f mov c, a ;ready for call |
|||
259 1707 cdac17 call setsec |
|||
260 170a c1 pop b ;recall sector count |
|||
261 170b 05 dcr b ;done? |
|||
262 170c c2e116 jnz rdsec |
|||
263 ; |
|||
264 ; done with the load, reset default buffer address |
|||
265 gocpm: ;(enter here from cold start boot) |
|||
266 ; enable rst0 and rst7 |
|||
267 170f f3 di |
|||
268 1710 3e12 mvi a, 12h ;initialize command |
|||
269 1712 d3fd out revrt |
|||
270 1714 af xra a |
|||
271 1715 d3fc out intc ;cleared |
|||
272 1717 3e7e mvi a, inte ;rst0 and rst7 bits on |
|||
273 1719 d3fc out intc |
|||
274 171b af xra a |
|||
275 171c d3f3 out icon ;interrupt control |
|||
276 ; |
|||
277 ; set default buffer address to 80h |
|||
278 171e 018000 lxi b, buff |
|||
279 1721 cdbb17 call setdma |
|||
280 ; |
|||
281 ; reset monitor entry points |
|||
282 1724 3ec3 mvi a, jmp |
|||
283 1726 320000 sta 0 |
|||
284 1729 210316 lxi h, wboote |
|||
285 172c 220100 shld 1 ;jump wboot at location 00 |
|||
286 172f 320500 sta 5 |
|||
287 1732 210608 lxi h, bdos |
|||
288 1735 220600 shld 6 ;jmp bdos at location 5 |
|||
289 if not test |
|||
290 1738 323800 sta 7*8 ;jmp to mon80 (may have changed by ddt) |
|||
291 173b 2100f8 lxi h, mon80 |
|||
292 173e 223900 shld 7*8+1 |
|||
293 endif |
|||
294 ; leave iobyte set |
|||
295 ; previously selected disk was b, send parameter to cpm |
|||
296 1741 3a0400 lda cdisk ;last logged disk number |
|||
297 1744 4f mov c, a ;send to ccp to log it in |
|||
298 1745 fb ei |
|||
299 1746 c30000 jmp cpmb |
|||
300 ; |
|||
301 ; error condition occurred, print message and retry |
|||
302 booterr: |
|||
303 1749 c1 pop b ;recall counts |
|||
304 174a 0d dcr c |
|||
305 174b ca5217 jz booter0 |
|||
306 ; try again |
|||
307 174e c5 push b |
|||
308 174f c3c916 jmp wboot0 |
|||
309 ; |
|||
310 booter0: |
|||
311 ; otherwise too many retries |
|||
312 1752 215b17 lxi h, bootmsg |
|||
313 1755 cdd317 call prmsg |
|||
314 1758 c30fff jmp rmon80 ;mds hardware monitor |
|||
315 ; |
|||
316 bootmsg: |
|||
317 175b 3f626f6f74 db '?boot', 0 |
|||
318 ; |
|||
319 ; |
|||
320 const: console status to reg-a |
|||
321 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
322 1761 c312f8 jmp csts |
|||
323 ; |
|||
324 conin: ;console character to reg-a |
|||
325 1764 cd03f8 call ci |
|||
326 1767 e67f ani 7fh ;remove parity bit |
|||
327 1769 c9 ret |
|||
328 ; |
|||
329 conout: ;console character from c to console out |
|||
330 176a c309f8 jmp co |
|||
331 ; |
|||
332 list: ;list device out |
|||
333 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
334 176d c30ff8 jmp lo |
|||
335 ; |
|||
336 listst: |
|||
337 ;return list status |
|||
338 1770 af xra a |
|||
339 1771 c9 ret ;always not ready |
|||
340 ; |
|||
341 punch: ;punch device out |
|||
342 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
343 1772 c30cf8 jmp po |
|||
344 ; |
|||
345 reader: ;reader character in to reg-a |
|||
346 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
347 1775 c306f8 jmp ri |
|||
348 ; |
|||
349 home: ;move to home position |
|||
350 ; treat as track 00 seek |
|||
351 1778 0e00 mvi c, 0 |
|||
352 177a c3a717 jmp settrk |
|||
353 ; |
|||
354 seldsk: ;select disk given by register c |
|||
355 177d 210000 lxi h, 0000h ;return 0000 if error |
|||
356 1780 79 mov a, c |
|||
357 1781 fe04 cpi ndisks ;too large? |
|||
358 1783 d0 rnc ;leave hl = 0000 |
|||
359 ; |
|||
360 1784 e602 ani 10b ;00 00 for drive 0, 1 and 10 10 for drive 2, 3 |
|||
361 1786 326618 sta dbank ;to select drive bank |
|||
362 1789 79 mov a, c ;00, 01, 10, 11 |
|||
363 178a e601 ani 1b ;mds has 0, 1 at 78, 2, 3 at 88 |
|||
364 178c b7 ora a ;result 00? |
|||
365 178d ca9217 jz setdrive |
|||
366 1790 3e30 mvi a, 00110000b ;selects drive 1 in bank |
|||
367 setdrive: |
|||
368 1792 47 mov b, a ;save the function |
|||
369 1793 216818 lxi h, iof ;io function |
|||
370 1796 7e mov a, m |
|||
371 1797 e6cf ani 11001111b ;mask out disk number |
|||
372 1799 b0 ora b ;mask in new disk number |
|||
373 179a 77 mov m, a ;save it in iopb |
|||
374 179b 69 mov l, c |
|||
375 179c 2600 mvi h, 0 ;hl=disk number |
|||
376 179e 29 dad h ;*2 |
|||
377 179f 29 dad h ;*4 |
|||
378 17a0 29 dad h ;*8 |
|||
379 17a1 29 dad h ;*16 |
|||
380 17a2 113316 lxi d, dpbase |
|||
381 17a5 19 dad d ;hl=disk header table address |
|||
382 17a6 c9 ret |
|||
383 ; |
|||
384 ; |
|||
385 settrk: ;set track address given by c |
|||
386 17a7 216a18 lxi h, iot |
|||
387 17aa 71 mov m, c |
|||
388 17ab c9 ret |
|||
389 ; |
|||
390 setsec: ;set sector number given by c |
|||
391 17ac 216b18 lxi h, ios |
|||
392 17af 71 mov m, c |
|||
393 17b0 c9 ret |
|||
394 sectran: |
|||
395 ;translate sector bc using table at de |
|||
396 17b1 0600 mvi b, 0 ;double-precision sector number in bc |
|||
397 17b3 eb xchg ;translate table address to hl |
|||
398 17b4 09 dad b ;translate (sector) address |
|||
399 17b5 7e mov a, m ;translated sector number to a |
|||
400 17b6 326b18 sta ios |
|||
401 17b9 6f mov l, a ;return sector number in l |
|||
402 17ba c9 ret |
|||
403 ; |
|||
404 setdma: ;set dma address given by regs b, c |
|||
405 17bb 69 mov l, c |
|||
406 17bc 60 mov h, b |
|||
407 17bd 226c18 shld iod |
|||
408 17c0 c9 ret |
|||
409 ; |
|||
410 read: ;read next disk record (assuming disk/trk/sec/dma set) |
|||
411 17c1 0e04 mvi c, readf ;set to read function |
|||
412 17c3 cde017 call setfunc |
|||
413 17c6 cdf017 call waitio ;perform read function |
|||
414 17c9 c9 ret ;may have error set in reg-a |
|||
415 ; |
|||
416 ; |
|||
417 write: ;disk write function |
|||
418 17ca 0e06 mvi c, writf |
|||
419 17cc cde017 call setfunc ;set to write function |
|||
420 17cf cdf017 call waitio |
|||
421 17d2 c9 ret ;may have error set |
|||
422 ; |
|||
423 ; |
|||
424 ; utility subroutines |
|||
425 prmsg: ;print message at h, l to 0 |
|||
426 17d3 7e mov a, m |
|||
427 17d4 b7 ora a zero? |
|||
428 17d5 c8 rz |
|||
429 ; more to print |
|||
430 17d6 e5 push h |
|||
431 17d7 4f mov c,a |
|||
432 17d8 cd6a17 call conout |
|||
433 17db e1 pop h |
|||
434 17dc 23 inx h |
|||
435 17dd c3d317 jmp prmsg |
|||
436 ; |
|||
437 setfunc: |
|||
438 ; set function for next i/o (command in reg-c) |
|||
439 17e0 216818 lxi h, iof ;io function address |
|||
440 17e3 7e mov a, m ;get it to accumulator for masking |
|||
441 17e4 e6f8 ani 11111000b ;remove previous command |
|||
442 17e6 b1 ora c ;set to new command |
|||
443 17e7 77 mov m, a ;replaced in iopb |
|||
444 ; the mds-800 controller requires disk bank bit in sector byte |
|||
445 ; mask the bit from the current i/o function |
|||
446 17e8 e620 ani 00100000b ;mask the disk select bit |
|||
447 17ea 216b18 lxi h, ios ;address the sector select byte |
|||
448 17ed b6 ora m ;select proper disk bank |
|||
449 17ee 77 mov m, a ;set disk select bit on/off |
|||
450 17ef c9 ret |
|||
451 ; |
|||
452 waitio: |
|||
453 17f0 0e0a mvi c, retry ;max retries before perm error |
|||
454 rewait: |
|||
455 ; start the i/o function and wait for completion |
|||
456 17f2 cd3f18 call intype ;in rtype |
|||
457 17f5 cd4c18 call inbyte ;clears the controller |
|||
458 ; |
|||
459 17f8 3a6618 lda dbank ;set bank flags |
|||
460 17fb b7 ora a ;zero if drive 0, 1 and nz if 2, 3 |
|||
461 17fc 3e67 mvi a, iopb and offh ;low address for iopb |
|||
462 17fe 0618 mvi b, iopb shr 8 ;high address for iopb |
|||
463 1800 c20b18 jnz iodr1 ;drive bank 1? |
|||
464 1803 d379 out ilow ;low address to controller |
|||
465 1805 78 mov a, b |
|||
466 1806 d37a out ihigh ;high address |
|||
467 1808 c31018 jmp waito ;to wait for complete |
|||
468 ; |
|||
469 iodr1: ;drive bank 1 |
|||
470 180b d389 out ilow+10h ;88 for drive bank 10 |
|||
471 180d 78 mov a, b |
|||
472 180e d38a out ihigh+10h |
|||
473 ; |
|||
474 1810 cd5918 waito: call instat ;wait for completion |
|||
475 1813 e604 ani iordy ;ready? |
|||
476 1815 ca1018 jz waito |
|||
477 ; |
|||
478 ; check io completion ok |
|||
479 1818 cd3f18 call intype ;must be io complete (00) unlinked |
|||
480 ; 00 unlinked i/o complete, 01 linked i/o complete (not used) |
|||
481 ; io disk status changed 11 (not used) |
|||
482 181b fe02 cpi 10b ;ready status change? |
|||
483 181d ca3218 jz wready |
|||
484 ; |
|||
485 ; must be 00 in the accumulator |
|||
486 1820 b7 ora a |
|||
487 1821 c23818 jnz werror ;some other condition, retry |
|||
488 ; |
|||
489 ; check i/o error bits |
|||
490 1824 cd4c18 call inbyte |
|||
491 1827 17 ral |
|||
492 1828 da3218 jc wready ;unit not ready |
|||
493 182b 1f rar |
|||
494 182c e6fe ani 11111110b ;any other errors? (deleted data ok) |
|||
495 182e c23818 jnz werror |
|||
496 ; |
|||
497 ; read or write is ok, accumulator contains zero |
|||
498 1831 c9 ret |
|||
499 ; |
|||
500 wready: ;not ready, treat as error for now |
|||
501 1832 cd4c18 call inbyte ;clear result byte |
|||
502 1835 c33818 jmp trycount |
|||
503 ; |
|||
504 werror: ;return hardware malfunction (crc, track, seek, etc.) |
|||
505 ; the mds controller has returned a bit in each position |
|||
506 ; of the accumulator, corresponding to the conditions: |
|||
507 ; 0 -deleted data (accepted as ok above) |
|||
508 ; 1 -crc error |
|||
509 ; 2 -seek error |
|||
510 ; 3 -address error (hardware malfunction) |
|||
511 ; 4 -data over/under flow (hardware malfunction) |
|||
512 ; 5 -write protect (treated as not ready) |
|||
513 ; 6 -write error (hardware malfunction) |
|||
514 ; j -not ready |
|||
515 ; (accumulator bits are numbered 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0) |
|||
516 ; |
|||
517 ; it may be useful to filter out the various conditions, |
|||
518 ; but we will get a permanent error message if it is not |
|||
519 ; recoverable. in any case, the not ready condition is |
|||
520 ; treated as a separated condition for later improvement |
|||
521 trycount: |
|||
522 ; register c contains retry count, decrement 'til zero |
|||
523 1838 0d dcr c |
|||
524 1839 c2f217 jnz rewait ;for another try |
|||
525 ; |
|||
526 ; cannot recover from error |
|||
527 183c 3e01 mvi a, 1 ;error code |
|||
528 183e c9 ret |
|||
529 ; |
|||
530 ; intype, inbyte, instat read drive bank 00 or 10 |
|||
531 183f 3a6618 intype: lda dbank |
|||
532 1842 b7 ora a |
|||
533 1843 c24918 jnz intyp1 ;skip to bank 10 |
|||
534 1846 db79 in rtype |
|||
535 1848 c9 ret |
|||
536 1849 db89 intyp1: in rtype+10h ;78 for 0, 1 88 for 2, 3 |
|||
537 184b c9 ret |
|||
538 ; |
|||
539 184c 3a6618 inbyte: lda dbank |
|||
540 184f b7 ora a |
|||
541 1850 c25618 jnz inbyt1 |
|||
542 1853 db7b in rbyte |
|||
543 1855 c9 ret |
|||
544 1856 db8b inbyt1: in rbyte+10h |
|||
545 1858 c9 ret |
|||
546 ; |
|||
547 1859 3a6618 instat: lda dbank |
|||
548 185c b7 ora a |
|||
549 185d c26318 jnz insta1 |
|||
550 1860 db78 in dstat |
|||
551 1862 c9 ret |
|||
552 1863 db88 insta1: in dstat+10h |
|||
553 1865 c9 ret |
|||
554 ; |
|||
555 ; |
|||
556 ; |
|||
557 ; data areas (must be in ram) |
|||
558 1866 00 dbank: db 0 ;disk bank 00 if drive 0, 1 |
|||
559 ; 10 if drive 2, 3 |
|||
560 iopb: ;io parameter block |
|||
561 1867 80 db 80h ;normal i/o operation |
|||
562 1868 04 iof: db readf ;io function, initial read |
|||
563 1869 01 ion: db 1 ;number of sectors to read |
|||
564 186a 02 iot: db offset ;track number |
|||
565 186b 01 ios: db 1 ;sector number |
|||
566 186c 8000 iod: dw buff ;io address |
|||
567 ; |
|||
568 ; |
|||
569 ; define ram areas for bdos operation |
|||
570 endef |
|||
571 186e+= begdat equ $ |
|||
572 186e+ dirbuf: ds 128 ;directory access buffer |
|||
573 18ee+ alv0: ds 31 |
|||
574 190d+ csv0: ds 16 |
|||
575 191d+ alv1: ds 31 |
|||
576 193c+ csv1: ds 16 |
|||
577 194c+ alv2: ds 31 |
|||
578 196b+ csv2: ds 16 |
|||
579 197b+ alv3: ds 31 |
|||
580 199a+ csv3: ds 16 |
|||
581 19aa+= enddat equ $ |
|||
582 013c+= datsiz equ $-begdat |
|||
583 19aa end |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
als1 001f 141# |
|||
als2 001f 146# |
|||
als3 001f 151# |
|||
alv0 18ee 87 573# |
|||
alv1 191d 91 575# |
|||
alv2 194c 95 577# |
|||
alv3 197b 99 579# |
|||
base 0078 180# 181 182 183 185 186 |
|||
bdos 0806 29# 287 |
|||
begdat 186e 571# 582 |
|||
bias 0000 19# 22# |
|||
boot 16b3 63 207# |
|||
booter0 1752 305 310# |
|||
booterr 1749 241 302# |
|||
bootmsg 175b 312 316# |
|||
buff 0080 34# 209 221 278 566 |
|||
cdisk 0004 33# 213 296 |
|||
ci f803 172# 325 |
|||
co f809 174# 330 |
|||
conin 1764 66 324# |
|||
conout 176a 67 329# 432 |
|||
const 1761 65 320# |
|||
cpmb 0000 28# 29 30 226 299 |
|||
cpml 1600 30# 31 |
|||
cr 000d 192# 196 205 |
|||
css1 0010 142# |
|||
css2 0010 147# |
|||
css3 0010 152# |
|||
csts f812 177# 322 |
|||
csv0 190d 87 574# |
|||
csv1 193c 91 576# |
|||
csv2 196b 95 578# |
|||
csv3 199a 99 580# |
|||
datsiz 013c 582# |
|||
dbank 1866 361 459 531 539 539 547 558# |
|||
dirbuf 186e 86 90 94 98 572# |
|||
dpb0 1673 86 101# 140 145 150 |
|||
dpb1 1673 90 140# |
|||
dpb2 1673 94 145# |
|||
dpb3 1673 98 150# |
|||
dpbase 1633 83# 380 |
|||
dpe0 1633 84# |
|||
dpe1 1643 88# |
|||
dpe2 1653 92# |
|||
dpe3 1663 96# |
|||
dstat 0078 181# 550 552 |
|||
enddat 19aa 581# |
|||
false 0000 15# 16 |
|||
gocpm 170f 214 265# |
|||
home 1778 71 349# |
|||
icon 00fe 166# 275 |
|||
ihigh 007a 186# 466 472 |
|||
ilow 0079 185# 464 470 |
|||
inbyt1 1856 541 544# |
|||
inbyte 184c 457 490 501 539# |
|||
insta1 1863 549 552# |
|||
instat 1859 474 547# |
|||
intc 00fc 165# 271 273 |
|||
inte 007e 167# 272 |
|||
intyp1 1849 533 536# |
|||
intype 183f 456 479 531# |
|||
iod 186c 242 407 566# |
|||
iodr1 180b 463 469# |
|||
iof 1868 369 439 562# |
|||
ion 1869 563# |
|||
iopb 1867 461 462 560# |
|||
iordy 0004 191# 475 |
|||
ios 186b 248 391 400 447 565# |
|||
iot 186a 252 386 564# |
|||
lf 000a 193# 196 196 205 |
|||
list 176d 68 332# |
|||
listst 1770 78 336# |
|||
lo f80f 176# 334 |
|||
mon80 f800 170# 291 |
|||
nsects 002c 31# 237 |
|||
offset 0002 32# 100 564 |
|||
patch 1600 25# 27 28 |
|||
po f80c 175# 343 |
|||
prmsg 17d3 211 313 425# 435 |
|||
punch 1772 69 341# |
|||
rbyte 007b 183# 542 544 |
|||
rd1 1705 250 257# |
|||
rdsec 16e1 238# 262 |
|||
read 17c1 76 240 410# |
|||
reader 1775 70 345# |
|||
readf 0004 188# 411 562 |
|||
recal 0003 190# |
|||
retry 000a 35# 223 453 |
|||
revrt 00fd 164# 269 |
|||
rewait 17f2 454# 524 |
|||
ri f806 173# 347 |
|||
rmon80 ff0f 171# 314 |
|||
rtype 0079 182# 534 536 |
|||
sectran 17b1 79 394# |
|||
seldsk 177d 72 229 354# |
|||
setdma 17bb 75 227 247 279 404# |
|||
setdrive 1792 365 367# |
|||
setfunc 17e0 412 419 437# |
|||
setsec 17ac 74 233 259 390# |
|||
settrk 17a7 73 231 255 352 385# |
|||
signon 169c 195# 210 |
|||
test 0000 16# 18 21 197 200 289 |
|||
true ffff 14# 15 |
|||
trycount 1838 502 521# |
|||
vers 0016 6# 204 204 |
|||
waito 1810 467 474# 476 |
|||
waitio 17f0 413 420 452# |
|||
wboot 16c3 64 217# |
|||
wboot0 16c9 225# 308 |
|||
wboote 1603 64# 284 |
|||
werror 1838 487 495 504# |
|||
wready 1832 483 492 500# |
|||
write 17ca 77 417# |
|||
writf 0006 189# 418 |
|||
xlt0 1682 84 112# 143 148 153 |
|||
xlt1 1682 88 143# |
|||
xlt2 1682 92 148# |
|||
xlt3 1682 96 153# |
|||
.nx appb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,371 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft B-% |
|||
Appendix B |
|||
|
|||
A Skeletal CBIOS |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 ; skeletal cbios for first level of cp/m 2.0 alteration |
|||
2 ; |
|||
3 0014 = msize equ 20 ;cp/m version memory size in kilobytes |
|||
4 ; |
|||
5 ; "bias" is address offset from 3400h for memory systems |
|||
6 ; than 16k (referred to as "b" throughout the text) |
|||
7 ; |
|||
8 0000 = bias equ (msize-20)*1024 |
|||
9 3400 = ccp equ 3400h+bias ;base of ccp |
|||
10 3c06 = bdos equ ccp+806h ;base of bdos |
|||
11 4a00 = bios equ ccp+1600h ;base of bios |
|||
12 0004 = cdisk equ 0004h ;current disk number 0=a,..., 15=p |
|||
13 0003 = iobyte equ 0003h ;intel i/o byte |
|||
14 ; |
|||
15 4a00 org bios ;origin of this program |
|||
16 002c = nsects equ ($-ccp)/128 ;warm start sector count |
|||
17 ; |
|||
18 ; jump vector for individual subroutines |
|||
19 4a00 c39c4a jmp boot ;cold start |
|||
20 4a03 c3a64a wboote: jmp wboot ;warm start |
|||
21 4a06 c3114b jmp const ;console status |
|||
22 4a09 c3244b jmp conin ;console character in |
|||
23 4a0c c3374b jmp conout ;console character out |
|||
24 4a0f c3494b jmp list ;list character out |
|||
25 4a12 c34d4b jmp punch ;punch character out |
|||
26 4a15 c34f4b jmp reader ;reader character out |
|||
27 4a18 c3544b jmp home ;move head to home position |
|||
28 4a1b c35a4b jmp seldsk ;select disk |
|||
29 4a1e c37d4b jmp settrk ;set track number |
|||
30 4a21 c3924b jmp setsec ;set sector number |
|||
31 4a24 c3ad4b jmp setdma ;set dma address |
|||
32 4a27 c3c34b jmp read ;read disk |
|||
33 4a2a c3d64b jmp write ;write disk |
|||
34 4a2d c34b4b jmp listst ;return list status |
|||
35 4a30 c3a74b jmp sectran ;sector translate |
|||
36 ; |
|||
37 ; fixed data tables for four-drive standard |
|||
38 ; ibm-compatible 8" disks |
|||
39 ; disk parameter header for disk 00 |
|||
40 4a33 734a0000 dpbase: dw trans, 0000h |
|||
41 4a37 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
42 4a3b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
43 4a3f ec4d704d dw chk00, all00 |
|||
44 ; disk parameter header for disk 01 |
|||
45 4a43 734a0000 dw trans, 0000h |
|||
46 4a47 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
47 4a4b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
48 4a4f fc4d8f4d dw chk01, all01 |
|||
49 ; disk parameter header for disk 02 |
|||
50 4a53 734a0000 dw trans, 0000h |
|||
51 4a57 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
52 4a5b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
53 4a5f 0c4eae4d dw chk02, all02 |
|||
54 ; disk parameter header for disk 03 |
|||
55 4a63 734a0000 dw trans, 0000h |
|||
56 4a67 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
57 4a6b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
58 4a6f 1c4ecd4d dw chk03, all03 |
|||
59 ; |
|||
60 ; sector translate vector |
|||
61 4a73 01070d13 trans: db 1, 7, 13, 19 ;sectors 1, 2, 3, 4 |
|||
62 4a77 19050b11 db 25, 5, 11, 17 ;sectors 5, 6, 7, 8 |
|||
63 4a7b 1703090f db 23, 3, 9, 15 ;sectors 9, 10, 11, 12 |
|||
64 4a7f 1502080e db 21, 2, 8, 14 ;sectors 13, 14, 15, 16 |
|||
65 4a83 141a060c db 20, 26, 6, 12 ;sectors 17, 18, 19, 20 |
|||
66 4a87 1218040a db 18, 24, 4, 10 ;sectors 21, 22, 23, 24 |
|||
67 4a8b 1016 db 16, 22 ;sectors 25, 26 |
|||
68 ; |
|||
69 dpblk: ;disk parameter block, common to all disks |
|||
70 4a8d 1a00 dw 26 ;sectors per track |
|||
71 4a8f 03 db 3 ;block shift factor |
|||
72 4a90 07 db 7 ;block mask |
|||
73 4a91 00 db 0 ;null mask |
|||
74 4a92 f200 dw 242 ;disk size-1 |
|||
75 4a94 3f00 dw 63 ;directory max |
|||
76 4a96 c0 db 192 ;alloc 0 |
|||
77 4a97 00 db 0 ;alloc 1 |
|||
78 4a98 1000 dw 16 ;check size |
|||
79 4a9a 0200 dw 2 ;track offset |
|||
80 ; |
|||
81 ; end of fixed tables |
|||
82 ; |
|||
83 ; individual subroutines to perform each function |
|||
84 boot: ;simplest case is to just perform parameter initialization |
|||
85 4a9c af xra a ;zero in the accum |
|||
86 4a9d 320300 sta iobyte ;clear the iobyte |
|||
87 4aa0 320400 sta cdisk ;select disk zero |
|||
88 4aa3 c3ef4a jmp gocpm ;initialize and go to cp/m |
|||
89 ; |
|||
90 wboot: ;simplest case is to read the disk until all sectors loaded |
|||
91 4aa6 318000 lxi sp, 80h ;use space below buffer for stack |
|||
92 4aa9 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;select disk 0 |
|||
93 4aab cd5a4b call seldsk |
|||
94 4aae cd544b call home ;go to track 00 |
|||
95 ; |
|||
96 4ab1 062c mvi b, nsects ;b counts # of sectors to load |
|||
97 4ab3 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;c has the current track number |
|||
98 4ab5 1602 mvi d, 2 ;d has the next sector to read |
|||
99 ; note that we begin by reading track 0, sector 2 since sector 1 |
|||
100 ; contains the cold start loader, which is skipped in a warm start |
|||
101 4ab7 210034 lxi h, ccp ;base of cp/m (initial load point) |
|||
102 load1: ;load one more sector |
|||
103 4aba c5 push b ;save sector count, current track |
|||
104 4abb d5 push d ;save next sector to read |
|||
105 4abc e5 push h ;save dma address |
|||
106 4abd 4a mov c, d ;get sector address to register c |
|||
107 4abe cd924b call setsec ;set sector address from register c |
|||
108 4ac1 c1 pop b ;recall dma address to b, c |
|||
109 4ac2 c5 push b ;replace on stack for later recall |
|||
110 4ac3 cdad4b call setdma ;set dma address from b, c |
|||
111 ; |
|||
112 ; drive set to 0, track set, sector set, dma address set |
|||
113 4ac6 cdc34b call read |
|||
114 4ac9 fe00 cpi 00h ;any errors? |
|||
115 4acb c2a64a jnz wboot ;retry the entire boot if an error occurs |
|||
116 ; |
|||
117 ; no error, move to next sector |
|||
118 4ace e1 pop h ;recall dma address |
|||
119 4acf 118000 lxi d, 128 ;dma=dma+128 |
|||
120 4ad2 19 dad d ;new dma address is in h, l |
|||
121 4ad3 d1 pop d ;recall sector address |
|||
122 4ad4 c1 pop b ;recall number of sectors remaining, and current trk |
|||
123 4ad5 05 dcr b ;sectors=sectors-1 |
|||
124 4ad6 caef4a jz gocpm ;transfer to cp/m if all have been loaded |
|||
125 ; |
|||
126 ; more sectors remain to load, check for track change |
|||
127 4ad9 14 inr d |
|||
128 4ada 7a mov a,d ;sector=27?, if so, change tracks |
|||
129 4adb fe1b cpi 27 |
|||
130 4add daba4a jc load1 ;carry generated if sector<27 |
|||
131 ; |
|||
132 ; end of current track, go to next track |
|||
133 4ae0 1601 mvi d, 1 ;begin with first sector of next track |
|||
134 4ae2 0c inr c ;track=track+1 |
|||
135 ; |
|||
136 ; save register state, and change tracks |
|||
137 4ae3 c5 push b |
|||
138 4ae4 d5 push d |
|||
139 4ae5 e5 push h |
|||
140 4ae6 cd7d4b call settrk ;track address set from register c |
|||
141 4ae9 e1 pop h |
|||
142 4aea d1 pop d |
|||
143 4aeb c1 pop b |
|||
144 4aec c3ba4a jmp load1 ;for another sector |
|||
145 ; |
|||
146 ; end of load operation, set parameters and go to cp/m |
|||
147 gocpm: |
|||
148 4aef 3ec3 mvi a, 0c3h ;c3 is a jmp instruction |
|||
149 4af1 320000 sta 0 ;for jmp to wboot |
|||
150 4af4 21034a lxi h, wboote ;wboot entry point |
|||
151 4af7 220100 shld 1 ;set address field for jmp at 0 |
|||
152 ; |
|||
153 4afa 320500 sta 5 ;for jmp to bdos |
|||
154 4afd 21063c lxi h, bdos ;bdos entry point |
|||
155 4b00 220600 shld 6 ;address field of jump at 5 to bdos |
|||
156 ; |
|||
157 4b03 018000 lxi b, 80h ;default dma address is 80h |
|||
158 4b06 cdad4b call setdma |
|||
159 ; |
|||
160 4b09 fb ei ;enable the interrupt system |
|||
161 4b0a 3a0400 lda cdisk ;get current disk number |
|||
162 4b0d 4f mov c, a ;send to the ccp |
|||
163 4b0e c30034 jmp ccp ;go to cp/m for further processing |
|||
164 ; |
|||
165 ; |
|||
166 ; simple i/o handlers (must be filled in by user) |
|||
167 ; in each case, the entry point is provided, with space reserved |
|||
168 ; to insert your own code |
|||
169 ; |
|||
170 const: ;console status, return 0ffh if character ready, 00h if not |
|||
171 4b11 ds 10h ;space for status subroutine |
|||
172 4b21 3e00 mvi a, 00h |
|||
173 4b23 c9 ret |
|||
174 ; |
|||
175 conin: ;console character into register a |
|||
176 4b24 ds 10h ;space for input routine |
|||
177 4b34 e67f ani 7fh ;strip parity bit |
|||
178 4b36 c9 ret |
|||
179 ; |
|||
180 conout: ;console character output from register c |
|||
181 4b37 79 mov a, c ;get to accumulator |
|||
182 4b38 ds 10h ;space for output routine |
|||
183 4b48 c9 ret |
|||
184 ; |
|||
185 list: ;list character from register c |
|||
186 4b49 79 mov a, c ;character to register a |
|||
187 4b4a c9 ret ;null subroutine |
|||
188 ; |
|||
189 listst: ;return list status (0 if not ready, 1 if ready) |
|||
190 4b4b af xra a ;0 is always ok to return |
|||
191 4b4c c9 ret |
|||
192 ; |
|||
193 punch: ;punch character from register c |
|||
194 4b4d 79 mov a, c ;character to register a |
|||
195 4b4e c9 ret ;null subroutine |
|||
196 ; |
|||
197 ; |
|||
198 reader: ;reader character into register a from reader device |
|||
199 4b4f 3e1a mvi a, 1ah ;enter end of file for now (replace later) |
|||
200 4b51 e67f ani 7fh ;remember to strip parity bit |
|||
201 4b53 c9 ret |
|||
202 ; |
|||
203 ; |
|||
204 ; i/o drivers for the disk follow |
|||
205 ; for now, we will simply store the parameters away for use |
|||
206 ; in the read and write subroutines |
|||
207 ; |
|||
208 home: ;move to the track 00 position of current drive |
|||
209 ; translate this call into a settrk call with parameter 00 |
|||
210 4b54 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;select track 0 |
|||
211 4b56 cd7d4b call settrk |
|||
212 4b59 c9 ret ;we will move to 00 on first read/write |
|||
213 ; |
|||
214 seldsk: ;select disk given by register c |
|||
215 4b51 210000 lxi h, 0000h ;error return code |
|||
216 4b5d 79 mov a, c |
|||
217 4b5e 32ef4c sta diskno |
|||
218 4b61 fe04 cpi 4 ;must be between 0 and 3 |
|||
219 4b63 d0 rnc ;no carry if 4, 5,... |
|||
220 ; disk number is in the proper range |
|||
221 4b64 ds 10 ;space for disk select |
|||
222 ; compute proper disk parameter header address |
|||
223 4b6e 3aef4c lda diskno |
|||
224 4b71 6f mov l, a ;l=disk number 0, 1, 2, 3 |
|||
225 4b72 2600 mvi h, 0 ;high order zero |
|||
226 4b74 29 dad h ;*2 |
|||
227 4b75 29 dad h ;*4 |
|||
228 4b76 29 dad h ;*8 |
|||
229 4b77 29 dad h ;*16 (size of each header) |
|||
230 4b78 11334a lxi d, dpbase |
|||
231 4b7b 19 dad 0 ;hl=.dpbase (diskno*16) |
|||
232 4b7c c9 ret |
|||
233 ; |
|||
234 settrk: ;set track given by register c |
|||
235 4b7d 79 mov a, c |
|||
236 4b7e 32e94c sta track |
|||
237 4b81 ds 10h ;space for track select |
|||
238 4b91 c9 ret |
|||
239 ; |
|||
240 setsec: ;set sector given by register c |
|||
241 4b92 79 mov a, c |
|||
242 4b93 32eb4c sta sector |
|||
243 4b96 ds 10h ;space for sector select |
|||
244 4ba6 c9 ret |
|||
245 ; |
|||
246 sectran: |
|||
247 ;translate the sector given by bc using the |
|||
248 ;translate table given by de |
|||
249 4ba7 eb xchg ;hl=.trans |
|||
250 4ba8 09 dad b ;hl=.trans (sector) |
|||
251 4ba9 6e mov l, m ;l=trans (sector) |
|||
252 4baa 2600 mvi h, 0 ;hl=trans (sector) |
|||
253 4bac c9 ret ;with value in hl |
|||
254 ; |
|||
255 setdma: ;set dma address given by registers b and c |
|||
256 4bad 69 mov l, c ;low order address |
|||
257 4bae 60 mov h, b ;high order address |
|||
258 4baf 22ed4c shld dmaad ;save the address |
|||
259 4bb2 ds 10h ;space for setting the dma address |
|||
260 4bc2 c9 ret |
|||
261 ; |
|||
262 read: ;perform read operation (usually this is similar to write |
|||
263 ; so we will allow space to set up read command, then use |
|||
264 ; common code in write) |
|||
265 4bc3 ds 10h ;set up read command |
|||
266 4bd3 c3e64b jmp waitio ;to perform the actual i/o |
|||
267 ; |
|||
268 write: ;perform a write operation |
|||
269 4bd6 ds 10h ;set up write command |
|||
270 ; |
|||
271 waitio: ;enter here from read and write to perform the actual i/o |
|||
272 ; operation. return a 00h in register a if the operation completes |
|||
273 ; properly, and 01h if an error occurs during the read or write |
|||
274 ; |
|||
275 ; in this case, we have saved the disk number in 'diskno' (0, 1) |
|||
276 ; the track number in 'track' (0-76) |
|||
277 ; the sector number in 'sector' (1-26) |
|||
278 ; the dma address in 'dmaad' (0-65535) |
|||
279 4be6 ds 256 ;space reserved for i/o drivers |
|||
280 4ce6 3e01 mvi a, 1 ;error condition |
|||
281 4ce8 c9 ret ;replaced when filled-in |
|||
282 ; |
|||
283 ; the remainder of the cbios is reserved uninitialized |
|||
284 ; data area, and does not need to be a part of the |
|||
285 ; system memory image (the space must be available, |
|||
286 ; however, between "begdat" and "enddat"). |
|||
287 ; |
|||
288 4ce9 track: ds 2 ;two bytes for expansion |
|||
289 4ceb sector: ds 2 ;two bytes for expansion |
|||
290 4ced dmaad: ds 2 ;direct memory address |
|||
291 4cef diskno: ds 1 ;disk number 0-15 |
|||
292 ; |
|||
293 ; scratch ram area for bdos use |
|||
294 4cf0= begdat equ $ ;beginning of data area |
|||
295 4cf0 dirfb: ds 128 ;scratch directory area |
|||
296 4d70 all00: ds 31 ;allocation vector 0 |
|||
297 4d8f all01: ds 31 ;allocation vector 1 |
|||
298 4dae all02: ds 31 ;allocation vector 2 |
|||
299 4dcd all03: ds 31 ;allocation vector 3 |
|||
300 4dec chk00: ds 16 ;check vector 0 |
|||
301 4dfc chk01: ds 16 ;check vector 1 |
|||
302 4e0c chk02: ds 16 ;check vector 2 |
|||
303 4e1c chk03: ds 16 ;check vector 3 |
|||
304 ; |
|||
305 4e2c enddat equ $ ;end of data area |
|||
306 013c= datsiz equ $-begdat; ;size of data area |
|||
307 4e2c end |
|||
|
|||
all00 4d70 43 296# |
|||
all01 4d8f 48 297# |
|||
all02 4dae 53 298# |
|||
all03 4dcd 58 299# |
|||
bdos 3c06 10# 154 |
|||
begdat 4cf0 294# 306 |
|||
bias 0000 8# 9 |
|||
bios 4a00 11# 15 |
|||
boot 4a9c 19 84# |
|||
ccp 3400 9# 10 11 16 101 163 |
|||
cdisk 0004 12# 87 161 |
|||
chk00 4dec 43 300# |
|||
chk01 4dfc 48 301# |
|||
chk02 4e0c 53 302# |
|||
chk03 4e1c 58 303# |
|||
conin 4b24 22 175# |
|||
conout 4b37 23 180# |
|||
const 4b11 21 170# |
|||
datsiz 013c 306# |
|||
dirbf 4cf0 42 47 52 57 295# |
|||
diskno 4cef 217 223 291# |
|||
dmaad 4ced 258 290# |
|||
dpbase 4a33 40# 230 |
|||
dpblk 4a8d 42 47 52 57 69# |
|||
enddat 4e2c 305# |
|||
gocpm 4aef 88 124 147# |
|||
home 4b54 27 94 208# |
|||
iobyte 0003 13# 86 |
|||
list 4b49 24 185# |
|||
listst 4b4b 34 189# |
|||
load1 4aba 102# 130 144 |
|||
msize 0014 3# 8 |
|||
nsects 002c 16# 96 |
|||
punch 4b4d 25 193# |
|||
read 4bc3 32 113 262# |
|||
reader 4b4f 26 198# |
|||
sector 4ceb 242 289# |
|||
sectran 4ba7 35 246# |
|||
seldsk 4b5a 28 93 214# |
|||
setdma 4bad 31 110 158 255# |
|||
setsec 4b92 30 107 240# |
|||
settrk 4b7d 29 140 211 234# |
|||
track 4ce9 236 288# |
|||
trans 4a73 40 45 50 55 61# |
|||
waitio 4be6 266 271# |
|||
wboot 4aa6 20 90# 115 |
|||
wboote 4a03 20# 150 |
|||
write 4bd6 33 268# |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.nx appc |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft C-% |
|||
Appendix C |
|||
|
|||
A Skeletal GETSYS/PUTSYS Program |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
; combined getsys and putsys programs from |
|||
; Sec 6.4 |
|||
; Start the programs at the base of the TPA |
|||
|
|||
0100 org 0100h |
|||
|
|||
0014 = msize equ 20 ;size of cp/m in Kbytes |
|||
|
|||
;"bias" is the amount to add to addresses for > 20k |
|||
; (referred to as "b" throughout the text) |
|||
|
|||
0000 = bias equ (msize-20)*1024 |
|||
3400 = ccp equ 3400h+bias |
|||
3c00 = bdos equ ccp+0800h |
|||
4a00 = bios equ ccp+1600h |
|||
|
|||
; getsys programs tracks 0 and 1 to memory at |
|||
; 3880h + bias |
|||
|
|||
; register usage |
|||
; a (scratch register) |
|||
; b track count (0...76) |
|||
; c sector count (1...26) |
|||
; d,e (scratch register pair) |
|||
; h,l load address |
|||
; sp set to track address |
|||
|
|||
gstart: ;start of getsys |
|||
0100 318033 lxi sp,ccp-0080h ;convenient place |
|||
0103 218033 lxi h,ccp-0080h ;set initial load |
|||
0106 0600 mvi b 0 ;start with track |
|||
rd$trk: ;read next track |
|||
0108 0e01 mvi c,1 ;each track start |
|||
rd$sec: |
|||
010a cd0003 call read$sec ;get the next sector |
|||
010d 118000 lxi d,128 ;offset by one sector |
|||
0110 19 dad d ; (hl=hl+128) |
|||
0111 0c inr c ;next sector |
|||
0112 79 mov a,c ;fetch sector number |
|||
0113 felb cpi 27 ;and see if last |
|||
0115 da0a01 jc rdsec ;<, do one more |
|||
|
|||
;arrive here at end of track, move to next track |
|||
|
|||
0118 04 inr b ;track = track+1 |
|||
0119 78 mov a,b ;check for last |
|||
011a fe02 cpi 2 ;track = 2 ? |
|||
011c da0801 jc rd$trk ;<, do another |
|||
|
|||
;arrive here at end of load, halt for lack of anything |
|||
;better |
|||
|
|||
011f fb ei |
|||
0120 76 hlt |
|||
; putsys program, places memory image |
|||
; starting at |
|||
; 3880h + bias back to tracks 0 and 1 |
|||
; start this program at the next page boundary |
|||
0200 org ($+0100h) and 0ff00h |
|||
|
|||
put$sys: |
|||
0200 318033 lxi sp,ccp-0080h ;convenient place |
|||
0203 218033 lxi h,ccp-0080h ;start of dump |
|||
0206 0600 mvi b,0 ;start with track |
|||
wr$trk: |
|||
0208 0e01 mvi b,1 ;start with sector |
|||
wr$sec: |
|||
020a cd0004 call write$sec ;write one sector |
|||
020d 118000 lxi d,128 ;length of each |
|||
0210 19 dad d ;<hl>=<hl> + 128 |
|||
0211 0c inr c ; <c>=<c> + 1 |
|||
0212 79 mov a,c ;see if |
|||
0213 felb cpi 27 ;past end of track |
|||
0215 da0a02 jc wr$sec ;no, do another |
|||
|
|||
;arrive here at end of track, move to next track |
|||
|
|||
0218 04 inr b ;track = track+1 |
|||
0219 78 mov a,b ;see if |
|||
021a fe02 cpi 2 ;last track |
|||
021c da0802 jc wr$trk ;no, do another |
|||
|
|||
; done with putsys, halt for lack of anything |
|||
; better |
|||
|
|||
02lf fb ei |
|||
0220 76 hit |
|||
|
|||
;user supplied subroutines for sector read and write |
|||
|
|||
; move to next page boundary |
|||
|
|||
0300 org ($+0100h) and 0ff00h |
|||
|
|||
read$sec: |
|||
;read the next sector |
|||
;track in <b>, |
|||
;sector in <c> |
|||
;dmaaddr in <hl> |
|||
|
|||
0300 c5 push b |
|||
0301 e5 push h |
|||
|
|||
;user defined read operation goes here |
|||
0302 ds 64 |
|||
|
|||
0342 el pop h |
|||
0343 cl pop b |
|||
0344 c9 ret |
|||
|
|||
0400 org ($+0100h) and 0ff00h ;another page |
|||
;boundary |
|||
|
|||
write$sec: |
|||
|
|||
;same parameters as read$sec |
|||
|
|||
0400 c5 push b |
|||
0401 e5 push h |
|||
|
|||
;user defined write operation goes here |
|||
0402 ds 64 |
|||
|
|||
0442 el pop h |
|||
0443 cl pop b |
|||
0444 c9 ret |
|||
|
|||
;end of getsys/putsys program |
|||
|
|||
0445 end |
|||
|
|||
.nx appd |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft D-% |
|||
Appendix D |
|||
|
|||
The Microcomputer Development System-800 Cold Start Loader for CP/M 2 |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 title mds cold start loader at 3000h' |
|||
2 ; |
|||
3 ; mds-800 cold start loader for cp/m 2.0 |
|||
4 ; |
|||
5 ; version 2.0 august, 1979 |
|||
6 ; |
|||
7 0000 = false equ 0 |
|||
8 ffff true equ not false |
|||
9 0000 = testing equ false if true, then go to mon80 on errors |
|||
10 ; |
|||
11 if testing |
|||
12 bias equ 03400h |
|||
13 endif |
|||
14 if not testing |
|||
15 0000 = bias equ 0000h |
|||
16 endif |
|||
17 0000 = cpmb equ bias ;base of dos load |
|||
18 0806 = bdos equ 806h+bias ;entry to dos for calls |
|||
19 1880 = bdose equ 1880h+bias ;end of dos load |
|||
20 1600 = boot equ 1600h+bias ;cold start entry point |
|||
21 1603 = rboot equ boot+3 ;warm start entry point |
|||
22 ; |
|||
23 3000 org 03000h ;loaded down from hardware boot at 3000H |
|||
24 ; |
|||
25 1880 = bdosl equ bdose-cpmb |
|||
26 0002 = ntrks equ 2 ;number of tracks to read |
|||
27 0031 = bdoss equ bdosl/128 ;number of sectors in dos |
|||
28 0019 = bdoso equ 25 ;number of bdos sectors on track 0 |
|||
29 0018 = bdos1 equ bdoss-bdoso ;number of sectors on track 1 |
|||
30 ; |
|||
31 f800 = mon80 equ 0f800h ;intel monitor base |
|||
32 ff0f = rmon80 equ 0ff0fh ;restart location for mon80 |
|||
33 0078 = base equ 078h ;'base' used by controller |
|||
34 0079 = rtype equ base+1 ;result type |
|||
35 007b = rbyte equ base+3 ;result byte |
|||
36 007f = reset equ base+7 ;reset controller |
|||
37 ; |
|||
38 0078 = dstat equ base ;disk status port |
|||
39 0079 = ilow equ base+1 ;low iopb address |
|||
40 007a = ihigh equ base+2 ;high iopb address |
|||
41 00ff = bsw equ 0ffh ;boot switch |
|||
42 0003 = recal equ 3h ;recalibrate selected drive |
|||
43 0004 = readf equ 4h ;disk read function |
|||
44 0100 = stack equ 100h ;use end of boot for stack |
|||
45 ; |
|||
46 rstart: |
|||
47 3000 310001 lxi sp,stack; ;in case of call to mon80 |
|||
48 ; clear disk status |
|||
49 3003 db79 in rtype |
|||
50 3005 db7b in rbyte |
|||
51 ; check if boot switch if off |
|||
52 coldstart: |
|||
53 3007 dbff in bsw |
|||
54 3009 e602 ani 02h ;switch on? |
|||
55 300b c20730 jnz coldstart |
|||
56 ; clear the controller |
|||
57 300e d37f out reset ;logic cleared |
|||
58 ; |
|||
59 ; |
|||
60 3010 0602 mvi b,ntrks ;number of tracks to read |
|||
61 3012 214230 lxi h,iopbo |
|||
62 ; |
|||
63 start: |
|||
64 ; |
|||
65 ; read first/next track into cpmb |
|||
66 3015 7d mov a,l |
|||
67 3016 d379 out ilow |
|||
68 3018 7c mov a,h |
|||
69 3019 d37a out ihigh |
|||
70 301b db78 waito: in dstat |
|||
71 301d e604 ani 4 |
|||
72 301f ca1b30 jz waito |
|||
73 ; |
|||
74 ; check disk status |
|||
75 3022 db79 in rtype |
|||
76 3024 e603 ani 11b |
|||
77 3026 fe02 cpi 2 |
|||
78 ; |
|||
79 if testing |
|||
80 cnc rmon80 ;go to monitor if 11 or 10 |
|||
81 endif |
|||
82 if not testing |
|||
83 3028 d20030 jnc rstart ;retry the load |
|||
84 endif |
|||
85 ; |
|||
86 302b db7b in rbyte ;i/o complete, check status |
|||
87 ; if not ready, then go to mon80 |
|||
88 302d 17 ral |
|||
89 302e dc0fff cc rmon80 ;not ready bit set |
|||
90 3031 1f rar ;restore |
|||
91 3032 e61e ani 11110b ;overrun/addr err/seek/crc/xxxx |
|||
92 ; |
|||
93 if testing |
|||
94 cnz rmon80 ;go to monitor |
|||
95 endif |
|||
96 if not testing |
|||
97 3034 c20030 jnz rstart ;retry the load |
|||
98 endif |
|||
99 ; |
|||
100 ; |
|||
101 3037 110700 lxi d,iopbl ;length of iopb |
|||
102 303a 19 dad d ;addressing next iopb |
|||
103 303b 05 dcr b ;count down tracks |
|||
104 303c c21530 jnz start |
|||
105 ; |
|||
106 ; |
|||
107 ; jmp to boot to print initial message, and set up jmps |
|||
108 303f c30016 jmp boot |
|||
109 ; |
|||
110 ; parameter blocks |
|||
111 3042 80 iopbo: db 80h ;iocw, no update |
|||
112 3043 04 db readf ;read function |
|||
113 3044 19 db bdoso ;#sectors to read on track 0 |
|||
114 3045 00 db 0 ;track 0 |
|||
115 3046 02 db 2 ;start with sector 2 on track 0 |
|||
116 3047 0000 dw cpmb ;start at base of bdos |
|||
117 0007 = iopbl equ $-iopbo |
|||
118 ; |
|||
119 3049 80 iopb1: db 80h |
|||
120 304a 04 db readf |
|||
121 304b 18 db bdos1 ;sectors to read on track 1 |
|||
122 304c 01 db 1 ;track 1 |
|||
123 304d 01 db 1 ;sector 1 |
|||
124 304e 800c dw cmpb+bdos0*128;base of second read |
|||
125 ; |
|||
126 3050 end |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
base 0078 33# 34 35 36 38 39 40 |
|||
bdos 0806 18# |
|||
bdoso 0019 28# 29 113 124 |
|||
bdos1 0018 29# 121 |
|||
bdose 1880 19# 25 |
|||
bdosl 1880 25# 27 |
|||
bdoss 0031 27# 29 |
|||
bias 0000 12# 15# 17 18 19 20 |
|||
boot 1600 20# 21 108 |
|||
bsw 00ff 41# 53 |
|||
coldstart 3007 52# 55 |
|||
cpmb 0000 17# 25 116 124 |
|||
dstat 0078 38# 70 |
|||
false 0000 7# 8 9 |
|||
ihigh 007a 40# 69 |
|||
ilow 0079 39# 67 |
|||
iopbo 3042 61 111# 117 |
|||
iopb1 3049 119# |
|||
iopbl 0007 101 117# |
|||
mon80 f800 31# |
|||
ntrks 0002 26# 60 |
|||
rboot 1603 21# |
|||
rbyte 007b 35# 50 86 |
|||
readf 0004 43# 112 120 |
|||
recal 0003 42# |
|||
reset 007f 36# 57 |
|||
rmon80 ff0f 32# 80 89 94 |
|||
rstart 3000 46# 83 97 |
|||
rtype 0079 34# 49 75 |
|||
stack 0100 44# 47 |
|||
start 3015 63# 104 |
|||
testing 0000 9# 11 14 79 82 93 96 |
|||
true ffff 8# |
|||
waito 301b 70# 72 |
|||
|
|||
.nx appe |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft E-% |
|||
Appendix E |
|||
|
|||
A Skeletal Cold Start Loader |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
;this is a sample cold start loader, which, when |
|||
;modified |
|||
;resides on track 00, sector 01 (the first sector on the |
|||
;diskette). we assume that the controller has loaded |
|||
;this sector into memory upon system start-up (this |
|||
;program can be keyed-in, or can exist in read-only |
|||
;memory |
|||
;beyond the address space of the cp/m version you are |
|||
;running). the cold start loader brings the cp/m system |
|||
;into memory at "loadp" (3400h + "bias"). in a 20k |
|||
;memory system, the value of "bias" is 000h, with |
|||
;large |
|||
;values for increased memory sizes (see section 2). |
|||
;after |
|||
;loading the cp/m system, the cold start loader |
|||
;branches |
|||
;to the "boot" entry point of the bios, which beings at |
|||
;"bios" + "bias". the cold start loader is not used un- |
|||
;til the system is powered up again, as long as the bios |
|||
;is not overwritten. the origin is assumed at 0000h, and |
|||
;must be changed if the controller brings the cold start |
|||
;loader into another area, or if a read-only memory |
|||
;area |
|||
;is used. |
|||
|
|||
0000 org 0 ;base of ram in |
|||
;cp/m |
|||
|
|||
0014 = msize equ 20 ;min mem size in |
|||
;kbytes |
|||
0000 = bias equ (msize-20)*1024 ;offset from 20k |
|||
;system |
|||
3400 = ccp equ 3400h+bias ;base of the ccp |
|||
4a00 = bios equ ccp+1600h ;base of the bios |
|||
0300 = biosl equ 0300h ;length of the bios |
|||
4a00 = boot equ bios |
|||
1900 = size equ bios+biosl-ccp ;size of cp/m |
|||
;system |
|||
0032 = sects equ size/128 ;# of sectors to load |
|||
|
|||
; begin the load operation |
|||
|
|||
cold: |
|||
0000 010200 lxi b,2 ;b=0, c=sector 2 |
|||
0003 1632 mvi d,sects ;d=# sectors to |
|||
;load |
|||
0005 210034 lxi h,ccp ;base transfer |
|||
;address |
|||
lsect: ;load the next sector |
|||
|
|||
; insert inline code at this point to |
|||
; read one 128 byte sector from the |
|||
; track given in register b, sector |
|||
; given in register c, |
|||
; into the address given by <hl> |
|||
;branch to location "cold" if a read error occurs |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
; user supplied read operation goes |
|||
; here... |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
|
|||
0008 c36b00 jmp past$patch ;remove this |
|||
;when patched |
|||
000b ds 60h |
|||
|
|||
past$patch: |
|||
;go to next sector if load is incomplete |
|||
006b 15 dcr d ;sects=sects-1 |
|||
006c ca004a jz boot ;head for the bios |
|||
|
|||
; more sectors to load |
|||
; |
|||
;we aren't using a stack, so use <sp> as scratch |
|||
;register |
|||
; to hold the load address increment |
|||
|
|||
006f 318000 lxi sp,128 ;128 bytes per |
|||
;sector |
|||
0072 39 dad sp ;<hl> = <hl> + |
|||
128 |
|||
0073 0c inr c ;sector=sector + 1 |
|||
0074 79 mov a,c |
|||
0075 felb cpi 27 ;last sector of |
|||
;track? |
|||
0077 da0800 jc lsect ;no, go read |
|||
;another |
|||
|
|||
;end of track, increment to next track |
|||
|
|||
007a 0e01 mvi c,l ;sector = 1 |
|||
007c 04 inr b ;track = track + 1 |
|||
007d c30800 jmp lsect ;for another group |
|||
0080 end ;of boot loader |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.nx appf |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,263 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft F-% |
|||
Appendix F |
|||
|
|||
CP/M Disk Definition Library |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1:; CP/M 2.0 disk re-definition library |
|||
2:; |
|||
3:; Copyright (c) 1979 |
|||
4:; Digital Research |
|||
5:; Box 579 |
|||
6:; Pacific Grove, CA |
|||
7:; 93950 |
|||
8:; |
|||
9:; CP/M logical disk drives are defined using the |
|||
10:; macros given below, where the sequence of calls |
|||
11:; is: |
|||
12:; |
|||
13:; disks n |
|||
14:; diskdef parameter-list-0 |
|||
15:; diskdef parameter-list-1 |
|||
16:; ... |
|||
17:; diskdef parameter-list-n |
|||
18:; endef |
|||
19:; |
|||
20:; where n is the number of logical disk drives attached |
|||
21:; to the CP/M system, and parameter-list-i defines the |
|||
22:; characteristics of the ith drive (i=0,1,...,n-1) |
|||
23:; |
|||
24:; each parameter-list-i takes the form |
|||
25:; dn,fsc,lsc,[skf],bls,dks,dir,cks,ofs,[0] |
|||
26:; where |
|||
27:; dn is the disk number 0,1,...,n-1 |
|||
28:; fsc is the first sector number (usually 0 or 1) |
|||
29:; lsc is the last sector number on a track |
|||
30:; skf is optional "skew factor" for sector translate |
|||
31:; bls is the data block size (1024,2048,...,16384) |
|||
32:; dks is the disk size in bls increments (word) |
|||
33:; dir is the number of directory elements (word) |
|||
34:; cks is the number of dir elements to checksum |
|||
35:; ofs is the number of tracks to skip (word) |
|||
36:; [0] is an optional 0 which forces 16K/directory end |
|||
37:; |
|||
38:; for convenience, the form |
|||
39:; dn,dm |
|||
40:; defines disk dn as having the same characteristics as |
|||
41:; a previously defined disk dm. |
|||
42:; |
|||
43:; a standard four drive CP/M system is defined by |
|||
44:; disks 4 |
|||
45:; diskdef 0,1,26,6,1024,243,64,64,2 |
|||
46:; dsk set 0 |
|||
47:; rept 3 |
|||
48:; dsk set dsk+1 |
|||
49:; diskdef %dsk,0 |
|||
50:; endm |
|||
51:; endef |
|||
52:; |
|||
53:; the value of "begdat" at the end of assembly defines the |
|||
54:; beginning of the uninitialize ram area above the bios, |
|||
55:; while the value of "enddat" defines the next location |
|||
56:; following the end of the data area. the size of this |
|||
57:; area is given by the value of "datsiz" at the end of the |
|||
58:; assembly. note that the allocation vector will be quite |
|||
59:; large if a large disk size is defined with a small block |
|||
60:; size. |
|||
61:; |
|||
62:dskhdr macro dn |
|||
63:;; define a single disk header list |
|||
64:dpe&dn: dw xlt&dn,0000h ;translate table |
|||
65: dw 0000h,0000h ;scratch area |
|||
66: dw dirbuf,dpb&dn ;dir buff,parm block |
|||
67: dw csv&dn,alv&dn ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
68: endm |
|||
69:; |
|||
70:disks macro nd |
|||
71:;; define nd disks |
|||
72:ndisks set nd ;;for later reference |
|||
73:dpbase equ $ ;base of disk parameter blocks |
|||
74:;; generate the nd elements |
|||
75:disknxt set 0 |
|||
76: rept nd |
|||
77: dskhdr %dsknxt |
|||
78:dsknxt set dsknxc+1 |
|||
79: endm |
|||
80: endm |
|||
81:; |
|||
82:dpbhdr macro dn |
|||
83:dpb&dn equ $ ;disk parm block |
|||
84: endm |
|||
85:; |
|||
86:ddb macro data,comment |
|||
87:;; define a db statement |
|||
88: db data comment |
|||
89: endm |
|||
90:; |
|||
91:ddw macro data,comment |
|||
92:;; define a dw statement |
|||
93: dw data comment |
|||
94: endm |
|||
95:; |
|||
96:gcd macro m,n |
|||
97:;; greatest common divisor of m,n |
|||
98:;; produces value gcdn as result |
|||
99:;; (used in sector translate table generation) |
|||
100:gcdm set m ;;variable for m |
|||
101:gcdn set n ;;variable for n |
|||
102:gcdr set 0 ;;variable for r |
|||
103: rept 65535 |
|||
104:gcdx set gcdm/gcdn |
|||
105:gcdr set gcdm-gcdx*gcdn |
|||
106: if gcdr = 0 |
|||
107: exitm |
|||
108: endif |
|||
109:gcdm set gcdn |
|||
110:gcdn set gcdr |
|||
111: endm |
|||
112: endm |
|||
113:; |
|||
114:diskdef macro dn,fsc,lsc,skf,bls,dks,dir,cks,ofs,k16 |
|||
115:;; generate the set statements for later tables |
|||
116: if nul lsc |
|||
117:;; current disk dn same as previous fsc |
|||
118:dpb&dn equ dpb&fsc ;equivalent parameters |
|||
119:als&dn equ als&fsc ;same allocation vector size |
|||
120:css&dn equ css&fsc ;same checksum vector size |
|||
121:xlt&dn equ xlt&fsc ;same translate table |
|||
122: else |
|||
123:secmax set lsc-(fsc) ;;sectors 0...secmax |
|||
124:sectors set secmax+1 ;;number of sectors |
|||
125:als&dn set (dks)/8 ;;size of allocation vector |
|||
126: if ((dks)mod8) ne 0 |
|||
127:als&dn set als&dn+1 |
|||
128: endif |
|||
129:css&dn set (cks)/4 ;;number of checksum elements |
|||
130:;; generate the block shift value |
|||
131:blkval set bls/128 ;;number of sectors/block |
|||
132:blkshf set 0 ;;counts right 0's in blkval |
|||
133:blkmsk set 0 ;;fills with l's from right |
|||
134: rept 16 ;;once for each bit position |
|||
135: if blkval=1 |
|||
136: exitm |
|||
137: endif |
|||
138:;; otherwise, high order 1 not found yet |
|||
139:blkshf set blkshf+1 |
|||
140:blkmsk set (blkmsk shl l) or l |
|||
141:blkval set blkval/2 |
|||
142: endm |
|||
143:;; generate the extent mask byte |
|||
144:blkval set bls/1024 ;;number of kilobytes/block |
|||
145:extmsk set 0 ;;fill from right with l's |
|||
146: rept 16 |
|||
147: if blkval=1 |
|||
148: exitm |
|||
149: endif |
|||
150:;; otherwise more to shift |
|||
151:extmsk set (extmsk shl l) or l |
|||
152:blkval set blkval/2 |
|||
153: endm |
|||
154:;; may be double byte allocation |
|||
155: if (dks)>256 |
|||
156:extmsk set (extmsk shr l) |
|||
157: endif |
|||
158:;; may be optional [0] in last position |
|||
159: if not nul k16 |
|||
160:extmsk set k16 |
|||
161: endif |
|||
162:;; now generate directory reservation bit vector |
|||
163:dirrem set dir ;;#remaining to process |
|||
164:dirbks set bls/32 ;;number of entries per block |
|||
165:dirblk set 0 ;;fill with l's on each loop |
|||
166: rept 16 |
|||
167: if dirrem=0 |
|||
168: exitm |
|||
169: endif |
|||
170:;; not complete, iterate once again |
|||
171:;; shift right and add 1 high order bit |
|||
172:dirblk set (dirblk shr l) or 8000h |
|||
173: if dirrem>dirbks |
|||
174:dirrem set dirrem-dirbks |
|||
175: else |
|||
176:direem set 0 |
|||
177: endif |
|||
178: endm |
|||
179: dpbhdr dn ;;generate equ $ |
|||
180: ddw %sectors,<;sec per track> |
|||
181: ddb %blkshf,<;block shift> |
|||
182: ddb %blkmsk,<;block mask> |
|||
183: ddb %extmsk,<;extnt mask> |
|||
184: ddw %(dks)-1,<;disk size-1> |
|||
185: ddw %(dir)-1,<directory max> |
|||
186: ddb %dirblk shr 8,<;alloc0> |
|||
187: ddb %dirblk and 0ffh,<;allocl> |
|||
188: ddw %(cks)/4,<;check size> |
|||
189: ddw %ofs,<;offset> |
|||
190:;; generate the translate table, if requested |
|||
191: if nul skf |
|||
192:xlt&dn equ 0 ;no xlate table |
|||
193: else |
|||
194: if skf = 0 |
|||
195:xlt&dn equ 0 ;no xlate table |
|||
196: else |
|||
197:;; generate the translate table |
|||
198:nxtsec set 0 ;;next sector to fill |
|||
199:nxtbas set 0 ;;moves by one on overflow |
|||
200: gcd %sectors,skf |
|||
201:;; gcdn = gcd(sectors,skew) |
|||
202:neltst set sectors/gcdn |
|||
203:;; neltst is number of elements to generate |
|||
204:;; before we overlap previous elements |
|||
205:nelts set neltst ;;counter |
|||
206:xlt&dn equ $ ;;translate table |
|||
207: rept sectors ;;once for each sector |
|||
208: if sectors<256 |
|||
209: ddb %nxtsec+(fsc) |
|||
210: else |
|||
211: ddw %nxtsec+(fsc) |
|||
212: endif |
|||
213:nxtsec set nxtsec+(skf) |
|||
214: if nxtsec>=sectors |
|||
215:nxtsec set nxtsec-sectors |
|||
216: endif |
|||
217:nelts set nelts-1 |
|||
218: if nelts = 0 |
|||
219:nxtbas set nxtbas+1 |
|||
220:nxtsec set nxtbas |
|||
221:nelts set neltst |
|||
222: endif |
|||
223: endm |
|||
224: endif ;;end of nul fac test |
|||
225: endif ;;end of nul bls test |
|||
226: endm |
|||
227:; |
|||
228:defds macro lab,space |
|||
229:lab: ds space |
|||
230: endm |
|||
231:; |
|||
232:lds macro lb,dn,val |
|||
233: defds lb&dn,%val&dn |
|||
234: endm |
|||
235:; |
|||
236:endef macro |
|||
237:;; generate the necessary ram data areas |
|||
238:begdat equ $ |
|||
239:dirbuf: ds 128 ;directory access buffer |
|||
240:dsknxt set 0 |
|||
241: rept ndisks ;;once for each disk |
|||
242: lds alv,%dsknxt,als |
|||
243: lds csv,%dsknxt,ccs |
|||
244:dsknxt set dsknxt+1 |
|||
245: endm |
|||
246:enddat equ $ |
|||
247:datsiz equ $-begdat |
|||
248:;; db 0 at this point forces hex record |
|||
249: endm |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.nx appg |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,475 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft G-% |
|||
Appendix G |
|||
|
|||
Blocking and Deblocking Algorithms |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 ; |
|||
2 ; |
|||
3 ; sector deblocking algorithms for cp/m 2.0 |
|||
4 ; |
|||
5 ; |
|||
6 ; |
|||
7 ; utility macro to compute sector mask |
|||
8 smask macro hblk |
|||
9 ;; compute log2(hblk), return @x as result |
|||
10 ;; (2 ** @x = hblk on return) |
|||
11 @y set hblk |
|||
12 @x set 0 |
|||
13 ;; count right shifts of @y until = 1 |
|||
14 rept 8 |
|||
15 if @y = 1 |
|||
16 exitm |
|||
17 endif |
|||
18 ;; @y is not 1, shift right one position |
|||
19 @y set @y shr 1 |
|||
20 @x set @x + 1 |
|||
21 endm |
|||
22 endm |
|||
23 ; |
|||
24 ; |
|||
25 ; |
|||
26 ; cp/m to host disk constants |
|||
27 ; |
|||
28 ; |
|||
29 0800 = blksiz equ 2048 ;cp/m allocation size |
|||
30 0200 = hstsiz equ 512 ;host disk sector size |
|||
31 0014 = hstspt equ 20 ;host disk sectors/trk |
|||
32 0004 = hstblk equ hstsiz/128 ;cp/m sects/host buff |
|||
33 0050 = cpmspt equ hstblk * hstspt ;cp/m sectors/track |
|||
34 0003 = secmsk equ hstblk-1 ;sector mask |
|||
35 smask hstblk ;compute sector mask |
|||
36 0002 = secshf equ @x ;log2(hstblk) |
|||
37 ; |
|||
38 ; |
|||
39 ; |
|||
40 ; bdos constants on entry to write |
|||
41 ; |
|||
42 ; |
|||
43 0000 = wrall equ 0 ;write to allocated |
|||
44 0001 = wrdir equ 1 ;write to directory |
|||
45 0002 = wrual equ 2 ;write to unallocated |
|||
46 ; |
|||
47 ; |
|||
48 ; |
|||
49 ; the bdos entry points given below show the |
|||
50 ; code which is relevant to deblocking only. |
|||
51 ; |
|||
52 ; |
|||
53 ; |
|||
54 ; diskdef macro, or hand coded tables go here |
|||
55 0000 = dpbase equ $ ;disk param block base |
|||
56 ; |
|||
57 boot: |
|||
58 wboot: |
|||
59 ;enter here on system boot to initialize |
|||
60 0000 af xra a ;0 to accumulator |
|||
61 0001 326a01 sta hstact ;host buffer inactive |
|||
62 0004 326c01 sta unacnt ;clear unalloc count |
|||
63 0007 c9 ret |
|||
64 ; |
|||
65 home: |
|||
66 ;home the selected disk |
|||
67 home: |
|||
68 0008 3a6b01 lda hstwrt ;check for pending write |
|||
69 000b b7 ora a |
|||
70 000c c21200 jnz homed |
|||
71 000f 326a01 sta hstact ;clear host active flag |
|||
72 homed: |
|||
73 0012 c9 ret |
|||
74 ; |
|||
75 seldsk: |
|||
76 ;select disk |
|||
77 0013 79 mov a,c ;selected disk number |
|||
78 0014 326101 sta sekdsk ;seek disk number |
|||
79 0017 6f mov l,a ;disk number to hl |
|||
80 0018 2600 mvi h,0 |
|||
81 rept 4 ;multiply by 16 |
|||
82 dad h |
|||
83 endm |
|||
84 001a+29 dad h |
|||
85 001b+29 dad h |
|||
86 001c+29 dad h |
|||
87 001d+29 dad h |
|||
88 001e 110000 lxi d,dpbase ;base of parm block |
|||
89 0021 19 dad d ;hl=.dpb(curdsk) |
|||
90 0022 c9 ret |
|||
91 ; |
|||
92 settrk: |
|||
93 ;set track given by registers bc |
|||
94 0023 60 mov h,b |
|||
95 0024 69 mov l,c |
|||
96 0025 226201 shld sektrk ;track to seek |
|||
97 0028 c9 ret |
|||
98 ; |
|||
99 setsec: |
|||
100 ;set sector given by register c |
|||
101 0029 79 mov a,c |
|||
102 002a 326401 sta seksec ;sector to seek |
|||
103 002d c9 ret |
|||
104 ; |
|||
105 setdma: |
|||
106 ;set dma address given by bc |
|||
107 002e 60 mov h,b |
|||
108 002f 69 mov l,c |
|||
109 0030 227501 shld dmaadr |
|||
110 0033 c9 ret |
|||
111 ; |
|||
112 sectran: |
|||
113 ;translate sector number bc |
|||
114 0034 60 mov h,b |
|||
115 0035 69 mov l,c |
|||
116 0036 c9 ret |
|||
117 ; |
|||
118 ; |
|||
119 ; |
|||
120 ; the read entry point takes the place of |
|||
121 ; the previous bios definition for read. |
|||
122 ; |
|||
123 ; |
|||
124 read: |
|||
125 ;read the selected cp/m sector |
|||
126 0037 af xra a |
|||
127 0038 326c01 sta unacnt |
|||
128 003b 3e01 mvi a,1 |
|||
129 003d 327301 sta readop ;read operation |
|||
130 0040 327201 sta rsflag ;must read data |
|||
131 0043 3e02 mvi a,wrual |
|||
132 0045 327401 sta wrtype ;treat as unalloc |
|||
133 0048 c3b600 jmp rwoper ;to perform the read |
|||
134 ; |
|||
135 ; |
|||
136 ; |
|||
137 ; the write entry point takes the place of |
|||
138 ; the previous bios definition for write. |
|||
139 ; |
|||
140 ; |
|||
141 write: |
|||
142 ;write the selected cp/m sector |
|||
143 004b af xra a ;0 to accumulator |
|||
144 004c 327301 sta readop ;not a read operation |
|||
145 004f 79 mov a,c ;write type in c |
|||
146 0050 327401 sta wrtype |
|||
147 0053 fe02 cpi wrual ;write unallocated? |
|||
148 0050 c26f00 jnz chkuna ;check for unalloc |
|||
149 ; |
|||
150 ; write to unallocated, set parameters |
|||
151 0058 3e10 mvi a,blksiz/128 ;next unalloc recs |
|||
152 005a 326c01 sta unacnt |
|||
153 005d 3a6101 lda sekdsk ;disk to seek |
|||
154 0060 326d01 sta unadsk ;unadsk = sekdsk |
|||
155 0063 2a6201 lhld settrk |
|||
156 0066 226e01 shld unatrk ;unatrk = sectrk |
|||
157 0069 3a6401 lda seksec |
|||
158 006c 327001 sta unasec ;unasec = seksec |
|||
159 ; |
|||
160 chkuna: |
|||
161 ;check for write to unallocated sector |
|||
162 006f 3a6c01 lda unacnt ;any unalloc remain? |
|||
163 0072 b7 ora a |
|||
164 0073 caae00 jz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
165 ; |
|||
166 ; more unallocated records remain |
|||
167 0076 3d dcr a ;unacnt = unacnt-1 |
|||
168 0077 326c01 sta unacnt |
|||
169 007a 3a6101 lda sekdsk ;same disk? |
|||
170 007d 216d01 lxi h,unadsk |
|||
171 0080 be cmp m ;sekdsk = unadsk? |
|||
172 0081 c2ae00 jnz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
173 ; |
|||
174 ; disks are the same |
|||
175 0084 216e01 lxi h,unatrk |
|||
176 0087 cd5301 call sektrkcmp ;saektrk = unatrk? |
|||
177 008a c2ae00 jnz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
178 ; |
|||
179 ; tracks are the same |
|||
180 008d 3a6401 lda seksec ;same sector? |
|||
181 0090 217001 lxi h,unasec |
|||
182 0093 be cmp m ;seksec = unasec? |
|||
183 0094 c2ae00 jnz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
184 ; |
|||
185 ; match, move to next sector for future ref |
|||
186 0097 34 inr m ;unasec = unasec+1 |
|||
187 0098 7e mov a,m ;end of track? |
|||
188 0099 fe50 cpi cpmspt ;count cp/m sectors |
|||
189 009b daa700 jc noovf ;skip if no overflow |
|||
190 ; |
|||
191 ; overflow to next track |
|||
192 009e 3600 mvi m,o ;unasec = 0 |
|||
193 00a0 2a6e01 lhld unatrk |
|||
194 00a3 23 inx h |
|||
195 00a4 226e01 shld unatrk ;unatrk = unatrk+1 |
|||
196 ; |
|||
197 noovf: |
|||
198 ;match found, mark as unnecessary read |
|||
199 00a7 af xra a ;0 to accumulator |
|||
200 00ab 327201 sta rsflag ;rsflag = 0 |
|||
201 00ab c3b600 jmp rwoper ;to perform the write |
|||
202 ; |
|||
203 alloc: |
|||
204 ;not an unallocated record, requires pre-read |
|||
205 00ae af xra a ;0 to accum |
|||
206 00af 326c01 sta unacnt ;unacnt = 0 |
|||
207 00b2 3c inr a ;1 to accum |
|||
208 00b3 327201 sta rsflag = 1 ;rsflag = 1 |
|||
209 ; |
|||
210 ; |
|||
211 ; |
|||
212 ; common code for read and write follows |
|||
213 ; |
|||
214 ; |
|||
215 rwoper: |
|||
216 ;enter here to perform the read-write |
|||
217 00b6 af xra a ;zero to accum |
|||
218 00b7 327101 sta erflag ;no errors (yet) |
|||
219 00ba 3a6401 lda seksec ;compute host sector |
|||
220 rept secshf |
|||
221 ora a ;carry = 0 |
|||
222 rar ;shift right |
|||
223 endm |
|||
224 00bd+b7 ora a ;carry = 0 |
|||
225 00be+1f rar ;shift right |
|||
226 00bf+b7 ora a ;carry = 0 |
|||
227 00c0+1f rar ;shift right |
|||
228 00c1 326901 sta sekhst ;host sector to seek |
|||
229 ; |
|||
230 ; active host sector? |
|||
231 00c4 216a01 lxi h,hstact ;host active flag |
|||
232 00c7 7e mov a,m |
|||
233 00c8 3601 mvi m,1 ;always becomes 1 |
|||
234 00ca b7 ora a ;was it already? |
|||
235 00cb caf200 jz filhst ;fill host if not |
|||
236 ; |
|||
237 ; host buffer active, same as seek buffer? |
|||
238 00ce 3a6101 lda sekdsk |
|||
239 00d1 216501 lxi h,hstdsk ;same disk? |
|||
240 00d4 be cmp m ;sekdsk = hstdsk? |
|||
241 00d5 c2eb00 jnz nomatch |
|||
242 ; |
|||
243 ; same disk, same track? |
|||
244 00d8 216601 lxi h,hsttrk |
|||
245 00db cd5301 call sektrkcmp ;sektrk = hsttrk? |
|||
246 00de c2eb00 jnz nomatch |
|||
247 ; |
|||
248 ; same disk, same track, same buffer? |
|||
249 00e1 3a6901 lda sekhst |
|||
250 00e4 216801 lxi h,hstsec ;sekhst = hstsec? |
|||
251 00e7 be cmp m |
|||
252 00e8 ca0f01 jz match ;skip if match |
|||
253 ; |
|||
254 nomatch: |
|||
255 ;proper disk, but not correct sector |
|||
256 00eb 3a6b01 lda hstwrt ;host written? |
|||
257 00ee b7 ora a |
|||
258 00ef c45f01 cnz writehst ;clear host buff |
|||
259 ; |
|||
260 filhst: |
|||
261 ;may have to fill the host buffer |
|||
262 00f2 3a6101 lda sekdsk |
|||
263 00f5 326501 sta hstdsk |
|||
264 00f8 2a6201 lhld sektrk |
|||
265 00fb 226601 shld hsttrk |
|||
266 00fe 3a6901 lda sekhst |
|||
267 0101 326801 sta hstsec |
|||
268 0104 3a7201 lda rsflag ;need to read? |
|||
269 0107 b7 ora a |
|||
270 0108 c46001 cnz readhst ;yes, if 1 |
|||
271 010b af xra a ;0 to accum |
|||
272 010c 326b01 sta hstwrt ;no pending write |
|||
273 ; |
|||
274 match: |
|||
275 ;copy data to or from buffer |
|||
276 010f 3a6401 lda seksec ;mask buffer number |
|||
277 0112 e603 ani secmsk ;least signif bits |
|||
278 0114 6f mov l,a ;ready to shift |
|||
279 0115 2600 mvi h,0 ;double count |
|||
280 rept 7 ;shift left 7 |
|||
281 dad h |
|||
282 endm |
|||
283 0117+29 dad h |
|||
284 0118+29 dad h |
|||
285 0119+29 dad h |
|||
286 011a+29 dad h |
|||
287 011b+29 dad h |
|||
288 011c+29 dad h |
|||
289 011d+29 dad h |
|||
290 ; hl has relative host buffer address |
|||
291 011e 117701 lxi d,hstbuf |
|||
292 0121 19 dad d ;hl = host address |
|||
293 0122 eb xchg ;now in de |
|||
294 0123 2a7501 lhld dmaadr ;get/put cp/m data |
|||
295 0126 0e80 mvi c,128 ;length of move |
|||
296 0128 3a7301 lda readop ;which way? |
|||
297 012b b7 ora a |
|||
298 012c c23501 jnz rwmove ;skip if read |
|||
299 ; |
|||
300 ; write operation, mark and switch direction |
|||
301 012f 3e01 mvi a,1 |
|||
302 0131 326b01 sta hstwrt ;hstwrt = 1 |
|||
303 0134 eb xchg ;source/dest swap |
|||
304 ; |
|||
305 rwmove: |
|||
306 ;c initially 128, de is source, hl is dest |
|||
307 0135 1a ldax d ;source character |
|||
308 0136 13 inx d |
|||
309 0137 77 mov m,a ;to dest |
|||
310 0138 23 inx h |
|||
311 0139 od dcr c ;loop 128 times |
|||
312 013a c23501 jnz rwmove |
|||
313 ; |
|||
314 ; data has been moved to/from host buffer |
|||
315 013d 3a7401 lda wrtype ;write type |
|||
316 0140 fe01 cpi wrdir ;to directory? |
|||
317 0142 3a7101 lda erflag ;in case of errors |
|||
318 0145 c0 rnz ;no further processing |
|||
319 ; |
|||
320 ; clear host buffer for directory write |
|||
321 0146 b7 ora a ;errors? |
|||
322 0147 c0 rnz ;skip if so |
|||
323 0148 af xra a ;0 to accum |
|||
324 0149 326b01 sta hstwrt ;buffer written |
|||
325 014c cd5f01 call writehst |
|||
326 014f 3a7101 lda erflag |
|||
327 0152 c9 |
|||
328 ; |
|||
329 ; |
|||
330 ; |
|||
331 ; utility subroutine for 16-bit compare |
|||
332 ; |
|||
333 ; |
|||
334 sektrkcmp: |
|||
335 ;hl = .unatrk or .hsttrk, compare with sektrk |
|||
336 0153 eb xchg |
|||
337 0154 216201 lxi h,sektrk |
|||
338 0157 1a ldax d ;low byte compare |
|||
339 0158 be cmp m ;same? |
|||
340 0159 c0 rnz ;return if not |
|||
341 ; low bytes equal, test high 1s |
|||
342 015a 13 inx d |
|||
343 015b 23 inx h |
|||
344 015c 1a ldax d |
|||
345 015d be cmp m ;sets flags |
|||
346 015e c9 ret |
|||
347 ; |
|||
348 ; |
|||
349 ; |
|||
350 ; writehst performs the physical write to |
|||
351 ; the host disk, readhst reads the physical |
|||
352 ; disk. |
|||
353 ; |
|||
354 ; |
|||
355 writehst: |
|||
356 ;hstdsk = host disk #, hsttrk = host track #, |
|||
357 ;hstsec = host sect #. write "hstsiz" bytes |
|||
358 ;from hstbuf and return error flag in erflag. |
|||
359 ;return erflag non-zero if error |
|||
360 015f c9 ret |
|||
361 ; |
|||
362 readhst: |
|||
363 ;hstdsk = host disk #, hsttrk = host track #, |
|||
364 ;hstsec = host sect #. read "hstsiz" bytes |
|||
365 ;into hstbuf and return error flag in erflag. |
|||
366 0160 c9 ret |
|||
367 ; |
|||
368 ; |
|||
369 ; |
|||
370 ; uninitialized ram data areas |
|||
371 ; |
|||
372 ; |
|||
373 ; |
|||
374 0161 sekdsk: ds 1 ;seek disk number |
|||
375 0162 sektrk: ds 2 ;seek track number |
|||
376 0164 seksec: ds 1 ;seek sector number |
|||
377 ; |
|||
378 0165 hstdsk: ds 1 ;host disk number |
|||
379 0166 hsttrk: ds 2 ;host track number |
|||
380 0168 hstsec: ds 1 ;host sector number |
|||
381 ; |
|||
382 0169 sekhst: ds 1 ;seek shr secshf |
|||
383 016a hstact: ds 1 ;host active flag |
|||
384 016b hstwrt: ds 1 ;host written flag |
|||
385 ; |
|||
386 016c unacnt: ds 1 ;unalloc rec cnt |
|||
387 016d unadsk: ds 1 ;last unalloc disk |
|||
388 016e unatrk: ds 2 ;last unalloc track |
|||
389 0170 unasec: ds 1 ;last unalloc sector |
|||
390 ; |
|||
391 0171 erflag: ds 1 ;error reporting |
|||
392 0172 rsflag: ds 1 ;read sector flag |
|||
393 0173 readop: ds 1 ;1 if read operation |
|||
394 0174 wrtype: ds 1 ;write operation type |
|||
395 0175 dmaadr: ds 2 ;last dma address |
|||
396 0177 hstbuf: ds hstsiz ;host buffer |
|||
397 ; |
|||
398 ; |
|||
399 ; |
|||
400 ; the endef macro invocation goes here |
|||
401 ; |
|||
402 ; |
|||
403 0377 end |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
alloc 00ae 164 172 177 183 203# |
|||
blksiz 0800 29# 151 |
|||
boot 0000 57# |
|||
chkuna 006f 148 160# |
|||
cpmspt 0050 33# 188 |
|||
dmaadr 0175 109 294 395# |
|||
dpbase 0000 55# 88 |
|||
erflag 0171 218 317 326 391# |
|||
filhst 00f2 235 260# |
|||
home 0008 65# 67# |
|||
homed 0012 70 72# |
|||
hstact 016a 61 71 231 383# |
|||
hstblk 0004 32# 33 34 35 |
|||
hstbuf 0177 291 396# |
|||
hstdsk 0165 239 263 378# |
|||
hstsec 0168 250 267 380# |
|||
hstsiz 0200 30# 32 396 |
|||
hstspt 0014 31# 33 |
|||
hsttrk 0166 244 265 379# |
|||
hstwrt 016b 68 256 272 302 324 384# |
|||
match 010fl 252 274# |
|||
nomatch 00eb 241 246 254# |
|||
noovf 00a7 189 197# |
|||
read 0037 124# |
|||
readhst 0160 270 362# |
|||
readop 0173 129 144 296 393# |
|||
rsflag 0172 130 200 208 268 392# |
|||
rwmove 0135 298 305# 312 |
|||
rwoper 00b6 133 201 215# |
|||
secmsk 0003 34# 277 |
|||
secshf 0002 36# 220 |
|||
sectran 0034 112# |
|||
sekdsk 0161 78 153 169 238 262 374# |
|||
sekhst 0169 228 249 266 382# |
|||
seksec 0164 102 157 180 219 276 376# |
|||
sektrk 0162 96 155 264 337 375# |
|||
sektrkcmp 0153 176 245 334# |
|||
seldsk 0013 75# |
|||
setdma 002e 105# |
|||
setsec 0029 99# |
|||
settrk 0023 92# |
|||
unacnt 016c 62 127 152 162 168 206 386# |
|||
unadsk 016d 154 170 387# |
|||
unasec 0170 158 181 389# |
|||
unatrk 016e 156 175 193 195 388# |
|||
wboot 0000 58# |
|||
wrall 0000 43# |
|||
wrdir 0001 44# 316 |
|||
write 004b 141# |
|||
writehst 015f 258 325 355# |
|||
wrtype 0174 132 146 315 394# |
|||
wrual 0002 45# 131 147 |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,904 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft H-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc H Glossary |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendix H |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Glossary |
|||
.qs |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual H Glossary |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
address: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Number representing the location of a byte in memory. Within |
|||
CP/M there are two kinds of addresses: logical and physical. A |
|||
physical address refers to an absolute and unique location within |
|||
the computer's memory space. A logical address refers to the |
|||
offset or displacement of a byte in relation to a base location. |
|||
A standard CP/M program is loaded at address 0100H, the base |
|||
value; the first instruction of a program has a physical address |
|||
of 0100H and a relative address or offset of OH. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
allocation vector (ALV): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
An allocation vector is maintained in the BIOS for each logged-in |
|||
disk drive. A vector consists of a string of bits, one for each |
|||
block on the drive. The bit corresponding to a particular block |
|||
is set to one when the block has been allocated and to zero |
|||
otherwise. The first two bytes of this vector are initialized |
|||
with the bytes AL0 and AL1 on, thus allocating the directory |
|||
blocks. CP/M Function 27 returns the allocation vector address. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
AL0, AL1: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Two bytes in the disk parameter block that reserve data blocks |
|||
for the directory. These two bytes are copied into the first two |
|||
bytes of the allocation vector when a drive is logged in. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
allocation vector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ALV: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
allocation vector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ambiguous filename: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Filename that contains either of the CP/M wildcard characters, ? |
|||
or *, in the primary filename, filetype, or both. When you |
|||
replace characters in a filename with these wildcard characters, |
|||
you create an ambiguous filename and can easily reference more |
|||
than one CP/M file in a single command line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
American Standard Code for Information Interchange: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASCII. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
applications program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program designed to solve a specific problem. Typical |
|||
applications programs are business accounting packages, word |
|||
processing (editing) programs and mailing list programs. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
archive attribute: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File attribute controlled by the high-order bit of the t3 byte |
|||
(FCB+11) in a directory element. This attribute is set if the |
|||
file has been archived. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
argument: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Symbol, usually a letter, indicating a place into which you can |
|||
substitute a number, letter, or name to give an appropriate |
|||
meaning to the formula in question. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASCII: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a |
|||
standard set of seven-bit numeric character codes used to |
|||
represent characters in memory. Each character requires one byte |
|||
of memory with the high-order bit usually set to zero. |
|||
Characters can be numbers, letters, and symbols. An ASCII file can be |
|||
intelligibly displayed on the video screen or printed on paper. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
assembler: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program that translates assembly language into the binary machine |
|||
code. Assembly language is simply a set of mnemonics used to |
|||
designate the instruction set of the CPU. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
in Section 3 of this manual. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
back-up: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Copy of a disk or file made for safekeeping, or the creation of |
|||
the duplicate disk or file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
BDOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BDOS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System. The BDOS module of the CP/M |
|||
operating system provides an interface for a user program to the |
|||
operating system. This interface is in the form of a set of |
|||
function calls which may be made to the BDOS through calls to |
|||
location 0005H in page zero. The user program specifies the |
|||
number of the desired function in register C. User programs |
|||
running under CP/M should use BDOS functions for all I/O |
|||
operations to remain compatible with other CP/M systems and |
|||
future releases. The BDOS normally resides in high memory |
|||
directly below the BIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
bias: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Address value which when added to the origin address of your BIOS |
|||
module produces 1F80H, the address of the BIOS module in the |
|||
MOVCPM image. There is also a bias value that when added to the |
|||
BOOT module origin produces 0900H, the address of the BOOT module |
|||
in the MOVCPM image. You must use these bias values with the R |
|||
command under DDT or SID \ \ when you patch a CP/M system. If you do |
|||
not, the patched system may fail to function. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
binary: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Base 2 numbering system. A binary digit can have one of two |
|||
values: 0 or 1. Binary numbers are used in computers because |
|||
the hardware can most easily exhibit two states: off and on. |
|||
Generally, a bit in memory represents one binary digit. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Basic Input/Output System: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
BIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BIOS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Input/Output System. The BIOS is the only hardware- |
|||
dependent module of the CP/M system. It provides the BDOS with a |
|||
set of primitive I/O operations. The BIOS is an assembly |
|||
language module usually written by the user, hardware |
|||
manufacturer, or independent software vendor, and is the key to |
|||
CP/M's portability. The BIOS interfaces the CP/M system to its |
|||
hardware environment through a standardized jump table at the |
|||
front of the BIOS routine and through a set of disk parameter |
|||
tables which define the disk environment. Thus, the BIOS |
|||
provides CP/M with a completely table-driven I/O system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BIOS base: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Lowest address of the BIOS module in memory, that by definition |
|||
must be the first entry point in the BIOS jump table. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
bit: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Switch in memory that can be set to on (1) or off (0). Bits are |
|||
grouped into bytes, eight bits to a byte, which is the smallest |
|||
directly addressable unit in an Intel 8080 or Zilog Z80. By |
|||
common convention, the bits in a byte are numbered from right, 0 |
|||
for the low-order bit, to left, 7 for the high-order bit. Bit |
|||
values are often represented in hexadecimal notation by grouping |
|||
the bits from the low-order bit in groups of four. Each group of |
|||
four bits can have a value from 0 to 15 and thus can easily be |
|||
represented by one hexadecimal digit. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BLM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block mask. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
block: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic unit of disk space allocation. Each disk drive has a fixed |
|||
block size (BLS) defined in its disk parameter block in the BIOS. |
|||
A block can consist of 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, or 16K consecutive bytes. |
|||
Blocks are numbered relative to zero so that each block is unique |
|||
and has a byte displacement in a file equal to the block number |
|||
times the block size. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
block mask (BLM): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Byte value in the disk parameter block at DPB + 3. The block |
|||
mask is always one less than the number of 128 byte sectors that |
|||
are in one block. Note that BLM = (2 ** BSH) - 1. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
block shift (BSH): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 2. |
|||
Block shift and block mask (BLM) values are determined by the |
|||
block size (BLS). Note that BLM = (2 ** BSH) - 1. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
blocking & deblocking algorithm: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
In some disk subsystems the disk sector size is larger than 128 |
|||
bytes, usually 256, 512, 1024, or 2048 bytes. When the host |
|||
sector size is larger than 128 bytes, host sectors must be |
|||
buffered in memory and the 128-byte CP/M sectors must be blocked |
|||
and deblocked by adding an additional module, the blocking and |
|||
deblocking algorithm, between the BIOS disk I/O routines and the |
|||
actual disk I/O. The host sector size must be an even multiple |
|||
of 128 bytes for the algorithm to work correctly. The blocking |
|||
and deblocking algorithm allows the BDOS and BIOS to function |
|||
exactly as if the entire disk consisted only of 128-byte sectors, |
|||
as in the standard CP/M installation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BLS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Block size in bytes. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
boot: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Process of loading an operating system into memory. A boot |
|||
program is a small piece of code that is automatically executed |
|||
when you power-up or reset your computer. The boot program loads |
|||
the rest of the operating system into memory in a manner similar |
|||
to a person pulling himself up by his own bootstraps. This |
|||
process is sometimes called a cold boot or cold start. Bootstrap |
|||
pocedures vary from system to system. The boot program must be |
|||
customized for the memory size and hardware environment that the |
|||
operating system manages. Typically, the boot resides on the |
|||
first sector of the system tracks on your system disk. When |
|||
executed, the boot loads the remaining sectors of the system |
|||
tracks into high memory at the location for which the CP/M system |
|||
has been configured. Finally, the boot transfers execution to |
|||
the boot entry point in the BIOS jump table so that the system |
|||
can initialize itself. In this case, the boot program should be |
|||
placed at 900H in the SYSGEN image. Alternatively, the boot |
|||
program may be located in ROM. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
bootstrap: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
boot. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BSH: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block shift. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BTREE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
General purpose file access method that has become the standard |
|||
organization for indexes in large data base systems. BTREE |
|||
provides near optimum performance over the full range of file |
|||
operations, such as insertion, deletion, search, and search next. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
buffer: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Area of memory that temporarily stores data during the transfer |
|||
of information. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
built-in commands: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Commands that permanently reside in memory. They respond quickly |
|||
because they are not accessed from a disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
byte: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Unit of memory or disk storage containing eight bits. A byte can |
|||
represent a binary number between 0 and 255, and is the smallest |
|||
unit of memory that can be addressed directly in 8-bit CPUs such |
|||
as the Intel 8080 or Zilog Z80. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CCP: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Console Command Processor. The CCP is a module of the CP/M |
|||
operating system. It is loaded directly below the BDOS module |
|||
and interprets and executes commands typed by the console user. |
|||
Usually these commands are programs that the CCP loads and calls. |
|||
Upon completion, a command program may return control to the CCP |
|||
if it has not overwritten it. If it has, the program can reload |
|||
the CCP into memory by a warm boot operation initiated by either |
|||
a jump to zero, BDOS system reset (Function 0), or a cold boot. |
|||
Except for its location in high memory, the CCP works like any |
|||
other standard CP/M program; that is, it makes only BDOS function |
|||
calls for its I/O operations. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CCP base: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Lowest address of the CCP module in memory. This term sometimes |
|||
refers to the base of the CP/M system in memory, as the CCP is |
|||
normally the lowest CP/M module in high memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
checksum vector (CSV): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Contiguous data area in the BIOS, with one byte for each |
|||
directory sector to be checked, that is, CKS bytes. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CKS. \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A checksum vector is initialized and maintained for each logged-in |
|||
drive. Each directory access by the system results in a checksum |
|||
calculation that is compared with the one in the checksum vector. |
|||
If there is a discrepancy, the drive is set to Read-Only status. |
|||
This feature prevents the user from inadvertently switching disks |
|||
without logging in the new disk. If the new disk is not logged-in, |
|||
it is treated the same as the old one, and data on it might be |
|||
destroyed if writing is done. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
CKS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Number of directory records to be checked summed on directory |
|||
accesses. This is a parameter in the disk parameter block |
|||
located in the BIOS. If the value of CKS is zero, then no |
|||
directory records are checked. CKS is also a parameter in the |
|||
diskdef macro library, where it is the actual number of directory |
|||
elements to be checked rather than the number of directory |
|||
records. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
cold boot: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
boot. \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Cold boot also refers to a jump to the boot entry point in the |
|||
BIOS jump table. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
COM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Filetype for a CP/M command file. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
command file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M command line. In general, a CP/M command line has three |
|||
parts: the command keyword, command tail, and a carriage return. |
|||
To execute a command, enter a CP/M command line directly after |
|||
the CP/M prompt at the console and press the carriage return or |
|||
enter key. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Executable program file of filetype COM. A command file is a |
|||
machine language object module ready to be loaded and executed at |
|||
the absolute address of 0100H. To execute a command file, enter |
|||
its primary filename as the command keyword in a CP/M command |
|||
line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command keyword: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Name that identifies a CP/M command, usually the primary filename |
|||
of a file of type COM, or a built-in command. The command |
|||
keyword precedes the command tail and the carriage return in the |
|||
command line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command syntax: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Statement that defines the correct way to enter a command. The |
|||
correct structure generally includes the command keyword, the |
|||
command tail, and a carriage return. A syntax line usually |
|||
contains symbols that you should replace with actual values when |
|||
you enter the command. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command tail: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Part of a command that follows the command keyword in the command |
|||
line. The command tail can include a drive specification, a |
|||
filename and filetype, and options or parameters. Some |
|||
commands do not require a command tail. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CON: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Mnemonic that represents the CP/M console device. |
|||
For example, the CP/M command PIP CON:=TEST.SUB displays the |
|||
file TEST.SUB on the console device. The explanation of the STAT |
|||
command tells how to assign the logical device CON: to various |
|||
physical devices. \c |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
concatenate: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Name of the PIP operation that copies two or more separate files |
|||
into one new file in the the specified sequence. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
concurrency: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Execution of two processes or operations simultaneously. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CONIN: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that reads a character from the |
|||
console device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CONOUT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that sends a character to the |
|||
console device. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
console: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Primary input/output device. The console consists of a listing |
|||
device, such as a screen or teletype, and a keyboard through |
|||
which the user communicates with the operating system or |
|||
applications program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Console Command Processor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CCP. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CONST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that returns the status of the |
|||
console device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
control character: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Nonprinting character combination. CP/M interprets some control |
|||
characters as simple commands such as line editing functions. To |
|||
enter a control character, hold down the CONTROL key and strike |
|||
the specified character key. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Control Program for Microcomputers: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Control Program for Microcomputers. An operating system that |
|||
manages computer resources and provides a standard systems |
|||
interface to software written for a large variety of |
|||
microprocessor-based computer systems. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 1.4l compatibility: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
For a CP/M 2 system to be able to read correctly single-density |
|||
disks produced under a CP/M 1.4 system, the extent mask must be |
|||
zero and the block size 1K. This is because under CP/M 2 an FCB |
|||
may contain more than one extent. The number of extents that may |
|||
be contained by an FCB is EXM+1. The issue of CP/M 1.4 |
|||
compatibility also concerns random file I/O. To perform random |
|||
file I/O under CP/M 1.4, you must maintain an FCB for each extent |
|||
of the file. This scheme is upward compatible with CP/M 2 for |
|||
files not exceeding 512K bytes, the largest file size supported |
|||
under CP/M 1.4. If you wish to implement random I/O for files |
|||
larger than 512K bytes under CP/M 2, you must use the random read |
|||
and random write functions, BDOS functions 33, 34, and 36. In |
|||
this case, only one FCB is used, and if CP/M 1.4 compatiblity is |
|||
required, the program must use the return version number |
|||
function, BDOS Function 12, to determine which method to employ. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M prompt: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Characters that indicate that CP/M is ready to execute your next |
|||
command. The CP/M prompt consists of an upper-case letter, A-P, |
|||
followed by a > character; for example, A>. The letter |
|||
designates which drive is currently logged in as the default |
|||
drive. CP/M will search this drive for the command file |
|||
specified, unless the command is a built-in command or prefaced |
|||
by a select drive command: for example, B:STAT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/NET: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Digital Research network operating system enabling microcomputers |
|||
to obtain access to common resources via a network. CP/NET |
|||
consists of MP/M masters and CP/M slaves with a network interface |
|||
between them. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CSV: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
checksum vector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
cursor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One-character symbol that can appear anywhere on the console |
|||
screen. The cursor indicates the position where the next |
|||
keystroke at the console will have an effect. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
data file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File containing information that will be processed by a program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
deblocking: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
blocking & deblocking algorithm. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
default: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Currently selected disk drive and user number. Any command that |
|||
does not specify a disk drive or a user number references the |
|||
default disk drive and user number. When CP/M is first invoked, |
|||
the default disk drive is drive A, and the default user number is |
|||
0. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
default buffer: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Default 128-byte buffer maintained at 0080H in page zero. When |
|||
the CCP loads a COM file, this buffer is initialized to the |
|||
command tail; that is, any characters typed after the COM file |
|||
name are loaded into the buffer. The first byte at 0080H |
|||
contains the length of the command tail, while the command tail |
|||
itself begins at 0081H. The command tail is terminated by a byte |
|||
containing a binary zero value. The I command under DDT and SID |
|||
initializes this buffer in the same way as the CCP. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
default FCB: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Two default FCBs are maintained by the CCP at 005CH and 006CH in |
|||
page zero. The first default FCB is initialized from the first |
|||
delimited field in the command tail. The second default FCB |
|||
is initialized from the next field in the command tail. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
delimiter: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Special characters that separate different items in a command |
|||
line; for example, a colon separates the drive specification from |
|||
the filename. The CCP recognizes the following characters as |
|||
delimiters: . : = ; < > _, blank, and carriage return. Several |
|||
CP/M commands also treat the following as delimiter characters: |
|||
, [ ] ( ) $. It is advisable to avoid the use of delimiter |
|||
characters and lower-case characters in CP/M filenames. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library that specifies the number |
|||
of directory elements on the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR attribute: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File attribute. A file with the DIR attribute can be displayed |
|||
by a DIR command. The file can be accessed from the default user |
|||
number and drive only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIRBUF: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
128-byte scratchpad area for directory operations, |
|||
usually located at the end of the BIOS. DIRBUF is used by the |
|||
BDOS during its directory operations. DIRBUF also refers to the |
|||
two-byte address of this scratchpad buffer in the disk parameter |
|||
header at DPbase + 8 bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
directory: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Portion of a disk that contains entries for each file on the |
|||
disk. In response to the DIR command, CP/M displays the |
|||
filenames stored in the directory. The directory also contains |
|||
the locations of the blocks allocated to the files. Each file |
|||
directory element is in the form of a 32-byte FCB, although one |
|||
file can have several elements, depending on its size. The |
|||
maximum number of directory elements supported is specified by |
|||
the drive's disk parameter block value for DRM. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
directory element: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data structure. Each file on a disk has one or more 32-byte |
|||
directory elements associated with it. There are four directory |
|||
elements per directory sector. Directory elements can also be |
|||
referred to as directory FCBs. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
directory entry: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File entry displayed by the DIR command. Sometimes this term |
|||
refers to a physical directory element. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk, diskette: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Magnetic media used for mass storage in a computer system. |
|||
Programs and data are recorded on the disk in the same way music |
|||
can be recorded on cassette tape. The CP/M operating system must |
|||
be initially loaded from disk when the computer is turned on. |
|||
Diskette refers to smaller capacity removable floppy diskettes, |
|||
while disk may refer to either a diskette, removable cartridge |
|||
disk, or fixed hard disk. Hard disk capacities range from five |
|||
to several hundred megabytes of storage. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
diskdef macro library: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Library of code that when used with MAC, the Digital Research |
|||
macro assembler, creates disk definition tables such as the DPB |
|||
and DPH automatically. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk drive: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Peripheral device that reads and writes information on disk. |
|||
CP/M assigns a letter to each drive under its |
|||
control. For example, CP/M may refer to the drives in a |
|||
four-drive system as A, B, C, and D. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter block (DPB): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data structure referenced by one or more disk parameter headers. |
|||
The disk parameter block defines disk characteristics in the |
|||
fields listed below: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
SPT is the total number of sectors per track. |
|||
BSH is the data allocation block shift factor. |
|||
BLM is the data allocation block mask. |
|||
EXM is the extent mask determined by BLS and DSM. |
|||
DSM is the maximum data block number. |
|||
DRM is the maximum number of directory entries--1. |
|||
AL0 reserves directory blocks. |
|||
AL1 reserves directory blocks. |
|||
CKS is the number of directory sectors check summed. |
|||
OFF is the number of reserved system tracks. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The address of the disk parameter block is located in the disk |
|||
parameter header at DPbase +0AH. CP/M Function 31 returns the |
|||
DPB address. Drives with the same characteristics can use the |
|||
same disk parameter header, and thus the same DPB. However, |
|||
drives with different characteristics must each have their own |
|||
disk parameter header and disk parameter blocks. When the BDOS |
|||
calls the SELDSK entry point in the BIOS, SELDSK must return the |
|||
address of the drive's disk parameter header in register HL. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter header (DPH): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data structure that contains information about the disk drive and |
|||
provides a scratchpad area for certain BDOS operations. The disk |
|||
parameter header contains six bytes of scratchpad area for the |
|||
BDOS, and the following five 2-byte parameters: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
XLT is the sector translation table address. |
|||
DIRBUF is the directory buffer address. |
|||
DPB is the disk parameter block address. |
|||
CSV is the checksum vector address. |
|||
ALV is the allocation vector address. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Given n disk drives, the disk parameter headers are arranged in a |
|||
table whose first row of 16 bytes corresponds to drive 0, with |
|||
the last row corresponding to drive n-1. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DKS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library specifying the number of |
|||
data blocks on the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DMA: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Direct Memory Access. DMA is a method of transferring data from |
|||
the disk into memory directly. In a CP/M system, the BDOS calls |
|||
the BIOS entry point READ to read a sector from the disk into the |
|||
currently selected DMA address. The DMA address must be the |
|||
address of a 128-byte buffer in memory, either the default buffer |
|||
at 0080H in page zero, or a user-assigned buffer in the TPA. |
|||
Similarly, the BDOS calls the BIOS entry point WRITE to write the |
|||
record at the current DMA address to the disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DN: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library specifying the logical |
|||
drive number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DPB: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DPH: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter header. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DRM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
2-byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 7. DRM is |
|||
one less than the total number of directory entries allowed for |
|||
the drive. This value is related to DPB bytes AL0 and AL1, which |
|||
allocates up to 16 blocks for directory entries. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DSM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
2-byte parameter of the disk parameter block at DPB + 5. DSM is |
|||
the maximum data block number supported by the drive. The |
|||
product BLS times (DSM+1) is the total number of bytes held by |
|||
the drive. This must not exceed the capacity of the physical |
|||
disk less the reserved system tracks. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
editor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Utility program that creates and modifies text files. An editor |
|||
can be used for creation of documents or creation of code for |
|||
computer programs. The CP/M editor is invoked by typing the |
|||
command ED next to the system prompt on the console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
EX: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Extent number field in an FCB. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
executable: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Ready to be run by the computer. Executable code is a series of |
|||
instructions that can be carried out by the computer. For |
|||
example, the computer cannot execute names and addresses, but it |
|||
can execute a program that prints all those names and addresses |
|||
on mailing labels. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
execute a program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Start the processing of executable code. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
EXM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent mask. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
16K consecutive bytes in a file. Extents are numbered from 0 to |
|||
31. One extent can contain 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 blocks. EX is the |
|||
extent number field of an FCB and is a one-byte field at FCB + |
|||
12, where FCB labels the first byte in the FCB. Depending on the |
|||
block size (BLS) and the maximum data block number (DSM), an FCB |
|||
can contain 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 extents. The EX field is normally |
|||
set to 0 by the user but contains the current extent number |
|||
during file I/O. The term FCB folding describes FCBs containing |
|||
more than one extent. In CP/M version 1.4, each FCB contained |
|||
only one extent. Users attempting to perform random record I/O |
|||
and maintain CP/M 1.4 compatiblity should be aware of the |
|||
implications of this difference. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 1.4 compatibility. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent mask (EXM): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A byte parameter in the disk parameter block located at DPB + 3. |
|||
The value of EXM is determined by the block size (BLS) and |
|||
whether the maximum data block number (DSM) exceeds 255. There |
|||
are EXM + 1 extents per directory FCB. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
FCB: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
File Control Block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Collection of characters, instructions, or data that can be |
|||
referenced by a unique identifier. Files are usually stored on |
|||
various types of media, such as disk, or magnetic |
|||
tape. A CP/M file is identified by a file specification and |
|||
resides on disk as a collection of from zero to 65,536 records. |
|||
Each record is 128 bytes and can contain either binary or ASCII |
|||
data. Binary files contain bytes of data that can vary in value |
|||
from 0H to 0FFH. ASCII files contain sequences of character |
|||
codes delineated by a carriage return and line-feed combination; |
|||
normally byte values range from 0H to 7FH. The directory maps |
|||
the file as a series of physical blocks. Although files are |
|||
defined as a sequence of consecutive logical records, these |
|||
records can not reside in consecutive sectors on the disk. See |
|||
also \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block, directory, extent, record, \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
and \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector. |
|||
.qs |
|||
.nx apph2.tex |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,912 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual H Glossary |
|||
.sp |
|||
File Control Block (FCB): |
|||
Structure used for accessing files on disk. Contains the drive, |
|||
filename, filetype, and other information describing a file to be |
|||
accessed or created on the disk. A file control block consists |
|||
of 36 consecutive bytes specified by the user for file I/O |
|||
functions. FCB can also refer to a directory element in the |
|||
directory portion of the allocated disk space. These contain the |
|||
same first 32 bytes of the FCB, but lack the current record and |
|||
random record number bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
filename: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Name assigned to a file. A filename can include a primary |
|||
filename of one to eight characters; a filetype of zero to three characters. |
|||
A period separates the primary filename from the filetype. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
file specification: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Unique file identifier. A complete CP/M file specification |
|||
includes a disk drive specification followed by a colon, d:, a |
|||
primary filename of one to eight characters, a period, and a filetype of |
|||
zero to three characters. For example, b:example.tex is a complete CP/M |
|||
file specification. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
filetype: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Extension to a filename. A filetype can be from zero to three |
|||
characters and must be separated from the primary filename by a |
|||
period. A filetype can tell something about the file. Some |
|||
programs require that files to be processed have specific |
|||
filetypes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
floppy disk: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Flexible magnetic disk used to store information. Floppy disks |
|||
come in 5 1/4- and 8-inch diameters. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
FSC: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library specifying the first |
|||
physical sector number. This parameter is used to determine SPT |
|||
and build XLT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hard disk: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Rigid, platter-like, magnetic disk sealed in a container. A hard |
|||
disk stores more information than a floppy disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hardware: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Physical components of a computer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hexadecimal notation: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Notation for base 16 values using the decimal digits and letters |
|||
A, B, C, D, E, and F to represent the 16 digits. Hexadecimal |
|||
notation is often used to refer to binary numbers. A binary |
|||
number can be easily expressed as a hexadecimal value by taking |
|||
the bits in groups of 4, starting with the least significant bit, |
|||
and expressing each group as a hexadecimal digit, 0-F. Thus the |
|||
bit value 1011 becomes 0BH and 10110101 becomes 0B5H. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hex file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
ASCII-printable representation of a command, machine language, |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hex file format: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Absolute output of ASM and MAC for the Intel 8080 is a hex format |
|||
file, containing a sequence of absolute records that give a load |
|||
address and byte values to be stored, starting at the load |
|||
address. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
HOME: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point which sets the disk head of the currently |
|||
selected drive to the track zero position. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
host: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Physical characteristics of a hard disk drive in a system using |
|||
the blocking and deblocking algorithm. The term, host, helps |
|||
distinguish physical hardware characteristics from CP/M's logical |
|||
characteristics. For example, CP/M sectors are always 128 bytes, |
|||
although the host sector size can be a multiple of 128 bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
input: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data going into the computer, usually from an operator typing at |
|||
the terminal or by a program reading from the disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
input/output: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
I/O. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
interface: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Object that allows two independent systems to communicate with |
|||
each other, as an interface between hardware and software in a |
|||
microcomputer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
I/O: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Abbreviation for input/output. Usually refers to input/output |
|||
operations or routines handling the input and output of data in |
|||
the computer system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
IOBYTE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A one-byte field in page zero, currently at location 0003H, that |
|||
can support a logical-to-physical device mapping for I/O. |
|||
However, its implementation in your BIOS is purely optional and |
|||
might or might not be supported in a given CP/M system. The IOBYTE |
|||
is easily set using the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
STAT <logical device> = <physical device> |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
The CP/M logical devices are CON:, RDR:, PUN:, and LST:; each of |
|||
these can be assigned to one of four physical devices. The IOBYTE |
|||
can be initialized by the BOOT entry point of the BIOS and |
|||
interpreted by the BIOS I/O entry points CONST, CONIN, CONOUT, |
|||
LIST, PUNCH, and READER. Depending on the setting of the IOBYTE, |
|||
different I/O drivers can be selected by the BIOS. For example, |
|||
setting LST:=TTY: might cause LIST output to be directed to a |
|||
serial port, while setting LST:=LPT: causes LIST output to be |
|||
directed to a parallel port. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
K: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Abbreviation for kilobyte. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
kilobyte. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
keyword: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
command keyword. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
kilobyte (K): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
1024 bytes or 0400H bytes of memory. This is a standard unit of |
|||
memory. For example, the Intel 8080 supports up to 64K of memory |
|||
address space or 65,536 bytes. 1024 kilobytes equal one megabyte, |
|||
or over one million bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
linker: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Utility program used to combine relocatable object modules into |
|||
an absolute file ready for execution. For example, LINK-80 \ \ |
|||
creates either a COM or PRL file from relocatable REL files, such |
|||
as those produced by PL/I-80 \ \ . |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LIST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A BIOS entry point to a routine that sends a character to the |
|||
list device, usually a printer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
list device: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Device such as a printer onto which data can be listed or |
|||
printed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LISTST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that returns the ready status of |
|||
the list device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
loader: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Utility program that brings an absolute program image into memory |
|||
ready for execution under the operating system, or a utility used |
|||
to make such an image. For example, LOAD prepares an absolute |
|||
COM file from the assembler hex file output that is ready to be |
|||
executed under CP/M. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logged in: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Made known to the operating system, in reference to drives. A |
|||
drive is logged in when it is selected by the user or an |
|||
executing process. It remains selected or logged in until you |
|||
change disks in a floppy disk drive or enter CTRL-C at the |
|||
command level, or until a BDOS Function 0 is executed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logical: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Representation of something that might or might not be the same |
|||
in its actual physical form. For example, a hard disk can occupy |
|||
one physical drive, yet you can divide the available storage on |
|||
it to appear to the user as if it were in several different |
|||
drives. These apparent drives are the logical drives. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logical sector: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logical-to-physical sector translation table: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
XLT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LSC: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Diskdef macro library parameter specifying the last physical |
|||
sector number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Logical CP/M list device, usually a printer. The CP/M list |
|||
device is an output-only device referenced through the LIST and |
|||
LISTST entry points of the BIOS. The STAT command allows |
|||
assignment of LST: to one of the physical devices: TTY:, CRT:, |
|||
LPT:, or UL1:, provided these devices and the IOBYTE are |
|||
implemented in the LIST and LISTST entry points of your CP/M BIOS |
|||
module. The CP/NET command NETWORK allows assignment of LST: to |
|||
a list device on a network master. For example, PIP LST:=TEST.SUB |
|||
prints the file TEST.SUB on the list device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
macro assembler: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Assembler code translator providing macro processing facilities. |
|||
Macro definitions allow groups of instructions to be stored and |
|||
substituted in the source program as the macro names are |
|||
encountered. Definitions and invocations can be nested and macro |
|||
parameters can be formed to pass arbitrary strings of text to a |
|||
specific macro for substitution during expansion. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
megabyte: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Over one million bytes; 1024 kilobytes. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
byte, \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
and \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
kilobyte. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
microprocessor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Silicon chip that is the central processing unit (CPU) of the |
|||
microcomputer. The Intel 8080 and the Zilog Z80 are |
|||
microprocessors commonly used in CP/M systems. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
MOVCPM image: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Memory image of the CP/M system created by MOVCPM. This image |
|||
can be saved as a disk file using the SAVE command or placed on |
|||
the system tracks using the SYSGEN command without specifying a |
|||
source drive. This image varies, depending on the presence of a |
|||
one-sector or two-sector boot. If the boot is less than 128 |
|||
bytes (one sector), the boot begins at 0900H, the CP/M system at |
|||
0980H, and the BIOS at 1F80H. Otherwise, the boot is at 0900H, |
|||
the CP/M system at 1000H, and the BIOS at 2000H. In a CP/M 1.4 |
|||
system with a one-sector boot, the addresses are the same as for |
|||
the CP/M 2 system--except that the BIOS begins at 1E80H instead |
|||
of 1F80H. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
MP/M: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Multi-Programming Monitor control program. A microcomputer |
|||
operating system supporting multi-terminal access with multi- |
|||
programming at each terminal. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
multi-programming: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
The capability of initiating and executing more than one program |
|||
at a time. These programs, usually called processes, are time-shared, |
|||
each receiving a slice of CPU time on a round-robin |
|||
basis. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
concurrency. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
nibble: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One half of a byte, usually the high-order or low-order 4 bits in |
|||
a byte. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
OFF: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Two-byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 13 bytes. |
|||
This value specifies the number of reserved system tracks. The |
|||
disk directory begins in the first sector of track OFF. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
OFS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Diskdef macro library parameter specifying the number of reserved |
|||
system tracks. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
OFF. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
operating system: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Collection of programs that supervises the execution of other |
|||
programs and the management of computer resources. An operating |
|||
system provides an orderly input/output environment between the |
|||
computer and its peripheral devices. It enables user-written |
|||
programs to execute safely. An operating system standardizes the |
|||
use of computer resources for the programs running under it. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
option: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One of many parameters that can be part of a command tail. Use |
|||
options to specify additional conditions for a command's |
|||
execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
output: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data that is sent to the console, disk, or printer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
page: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
256 consecutive bytes in memory beginning on a page boundary, |
|||
whose base address is a multiple of 256 (100H) bytes. In hex |
|||
notation, pages always begin at an address with a least |
|||
significant byte of zero. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
page relocatable program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
PRL. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
page zero: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Memory region between 0000H and 0100H used to hold critical |
|||
system parameters. Page zero functions primarily as an interface |
|||
region between user programs and the CP/M BDOS module. Note that |
|||
in non-standard systems this region is the base page of the |
|||
system and represents the first 256 bytes of memory used by the |
|||
CP/M system and user programs running under it. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
parameter: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Value in the command tail that provides additional information |
|||
for the command. Technically, a parameter is a required element |
|||
of a command. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
peripheral devices: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Devices external to the CPU. For example, terminals, printers, |
|||
and disk drives are common peripheral devices that are not part |
|||
of the processor but are used in conjunction with it. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
physical: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Characteristic of computer components, generally hardware, that |
|||
actually exist. In programs, physical components can be |
|||
represented by logical components. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
primary filename: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
First 8 characters of a filename. The primary filename is a |
|||
unique name that helps the user identify the file contents. A |
|||
primary filename contains one to eight characters and can include any |
|||
letter or number and some special characters. The primary |
|||
filename follows the optional drive specification and precedes |
|||
the optional filetype. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
PRL: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Page relocatable program. A page relocatable program is stored |
|||
on disk with a PRL filetype. Page relocatable programs are |
|||
easily relocated to any page boundary and thus are suitable for |
|||
execution in a nonbanked MP/M system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Series of coded instructions that performs specific tasks when |
|||
executed by a computer. A program can be written in a |
|||
processor-specific language or a high-level language that can be |
|||
implemented on a number of different processors. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
prompt: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Any characters displayed on the video screen to help the user |
|||
decide what the next appropriate action is. A system prompt is a |
|||
special prompt displayed by the operating |
|||
system. The alphabetic character indicates the default drive. Some |
|||
applications programs have their own special prompts. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M prompt. |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
PUN: |
|||
Logical CP/M punch device. The punch device is an output-only |
|||
device accessed through the PUNCH entry point of the BIOS. In |
|||
certain implementations, PUN: can be a serial device such as a |
|||
modem. |
|||
.sp |
|||
PUNCH: |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that sends a character to the punch |
|||
device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
RDR: |
|||
Logical CP/M reader device. The reader device is an input-only |
|||
device accessed through the READER entry point in the BIOS. |
|||
See |
|||
PUN:. |
|||
.sp |
|||
READ: |
|||
Entry point in the BIOS to a routine that reads 128 bytes from |
|||
the currently selected drive, track, and sector into the current |
|||
DMA address. |
|||
.sp |
|||
READER: |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that reads the next |
|||
character from the currently assigned reader device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Read-Only (R/O): |
|||
Attribute that can be assigned to a disk file or a disk drive. |
|||
When assigned to a file, the Read-Only attribute allows you to |
|||
read from that file but not write to it. When assigned to a |
|||
drive, the Read-Only attribute allows you to read any file on the |
|||
disk, but prevents you from adding a new file, erasing or changing |
|||
a file, renaming a file, or writing on the disk. The STAT |
|||
command can set a file or a drive to Read-Only. Every file and |
|||
drive is either Read-Only or Read-Write. The default setting for |
|||
drives and files is Read-Write, but an error in resetting the |
|||
disk or changing media automatically sets the drive to Read-Only |
|||
until the error is corrected. See also \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ROM. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Read-Write (R/W): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Attribute that can be assigned to a disk file or a disk drive. |
|||
The Read-Write attribute allows you to read from and write to a |
|||
specific Read-Write file or to any file on a disk that is in a |
|||
drive set to Read-Write. A file or drive can be set to either |
|||
Read-Only or Read-Write. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
record: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Group of bytes in a file. A physical record consists of 128 |
|||
bytes and is the basic unit of data transfer between the |
|||
operating system and the application program. A logical record |
|||
might vary in length and is used to represent a unit of |
|||
information. Two 64-byte employee records can be stored in one |
|||
128-byte physical record. Records are grouped together to form a |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
recursive procedure: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Code that can call itself during execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
reentrant procedure: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Code that can be called by one process while another is already |
|||
executing it. Thus, reentrant code can be shared between |
|||
different users. Reentrant procedures must not be self- |
|||
modifying; that is, they must be pure code and not contain data. |
|||
The data for reentrant procedures can be kept in a separate data |
|||
area or placed on the stack. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
restart (RST): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One-byte call instruction usually used during interrupt sequences |
|||
and for debugger break pointing. There are eight restart |
|||
locations, RST 0 through RST 7, whose addresses are given by the |
|||
product of 8 times the restart number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
R/O: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
Read-Only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ROM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Read-Only memory. This memory can be read but not written and so |
|||
is suitable for code and preinitialized data areas only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
RST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
restart. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
R/W: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
Read-Write. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
In a CP/M system, a sector is always 128 consecutive bytes. A |
|||
sector is the basic unit of data read and written on the disk by |
|||
the BIOS. A sector can be one 128-byte record in a file or a |
|||
sector of the directory. The BDOS always requests a logical |
|||
sector number between 0 and (SPT-1). This is typically |
|||
translated into a physical sector by the BIOS entry point |
|||
SECTRAN. In some disk subsystems, the disk sector size is larger |
|||
than 128 bytes, usually a power of two, such as 256, 512, 1024, or |
|||
2048 bytes. These disk sectors are always referred to as host |
|||
sectors in CP/M documentation and should not be confused with |
|||
other references to sectors, in which cases the CP/M 128-byte |
|||
sectors should be assumed. When the host sector size is larger |
|||
than 128 bytes, host sectors must be buffered in memory and the |
|||
128-byte CP/M sectors must be blocked and deblocked from them. |
|||
This can be done by adding an additional module, the blocking and |
|||
deblocking algorithm, between the BIOS disk I/O routines and the |
|||
actual disk I/O. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
sectors per track (SPT): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A two-byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 0. The |
|||
BDOS makes calls to the BIOS entry point SECTRAN with logical |
|||
sector numbers ranging between 0 and (SPT - 1) in register BC. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SECTRAN: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that performs |
|||
logical-to-physical sector translation for the BDOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SELDSK: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SETDMA: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected DMA address. The DMA address is the address of a |
|||
128-byte buffer region in memory that is used to transfer data to |
|||
and from the disk in subsequent reads and writes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SETSEC: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected sector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SETTRK: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected track. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
skew factor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Factor that defines the logical-to-physical sector number |
|||
translation in XLT. Logical sector numbers are used by the BDOS |
|||
and range between 0 and (SPT - 1). Data is written in |
|||
consecutive logical 128-byte sectors grouped in data blocks. The |
|||
number of sectors per block is given by BLS/128. Physical |
|||
sectors on the disk media are also numbered consecutively. If |
|||
the physical sector size is also 128 bytes, a one-to-one |
|||
relationship exists between logical and physical sectors. The |
|||
logical-to-physical translation table (XLT) maps this |
|||
relationship, and a skew factor is typically used in generating |
|||
the table entries. For instance, if the skew factor is 6, XLT |
|||
will be: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Logical: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... 25 |
|||
Physical: 1 7 13 19 25 5 11 ... 22 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The skew factor allows time for program processing without |
|||
missing the next sector. Otherwise, the system must wait for an |
|||
entire disk revolution before reading the next logical sector. |
|||
The skew factor can be varied, depending on hardware speed and |
|||
application processing overhead. Note that no sector translation |
|||
is done when the physical sectors are larger than 128 bytes, as |
|||
sector deblocking is done in this case. See also \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector, SKF, \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
and \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
XLT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SKF: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A diskdef macro library parameter specifying the skew factor to |
|||
be used in building XLT. If SKF is zero, no translation table is |
|||
generated and the XLT byte in the DPH will be 0000H. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
software: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Programs that contain machine-readable instructions, as opposed |
|||
to hardware, which is the actual physical components of a |
|||
computer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
source file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
ASCII text file usually created with an editor that is an input |
|||
file to a system program, such as a language translator or text |
|||
formatter. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SP: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Stack pointer. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
stack. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
spooling: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Process of accumulating printer output in a file while the |
|||
printer is busy. The file is printed when the printer becomes |
|||
free; a program does not have to wait for the slow printing |
|||
process. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SPT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sectors per track. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
stack: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Reserved area of memory where the processor saves the return |
|||
address when a call instruction is received. When a return |
|||
instruction is encountered, the processor restores the current |
|||
address on the stack to the program counter. Data such as the |
|||
contents of the registers can also be saved on the stack. The |
|||
push instruction places data on the stack and the pop instruction |
|||
removes it. An item is pushed onto the stack by decrementing the |
|||
stack pointer (SP) by 2 and writing the item at the SP address. |
|||
In other words, the stack grows downward in memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
syntax: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Format for entering a given command. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SYS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
system attribute. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SYSGEN image: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Memory image of the CP/M system created by SYSGEN when a |
|||
destination drive is not specified. This is the same as the |
|||
MOVCPM image that can be read by SYSGEN if a source drive is |
|||
not specified. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
MOVCPM image. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
system attribute (SYS): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File attribute. You can give a file the system attribute by |
|||
using the SYS option in the STAT command or by using the set file |
|||
attributes function, BDOS Function 12. A file with the SYS |
|||
attribute is not displayed in response to a DIR command. If you |
|||
give a file with user number 0 the SYS attribute, you can read |
|||
and execute that file from any user number on the same drive. |
|||
Use this feature to make your commonly used programs available |
|||
under any user number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
system prompt: |
|||
Symbol displayed by the operating system indicating that the |
|||
system is ready to receive input. |
|||
See prompt and CP/M prompt. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
system tracks: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Tracks reserved on the disk for the CP/M system. The number of |
|||
system tracks is specified by the parameter OFF in the disk |
|||
parameter block (DPB). The system tracks for a drive always |
|||
precede its data tracks. The command SYSGEN copies the CP/M |
|||
system from the system tracks to memory, and vice versa. The |
|||
standard SYSGEN utility copies 26 sectors from track 0 and 26 |
|||
sectors from track 1. When the system tracks contain additional |
|||
sectors or tracks to be copied, a customized SYSGEN must be used. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
terminal: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
TPA: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Transient Program Area. Area in memory where user programs run |
|||
and store data. This area is a region of memory beginning at |
|||
0100H and extending to the base of the CP/M system in high |
|||
memory. The first module of the CP/M system is the CCP, which |
|||
can be overwritten by a user program. If so, the TPA is extended |
|||
to the base of the CP/M BDOS module. If the CCP is overwritten, |
|||
the user program must terminate with either a system reset |
|||
(Function 0) call or a jump to location zero in page zero. The |
|||
address of the base of the CP/M BDOS is stored in location 0006H |
|||
in page zero least significant byte first. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
track: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data on the disk media is accessed by combination of track and |
|||
sector numbers. Tracks form concentric rings on the disk; the |
|||
standard IBM single-density disks have 77 tracks. Each track |
|||
consists of a fixed number of numbered sectors. Tracks are |
|||
numbered from zero to one less than the number of tracks on the |
|||
disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Transient Program Area: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
TPA. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
upward compatible: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Term meaning that a program created for the previously released |
|||
operating system, or compiler, runs under the newly released |
|||
version of the same operating system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
USER: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Term used in CP/M and MP/M systems to distinguish distinct |
|||
regions of the directory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
user number: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Number assigned to files in the disk directory so that different |
|||
users need only deal with their own files and have their own |
|||
directories, even though they are all working from the same disk. |
|||
In CP/M, files can be divided into 16 user groups. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
utility: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Tool. Program that enables the user to perform certain |
|||
operations, such as copying files, erasing files, and editing |
|||
files. The utilities are created for the convenience of |
|||
programmers and users. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
vector: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Location in memory. An entry point into the operating system |
|||
used for making system calls or interrupt handling. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
warm start: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program termination by a jump to the warm start vector at |
|||
location 0000H, a system reset (BDOS Function 0), or a CTRL-C |
|||
typed at the keyboard. A warm start reinitializes the disk |
|||
subsystem and returns control to the CP/M operating system at the |
|||
CCP level. The warm start vector is simply a jump to the WBOOT |
|||
entry point in the BIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
WBOOT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS used when a warm start |
|||
occurs. A warm start is performed when a user program branches |
|||
to location 0000H, when the CPU is reset from the front panel, or |
|||
when the user types CTRL-C. The CCP and BDOS are reloaded from |
|||
the system tracks of drive A. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
wildcard characters: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Special characters that match certain specified items. In CP/M |
|||
there are two wildcard characters: ? and *. The ? can be |
|||
substituted for any single character in a filename, and the * can |
|||
be substituted for the primary filename, the filetype, or both. |
|||
By placing wildcard characters in filenames, the user creates an |
|||
ambiguous filename and can quickly reference one or more files. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
word: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
16-bit or two-byte value, such as an address value. Although the |
|||
Intel 8080 is an 8-bit CPU, addresses occupy two bytes and are |
|||
called word values. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
WRITE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that writes the record at |
|||
the currently selected DMA address to the currently selected |
|||
drive, track, and sector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
XLT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Logical-to-physical sector translation table located in the BIOS. |
|||
SECTRAN uses XLT to perform logical-to-physical sector number |
|||
translation. XLT also refers to the two-byte address in the disk |
|||
parameter header at DPBASE + 0. If this parameter is zero, no |
|||
sector translation takes place. Otherwise this parameter is the |
|||
address of the translation table. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ZERO PAGE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
page zero. |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Appendix H |
|||
.nx appi |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,939 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft I-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc I CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendix I |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.qs |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual I CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Messages come from several different sources. CP/M displays |
|||
error messages when there are errors in calls to the Basic Disk |
|||
Operating System (BDOS). CP/M also displays messages when there |
|||
are errors in command lines. Each utility supplied with CP/M has |
|||
its own set of messages. The following lists CP/M messages and |
|||
utility messages. One might see messages other than those listed |
|||
here if one is running an application program. Check the |
|||
application program's documentation for explanations of those |
|||
messages. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
? |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. This message has four possible meanings: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 23 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o DDT does not understand the assembly language instruction. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o The file cannot be opened. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o A checksum error occurred in a HEX file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o The assembler/disassembler was overlayed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ABORTED |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You stopped a PIP operation by pressing a key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ASM Error Messages |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
D Data error: data statement element cannot be placed in |
|||
specified data area. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
E Expression error: expression cannot be evaluated during |
|||
assembly. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
L Label error: label cannot appear in this context (might be |
|||
duplicate label). |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM Error Messages (continued) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
N Not implemented: unimplemented features, such as macros, are |
|||
trapped. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
O Overflow: expression is too complex to evaluate. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
P Phase error: label value changes on two passes through |
|||
assembly. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
R Register error: the value specified as a register is |
|||
incompatible with the code. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
S Syntax error: improperly formed expression. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
U Undefined label: label used does not exist. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
V Value error: improperly formed operand encountered in an |
|||
expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
BAD DELIMITER |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. Check command line for typing errors. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bad Load |
|||
.sp |
|||
CCP error message, or SAVE error message. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: |
|||
.sp |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System error on the designated drive: CP/M |
|||
replaces d: with the drive specification of the drive where the |
|||
error occurred. This message is followed by one of the four |
|||
phrases in the situations described below. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: Bad Sector |
|||
.sp |
|||
This message appears when CP/M finds no disk in the drive, when |
|||
the disk is improperly formatted, when the drive latch is open, |
|||
or when power to the drive is off. Check for one of these |
|||
situations and try again. This could also indicate a hardware |
|||
problem or a worn or improperly formatted disk. Press ^C to |
|||
terminate the program and return to CP/M, or press RETURN |
|||
to ignore the error. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: File R/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
You tried to erase, rename, or set file attributes on a Read-Only |
|||
file. The file should first be set to Read-Write (R/W) with the |
|||
command: STAT filespec $R/W. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: R/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
Drive has been assigned Read-Only status with a STAT command, or |
|||
the disk in the drive has been changed without being initialized |
|||
with a ^C. CP/M terminates the current program as soon as you |
|||
press any key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err on d: Select |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M received a command line specifying a nonexistent drive. |
|||
CP/M terminates the current program as soon as you press any key. |
|||
Press RETURN or CTRL-C to recover. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Break "x" at c |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. "x" is one of the symbols described below and c is the |
|||
command letter being executed when the error occurred. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
# Search failure. ED cannot find the string specified in an F, |
|||
S, or N command. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
? Unrecognized command letter c. ED does not recognize the |
|||
indicated command letter, or an E, H, Q, or O command is not |
|||
alone on its command line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
O The file specified in an R command cannot be found. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
> Buffer full. ED cannot put any more characters in the memory |
|||
buffer, or the string specified in an F, N, or S command is too |
|||
long. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
E Command aborted. A keystroke at the console aborted command |
|||
execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Break "x" at c (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
F Disk or directory full. This error is followed by either the |
|||
disk or directory full message. Refer to the recovery procedures |
|||
listed under these messages. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CANNOT CLOSE DESTINATION FILE--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. An output file cannot be closed. You should take |
|||
appropriate action after checking to see if the correct disk is |
|||
in the drive and that the disk is not write-protected. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
Cannot close, R/O |
|||
CANNOT CLOSE FILES |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M cannot write to the file. This usually occurs because the |
|||
disk is write-protected. |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. An output file cannot be closed. This is a fatal error |
|||
that terminates ASM execution. Check to see that the disk is in |
|||
the drive, and that the disk is not write-protected. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
DDT. The disk file written by a W command cannot be closed. |
|||
This is a fatal error that terminates DDT execution. Check if |
|||
the correct disk is in the drive and that the disk is not write-protected. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. This error can occur during SUBMIT file processing. |
|||
Check if the correct system disk is in the A drive and that the |
|||
disk is not write-protected. The SUBMIT job can be restarted |
|||
after rebooting CP/M. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CANNOT READ |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP cannot read the specified source. Reader cannot be |
|||
implemented. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CANNOT WRITE |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The destination specified in the PIP command is illegal. |
|||
You probably specified an input device as a destination. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Checksum error |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. A HEX record checksum error was encountered. The HEX |
|||
record that produced the error must be corrected, probably by |
|||
recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
CHECKSUM ERROR |
|||
LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
ERROR ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
BYTES READ: |
|||
hhhh: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. File contains incorrect data. Regenerate HEX file from |
|||
the source. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Command Buffer Overflow |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The SUBMIT buffer allows up to 2048 characters in the |
|||
input file. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Command too long |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. A command in the SUBMIT file cannot exceed 125 |
|||
characters. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CORRECT ERROR, TYPE RETURN OR CTRL-Z |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. A HEX record checksum was encountered during the transfer |
|||
of a HEX file. The HEX file with the checksum error should be |
|||
corrected, probably by recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
DESTINATION IS R/O, DELETE (Y/N)? |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The destination file specified in a PIP command already |
|||
exists and it is Read-Only. If you type Y, the destination file |
|||
is deleted before the file copy is done. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Directory full |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. There is not enough directory space for the file being |
|||
written to the destination disk. You can use the OXfilespec |
|||
command to erase any unnecessary files on the disk without |
|||
leaving the editor. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. There is not enough directory space to write the $$$.SUB |
|||
file used for processing SUBMITs. Erase some files or select a |
|||
new disk and retry. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Disk full |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. There is not enough disk space for the output file. This |
|||
error can occur on the W, E, H, or X commands. If it occurs with |
|||
X command, you can repeat the command prefixing the filename with |
|||
a different drive. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
DISK READ ERROR--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The input disk file specified in a PIP command cannot be |
|||
read properly. This is usually the result of an unexpected end-of-file. |
|||
Correct the problem in your file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
DISK WRITE ERROR--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. A disk write operation cannot be successfully performed |
|||
during a W command, probably due to a full disk. You should |
|||
either erase some unnecessary files or get another disk with more |
|||
space. |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. A disk write operation cannot be successfully performed |
|||
during a PIP command, probably due to a full disk. You should |
|||
either erase some unnecessary files or get another disk with more |
|||
space and execute PIP again. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The SUBMIT program cannot write the $$$.SUB file to the |
|||
disk. Erase some files, or select a new disk and try again. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: BAD PARAMETER |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You entered an illegal parameter in a PIP command. Retype |
|||
the entry correctly. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: CANNOT OPEN SOURCE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Displayed if LOAD cannot find the specified file or if no |
|||
filename is specified. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: CANNOT CLOSE FILE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Caused by an error code returned by a BDOS function call. |
|||
Disk might be write-protected. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: CANNOT OPEN SOURCE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Cannot find source file. Check disk directory. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: DISK READ, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Caused by an error code returned by a BDOS function call. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: DISK WRITE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Destination disk is full. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: INVERTED LOAD ADDRESS, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. The address of a record was too far from the address of |
|||
the previously-processed record. This is an internal limitation |
|||
of LOAD, but it can be circumvented. Use DDT to read the HEX |
|||
file into memory, then use a SAVE command to store the memory |
|||
image file on disk. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: NO MORE DIRECTORY SPACE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Disk directory is full. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Error on line nnn message |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The SUBMIT program displays its messages in the format |
|||
shown above, where nnn represents the line number of the SUBMIT |
|||
file. Refer to the message following the line number. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
FILE ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. Disk or directory is full, and ED cannot write anything more |
|||
on the disk. This is a fatal error, so make sure there is enough |
|||
space on the disk to hold a second copy of the file before |
|||
invoking ED. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
FILE EXISTS |
|||
.sp |
|||
You have asked CP/M to create or rename a file using a file |
|||
specification that is already assigned to another file. Either |
|||
delete the existing file or use another file specification. |
|||
.sp |
|||
REN. The new name specified is the name of a file that already |
|||
exists. You cannot rename a file with the name of an existing |
|||
file. If you want to replace an existing file with a newer |
|||
version of the same file, either rename or erase the existing |
|||
file, or use the PIP utility. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
File exists, erase it |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. The destination filename already exists when you are placing |
|||
the destination file on a different disk than the source. It |
|||
should be erased or another disk selected to receive the output |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
** FILE IS READ/ONLY ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. The file specified in the command to invoke ED has the |
|||
Read-Only attribute. Ed can read the file so that the user can |
|||
examine it, but ED cannot change a Read-Only file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
File Not Found |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M cannot find the specified file. Check that you have entered |
|||
the correct drive specification or that you have the correct disk |
|||
in the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. ED cannot find the specified file. Check that you have |
|||
entered the correct drive specification or that you have the |
|||
correct disk in the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. STAT cannot find the specified file. The message might |
|||
appear if you omit the drive specification. Check to see if the |
|||
correct disk is in the drive. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
FILE NOT FOUND--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
PIP. An input file that you have specified does not exist. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Filename required |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. You typed the ED command without a filename. Reenter the ED |
|||
command followed by the name of the file you want to edit or |
|||
create. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
hhhh??=dd |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. The ?? indicates DDT does not know how to represent the |
|||
hexadecimal value dd encountered at address hhhh in 8080 assembly |
|||
language. dd is not an 8080 machine instruction opcode. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Insufficient memory |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. There is not enough memory to load the file specified in an |
|||
R or E command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid Assignment |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. You specified an invalid drive or file assignment, or |
|||
misspelled a device name. This error message might be followed |
|||
by a list of the valid file assignments that can follow a |
|||
filename. If an invalid drive assignment was attempted the |
|||
message Use: d:=RO is displayed, showing the proper syntax for |
|||
drive assignments. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid control character |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The only valid control characters in the SUBMIT files of |
|||
the type SUB are ^ A through ^ Z. Note that in a SUBMIT file the |
|||
control character is represented by typing the circumflex, ^, not |
|||
by pressing the control key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID DIGIT--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. An invalid HEX digit has been encountered while reading a |
|||
HEX file. The HEX file with the invalid HEX digit should be |
|||
corrected, probably by recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid Disk Assignment |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. Might appear if you follow the drive specification with |
|||
anything except =R/O. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID DISK SELECT |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M received a command line specifying a nonexistent drive, or |
|||
the disk in the drive is improperly formatted. CP/M terminates |
|||
the current program as soon as you press any key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID DRIVE NAME (Use A, B, C, or D) |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. SYSGEN recognizes only drives A, B, C, and D as valid |
|||
destinations for system generation. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid File Indicator |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. Appears if you do not specify RO, RW, DIR, or SYS. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID FORMAT |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The format of your PIP command is illegal. See the |
|||
description of the PIP command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
INVALID HEX DIGIT |
|||
LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
ERROR ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
BYTES READ: |
|||
hhhh |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. File contains incorrect HEX digit. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID MEMORY SIZE |
|||
.sp |
|||
MOVCPM. Specify a value less than 64K or your computer's actual |
|||
memory size. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID SEPARATOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You have placed an invalid character for a separator |
|||
between two input filenames. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID USER NUMBER |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You have specified a user number greater than 15. User |
|||
numbers are in the range 0 to 15. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
n? |
|||
.sp |
|||
USER. You specified a number greater than fifteen for a user |
|||
area number. For example, if you type USER 18<cr>, the screen |
|||
displays 18?. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO DIRECTORY SPACE |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The disk directory is full. Erase some files to make room |
|||
for PRN and HEX files. The directory can usually hold only 64 |
|||
filenames. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO DIRECTORY SPACE--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. There is not enough directory space for the output file. |
|||
You should either erase some unnecessary files or get another |
|||
disk with more directory space and execute PIP again. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO FILE--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
DIR, ERA, REN, PIP. CP/M cannot find the specified file, or no |
|||
files exist. |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The indicated source or include file cannot be found on the |
|||
indicated drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. The file specified in an R or E command cannot be found on |
|||
the disk. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO INPUT FILE PRESENT ON DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
DUMP. The file you requested does not exist. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
No memory |
|||
.sp |
|||
There is not enough (buffer?) memory available for loading the |
|||
program specified. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO SOURCE FILE ON DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. SYSGEN cannot find CP/M either in CPMxx.com form or on |
|||
the system tracks of the source disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO SOURCE FILE PRESENT |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The assembler cannot find the file you specified. Either |
|||
you mistyped the file specification in your command line, or the |
|||
filetype is not ASM. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO SPACE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SAVE. Too many files are already on the disk, or no room is left |
|||
on the disk to save the information. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
No SUB file present |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. For SUBMIT to operate properly, you must create a file |
|||
with filetype of SUB. The SUB file contains usual CP/M commands. |
|||
Use one command per line. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NOT A CHARACTER SOURCE |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The source specified in your PIP command is illegal. You |
|||
have probably specified an output device as a source. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
** NOT DELETED ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP did not delete the file, which might have had the R/O |
|||
attribute. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NOT FOUND |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP cannot find the specified file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
OUTPUT FILE WRITE ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. You specified a write-protected disk as the destination for |
|||
the PRN and HEX files, or the disk has no space left. Correct |
|||
the problem before assembling your program. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Parameter error |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. Within the SUBMIT file of type sub, valid parameters are |
|||
$0 through $9. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
PARAMETER ERROR, TYPE RETURN TO IGNORE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. If you press RETURN, SYSGEN proceeds without processing |
|||
the invalid parameter. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
QUIT NOT FOUND |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The string argument to a Q parameter was not found in your |
|||
input file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Read error |
|||
.sp |
|||
TYPE. An error occurred when reading the file specified in the |
|||
type command. Check the disk and try again. The STAT filespec |
|||
command can diagnose trouble. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
READER STOPPING |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. Reader operation interrupted. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Record Too Long |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP cannot process a record longer than 128 bytes. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Requires CP/M 2.0 or later |
|||
.sp |
|||
XSUB. XSUB requires the facilities of CP/M 2.0 or newer version. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Requires CP/M 2.0 or new for operation |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. This version of PIP requires the facilities of CP/M 2.0 or |
|||
newer version. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
START NOT FOUND |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The string argument to an S parameter cannot be found in |
|||
the source file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SOURCE FILE INCOMPLETE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. SYSGEN cannot use your CP/M source file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SOURCE FILE NAME ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. When you assemble a file, you cannot use the wildcard |
|||
characters * and ? in the filename. Only one file can be |
|||
assembled at a time. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SOURCE FILE READ ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The assembler cannot understand the information in the file |
|||
containing the assembly-language program. Portions of another |
|||
file might have been written over your assembly-language file, or |
|||
information was not properly saved on the disk. Use the TYPE |
|||
command to locate the error. Assembly-language files contain the |
|||
letters, symbols, and numbers that appear on your keyboard. If |
|||
your screen displays unrecognizable output or behaves strangely, |
|||
you have found where computer instructions have crept into your |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SYNCHRONIZATION ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
MOVCPM. The MOVCPM utility is being used with the wrong CP/M |
|||
system. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
"SYSTEM" FILE NOT ACCESSIBLE |
|||
.sp |
|||
You tried to access a file set to SYS with the STAT command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
** TOO MANY FILES ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. There is not enough memory for STAT to sort the files |
|||
specified, or more than 512 files were specified. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
UNEXPECTED END OF HEX FILE--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. An end-of-file was encountered prior to a termination HEX |
|||
record. The HEX file without a termination record should be |
|||
corrected, probably by recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Unrecognized Destination |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. Check command line for valid destination. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Use: STAT d:=RO |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. An invalid STAT drive command was given. The only valid |
|||
drive assignment in STAT is STAT d:=RO. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
VERIFY ERROR:--\\{filespec\\} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. When copying with the V option, PIP found a difference when |
|||
rereading the data just written and comparing it to the data in |
|||
its memory buffer. Usually this indicates a failure of either |
|||
the destination disk or drive. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
WRONG CP/M VERSION (REQUIRES 2.0) |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
XSUB ACTIVE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. XSUB has been invoked. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
XSUB ALREADY PRESENT |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. XSUB is already active in memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Your input? |
|||
.sp |
|||
If CP/M cannot find the command you specified, it returns the |
|||
command name you entered followed by a question mark. Check that |
|||
you have typed the command line correctly, or that the command |
|||
you requested exists as a .COM file on the default or specified |
|||
disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Appendix I |
|||
|
|||
Binary file not shown.
@ -1,670 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 5-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 5 |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.qs |
|||
.tc 5 CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.1 Introduction |
|||
.tc 5.1 Introduction |
|||
5.1 Introduction |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
This chapter describes CP/M (release 2) system organization including the |
|||
structure of memory and system entry points. This section provides |
|||
the information you need to write programs that operate under CP/M and |
|||
that use the peripheral and disk I/O facilities of the system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M is logically divided into four parts, called the Basic Input/Output |
|||
System (BIOS), the Basic Disk Operating System (BDOS), the Console Command |
|||
Processor (CCP), and the Transient Program Area (TPA). The BIOS is a |
|||
hardware-dependent module that defines the exact low level interface with a |
|||
particular computer system that is necessary for peripheral device I/O. |
|||
Although a standard BIOS is supplied by Digital Research, explicit |
|||
instructions are provided for field reconfiguration of the BIOS to match |
|||
nearly any hardware environment, see Section 6. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The BIOS and BDOS are |
|||
logically combined into a single module with a common entry point and |
|||
referred to as the FDOS. The CCP is a distinct program that uses the FDOS to |
|||
provide a human-oriented interface with the information that is cataloged on |
|||
the back-up storage device. The TPA is an area of memory, |
|||
not used by the FDOS and CCP, where various nonresident operating |
|||
system commands and user programs are executed. The lower portion of memory |
|||
is reserved for system information and is detailed in later sections. Memory |
|||
organization of the CP/M system is shown in Figure 5-1. |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
High |
|||
Memory FDOS (BDOS+BIOS) |
|||
FBASE: |
|||
|
|||
CCP |
|||
CBASE: |
|||
|
|||
TPA |
|||
TBASE: |
|||
|
|||
System Parameters |
|||
BOOT: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figure 5-1. CP/M Memory Organization |
|||
.qs |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The exact memory addresses corresponding to BOOT, TBASE, CBASE, and FBASE |
|||
vary from version to version and are described fully in Section 6. All |
|||
standard CP/M versions assume BOOT=0000H, which is the base of |
|||
random access memory. The machine code found at location BOOT performs a |
|||
system warm start, which loads and initializes the programs and variables |
|||
necessary to return control to the CCP. Thus, transient programs need only |
|||
jump to location BOOT to return control to CP/M at the command level. |
|||
Further, the standard versions assume TBASE=BOOT+0100H, which is normally |
|||
location 0100H. The principal entry point to the FDOS is at location |
|||
BOOT+0005H (normally 0005H) where a jump to FBASE is found. The address |
|||
field at BOOT+0006H (normally 0006H) contains the value of FBASE and can be |
|||
used to determine the size of available memory, assuming that the CCP is |
|||
being overlaid by a transient program. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Transient programs are loaded into the TPA and executed as follows. The |
|||
operator communicates with the CCP by typing command lines following each |
|||
prompt. Each command line takes one of the following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
command |
|||
command file1 |
|||
command file1 file2 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where command is either a built-in function, such as DIR or TYPE, or the name |
|||
of a transient command or program. If the command is a built-in function of |
|||
CP/M, it is executed immediately. Otherwise, the CCP searches the currently |
|||
addressed disk for a file by the name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
command.COM |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the file is found, it is assumed to be a memory image of a program that |
|||
executes in the TPA and thus implicity originates at TBASE in memory. The |
|||
CCP loads the COM file from the disk into memory starting at TBASE and can |
|||
extend up to CBASE. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the command is followed by one or two file specifications, the CCP prepares |
|||
one or two File Control Block (FCB) names in the system |
|||
parameter area. These optional FCBs are in the form necessary to |
|||
access files through the FDOS and are described in Section 5.2. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The transient program receives control from the CCP and begins |
|||
execution, using the I/O facilities of the FDOS. The transient |
|||
program is called from the CCP. Thus, it can simply return to the CCP upon |
|||
completion of its processing, or can jump to BOOT to pass control back to |
|||
CP/M. In the first case, the transient program must not use memory above |
|||
CBASE, while in the latter case, memory up through FBASE-1 can be used. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The transient program can use the CP/M I/O facilities to communicate with the |
|||
operator's console and peripheral devices, including the disk subsystem. The |
|||
I/O system is accessed by passing a function number and an information address |
|||
to CP/M through the FDOS entry point at BOOT+0005H. In the case of a disk |
|||
read, for example, the transient program sends the number corresponding to a |
|||
disk read, along with the address of an FCB to the CP/M FDOS. The FDOS, in |
|||
turn, performs the operation and returns with either a disk read completion |
|||
indication or an error number indicating that the disk read was unsuccessful. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 5.2 Operating System Call Conventions |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.2 Call Conventions |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.2 Operating System Call Conventions |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
This section provides detailed information for performing direct operating |
|||
system calls from user programs. Many of the functions listed below, however, |
|||
are accessed more simply through the I/O macro library provided with the |
|||
MAC macro assembler and listed in the Digital Research manual |
|||
entitled, \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
Programmer's Utilities Guide for the CP/M Family of Operating Systems. |
|||
.qu |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M facilities that are available for access by transient programs fall into |
|||
two general categories: simple device I/O and disk file I/O. The simple |
|||
device operations are |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o read a console character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o write a console character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o read a sequential character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o write a sequential character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o get or set I/O status |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o print console buffer |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o interrogate console ready |
|||
.sp |
|||
The following FDOS operations perform disk I/O: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o disk system reset |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o drive selection |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file creation |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file close |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o directory search |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file delete |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file rename |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o random or sequential read |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o random or sequential write |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o interrogate available disks |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o interrogate selected disk |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o set DMA address |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o set/reset file indicators. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
As mentioned above, access to the FDOS functions is accomplished by passing |
|||
a function number and information address through the primary point at |
|||
location BOOT+0005H. In general, the function number is passed in register C |
|||
with the information address in the double byte pair DE. Single byte values |
|||
are returned in register A, with double byte values returned in HL, a zero |
|||
value is returned when the function number is out of range. For reasons of |
|||
compatibility, register A = L and register B = H upon return in all cases. |
|||
Note that the register passing conventions of CP/M agree with |
|||
those of the Intel PL/M systems programming language. CP/M functions and |
|||
their numbers are listed below. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
O System Reset 19 Delete File |
|||
1 Console Input 20 Read Sequential |
|||
2 Console Output 21 Write Sequential |
|||
3 Reader Input 22 Make File |
|||
4 Punch Output 23 Rename File |
|||
5 List Output 24 Return Login Vector |
|||
6 Direct Console I/O 25 Return Current Disk |
|||
7 Get I/O Byte 26 Set DMA Address |
|||
8 Set I/O Byte 27 Get Addr(Alloc) |
|||
9 Print String 28 Write Protect Disk |
|||
10 Read Console Buffer 29 Get R/0 Vector |
|||
11 Get Console Status 30 Set File Attributes |
|||
12 Return Version Number 31 Get Addr(Disk Parms) |
|||
13 Reset Disk System 32 Set/Get User Code |
|||
14 Select Disk 33 Read Random |
|||
15 Open File 34 Write Random |
|||
16 Close File 35 Compute File Size |
|||
17 Search for First 36 Set Random Record |
|||
18 Search for Next 37 Reset Drive |
|||
40 Write Random with Zero Fill |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Functions 28 and 32 should be avoided in application programs to |
|||
maintain upward compatibility with CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon entry to a transient program, the CCP leaves the stack |
|||
pointer set to an eight-level stack area with the CCP return |
|||
address pushed onto the stack, leaving seven levels before |
|||
overflow occurs. Although this stack is usually not used by a |
|||
transient program (most transients return to the CCP |
|||
through a jump to location 0000H) it is large enough to |
|||
make CP/M system calls because the FDOS switches to a local stack |
|||
at system entry. For example, the assembly-language program segment below |
|||
reads characters continuously until an asterisk is |
|||
encountered, at which time control returns to the CCP, assuming a |
|||
standard CP/M system with BOOT = 0000H. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
BDOS EQU 0005H ;STANDARD CP/M ENTRY |
|||
CONIN EQU 1 ;CONSOLE INPUT FUNCTION |
|||
; |
|||
ORG 0100H ;BASE OF TPA |
|||
NEXTC: MVI C,CONIN ;READ NEXT CHARACTER |
|||
CALL BDOS ;RETURN CHARACTER IN <A> |
|||
CPI '*' ;END OF PROCESSING? |
|||
JNZ NEXTC ;LOOP IF NOT |
|||
RET ;RETURN TO CCP |
|||
END |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M implements a named file structure on each disk, providing a |
|||
logical organization that allows any particular file to contain |
|||
any number of records from completely empty to the full capacity |
|||
of the drive. Each drive is logically distinct with a disk |
|||
directory and file data area. The disk filenames are in three |
|||
parts: the drive select code, the filename (consisting of one to |
|||
eight nonblank characters), and the filetype (consisting of zero |
|||
to three nonblank characters). The filetype names the generic |
|||
category of a particular file, while the filename distinguishes |
|||
individual files in each category. The filetypes listed in Table 5-1 |
|||
name a few generic categories that have been established, |
|||
although they are somewhat arbitrary. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-1. CP/M Filetypes |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Filetype Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 30 |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
ASM Assembler Source |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
PRN Printer Listing |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
HEX Hex Machine Code |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
BAS Basic Source File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
INT Intermediate Code |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
COM Command File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
PLI PL/I Source File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
REL Relocatable Module |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
TEX TEX Formatter Source |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
BAK ED Source Backup |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
SYM SID Symbol File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
$$$ Temporary File |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Source files are treated as a sequence of ASCII characters, where |
|||
each line of the source file is followed by a carriage return, and |
|||
line-feed sequence (0DH followed by 0AH). Thus, one 128-byte CP/M |
|||
record can contain several lines of source text. The end of an |
|||
ASCII file is denoted by a CTRL-Z character (1AH) or a real |
|||
end-of-file returned by the CP/M read operation. CTRL-Z characters embedded |
|||
within machine code files (for example, COM files) are ignored and |
|||
the end-of-file condition returned by CP/M is used to terminate |
|||
read operations. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Files in CP/M can be thought of as a sequence of up to 65536 |
|||
records of 128 bytes each, numbered from 0 through 65535, thus |
|||
allowing a maximum of 8 megabytes per file. Note, however, |
|||
that although the records may be considered logically |
|||
contiguous, they may not be physically contiguous in the disk |
|||
data area. Internally, all files are divided into 16K byte |
|||
segments called logical extents, so that counters are easily |
|||
maintained as 8-bit values. The division into extents is |
|||
discussed in the paragraphs that follow: however, they are not |
|||
particularly significant for the programmer, because each extent is |
|||
automatically accessed in both sequential and random access |
|||
modes. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the file operations starting with Function 15, DE |
|||
usually addresses a FCB. Transient programs |
|||
often use the default FCB area reserved by CP/M at |
|||
location BOOT+005CH (normally 005CH) for simple file operations. |
|||
The basic unit of file information is a 128-byte record used for |
|||
all file operations. Thus, a default location for disk I/O is |
|||
provided by CP/M at location BOOT+0080H (normally 0080H) which |
|||
is the initial default DMA address. See Function 26. |
|||
.pp |
|||
All directory operations take place in a reserved area that does not |
|||
affect write buffers as was the case in release 1, with the |
|||
exception of Search First and Search Next, where compatibility is |
|||
required. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The FCB data area consists of a sequence of 33 bytes for |
|||
sequential access and a series of 36 bytes in the case when the |
|||
file is accessed randomly. The default FCB, normally located at |
|||
005CH, can be used for random access files, because the three bytes |
|||
starting at BOOT+007DH are available for this purpose. Figure 5-2 shows |
|||
the FCB format with the following fields. |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
dr f1 f2 / / f8 t1 t2 t3 ex s1 s2 rc d0 / / dn cr r0 r1 r2 |
|||
00 01 02 ... 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ... 31 32 33 34 35 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figure 5-2. File Control Block Format |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
The following table lists and describes each of the fields in the File Control |
|||
Block figure. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-2. File Control Block Fields |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Field Definition |
|||
.sp |
|||
dr drive code (0-16) |
|||
0 = use default drive for file |
|||
1 = auto disk select drive A, |
|||
2 = auto disk select drive B, |
|||
. |
|||
. |
|||
. |
|||
16= auto disk select drive P. |
|||
.sp |
|||
f1...f8 contain the filename in ASCII |
|||
upper-case, with high bit = 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
t1, t2, t3 contain the filetype in ASCII |
|||
upper-case, with high bit = 0 |
|||
t1', t2', and t3' denote the |
|||
bit of these positions, |
|||
t1' = 1 =>Read-Only file, |
|||
t2' = 1 =>SYS file, no DIR list |
|||
.sp |
|||
ex contains the current extent |
|||
number, normally set to 00 by |
|||
the user, but in range 0-31 |
|||
during file I/O |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-2. (continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Field Definition |
|||
.sp |
|||
s1 reserved for internal system use |
|||
.sp |
|||
s2 reserved for internal system use, |
|||
set to zero on call to OPEN, MAKE, |
|||
SEARCH |
|||
.sp |
|||
rc record count for extent ex; |
|||
takes on values from 0-127 |
|||
.sp |
|||
d0...dn filled in by CP/M; reserved for |
|||
system use |
|||
.sp |
|||
cr current record to read or write in |
|||
a sequential file operation; |
|||
normally set to zero by user |
|||
.sp |
|||
r0, r1, r2 optional random record number in |
|||
the range 0-65535, with overflow |
|||
to r2, r0, r1 constitute a 16-bit |
|||
value with low byte r0, and high |
|||
byte r1 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Each file being accessed through CP/M must have a corresponding |
|||
FCB, which provides the name and allocation information for all |
|||
subsequent file operations. When accessing files, it is the |
|||
programmer's responsibility to fill the lower 16 bytes of the FCB |
|||
and initialize the cr field. Normally, bytes 1 through 11 are |
|||
set to the ASCII character values for the filename and filetype, |
|||
while all other fields are zero. |
|||
.pp |
|||
FCBs are stored in a directory area of the disk, and are brought |
|||
into central memory before the programmer proceeds with file |
|||
operations (see the OPEN and MAKE functions). The memory copy of |
|||
the FCB is updated as file operations take place and later |
|||
recorded permanently on disk at the termination of the file |
|||
operation, (see the CLOSE command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CCP constructs the first 16 bytes of two optional FCBs for a |
|||
transient by scanning the remainder of the line following the |
|||
transient name, denoted by file1 and file2 in the prototype |
|||
command line described above, with unspecified fields set to |
|||
ASCII blanks. The first FCB is constructed at location |
|||
BOOT+005CH and can be used as is for subsequent file operations. |
|||
The second FCB occupies the d0...dn portion of the first FCB and |
|||
must be moved to another area of memory before use. If, for |
|||
example, the following command line is typed: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PROGNAME B:X.ZOT Y.ZAP |
|||
.bp |
|||
the file PROGNAME.COM is loaded into the TPA, and the default FCB |
|||
at BOOT+005CH is initialized to drive code 2, filename X, and |
|||
filetype ZOT. The second drive code takes the default value 0, |
|||
which is placed at BOOT-006CH, with the filename Y placed into |
|||
location BOOT+006DH and filetype ZAP located 8 bytes later at |
|||
BOOT+0075H. All remaining fields through cr are set to zero. |
|||
Note again that it is the programmer's |
|||
responsibility to move this second filename and filetype to another |
|||
area, usually a separate file control block, before opening the |
|||
file that begins at BOOT+005CH, because the open operation |
|||
overwrites the second name and type. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If no filenames are specified in the original command, the |
|||
fields beginning at BOOT+005DH and BOOT+006DH contain blanks. In |
|||
all cases, the CCP translates lower-case alphabetics to upper-case |
|||
to be consistent with the CP/M file naming conventions. |
|||
.pp |
|||
As an added convenience, the default buffer area at location |
|||
BOOT+0080H is initialized to the command line tail typed by the |
|||
operator following the program name. The first position contains |
|||
the number of characters, with the characters themselves |
|||
following the character count. Given the above command line, the |
|||
area beginning at BOOT+0080H is initialized as follows: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
BOOT+0080H: |
|||
.sp |
|||
+00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +A +B +C +D +E |
|||
E '' 'B' ':' 'X' '.' 'Z' 'O' 'T' '' 'Y' '.' 'Z' 'A' 'P' |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
where the characters are translated to upper-case ASCII with |
|||
uninitialized memory following the last valid character. Again, |
|||
it is the responsibility of the programmer to extract the |
|||
information from this buffer before any file operations are |
|||
performed, unless the default DMA address is explicitly changed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Individual functions are described in detail in the pages that |
|||
follow. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 0: SYSTEM RESET |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 00H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The System Reset function returns control to the CP/M operating |
|||
system at the CCP level. The CCP reinitializes the disk |
|||
subsystem by selecting and logging-in disk drive A. This |
|||
function has exactly the same effect as a jump to location BOOT. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 1: CONSOLE INPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 01H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Console Input function reads the next console character to |
|||
register A. Graphic characters, along with carriage return, line-feed, |
|||
and back space (CTRL-H) are echoed to the console. Tab |
|||
characters, CTRL-I, move the cursor to the next tab stop. A check |
|||
is made for start/stop scroll, CTRL-S, and start/stop printer echo, |
|||
CTRL-P. The FDOS does not return to the calling program until a |
|||
character has been typed, thus suspending execution if a |
|||
character is not ready. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 2: CONSOLE OUTPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters |
|||
Register C: 02H |
|||
Register E: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ASCII character from register E is sent to the console |
|||
device. As in Function 1, tabs are expanded and checks are made |
|||
for start/stop scroll and printer echo. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 3: READER INPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 03H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Reader Input function reads the next character from the |
|||
logical reader into register A. See the IOBYTE definition in |
|||
Chapter 6. Control does not return until the character has been |
|||
read. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 4: PUNCH OUTPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 04H |
|||
register E: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Punch Output function sends the character from register E to |
|||
the logical punch device. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 5: LIST OUTPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 05H |
|||
Register E: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The List Output function sends the ASCII character in register E |
|||
to the logical listing device. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 6: DIRECT CONSOLE I/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 06H |
|||
Register E: 0FFH (input) or |
|||
char (output) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: char or status |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Direct Console I/O is supported under CP/M for those specialized |
|||
applications where basic console input and output are required. |
|||
Use of this function should, in general, be avoided since it |
|||
bypasses all of the CP/M normal control character functions (for example, |
|||
CTRL-S and CTRL-P). Programs that perform direct I/O |
|||
through the BIOS under previous releases of CP/M, however, should |
|||
be changed to use direct I/O under BDOS so that they can be fully |
|||
supported under future releases of MP/M \ and CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon entry to Function 6, register E either contains hexadecimal |
|||
FF, denoting a console input request, or an ASCII character. If |
|||
the input value is FF, Function 6 returns A = 00 if no character |
|||
is ready, otherwise A contains the next console input character. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the input value in E is not FF, Function 6 assumes that E |
|||
contains a valid ASCII character that is sent to the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 6 must not be used in conjunction with other console I/O |
|||
functions. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 7: GET I/O BYTE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 07H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: I/O Byte Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Get I/O Byte function returns the current value of IOBYTE in |
|||
register A. See Chapter 6 for IOBYTE definition. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 8: SET I/O BYTE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 08H |
|||
Register E: I/O Byte Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SET I/O Byte function changes the IOBYTE value to that given |
|||
in register E. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 9: PRINT STRING |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 09H |
|||
Registers DE: String Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Print String function sends the character string stored in |
|||
memory at the location given by DE to the console device, until a |
|||
$ is encountered in the string. Tabs are expanded as in Function |
|||
2, and checks are made for start/stop scroll and printer echo. |
|||
.nx fiveb.tex |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,806 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 10: READ CONSOLE BUFFER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0AH |
|||
Registers DE: Buffer Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Console Characters in Buffer |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Read Buffer functions reads a line of edited console input |
|||
into a buffer addressed by registers DE. Console input is |
|||
terminated when either input buffer overflows or a carriage return |
|||
or line-feed is typed. The Read Buffer takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DE:+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 . . .+n |
|||
.sp |
|||
mx nc c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7 ... ?? |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where mx is the maximum number of characters that the buffer will |
|||
hold, 1 to 255, and nc is the number of characters read (set by |
|||
FDOS upon return) followed by the characters read from the |
|||
console. If nc < mx, then uninitialized positions follow the |
|||
last character, denoted by ?? in the above figure. A number of |
|||
control functions, summarized in Table 5-3, are recognized during |
|||
line editing. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-3. Edit Control Characters |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Character Edit Control Function |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
rub/del removes and echoes the last character |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-C reboots when at the beginning of line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-E causes physical end of line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-H backspaces one character position |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-J (line feed) terminates input line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-M (return) terminates input line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-R retypes the current line after new line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-U removes current line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-X same as CTRL-U |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The user should also note that certain functions that return the |
|||
carriage to the leftmost position (for example, CTRL-X) do so only to the |
|||
column position where the prompt ended. In earlier releases, the |
|||
carriage returned to the extreme left margin. This convention |
|||
makes operator data input and line correction more legible. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 11: GET CONSOLE STATUS |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0BH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Console Status |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Console Status function checks to see if a character has been |
|||
typed at the console. If a character is ready, the value 0FFH is |
|||
returned in register A. Otherwise a 00H value is returned. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 12: RETURN VERSION NUMBER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0CH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: Version Number |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 12 provides information that allows version independent |
|||
programming. A two-byte value is returned, with H = 00 |
|||
designating the CP/M release (H = 01 for MP/M) and L = 00 for |
|||
all releases previous to 2.0. CP/M 2.0 returns a hexadecimal 20 |
|||
in register L, with subsequent version 2 releases in the |
|||
hexadecimal range 21,22, through 2F. Using Function 12, for |
|||
example, the user can write application programs that provide |
|||
both sequential and random access functions. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 13: RESET DISK SYSTEM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0DH |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Reset Disk function is used to programmatically restore the |
|||
file system to a reset state where all disks are set to |
|||
Read-Write. See functions 28 and 29, only disk drive A is |
|||
selected, and the default DMA address is reset to BOOT+0080H. |
|||
This function can be used, for example, by an application program |
|||
that requires a disk change without a system reboot. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 14: SELECT DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0EH |
|||
Register E: Selected Disk |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Select Disk function designates the disk drive named in register |
|||
E as the default disk for subsequent file operations, with E = O |
|||
for drive A, 1 for drive B, and so on through 15, corresponding to drive |
|||
P in a full 16 drive system. The drive is placed in an on-line |
|||
status, which activates its directory until the next cold start, |
|||
warm start, or disk system reset operation. If the disk medium |
|||
is changed while it is on-line, the drive automatically goes to |
|||
a Read-Only status in a standard CP/M environment, see Function |
|||
28. FCBs that specify drive code zero (dr = 00H) automatically |
|||
reference the currently selected default drive. Drive code |
|||
values between 1 and 16 ignore the selected default |
|||
drive and directly reference drives A through P. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 15: OPEN FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0FH |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Open File operation is used to activate a file that currently |
|||
exists in the disk directory for the currently active user |
|||
number. The FDOS scans the referenced disk directory for a match |
|||
in positions 1 through 14 of the FCB referenced by DE (byte s1 is |
|||
automatically zeroed) where an ASCII question mark (3FH) matches |
|||
any directory character in any of these positions. Normally, no |
|||
question marks are included, and bytes ex and s2 of the FCB are |
|||
zero. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If a directory element is matched, the relevant directory |
|||
information is copied into bytes d0 through dn of FCB, thus |
|||
allowing access to the files through subsequent read and write |
|||
operations. The user should note that an existing file must not |
|||
be accessed until a successful open operation is completed. Upon |
|||
return, the open function returns a directory code with the value |
|||
0 through 3 if the open was successful or 0FFH (255 decimal) if |
|||
the file cannot be found. If question marks occur in the FCB, |
|||
the first matching FCB is activated. Note that the current |
|||
record, (cr) must be zeroed by the program if the file is to be |
|||
accessed sequentially from the first record. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 16: CLOSE FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 10H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Close File function performs the inverse of the Open File |
|||
function. Given that the FCB addressed by DE has been previously |
|||
activated through an open or make function, the close function |
|||
permanently records the new FCB in the reference disk directory |
|||
see functions 15 and 22. The FCB matching process for the close |
|||
is identical to the open function. The directory code returned |
|||
for a successful close operation is 0, 1, 2, or 3, while a 0FFH |
|||
(255 decimal) is returned if the filename cannot be found in the |
|||
directory. A file need not be closed if only read operations |
|||
have taken place. If write operations have occurred, the close |
|||
operation is necessary to record the new directory information |
|||
permanently. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 17: SEARCH FOR FIRST |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 11H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Search First scans the directory for a match with the file given |
|||
by the FCB addressed by DE. The value 255 (hexadecimal FF) is |
|||
returned if the file is not found; otherwise, 0, 1, 2, or 3 is |
|||
returned indicating the file is present. When the file is found, |
|||
the current DMA address is filled with the record containing the |
|||
directory entry, and the relative starting position is A *32 |
|||
(that is, rotate the A register left 5 bits, or ADD A five times). |
|||
Although not normally required for application programs, the |
|||
directory information can be extracted from the buffer at this |
|||
position. |
|||
.pp |
|||
An ASCII question mark (63 decimal, 3F hexadecimal) in any |
|||
position from f1 through ex matches the corresponding field of |
|||
any directory entry on the default or auto-selected disk drive. |
|||
If the dr field contains an ASCII question mark, the auto disk |
|||
select function is disabled and the default disk is searched, |
|||
with the search function returning any matched entry, allocated |
|||
or free, belonging to any user number. This latter function is |
|||
not normally used by application programs, but it allows complete |
|||
flexibility to scan all current directory values. If the dr |
|||
field is not a question mark, the s2 byte is automatically |
|||
zeroed. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 18: SEARCH FOR NEXT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 12H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Search Next function is similar to the Search First function, except |
|||
that the directory scan continues from the last matched entry. |
|||
Similar to Function 17, Function 18 returns the decimal value 255 |
|||
in A when no more directory items match. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 19: DELETE FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 13H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Delete File function removes files that match the FCB |
|||
addressed by DE. The filename and type may contain ambiguous |
|||
references (that is, question marks in various positions), but the |
|||
drive select code cannot be ambiguous, as in the Search and |
|||
Search Next functions. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 19 returns a decimal 255 if the referenced file or files |
|||
cannot be found; otherwise, a value in the range 0 to 3 returned. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 20: READ SEQUENTIAL |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 14H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Given that the FCB addressed by DE has been activated through an |
|||
Open or Make function, the Read Sequential function reads the |
|||
next 128-byte record from the file into memory at the current DMA |
|||
address. The record is read from position cr of the extent, and |
|||
the cr field is automatically incremented to the next record |
|||
position. If the cr field overflows, the next logical extent is |
|||
automatically opened and the cr field is reset to zero in |
|||
preparation for the next read operation. The value 00H is |
|||
returned in the A register if the read operation was successful, |
|||
while a nonzero value is returned if no data exist at the next |
|||
record position (for example, end-of-file occurs). |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 21: WRITE SEQUENTAIL |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 15H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Given that the FCB addressed by DE has been activated through an |
|||
Open or Make function, the Write Sequential |
|||
function writes the 128-byte data record at the current DMA |
|||
address to the file named by the FCB. The record is placed at |
|||
position cr of the file, and the cr field is automatically |
|||
incremented to the next record position. If the cr field |
|||
overflows, the next logical extent is automatically opened and |
|||
the cr field is reset to zero in preparation for the next write |
|||
operation. Write operations can take place into an existing |
|||
file, in which case, newly written records overlay those that |
|||
already exist in the file. Register A = 00H upon return from a |
|||
successful write operation, while a nonzero value indicates an |
|||
unsuccessful write caused by a full disk. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 22: MAKE FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 16H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Make File operation is similar to the Open File operation |
|||
except that the FCB must name a file that does not exist in the |
|||
currently referenced disk directory (that is, the one named |
|||
explicitly by a nonzero dr code or the default disk if dr is |
|||
zero). The FDOS creates the file and initializes both the |
|||
directory and main memory value to an empty file. The programmer |
|||
must ensure that no duplicate filenames occur, and a preceding |
|||
delete operation is sufficient if there is any possibility of |
|||
duplication. Upon return, register A = 0, 1, 2, or 3 if the |
|||
operation was successful and 0FFH (255 decimal) if no more |
|||
directory space is available. The Make function has the side |
|||
effect of activating the FCB and thus a subsequent open is not |
|||
necessary. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 23: RENAME FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 17H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Rename function uses the FCB addressed by DE to change all |
|||
occurrences of the file named in the first 16 bytes to the file |
|||
named in the second 16 bytes. The drive code dr at postion 0 is |
|||
used to select the drive, while the drive code for the new |
|||
filename at position 16 of the FCB is assumed to be zero. Upon |
|||
return, register A is set to a value between 0 and 3 if the |
|||
rename was successful and 0FFH (255 decimal) if the first |
|||
filename could not be found in the directory scan. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 24: RETURN LOG-IN VECTOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 18H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: Log-in Vector |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The log-in vector value returned by CP/M is a 16-bit value in HL, where the |
|||
least significant bit of L corresponds to the first drive A and |
|||
the high-order bit of H corresponds to the sixteenth drive, |
|||
labeled P. A 0 bit indicates that the drive is not on-line, |
|||
while a 1 bit marks a drive that is actively on-line as a result |
|||
of an explicit disk drive selection or an implicit drive select |
|||
caused by a file operation that specified a nonzero dr field. |
|||
The user should note that compatibility is maintained with |
|||
earlier releases, because registers A and L contain the same values |
|||
upon return. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 25: RETURN CURRENT DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 19H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Current Disk |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 25 returns the currently selected default disk number in |
|||
register A. The disk numbers range from 0 through 15 |
|||
corresponding to drives A through P. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 26: SET DMA ADDRESS |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1AH |
|||
Registers DE: DMA Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
DMA is an acronym for Direct Memory Address, which is often used |
|||
in connection with disk controllers that directly access the |
|||
memory of the mainframe computer to transfer data to and from the |
|||
disk subsystem. Although many computer systems use non-DMA |
|||
access (that is, the data is transferred through programmed I/O |
|||
operations), the DMA address has, in CP/M, come to mean the |
|||
address at which the 128-byte data record resides before a disk |
|||
write and after a disk read. Upon cold start, warm start, or |
|||
disk system reset, the DMA address is automatically set to |
|||
BOOT+0080H. The Set DMA function can be used to change |
|||
this default value to address another area of memory where the |
|||
data records reside. Thus, the DMA address becomes the value |
|||
specified by DE until it is changed by a subsequent Set DMA |
|||
function, cold start, warm start, or disk system reset. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 27: GET ADDR (ALLOC) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1BH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: ALLOC Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
An allocation vector is maintained in main memory for each on- |
|||
line disk drive. Various system programs use the information |
|||
provided by the allocation vector to determine the amount of |
|||
remaining storage (see the STAT program). Function 27 returns |
|||
the base address of the allocation vector for the currently |
|||
selected disk drive. However, the allocation information might be |
|||
invalid if the selected disk has been marked Read-Only. Although |
|||
this function is not normally used by application programs, |
|||
additional details of the allocation vector are found in Chapter |
|||
6. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 28: WRITE PROTECT DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1CH |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Write Protect Disk function provides temporary write |
|||
protection for the currently selected disk. Any attempt to write |
|||
to the disk before the next cold or warm start operation produces |
|||
the message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS ERR on d:R/O |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 29: GET READ-ONLY VECTOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1DH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: R/O Vector Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 29 returns a bit vector in register pair HL, which |
|||
indicates drives that have the temporary Read-Only bit set. As |
|||
in Function 24, the least significant bit corresponds to drive A, |
|||
while the most significant bit corresponds to drive P. The R/O |
|||
bit is set either by an explicit call to Function 28 or by the |
|||
automatic software mechanisms within CP/M that detect changed |
|||
disks. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 30: SET FILE ATTRIBUTES |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1EH |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Set File Attributes function allows programmatic manipulation |
|||
of permanent indicators attached to files. In particular, the R/O |
|||
and System attributes (t1' and t2') can be set or reset. The DE |
|||
pair addresses an unambiguous filename with the appropriate |
|||
attributes set or reset. Function 30 searches for a match and |
|||
changes the matched directory entry to contain the selected |
|||
indicators. Indicators f1' through f4' are not currently used, |
|||
but may be useful for applications programs, since they are not |
|||
involved in the matching process during file open and close |
|||
operations. Indicators f5' through f8' and t3' are reserved for |
|||
future system expansion. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 31: GET ADDR (DISK PARMS) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1FH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: DPB Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The address of the BIOS resident disk parameter block is returned |
|||
in HL as a result of this function call. This address can be |
|||
used for either of two purposes. First, the disk parameter |
|||
values can be extracted for display and space computation |
|||
purposes, or transient programs can dynamically change the values |
|||
of current disk parameters when the disk environment changes, if |
|||
required. Normally, application programs will not require this |
|||
facility. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 32: SET/GET USER CODE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 20H |
|||
Register E: OFFH (get) or |
|||
User Code (set) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Current Code or |
|||
(no value) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
An application program can change or interrogate the currently |
|||
active user number by calling Function 32. If register E = 0FFH, |
|||
the value of the current user number is returned in register A, |
|||
where the value is in the range of 0 to 15. If register E is not |
|||
0FFH, the current user number is changed to the value of E, |
|||
modulo 16. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 33: READ RANDOM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 21H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Return Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Read Random function is similar to the sequential file read |
|||
operation of previous releases, except that the read operation |
|||
takes place at a particular record number, selected by the 24-bit |
|||
value constructed from the 3-byte field following the FCB (byte |
|||
positions r0 at 33, r1 at 34, and r2 at 35). The user should |
|||
note that the sequence of 24 bits is stored with least |
|||
significant byte first (r0), middle byte next (r1), and high byte |
|||
last (r2). CP/M does not reference byte r2, except in computing |
|||
the size of a file (Function 35). Byte r2 must be zero, however, |
|||
since a nonzero value indicates overflow past the end of file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Thus, the r0, r1 byte pair is treated as a double-byte, or word |
|||
value, that contains the record to read. This value ranges from |
|||
0 to 65535, providing access to any particular record of the 8- |
|||
megabyte file. To process a file using random access, the base |
|||
extent (extent 0) must first be opened. Although the base extent |
|||
might or might not contain any allocated data, this ensures that the |
|||
file is properly recorded in the directory and is visible in DIR |
|||
requests. The selected record number is then stored in the |
|||
random record field (r0, r1), and the BDOS is called to read the |
|||
record. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon return from the call, register A either contains an error |
|||
code, as listed below, or the value 00, indicating the operation |
|||
was successful. In the latter case, the current DMA address |
|||
contains the randomly accessed record. Note that |
|||
contrary to the sequential read operation, the record number is |
|||
not advanced. Thus, subsequent random read operations continue |
|||
to read the same record. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon each random read operation, the logical extent and current |
|||
record values are automatically set. Thus, the file can be |
|||
sequentially read or written, starting from the current randomly |
|||
accessed position. However, note that, in this |
|||
case, the last randomly read record will be reread as one |
|||
switches from random mode to sequential read and the last record |
|||
will be rewritten as one switches to a sequential write operation. |
|||
The user can simply advance the random record |
|||
position following each random read or write to obtain the effect |
|||
of sequential I/O operation. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Error codes returned in register A following a random read are |
|||
listed below. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
01 reading unwritten data |
|||
.sp |
|||
02 (not returned in random mode) |
|||
.sp |
|||
03 cannot close current extent |
|||
.sp |
|||
04 seek to unwritten extent |
|||
.sp |
|||
05 (not returned in read mode) |
|||
.sp |
|||
06 seek past physical end of disk |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Error codes 01 and 04 occur when a random read operation accesses |
|||
a data block that has not been previously written or an extent |
|||
that has not been created, which are equivalent conditions. |
|||
Error code 03 does not normally occur under proper system |
|||
operation. If it does, it can be cleared by simply rereading or |
|||
reopening extent zero as long as the disk is not physically write |
|||
protected. Error code 06 occurs whenever byte r2 is nonzero |
|||
under the current 2.0 release. Normally, nonzero return codes |
|||
can be treated as missing data, with zero return codes indicating |
|||
operation complete. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 34: WRITE RANDOM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 22H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Return Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Write Random operation is initiated similarly to the Read |
|||
Random call, except that data is written to the disk from the |
|||
current DMA address. Further, if the disk extent or data block |
|||
that is the target of the write has not yet been allocated, the |
|||
allocation is performed before the write operation continues. As |
|||
in the Read Random operation, the random record number is not |
|||
changed as a result of the write. The logical extent number and |
|||
current record positions of the FCB are set to correspond to the |
|||
random record that is being written. Again, sequential read or |
|||
write operations can begin following a random write, with the |
|||
notation that the currently addressed record is either read or |
|||
rewritten again as the sequential operation begins. You can |
|||
also simply advance the random record position following each |
|||
write to get the effect of a sequential write operation. |
|||
Note that reading or writing the last record of an extent in |
|||
random mode does not cause an automatic extent switch as it does |
|||
in sequential mode. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The error codes returned by a random write are identical to the |
|||
random read operation with the addition of error code 05, which |
|||
indicates that a new extent cannot be created as a result of |
|||
directory overflow. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 35: COMPUTE FILE SIZE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 23H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Random Record Field Set |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
When computing the size of a file, the DE register pair addresses |
|||
an FCB in random mode format (bytes r0, r1, and r2 are present). |
|||
The FCB contains an unambiguous filename that is used in the |
|||
directory scan. Upon return, the random record bytes contain the |
|||
virtual file size, which is, in effect, the record address of |
|||
the record following the end of the file. Following a call to |
|||
Function 35, if the high record byte r2 is 01, the file contains |
|||
the maximum record count 65536. Otherwise, bytes r0 and r1 |
|||
constitute a 16-bit value as before (r0 is the least significant byte), |
|||
which is the file size. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Data can be appended to the end of an existing file by simply |
|||
calling Function 35 to set the random record position to the end |
|||
of file and then performing a sequence of random writes starting |
|||
at the preset record address. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The virtual size of a file corresponds to the physical size when |
|||
the file is written sequentially. If the file was created in |
|||
random mode and holes exist in the allocation, the file might |
|||
contain fewer records than the size indicates. For example, |
|||
if only the last record of an 8-megabyte file is written in |
|||
random mode (that is, record number 65535), the virtual size is |
|||
65536 records, although only one block of data is actually |
|||
allocated. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 36: SET RANDOM RECORD |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 24H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Random Record Field Set |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Set Random Record function causes the BDOS automatically |
|||
to produce the random record position from a file that has been |
|||
read or written sequentially to a particular point. The function |
|||
can be useful in two ways. |
|||
.pp |
|||
First, it is often necessary initially to read and scan a |
|||
sequential file to extract the positions of various key fields. |
|||
As each key is encountered, Function 36 is called to compute the |
|||
random record position for the data corresponding to this key. If |
|||
the data unit size is 128 bytes, the resulting record position is |
|||
placed into a table with the key for later retrieval. After |
|||
scanning the entire file and tabulating the keys and their record |
|||
numbers, the user can move instantly to a particular keyed record |
|||
by performing a random read, using the corresponding random |
|||
record number that was saved earlier. The scheme is easily |
|||
generalized for variable record lengths, because the program need |
|||
only store the buffer-relative byte position along with the key |
|||
and record number to find the exact starting position of the |
|||
keyed data at a later time. |
|||
.pp |
|||
A second use of Function 36 occurs when switching from a |
|||
sequential read or write over to random read or write. A file is |
|||
sequentially accessed to a particular point in the file, Function |
|||
36 is called, which sets the record number, and subsequent random |
|||
read and write operations continue from the selected point in the |
|||
file. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 37: RESET DRIVE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 25H |
|||
Registers DE: Drive Vector |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: 00H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Reset Drive function allows resetting of specified drives. |
|||
The passed parameter is a 16-bit vector of drives to be reset; |
|||
the least significant bit is drive A:. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To maintain compatibility with MP/M, CP/M returns a zero value. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 40: WRITE RANDOM WITH ZERO FILL |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 28H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Return Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Write With Zero Fill operation is similar to Function 34, |
|||
with the exception that a previously unallocated block is filled |
|||
with zeros before the data is written. |
|||
.nx fivec |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,444 +0,0 @@ |
|||
|
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.3 A Sample Copy Program |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following program provides a relatively simple example of file |
|||
operations. The program source file is created as COPY.ASM using |
|||
the CP/M ED program and then assembled using ASM or MAC, resulting |
|||
in a HEX file. The LOAD program is used to produce a COPY.COM |
|||
file that executes directly under the CCP. The program begins |
|||
by setting the stack pointer to a local area and proceeds to move |
|||
the second name from the default area at 006CH to a 33-byte File |
|||
Control Block called DFCB. The DFCB is then prepared for file |
|||
operations by clearing the current record field. At this point, |
|||
the source and destination FCBs are ready for processing, because |
|||
the SFCB at 005CH is properly set up by the CCP upon entry to the |
|||
COPY program. That is, the first name is placed into the default |
|||
FCB, with the proper fields zeroed, including the current record |
|||
field at 007CH. The program continues by opening the source |
|||
file, deleting any existing destination file, and creating the destination |
|||
file. If all this is successful, the program loops at the label |
|||
COPY until each record is read from the source file and placed into the |
|||
destination file. Upon completion of the data transfer, the |
|||
destination file is closed and the program returns to the |
|||
CCP command level by jumping to BOOT. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
; sample file-to-file copy program |
|||
; |
|||
; at the ccp level, the command |
|||
; |
|||
; copy a:x.y b:u.v |
|||
; |
|||
; copies the file named x.y from drive |
|||
; a to a file named u.v. on drive b. |
|||
; |
|||
0000 = boot equ 0000h ;system reboot |
|||
0005 = bdos equ 0005h ;bdos entry point |
|||
005c = fcbl equ 005ch ;first file name |
|||
005c = sfcb equ fcbl ;source fcb |
|||
006c = fcb2 equ 006ch ;second file name |
|||
0080 = dbuff equ 0080h ;default buffer |
|||
0100 = tpa equ 0100h ;beginning of tpa |
|||
; |
|||
0009 = printf equ 9 ;print buffer func# |
|||
000f = openf equ 15 ;open file func# |
|||
0010 = closef equ 16 ;close file func# |
|||
0013 = deletef equ 19 ;delete file func# |
|||
0014 = readf equ 20 ;sequential read |
|||
0015 = writef equ 21 ;sequential write |
|||
0016 = makef equ 22 ;make file func# |
|||
; |
|||
0100 org tpa ;beginning of tpa |
|||
0100 311b02 lxi sp,stack ;local stack |
|||
; |
|||
; move second file name to dfcb |
|||
0103 0e10 mvi c,16 ;half an fcb |
|||
0105 116c00 lxi d,fcb2 ;source of move |
|||
0108 21da01 lxi h,dfcb ;destination fcb |
|||
010b 1a mfcb: Idax d ;source fcb |
|||
010c 13 inx d ;ready next |
|||
010d 77 mov m,a ;dest fcb |
|||
010e 23 inx h ;ready next |
|||
010f 0d dcr c ;count 16...0 |
|||
0110 c10b01 jnz mfcb ;loop 16 times |
|||
; |
|||
; name has been removed, zero cr |
|||
0113 af xra a ;a = 00h |
|||
0114 32fa01 sta dfcbcr ;current rec = 0 |
|||
; |
|||
; source and destination fcb's ready |
|||
; |
|||
0117 115c00 lxi d,sfcb ;source file |
|||
011a cd6901 call open ;error if 255 |
|||
011d 118701 lxi d,nofile ;ready message |
|||
0120 3c inr a ;255 becomes 0 |
|||
0121 cc6101 cz finis ;done if no file |
|||
; |
|||
; source file open, prep destination |
|||
0124 11da01 lxi d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
0127 cd7301 call delete ;remove if present |
|||
; |
|||
012a 11da01 lxi d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
012d cd8201 call make ;create the file |
|||
0130 119601 lxi d,nodir ;ready message |
|||
0133 3c inr a ;255 becomes 0 |
|||
0134 cc6101 cz finis ;done if no dir space |
|||
; |
|||
; source file open, dest file open |
|||
; copy until end of file on source |
|||
; |
|||
0137 115c00 copy: lxi d,sfcb ;source |
|||
013a cd7801 call read ;read next record |
|||
013d b7 ora a ;end of file? |
|||
013e c25101 jnz eofile ;skip write if so |
|||
; |
|||
; not end of file, write the record |
|||
0141 11da01 lix d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
0144 cd7d01 call write ;write record |
|||
0147 11a901 lxi d,space ;ready message |
|||
014a b7 ora a ;00 if write ok |
|||
014b c46101 cnz finis ;end if so |
|||
014e c33701 jmp copy ;loop until eof |
|||
; |
|||
eofile: ;end of file, close destination |
|||
0151 11da01 lxi d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
0154 cd6e01 call close ;255 if error |
|||
0157 21bb01 lxi h,wrprot ;ready message |
|||
015a 3c inr a ;255 becomes 00 |
|||
015b cc6101 cz finis ;shouldn't happen |
|||
; |
|||
; copy operation complete, end |
|||
015e 11cc01 lxi d,normal ;ready message |
|||
; |
|||
finis ;write message given by de, reboot |
|||
0161 0e09 mvi c,printf |
|||
0163 cd0500 call bdos ;write message |
|||
0166 c30000 jmp boot ;reboot system |
|||
; |
|||
; system interface subroutines |
|||
; (all return directly from bdos) |
|||
; |
|||
0169 0e0f open: mvi c,openf |
|||
016b c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
016e 0e10 close: mvi c,closef |
|||
0170 c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
0173 0e13 delete mvi c,deletef |
|||
0175 c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
0178 0e14 read: mvi c,readf |
|||
017a c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
017d 0e15 write: mvi c,writef |
|||
017f c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
0182 0e16 make: mvi c,makef |
|||
0184 c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
; console messages |
|||
0187 6e6f20f nofile: db 'no source file$' |
|||
0196 6e6f209 nodir: db 'no directory space$' |
|||
01a9 6f7574f space: db 'out of dat space$' |
|||
01bb 7772695 wrprot: db 'write protected?$' |
|||
01cc 636f700 normal: db 'copy complete$' |
|||
; |
|||
; data areas |
|||
01da dfcb: ds 33 ;destination fcb |
|||
01fa dfcbcr equ dfcb+32 ;current record |
|||
; |
|||
01fb ds 32 ;16 level stack |
|||
stack: |
|||
021b end |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that there are several simplifications in this |
|||
particular program. First, there are no checks for invalid filenames |
|||
that could contain ambiguous references. This |
|||
situation could be detected by scanning the 32-byte default area |
|||
starting at location 005CH for ASCII question marks. A check |
|||
should also be make to ensure that the filenames have |
|||
been included (check locations 005DH and 006DH for nonblank ASCII |
|||
characters). Finally, a check should be made to ensure that the |
|||
source and destination filenames are different. An improvement |
|||
in speed could be obtained by buffering more data on each read |
|||
operation. One could, for example, determine the size of memory |
|||
by fetching FBASE from location 0006H and using the entire |
|||
remaining portion of memory for a data buffer. In this case, the |
|||
programmer simply resets the DMA address to the next successive |
|||
128-byte area before each read. Upon writing to the destination |
|||
file, the DMA address is reset to the beginning of the buffer and |
|||
incremented by 128 bytes to the end as each record is |
|||
transferred to the destination file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility |
|||
.tc 5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following file dump program is slightly more complex than |
|||
the simple copy program given in the previous section. The dump |
|||
program reads an input file, specified in the CCP command line, |
|||
and displays the content of each record in hexadecimal format at |
|||
the console. Note that the dump program saves the CCP's stack |
|||
upon entry, resets the stack to a local area, and restores the |
|||
CCP's stack before returning directly to the CCP. Thus, the |
|||
dump program does not perform and warm start at the end of |
|||
processing. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
x.in 5 |
|||
;DUMP program reads input file and displays |
|||
hex data |
|||
; |
|||
0100 org 100h |
|||
0005 = bdos equ 0005h = ;bdos entry point |
|||
0001 = cons equ 1 ;read console |
|||
0002 = typef equ 2 ;type function |
|||
0009 = printf equ 9 ;buffer print entry |
|||
000b = brkf equ 11 ;break key function |
|||
;(true if char |
|||
000f = openf equ 15 ;file open |
|||
0014 = readf equ 20 ;read function |
|||
; |
|||
005c = fcb equ 5ch ;file control block |
|||
;address |
|||
0080 = buff equ 80h ;input disk buffer |
|||
;address |
|||
; |
|||
; non graphic characters |
|||
000d = cr equ 0dh ;carriage return |
|||
000a = If equ 0ah ;line feed |
|||
; |
|||
; file control block definitions |
|||
005c = fcbdn equ fcb+0 ;disk name |
|||
005d = fcbfn equ fcb+1 ;file name |
|||
0065 = fcbft equ fcb+9 ;disk file type (3 |
|||
;characters) |
|||
0068 = fcbrl equ fcb+12 ;file's current reel |
|||
;number |
|||
006b = fcbrc equ fcb+15 ;file's record count (0 to |
|||
;128)128) |
|||
007c = fcbcr' equ fcb+32 ;current (next) record |
|||
;number (0 |
|||
007d = fcbin equ fcb+33 ;fcb length |
|||
; |
|||
; set up stack |
|||
0100 210000 lxi h,0 |
|||
0103 39 dad sp |
|||
; entry stack pointer in hl from the ccp |
|||
0104 221502 shld oldsp |
|||
; set sp to local stack area (restored at |
|||
; finis) |
|||
0107 315702 lxi sp,stktop |
|||
; read and print successive buffers |
|||
010a cdc101 call setup ;set up input file |
|||
010d feff cpi 255 ;255 if file not present |
|||
010f c21b01 jnz openok ;skip if open is ok |
|||
; |
|||
; file not there, give error message and |
|||
; return |
|||
0112 11f301 lxi d,opnmsg |
|||
0115 cd9c01 call err |
|||
0118 c35101 jmp finis ;to return |
|||
; |
|||
openok: ;open operation ok, set buffer index to |
|||
;end |
|||
011b 3e80 mvi a,80h |
|||
011d 321302 sta ibp ;set buffer pointer to 80h |
|||
; hl contains next address to print |
|||
0120 210000 lxi h,0 ;start with 0000 |
|||
; |
|||
gloop: |
|||
0123 e5 push h ;save line position |
|||
0124 cda201 call gnb |
|||
0127 e1 pop h ;recall line position |
|||
0138 da5101 jc finis ;carry set by gnb if end |
|||
;file |
|||
012b 47 mov b,a |
|||
; print hex values |
|||
; check for line fold |
|||
012c 7d |
|||
mov a,l |
|||
012d e60f ani 0fh ;check low 4 bits |
|||
012f c24401 jnz nonum |
|||
; print line number |
|||
0132 cd7201 call crlf |
|||
; |
|||
; check for break key |
|||
0135 cd5901 call break |
|||
; accum lsb = 1 if character ready |
|||
0138 0f rrc ;into carry |
|||
0139 da5101 jc finis ;don't print any more |
|||
; |
|||
013c 7c mov a,h |
|||
013d cd8f01 call phex |
|||
0140 7d mov a,l |
|||
0141 cd8f01 call phex |
|||
nonum |
|||
0144 23 inx h ;to next line number |
|||
0145 3e20 mvi a,'' |
|||
0147 cd6501 call pchar |
|||
014a 78 mov a,b |
|||
014b cd8f01 call phex |
|||
014e c32301 jmp gloop |
|||
; |
|||
finis |
|||
; end of dump, return to cco |
|||
; (note that a jmp to 0000h reboots) |
|||
0151 cd7201 call crif |
|||
0154 2a1502 lhld oldsp |
|||
0157 f9 sphl |
|||
; stack pointer contains ccp's stack |
|||
; location |
|||
0158 c9 ret ;to the ccp |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
; subroutines |
|||
; |
|||
break: ;check break key (actually any key will |
|||
;do) |
|||
0159 e5d5c5 push h! push d! push b; environment |
|||
;saved |
|||
015c 0e0b mvi c,brkf |
|||
015e cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0161 c1d1e1 pop b! pop d! pop h; environment |
|||
restored |
|||
0164 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
pchar: ;print a character |
|||
0165 e5d5c5 push h! push d! push b; saved |
|||
0168 0e02 mvi c, typef |
|||
016a 5f mov e,a |
|||
016b cd0500 call bdos |
|||
016e c1d1e1 pop b! pop d! pop h; restored |
|||
0171 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
crlf |
|||
0172 3e0d mvi a,cr |
|||
0174 cd6501 call pchar |
|||
0177 3e0a mvi a,lf |
|||
0179 cd6501 call pchar |
|||
017c c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
pnib: ;print nibble in reg a |
|||
017d e60f ani ofh ;low 4 bits |
|||
017f fe0a cpi 10 |
|||
0181 d28901 jnc p10 |
|||
; less than or equal to 9 |
|||
0184 c630 adi '0' |
|||
0186 c38b01 jmp prn |
|||
; |
|||
; greater or equal to 10 |
|||
0189 c637 p10: adi 'a' - 10 |
|||
018b cd6501 prn: call pchar |
|||
018e c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
phex ;print hex char in reg a |
|||
018f f5 pushpsw |
|||
0190 0f rrc |
|||
0191 0f rrc |
|||
0192 0f rrc |
|||
0193 0f rrc |
|||
0194 cd7d01 call pnib ;print nibble |
|||
0197 f1 pop psw |
|||
0198 cd7d01 call pnip |
|||
019b c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
err: ;print error message |
|||
; d,e addresses message ending with "$" |
|||
019c 0e09 mvi c,printf ;print buffer |
|||
;function |
|||
019e cd0500 call bdos |
|||
01a1 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
gnb: ;get next byte |
|||
01a2 3a1302 lda ibp |
|||
01a5 fe80 cpi 80h |
|||
01a7 c2b301 jnz g0 |
|||
; read another buffer |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
01aa cdce01 call diskr |
|||
01ad b7 ora a ;zero value if read ok |
|||
01ae cab301 jz g0 ;for another byte |
|||
; end of data, return with carry set for eof |
|||
01b1 37 stc |
|||
01b2 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
g0: ;read the byte at buff+reg a |
|||
01b3 5f mov e,a ;Is byte of buffer index |
|||
01b4 1600 mvi d,0 ;double precision |
|||
;index to de |
|||
01b6 3c inr a ;index=index+1 |
|||
01b7 321302 sta ibp ;back to memory |
|||
; pointer is incremented |
|||
; save the current file address |
|||
01ba 218000 lxi h,buff |
|||
01bd 19 dad d |
|||
; absolute character address is in hl |
|||
01be 7e mov a,m |
|||
; byte is in the accumulator |
|||
01bf b7 ora a ;reset carry bit |
|||
01c0 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
setup: ;set up file |
|||
; open the file for input |
|||
01c1 af xra a ;zero to accum |
|||
01c2 327c00 sta fcbcr ;clear current record |
|||
; |
|||
01c5 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
01c8 0e0f mvi c,openf |
|||
01ca cd0500 call bdos |
|||
; 255 in accum if open error |
|||
01cd c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
diskr: ;read disk file record |
|||
01ce e5d5c5 push h! push d! push b |
|||
01d1 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
01d4 0e14 mvi c,readf |
|||
01d6 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
01d9 c1d1e1 pop b! pop d! pop h |
|||
01dc c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
; fixed message area |
|||
01dd 46494c0 signon: db 'file dump version 2.0$' |
|||
01f3 0d0a4e0 opnmsg: db cr,lf,'no input file present on |
|||
disk$' |
|||
|
|||
; variable area |
|||
0213 ibp: ds 2 ;input buffer pointer |
|||
0215 oldsp: ds 2 ;entry sp value from ccp |
|||
; |
|||
; stack area |
|||
0217 ; ds 64 ;reserve 32 level stack |
|||
stktop: |
|||
; |
|||
0257 end |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.nx fived |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,497 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.5 Sample Random Access Program |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.5 A Sample Random Access Program |
|||
.qs |
|||
.tc 5.5 A Sample Random Access Program |
|||
.pp |
|||
This chapter concludes with an extensive example of random access operation. |
|||
The program listed below performs the simple function of reading or writing |
|||
random records upon command from the terminal. When a |
|||
program has been created, assembled, and placed into a file |
|||
labeled RANDOM.COM, the CCP level command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
RANDOM X.DAT |
|||
.sp |
|||
starts the test program. The program looks for a file by the |
|||
name X.DAT and, if found, proceeds to prompt the console for |
|||
input. If not found, the file is created before the prompt is |
|||
given. Each prompt takes the form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
next command? |
|||
.sp |
|||
and is followed by operator input, followed by a carriage |
|||
return. The input commands take the form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
nW nR Q |
|||
.sp |
|||
where n is an integer value in the range 0 to 65535, and W, R, |
|||
and Q are simple command characters corresponding to random |
|||
write, random read, and quit processing, respectively. If the W |
|||
command is issued, the RANDOM program issues the prompt |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
type data: |
|||
.sp |
|||
The operator then responds by typing up to 127 characters, |
|||
followed by a carriage return. RANDOM then writes the character |
|||
string into the X.DAT file at record n. If the R command is |
|||
issued, RANDOM reads record number n and displays the string |
|||
value at the console, If the Q command is issued, the X.DAT file |
|||
is closed, and the program returns to the CCP. In the interest |
|||
of brevity, the only error message is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
error, try again. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The program begins with an initialization section where the input |
|||
file is opened or created, followed by a continuous loop at the |
|||
label ready where the individual commands are interpreted. The |
|||
DFBC at 005CH and the default buffer at 0080H are used in all |
|||
disk operations. The utility subroutines then follow, which |
|||
contain the principal input line processor, called readc. This |
|||
particular program shows the elements of random access |
|||
processing, and can be used as the basis for further program |
|||
development. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Sample Random Access Program for CP/M 2.0 |
|||
.qs |
|||
|
|||
0100 org 100h ;base of tpa |
|||
; |
|||
0000 = reboot equ 0000h ;system reboot |
|||
0005 = bdos equ 0005h ;bdos entry point |
|||
; |
|||
0001 = coninp equ 1 ;console input function |
|||
0002 = conout equ 2 ;console output function |
|||
0009 = pstring equ 9 ;print string until '$' |
|||
000a = rstring equ 10 ;read console buffer |
|||
000c = version equ 12 ;return version number |
|||
000f = openf equ 15 ;file open function |
|||
0010 = closef equ 16 ;close function |
|||
0016 = makef equ 22 ;make file function |
|||
0021 = readr equ 33 ;read random |
|||
0022 = writer equ 34 ;write random |
|||
; |
|||
005c = fcb equ 005ch ;default file control |
|||
;block |
|||
007d = ranrec equ fcb+33 ;random record position |
|||
007f = ranovf equ fcb+35 ;high order (overflow) |
|||
;byte |
|||
0080 = buff equ 0080h ;buffer address |
|||
; |
|||
000d = cr equ 0dh ;carriage return |
|||
000a = lf equ 0ah ;line feed |
|||
; |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.sh |
|||
Load SP, Set-Up File for Random Access |
|||
.qs |
|||
|
|||
0100 31bc00 lxi sp,stack |
|||
; |
|||
; version 2.0 |
|||
0103 0e0c mvi c,version |
|||
0105 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0108 fe20 cpi 20h ;version 2.0 or better? |
|||
010a d21600 jnc versok |
|||
; bad version, message and go back |
|||
010d 111b00 lxi d,badver |
|||
0110 cdda00 call print |
|||
0113 c30000 jmp reboot |
|||
; |
|||
versok: |
|||
; correct versionm for random access |
|||
0116 0e0f mvi c,openf ;open default fcb |
|||
0118 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
011b cd 0500 call bdos |
|||
011e 3c inr a ;err 255 becomes zero |
|||
011f c23700 jnz ready |
|||
; |
|||
; connot open file, so create it |
|||
0122 0e16 mvi c,makef |
|||
0124 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
0127 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
012a 3c inr a ;err 255 becomes zero |
|||
012b c23700 jnz ready |
|||
; |
|||
; cannot create file, directory full |
|||
012e 113a00 lxi d,nospace |
|||
0131 cdda00 call print |
|||
0134 c30000 jmp reboot ;back to ccp |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Loop Back to Ready After Each Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
ready: |
|||
; file is ready for processing |
|||
; |
|||
0137 cde500 call readcom ;read next command |
|||
013a 227d00 shld ranrec ;store input record# |
|||
013d 217f00 lxi h,ranovf |
|||
0140 3600 mvi m,0 ;clear high byte if set |
|||
0142 fe51 cpi 'Q' ;quit? |
|||
0144 c25600 jnz notq |
|||
; |
|||
; quit processing, close file |
|||
0147 0e10 mvi c,closef |
|||
0149 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
014c cd0500 call bdos |
|||
014f 3c inr a ;err 255 becomes 0 |
|||
0150 cab900 jz error ;error message, retry |
|||
0153 c30000 jmp reboot ;back to ccp |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
End of Quit Command, Process Write |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
notq: |
|||
; not the quit command, random write? |
|||
0156 fe57 cpi 'W' |
|||
0158 c28900 jnz notw |
|||
; |
|||
; this is a random write, fill buffer untill cr |
|||
015b 114d00 lxi d,datmsg |
|||
015e cdda00 call print ;data prompt |
|||
0161 0e7f mvi c,127 ;up to 127 characters |
|||
0163 218000 lxi h,buff ;destination |
|||
rloop: ;read next character to buff |
|||
0166 c5 push b ;save counter |
|||
0167 e5 push h ;next destination |
|||
0168 cdc200 call getchr ;character to a |
|||
016b e1 pop h ;restore counter |
|||
016c c1 pop b ;restore next to fill |
|||
016d fe0d cpi cr ;end of line? |
|||
016f ca7800 jz erloop |
|||
; not end, store character |
|||
0172 77 mov m,a |
|||
0173 23 inx h ;next to fill |
|||
0174 0d dcr c ;counter goes down |
|||
0175 c26600 jnz rloop ;end of buffer? |
|||
erloop: |
|||
; end of read loop, store 00 |
|||
0178 3600 mvi m,0 |
|||
; |
|||
; write the record to selected record number |
|||
017a 0e22 mvi c,writer |
|||
017c 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
017c cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0182 b7 ora a ;erro code zero? |
|||
0183 c2b900 jnz error ;message if not |
|||
0186 c33700 jmp ready ;for another record |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
End of Write Command, Process Read |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
notw: |
|||
; not a write command, read record? |
|||
0189 fe52 cpi 'R' |
|||
018b c2b900 jnz error ;skip if not |
|||
; |
|||
; read random record |
|||
018e 0e21 mvi c,readr |
|||
0190 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
0193 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0196 b7 ora a ;return code 00? |
|||
0197 c2b900 jnz error |
|||
; |
|||
; read was successful, write to console |
|||
019a cdcf00 call crlf ;new line |
|||
019d 0e80 mvi c,128 ;max 128 characters |
|||
019f 218000 lxi h,buff ;next to get |
|||
wloop: |
|||
01a2 7e mov a,m ;next character |
|||
01a3 23 inx h ;next to get |
|||
01a4 e67f ani 7fh ;mask parity |
|||
01a6 ca3700 jz ready ;for another command |
|||
;if 00 |
|||
01a9 c5 push b ;save counter |
|||
01aa e5 push h ;save next to get |
|||
01ab fe20 cpi '' ;graphic? |
|||
01ad d4c800 cnc putchr ;skip output if not |
|||
01b0 e1 pop h |
|||
01b1 c1 pop b |
|||
01b2 0d dcr c ;count=count-1 |
|||
01b3 c2a200 jnz wloop |
|||
01b6 c33700 jmp ready |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
End of Read Command, All Errors End Up Here |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
error: |
|||
01b9 115900 lxi d,errmsg |
|||
01bc cdda00 call print |
|||
01bf c33700 jmp ready |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Utility Subroutines for Console I/O |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
getchr: |
|||
;read next console character to a |
|||
01c2 0e01 mvi c,coninp |
|||
01c4 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
01c7 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
putchr: |
|||
;write character from a to console |
|||
01c8 0e02 mvi c,conout |
|||
01ca 5f mov e,a ;character to send |
|||
01cb cd0500 call bdos ;send character |
|||
01ce c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
crlf: |
|||
;send carriage return line feed |
|||
01cf 3e0d mvi a,cr ;carriage return |
|||
01d1 cdc800 call putchr |
|||
01d4 3e0a mvi a,lf ;line feed |
|||
01d6 cdc800 call putchr |
|||
01d9 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
print: |
|||
;print the buffer addressed by de untill $ |
|||
01da d5 push d |
|||
01db cdcf00 call crlf |
|||
01de d1 pop d ;new line |
|||
01df 0e09 mvi c,pstring |
|||
01e0 cd0500 call bdos ;print the string |
|||
01e4 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
readcom: |
|||
;read the next command line to the conbuf |
|||
01e5 116b00 lxi d,prompt |
|||
01e8 cdda00 call print ;command? |
|||
01eb 0e0a mvi c,rstring |
|||
01ed 117a00 lxi d,conbuf |
|||
01f0 cd0500 call bdos ;read command line |
|||
; command line is present, scan it |
|||
01f3 210000 lxi h,0 ;start with 0000 |
|||
01f6 117c00 lxi d,conlin ;command line |
|||
01f9 1a readc: ldax d ;next command |
|||
;character |
|||
01fa 13 inx d ;to next command |
|||
;position |
|||
01fb b7 ora a ;cannot be end of |
|||
;command |
|||
01fc c8 rz |
|||
; not zero, numeric? |
|||
01fd d630 sui '0' |
|||
01ff fe0a cpi 10 ;carry if numeric |
|||
0201 d21300 jnc endrd |
|||
; add-in next digit |
|||
0204 29 dad h ;*2 |
|||
0205 4d mov c,l |
|||
0206 44 mov b,h ;bc = value * 2 |
|||
0207 29 dad h ;*4 |
|||
0208 29 dad h ;*8 |
|||
0209 09 dad b ;*2 + *8 = *10 |
|||
020a 85 add l ;*digit |
|||
020b 6f mov l,a |
|||
020c d2f900 jnc readc ;for another char |
|||
020f24 inr h ;overflow |
|||
0210 c3f900 jmp readc ;for another char |
|||
endrd: |
|||
; end of read, restore value in a |
|||
0213 c630 adi '0' ;command |
|||
0215 fe61 cpi 'a' ;translate case? |
|||
0217 d8 rc |
|||
; lower case, mask lower case bits |
|||
0218 e65f ani 101$1111b |
|||
021a c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
String Data Area for Console Messages |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
badver: |
|||
021b 536f79 db 'sorry, you need cp/m version 2$' |
|||
nospace: |
|||
023a 4e6f29 db 'no directory space$' |
|||
datmsg: |
|||
024d 547970 db 'type data: $' |
|||
errmsg: |
|||
0259 457272 db 'error, try again.$' |
|||
prompt: |
|||
026b 4e6570 db 'next command? $' |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Fixed and Variable Data Area |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
027a 21 conbuf: db conlen ;length of console buffer |
|||
027b consiz: ds 1 ;resulting size after read |
|||
027c conlin: ds 32 ;length 32 buffer |
|||
0021 = conlen equ $-consiz |
|||
; |
|||
029c ds 32 ;16 level stack |
|||
stack: |
|||
02bc end |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
Major improvements could be made to this particular program to enhance |
|||
its operation. In fact, with some work, this program could |
|||
evolve into a simple data base management system. One could, for |
|||
example, assume a standard record size of 128 bytes, consisting |
|||
to arbitrary fields within the record. A program, called GETKEY, |
|||
could be developed that first reads a sequential file and |
|||
extracts a specific field defined by the operator. For example, |
|||
the command |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
GETKEY NAMES.DAT LASTNAME 10 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
would cause GETKEY to read the data base file NAMES.DAT and |
|||
extract the LAST-NAME field from each record, starting in |
|||
position 10 and ending at character 20. GETKEY builds a table in |
|||
memory consisting of each particular LASTNAME field, along with |
|||
its 16-bit record number location within the file. The GETKEY |
|||
program then sorts this list and writes a new file, called |
|||
LASTNAME.KEY, which is an alphabetical list of LASTNAME fields |
|||
with their corresponding record numbers. This list is called an |
|||
inverted index in information retrieval parlance. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the programmer were to rename the program shown above as QUERY |
|||
and modify it so that it reads a sorted key file into memory, |
|||
the command line might appear as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
QUERY NAMES.DAT LASTNAME.KEY |
|||
.sp |
|||
Instead of reading a number, the QUERY program reads an |
|||
alphanumeric string that is a particular key to find in the |
|||
NAMES.DAT data base. Because the LASTNAME.KEY list is sorted, one |
|||
can find a particular entry rapidly by performing a binary |
|||
search, similar to looking up a name in the telephone book. |
|||
Starting at both ends of the list, one examines the |
|||
entry halfway in between and, if not matched, splits either the |
|||
upper half or the lower half for the next search. You will |
|||
quickly reach the item you are looking for and find the |
|||
corresponding record number. You should fetch and display |
|||
this record at the console, just as was done in the program shown |
|||
above. |
|||
.pp |
|||
With some more work, you can allow a fixed grouping size |
|||
that differs from the 128-byte record shown above. This is |
|||
accomplished by keeping track of the record number and the |
|||
byte offset within the record. Knowing the group size, you |
|||
randomly access the record containing the proper group, offset |
|||
to the beginning of the group within the record read sequentially |
|||
until the group size has been exhausted. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Finally, you can improve QUERY considerably by allowing boolean |
|||
expressions, which compute the set of records that satisfy |
|||
several relationships, such as a LASTNAME between HARDY and |
|||
LAUREL and an AGE lower than 45. Display all the records that |
|||
fit this description. Finally, if your lists are getting |
|||
too big to fit into memory, randomly access key |
|||
files from the disk as well. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 5.6 System Function Summary |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.6 System Function Summary |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.6 System Function Summary |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Function Function Input Output |
|||
Number Name |
|||
.sp |
|||
Decimal Hex |
|||
.sp |
|||
0 0 System Reset C = 00H none |
|||
1 1 Console Input C = 01H A = ASCII char |
|||
2 2 Console Output E = char none |
|||
3 3 Reader Input A = ASCII char |
|||
4 4 Punch Output E = char none |
|||
5 5 List Output E = char none |
|||
6 6 Direct Console I/O C = 06H A = char or status |
|||
|
|||
E = 0FFH (input) or (no value) |
|||
0FEH (status) or |
|||
char (output) |
|||
7 7 Get I/O Byte none A = I/O byte |
|||
Value |
|||
8 8 Set I/O Byte E = I/O Byte none |
|||
9 9 Print String DE = Buffer Address none |
|||
10 A Read Console Buffer DE = Buffer Console |
|||
Characters |
|||
in Buffer |
|||
11 B Get Console Status none A = 00/non zero |
|||
12 C Return Version Number none HL: Version |
|||
Number |
|||
13 D Reset Disk System none none |
|||
14 E Select Disk E = Disk Number none |
|||
15 F Open File DE = FCB Address FF if not found |
|||
16 10 Close File DE = FCB Address FF if not found |
|||
17 11 Search For First DE = FCB Address A = Directory |
|||
Code |
|||
18 12 Search For Next none A = Directory |
|||
Code |
|||
19 13 Delete File DE = FCB Address A = none |
|||
20 14 Read Sequential DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
21 15 Write Sequential DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
22 16 Make File DE = FCB Address A = FF if no DIR |
|||
Space |
|||
23 17 Rename File DE = FCB Address A = FF in not |
|||
found |
|||
24 18 Return Login Vector none HL = Login |
|||
Vector* |
|||
25 19 Return Current Disk none A = Current Disk |
|||
Number |
|||
26 1A Set DMA Address DE = DMA Address none |
|||
27 1B Get ADDR (ALLOC) none HL = ALLOC |
|||
Address* |
|||
28 1C Write Protect Disk none none |
|||
29 1D Get Read/only Vector none HL = R/O |
|||
Vector Value* |
|||
30 1E Set File Attributes DE = FCB Address A = none |
|||
31 1F Get ADDR (Disk Parms) none HL = DPB |
|||
Address |
|||
32 20 Set/Get User Code E = 0FFH for Get User Number |
|||
E = 00 to 0FH for Set |
|||
33 21 Read Random DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
34 22 Write Random DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
35 23 Compute File Size DE = FCB Address r0, r1, r2 |
|||
36 24 Set Random Record DE = FCB Address r0, r1, r2 |
|||
37 25 Reset Drive DE = Drive Vector A = 0 |
|||
38 26 Access Drive not supported |
|||
39 27 Free Drive not supported |
|||
40 28 Write Random with Fill DE = FCB A = Error Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
*Note that A = L, and B = H upon return. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Section 5 |
|||
.nx sixa |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,693 +0,0 @@ |
|||
|
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 4-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 4 CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.qs |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 4.1 Introduction |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.1 Introduction |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The DDT program allows dynamic interactive testing and debugging of |
|||
programs generated in the CP/M environment. Invoke the debugger with |
|||
a command of one of the following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DDT |
|||
DDT filename.HEX |
|||
DDT filename.COM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where filename is the name of the program to be loaded and |
|||
tested. In both cases, the DDT program is brought into main |
|||
memory in place of the Console Command Processor (CCP) and resides |
|||
directly below the Basic Disk Operating System (BDOS) |
|||
portion of CP/M. Refer to Section 5 for standard memory |
|||
organization. The BDOS |
|||
starting address, located in the address field of the |
|||
JMP instruction at location 5H, is altered to reflect the |
|||
reduced Transient Program Area (TPA) size. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second and third forms of the DDT command perform the same |
|||
actions as the first, except there is a subsequent automatic load |
|||
of the specified HEX or COM file. The action is identical to the |
|||
following sequence of commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DDT |
|||
Ifilename.HEX or Ifilename.COM |
|||
R |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the I and R commands set up and read the specified program |
|||
to test. See the explanation of the I and R |
|||
commands below for exact details. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon initiation, DDT prints a sign-on message in the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT VER m.m |
|||
.sp |
|||
where m.m is the revision number. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Following the sign-on message, DDT prompts you with the |
|||
hyphen character, -, and waits for input commands from the |
|||
console. You can type any of several single-character commands, |
|||
followed by a carriage return to execute the command. Each |
|||
line of input can be line-edited using the following standard |
|||
CP/M controls: |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-1. Line-editing Controls |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Control Result |
|||
.sp |
|||
rubout removes the last character typed |
|||
|
|||
CTRL-U removes the entire line, ready for retyping |
|||
|
|||
CTRL-C reboots system |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Any command can be up to 32 characters in length. An automatic |
|||
carriage return is inserted as character 33, where the |
|||
first character determines the command type. Table 4-2 describes DDT |
|||
commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-2. DDT Commands |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Command Result |
|||
Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 57 |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
A enters assembly-language mnemonics with operands. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
D displays memory in hexadecimal and ASCII. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
F fills memory with constant data. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
G begins execution with optional breakpoints. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
I sets up a standard input File Control Block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
L lists memory using assembler mnemonics. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
M moves a memory segment from source to destination. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
R reads a program for subsequent testing. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
S substitutes memory values. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
T traces program execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
U untraced program monitoring. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
X examines and optionally alters the CPU state. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The command character, in some cases, is followed by zero, one, |
|||
two, or three hexadecimal values, which are separated by commas |
|||
or single blank characters. All DDT numeric output is in |
|||
hexadecimal form. The commands are not execution until the |
|||
carriage return is typed at the end of the command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
At any point in the debug run, you can stop execution of |
|||
DDT by using either a CTRL-C or G0 (jump to location 0000H) and |
|||
save the current memory image by using a SAVE command of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE n filename. COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
where n is the number of pages (256 byte blocks) to be saved on |
|||
disk. The number of blocks is determined by taking the high-order |
|||
byte of the address in the TPA and converting this number to |
|||
decimal. For example, if the highest address in the TPA is 134H, |
|||
the number of pages is 12H or 18 in decimal. You could type a |
|||
CTRL-C during the debug run, returning to the CCP level, followed |
|||
by |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE 18 X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
The memory image is saved as X.COM on the disk and can be |
|||
directly executed by typing the name X. If further testing is |
|||
required, the memory image can be recalled by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
which reloads the previously saved program from location 100H |
|||
through page 18, 23FFH. The CPU state is not a part of the COM |
|||
file; thus, the program must be restarted from the beginning to |
|||
test it properly. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2 DDT Commands |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.2 DDT Commands |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2 DDT Commands |
|||
.pp |
|||
The individual commands are detailed below. In each case, the |
|||
operator must wait for the hyphen prompt character before entering |
|||
the command. If control is passed to a program under test, and |
|||
the program has not reached a breakpoint, control can be returned |
|||
to DDT by executing a RST 7 from the front panel. In the |
|||
explanation of each command, the command letter is shown in some |
|||
cases with numbers separated by commas, the the numbers are |
|||
represented by lower-case letters. These numbers are always |
|||
assumed to be in a hexadecimal radix and from one to four digits |
|||
in length. Longer numbers are automatically truncated on the |
|||
right. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Many of the commands operate upon a CPU state that corresponds |
|||
to the program under test. The CPU state holds the registers of |
|||
the program being debugged and initially contains zeros for all |
|||
registers and flags except for the program counter, P, and stack |
|||
pointer, S, which default to 100H. The program counter is |
|||
subsequently set to the starting address given in the last record |
|||
of a HEX file if a file of this form is loaded, see the I and R |
|||
commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
DDT allows in-line assembly language to be inserted into the |
|||
current memory image using the A command, which takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
As |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the hexadecimal starting address for the in-line |
|||
assembly. DDT prompts the console with the address of the next |
|||
instruction to fill and reads the console, looking for assembly-language |
|||
mnemonics followed by register references and operands in |
|||
absolute hexadecimal form. See the \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
Intel 8080 Assembly Language Reference Card \c |
|||
.qu |
|||
for a list of mnemonics. Each |
|||
successive load address is printed before reading the console. |
|||
The A command terminates when the first empty line is input from |
|||
the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon completion of assembly language input, you can |
|||
review the memory segment using the DDT disassembler (see the L |
|||
command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that the assembler/disassembler portion of |
|||
DDT can be overlaid by the transient program being tested, in |
|||
which case the DDT program responds with an error condition when |
|||
the A and L commands are used. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.2 The D (Display) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.2 The D (Display) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The D command allows you to view the contents of memory |
|||
in hexadecimal and ASCII formats. The D command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
D |
|||
Ds |
|||
Ds,f |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the first form, memory is displayed from the current display |
|||
address, initially 100H, and continues for 16 display lines. |
|||
Each display line takes the followng form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
aaaa bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb cccccccccccccccc |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where aaaa is the display address in hexadecimal and bb |
|||
represents data present in memory starting at aaaa. The ASCII |
|||
characters starting at aaaa are to the right (represented by the |
|||
sequence of character c) where nongraphic characters are printed as a |
|||
period. You should note that both upper- and lower-case |
|||
alphabetics are displayed, and will appear as upper-case symbols |
|||
on a console device that supports only upper-case. Each display |
|||
line gives the values of 16 bytes of data, with the first line |
|||
truncated so that the next line begins at an address that is a |
|||
multiple of 16. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form of the D command is similar to the first, except |
|||
that the display address is first set to address s. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The third form causes the display to continue from address s |
|||
through address f. In all cases, the display address is set to |
|||
the first address not displayed in this command, so that a |
|||
continuing display can be accomplished by issuing successive D |
|||
commands with no explicit addresses. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Excessively long displays can be aborted by pressing the return key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The F command takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Fs,f,c, |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the starting address, f is the final address, and c is |
|||
a hexadecimal byte constant. DDT stores the constant c at |
|||
address s, increments the value of s and test against f. If s |
|||
exceeds f, the operation terminates, otherwise the operation is |
|||
repeated. Thus, the fill command can be used to set a memory |
|||
block to a specific constant value. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.4 The G (Go) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.4 The G (Go) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
A program is executed using the G command, with up to two |
|||
optional breakpoint addresses. The G command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
G |
|||
Gs |
|||
Gs,b |
|||
Gs,b,c |
|||
G,b |
|||
G,b,c |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The first form executes the program at the current value of the |
|||
program counter in the current machine state, with no breakpoints |
|||
set. The only way to regain control in DDT is through a RST 7 |
|||
execution. The current program counter can be viewed by typing |
|||
an X or XP command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form is similar to the first, except that the program |
|||
counter in the current machine state is set to address s before |
|||
execution begins. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The third form is the same as the second, except that program |
|||
execution stops when address b is encountered (b must be in the |
|||
area of the program under test). The instruction at location b is |
|||
not executed when the breakpoint is encountered. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The fourth form is identical to the third, except that two |
|||
breakpoints are specified, one at b and the other at c. |
|||
Encountering either breakpoint causes execution to stop, and both |
|||
breakpoints are cleared. The last two forms take the program |
|||
counter from the current machine state and set one and two |
|||
breakpoints, respectively. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Execution continues from the starting address in real-time to the |
|||
next breakpoint. There is no intervention between the starting |
|||
address and the break address by DDT. If the program under test |
|||
does not reach a breakpoint, control cannot return to DDT without |
|||
executing a RST 7 instruction. Upon encountering a breakpoint, |
|||
DDT stops execution and types |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*d |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d is the stop address. The machine state can be examined |
|||
at this point using the X (Examine) command. You must |
|||
specify breakpoints that differ from the program counter address |
|||
at the beginning of the G command. Thus, if the current program |
|||
counter is 1234H, then the following commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
G,1234 |
|||
G400,400 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
both produce an immediate breakpoint without executing any |
|||
instructions. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.5 The I (Input) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.5 The I (Input) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The I command allows you to insert a filename into the default |
|||
File Control Block (FCB) at 5CH. The FCB created by CP/M for |
|||
transient programs is placed at this location (see Section 5). |
|||
The default FCB can be used by the program under test as if it |
|||
had been passed by the CP/M Console Processor. Note that this |
|||
filename is also used by DDT for reading additional HEX and COM |
|||
files. The I command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Ifilename |
|||
Ifilename.typ |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the second form is used and the filetype is either HEX or COM, |
|||
subsequent R commands can be used to read the pure binary or hex |
|||
format machine code. Section 4.2.8 gives further details. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.6 The L (List) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.6 The L (List) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The L command is used to list assembly-language mnemonics in a |
|||
particular program region. The L command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
L |
|||
Ls |
|||
Ls,f |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The first form lists twelve lines of disassembled machine code |
|||
from the current list address. The second form sets the list |
|||
address to s and then lists twelve lines of code. The last form |
|||
lists disassembled code from s through address f. In all three |
|||
cases, the list address is set to the next unlisted location in |
|||
preparation for a subsequent L command. Upon encountering an |
|||
execution breakpoint, the list address is set to the current |
|||
value of the program counter (G and T commands). Again, long |
|||
typeouts can be aborted by pressing RETURN during the list |
|||
process. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.7 The M (Move) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.7 The M (Move) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The M command allows block movement of program or data areas from |
|||
one location to another in memory. The M command takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Ms,f,d |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the start address of the move, f is the final address, |
|||
and d is the destination address. Data is first removed from s |
|||
to d, and both addresses are incremented. If s exceeds f, the |
|||
move operation stops; otherwise, the move operation is repeated. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.8 The R (Read) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.8 The R (Read) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The R command is used in conjunction with the I command to read |
|||
COM and HEX files from the disk into the transient program |
|||
area in preparation for the debug run. The R command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
R |
|||
RB |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where b is an optional bias address that is added to each program |
|||
or data address as it is loaded. The load operation must not |
|||
overwrite any of the system parameters from 000H through 0FFH |
|||
(that is, the first page of memory). If b is omitted, then |
|||
b=0000 is assumed. The R command requires a previous I command, |
|||
specifying the name of a HEX or COM file. The load address for |
|||
each record is obtained from each individual HEX record, while an |
|||
assumed load address of 100H is used for COM files. Note that |
|||
any number of R commands can be issued following the I command to |
|||
reread the program under test, assuming the tested program does |
|||
not destroy the default area at 5CH. Any file specified with the |
|||
filetype COM is assumed to contain machine code in pure binary |
|||
form (created with the LOAD or SAVE command), and all others are |
|||
assumed to contain machine code in Intel hex format (produced, |
|||
for example, with the ASM command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
Recall that the command, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT filename.filetype |
|||
.sp |
|||
which initiates the DDT program, equals to the following commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DDT |
|||
-Ifilename.filetype |
|||
-R |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Whenever the R command is issued, DDT responds with either the |
|||
error indicator ? (file cannot be opened, or a checksum error |
|||
occurred in a HEX file) or with a load message. The load message |
|||
takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
nnnn pppp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where nnnn is the next address following the loaded program and |
|||
pppp is the assumed program counter (100H for COM files, or |
|||
taken from the last record if a HEX file is specified). |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.9 The S (Set) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.9 The S (Set) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The S command allows memory locations to be examined and |
|||
optionally altered. The S command takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Ss |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the hexadecimal starting address for examination and |
|||
alteration of memory. DDT responds with a numeric prompt, giving |
|||
the memory location, along with the data currently held in |
|||
memory. If you type a carriage return, the data is |
|||
not altered. If a byte value is typed, the value is stored at |
|||
the prompted address. In either case, DDT continues to prompt |
|||
with successive addresses and values until you type either a period |
|||
or an invalid input value is detected. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.10 The T (Trace) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.10 The T (Trace) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The T command allows selective tracing of program execution for 1 |
|||
to 65535 program steps. The T command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
T |
|||
Tn |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the first form, the CPU state is displayed and the next |
|||
program step is executed. The program terminates immediately, |
|||
with the termination address displayed as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
where hhhh is the next address to execute. The display address |
|||
(used in the D command) is set to the value of H and L, and the |
|||
list address (used in the L command) is set to hhhh. The CPU |
|||
state at program termination can then be examined using the X |
|||
command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form of the T command is similar to the first, except |
|||
that execution is traced for n steps (n is a hexadecimal value) |
|||
before a program breakpoint occurs. A breakpoint can be forced |
|||
in the trace mode by typing a rubout character. The CPU state is |
|||
displayed before each program step is taken in trace mode. The |
|||
format of the display is the same as described in the X command. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
You should note that program tracing is discontinued at the |
|||
CP/M interface and resumes after return from CP/M to the program |
|||
under test. Thus, CP/M functions that access I/O devices, such |
|||
as the disk drive, run in real-time, avoiding I/O timing |
|||
problems. Programs running in trace mode execute approximately |
|||
500 times slower than real-time because DDT gets control after each |
|||
user instruction is executed. Interrupt processing routines can |
|||
be traced, but commands that use the breakpoint facility (G, T, |
|||
and U) accomplish the break using an RST 7 instruction, which |
|||
means that the tested program cannot use this interrupt location. |
|||
Further, the trace mode always runs the tested program with |
|||
interrupts enabled, which may cause problems if asynchronous |
|||
interrupts are received during tracing. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To get control back to DDT during trace, press RETURN rather than |
|||
executing an RST 7. This ensures that the trace for current |
|||
instruction is completed before interruption. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The U command is identical to the T command, except that |
|||
intermediate program steps are not displayed. The untrace mode |
|||
allows from 1 to 65535, (0FFFFH) steps to be executed in monitored |
|||
mode and is used principally to retain control of an executing |
|||
program while it reaches steady state conditions. All conditions |
|||
of the T command apply to the U command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The X command allows selective display and alteration of the |
|||
current CPU state for the program under test. The X command |
|||
takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
X |
|||
Xr |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where r is one of the 8080 CPU registers listed in the following table. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-3. CPU Registers |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Register Meaning Value |
|||
.sp |
|||
C Carry flag (0/1) |
|||
Z Zero flag (0/1) |
|||
M Minus flag (0/1) |
|||
E Even parity flag (0/1) |
|||
I Interdigit carry (0/1) |
|||
A Accumulator (0-FF) |
|||
B BC register pair (0-FFFF) |
|||
D DE register pair (0-FFFF) |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-3. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Register Meaning Value |
|||
.sp |
|||
H HL register pair (0-FFFF) |
|||
S Stack pointer (0-FFFF) |
|||
P Program counter (0-FFFF) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
In the first case, the CPU register state is displayed in the |
|||
format: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
CfZfMfEflf A=bb B=dddd D=dddd H=dddd S=dddd P=dddd inst |
|||
.sp |
|||
where f is a 0 or 1 flag value, bb is a byte value, and dddd is a |
|||
double-byte quantity corresponding to the register pair. The |
|||
inst field contains the disassembled instruction, that occurs at |
|||
the location addressed by the CPU state's program counter. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form allows display and optional alteration of |
|||
register values, where r is one of the registers given above (C, |
|||
Z, M, E, I, A, B, D, H, S, or P). In each case, the flag or |
|||
register value is first displayed at the console. The DDT |
|||
program then accepts input from the console. If a carriage |
|||
return is typed, the flag or register value is not altered. If |
|||
a value in the proper range is typed, the flag or register value |
|||
is altered. You should note that BC, DE, and HL are |
|||
displayed as register pairs. Thus, you must type the entire |
|||
register pair when B, C, or the BC pair is altered. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.3 Implementation Notes |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.3 Implementation Notes |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.3 Implementation Notes |
|||
.pp |
|||
The organization of DDT allows certain nonessential portions to |
|||
be overlaid to gain a larger transient program area for debugging |
|||
large programs. The DDT program consists of two parts: the DDT |
|||
nucleus and the assembler/disassembler module. The DDT nucleus |
|||
is loaded over the CCP and, although loaded with the DDT nucleus, |
|||
the assembler/disassembler is overlayable unless used to assemble |
|||
or disassemble. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In particular, the BDOS address at location 6H (address field of |
|||
the JMP instruction at location 5H) is modified by DDT to address |
|||
the base location of the DDT nucleus, which, in turn, contains a |
|||
JMP instruction to the BDOS. Thus, programs that use this |
|||
address field to size memory see the logical end of memory at the |
|||
base of the DDT nucleus rather than the base of the BDOS. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The assembler/disassembler module resides directly below the DDT |
|||
nucleus in the transient program area. If the A, L, T, or X |
|||
commands are used during the debugging process, the DDT program |
|||
again alters the address field at 6H to include this module, |
|||
further reducing the logical end of memory. If a program loads |
|||
beyond the beginning of the assembler/disassembler module, the A |
|||
and L commands are lost (their use produces a ? in response) |
|||
and the trace and display (T and X) commands list the inst field |
|||
of the display in hexadecimal, rather than as a decoded |
|||
instruction. |
|||
.nx fourb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,583 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.4 A Sample Program |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.4 A Sample Program |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.4 A Sample Program |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following example shows an edit, assemble, and debug for a |
|||
simple program that reads a set of data values and determines the |
|||
largest value in the set. The largest value is taken from the |
|||
vector and stored into LARGE at the termination of the program. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ED SCAN.ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Create source program; |
|||
" " represents carriage return. |
|||
*I |
|||
ORG 1-00H ;START OF TRANSIENT |
|||
;AREA |
|||
MVI B, LEN ;LENGTH OF VECTOR TO SCAN |
|||
MVI C, 0 ;LARGER_RST VALUE SO FAR |
|||
LOOP LXI H, VECT ;BASE OF VECTOR |
|||
LOOP: MOV A, M ;GET VALUE |
|||
SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT |
|||
;FOUND |
|||
; NEW LARGEST VALUE, STORE IT TO C |
|||
MOV C, A |
|||
NFOUND INX H ;TO NEXT ELEMENT |
|||
DCR B ;MORE TO SCAN? |
|||
JNZ LOOP ;FOR ANOTHER |
|||
; |
|||
; END OF SCAN, STORE C |
|||
MOV A, C ;GET LARGEST VALUE |
|||
STA LARGE |
|||
JMP 0 ;REBOOT |
|||
; |
|||
; TEST DATA |
|||
VECT: DB 2,0,4,3,5,6,1,5 |
|||
LEN EQU $-VECT ;LENGTH |
|||
LARGE: DS 1 ;LARGEST VALUE ON EXIT |
|||
END |
|||
|
|||
.bp |
|||
^-Z |
|||
*B0P |
|||
ORG 100H ;START OF TRANSIENT AREA |
|||
MVI B,LEN ;LENGTH OF VECTOR TO SCAN |
|||
MVI C,0 ;LARGEST VALUE SO FAR |
|||
LXI H,VECT ;BASE OF VECTOR |
|||
LOOP: MOV A,M ;GET VALUE |
|||
SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT |
|||
;FOUND |
|||
; NEW LARGEST VALUE, STORE IT TO C |
|||
MOV C,A |
|||
NFOUND: INX H ;TO NEXT ELEMENT |
|||
DCR B ;MORE TO SCAN? |
|||
JNZ LOOP ;FOR ANOTHER |
|||
; END OF SCAN, STORE C |
|||
MOV A,C ;GET LARGEST VALUE |
|||
STA LARGE |
|||
JMP 0 ;REBOOT |
|||
; |
|||
; TEST DATA |
|||
|
|||
VECT: DB 2,0,4,3,5,6,1,5 |
|||
LEN EQU $-VECT ;LENGTH |
|||
LARGE: DS 1 ;LARGEST VALUE ON EXIT |
|||
END |
|||
*E <--End of edit |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM SCAN \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Start Assembler |
|||
|
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER - VER 1.0 |
|||
|
|||
0122 |
|||
002H USE FACTOR |
|||
END OF ASSEMBLY Assembly complete; lock at program listing |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
TYPE SCAN.PRN |
|||
.qs |
|||
Code address Source program |
|||
0100 ORG 100H ;START OF TRANSIENT AREA |
|||
0100 0608 MVI B,LEN ;LENGTH OF VECTOR TO SCAN |
|||
0102 0E00 Machine code MVI C,0 ;LARGEST VALUE SO FAR |
|||
0104 211901 LXI H,VECT. ;BASE OF VECTOR |
|||
0107 7E LOOP: MOV A,M ;GET VALUE |
|||
0108 91 SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
0109 D20D01 JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT |
|||
;FOUND |
|||
; NEW LARGEST VALUE, STORE IT TO C |
|||
010C 4F MOV C,A |
|||
.bp |
|||
010D 23 NFOUND: INX H ;TO NEXT ELEMENT |
|||
010E 05 DCR B ;MORE TO SCAN? |
|||
010F C20701 JNZ LOOP ;FOR ANOTHER |
|||
; |
|||
; END OF SCAN, STORE C |
|||
0112 79 MOV A,C ;GET LARGEST VALUE |
|||
0113 322101 STA LARGE |
|||
|
|||
0116 C30000 JMP 0 ;REBOOT |
|||
Code--data listing; |
|||
truncated ; TEST DATA |
|||
0119 0200040305 VECT: DB 2,0,4,3,5,6,1,5 |
|||
0008 = Value of LEN EQU $-VECT ;LENGTH |
|||
0121 equate LARGE: DS 1 ;LARGEST VALUE ON EXIT |
|||
0122 END |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Start debugger using hex format machine code |
|||
|
|||
DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC Next instruction |
|||
0121 0000 to execute at |
|||
-X Last load address + 1 PC=0 |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0000 OUT 7F |
|||
-XP Examine registers before debug run |
|||
|
|||
P=0000 100 Change PC to 100 |
|||
|
|||
-X Look at registers again |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
-L100 |
|||
PC changed Next instruction |
|||
to execute at PC=100 |
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C Disassembled machine |
|||
0109 JNC 010D code at 100H |
|||
010C MOV C,A (see source listing |
|||
010D INX H for comparison) |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-L |
|||
.bp |
|||
0113 STA 0121 |
|||
0116 JMP 0000 |
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
011A NOP A little more machine |
|||
011B INR B code. Note that pro- |
|||
011C INX B gram ends at location |
|||
011D DCR B 116 with a JMP to |
|||
011E MVI B,01 0000. Remainder of |
|||
0120 DCR B listing is assembly of |
|||
0121 LXI D,2200 data. |
|||
0124 LXI H,0200 |
|||
-A116 Enter in-line assembly mode to change the JMP to 0000 into a RST 7, |
|||
which will cause the program under test to return to DDT if 116H is |
|||
ever executed. |
|||
0116 RST 7 |
|||
|
|||
0117 (Single carriage return stops assemble mode) |
|||
|
|||
-L113 List code at 113H to check that RST 7 was properly inserted |
|||
|
|||
0113 STA 0121 |
|||
0116 RST 07 in place of JMP |
|||
0117 NOP |
|||
0118 NOP |
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
011A NOP |
|||
011B INR B |
|||
011C INX B |
|||
- |
|||
|
|||
-X Look at registers |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
-T |
|||
Execute Program for one stop. Initial CPU state, before is executed |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08*0102 |
|||
Automatic breakpoint |
|||
|
|||
Trace one step again (note O8H in B) |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00*0104 |
|||
-T |
|||
Trace again (Register C is cleared) |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119*0107 |
|||
-T3 Trace three steps |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D*010D |
|||
-D119 |
|||
Display memory starting at 119H. Automatic breakpoint at 10DH |
|||
|
|||
0119 02 00 04 03 05 06 01.Program data Lower-case x |
|||
0120 05 11 00 22 21 00 02 7E EB 77 13 23 EB 0B 78 B1 ..."!.. . W .#..X. |
|||
0130 C2 27 01 C3 03 29 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ...' ...)......... |
|||
0140 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
0150 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
0160 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Data are displayed |
|||
0170 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 in ASCI with a "." |
|||
0180 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 in the position of |
|||
0190 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 nongraphic........ |
|||
01A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 characters........ |
|||
01B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
01C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
-X |
|||
Current CPU state |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
-T5 |
|||
Trace 5 steps from current CPU state |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
|
|||
U5 |
|||
Automatic breakpoint |
|||
Trace without listing intermediate states |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D*0108 |
|||
-X |
|||
CPU state at end of U5 |
|||
C0Z0M0E1I1 A=04 B=0600 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
-G Run program from current PC until completion (in real-time) |
|||
|
|||
*0116 breakpoint at 116H, caused by executing RST 7 in machine code. |
|||
|
|||
-X |
|||
CPU state at end of program |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0116 RST 07 |
|||
-XP |
|||
Examine and change program counter |
|||
|
|||
P=0116 100 |
|||
|
|||
-X |
|||
|
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
-T10 |
|||
|
|||
First data element |
|||
Current largest value |
|||
Subtract for comparison C |
|||
Trace 10 (hexadecimal) steps |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E1I1 A=00 B=0600 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E1I1 A=00 B=0600 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M*0108 |
|||
-A109 |
|||
Insert a "hot patch" into Program should have moved the |
|||
the machine code value from A into C since A>C. |
|||
0109 JC 10D to change the Since this code was not executed, |
|||
JNC to JC it appears that the JNC should |
|||
010C have been a JC instruction |
|||
|
|||
Stop DDT so that a version of |
|||
-G0 the patched program can be saved |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
SAVE 1 SCAN.COM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program resides on first |
|||
page, so save 1 page. |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.COM |
|||
.qs |
|||
Restart DDT with the save memory |
|||
DDT VER 1.0 image to continue testing |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
0200 0100 |
|||
|
|||
-L100 List some code |
|||
|
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C |
|||
0109 JC 010D Previous patch is present in X.COM |
|||
010C MOV C,A |
|||
010D INX H |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0100 |
|||
|
|||
-T10 |
|||
Trace to see how patched version operates Data is moved from A to C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010C MOV C,A |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=FE B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107*0107 |
|||
-X Breakpoint after 16 steps |
|||
|
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=FE B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
-G,108 Run from current PC and breakpoint at 108H |
|||
|
|||
*0108 |
|||
-X |
|||
Next data item |
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=04 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
-T |
|||
Single step for a few cycles |
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=04 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D*010C |
|||
-X |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010C MOV C,A |
|||
-G Run to completion |
|||
|
|||
*0116 |
|||
-X |
|||
|
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0003 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0116 RST 07 |
|||
-S121 Look at the value of "LARGE" |
|||
|
|||
0121 03 Wrong value! |
|||
|
|||
0122 00 |
|||
|
|||
0123 22 |
|||
|
|||
0124 21 |
|||
|
|||
0125 00 |
|||
|
|||
0126 02 |
|||
|
|||
0127 7E _\b. End of the S command |
|||
|
|||
-L100 |
|||
|
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C |
|||
0109 JC 010D |
|||
010C MOV C,A |
|||
010D INX H |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-L Review the code |
|||
|
|||
0113 STA 0121 |
|||
0116 RST 07 |
|||
0117 NOP |
|||
0118 NOP |
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
011A NOP |
|||
011B INR B |
|||
011C INX B |
|||
011D DCR B |
|||
011E MVI B,01 |
|||
0120 DCR B |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0116 100 Reset the PC |
|||
|
|||
-T |
|||
Single step, and watch data values |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0003 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08*0102 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0803 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00*0104 |
|||
-T |
|||
Count set Largest set |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0800 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119*0107 |
|||
-T |
|||
Base address of data set |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M*0108 |
|||
-T |
|||
First data item brought to A |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D*010C |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010C MOV C,A*010D |
|||
-T |
|||
First data item moved to C correctly |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H*010E |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B*010F |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107*0107 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M*0108 |
|||
-T |
|||
Second data item brought to A |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
-T |
|||
Subtract destroys data value that was loaded! |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D*010D |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010D INX H*010E |
|||
-L100 |
|||
|
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C This should have been a CMP so that register A |
|||
0109 JC 010D would not be destroyed. |
|||
010C MOV C,A |
|||
010D INX H |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-A108 |
|||
|
|||
0108 CMP C Hot patch at 108H changes SUB to CMP |
|||
|
|||
0109 |
|||
|
|||
-G0 Stop DDT for SAVE |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
SAVE 1 SCAN.COM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Save memory image |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.COM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Restart DDT |
|||
|
|||
DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
0200 0100 |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0100 |
|||
|
|||
-L116 |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
|
|||
0116 RST 07 |
|||
0117 NOP |
|||
0118 NOP Look at code to see if it was properly loaded |
|||
0119 STAX B (long typeout aborted with rubout) |
|||
011A NOP |
|||
- |
|||
|
|||
-G,116 Run from 100H to completion |
|||
|
|||
*0116 |
|||
-XC Look at carry (accidental typo) |
|||
C1 |
|||
-X Look at CPU state |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
|
|||
C1Z1M0E1I1 A=06 B=0006 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0116 RST 07 |
|||
-S121 Look at "large"--it appears to be correct. |
|||
|
|||
0121 06 |
|||
|
|||
0122 00 |
|||
|
|||
0123 22 |
|||
|
|||
-G0 Stop DDT |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ED SCAN.ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Re-edit the source program, and make both changes |
|||
|
|||
*NSUB |
|||
*0LT |
|||
CTRL-Z SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
*SSUB^\b|ZCMP^\b|Z0LT |
|||
CMP D ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
* |
|||
JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT FOUND |
|||
*SNC^\b|ZC^\b|Z0LT |
|||
JC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT FOUND |
|||
*E |
|||
Reassemble, selecting source from disk A |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM SCAN.AAZ \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
<--- Hex to disk A |
|||
Print to Z (selects no print file) |
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER VER 1.0 |
|||
|
|||
0122 |
|||
002H USE FACTOR |
|||
END OF ASSEMBLY |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Rerun debugger to check changes |
|||
|
|||
DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
0121 0000 |
|||
-L116 |
|||
|
|||
0116 JMP 0000 Check to ensure end is still at 116H |
|||
|
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
|
|||
011A NOP |
|||
011B INR B |
|||
|
|||
-(rubout) |
|||
|
|||
-G100,116 Go from beginning with breakpoint at end |
|||
|
|||
*0116 Breakpoint reached |
|||
-D121 Look at "LARGE" |
|||
Correct value computed |
|||
0121 06 00 22 21 00 02 7E EB 77 13 23 EB 0B 78 B1 .. '!... W .#..X. |
|||
0130 C2 27 01 C3 03 29 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .'...)........ |
|||
0140 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .............. |
|||
|
|||
-(rubout) Aborts long typeout |
|||
|
|||
G0 Stop DDT, debug session complete. |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Section 4 |
|||
.nx fivea |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,453 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.op |
|||
.sp 15 |
|||
.ce 100 |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Operating System |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Manual |
|||
.qs |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.sp 10 |
|||
Copyright (c) 1982 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
P.O. Box 579 |
|||
160 Central Avenue |
|||
Pacific Grove, CA 93950 |
|||
(408) 649-3896 |
|||
TWX 910 360 5001 |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
All Rights Reserved |
|||
.ce 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.po 17 |
|||
.ll 50 |
|||
.ce |
|||
COPYRIGHT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copyright (c) 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1982, 1983, and 1984 by |
|||
Digital Research Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this |
|||
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored |
|||
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or |
|||
computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, |
|||
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior |
|||
written permission of Digital Research Inc., Post Office Box 579, |
|||
Pacific Grove, California, 93950. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Thus, readers are granted permission to include the example |
|||
programs, either in whole or in part, in their own programs. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
DISCLAIMER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research Inc. makes no representations or warranties with |
|||
respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims |
|||
any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for |
|||
any particular purpose. Further, Digital Research Inc. reserves the |
|||
right to revise this publication and to make changes from |
|||
time to time in the content hereof without obligation of |
|||
Digital Research Inc. to notify any person of such revision or |
|||
changes. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
TRADEMARKS |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M, CP/NET, and Digital Research and its logo are registered |
|||
trademarks of Digital Research. ASM, DESPOOL, DDT, LINK-80, MAC, |
|||
MP/M, PL/I-80 and SID are trademarks of Digital Research. IBM is |
|||
a registered trademark of International Business Machines. Intel |
|||
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. TI Silent 700 is |
|||
a trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated. Zilog and Z80 are |
|||
registered trademarks of Zilog, Inc. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
The \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
CP/M Operating System Manual \c |
|||
.qu |
|||
was prepared using the Digital Research TEX Text Formatter and printed |
|||
in the United States of America. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce 6 |
|||
********************************* |
|||
* First Edition: 1976 * |
|||
* Second Edition: July 1982 * |
|||
* Third Edition: March 1983 * |
|||
* Fourth Edition: March 1984 * |
|||
********************************* |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft iii |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
1 CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2.1 General Command Structure . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
1.2.2 File References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.3 Switching Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 |
|||
1.4 Built-in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.4.1 ERA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
1.4.2 DIR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 |
|||
1.4.3 REN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.4 SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.5 TYPE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
1.4.6 USER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.5 Line Editing and Output Control . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6 Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6.1 STAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 |
|||
1.6.2 ASM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 |
|||
1.6.3 LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 |
|||
1.6.4 PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 |
|||
1.6.5 ED Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 |
|||
1.6.6 SYSGEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 |
|||
1.6.7 SUBMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 |
|||
1.6.8 DUMP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
1.6.9 MOVCPM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.7 BDOS Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
2 The CP/M Editor |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1 Introduction to ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1.1 ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
2.1.2 Text Transfer Functions . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2.1.3 Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
2.1.4 Line Numbers and ED Start-up . . . . . . . . 2-5 |
|||
2.1.5 Memory Buffer Operation . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2.1.6 Command Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2.1.7 Text Search and Alteration . . . . . . . . . 2-10 |
|||
2.1.8 Source Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2.1.9 Repetitive Command Execution . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft iv |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
2.2 ED Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.3 Control Characters and Commands . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
3 CP/M Assembler |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.2 Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3 Forming the Operand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3.1 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
3.3.2 Numeric Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.3 Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.4 String Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3.3.6 Precedence of Operators . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4 Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4.1 The ORG Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.2 The END Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.3 The EQU Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.4 The SET Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives . . . . . . . . 3-12 |
|||
3.4.6 The DB Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 |
|||
3.4.7 The DW Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
3.4.8 The DS Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5 Operation Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5.1 Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3.5.2 Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.3 Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.4 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3.5.5 Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . 3-19 |
|||
3.5.6 Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.6 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.7 A Sample Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft v |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
4 CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2 DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
4.2.2 The D (Display) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 |
|||
4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.4 The G (Go) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.5 The I (Input) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.6 The L (List) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.7 The M (Move) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.8 The R (Read) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.9 The S (Set) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.1- The T (Trace) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.3 Implementation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.4 A Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
5 CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.2 Operating System Call Conventions . . . . . . . . . 5-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program . . . . . . . . 5-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.5 A Sample Random Access Program . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.6 System Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
6 CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.2 First-level System Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.3 Second-level System Generation . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vi |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
6.5 Disk Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.6 The BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.7 A Sample BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.8 A Sample Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.9 Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.10 Disk Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.11 The DISKDEF Macro Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.12 Sector Blocking and Deblocking . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendixes |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
A \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
B \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal CBIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
C \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal GETSYS/PUTSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
D \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
The Model 800 Cold Start Loader for CP/M 2 . . . . . . D-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
E \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
F \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Disk Definition Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
G \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Blocking and Deblocking Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . G-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
H \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
I \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft viii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
1-1. Line-editing Control Characters . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
1-2. CP/M Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
1-3. Physical Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 |
|||
1-4. PIP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. ED Text Transfer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2-2. Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2-3. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2-4. Error Message Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2-5. ED Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
2-6. ED Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3-1. Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3-2. Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3-3. Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
3-4. Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3-5. Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . . 3-16 |
|||
3-6. Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-7. Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-8. Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3-9. Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 |
|||
3-10. Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4-1. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-2. DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-3. CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Filetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
5-3. Edit Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. Standard Memory Size Values . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
6-2. Common Values for CP/M Systems . . . . . . . . 6-7 |
|||
6-3. CP/M Disk Sector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
6-4. IOBYTE Field Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-5. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 |
|||
6-6. Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
6-7. Disk Parameter Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-8. BSH and BLM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-9. EXM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-10. BLS Tabluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 |
|||
.sp |
|||
I-1. CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. Overall ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
2-2. Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft ix |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-3. Logical Organization of Memory Buffer . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. IOBYTE Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-2. Disk Parameter Header Format . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
6-3. Disk Parameter Header Table . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-4. Disk Parameter Block Format . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 |
|||
6-5. AL0 and AL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. GETSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
6-2. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.nx onea |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,468 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft Index-% |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Index |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
A |
|||
.qs |
|||
Absolute line number, 36 |
|||
Access mode, 13 |
|||
afn (ambiguous file |
|||
reference), 3, 4, 6 |
|||
Allocation vector, 105 |
|||
Ambiguous file reference |
|||
(afn), 3, 4, 6 |
|||
ASM, 15, 47 |
|||
Assembler, 15, 47 |
|||
Assembler/disassembler module |
|||
(DDT), 77 |
|||
Assembler errors, 62 |
|||
Assembly language mnemonics |
|||
in DDT, 71, 74 |
|||
Assembly language program, 49 |
|||
Assembly language statement, 49 |
|||
Automatic command |
|||
processing, 25 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
B |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Base, 50 |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System |
|||
(BDOS), 2, 89, 127 |
|||
Basic I/O System (BIOS), |
|||
2, 89, 127 |
|||
BDOS (Basic Disk Operating |
|||
System), 2, 89, 127 |
|||
Binary constants, 50 |
|||
BIOS (Basic I/O System), |
|||
2, 89, 127 |
|||
BIOS disk definition, 137, 148 |
|||
subroutines |
|||
Block move command, 74 |
|||
bls parameter, 149 |
|||
BOOT, 90, 136, 140 |
|||
entry point |
|||
Break point, 71, 73 |
|||
Built-in commands, 3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
C |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Case translation, 5, 6, 20, |
|||
37, 39, 44, 45, 51, 95 |
|||
CCP (Console Command |
|||
Processor), 2, 69, 89, 127 |
|||
CCP Stack, 92 |
|||
Character pointer, 35 |
|||
CKS parameter, 149 |
|||
Close File function, 101 |
|||
Code and data areas, 144 |
|||
Cold start loader, 136, |
|||
140, 143 |
|||
Combine files, 17 |
|||
Command, 3 |
|||
Command line, 90 |
|||
Comment field, 49 |
|||
Compute File Size |
|||
function, 108 |
|||
Condition flags, 58, 77 |
|||
Conditional assembly, 56 |
|||
CONIN, 140 |
|||
CONOUT, 141 |
|||
CONSOLE, 138 |
|||
Console Command Processor |
|||
(CCP), 2, 69, 89, 127 |
|||
Console Input function, 95 |
|||
Console Output function, 96 |
|||
CONST, 140 |
|||
Constant, 50 |
|||
Control characters, 9, |
|||
Control functions, 9 |
|||
CTRL-Z character, 93 |
|||
Copy files, 17 |
|||
CPU state, 71 |
|||
cr (carriage return), 39 |
|||
Create files, 23 |
|||
Create system disk, 24 |
|||
Creating COM files, 16 |
|||
Currently logged disk, |
|||
3, 5, 10, 17, 25 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
D |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Data allocation size, 147 |
|||
Data block number, 147 |
|||
DB statement, 57 |
|||
DDT commands, 70, 133 |
|||
DDT nucleus, 77 |
|||
DDT prompt, 70 |
|||
DDT sign-on message, 69 |
|||
Decimal constant, 50 |
|||
Default FCB, 73 |
|||
Delete File function, 102 |
|||
DESPOOL, 138 |
|||
Device assignment, 11 |
|||
DIR, 6 |
|||
DIR attribute, 14 |
|||
dir parameter, 149 |
|||
Direct console I/O |
|||
function, 97 |
|||
Direct Memory Address, 104 |
|||
Directory, 6 |
|||
Directory code, 100, 101, |
|||
102, 103 |
|||
Disassembler, 71, 77 |
|||
Disk attributes, 11 |
|||
Disk drive name, 5 |
|||
Disk I/O functions, 99-110 |
|||
Disk parameter block, 146 |
|||
Disk parameter header, 145 |
|||
Disk parameter table, 145 |
|||
Disk statistics, 10 |
|||
Disk-to-disk copy, 18 |
|||
DISKDEF macro, 149 |
|||
Diskette format, 31 |
|||
DISKS macro, 150, 186 |
|||
Display file contents, 8 |
|||
dks parameter, 149 |
|||
DMA, 104 |
|||
DMA address, 93 |
|||
dn parameter, 149 |
|||
DPBASE, 146 |
|||
Drive characteristics, 14 |
|||
Drive select code, 94 |
|||
Drive specification, 5 |
|||
DS statement, 57 |
|||
DUMP, 27, 113 |
|||
DW statement, 57 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
E |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED, 23, 33-45, 131 |
|||
ED commands, 38, 44 |
|||
ED errors, 43 |
|||
Edit command line, 9 |
|||
8080 CPU registers, 76 |
|||
8080 registers, 51 |
|||
end-of-file, 19, 93 |
|||
END statement, 49, 54 |
|||
EMDEF macro, 150 |
|||
ENDIF statement, 56 |
|||
EQU statement, 55 |
|||
ERA, 6 |
|||
Erase files, 6 |
|||
Error messages, 29, 43, |
|||
62, 153 |
|||
Expression, 49 |
|||
Extents, 13 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
F |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
FBASE, 89 |
|||
FCB, 93, 94 |
|||
FCB format, 93, 94 |
|||
FDOS (operations), 89, 91 |
|||
File attributes, 14 |
|||
File compatibility, 23 |
|||
File control block (FCB), |
|||
93, 94 |
|||
File expansion, 128 |
|||
File extent, 93 |
|||
File indicators, 14 |
|||
File names, 3 |
|||
File reference, 3 |
|||
File statistics, 10, 13 |
|||
Filetype, 93 |
|||
Find command, 39 |
|||
fsc parameter, 149 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
G |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Get ADDR (Alloc) function, |
|||
105 |
|||
Get ADDR (Disk Parms) |
|||
function, 106 |
|||
Get Console Status, 99 |
|||
Get I/O Byte function, 97 |
|||
Get Read/Only Vector |
|||
function, 105 |
|||
GETSYS, 128, 134 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
H |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Hexadecimal, 49, 50 |
|||
Hex files, 16, 19, 20, 47 |
|||
HOME subroutine, 139, 141 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
I |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Identifier, 49, 50 |
|||
IF statement, 56 |
|||
Initialized storage areas, 57 |
|||
In-line assembly language, 71 |
|||
Insert mode, 37 |
|||
Insert String, 40 |
|||
IOBYTE function, 138, 139 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
J |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Jump vector, 137 |
|||
Juxtaposition command,41 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
K |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Key fields, 109 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
L |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Label field, 49 |
|||
Labels, 48, 49, 58 |
|||
Library read command, 42 |
|||
Line-editing control |
|||
characters, 38, 70, 98 |
|||
Line-editing functions, 9 |
|||
Line numbers, 36 |
|||
LIST, 138, 141 |
|||
List Output function, 96 |
|||
LISTST, 142 |
|||
LOAD, 16 |
|||
Logged in, 3 |
|||
Logical devices, 11, 18, 138 |
|||
Logical extents, 93 |
|||
Logical-physical assignments, |
|||
12, 139 |
|||
Logical to physical device |
|||
mapping, 138 |
|||
Logical to physical sector |
|||
translation, 143, 149 |
|||
Isc parameter, 149 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
M |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Machine executable code, 16 |
|||
Macro command, 42 |
|||
Make File function, 103 |
|||
Memory buffer, 33, 34, 35, 37 |
|||
Memory image, 71, 131, 132 |
|||
Memory image file, 16 |
|||
Memory size, 27, 128, 132 |
|||
MOVCPM, 27, 131, 132 |
|||
Multiple command |
|||
processing, 25 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
N |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
{o} parameter, 149 |
|||
Octal constant, 50 |
|||
ofs parameter, 150 |
|||
On-line status, 100 |
|||
Open File function, 100 |
|||
Operand field, 49-51 |
|||
Operation field, 49-58 |
|||
Operators, 52, 53, 58 |
|||
ORG directive, 54 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
P |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Page zero, 144 |
|||
Patching the CP/M system, 128 |
|||
Peripheral devices, 138 |
|||
Physical devices, 12, 18, 139 |
|||
Physical file size, 109 |
|||
Physical to logical device |
|||
assignment, 12, 139 |
|||
PIP, 17 |
|||
PIP devices, 19 |
|||
PIP parameters, 20 |
|||
Print String function, 98 |
|||
PRN file, 47 |
|||
Program counter, 71, 73, 76 |
|||
Program tracing, 75 |
|||
Prompt, 3 |
|||
Pseudo-operation, 53 |
|||
PUNCH, 138, 141 |
|||
Punch Output function, 96 |
|||
PUTSYS, 129, 135 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
R |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Radix indicators, 50 |
|||
Random access, 107, 108, 117 |
|||
Random record number, 108 |
|||
READ, 142 |
|||
Read Console Buffer |
|||
function, 98 |
|||
Read only, 14 |
|||
Read/only status, 14 |
|||
Read random error codes, 107 |
|||
Read Random function, 107 |
|||
READ routine, 139 |
|||
Read Sequential function, 102 |
|||
Read/write, 14 |
|||
READER, 138, 141 |
|||
Reader Input function, 96 |
|||
REN, 7 |
|||
Rename file function, 104 |
|||
Reset Disk function, 99 |
|||
Reset Drive function, 109 |
|||
Reset state, 99 |
|||
Return Current Disk |
|||
function, 104 |
|||
Return Log-in Vector |
|||
function, 104 |
|||
Return Version Number |
|||
function, 99 |
|||
R/O, 14 |
|||
R/O, attribute, 106 |
|||
R/O bit, 105 |
|||
R/W, 14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
S |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
SAVE, 7 |
|||
SAVE command, 70 |
|||
Search for First function, 101 |
|||
Search for Next function, 102 |
|||
Search strings, 39 |
|||
Sector allocation, 136 |
|||
SECTRAN, 143 |
|||
SELDSK, 139, 141, 146 |
|||
Select Disk function, 100 |
|||
Sequential access, 93 |
|||
Set DMA address function, 104 |
|||
Set File Attributes |
|||
function, 106 |
|||
Set/GET User Code |
|||
function, 106 |
|||
Set I/O Byte function, 97 |
|||
Set Random Record |
|||
function, 109 |
|||
SET statement, 55 |
|||
SETDMA, 142 |
|||
SETSEC, 142 |
|||
SETTRK, 141 |
|||
Simple character I/O, 138 |
|||
Size in records, 13 |
|||
skf parameter, 149, 150 |
|||
Source files, 93 |
|||
Stack pointer, 92 |
|||
STAT, 10, 139, 151 |
|||
Stop console output, 9 |
|||
String substitutions, 40 |
|||
SUBMIT, 25 |
|||
SYS attribute, 14 |
|||
SYSGEN, 24, 134 |
|||
System attribute, 44, 106 |
|||
System parameters, 140 |
|||
System (re)initialization, 138 |
|||
System Reset function, 95 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
T |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Testing and debugging of |
|||
programs, 69 |
|||
Text transfer commands, 35 |
|||
TPA (Transient Program Area), |
|||
2, 89 |
|||
Trace mode, 76 |
|||
Transient commands, 3, 9 |
|||
Transient Program Area |
|||
(TPA), 2, 89 |
|||
Translate table, 150 |
|||
Translation vectors, 146 |
|||
TYPE, 8 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
U |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
ufn, 3, 6 |
|||
Unambiguous file reference, |
|||
3, 6 |
|||
Uninitialized memory, 57 |
|||
Untrace mode, 76 |
|||
USER, 8 |
|||
USER numbers, 8, 15, 106 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
V |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Verify line numbers command, |
|||
37, 45 |
|||
Version independent |
|||
programming, 99 |
|||
Virtual file size, 108 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
W |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Warm start, 90, 140 |
|||
WBOOT entry point, 140 |
|||
WRITE, 142 |
|||
Write Protect Disk |
|||
function, 105 |
|||
Write random error codes, 108 |
|||
Write Random function, 108 |
|||
Write Random with Zero Fill |
|||
function, 110 |
|||
Write routine, 142 |
|||
Write Sequential function, 103 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
X |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
XSOB, 26 |
|||
.fi |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,993 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 1-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 1 CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 1 |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.1 Introduction |
|||
.tc 1.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.1 Introduction |
|||
.qs |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
CP/M \ is a monitor control program for microcomputer system development that |
|||
uses floppy disks or Winchester hard disks for backup storage. Using a |
|||
computer system based on the Intel \ 8080 microcomputer, CP/M provides an |
|||
environment for program construction, storage, and editing, along |
|||
with assembly and program check-out facilities. CP/M can be easily |
|||
altered to execute with any computer |
|||
configuration that uses a Zilog \ Z80 \ or an Intel 8080 Central Processing |
|||
Unit (CPU) and has at least 20K bytes of main memory with up to 16 disk |
|||
drives. A detailed discussion of the modifications required for any |
|||
particular hardware environment is given in Section 6. Although the |
|||
standard Digital Research version operates on a single-density |
|||
Intel Model 800, microcomputer development system several different |
|||
hardware manufacturers support their own input-output (I/O) drivers for CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CP/M monitor provides rapid access to programs through a comprehensive |
|||
file management package. The file subsystem supports a named file structure, |
|||
allowing dynamic allocation of file space as well as sequential and random |
|||
file access. Using this file system, a large number of programs can be |
|||
stored in both source and machine-executable form. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M 2 is a high-performance, single console operating system that uses |
|||
table-driven techniques to allow field reconfiguration to match a wide |
|||
variety of disk capacities. All fundamental file restrictions are removed, |
|||
maintaining upward compatibility from previous versions of release 1. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Features of CP/M 2 include field specification of one to sixteen logical |
|||
drives, each containing up to eight megabytes. Any particular file can |
|||
reach the full drive size with the capability of expanding to thirty-two |
|||
megabytes in future releases. The directory size can be field-configured to |
|||
contain any reasonable number of entries, and each file is optionally tagged |
|||
with Read-Only and system attributes. Users of CP/M 2 are physically |
|||
separated by user numbers, with facilities for file copy operations from one |
|||
user area to another. Powerful relative-record random access functions are |
|||
present in CP/M 2 that provide direct access to any of the 65536 records of |
|||
an eight-megabyte file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M also supports ED, a powerful context editor, ASM , an Intel-compatible |
|||
assembler, and DDT , debugger subsystems. Optional software includes a |
|||
powerful |
|||
Intel-compatible macro assembler, symbolic debugger, along with various |
|||
high-level languages. When coupled with CP/M's Console Command |
|||
Processor (CCP), |
|||
the resulting facilities equal or exceed similar large computer facilities. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M is logically divided into several distinct parts: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
o BIOS (Basic I/O System), hardware-dependent |
|||
o BDOS (Basic Disk Operating System) |
|||
o CCP (Console Command Processor) |
|||
o TPA (Transient Program Area) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The BIOS provides the primitive operations necessary to access the disk |
|||
drives and to interface standard peripherals: teletype, CRT, paper tape |
|||
reader/punch, and user-defined peripherals. You can tailor |
|||
peripherals for any particular hardware environment by patching this |
|||
portion of |
|||
CP/M. The BDOS provides disk management by controlling one or more disk |
|||
drives containing independent file directories. The BDOS implements disk |
|||
allocation strategies that provide fully dynamic file construction while |
|||
minimizing head movement across the disk during access. The BDOS has entry |
|||
points that include the following primitive operations, which the |
|||
program accesses: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o SEARCH looks for a particular disk file by name. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o OPEN opens a file for further operations. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o CLOSE closes a file after processing. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o RENAME changes the name of a particular file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o READ reads a record from a particular file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o WRITE writes a record to a particular file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o SELECT selects a particular disk drive for further operations. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CCP provides a symbolic interface between your console and the |
|||
remainder of the CP/M system. The CCP reads the console device and |
|||
processes commands, which include listing the file directory, printing the |
|||
contents of files, and controlling the operation of transient programs, such |
|||
as assemblers, editors, and debuggers. The standard commands that are |
|||
available in the CCP are listed in Section 1.2.1. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The last segment of CP/M is the area called the Transient Program |
|||
Area (TPA). The TPA holds programs that are loaded from the disk under |
|||
command of the CCP. During program editing, for example, the TPA holds |
|||
the CP/M text editor machine code and data areas. Similarly, programs |
|||
created under CP/M can be checked out by loading and executing these |
|||
programs in the TPA. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Any or all of the CP/M component subsystems can be overlaid by an |
|||
executing program. That is, once a user's program is loaded into the TPA, |
|||
the CCP, BDOS, and BIOS areas can be used as the program's data area. |
|||
A bootstrap loader is programmatically accessible whenever the BIOS portion |
|||
is not overlaid; thus, the user program need only branch to the bootstrap |
|||
loader at the end of execution and the complete CP/M monitor is reloaded |
|||
from disk. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CP/M operating system is partitioned into distinct modules, including |
|||
the BIOS portion that defines the hardware environment in which CP/M is |
|||
executing. Thus, the standard system is easily modified to any nonstandard |
|||
environment by changing the peripheral drivers to handle the custom system. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 1.2 Functional Description |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.2 Functional Description |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.2 Functional Description |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
You interact with CP/M primarily through the CCP, which reads and |
|||
interprets commands entered through the console. In general, the CCP |
|||
addresses one of several disks that are on-line. The standard system |
|||
addresses up to sixteen different disk drives. These disk drives are |
|||
labeled A through P. A disk is logged-in if the CCP is currently |
|||
addressing the disk. To clearly indicate which disk is the currently logged |
|||
disk, the CCP always prompts the operator with the disk name followed by the |
|||
symbol >, indicating that the CCP is ready for another command. Upon |
|||
initial start-up, the CP/M system is loaded from disk A, and the CCP |
|||
displays the following message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
CP/M VER x.x |
|||
.sp |
|||
where x.x is the CP/M version number. All CP/M systems are initially set |
|||
to operate in a 20K memory space, but can be easily reconfigured to fit any |
|||
memory size on the host system (see Section 1.6.9). Following system |
|||
sign-on, CP/M automatically logs in disk A, prompts you with the |
|||
symbol A>, indicating that CP/M is currently addressing disk A, and |
|||
waits for a command. The commands are implemented at two levels: built-in |
|||
commands and transient commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.2.1 General Command Structure |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.2.1 General Command Structure |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Built-in commands are a part of the CCP program, while transient |
|||
commands are loaded into the TPA from disk and executed. The |
|||
following are built-in commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
o ERA erases specified files. |
|||
o DIR lists filenames in the directory. |
|||
o REN renames the specified file. |
|||
o SAVE saves memory contents in a file. |
|||
o TYPE types the contents of a file on the logged disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
Most of the commands reference a particular file or group of files. The |
|||
form of a file reference is specified in Section 1.2.2. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.2.2 File References |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.2.2 File References |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
A file reference identifies a particular file or group of files on a |
|||
particular disk attached to CP/M. These file references are |
|||
either unambiguous (ufn) or ambiguous (afn). An unambiguous file |
|||
reference uniquely identifies a single file, while an ambiguous file |
|||
reference is satisfied by a number of different files. |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
File references consist of two parts: the primary filename and the |
|||
filetype. Although the filetype is optional, it usually is |
|||
generic. For example, the filetype ASM is used to denote that the file is an |
|||
assembly language source file, while the primary filename distinguishes each |
|||
particular source file. The two names are separated by a period, as shown |
|||
in the following example: |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.typ |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
In this example, filename is the primary filename of eight characters or |
|||
less, and typ |
|||
is the filetype of no more than three characters. As mentioned above, the |
|||
name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename |
|||
.sp |
|||
is also allowed and is equivalent to a filetype consisting of |
|||
three blanks. The characters used in specifying an unambiguous |
|||
file reference cannot contain any of the following special |
|||
characters: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
< > . , ; : = ? * [ ] _ % | ( ) / \\textbackslash |
|||
.sp |
|||
while all alphanumerics and remaining special characters are allowed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
An ambiguous file reference is used for directory search and pattern |
|||
matching. The form of an ambiguous file reference is similar to an |
|||
unambiguous reference, except the symbol ? can be interspersed throughout |
|||
the primary and secondary names. In various commands throughout CP/M, |
|||
the ? symbol matches any character of a filename in the ? position. |
|||
Thus, the ambiguous reference |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X?Z.C?M |
|||
.sp |
|||
matches the following unambiguous filenames |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
XYZ.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
and |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X3Z.CAM |
|||
.sp |
|||
The * wildcard character can also be used in an ambiguous file |
|||
reference. The * character replaces all or part of a filename or |
|||
filetype. Note that |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*.* |
|||
.sp |
|||
equals the ambiguous file reference |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
????????.??? |
|||
.sp |
|||
while |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.* |
|||
.sp |
|||
and |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*.typ |
|||
.sp |
|||
are abbreviations for |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.??? |
|||
.sp |
|||
and |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
????????.typ |
|||
.sp |
|||
respectively. As an example, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR *.* |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
is interpreted by the CCP as a command to list the names of all disk files |
|||
in the directory. The following example searches only for a file |
|||
by the name X.Y: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR X,Y |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Similarly, the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR X?Y.C?M |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
causes a search for all unambiguous filenames on the disk that satisfy |
|||
this ambiguous reference. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following file references are valid unambiguous file references: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
X |
|||
X.Y |
|||
XYZ |
|||
XYZ.COM |
|||
GAMMA |
|||
GAMMA.1 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
As an added convenience, the programmer can generally specify the disk drive |
|||
name along with the filename. In this case, the drive name is given as a |
|||
letter A through P followed by a colon (:). The specified drive is |
|||
then logged-in before the file operation occurs. Thus, the following are |
|||
valid file references with disk name prefixes: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
A:X.Y |
|||
P:XYZ.COM |
|||
B:XYZ |
|||
B:X.A?M |
|||
C:GAMMA |
|||
C:*.ASM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
All alphabetic lower-case letters in file and drive names are translated to |
|||
upper-case when they are processed by the CCP. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.3 Switching Disks |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.3 Switching Disks |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.3 Switching Disks |
|||
.qs |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operator can switch the currently logged disk by typing the disk drive |
|||
name, A through P, followed by a colon when the CCP is waiting for |
|||
console input. The following sequence of prompts and commands |
|||
can occur after the CP/M system is loaded from disk A: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
CP/M VER 2.2 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
List all files on disk A. |
|||
A:SAMPLE ASM SAMPLE PRN |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
B: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Switch to disk B. |
|||
B>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR *.ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
List all ASM files on B. |
|||
B:DUMP ASM FILES ASM |
|||
b>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
A: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Switch back to A. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4 Built-in Commands |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.4 Built-in Commands |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4 Built-in Commands |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The file and device reference forms described can now be used to fully |
|||
specify the structure of the built-in commands. Assume the following |
|||
abbreviations in the description below: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
ufn unambiguous file reference |
|||
afn ambiguous file reference |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Recall that the CCP always translates lower-case characters to upper-case |
|||
characters internally. Thus, lower-case alphabetics are treated as if they |
|||
are upper-case in command names and file references. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4.1 ERA Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.1 ERA Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ERA afn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ERA (erase) command removes files from the currently logged-in |
|||
disk, for example, the disk name currently prompted by CP/M preceding the >. |
|||
The files that are erased are those that satisfy the ambiguous file |
|||
reference afn. The following examples illustrate the use of ERA: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA X.Y The file named X.Y on the currently logged disk is removed |
|||
from the disk directory and the space is returned. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA X.* All files with primary name X are removed from the current |
|||
disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA *.ASM All files with secondary name ASM are removed from the |
|||
current disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA X?Y.C?M All files on the current disk that satisfy the ambiguous |
|||
reference X?Y.C?M are deleted. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA *.* Erase all files on the current disk. In this |
|||
case, the CCP prompts the console with the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
ALL FILES (Y/N)? |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
which requires a Y response before files are actually removed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA b:*.PRN All files on drive B that satisfy the ambiguous |
|||
reference ????????.PRN are deleted, independently of the currently |
|||
logged disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 1.4.2 DIR Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.2 DIR Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DIR afn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DIR (directory) command causes the names of all files that satisfy the |
|||
ambiguous filename afn to be listed at the console device. As a special |
|||
case, the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DIR |
|||
.sp |
|||
lists the files on the currently logged disk (the command DIR is |
|||
equivalent to the command DIR *.*). The following are valid DIR |
|||
commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DIR X.Y |
|||
DIR X?Z.C?M |
|||
DIR ??.Y |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
Similar to other CCP commands, the afn can be preceded by a drive name. |
|||
The following DIR commands cause the selected drive to be addressed before |
|||
the directory search takes place: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DIR B: |
|||
DIR B:X.Y |
|||
DIR B:*.A?M |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
If no files on the selected disk satisfy the directory request, the |
|||
message NO FILE appears at the console. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 1.4.3 REN Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.3 REN Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
REN ufn1=ufn2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The REN (rename) command allows you to change the names of files on |
|||
disk. The file satisfying ufn2 is changed to ufn1. The currently logged |
|||
disk is assumed to contain the file to rename (ufn2). You can also |
|||
type a left-directed arrow instead of the equal sign if the console supports |
|||
this graphic character. The following are examples of the REN |
|||
command: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN X.Y=Q.R The file Q.R is changed to X.Y. |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
.sp |
|||
REN XYZ.COM=XYZ.XXX The file XYZ.XXX is changed to XYZ.COM. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operator precedes either ufn1 or ufn2 (or both) by an optional drive |
|||
address. If ufn1 is preceded by a drive name, then ufn2 is assumed to exist |
|||
on the same drive. Similarly, if ufn2 is preceded by a drive name, then |
|||
ufn1 is assumed to exist on the drive as well. The same drive must be |
|||
specified in both cases if both ufn1 and ufn2 are preceded by drive names. |
|||
The following REN commands illustrate this format: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN A:X.ASM=Y.ASM The file Y.ASM is changed to X.ASM on drive A. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN B:ZAP.BAS=ZOT.BAS The file ZOT.BAS is changed to ZAP.BAS on drive B. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN B:A.ASM=B:A.BAK The file A.BAK is renamed to A.ASM on drive B. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
If ufn1 is already present, the REN command responds with the |
|||
error FILE EXISTS and not perform the change. If ufn2 does not exist on |
|||
the specified disk, the message NO FILE is printed at the console. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4.4 SAVE Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.4 SAVE Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE n ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SAVE command places n pages (256-byte blocks) onto disk from the TPA |
|||
and names this file ufn. In the CP/M distribution system, the TPA starts |
|||
at 100H (hexadecimal) which is the second page of memory. The SAVE command |
|||
must specify 2 pages of memory if the user's program occupies the area |
|||
from 100H through 2FFH. The machine code file can be subsequently loaded |
|||
and executed. The following are examples of the SAVE command: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 3X.COM Copies 100H through 3FFH to X.COM. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 40 Q Copies 100H through 28FFH to Q. Note that 28 is the |
|||
page count in 28FFH, and that 28H = 2*16+8=40 decimal. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 4 X.Y Copies 100H through 4FFH to X.Y. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The SAVE command can also specify a disk drive in the ufn portion of the |
|||
command, as shown in the following example: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 10 B:ZOT.COM Copies 10 pages, 100H through 0AFFH, to the |
|||
file ZOT.COM on drive B. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 1.4.5 TYPE Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.5 TYPE Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
TYPE ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The TYPE command displays the content of the ASCII source file ufn on the |
|||
currently logged disk at the console device. The following are valid |
|||
TYPE commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TYPE X.Y |
|||
TYPE X.PLM |
|||
TYPE XXX |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
The TYPE command expands tabs, CTRL-I characters, assuming tab positions are |
|||
set at every eighth column. The ufn can also reference a drive name. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
TYPE B:X.PRN The file X.PRN from drive B is displayed. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4.6 USER Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.6 USER Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
USER n |
|||
.pp |
|||
The USER command allows maintenance of separate files in the same |
|||
directory. In the syntax line, n is an integer value in the range 0 to |
|||
15. On cold start, the operator is automatically logged into user |
|||
area number 0, which is |
|||
compatible with standard CP/M 1 directories. You can issue the |
|||
USER command at any time to move to another logical area within the same |
|||
directory. Drives that are logged-in while addressing one user number are |
|||
automatically active when the operator moves to another. A user number is |
|||
simply a prefix that accesses particular directory entries on the active |
|||
disks. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The active user number is maintained until changed by a subsequent USER |
|||
command, or until a cold start when user 0 is again assumed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.5 Line Editing and Output Control |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.5 Line Editing and Output Control |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.5 Line Editing and Output Control |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CCP allows certain line-editing functions while typing command lines. |
|||
The CTRL-key sequences are obtained by pressing the control and letter keys |
|||
simultaneously. Further, CCP command lines are generally up to 255 |
|||
characters in length; they are not acted upon until the carriage return key |
|||
is pressed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-1. Line-editing Control Characters |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Character Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 18 |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-C Reboots CP/M system when pressed at start of line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-E Physical end of line; carriage is returned, but line is not sent |
|||
until the carriage return key is pressed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-H Backspaces one character position. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-J Terminates current input (line feed). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-M Terminates current input (carriage return). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-P Copies all subsequent console output to the currently |
|||
assigned list device (see Section 1.6.1). Output is sent to the list device |
|||
and the console device until the next CTRL-P is pressed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-R Retypes current command line; types a clean line following |
|||
character deletion with rubouts. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-S Stops the console output temporarily. Program execution and |
|||
output continue when you press any character at the console, for |
|||
example another CTRL-S. This feature stops output on high speed consoles, |
|||
such as CRTs, in order to view a segment of output before continuing. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-1. (continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Character Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 18 |
|||
.ti-12 |
|||
CTRL-U Deletes the entire line typed at the console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-X Same as CTRL-U. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-Z Ends input from the console (used in PIP and ED). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
RUB/DEL Deletes and echoes the last character typed at the console. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Transient commands are loaded from the currently logged disk and executed in |
|||
the TPA. The transient commands for execution under the CCP are below. |
|||
Additional functions are easily defined by the user (see Section 1.6.3). |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-2. CP/M Transient Commands |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Command Function |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
STAT Lists the number of bytes of storage remaining on the currently |
|||
logged disk, provides statistical information about particular files, and |
|||
displays or alters device assignment. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
ASM Loads the CP/M assembler and assembles the specified program from |
|||
disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
LOAD Loads the file in Intel HEX machine code format and produces a |
|||
file in machine executable form which can be loaded into the TPA. This loaded |
|||
program becomes a new command under the CCP. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
DDT Loads the CP/M debugger into TPA and starts execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
PIP Loads the Peripheral Interchange Program for subsequent disk file |
|||
and peripheral transfer operations. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti-11 |
|||
ED Loads and executes the CP/M text editor program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
SYSGEN Creates a new CP/M system disk. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-2. (continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Command Function |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
SUBMIT Submits a file of commands for batch processing. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
DUMP Dumps the contents of a file in hex. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
MOVCPM Regenerates the CP/M system for a particular memory size. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Transient commands are specified in the same manner as built-in commands, and |
|||
additional commands are easily defined by the user. For convenience, the |
|||
transient command can be preceded by a drive name which causes the transient |
|||
to be loaded from the specified drive into the TPA for execution. Thus, the |
|||
command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
B:STAT |
|||
.sp |
|||
causes CP/M to temporarily log in drive B for the source of the STAT |
|||
transient, and then return to the original logged disk for subsequent |
|||
processing. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.1 STAT Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.1 STAT Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
STAT |
|||
STAT "command line" |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The STAT command provides general statistical information about file storage |
|||
and device assignment. Special forms of the command line allow the current |
|||
device assignment to be |
|||
examined and altered. The various command lines that can be specified are |
|||
shown with an explanation of each form to the right. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT If you type an empty command line, the STAT transient |
|||
calculates the storage remaining on all active drives, and prints |
|||
one of the following messages: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
d: R/W, SPACE: nnnK |
|||
.sp |
|||
d: R/O, SPACE: nnnK |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
for each active drive d:, where R/W indicates the drive can be read or |
|||
written, and R/O indicates the drive is Read-Only (a drive becomes R/O by |
|||
explicitly setting it to Read-Only, as shown below, or by inadvertently |
|||
changing disks without performing a warm start). The space remaining on |
|||
the disk in drive d: is given in kilobytes by nnn. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT d: If a drive name is given, then the drive is selected before |
|||
the storage is computed. Thus, the command STAT B: could be issued while |
|||
logged into drive A, resulting in the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
BYTES REMAINING ON B: nnnK |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT afn The command line can also specify a set of files to be |
|||
scanned by STAT. The files that satisfy afn are listed in alphabetical |
|||
order, with storage requirements for each file under the heading: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
RECS BYTES EXT D:FILENAME.TYP |
|||
rrrr bbbK ee d:filename.typ |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where rrrr is the number of 128-byte records allocated to the file, bbb is |
|||
the number of kilobytes allocated to the file (bbb=rrrr*128/1024), ee is the |
|||
number of 16K extensions (ee=bbb/16), d is the drive name containing the |
|||
file (A...P), filename is the eight-character primary filename, and |
|||
typ is the three-character filetype. After listing the individual |
|||
files, the storage usage is summarized. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT d:afn The drive name can be given ahead of the afn. The specified |
|||
drive is first selected, and the form STAT afn is executed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT d:=R/O This form sets the drive given by d to Read-Only, remaining |
|||
in effect until the next warm or cold start takes place. When a disk is |
|||
Read-Only, the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
BDOS ERR ON d: Read-Only |
|||
.sp |
|||
appears if there is an attempt to write to the Read-Only disk. CP/M |
|||
waits until a key is pressed before performing an automatic |
|||
warm start, at |
|||
which time the disk becomes R/W. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The STAT command allows you to control the physical-to-logical device |
|||
assignment. See the IOBYTE function described in Sections 5 and 6. There |
|||
are four logical peripheral devices that are, at any particular instant, each |
|||
assigned one of several physical peripheral devices. The |
|||
following is a list of the four logical devices: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o CON: is the system console device, used by CCP for communication with the |
|||
operator. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o RDR: is the paper tape reader device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o PUN: is the paper tape punch device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o LST: is the output list device. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The actual devices attached to any particular computer system are driven by |
|||
subroutines in the BIOS portion of CP/M. Thus, the logical RDR: device, for |
|||
example, could actually be a high speed reader, teletype reader, or cassette |
|||
tape. To allow some flexibility in device naming and assignment, several |
|||
physical devices are defined in Table 1-3. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-3. Physical Devices |
|||
.qs |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Device Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 14 |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
TTY: Teletype device (slow speed console) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
CRT: Cathode ray tube device (high speed console) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
BAT: Batch processing (console is current RDR:, output goes to current |
|||
LST: device) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UC1: User-defined console |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
PTR: Paper tape reader (high speed reader) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UR1: User-defined reader #1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UR2: User-defined reader #2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
PTP: Paper tape punch (high speed punch) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UP1: User-defined punch #1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UP2: User-defined punch #2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
LPT: Line printer |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UL1: User-defined list device #1 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.nx oneb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,915 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.ft 1-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
It is emphasized that the physical device names might not actually |
|||
correspond to devices that the names imply. That is, you can |
|||
implement the PTP: device as a cassette write operation. The exact |
|||
correspondence and driving subroutine is defined in the BIOS portion of |
|||
CP/M. In the standard distribution version of CP/M, these devices correspond |
|||
to their names on the Model 800 development system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The command, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT VAL: |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces a summary of the available status commands, resulting in |
|||
the output: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Temp R/O Disk d:$R/O |
|||
Set Indicator: filename.typ $R/O $R/W $SYS $DIR |
|||
Disk Status: DSK: d:DSK |
|||
Iobyte Assign: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
which gives an instant summary of the possible STAT commands and shows the |
|||
permissible logical-to-physical device assignments: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
CON: = TTY: CRT: BAT: UC1: |
|||
RDR: = TTY: PTR: UR1: UR2: |
|||
PUN: = TTY: PTP: UP1: UP2: |
|||
LST: = TTY: CRT: LPT: UL1: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The logical device to the left takes any of the four physical assignments |
|||
shown to the right. The current logical-to-physical mapping is displayed by |
|||
typing the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT DEV: |
|||
.sp |
|||
This command produces a list of each logical device to the left and |
|||
the current |
|||
corresponding physical device to the right. For example, the list might |
|||
appear as follows: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
CON: = CRT: |
|||
RDR: = UR1: |
|||
PUN: = PTP: |
|||
LST: = TTY: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The current logical-to-physical device assignment is changed by typing a STAT |
|||
command of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT ld1 = pd1, ld2 = pd2, ... , ldn = pdn |
|||
.sp |
|||
where ld1 through ldn are logical device names and pd1 through pdn are |
|||
compatible physical device names. For example, ldi and pdi appear on the |
|||
same line |
|||
in the VAL: command shown above. The following example shows valid STAT |
|||
commands that change the |
|||
current logical-to-physical device assignments: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
STAT CON:=CRT: |
|||
STAT PUN:=TTY:, LST:=LPT:, RDR:=TTY: |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
The command form, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $S |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d: is an optional drive name and filename.typ is an unambiguous or |
|||
ambiguous filename, produces the following output display format: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Size Recs Bytes Ext Acc |
|||
.sp |
|||
48 48 6K 1 R/O A:ED.COM |
|||
55 55 12K 1 R/O (A:PIP.COM) |
|||
65536 128 16K 2 R/W A:X.DAT |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
where the $S parameter causes the Size field to be displayed. Without the |
|||
$S, the Size field is skipped, but the remaining fields are displayed. The |
|||
Size field lists the virtual file size in records, while the Recs field |
|||
sums the number of virtual records in each extent. For files constructed |
|||
sequentially, the Size and Recs fields are identical. The Bytes field |
|||
lists the actual number of bytes allocated to the corresponding file. The |
|||
minimum allocation unit is determined at configuration time; thus, the number |
|||
of bytes corresponds to the record count plus the remaining unused space in |
|||
the last allocated block for sequential files. Random access files are given |
|||
data areas only when written, so the Bytes field contains the only accurate |
|||
allocation figure. In the case of random access, the Size field gives the |
|||
logical end-of-file record position and the Recs field counts the logical |
|||
records of each extent. Each of these extents, however, can contain |
|||
unallocated holes even though they are added into the record count. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Ext field counts the number of physical extents allocated to the file. |
|||
The Ext count corresponds to the number of directory entries given to the |
|||
file. Depending on allocation size, there can be up to 128K |
|||
bytes (8 logical extents) directly addressed by a single directory entry. In a special case, |
|||
there are actually 256K bytes that can be directly addressed by a physical |
|||
extent. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Acc field gives the R/O or R/W file indicator, which you can |
|||
change using the commands shown. The four command forms, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $R/O |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $R/W |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $SYS |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $DIR |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
set or reset various permanent file indicators. The R/O indicator places the |
|||
file, or set of files, in a Read-Only status until changed by a subsequent |
|||
STAT command. The R/O status is recorded in the directory with the file so |
|||
that it remains R/O through intervening cold start operations. The R/W |
|||
indicator places the file in a permanent Read-Write status. The SYS |
|||
indicator attaches the system indicator to the file, while the DIR command |
|||
removes the system indicator. The filename.typ may be ambiguous or |
|||
unambiguous, but files whose attributes are changed are listed at the console |
|||
when the change occurs. The drive name denoted by d: is optional. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When a file is marked R/O, subsequent attempts to erase or write into the |
|||
file produce the following BDOS message at your screen: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS Err on d: File R/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
lists the drive characteristics of the disk named by d: that is in the range |
|||
A:, B:,...,P:. The drive characteristics are listed in the |
|||
following format: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
d: Drive Characteristics |
|||
65536: 128 Byte Record Capacity |
|||
8192: Kilobyte Drive Capacity |
|||
128: 32 Byte Directory Entries |
|||
0: Checked Directory Entries |
|||
1024: Records/Extent |
|||
128: Records/Block |
|||
58: Sectors/Track |
|||
2: Reserved Tracks |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d: is the selected drive, followed by the total record capacity |
|||
(65536 is an eight-megabyte drive), followed by the total capacity listed in |
|||
kilobytes. The directory size is listed next, followed by the checked |
|||
entries. The number of checked entries is usually identical to the directory |
|||
size for removable media, because this mechanism is used to detect changed |
|||
media during CP/M operation without an intervening warm start. For fixed |
|||
media, the number is usually zero, because the media are not changed without |
|||
at least a cold or warm start. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The number of records per extent determines |
|||
the addressing capacity of each directory entry (1024 times 128 bytes, or |
|||
128K in the previous example). The number of records per block shows the |
|||
basic allocation size (in the example, 128 records/block times 128 bytes per |
|||
record, or 16K bytes per block). The listing is then followed by the number |
|||
of physical sectors per track and the number of reserved tracks. |
|||
.pp |
|||
For logical |
|||
drives that share the same physical disk, the number of reserved tracks can |
|||
be quite large because this mechanism is used to skip lower-numbered disk |
|||
areas allocated to other logical disks. The command form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT DSK: |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces a drive characteristics table for all currently active drives. The |
|||
final STAT command form is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT USR: |
|||
.sp |
|||
which produces a list of the user numbers that have files on the currently |
|||
addressed disk. The display format is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Active User: 0 |
|||
Active Files: 0 1 3 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the first line lists the currently addressed user number, as set by the |
|||
last CCP USER command, followed by a list of user numbers scanned from the |
|||
current directory. In this case, the active user number is 0 (default at cold |
|||
start) with three user numbers that have active files on the current disk. |
|||
The operator can subsequently examine the directories of the other user |
|||
numbers by logging in with USER 1 or USER 3 commands, followed by a DIR |
|||
command at the CCP level. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.2 ASM Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.2 ASM Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ASM command loads and executes the CP/M 8080 assembler. The ufn |
|||
specifies a source file containing assembly language statements, where the |
|||
filetype is assumed to be ASM and is not specified. The following ASM |
|||
commands are valid: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
ASM X |
|||
ASM GAMMA |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
The two-pass assembler is automatically executed. Assembly errors that occur |
|||
during the second pass are printed at the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The assembler produces a file: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.PRN |
|||
.sp |
|||
where X is the primary name specified in the ASM command. The PRN file |
|||
contains a listing of the source program with embedded tab characters if |
|||
present in the source program, along with the machine code generated for |
|||
each statement and diagnostic error messages, if any. The PRN file is listed |
|||
at the console using the TYPE command, or sent to a peripheral device |
|||
using PIP (see Section 1.6.4). Note that the PRN file |
|||
contains the original source program, augmented by miscellaneous assembly |
|||
information in the leftmost 16 columns; for example, program addresses and |
|||
hexadecimal |
|||
machine code. The PRN file serves as a backup for the original |
|||
source file. If the source file is accidentally removed or destroyed, the |
|||
PRN file can be edited by removing the leftmost 16 characters |
|||
of each line (see Section 2). This is done by issuing a single editor macro |
|||
command. |
|||
The resulting file is identical to the original source file and can be |
|||
renamed from PRN to ASM for subsequent editing and assembly. The file |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.HEX |
|||
.sp |
|||
is also produced, which contains 8080 machine language in Intel HEX format |
|||
suitable for subsequent loading and execution (see Section 1.6.3). For |
|||
complete details of CP/M's assembly language program, see Section 3. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The source file for assembly is taken from an alternate disk by prefixing the |
|||
assembly language filename by a disk drive name. The command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM B:ALPHA |
|||
.sp |
|||
loads the assembler from the currently logged drive and processes the source |
|||
program ALPHA.ASM on drive B. The HEX and PRN files are also placed on |
|||
drive B in this case. |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.3 LOAD Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.3 LOAD Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
LOAD ufn |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The LOAD command reads the file ufn, which is assumed to contain HEX format |
|||
machine code, and produces a memory image file that can subsequently be |
|||
executed. The filename ufn is assumed to be of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.HEX |
|||
.sp |
|||
and only the filename X need be specified in the command. The LOAD command |
|||
creates a file named |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
that marks it as containing machine executable code. The file is actually |
|||
loaded into memory and executed when the user types the filename X |
|||
immediately after the prompting character > printed by the CCP. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Generally, the CCP reads the filename X following the prompting character and |
|||
looks for a built-in function name. If no function name is found, the CCP |
|||
searches the system disk directory for a file by the name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.COM |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
If found, the machine code is loaded into the TPA, and the program executes. |
|||
Thus, the user need only LOAD a hex file once; it can be subsequently |
|||
executed any number of times by typing the primary name. This |
|||
way, you can invent new commands in the CCP. Initialized disks contain |
|||
the transient commands as COM files, which are optionally deleted. The |
|||
operation takes place on an alternate drive if the filename is prefixed |
|||
by a drive name. Thus, |
|||
.bp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
LOAD B:BETA |
|||
.sp |
|||
brings the LOAD program into the TPA from the currently logged disk and |
|||
operates on drive B after execution begins. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
the BETA.HEX file must contain valid Intel format |
|||
hexadecimal machine code records (as produced by the ASM program, for |
|||
example) that begin at 100H of the TPA. The addresses in the hex records |
|||
must be in ascending order; gaps in unfilled memory regions are filled with |
|||
zeroes by the LOAD command as the hex records are read. Thus, LOAD must be |
|||
used only for creating CP/M standard COM files that operate in the TPA. |
|||
Programs that occupy regions of memory other than the TPA are loaded under |
|||
DDT. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.4 PIP |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.4 PIP |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
PIP |
|||
PIP destination=source#1, source#2, ..., source #n |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP is the CP/M Peripheral Interchange Program that implements the basic |
|||
media conversion operations necessary to load, print, punch, copy, and |
|||
combine disk files. The PIP program is initiated by typing one of the |
|||
following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
PIP |
|||
PIP command line |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
In both cases PIP is loaded into the TPA and executed. In the |
|||
first form, PIP reads command lines directly from the console, prompted with |
|||
the * character, until an empty command line is typed (for example, a single |
|||
carriage return is issued by |
|||
the operator). Each successive command line causes some media conversion |
|||
to take place according to the rules shown below. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the second form, the PIP |
|||
command is equivalent to the first, except that the single command line |
|||
given with the PIP command is automatically executed, and PIP terminates |
|||
immediately with no further prompting of the console for input command |
|||
lines. The form of each command line is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
destination = source#1, source#2, ..., source#n |
|||
.sp |
|||
where destination is the file or peripheral device to receive the |
|||
data, |
|||
and source#1, ..., source#n is a series of one or more files or devices |
|||
that are copied from left to right to the destination. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When multiple files are given in the command line (for example, |
|||
n>1), the individual |
|||
files are assumed to contain ASCII characters, with an assumed CP/M |
|||
end-of-file character (CTRL-Z) at the end of each file (see the O parameter |
|||
to override this assumption). Lower-case ASCII alphabetics are internally |
|||
translated to upper-case to be consistent with CP/M file and device name |
|||
conventions. Finally, the total command line length cannot exceed 255 |
|||
characters. CTRL-E can be used to force a physical carriage return for lines |
|||
that exceed the console width. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The destination and source elements are unambiguous references to CP/M source |
|||
files with or without a preceding disk drive name. That is, any file can be |
|||
referenced with a preceding drive name (A: through P:) that defines the |
|||
particular drive where the file can be obtained or stored. When the drive |
|||
name is not included, the currently logged disk is assumed. The |
|||
destination file can also appear as one or more of the source files, in |
|||
which case the source file is not altered until the entire concatenation is |
|||
complete. If it already exists, the destination file is removed if the |
|||
command line is properly formed. It is not removed if an error condition |
|||
arises. The following command lines, with explanations to the |
|||
right, are |
|||
valid as input to PIP: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
X=Y Copies to file X from file Y, where X and Y are |
|||
unambiguous filenames; Y remains unchanged. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
X=Y,Z Concatenates files Y and z and copies to file X, |
|||
with Y and Z unchanged. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
X.ASM=Y.ASM,Z.ASM Creates the file X.ASM from the concatenation of the |
|||
Y and Z.ASM files. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
NEW.ZOT=B:OLD.ZAP Moves a copy of OLD.ZAPP from drive B to the currently |
|||
logged disk; names the file NEW.ZOT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
B:A.U=B:B.V,A:C.W,D.X Concatenates file B.V from drive B with C.W from drive |
|||
a and D.X from the logged disk; creates the file A.U on drive b. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
For convenience, PIP allows abbreviated commands for transferring files |
|||
between disk drives. The abbreviated PIP forms are |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
PIP d:=afn |
|||
PIP d\d1\u=d\d2\u:afn |
|||
PIP ufn = d\d2\u: |
|||
PIP d\d1\u:ufn = d\d2\u: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The first form copies all files from the currently logged disk that satisfy |
|||
the afn to the same files on drive d, where d = A...P. The second form is |
|||
equivalent to the first, where the source for the copy is drive |
|||
d\d2\u, where d\d2\u = A...P. The third form is equivalent to the command PIP |
|||
d\d1\u:ufn=d\d2\u:ufn which copies the file given by ufn from drive |
|||
d\d2\u to the file ufn on drive d\d1\u:. The fourth form is equivalent to |
|||
the third, where the source disk is explicitly given by d\d2\u:. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The source and destination disks must be different in all of these cases. |
|||
If an afn is specified, PIP lists each ufn that satisfies the afn as it |
|||
is being copied. If a file exists by the same name as the destination file, |
|||
it is removed after successful completion of the copy and replaced by the |
|||
copied file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following PIP commands give examples of valid disk-to-disk copy operations: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:=*.COM Copies all files that have the secondary name COM to |
|||
drive B from the current drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
A:=B:ZAP.* Copies all files that have the primary name ZAP to |
|||
drive A from drive B. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ZAP.ASM=B: Same as ZAP.ASM=B:ZAP.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:ZOT.COM=A: Same as B:ZOT.COM=A:ZOT.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:=GAMMA.BAS Same as B:GAMMA.BAS=GAMMA.BAS |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:=A:GAMMA.BAS Same as B:GAMMA.BAS=A:GAMMA.BAS |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP allows reference to physical and logical devices that are attached to the |
|||
CP/M system. The device names are the same as given under the STAT command, |
|||
along with a number of specially named devices. The following is |
|||
a list of logical devices given in the STAT command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
CON: (console) |
|||
RDR: (reader) |
|||
PUN: (punch) |
|||
LST: (list) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
while the physical devices are |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TTY: (console), reader, punch, or list) |
|||
CRT: (console, or list), UC1: (console) |
|||
PTR: (reader), UR1: (reader), UR2: (reader) |
|||
PTP: (punch), UP1: (punch), UP2: (punch) |
|||
LPT: (list), UL1: (list) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The BAT: physical device is not included, because this assignment is used |
|||
only to indicate that the RDR: and LST: devices are used for console |
|||
input/output. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The RDR, LST, PUN, and CON devices are all defined within the BIOS portion of |
|||
CP/M, and are easily altered for any particular I/O system. The current |
|||
physical device mapping is defined by IOBYTE; see Section 6 for a discussion |
|||
of this function. The destination device must be capable of |
|||
receiving data, for example, data cannot be sent to the punch, and the |
|||
source devices must be |
|||
capable of generating data, for example, the LST: device cannot be read. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following list describes additional device names that can be used in |
|||
PIP commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o NUL: sends 40 nulls (ASCII 0s) to the device. This can be issued |
|||
at the end of punched output. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o EOF: sends a CP/M end-of-file (ASCII CTRL-Z) to the destination |
|||
device (sent automatically at the end of all ASCII data transfers through PIP). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o INP: is a special PIP input source that can be patched into the PIP |
|||
program. PIP gets the input data character-by-character, by CALLing location |
|||
103H, with data returned in location 109H (parity bit must be zero). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o OUT: is a special PIP output destination that can be patched into the |
|||
PIP program. PIP CALLs location 106H with data in register C for each |
|||
character to transmit. Note that locations 109H through |
|||
1FFH of the PIP memory image are not used and can be replaced by special |
|||
purpose drivers using DDT (see Section 4). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o PRN: is the same as LST:, except that tabs are expanded at every eighth |
|||
character position, lines are numbered, and page ejects are inserted every |
|||
60 lines with an initial eject (same as using PIP options [t8np]). |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
File and device names can be interspersed in the PIP commands. In each case, |
|||
the specific device is read until end-of-file (CTRL-Z for ASCII files, and |
|||
end-of-data for non-ASCII disk files). Data from each device or file are |
|||
concatenated from left to right until the last data source has been read. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The destination device or file is written using the data from the source |
|||
files, and an end-of-file character, CTRL-Z, is appended to the result |
|||
for ASCII files. If the destination is a disk file, a temporary file is |
|||
created ($$$ secondary name) that is changed to the actual filename only |
|||
on successful completion of the copy. Files with the extension COM are |
|||
always assumed to be non-ASCII. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The copy operation can be aborted at any time by pressing any key on the |
|||
keyboard. PIP responds with the message ABORTED to |
|||
indicate that the operation has not been completed. If any operation is |
|||
aborted, or if an error occurs during processing, PIP removes any pending |
|||
commands that were set up while using the SUBMIT command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP performs a special function if the destination is a disk file with type |
|||
HEX (an Intel hex-formatted machine code file), and the source is an |
|||
external peripheral device, such as a paper tape reader. In this case, the |
|||
PIP program checks to ensure that the source file contains a properly formed |
|||
hex file, with legal hexadecimal values and checksum records. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When an |
|||
invalid input record is found, PIP reports an error message at the console |
|||
and waits for corrective action. Usually, you can open the reader |
|||
and rerun a section of the tape (pull the tape back about 20 inches). When |
|||
the tape is ready for the reread, a single carriage return is typed at the |
|||
console, and PIP attempts another read. If the tape position cannot be |
|||
properly read, continue the read by typing a return following the |
|||
error message, and enter the record manually with the ED program after |
|||
the disk file is constructed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP allows the end-of-file to |
|||
be entered from the console if the source file is an RDR: device. In |
|||
this case, the PIP program reads the device and monitors the keyboard. If |
|||
CTRL-Z is typed at the keyboard, the read operation is terminated normally. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following are valid PIP commands: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP LST: = X.PRN |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies X.PRN to the LST device and |
|||
terminates the PIP program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP |
|||
.sp |
|||
Starts PIP for a sequence of |
|||
commands. PIP prompts with *. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*CON:=X.ASM,Y.ASM,Z.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Concatenates three ASM files and copies to |
|||
the CON device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*X.HEX=CON:,Y.HEX,PTR: |
|||
.sp |
|||
Creates a HEX file by reading the CON |
|||
until a CTRL-Z is typed, followed by data from Y.HEX and PTR until |
|||
a CTRL-Z is encountered. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP PUN:=NUL:,X.ASM,EOF:,NUL: |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Sends 40 nulls to the punch device; copies the X.ASM file to the punch, |
|||
followed by an end-of-file, CTRL-Z, and 40 more null characters. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(carriage return) |
|||
.sp |
|||
A single carriage return stops PIP. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can also specify one or more PIP parameters, enclosed in left and |
|||
right square brackets, separated by zero or more blanks. Each parameter |
|||
affects the copy operation, and the enclosed list of parameters must |
|||
immediately follow the affected file or device. Generally, each parameter |
|||
can be followed by an optional decimal integer value (the S and Q parameters |
|||
are exceptions). Table 1-4 describes valid PIP parameters. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-4. PIP Parameters |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Parameter Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 17 |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
B Blocks mode transfer. Data are buffered by PIP until an ASCII x-off |
|||
character, CTRL-S, is received from the source device. This allows transfer |
|||
of data to a disk file from a continuous reading device, such as a cassette |
|||
reader. Upon receipt of the x-off, PIP clears the disk buffers and returns |
|||
for more input data. The amount of data that can be buffered depends on the |
|||
memory size of the host system. PIP issues an error message if the |
|||
buffers overflow. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Dn Deletes characters that extend past column n in the transfer of data |
|||
to the destination from the character source. This parameter is generally |
|||
used to truncate long lines that are sent to a narrow printer or |
|||
console device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
E Echoes all transfer operations to the console as they are being |
|||
performed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
F Filters form-feeds from the file. All embedded form-feeds are |
|||
removed. The P parameter can be used simultaneously to insert new form-feeds. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Gn Gets file from user number n (n in the range 0-15). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
H Transfers HEX data. All data are checked for proper Intel hex file |
|||
format. Nonessential characters between hex records are removed during the |
|||
copy operation. The console is prompted for corrective action in case |
|||
errors occur. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
I Ignores :00 records in the transfer of Intel hex format |
|||
file. The I parameter automatically sets the H parameter. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-4. (continued) |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Parameter Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 17 |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
L Translates upper-case alphabetics to lower-case. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
N Adds line numbers to each line transferred to the destination, |
|||
starting at one and incrementing by 1. Leading zeroes are suppressed, and |
|||
the number is followed by a colon. If N2 is specified, leading zeroes are |
|||
included and a tab is inserted following the number. The tab is expanded if |
|||
T is set. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
O Transfers non-ASCII object files. The normal CP/M end-of-file is |
|||
ignored. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Pn Includes page ejects at every n lines with an initial page eject. |
|||
If n = 1 or is excluded altogether, page ejects occur every 60 lines. If |
|||
the F parameter is used, form-feed suppression takes place before the new |
|||
page ejects are inserted. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Qs^Z Quits copying from the source device or file when the |
|||
string s, terminated by CTRL-Z, is encountered. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
R Reads system files. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Ss^Z Start copying from the source device when the string |
|||
s, terminated by CTRL-Z, is encountered. The S and Q parameters can be used |
|||
to abstract a particular section of a file, such as a subroutine. The |
|||
start and quit strings are always included in the copy operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
If you specify a command line after the PIP command keyword, the CCP |
|||
translates strings |
|||
following the S and Q parameters to upper-case. If you do not |
|||
specify a command line, PIP does not perform the automatic upper-case |
|||
translation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Tn Expands tabs, CTRL-I characters, to every nth column during the |
|||
transfer of characters to the destination from the source. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
U Translates lower-case alphabetics to upper-case during the copy |
|||
operation. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-4. (continued) |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Parameter Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 17 |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
V Verifies that data have been copied correctly by rereading after the |
|||
write operation (the destination must be a disk file). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
W Writes over R/O files without console interrogation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Z Zeros the parity bit on input for each ASCII character. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following examples show valid PIP commands that specify parameters in |
|||
the file transfer. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP X.ASM=B:[v] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies X.ASM from drive B to the current drive and verifies that the data were |
|||
properly copied. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP LPT:=X.ASM[nt8u] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies X.ASM to the LPT: device; numbers each line, expands tabs to every |
|||
eighth column, and translates lower-case alphabetics to upper-case. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP PUN:=X.HEX[i],Y.ZOT[h] |
|||
.sp |
|||
First copies X.HEX to the PUN: device |
|||
and ignores the trailing :00 record in X.HEX; continues the transfer of data |
|||
by reading Y.ZOT, which contains HEX records, including any :00 records |
|||
it contains. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP X.LIB=Y.ASM[sSUBRI:^z qJMP L3^z] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies from the file Y.ASM into the |
|||
file X.LIB. The command starts the copy when the string SUBR1: has been |
|||
found, and quits copying after the string JMP L3 is encountered. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP PRN:=X.ASM[p50] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Sends X.ASM to the LST: device with |
|||
line numbers, expands tabs to every eighth column, and ejects |
|||
pages at every |
|||
50th line. The assumed parameter list for a PRN file is nt8p60; p50 |
|||
overrides the default value. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Under normal operation, PIP does not overwrite a file that is set to a |
|||
permanent R/O status. If an attempt is made to overwrite an R/O file, the |
|||
following prompt appears: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DESTINATION FILE IS R/O, DELETE (Y/N)? |
|||
.sp |
|||
If you type Y, the file is overwritten. Otherwise, the following response |
|||
appears: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
** NOT DELETED ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
The file transfer is skipped, and PIP continues with the next |
|||
operation in sequence. To avoid the prompt and response in the case of R/O |
|||
file overwrite, the command line can include the W parameter, as |
|||
shown in this example: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP A:=B:*.COM[W] |
|||
.sp |
|||
The W parameter copies all nonsystem files to the A drive from the B drive and |
|||
overwrites any R/O files in the process. If the operation involves several |
|||
concatenated files, the W parameter need only be included with the last file |
|||
in the list, as in this example: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP A.DAT=B.DAT,F:NEW.DAT,G:OLD.DAT[W] |
|||
.pp |
|||
Files with the system attribute can be included in PIP transfers if the R |
|||
parameter is included; otherwise, system files are not |
|||
recognized. For example, the command line: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP ED.COM=B:ED.COM[R] |
|||
.sp |
|||
reads the ED.COM file from the B drive, even if it has been |
|||
marked as an R/O and system file. The system file attributes are copied, if |
|||
present. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Downward compatibility with previous versions of CP/M is only maintained if |
|||
the file does not exceed one megabyte, no file attributes are set, and the |
|||
file is created by user 0. If compatibility is required with |
|||
nonstandard, for example, double-density versions of 1.4, it |
|||
might be |
|||
necessary to select 1.4 |
|||
compatibility mode when constructing the internal disk parameter block. See |
|||
Section 6 and refer to Section 6.10, which describes BIOS differences. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
to copy files into another user area, PIP.COM must be located in that user |
|||
area. Use the following procedure to make a copy of PIP.COM in another |
|||
user area. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
USER 0 Log in user 0. |
|||
|
|||
DDT PIP.COM (note PIP size s) Load PIP to memory. |
|||
|
|||
GO Return to CCP. |
|||
|
|||
USER 3 Log in user 3. |
|||
|
|||
SAVEs PIP.COM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
In this procedure, s is the integral number of memory pages, 256-byte |
|||
segments, occupied |
|||
by PIP. The number s can be determined when PIP.COM is loaded under DDT, |
|||
by referring to the value under the NEXT display. If, for example, the next |
|||
available address is 1D00, then PIP.COM requires 1C hexadecimal |
|||
pages, or |
|||
1 times 16 + 12 = 28 pages, and the value of s is 28 in the subsequent |
|||
save. Once PIP is copied in this manner, it can be copied to another disk |
|||
belonging to the same user number through normal PIP transfers. |
|||
.nx onec |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,683 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.ft 1-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.5 ED Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.5 ED Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED ufn |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The ED program is the CP/M system context editor that allows creation and |
|||
alteration of ASCII files in the CP/M environment. Complete details of |
|||
operation are given in Section 2. ED allows the operator to create and |
|||
operate upon source files that are organized as a sequence of ASCII |
|||
characters, separated by end-of-line characters (a carriage |
|||
return/line-feed |
|||
sequence). There is no practical restriction on line length (no single |
|||
line can exceed the size of the working memory) that is defined by the |
|||
number of characters typed between carriage returns. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ED program has |
|||
a number of commands for character string searching, replacement, and |
|||
insertion that are useful for creating and correcting programs or text |
|||
files under CP/M. Although the CP/M has a limited memory work |
|||
space area (approximately 5000 characters in a 20K CP/M system), the file |
|||
size that |
|||
can be edited is not limited, since data are easily paged through this |
|||
work area. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If it does not exist, ED creates the specified source file and opens the |
|||
file for access. If the source file does exist, the |
|||
programmer appends data for editing (see the A command). The appended data |
|||
can then be |
|||
displayed, altered, and written from the work area back to the |
|||
disk (see the W command). Particular points in the program can be |
|||
automatically paged and |
|||
located by context, allowing easy access to particular |
|||
portions of a large file (see the N command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
If you type the following command line: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED X.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
the ED program creates an intermediate work file with the name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.$$$ |
|||
.sp |
|||
to hold the edited data during the ED run. Upon completion of ED, the |
|||
X.ASM file (original file) is renamed to X.BAK, and the edited work file is |
|||
renamed to X.ASM. Thus, the X.BAK file contains the original unedited |
|||
file, and the X.ASM file contains the newly edited file. The operator can |
|||
always return to the previous version of a file by removing the most recent |
|||
version and renaming the previous version. If the current X.ASM file has |
|||
been improperly edited, the following sequence of commands reclaim the |
|||
back-up file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DIR X.* Checks to see that BAK file is |
|||
available. |
|||
|
|||
ERA X.ASM Erases most recent version. |
|||
|
|||
REN X.ASM=X.BAK Renames the BAK file to ASM. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
You can abort the edit at any point (reboot, power failure, CTRL-C, |
|||
or CTRL-Q command) without destroying the original file. In this case, the |
|||
BAK file is not created and the original file is always intact. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ED program allows the user to edit the source on one disk and create the |
|||
back-up file on another disk. This form of the ED command is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED ufn d: |
|||
.sp |
|||
where ufn is the name of the file to edit on the currently logged disk and d |
|||
is the name of an alternate drive. The ED program reads and processes the |
|||
source file and writes the new file to drive d using the name ufn. After |
|||
processing, the original file becomes the back-up file. If the operator is |
|||
addressing disk A, the following command is valid. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED X.ASM b: |
|||
.sp |
|||
This edits the file X.ASM on drive A, creating the new file X.$$$ on |
|||
drive B. After a successful edit, A:X.ASM is renamed to A:X.BAK, and |
|||
B:X.$$$ is renamed to B:X.ASM. For convenience, the currently logged disk |
|||
becomes drive B at the end of the edit. Note that if a file |
|||
named B:X.ASM exists before the editing begins, the following |
|||
message appears on the screen: |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
FILE EXISTS |
|||
.sp |
|||
This message is a precaution against accidentally destroying |
|||
a source file. You should first erase the existing file and then restart |
|||
the edit operation. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Similar to other transient commands, editing can take place on a drive |
|||
different from the currently logged disk by preceding the source filename |
|||
by a drive name. The following are examples of valid edit |
|||
requests: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 25 |
|||
.ti -17 |
|||
ED A:X.ASM Edits the file X.ASM on drive A, with new file and back-up |
|||
on drive A. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -17 |
|||
ED B:X.ASM A: Edits the file X.ASM on drive B to the temporary file X.$$$ |
|||
on drive A. After editing, this command changes X.ASM on drive B to X.BAK |
|||
and changes X.$$$ on drive A to X.ASM. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.6 SYSGEN Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.6 SYSGEN Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SYSGEN |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SYSGEN transient command allows generation of an initialized disk |
|||
containing the CP/M operating system. The SYSGEN program prompts the |
|||
console for commands by interacting as shown. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SYSGEN <cr> |
|||
.sp |
|||
Initiates the SYSGEN program. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SYSGEN VERSION x.x |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN sign-on message. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
SOURCE DRIVE NAME |
|||
(OR RETURN TO SKIP) |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
Respond with the drive name (one of the letters A, B, C, or D) of the |
|||
disk containing a CP/M system, usually A. If a copy of CP/M already exists |
|||
in memory due to a MOVCPM command, press only a carriage return. Typing a |
|||
drive name d causes the response: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SOURCE ON d THEN TYPE RETURN |
|||
.sp |
|||
Place a disk containing the CP/M operating |
|||
system on drive d (d is one of A, B, C, or D). Answer by pressing a carriage |
|||
return when ready. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
FUNCTION COMPLETE |
|||
.sp |
|||
System is copied to memory. SYSGEN then prompts with the following: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
If a disk is being initialized, place the new disk into a drive |
|||
and answer with the drive name. Otherwise, press a carriage return |
|||
and the system reboots from drive A. Typing drive name d causes |
|||
SYSGEN to prompt with the following message: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DESTINATION ON d |
|||
THEN TYPE RETURN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Place new disk into drive d; press return when ready. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
FUNCTION COMPLETE |
|||
.sp |
|||
New disk is initialized in drive d. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The DESTINATION prompt is repeated until a single carriage return is |
|||
pressed at the console, so that more than one disk can be initialized. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon completion of a successful system generation, the new disk contains |
|||
the operating system, and only the built-in commands are available. An |
|||
IBM-compatible disk appears to CP/M as a disk with an |
|||
empty directory; therefore, the operator must copy the appropriate COM files |
|||
from an existing CP/M disk to the newly constructed disk using the |
|||
PIP transient. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can copy all files from an existing disk by typing the following |
|||
PIP command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP B: = A:*.*[v] |
|||
.bp |
|||
This command copies all files from disk drive A to disk drive B and verifies |
|||
that |
|||
each file has been copied correctly. The name of each file is displayed at |
|||
the console as the copy operation proceeds. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that a SYSGEN does not destroy the files that already |
|||
exist on a disk; it only constructs a new operating system. If a |
|||
disk is being used only on drives B through P and will never be the |
|||
source of a bootstrap operation on drive A, the SYSGEN need not take place. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.7 SUBMIT Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.7 SUBMIT Command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SUBMIT ufn parm#1 ... parm#n |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SUBMIT command allows CP/M commands to be batched for automatic |
|||
processing. The ufn given in the SUBMIT command must be the filename of a |
|||
file that exists on the currently logged disk, with an assumed file type of |
|||
SUB. The SUB file contains CP/M prototype commands with possible parameter |
|||
substitution. The actual parameters parm#1 ... parm#n are substituted into |
|||
the prototype commands, and, if no errors occur, the file of substituted |
|||
commands are processed sequentially by CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The prototype command file is created using the ED program, with |
|||
interspersed $ parameters of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
$1 $2 $3 ...$n |
|||
.sp |
|||
corresponding to the number of actual parameters that will be included when |
|||
the file is submitted for execution. When the SUBMIT transient is executed, |
|||
the actual parameters parm#1 ... parm#n are paired with the formal parameters |
|||
$1 ... $n in the prototype commands. If the numbers of formal and actual |
|||
parameters do not correspond, the SUBMIT function is aborted with an error |
|||
message at the console. The SUBMIT function creates a file of substituted |
|||
commands with the name |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
$$$.SUB |
|||
.sp |
|||
on the logged disk. When the system reboots, at the termination of the |
|||
SUBMIT, this command file is read by the CCP as a source of input rather |
|||
than the console. If the SUBMIT function is performed on any disk other |
|||
than drive A, the commands are not processed until the disk is inserted into |
|||
drive A and the system reboots. You can abort command processing at |
|||
any time by pressing the rubout key when the command is read and echoed. In |
|||
this case, the $$$.SUB file is removed and the subsequent commands come |
|||
from the console. Command processing is also aborted if the CCP detects an |
|||
error in any of the commands. Programs that execute under CP/M can abort |
|||
processing of command files when error conditions occur by erasing any |
|||
existing $$$.SUB file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To introduce dollar signs into a SUBMIT file, you can type a $$ |
|||
which reduces to a single $ within the command file. A caret, |
|||
^, precedes an alphabetic character s, which produces a single CTRL-X |
|||
character within the file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The last command in a SUB file can initiate another SUB file, allowing |
|||
chained batch commands: |
|||
.pp |
|||
Suppose the file ASMBL.SUB exists on disk and contains the prototype commands |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
ASM $1 |
|||
DIR $1.* |
|||
ERA *.BAK |
|||
PIP $2:=$1.PRN |
|||
ERA $1.PRN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
then, you issue the following command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SUBMIT ASMBL X PRN |
|||
.sp |
|||
The SUBMIT program reads the ASMBL.SUB file, |
|||
substituting X: for all occurrences of $1 and PRN for all occurrences of |
|||
$2. This results in a $$$.SUB file containing the commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
ASM X |
|||
DIR X.* |
|||
ERA *.BAK |
|||
PIP PRN:=X.PRN |
|||
ERA X.PRN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
which are executed in sequence by the CCP. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SUBMIT function can access a SUB file on an alternate drive by preceding |
|||
the filename by a drive name. Submitted files are only acted upon when |
|||
they appear on drive A. Thus, it is possible to create a submitted file |
|||
on drive B that is executed at a later time when inserted in drive A. |
|||
.pp |
|||
An additional utility program called XSUB extends the power of the SUBMIT |
|||
facility to include line input to programs as well as the CCP. The XSUB |
|||
command is included as the first line of the SUBMIT |
|||
file. When it is executed, XSUB self-relocates directly below the CCP. All |
|||
subsequent SUBMIT command lines are processed by XSUB so that programs that |
|||
read buffered console input, BDOS Function 10, receive their input directly |
|||
from the SUBMIT file. For example, the file SAVER.SUB can contain the |
|||
following SUBMIT lines: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
XSUB |
|||
DDT |
|||
|$1.COM |
|||
R |
|||
GO |
|||
SAVE 1 $2.COM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
a subsequent SUBMIT command, such as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
SUBMIT SAVER PIP Y |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
substitutes X for $1 and Y for $2 in the command stream. The XSUB |
|||
program loads, followed by DDT, which is sent to the command lines PIP.COM, |
|||
R, and G0, thus returning to the CCP. The final command SAVE 1 Y.COM is |
|||
processed by the CCP. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The XSUB program remains in memory and prints the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(xsub active) |
|||
.sp |
|||
on each warm start operation to indicate its presence. Subsequent SUBMIT |
|||
command streams do not require the XSUB, unless an intervening cold start |
|||
occurs. Note that XSUB must be loaded after the optional |
|||
CP/M DESPOOL utility, if both are to run simultaneously. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.8 DUMP Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.8 DUMP Command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DUMP ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DUMP program types the contents of the disk file (ufn) at the console in |
|||
hexadecimal form. The file contents are listed sixteen bytes at a time, |
|||
with the absolute byte address listed to the left of each line in |
|||
hexadecimal. Long typeouts can be aborted by pressing the rubout key during |
|||
printout. The source listing of the DUMP program is given in Section 5 as |
|||
an example of a program written for the CP/M environment. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.9 MOVCPM Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.9 MOVCPM Command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
MOVCPM |
|||
.pp |
|||
The MOVCPM program allows you to reconfigure the CP/M system for any |
|||
particular memory size. Two optional parameters can be used to indicate the |
|||
desired size of the new system and the disposition of the new system at |
|||
program termination. If the first parameter is omitted or an * is given, |
|||
the MOVCPM program reconfigures the system to its maximum size, based |
|||
upon the kilobytes of contiguous RAM in the host system (starting at 0000H). |
|||
If the second parameter is omitted, the system is executed, but not |
|||
permanently recorded; if * is given, the system is left in memory, ready |
|||
for a SYSGEN operation. The MOVCPM program relocates a memory image of CP/M |
|||
and places this image in memory in preparation for a system generation |
|||
operation. The following is a list of MOVCPM command forms: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 23 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM Relocates and executes CP/M for management of the current |
|||
memory |
|||
configuration (memory is examined for contiguous RAM, starting at 100H). |
|||
On completion of the relocation, the new system is executed but not |
|||
permanently recorded on the disk. The system that is constructed |
|||
contains a BIOS for the Intel microcomputer development system 800. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM n Creates a relocated CP/M system for management of an n kilobyte |
|||
system (n must be in the range of 20 to 64), and executes the system as |
|||
described. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM * * Constructs a relocated memory image for the current memory |
|||
configuration, but leaves the memory image in memory in preparation for a |
|||
SYSGEN operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM n * Constructs a relocated memory image for an n kilobyte memory |
|||
system, and leaves the memory image in preparation for a SYSGEN operation. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
For example, the command, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
MOVCPM * * |
|||
.sp |
|||
constructs a new version of the CP/M system and leaves it in |
|||
memory, ready for a SYSGEN operation. The message |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
READY FOR 'SYSGEN' OR |
|||
'SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM' |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
appears at the console upon completion, where xx is the current memory |
|||
size in kilobytes. You can then type the following sequence: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
SYSGEN This starts the system generation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
SOURCE DRIVE NAME Respond with a carriage return |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
(OR RETURN TO SKIP) to skip the CP/M read operation, because the |
|||
system is already in memory as a result of the previous MOVCPM operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME Respond with B to write new |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) system to the disk in drive B. SYSGEN |
|||
prompts with the following message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
DESTINATION ON B, Place the new disk on drive B |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
THEN TYPE RETURN and press the RETURN key when ready. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
If you respond with A rather than B above, the system is |
|||
written to drive A rather than B. SYSGEN continues to print this |
|||
prompt: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME (OR RETURN TO REBOOT) |
|||
.sp |
|||
until you respond with a single carriage return, which stops the |
|||
SYSGEN program with a system reboot. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can then go through the reboot process with the old or new |
|||
disk. Instead of performing the SYSGEN operation, you can |
|||
type a command of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
at the completion of the MOVCPM function, where xx is the value indicated |
|||
in the SYSGEN message. The CP/M memory image on the currently logged disk is |
|||
in a form that can be patched. This is necessary when operating in a |
|||
nonstandard environment where the BIOS must be altered for a particular |
|||
peripheral device configuration, as described in Section 6. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following are valid MOVCPM commands: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 23 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM 48 Constructs a 48K version of CP/M and starts execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM 48 * Constructs a 48K version of CP/M in preparation for permanent |
|||
recording; the response is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
READY FOR 'SYSGEN' OR |
|||
'SAVE 34 CPM48.COM' |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM * * Constructs a maximum memory version of CP/M and |
|||
starts execution. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The newly created system is serialized with the number attached to the |
|||
original disk and is subject to the conditions of the Digital Research |
|||
Software Licensing Agreement. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.7 BDOS Error Messages |
|||
.tc 1.7 BDOS Error Messages |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.7 BDOS Error Messages |
|||
.qs |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
There are three error situations that the Basic Disk Operating System |
|||
intercepts during file processing. When one of these conditions is detected, |
|||
the BDOS prints the message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS ERR ON d: error |
|||
.bp |
|||
where d is the drive name and error is one of the three error messages: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
BAD SECTOR |
|||
SELECT |
|||
READ ONLY |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The BAD SECTOR message indicates that the disk controller electronics has |
|||
detected an error condition in reading or writing the disk. This |
|||
condition is generally caused by a malfunctioning disk controller or an |
|||
extremely worn disk. If you find that CP/M reports this |
|||
error more than once a month, the state of the controller electronics and the |
|||
condition of the media should be checked. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can also encounter this condition in reading files generated |
|||
by a controller produced by a different manufacturer. Even |
|||
though controllers claim to be IBM..-compatible, one |
|||
often finds small differences in recording formats. The Model 800 controller, |
|||
for example, requires two bytes of one's following the data CRC byte, which |
|||
is not required in the IBM format. As a result, disks generated by the |
|||
Intel microcomputer development system can be read by almost all |
|||
other IBM-compatible system, while disk files generated on other |
|||
manufacturers' equipment produce the BAD SECTOR message when read |
|||
by the microcomputer development system. To recover from this |
|||
condition, press a CTRL-C to reboot (the safest course), or a |
|||
return, which ignores the bad sector in the file operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
pressing a return might destroy disk integrity if the |
|||
operation is a directory write. Be sure you have adequate |
|||
back-ups in this case. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SELECT error occurs when there is an attempt to address a drive beyond |
|||
the range supported by the BIOS. In this case, the value of d in the error |
|||
message gives the selected drive. The system reboots following any input |
|||
from the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The READ ONLY message occurs when there is an attempt to write to a |
|||
disk or file that has been designated as Read-Only in a STAT command or |
|||
has been set to Read-Only by the BDOS. Reboot CP/M by |
|||
using the warm start procedure, CTRL-C, or by performing a cold start |
|||
whenever the disks are changed. If a changed disk is to be read but |
|||
not written, BDOS allows the disk to be changed without the warm or |
|||
cold start, but internally marks the drive as Read-Only. The status of the |
|||
drive is subsequently changed to Read-Write if a warm or cold start occurs. |
|||
On issuing this message, CP/M waits for input from the console. An automatic |
|||
warm start takes place following any input. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.8 Operation of CP/M on the Model 800 |
|||
.tc 1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 |
|||
.pp |
|||
This section gives operating procedures for using CP/M on the |
|||
Intel Model 800 microcomputer development system microcomputer development |
|||
system. Basic knowledge of the microcomputer development system |
|||
hardware and software systems is assumed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M is initiated in essentially the same manner as the Intel ISIS operating |
|||
system. The disk drives are labeled 0 through 3 on the |
|||
microcomputer development system, corresponding |
|||
to CP/M drives A through D, respectively. The CP/M system disk is |
|||
inserted into drive 0, and the BOOT and RESET switches are pressed in |
|||
sequence. The interrupt 2 light should go on at this point. The space bar |
|||
is then pressed on the system console, and the light should go |
|||
out. If it does not, the user should check connections and baud rates. The |
|||
BOOT |
|||
switch is turned off, and the CP/M sign-on message should appear at the |
|||
selected console device, followed by the A> system prompt. You |
|||
can then issue the various resident and transient commands. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CP/M system can be restarted (warm start) at any time by pushing the |
|||
INT 0 switch on the front panel. The built-in Intel ROM monitor can be |
|||
initiated by pushing the INT 7 switch, which generates an RST 7, except when |
|||
operating under DDT, in which case the DDT program gets control instead. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Diskettes can be removed from the drives at any time, and the system can be |
|||
shut down during operation without affecting data integrity. Do |
|||
not remove a disk and replace it with another without rebooting the |
|||
system (cold or warm start) unless the inserted disk is Read-Only. |
|||
.pp |
|||
As a result of hardware hang-ups or malfunctions, CP/M might |
|||
print the following message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS ERR ON d: BAD SECTOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d is the drive that has a permanent error. This error can occur when |
|||
drive doors are opened and closed randomly, followed by disk operations, or |
|||
can be caused by a disk, drive, or controller failure. You can |
|||
optionally elect to ignore the error by pressing a single return at the |
|||
console. The error might produce a bad data record, requiring |
|||
reinitialization |
|||
of up to 128 bytes of data. You can reboot the CP/M system and try |
|||
the operation again. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Termination of a CP/M session requires no special action, except that it is |
|||
necessary to remove the disks before turning the power off to avoid |
|||
random transients that often make their way to the drive electronics. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You should use IBM-compatible disks rather than disks |
|||
that have previously been used with any ISIS version. In particular, the |
|||
ISIS FORMAT operation produces nonstandard sector numbering throughout the |
|||
disk. This nonstandard numbering seriously degrades the performance of |
|||
CP/M, and causes CP/M to operate noticeably slower than the distribution |
|||
version. If it becomes necessary to reformat a disk, which |
|||
should not be the case for standard disks, a program can be |
|||
written under CP/M that causes the Model 800 controller to |
|||
reformat with sequential sector numbering (1-26) on each track. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Generally, IBM-compatible 8-inch disks do not need to be formatted. |
|||
However, 5 1/4-inch disks need to be formatted. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Section 1 |
|||
.nx two |
|||
|
|||
Binary file not shown.
File diff suppressed because it is too large
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.nx front |
|||
|
|||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
File diff suppressed because it is too large
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.nx appa.tex |
|||
|
|||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Binary file not shown.
Binary file not shown.
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.nx apph.tex |
|||
|
|||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
@ -1,807 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 6-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 6 CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 6 |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 6.1 Introduction |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.1 Introduction |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The standard CP/M system assumes operation on an Intel Model |
|||
800 microcomputer development system , but is designed so you can alter a |
|||
specific set of subroutines that define the hardware operating |
|||
environment. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Although standard CP/M 2 is configured for single-density floppy |
|||
disks, field-alteration features allow adaptation to a wide |
|||
variety of disk subsystems from single-drive minidisks to |
|||
high-capacity, hard disk systems. To simplify the following |
|||
adaptation process, it is assumed that CP/M 2 is first |
|||
configured for single-density floppy disks where minimal editing |
|||
and debugging tools are available. If an earlier version of CP/M |
|||
is available, the customizing process is eased considerably. In |
|||
this latter case, you might want to review the system |
|||
generation process and skip to later sections that discuss system |
|||
alteration for nonstandard disk systems. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To achieve device independence, CP/M is separated into three |
|||
distinct modules: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o BIOS is the Basic I/O System, which is environment dependent. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o BDOS is the Basic Disk Operating System, which is not dependent upon the |
|||
hardware configuration. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o CCP is the Console Command Processor, which uses the BDOS. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Of these modules, only the BIOS is dependent upon the particular |
|||
hardware. You can patch the distribution version |
|||
of CP/M to provide a new BIOS that provides a customized |
|||
interface between the remaining CP/M modules and the |
|||
hardware system. This document provides a step-by-step |
|||
procedure for patching a new BIOS into CP/M. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
All disk-dependent portions of CP/M 2 are placed into a BIOS, a |
|||
resident disk parameter block, which is either hand coded or |
|||
produced automatically using the disk definition macro library |
|||
provided with CP/M 2. The end user need only specify the maximum |
|||
number of active disks, the starting and ending sector numbers, |
|||
the data allocation size, the maximum extent of the logical disk, |
|||
directory size information, and reserved track values. |
|||
The macros use this information to generate |
|||
the appropriate tables and table references for use during CP/M 2 |
|||
operation. Deblocking information is provided, which aids in |
|||
assembly or disassembly of sector sizes that are multiples of the |
|||
fundamental 128-byte data unit, and the system alteration manual |
|||
includes general purpose subroutines that use the deblocking |
|||
information to take advantage of larger sector sizes. Use of |
|||
these subroutines, together with the table-drive data access |
|||
algorithms, makes CP/M 2 a universal data management system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
File expansion is achieved by providing up to 512 logical file |
|||
extents, where each logical extent contains 16K bytes of data. |
|||
CP/M 2 is structured, however, so that as much as 128K bytes of |
|||
data are addressed by a single physical extent, corresponding to a |
|||
single directory entry, maintaining compatibility with previous |
|||
versions while taking advantage of directory space. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If CP/M is being tailored to a computer system for the first |
|||
time, the new BIOS requires some simple software development and |
|||
testing. The standard BIOS is listed in Appendix A and can be |
|||
used as a model for the customized package. A skeletal version |
|||
of the BIOS given in Appendix B can serve as the basis for a |
|||
modified BIOS. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
In addition to the BIOS, you must write a simple memory |
|||
loader, called GETSYS, which brings the operating system into |
|||
memory. To patch the new BIOS into CP/M, you must write the |
|||
reverse of GETSYS, called PUTSYS, which places an altered version |
|||
of CP/M back onto the disk. PUTSYS can be derived from GETSYS by |
|||
changing the disk read commands into disk write commands. Sample |
|||
skeletal GETSYS and PUTSYS programs are described in Section 6.4 |
|||
and listed in Appendix C. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To make the CP/M system load automatically, you must also |
|||
supply a cold start loader, similar to the one provided with |
|||
CP/M, listed in Appendixes A and D. A skeletal form of a cold |
|||
start loader is given in Appendix E, which serves as a model for |
|||
the loader. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 6.2 First-level System Regeneration |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.2 First-level Regeneration |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.2 First-level System Regeneration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The procedure to patch the CP/M system is given below. Address |
|||
references in each step are shown with H denoting the |
|||
hexadecimal radix, and are given for a 20K CP/M system. For |
|||
larger CP/M systems, a bias is added to each address that is |
|||
shown with a +b following it, where b is equal to the memory |
|||
size-20K. Values for b in various standard memory sizes are listed in |
|||
Table 6-1. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 6-1. Standard Memory Size Values |
|||
|
|||
.nf |
|||
Memory Size Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 13 |
|||
24K: b = 24K - 20K = 4K = 1000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
32K: b = 32K - 20K = 12K = 3000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
40K: b = 40K - 20K = 20K = 5000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
48K: b = 48K - 20K = 28K = 7000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
56K: b = 56K - 20K = 36K = 9000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
62K: b = 62K - 20K = 42K = A800H |
|||
.sp |
|||
64K: b = 64K - 20K = 44K = B000H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that the standard distribution version of CP/M is set for |
|||
operation within a 20K CP/M system. Therefore, you must first bring up |
|||
the 20K CP/M system, then configure it for actual |
|||
memory size (see Section 6.3). |
|||
.pp |
|||
Follow these steps to patch your CP/M system: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
1) Read Section 6.4 and write a GETSYS program that reads the |
|||
first two tracks of a disk into memory. The program from the |
|||
disk must be loaded starting at location 3380H. GETSYS is coded |
|||
to start at location 100H (base of the TPA) as shown in Appendix |
|||
C. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
2) Test the GETSYS program by reading a blank disk into memory, |
|||
and check to see that the data has been read properly and that |
|||
the disk has not been altered in any way by the GETSYS program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
3) Run the GETSYS program using an initialized CP/M disk to see |
|||
if GETSYS loads CP/M starting at 3380H (the operating system |
|||
actually starts 128 bytes later at 3400H). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
4) Read Section 6.4 and write the PUTSYS program. This writes |
|||
memory starting at 3380H back onto the first two tracks of the |
|||
disk. The PUTSYS program should be located at 200H, as shown in |
|||
Appendix C. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
5) Test the PUTSYS program using a blank, uninitialized disk by |
|||
writing a portion of memory to the first two tracks; clear memory |
|||
and read it back using GETSYS. Test PUTSYS completely, because |
|||
this program will be used to alter CP/M on disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
6) Study Sections 6.5, 6.6, and 6.7 along with the distribution |
|||
version of the BIOS given in Appendix A and write a simple |
|||
version that performs a similar function for the customized |
|||
environment. Use the program given in Appendix B as a model. |
|||
Call this new BIOS by name CBIOS (customized BIOS). Implement |
|||
only the primitive disk operations on a single drive and simple |
|||
console input/output functions in this phase. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
7) Test CBIOS completely to ensure that it properly performs |
|||
console character I/O and disk reads and writes. Be careful to |
|||
ensure that no disk write operations occur during read operations |
|||
and check that the proper track and sectors are addressed on all |
|||
reads and writes. Failure to make these checks might cause |
|||
destruction of the initialized CP/M system after it is patched. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
8) Referring to Table 6-3 in Section 6.5, note that the BIOS is |
|||
placed between locations 4A00H and 4FFFH. Read the CP/M system |
|||
using GETSYS and replace the BIOS segment by the CBIOS developed |
|||
in step 6 and tested in step 7. This replacement is done in |
|||
memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
9) Use PUTSYS to place the patched memory image of CP/M onto the |
|||
first two tracks of a blank disk for testing. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
10) Use GETSYS to bring the copied memory image from the test |
|||
disk back into memory at 3380H and check to ensure that it has |
|||
loaded back properly (clear memory, if possible, before the |
|||
load). Upon successful load, branch to the cold start code at |
|||
location 4A00H. The cold start routine initializes page |
|||
zero, then jumps to the CCP at location 3400H, which calls the |
|||
BDOS, which calls the CBIOS. The CCP asks the CBIOS to read |
|||
sixteen sectors on track 2, and CP/M types A>, the system |
|||
prompt. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
If difficulties are encountered, use whatever debug facilities |
|||
are available to trace and breakpoint the CBIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
11) Upon completion of step 10, CP/M has prompted the console for |
|||
a command input. To test the disk write operation, type |
|||
.sp |
|||
SAVE 1 X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
All commands must be followed by a carriage return. CP/M |
|||
responds with another prompt after several disk accesses: |
|||
.sp |
|||
A> |
|||
.sp |
|||
If it does not, debug the disk write functions and retry. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
12) Test the directory command by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
DIR |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M responds with |
|||
.sp |
|||
A:X COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
13) Test the erase command by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
ERA X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M responds with the A prompt. This is now an operational |
|||
system that only requires a bootstrap loader to function |
|||
completely. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
14) Write a bootstrap loader that is similar to GETSYS and place |
|||
it on track 0, sector 1, using PUTSYS (again using the test disk, |
|||
not the distribution disk). See Sections 6.5 and 6.8 for more |
|||
information on the bootstrap operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
15) Retest the new test disk with the bootstrap loader installed |
|||
by executing steps 11, 12, and 13. Upon completion of these |
|||
tests, type a CTRL-C. The system executes a warm start, which |
|||
reboots the system, and types the A prompt. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
16) At this point, there is probably a good version of the |
|||
customized CP/M system on the test disk. Use GETSYS to load CP/M |
|||
from the test disk. Remove the test disk, place the distribution |
|||
disk, or a legal copy, into the drive, and use PUTSYS to |
|||
replace the distribution version with the customized version. |
|||
Do not make this replacement if you are unsure of the patch |
|||
because this step destroys the system that was obtained from |
|||
Digital Research. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
17) Load the modified CP/M system and test it by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
DIR |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M responds with a list of files that are provided on the |
|||
initialized disk. The file DDT.COM is the memory image for the |
|||
debugger. Note that from now on, you must always reboot the |
|||
CP/M system (CTRL-C is sufficient) when the disk is removed and |
|||
replaced by another disk, unless the new disk is to be Read-Only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
18) Load and test the debugger by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT |
|||
.sp |
|||
See Chapter 4 for operating procedures. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
19) Before making further CBIOS modifications, practice using the |
|||
editor (see Chapter 2), and assembler (see Chapter 3). Recode |
|||
and test the GETSYS, PUTSYS, and CBIOS programs using ED, ASM, |
|||
and DDT. Code and test a COPY program that does a sector-to-sector |
|||
copy from one disk to another to obtain back-up copies of |
|||
the original disk. Read the CP/M Licensing Agreement specifying |
|||
legal responsibilities when copying the CP/M system. Place the |
|||
following copyright notice: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Copyright (c), 1983 |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
on each copy that is made with the COPY program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
20) Modify the CBIOS to include the extra functions for punches, |
|||
readers, and sign-on messages, and add the facilities for |
|||
additional disk drives, if desired. These changes can be made |
|||
with the GETSYS and PUTSYS programs or by referring to the |
|||
regeneration process in Section 6.3. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
You should now have a good copy of the customized CP/M |
|||
system. Although the CBIOS portion of CP/M belongs to the user, |
|||
the modified version cannot be legally copied. |
|||
.pp |
|||
It should be noted that the system remains file-compatible with |
|||
all other CP/M systems (assuming media compatibility) which |
|||
allows transfer of nonproprietary software between CP/M users. |
|||
.tc 6.3 Second-level System Generation |
|||
.bp |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.3 Second-level System Generation |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.3 Second-level System Generation |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Once the system is running, the next step is to configure CP/M |
|||
for the desired memory size. Usually, a memory image is first |
|||
produced with the MOVCPM program (system relocator) and then |
|||
placed into a named disk file. The disk file can then be loaded, |
|||
examined, patched, and replaced using the debugger and the |
|||
system generation program (refer to Chapter 1). |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CBIOS and BOOT are modified using ED and assembled using ASM, |
|||
producing files called CBIOS.HEX and BOOT.HEX, which contain the |
|||
code for CBIOS and BOOT in Intel hex format. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To get the memory image of CP/M into the TPA configured for the |
|||
desired memory size, type the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
MOVCPM xx* |
|||
.sp |
|||
where xx is the memory size in decimal K bytes, for example, 32 |
|||
for 32K. The response is as follows: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
CONSTRUCTING xxK CP/M VERS 2.0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
READY FOR "SYSGEN" OR |
|||
.sp |
|||
"SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM" |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
An image of CP/M in the TPA is configured for the requested |
|||
memory size. The memory image is at location 0900H through |
|||
227FH, that is, the BOOT is at 0900H, the CCP is at 980H, the |
|||
BDOS starts at 1180H, and the BIOS is at 1F80H. Note that the |
|||
memory image has the standard Model 800 BIOS and BOOT on it. It is now |
|||
necessary to save the memory image in a file so that you can |
|||
patch the CBIOS and CBOOT into it: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM |
|||
.pp |
|||
The memory image created by the MOVCPM program is offset by a |
|||
negative bias so that it loads into the free area of the TPA, and |
|||
thus does not interfere with the operation of CP/M in higher |
|||
memory. This memory image can be subsequently loaded under DDT |
|||
and examined or changed in preparation for a new generation of |
|||
the system. DDT is loaded with the memory image by typing: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT CPMxx.COM Loads DDT, then reads the CP/M image. |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT should respond with the following: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
2300 0100 |
|||
- The DDT prompt |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
You can then give the display and disassembly commands to examine |
|||
portions of the memory image between 900H and 227FH. |
|||
Note, however, that to find any particular address |
|||
within the memory image, you must apply the negative bias to the |
|||
CP/M address to find the actual address. Track 00, sector 01, is |
|||
loaded to location 900H (the user should find the cold start |
|||
loader at 900H to 97FH); track 00, sector 02, is loaded into 980H |
|||
(this is the base of the CCP); and so on through the entire CP/M |
|||
system load. In a 20K system, for example, the CCP resides at |
|||
the CP/M address 3400H, but is placed into memory at 980H by the |
|||
SYSGEN program. Thus, the negative bias, denoted by n, satisfies |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
3400H + n = 980H, or n =980H - 3400H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Assuming two's complement arithmetic, n = D580H, which can be |
|||
checked by |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
3400H + D580H = 10980H = 0980H (ignoring high-order |
|||
overflow). |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that for larger systems, n satisfies |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
(3400H+b) + n = 980H, or |
|||
n = 980H - (3400H + b), or |
|||
n = D580H - b |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The value of n for common CP/M systems is given below. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 6-2. Common Values for CP/M Systems |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Memory Size BIAS b Negative Offset n |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 13 |
|||
20K 0000H D580H - 0000H = D580H |
|||
24K 1000H D580H - 1000H = C580H |
|||
32K 3000H D580H - 3000H = A580H |
|||
40K 5000H D580H - 5000H = 8580H |
|||
48K 7000H D580H - 7000H = 6580H |
|||
56K 9000H D580H - 9000H = 4580H |
|||
62K A800H D580H - A800H = 2D80H |
|||
64K B000H D580H - B000H = 2580H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
If you want to locate the address x within the memory image |
|||
loaded under DDT in a 20K system, first type |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Hx,n Hexadecimal sum and difference |
|||
.sp |
|||
and DDT responds with the value of x+n (sum) and x-n |
|||
(difference). The first number printed by DDT is the actual memory |
|||
address in the image where the data or code is located. For example, |
|||
the following DDT command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
H3400,D580 |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces 980H as the sum, which is where the CCP |
|||
is located in the memory image under DDT. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Type the L command to disassemble portions of the |
|||
BIOS located at (4A00H+b)-n, which, when one uses the H command, |
|||
produces an actual address of 1F80H. The disassembly command |
|||
would thus be as follows: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
L1F80 |
|||
.sp |
|||
It is now necessary to patch in the CBOOT and CBIOS routines. The BOOT |
|||
resides at location 0900H in the memory image. If the actual |
|||
load address is n, then to calculate the bias (m), |
|||
type the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
H900,n Subtract load address from target address. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second number typed by DDT in response to the command is the |
|||
desired bias (m). For example, if the BOOT executes at 0080H, |
|||
the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
H900,80 |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
0980 0880 Sum and difference in hex. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Therefore, the bias m would be 0880H. To read-in the BOOT, give the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ICBOOT.HEX Input file CBOOT.HEX |
|||
.sp |
|||
Then |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Rm Read CBOOT with a bias of m (=900H-n). |
|||
.sp |
|||
Examine the CBOOT with |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
L900 |
|||
.sp |
|||
You are now ready to replace the CBIOS by examining the area at |
|||
1F80H, where the original version of the CBIOS resides, and then |
|||
typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ICBIOS.HEX Ready the hex file for loading. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Assume that the CBIOS is being integrated into a 20K |
|||
CP/M system and thus originates at location 4A00H. To locate the |
|||
CBIOS properly in the memory image under DDT, you must apply the |
|||
negative bias n for a 20K system when loading the hex file. This |
|||
is accomplished by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
RD580 Read the file with bias D580H. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Upon completion of the read, reexamine the area |
|||
where the CBIOS has been loaded (use an L1F80 command) to ensure |
|||
that it is properly loaded. When you are satisfied that the change has |
|||
been made, return from DDT using a CTRL-C or, G0 command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
SYSGEN is used to replace the patched memory image back onto a |
|||
disk (you use a test disk until sure of the |
|||
patch) as shown in the following interaction: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
SYSGEN Start the SYSGEN program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN VERSION 2.0 Sign-on message from SYSGEN. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SOURCE DRIVE NAME Respond with a carriage return |
|||
(OR RETURN TO SKIP) to skip the CP/M read operation |
|||
because the system is already |
|||
in memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME Respond with B to write the new |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) system to the disk in drive B. |
|||
|
|||
.sp |
|||
DESTINATION ON B, Place a scratch disk in drive |
|||
THEN TYPE RETURN B, then press RETURN. |
|||
.sp |
|||
FUNCTION COMPLETE |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Place the scratch disk in drive A, then |
|||
perform a cold start to bring up the newly-configured CP/M |
|||
system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The new CP/M system is then tested and the Digital Research |
|||
copyright notice is placed on the disk, as specified in the |
|||
Licensing Agreement: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Copyright (c), 1979 |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following program provides a framework for the GETSYS and |
|||
PUTSYS programs referenced in Sections 6.1 and 6.2. To read and |
|||
write the specific sectors, you must insert the READSEC and WRITESEC |
|||
subroutines. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
; GETSYS PROGRAM -- READ TRACKS 0 AND 1 TO MEMORY AT 3380H |
|||
; REGISTER USE |
|||
.sp |
|||
; A (SCRATCH REGISTER) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; B TRACK COUNT (0, 1) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; C SECTOR COUNT (1,2,...,26) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; DE (SCRATCH REGISTER PAIR) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; HL LOAD ADDRESS |
|||
.sp |
|||
; SP SET TO STACK ADDRESS |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
START: LXI SP,3380H ;SET STACK POINTER TO SCRATCH |
|||
;AREA |
|||
LXI H,3380H ;SET BASE LOAD ADDRESS |
|||
MVI B,0 ;START WITH TRACK 0 |
|||
RDTRK: ;READ NEXT TRACK (INITIALLY 0) |
|||
MVI C,1 ;READ STARTING WITH SECTOR 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
RDSEC: ;READ NEXT SECTOR |
|||
CALL READSEC ;USER-SUPPLIED SUBROUTINE |
|||
LXI D,128 ;MOVE LOAD ADDRESS TO NEXT 1/2 |
|||
;PAGE |
|||
DAD D ;HL = HL + 128 |
|||
INR C ;SECTOR = SECTOR + 1 |
|||
MOV A,C ;CHECK FOR END OF TRACK |
|||
CPI 27 |
|||
JC RDSEC ;CARRY GENERATED IF SECTOR <27 |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
; ARRIVE HERE AT END OF TRACK, MOVE TO NEXT TRACK |
|||
INR B |
|||
MOV A,B ;TEST FOR LAST TRACK |
|||
CPI 2 |
|||
JC RDTRK ;CARRY GENERATED IF TRACK <2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
; USER-SUPPLIED SUBROUTINE TO READ THE DISK |
|||
READSEC: |
|||
; ENTER WITH TRACK NUMBER IN REGISTER B, |
|||
SECTOR NUMBER IN REGISTER C, AND |
|||
.sp |
|||
; ADDRESS TO FILL IN HL |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
PUSH B ;SAVE B AND C REGISTERS |
|||
PUSH H ;SAVE HL REGISTERS |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listing 6-1. GETSYS Program |
|||
.bp |
|||
................................................. |
|||
perform disk read at this point, branch to |
|||
label START if an error occurs |
|||
................................................. |
|||
POP H ;RECOVER HL |
|||
POP B ;RECOVER B AND C REGISTERS |
|||
RET ;BACK TO MAIN PROGRAM |
|||
.sp |
|||
END START |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listing 6-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
This program is assembled and listed in Appendix B for reference |
|||
purposes, with an assumed origin of 100H. The hexadecimal |
|||
operation codes that are listed on the left might be useful if the |
|||
program has to be entered through the panel switches. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The PUTSYS program can be constructed from GETSYS by changing |
|||
only a few operations in the GETSYS program given above, as shown |
|||
in Appendix C. The register pair HL becomes the dump address, |
|||
next address to write, and operations on these registers do not |
|||
change within the program. The READSEC subroutine is replaced by |
|||
a WRITESEC subroutine, which performs the opposite function; data |
|||
from address HL is written to the track given by register B |
|||
and sector given by register C. It is often useful to combine |
|||
GETSYS and PUTSYS into a single program during the test and |
|||
development phase, as shown in Appendix C. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 6.5 Disk Organization |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.5 Disk Organization |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.5 Disk Organization |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The sector allocation for the standard distribution version of |
|||
CP/M is given here for reference purposes. The first sector contains |
|||
an optional software boot section (see the table on the following |
|||
page. Disk controllers are often set up to bring track 0, |
|||
sector 1, into memory at a specific location, often location |
|||
0000H. The program in this sector, called BOOT, has the |
|||
responsibility of bringing the remaining sectors into memory |
|||
starting at location 3400H+b. If the controller does not |
|||
have a built-in sector load, the program in track 0, sector 1 can |
|||
be ignored. In this case, load the program from track 0, sector |
|||
2, to location 3400H+b. |
|||
.pp |
|||
As an example, the Intel Model 800 |
|||
hardware cold start loader brings track 0, sector 1, into |
|||
absolute address 3000H. Upon loading this sector, control |
|||
transfers to location 3000H, where the bootstrap operation |
|||
commences by loading the remainder of track 0 and all of track 1 |
|||
into memory, starting at 3400H+b. Note that this bootstrap |
|||
loader is of little use in a non-microcomputer development system |
|||
environment, although it is useful to examine it because some of |
|||
the boot actions will have to be duplicated in the user's cold |
|||
start loader. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 6-3. CP/M Disk Sector Allocation |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Track # Sector Page# Memory Address CP/M Module name |
|||
.sp |
|||
00 01 (boot address) Cold Start Loader |
|||
00 02 00 3400H+b CCP |
|||
' 03 ' 3480H+b ' |
|||
' 04 01 3500H+b ' |
|||
' 05 ' 3580H+b ' |
|||
' 06 02 3600H+b ' |
|||
' 07 ' 3680H+b ' |
|||
' 08 03 3700H+b ' |
|||
' 09 ' 3780H+b ' |
|||
' 10 04 3800H+b ' |
|||
' 11 ' 3880H+b ' |
|||
' 12 05 3900H+b ' |
|||
' 13 ' 3980H+b ' |
|||
' 14 06 3A00H+b ' |
|||
' 15 ' 3A80H+b ' |
|||
' 16 07 3B00H+b ' |
|||
00 17 ' 3B80H+b CCP |
|||
00 18 08 3C00H+b BDOS |
|||
' 19 ' 3C80H+b ' |
|||
' 20 09 3D00H+b ' |
|||
' 21 ' 3D80H+b ' |
|||
' 22 10 3E00H+b ' |
|||
' 23 ' 3E80H+b ' |
|||
' 24 11 3F00H+b ' |
|||
' 25 ' 3F80H+b ' |
|||
' 26 12 4000H+b ' |
|||
01 01 ' 4080H+b ' |
|||
' 02 13 4100H+b ' |
|||
' 03 ' 4180H+B ' |
|||
' 04 14 4200H+b ' |
|||
' 05 ' 4280H+b ' |
|||
' 06 15 4300H+b ' |
|||
' 07 ' 4380H+b ' |
|||
' 08 16 4400H+b ' |
|||
' 09 ' 4480H+b ' |
|||
' 10 17 4500H+b ' |
|||
' 11 ' 4580H+b ' |
|||
' 12 18 4600H+b ' |
|||
' 13 ' 4680H+b ' |
|||
' 14 19 4700H+b ' |
|||
' 15 ' 4780H+b ' |
|||
' 16 20 4800H+b ' |
|||
' 17 ' 4880H+b ' |
|||
' 18 21 4900H+b ' |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
01 19 ' 4900H+b BDOS |
|||
07 20 22 4A00H+b BIOS |
|||
' 21 ' 4A80H+b ' |
|||
' 22 23 4B00H+b ' |
|||
' 23 ' 4B80H+b ' |
|||
' 24 24 4C00H+b ' |
|||
01 25 ' 4C80H+b BIOS |
|||
01 26 25 4D00H+b BIOS |
|||
02-76 01-26 (directory and data) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.nx sixb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
@ -1,447 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.op |
|||
.sp 15 |
|||
.ce 100 |
|||
.bo 5 |
|||
CP/M |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Operating System |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Manual |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.sp 10 |
|||
Copyright (c) 1982 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
P.O. Box 579 |
|||
160 Central Avenue |
|||
Pacific Grove, CA 93950 |
|||
(408) 649-3896 |
|||
TWX 910 360 5001 |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
All Rights Reserved |
|||
.ce 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.po 17 |
|||
.ll 50 |
|||
.ce |
|||
COPYRIGHT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copyright (c) 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1982, 1983, and 1984 by |
|||
Digital Research Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this |
|||
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored |
|||
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or |
|||
computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, |
|||
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior |
|||
written permission of Digital Research Inc., Post Office Box 579, |
|||
Pacific Grove, California, 93950. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Thus, readers are granted permission to include the example |
|||
programs, either in whole or in part, in their own programs. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
DISCLAIMER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research Inc. makes no representations or warranties with |
|||
respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims |
|||
any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for |
|||
any particular purpose. Further, Digital Research Inc. reserves the |
|||
right to revise this publication and to make changes from |
|||
time to time in the content hereof without obligation of |
|||
Digital Research Inc. to notify any person of such revision or |
|||
changes. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
TRADEMARKS |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M, CP/NET, and Digital Research and its logo are registered |
|||
trademarks of Digital Research. ASM, DESPOOL, DDT, LINK-80, MAC, |
|||
MP/M, PL/I-80 and SID are trademarks of Digital Research. IBM is |
|||
a registered trademark of International Business Machines. Intel |
|||
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. TI Silent 700 is |
|||
a trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated. Zilog and Z80 are |
|||
registered trademarks of Zilog, Inc. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
The \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
CP/M Operating System Manual \c |
|||
.qu |
|||
was prepared using the Digital Research TEX Text Formatter and printed |
|||
in the United States of America. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce 6 |
|||
********************************* |
|||
* First Edition: 1976 * |
|||
* Second Edition: July 1982 * |
|||
* Third Edition: March 1983 * |
|||
* Fourth Edition: March 1984 * |
|||
********************************* |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft iii |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
1 CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2.1 General Command Structure . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
1.2.2 File References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.3 Switching Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 |
|||
1.4 Built-in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.4.1 ERA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
1.4.2 DIR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 |
|||
1.4.3 REN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.4 SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.5 TYPE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
1.4.6 USER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.5 Line Editing and Output Control . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6 Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6.1 STAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 |
|||
1.6.2 ASM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 |
|||
1.6.3 LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 |
|||
1.6.4 PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 |
|||
1.6.5 ED Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 |
|||
1.6.6 SYSGEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 |
|||
1.6.7 SUBMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 |
|||
1.6.8 DUMP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
1.6.9 MOVCPM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.7 BDOS Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
2 The CP/M Editor |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1 Introduction to ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1.1 ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
2.1.2 Text Transfer Functions . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2.1.3 Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
2.1.4 Line Numbers and ED Start-up . . . . . . . . 2-5 |
|||
2.1.5 Memory Buffer Operation . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2.1.6 Command Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2.1.7 Text Search and Alteration . . . . . . . . . 2-10 |
|||
2.1.8 Source Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2.1.9 Repetitive Command Execution . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft iv |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
2.2 ED Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.3 Control Characters and Commands . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
3 CP/M Assembler |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.2 Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3 Forming the Operand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3.1 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
3.3.2 Numeric Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.3 Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.4 String Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3.3.6 Precedence of Operators . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4 Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4.1 The ORG Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.2 The END Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.3 The EQU Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.4 The SET Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives . . . . . . . . 3-12 |
|||
3.4.6 The DB Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 |
|||
3.4.7 The DW Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
3.4.8 The DS Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5 Operation Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5.1 Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3.5.2 Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.3 Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.4 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3.5.5 Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . 3-19 |
|||
3.5.6 Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.6 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.7 A Sample Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft v |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
4 CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2 DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
4.2.2 The D (Display) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 |
|||
4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.4 The G (Go) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.5 The I (Input) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.6 The L (List) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.7 The M (Move) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.8 The R (Read) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.9 The S (Set) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.1- The T (Trace) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.3 Implementation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.4 A Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
5 CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.2 Operating System Call Conventions . . . . . . . . . 5-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program . . . . . . . . 5-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.5 A Sample Random Access Program . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.6 System Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
6 CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.2 First-level System Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.3 Second-level System Generation . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vi |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
6.5 Disk Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.6 The BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.7 A Sample BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.8 A Sample Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.9 Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.10 Disk Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.11 The DISKDEF Macro Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.12 Sector Blocking and Deblocking . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendixes |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
A \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
B \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal CBIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
C \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal GETSYS/PUTSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
D \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
The Model 800 Cold Start Loader for CP/M 2 . . . . . . D-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
E \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
F \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Disk Definition Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
G \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Blocking and Deblocking Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . G-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
H \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
I \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft viii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
1-1. Line-editing Control Characters . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
1-2. CP/M Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
1-3. Physical Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 |
|||
1-4. PIP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. ED Text Transfer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2-2. Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2-3. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2-4. Error Message Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2-5. ED Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
2-6. ED Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3-1. Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3-2. Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3-3. Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
3-4. Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3-5. Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . . 3-16 |
|||
3-6. Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-7. Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-8. Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3-9. Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 |
|||
3-10. Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4-1. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-2. DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-3. CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Filetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
5-3. Edit Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. Standard Memory Size Values . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
6-2. Common Values for CP/M Systems . . . . . . . . 6-7 |
|||
6-3. CP/M Disk Sector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
6-4. IOBYTE Field Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-5. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 |
|||
6-6. Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
6-7. Disk Parameter Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-8. BSH and BLM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-9. EXM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-10. BLS Tabluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 |
|||
.sp |
|||
I-1. CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. Overall ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
2-2. Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft ix |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-3. Logical Organization of Memory Buffer . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. IOBYTE Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-2. Disk Parameter Header Format . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
6-3. Disk Parameter Header Table . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-4. Disk Parameter Block Format . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 |
|||
6-5. AL0 and AL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. GETSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
6-2. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.nx onea |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,938 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 3-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 3 CP/M Assembler |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Assembler |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.1 Introduction |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.1 Introduction |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The CP/M assembler reads assembly-language source files from the |
|||
disk and produces 8080 machine language in Intel hex format. |
|||
To start the CP/M assembler, type a command in one of the |
|||
following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
ASM filename |
|||
ASM filename.parms |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
In both cases, the assembler assumes there is a file on the |
|||
disk with the name: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
which contains an 8080 assembly-language source file. The first |
|||
and second forms shown above differ only in that the second form |
|||
allows parameters to be passed to the assembler to control source |
|||
file access and hex and print file destinations. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In either case, the CP/M assembler loads and prints the message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER VER n.n |
|||
.sp |
|||
where n.n is the current version number. In the case of the |
|||
first command, the assembler reads the source file with assumed |
|||
filetype ASM and creates two output files |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
filename.HEX |
|||
filename.PRN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The HEX file contains the machine code corresponding to the |
|||
original program in Intel hex format, and the PRN file contains |
|||
an annotated listing showing generated machine code, error flags, |
|||
and source lines. If errors occur during translation, they are |
|||
listed in the PRN file and at the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The form ASM filename parms is used to redirect input and |
|||
output files from their defaults. In this case, the parms |
|||
portion of the command is a three-letter group that specifies the |
|||
origin of the source file, the destination of the hex file, and |
|||
the destination of the print file. The form is |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.p1p2p3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where p1, p2, and p3 are single letters. P1 can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A,B, ...,P |
|||
.sp |
|||
which designates the disk name that contains the source file. P2 |
|||
can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A,B, ...,P |
|||
.sp |
|||
which designates the disk name that will receive the hex file; or, P2 |
|||
can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Z |
|||
.sp |
|||
which skips the generation of the hex file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
P3 can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A,B, ...,P |
|||
.sp |
|||
which designates the disk name that will receive the |
|||
print file. P3 can also be specified as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X |
|||
.sp |
|||
which places the listing at the console; or |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Z |
|||
.sp |
|||
which skips generation of the print file. Thus, the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X.AAA |
|||
.sp |
|||
indicates that the source, X.HEX, and print, X.PRN, files |
|||
are also to be created on disk A. This form of the command is |
|||
implied if the assembler is run from disk A. Given that you are |
|||
currently addressing disk A, the above command is the same as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X |
|||
.sp |
|||
The command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X.ABX |
|||
.sp |
|||
indicates that the source file is to be taken from disk A, the |
|||
hex file is to be placed on disk B, and the listing file is to be |
|||
sent to the console. The command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X.BZZ |
|||
.sp |
|||
takes the source file from disk B and skips the generation of the |
|||
hex and print files. This command is useful for fast execution of |
|||
the assembler to check program syntax. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The source program format is compatible with the Intel 8080 |
|||
assembler. Macros are not implemented in ASM; see the optional |
|||
MAC macro assembler. There are certain extensions in the CP/M |
|||
assembler that make it somewhat easier to use. These extensions |
|||
are described below. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.2 Program Format |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.2 Program Format |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.2 Program Format |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
An assembly-language program acceptable as input to the assembler |
|||
consists of a sequence of statements of the form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
line# label operation operand ;comment |
|||
.sp |
|||
where any or all of the fields may be present in a particular |
|||
instance. Each assembly-language statement is terminated with a |
|||
carriage return and line-feed (the line-feed is inserted |
|||
automatically by the ED program), or with the character !, which |
|||
is treated as an end-of-line by the assembler. Thus, multiple |
|||
assembly-language statements can be written on the same physical |
|||
line if separated by exclamation point symbols. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The line# is an optional decimal integer value representing the |
|||
source program line number, and ASM ignores this field if |
|||
present. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The label field takes either of the following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
identifier |
|||
identifier: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The label field is optional, except where noted in particular statement |
|||
types. The identifier is a sequence of alphanumeric characters |
|||
where the first character is alphabetic. Identifiers can be |
|||
freely used by the programmer to label elements such as program |
|||
steps and assembler directives, but cannot exceed 16 characters |
|||
in length. All characters are significant in an identifier, |
|||
except for the embedded dollar symbol $, which can be used to |
|||
improve readability of the name. Further, all lower-case |
|||
alphabetics are treated as upper-case. The |
|||
following are all valid instances of labels: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
x xy long$name |
|||
|
|||
x: yxl: longer$named$data: |
|||
|
|||
X1Y2 X1x2 x234$5678$9012$3456: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operation field contains either an assembler directive or |
|||
pseudo operation, or an 8080 machine operation code. The pseudo |
|||
operations and machine operation codes are described in Section |
|||
3.3. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Generally, the operand field of the statement contains an |
|||
expression formed out of constants and labels, along with |
|||
arithmetic and logical operations on these elements. Again, the |
|||
complete details of properly formed expressions are given in |
|||
Section 3.3. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The comment field contains arbitrary characters following the |
|||
semicolon |
|||
symbol until the next real or logical end-of-line. These |
|||
characters are read, listed, and otherwise ignored by the |
|||
assembler. The CP/M assembler also treats statements that begin |
|||
with an * in column one as comment statements that are listed |
|||
and ignored in the assembly process. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The assembly-language program is formulated as a sequence of |
|||
statements of the above form, terminated by an optional END |
|||
statement. All statements following the END are ignored by the |
|||
assembler. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3 Forming the Operand |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.3 Forming the Operand |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3 Forming the Operand |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
To describe the operation codes and pseudo operations completely, |
|||
it is necessary first to present the form of the operand field, |
|||
since it is used in nearly all statements. Expressions in the |
|||
operand field consist of simple operands, labels, constants, and |
|||
reserved words, combined in properly formed subexpressions by |
|||
arithmetic and logical operators. The expression computation is |
|||
carried out by the assembler as the assembly proceeds. Each |
|||
expression must produce a 16-bit value during the assembly. |
|||
Further, the number of significant digits in the result must not |
|||
exceed the intended use. If an expression is to be used |
|||
in a byte move immediate instruction, the most significant 8 bits |
|||
of the expression must be zero. The restriction on the |
|||
expression significance is given with the individual |
|||
instructions. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.1 Labels |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.1 Labels |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
As discussed above, a label is an identifier that occurs on a |
|||
particular statement. In general, the label is given a value |
|||
determined by the type of statement that it precedes. If the |
|||
label occurs on a statement that generates machine code or |
|||
reserves memory space (for example, a MOV instruction or a |
|||
DS pseudo operation), the label is given the value of the program address |
|||
that it labels. If the label precedes an EQU or SET, the label |
|||
is given the value that results from evaluating the operand |
|||
field. Except for the SET statement, an identifier can label |
|||
only one statement. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When a label appears in the operand field, its value is |
|||
substituted by the assembler. This value can then be combined |
|||
with other operands and operators to form the operand field for a |
|||
particular instruction. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 3.3.2 Numeric Constants |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.2 Numeric Constants |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
A numeric constant is a 16-bit value in one of several bases. |
|||
The base, called the radix of the constant, is denoted by a |
|||
trailing radix indicator. The following are radix indicators: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
o B is a binary constant (base 2). |
|||
o O is a octal constant (base 8). |
|||
o Q is a octal constant (base 8). |
|||
o D is a decimal constant (base 10). |
|||
o H is a hexadecimal constant (base 16). |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Q is an alternate radix indicator for octal numbers because the |
|||
letter O is easily confused with the digit 0. Any numeric |
|||
constant that does not terminate with a radix indicator is |
|||
a decimal constant. |
|||
.pp |
|||
A constant is composed as a sequence of digits, followed by |
|||
an optional radix indicator, where the digits are in the |
|||
appropriate range for the radix. Binary constants must |
|||
be composed of 0 and 1 digits, octal constants can contain digits |
|||
in the range 0-7, while decimal constants contain decimal digits. |
|||
Hexadecimal constants contain decimal digits as well as |
|||
hexadecimal digits A(10D), B(11D), C(12D), D(13D), E(14D), and |
|||
F(15D). Note that the leading digit of a |
|||
hexadecimal constant must be a decimal digit to avoid confusing a |
|||
hexadecimal constant with an identifier. A leading 0 will always |
|||
suffice. A constant composed in this manner must evaluate to a |
|||
binary number that can be contained within a 16-bit counter, |
|||
otherwise it is truncated on the right by the assembler. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Similar |
|||
to identifiers, embedded $ signs are allowed within constants to |
|||
improve their readability. Finally, the radix indicator is |
|||
translated to upper-case if a lower-case letter is encountered. |
|||
The following are all valid instances of numeric constants: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
1234 1234D 1100B 1111$0000$1111$0000B |
|||
.sp |
|||
1234H OFFEH 3377O 33$77$22Q |
|||
.sp |
|||
3377o Ofe3h 1234d Offffh |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.3 Reserved Words |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.3 Reserved Words |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
There are several reserved character sequences that have |
|||
predefined meanings in the operand field of a statement. The |
|||
names of 8080 registers are given below. When they are |
|||
encountered, they produce the values shown to the right. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-1. Reserved Characters |
|||
.sp |
|||
Character Value |
|||
|
|||
A 7 |
|||
B 0 |
|||
C 1 |
|||
D 2 |
|||
E 3 |
|||
H 4 |
|||
L 5 |
|||
M 6 |
|||
SP 6 |
|||
PSW 6 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Again, lower-case names have the same values as their upper-case |
|||
equivalents. Machine instructions can also be used in the |
|||
operand field; they evaluate to their internal codes. In the case |
|||
of instructions that require operands, where the specific operand |
|||
becomes a part of the binary bit pattern of the instruction, |
|||
for example, MOV A,B, the value of the instruction, in this case MOV, |
|||
is the bit pattern of the instruction with zeros in the optional |
|||
fields, for example, MOV produces 40H. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When the symbol $ occurs in the operand field, not embedded |
|||
within identifiers and numeric constants, its value becomes the |
|||
address of the next instruction to generate, not including the |
|||
instruction contained within the current logical line. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.4 String Constants |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.4 String Constants |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
String constants represent sequences of ASCII characters and are |
|||
represented by enclosing the characters within apostrophe symbols. |
|||
All strings must be fully contained within the current |
|||
physical line (thus allowing exclamation point symbols within |
|||
strings) and must |
|||
not exceed 64 characters in length. The apostrophe character |
|||
itself can be included within a string by representing it as a |
|||
double apostrophe (the two keystrokes ''), which becomes a single |
|||
apostrophe when read by the assembler. In most cases, the string |
|||
length is restricted to either one or two characters (the DB |
|||
pseudo operation is an exception), in which case the string |
|||
becomes an 8- or 16-bit value, respectively. Two-character |
|||
strings become a 16-bit constant, with the second character as |
|||
the low-order byte, and the first character as the high-order |
|||
byte. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The value of a character is its corresponding ASCII code. There |
|||
is no case translation within strings; both upper- and |
|||
lower-case characters can be represented. You should note |
|||
that only graphic printing ASCII characters are |
|||
allowed within strings. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Valid strings: How assembler reads strings: |
|||
|
|||
'A' 'AB' 'ab' 'c' A AB ab c |
|||
'' 'a''' '''' '''' a' ' ' |
|||
'Walla Walla Wash.' Walla Walla Wash. |
|||
'She said ''Hello'' to me.' She said ''Hello'' to me |
|||
'I said ''Hello'' to her.' I said ''Hello'' to her |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operands described in Section 3.3 can be combined in normal algebraic |
|||
notation using any combination of properly formed operands, |
|||
operators, and parenthesized expressions. The operators |
|||
recognized in the operand field are described in Table 3-2. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-2. Arithmetic and Logical Operators |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Operators Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a + b unsigned arithmetic sum of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a - b unsigned arithmetic difference between a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
+ b unary plus (produces b) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
- b unary minus (identical to 0 - b) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a * b unsigned magnitude multiplication of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a / b unsigned magnitude division of a by b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a MOD b remainder after a / b. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
NOT b logical inverse of b (all 0s become 1s, 1s become |
|||
0s), where b is considered a 16-bit value |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a AND b bit-by-bit logical and of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a OR b bit-by-bit logical or of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a XOR b bit-by-bit logical exclusive or of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a SHL b the value that results from shifting a to the left |
|||
by an amount b, with zero fill |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a SHR b the value that results from shifting a to the |
|||
right by an amount b, with zero fill |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
In each case, a and b represent simple operands (labels, numeric |
|||
constants, reserved words, and one- or two-character strings) or |
|||
fully enclosed parenthesized subexpressions, like those shown in |
|||
the following examples: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
10+20 10h+37Q LI/3 (L2+4) SHR 3 |
|||
|
|||
('a' and 5fh) + '0' ('B'+B) OR (PSW+M) |
|||
|
|||
(1+(2+c)) shr (A-(B+1)) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that all computations are performed at assembly time as 16-bit |
|||
unsigned operations. Thus, -1 is computed as 0-1, which |
|||
results in the value 0ffffh (that is, all 1s). The resulting |
|||
expression must fit the operation code in which it is used. For |
|||
example, if the expression is used in an ADI (add immediate) |
|||
instruction, the high-order 8 bits of the expression must be |
|||
zero. As a result, the operation ADI-1 produces an error message |
|||
(-1 becomes 0ffffh, which cannot be represented as an 8-bit |
|||
value), while ADI(-1) AND 0FFH is accepted by the assembler |
|||
because the AND operation zeros the high-order bits of the |
|||
expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.6 Precedence of Operators |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.6 Precedence of Operators |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
As a convenience to the programmer, ASM assumes that operators |
|||
have a relative precedence of application that allows the |
|||
programmer to write expressions without nested levels of |
|||
parentheses. The resulting expression has assumed parentheses |
|||
that are defined by the relative precedence. The order of |
|||
application of operators in unparenthesized expressions is listed |
|||
below. Operators listed first have highest precedence (they are |
|||
applied first in an unparenthesized expression), while operators |
|||
listed last have lowest precedence. Operators listed on the same |
|||
line have equal precedence, and are applied from left to right as |
|||
they are encountered in an expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.nf |
|||
* / MOD SHL SHR |
|||
|
|||
- + |
|||
|
|||
NOT |
|||
|
|||
AND |
|||
|
|||
OR XOR |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Thus, the expressions shown to the left below are interpreted by |
|||
the assembler as the fully parenthesized expressions shown to the |
|||
right. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
a*b+c (a*b)+c |
|||
|
|||
a+b*c a+(b*c) |
|||
|
|||
a MOD b*c SHL d ((a MOD b)*c) SHL d |
|||
|
|||
a OR b AND NOT c+d SHL e a OR (b AND (NOT (c+(d SHL e)))) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Balanced, parenthesized subexpressions can always be used to |
|||
override the assumed parentheses; thus, the last expression above |
|||
could be rewritten to force application of operators in a |
|||
different order, as shown: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(a OR b) AND (NOT c)+ d SHL e |
|||
.sp |
|||
This results in these assumed parentheses: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(a OR b) AND ((NOT c) + (d SHL e)) |
|||
.pp |
|||
An unparenthesized expression is well-formed only if the |
|||
expression that results from inserting the assumed parentheses is |
|||
well-formed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4 Assembler Directives |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Guide 3.4 Assembler Directives |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4 Assembler Directives |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Assembler directives are used to set labels to specific values |
|||
during the assembly, perform conditional assembly, define storage |
|||
areas, and specify starting addresses in the program. Each |
|||
assembler directive is denoted by a pseudo operation that appears |
|||
in the operation field of the line. The acceptable pseudo operations |
|||
are shown in Table 3-3. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-3. Assembler Directives |
|||
.sp |
|||
Directive Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
ORG set the program or data origin |
|||
.sp |
|||
END end program, optional start address |
|||
.sp |
|||
EQU numeric equate |
|||
.sp |
|||
SET numeric set |
|||
.sp |
|||
IF begin conditional assembly |
|||
.sp |
|||
ENDIF end of conditional assembly |
|||
.sp |
|||
DB define data bytes |
|||
.sp |
|||
DW define data words |
|||
.sp |
|||
DS define data storage area |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 3.4.1 The ORG Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.1 The ORG Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ORG statement takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label ORG expression |
|||
.sp |
|||
where label is an optional program identifier and expression is |
|||
a 16-bit expression, consisting of operands that are defined |
|||
before the ORG statement. The assembler begins machine code |
|||
generation at the location specified in the expression. There |
|||
can be any number of ORG statements within a particular program, |
|||
and there are no checks to ensure that the programmer is not |
|||
defining overlapping memory areas. Note that |
|||
most programs written for the CP/M system begin with an ORG |
|||
statement of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ORG 100H |
|||
.sp |
|||
which causes machine code generation to begin at the base of the |
|||
CP/M transient program area. If a label is specified in the ORG |
|||
statement, the label is given the value of the expression. This |
|||
label can then be used in the operand field of other statements |
|||
to represent this expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.2 The END Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.2 The END Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The END statement is optional in an assembly-language program, |
|||
but if it is present it must be the last statement. All |
|||
subsequent statements are ignored in the assembly. The END |
|||
statement takes the following two forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
label END |
|||
|
|||
label END expression |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the label is again optional. If the first form is used, |
|||
the assembly process stops, and the default starting address of |
|||
the program is taken as 0000. Otherwise, the expression is |
|||
evaluated, and becomes the program starting address. This |
|||
starting address is included in the last record of the Intel-formatted |
|||
machine code hex file that results from the |
|||
assembly. Thus, most CP/M assembly-language programs end with |
|||
the statement: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
END 100H |
|||
.sp |
|||
resulting in the default starting address of 100H (beginning of |
|||
the transient program area). |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 3.4.3 The EQU Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.3 The EQU Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The EQU (equate) statement is used to set up synonyms for |
|||
particular numeric values. The EQU statement takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
label EQU expression |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the label must be present and must not label any other |
|||
statement. The assembler evaluates the expression and assigns |
|||
this value to the identifier given in the label field. The |
|||
identifier is usually a name that describes the value in a more |
|||
human-oriented manner. Further, this name is used throughout the |
|||
program to place parameters on certain functions. Suppose data |
|||
received from a teletype appears on a particular input port, and |
|||
data is sent to the teletype through the next output port in |
|||
sequence. For example, you can use this series of equate statements |
|||
to define these ports for a particular hardware environment: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TTYBASE EQU 10H ;BASE PORT NUMBER FOR TTY |
|||
|
|||
TTYIN EQU TTYBASE ;TTY DATA IN |
|||
|
|||
TTYOUT EQU TTYBASE+1 ;TTY DATA OUT |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
At a later point in the program, the statements that access the |
|||
teletype can appear as follows: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 7 |
|||
.nf |
|||
IN TTYIN ;READ TTY DATA TO REG-A |
|||
|
|||
... |
|||
|
|||
OUT TTYOUT ;WRITE DATA TO TTY FROM REG-A |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
making the program more readable than if the absolute I/O ports |
|||
are used. Further, if the hardware environment is redefined |
|||
to start the teletype communications ports at 7FH instead of 10H, |
|||
the first statement need only be changed to |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TTYBASE EQU 7FH ;BASE PORT NUMBER FOR TTY |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
and the program can be reassembled without changing any other |
|||
statements. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.4 The SET Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.4 The SET Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SET statement is similar to the EQU, taking the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label SET expression |
|||
.sp |
|||
except that the label can occur on other SET statements within |
|||
the program. The expression is evaluated and becomes the current |
|||
value associated with the label. Thus, the EQU statement defines |
|||
a label with a single value, while the SET statement defines a |
|||
value that is valid from the current SET statement to the point |
|||
where the label occurs on the next SET statement. The use of the |
|||
SET is similar to the EQU statement, but is used most often in |
|||
controlling conditional assembly. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The IF and ENDIF statements define a range of assembly-language |
|||
statements that are to be included or excluded during the |
|||
assembly process. These statements take on the form: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
IF expression |
|||
|
|||
statement#1 |
|||
|
|||
statement#2 |
|||
|
|||
... |
|||
|
|||
statement#n |
|||
|
|||
ENDIF |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
When encountering the IF statement, the assembler evaluates the |
|||
expression following the IF. All operands in the expression must |
|||
be defined ahead of the IF statement. If the expression |
|||
evaluates to a nonzero value, then statement#1 through |
|||
statement#n are assembled. If the expression evaluates to zero, |
|||
the statements are listed but not assembled. Conditional |
|||
assembly is often used to write a single generic program that |
|||
includes a number of possible run-time environments, with only a |
|||
few specific portions of the program selected for any particular |
|||
assembly. The following program segments, for example, might be |
|||
part of a program that communicates with either a teletype or a |
|||
CRT console (but not both) by selecting a particular value for |
|||
TTY before the assembly begins. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
TRUE EQU OFFFFH ;DEFINE VALUE OF TRUE |
|||
FALSE EQU NOT TRUE ;DEFINE VALUE OF FALSE |
|||
; |
|||
TTY EQU TRUE ;TRUE IF TTY, FALSE IF CRT |
|||
; |
|||
TTYBASE EQU 10H ;BASE OF TTY I/O PORTS |
|||
CRTBASE EQU 20H ;BASE OF CRT I/O PORTS |
|||
IF TTY ;ASSEMBLE RELATIVE TO |
|||
;TTYBASE |
|||
CONIN EQU TTYBASE ;CONSOLE INPUT |
|||
CONOUT EQU TTYBASE+1 ;CONSOLE OUTPUT |
|||
ENDIF |
|||
|
|||
; IF NOT TTY ;ASSEMBLE RELATIVE TO |
|||
;CRTBASE |
|||
CONIN EQU CRTBASE ;CONSOLE INPUT |
|||
CONOUT EQU CRTBASE+1 ;CONSOLE OUTPUT |
|||
|
|||
ENDIF |
|||
... |
|||
IN CONIN ;READ CONSOLE DATA |
|||
... |
|||
OUT CONTOUT ;WRITE CONSOLE DATA |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
In this case, the program assembles for an environment where |
|||
a teletype is connected, based at port 10H. The statement |
|||
defining TTY can be changed to |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
TTY EQU FALSE |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
and, in this case, the program assembles for a CRT based at |
|||
port 20H. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.6 The DB Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.6 The DB Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DB directive allows the programmer to define initialized |
|||
storage areas in single-precision byte format. The DB statement |
|||
takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label DB e#1, e#2, ..., e#n |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where e#1 through e#n are either expressions that evaluate to 8-bit |
|||
values (the high-order bit must be zero) or are ASCII strings |
|||
of length no greater than 64 characters. There is no practical |
|||
restriction on the number of expressions included on a single |
|||
source line. The expressions are evaluated and placed |
|||
sequentially into the machine code file following the last |
|||
program address generated by the assembler. String characters |
|||
are similarly placed into memory starting with the first |
|||
character and ending with the last character. Strings of length |
|||
greater than two characters cannot be used as operands in more |
|||
complicated expressions. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
ASCII |
|||
characters are always placed in memory with the parity bit reset |
|||
(0). Also, there is no translation from lower- to upper-case |
|||
within strings. The optional label can be used to reference the |
|||
data area throughout the remainder of the program. The following |
|||
are examples of valid DB statements: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
data: DB 0,1,2,3,4,5 |
|||
DB data and 0ffh,5,377Q,1+2+3+4 |
|||
|
|||
sign-on: DB 'please type your name',cr,lf,0 |
|||
DB 'AB' SHR 8, 'C', 'DE' AND 7FH |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.4.7 The DW Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.7 The DW Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DW statement is similar to the DB statement except double-precision |
|||
two-byte words of storage are initialized. The DW statement |
|||
takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label DW e#1, e#2, ..., e#n |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where e#1 through e#n are expressions that evaluate to 16-bit |
|||
results. Note that ASCII strings of one or two |
|||
characters are allowed, but strings longer than two characters |
|||
are disallowed. In all cases, the data storage is consistent |
|||
with the 8080 processor; the least significant byte of the |
|||
expression is stored first in memory, followed by the most |
|||
significant byte. The following are examples of DW statements: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
doub: DW 0ffefh,doub+4,signon-$,255+255 |
|||
DW 'a', 5, 'ab', 'CD', 6 shl 8 or llb. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.4.8 The DS Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.8 The DS Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DS statement is used to reserve an area of uninitialized |
|||
memory, and takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
label DS expression |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the label is optional. The assembler begins subsequent |
|||
code generation after the area reserved by the DS. Thus, the DS |
|||
statement given above has exactly the same effect as the following |
|||
statement: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 7 |
|||
label: EQU $ ;LABEL VALUE IS CURRENT CODE LOCATION |
|||
ORG $+expression ;MOVE PAST RESERVED AREA |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.nx threeb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,954 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.ft 3-% |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.5 Operation Codes |
|||
.tc 3.5 Operation Codes |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.5 Operation Codes |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
Assembly-language operation codes form the principal part of |
|||
assembly-language programs and form the operation field of the |
|||
instruction. In general, ASM accepts all the standard mnemonics |
|||
for the Intel 8080 microcomputer, which are given in detail in the \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
Intel 8080 Assembly Language Programming Manual. \c |
|||
.qu |
|||
Labels are optional on each input line. The individual operators |
|||
are listed briefly in the following sections for completeness, |
|||
although the Intel manuals should be |
|||
referenced for exact operator details. In Tables 3-4 through 3-8, |
|||
bit values have the following meaning: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o e3 represents a 3-bit value in the range 0-7 that can be |
|||
one of the predefined registers A, B, C, D, E, H, L, M, SP, or |
|||
PSW. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o e8 represents an 8-bit value in the range 0-255. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o e16 represents a 16-bit value in the range 0-65535. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
These expressions can be formed from an arbitrary combination of |
|||
operands and operators. In some cases, the operands are |
|||
restricted to particular values within the allowable range, such |
|||
as the PUSH instruction. These cases are noted as they are |
|||
encountered. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the sections that follow, each operation code is listed in its |
|||
most general form, along with a specific example, a short |
|||
explanation, and special restrictions. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.5.1 Jumps, Calls, and Returns |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.5.1 Jumps, Calls, and Returns |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Jump, Call, and Return instructions allow several different |
|||
forms that test the condition flags set in the 8080 microcomputer |
|||
CPU. The forms are shown in Table 3-4. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-4. Jumps, Calls, and Returns |
|||
.ll 63 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form Bit Example Meaning |
|||
Value |
|||
|
|||
JMP e16 JMP L1 Jump unconditionally to label |
|||
|
|||
JNZ e16 JNZ L2 Jump on nonzero condition to label |
|||
|
|||
JZ e16 JZ 100H Jump on zero condition to label |
|||
|
|||
JNC e16 JNC L1+4 Jump no carry to label |
|||
|
|||
JC e16 JC L3 Jump on carry to label |
|||
|
|||
JPO e16 JPO $+8 Jump on parity odd to label |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-4. (continued) |
|||
.ll 63 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form Bit Example Meaning |
|||
Value |
|||
|
|||
JPE e16 JPE L4 Jump on even parity to label |
|||
|
|||
JP e16 JP GAMMA Jump on positive result to label |
|||
|
|||
JM e16 JM al Jump on minus to label |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
CALL e16 CALL S1 Call subroutine unconditionally |
|||
|
|||
CNZ e16 CNZ S2 Call subroutine on nonzero |
|||
condition |
|||
|
|||
CZ e16 CZ 100H Call subroutine on zero condition |
|||
|
|||
CNC e16 CNC S1+4 Call subroutine if no carry set |
|||
|
|||
CC e16 CC S3 Call subroutine if carry set |
|||
|
|||
CPO e16 CPO $+8 Call subroutine if parity odd |
|||
|
|||
CPE e16 CPE $4 Call subroutine if parity even |
|||
|
|||
CP e16 CP GAMMA Call subroutine if positive result |
|||
|
|||
CM e16 CM b1$c2 Call subroutine if minus flag |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
RST e3 RST 0 Programmed restart, equivalent to |
|||
CALL 8*e3, except one byte call |
|||
|
|||
RET Return from subroutine |
|||
|
|||
RNZ Return if nonzero flag set |
|||
|
|||
RZ Return if zero flag set |
|||
|
|||
RNC Return if no carry |
|||
|
|||
RC Return if carry flag set |
|||
|
|||
RPO Return if parity is odd |
|||
|
|||
RPE Return if parity is even |
|||
|
|||
RP Return if positive result |
|||
|
|||
RM Return if minus flag is set |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.5.2 Immediate Operand Instructions |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.5.2 Immediate Operand Instructions |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
Several instructions are available that load single- or double- |
|||
precision registers or single-precision memory cells with |
|||
constant values, along with instructions that perform immediate |
|||
arithmetic or logical operations on the accumulator (register A). |
|||
Table 3-5 describes the immediate operand instructions. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-5. Immediate Operand Instructions |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form with Example Meaning |
|||
Bit Values |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
MVI e3,e8 MVI B,255 Move immediate data to register A, B, C, D, |
|||
E, H, L, or M (memory) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
ADI e8 ADI 1 Add immediate operand to A without carry |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
ACI e8 ACI 0FFH Add immediate operand to A with carry |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
SUI e8 SUI L + 3 Subtract from A without borrow (carry) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
SBI e8 SBI L AND 11B Subtract from A with borrow (carry) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
ANI e8 ANI $ AND 7FH Logical and A with immediate data |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
XRI e8 XRI 1111$0000B Exclusive or A with immediate data |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
ORI e8 ORI L AND 1+1 Logical or A with immediate data |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
CPI e8 CPI 'a' Compare A with immediate data, same |
|||
as SUI except register A not changed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
LXI e3,e16 LXI B,100H Load extended immediate to register |
|||
pair. e3 must be equivalent to B, D, H, or SP. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.5.3 Increment and Decrement Instructions |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.5.3 Increment and Decrement Instructions |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The 8080 provides instructions for incrementing or decrementing |
|||
single- and double-precision registers. The instructions are |
|||
described in Table 3-6. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-6. Increment and Decrement Instructions |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form with Example Meaning |
|||
Bit Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -28 |
|||
INR e3 INR E Single-precision increment |
|||
register. e3 produces one of A, B, C, D, E, H, L, M. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -28 |
|||
DCR e3 DCR A Single-precision decrement |
|||
register. e3 produces one of A, B, C, D, E, H, L, M. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -28 |
|||
INX e3 INX SP Double-precision increment register |
|||
pair. e3 must be equivalent to B, D, H, or SP. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -28 |
|||
DCX e3 DCX B Double-precision decrement register |
|||
pair. e3 must be equivalent to B, D, H, or SP. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.5.4 Data Movement Instructions |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.5.4 Data Movement Instructions |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Instructions that move data from memory to the CPU and from CPU to memory are |
|||
given in the following table. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-7. Data Movement Instructions |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form with Example Meaning |
|||
Bit Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
MOV e3,e3 MOV A,B Move data to leftmost element from rightmost |
|||
element. e3 produces on of A, B, C, D, E, H, L, or M. MOV M,M is |
|||
disallowed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
LDAX e3 LDAX B Load register A from computed address. e3 must |
|||
produce either B or D. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
STAX e3 STAX D Store register A to computed |
|||
address. e3 must produce either B or D. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
LHLD e16 LHLD L1 Load HL direct from location |
|||
e16. Double-precision load to H and L. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-7. (continued) |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form with Example Meaning |
|||
Bit Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
SHLD e16 SHLD L5+x Store HL direct to location e16. |
|||
Double-precision store from H and L to memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
LDA e16 LDA Gamma Load register A from address e16. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
STA e16 STA X3-5 Store register A into memory |
|||
at e16. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
POP e3 POP PSW Load register pair from stack, set SP. |
|||
e3 must produce one of B, D, H, or PSW. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
PUSH e3 PUSH B Store register pair into stack, set SP. e3 |
|||
must produce on of B, D, H, or PSW. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
IN e8 IN 0 Load register A with data from port |
|||
e8. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
OUT e8 OUT 255 Send data from register A to port |
|||
e8. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
XTHL Exchange data from top of stack |
|||
with HL. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
PCHL Fill program counter with data from |
|||
HL. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
SPHL Fill stack pointer with data from |
|||
HL. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -30 |
|||
XCHG Exchange DE pair with HL pair. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.5.5 Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.5.5 Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Instructions that act upon the single-precision accumulator to |
|||
perform arithmetic and logic operations are given in the |
|||
following table. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-8. Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form with Example Meaning |
|||
Bit Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
ADD e3 ADD B Add register given by e3 to |
|||
accumulator without carry. e3 must produce one of A, B, C, D, E, |
|||
H, or L. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
ADC e3 ADC L Add register to A with carry, e3 as |
|||
above. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
SUB e3 SUB H Subtract reg e3 from A without |
|||
carry, e3 is defined as above. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
SBB e3 SBB 2 Subtract register e3 from A with |
|||
carry, e3 defined as above. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
ANA e3 ANA 1+1 Logical and reg with A, e3 as |
|||
above. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
XRA e3 XRA A Exclusive or with A, e3 as above. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
ORA e3 ORA B Logical or with A, e3 defined as |
|||
above. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
CMP e3 CMP H Compare register with A, e3 as |
|||
above. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
DAA Decimal adjust register A based |
|||
upon last arithmetic logic unit operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
CMA Complement the bits in register A. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
STC Set the carry flag to 1. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
CMC Complement the carry flag. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
RLC Rotate bits left, (re)set carry as a |
|||
side effect. High-order A bit becomes carry. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
RRC Rotate bits right, (re)set carry as |
|||
side effect. Low-order A bit becomes carry. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-8. (continued) |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Form with Example Meaning |
|||
Bit Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
RAL Rotate carry/A register to left. |
|||
Carry is involved in the rotate. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
RAR Rotate carry/A register to right. |
|||
Carry is involved in the rotate. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -29 |
|||
DAD e3 DAD B Double-precision add register pair |
|||
e3 to HL. e3 must produce B, D, H, or SP. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.5.6 Control Instructions |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.5.6 Control Instructions |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The four remaining instructions, categorized as control instructions, are |
|||
the following: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
o HLT halts the 8080 processor. |
|||
o DI disables the interrupt system. |
|||
o EI enables the interrupt system. |
|||
o NOP means no operation. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.6 Error Messages |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.6 Error Messages |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.6 Error Messages |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
When errors occur within the assembly-language program, they are |
|||
listed as single-character flags in the leftmost position of the |
|||
source listing. The line in error is also echoed at the console |
|||
so that the source listing need not be examined to determine if |
|||
errors are present. The error codes are listed in the following |
|||
table. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-9. Error Codes |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Error Code Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
D Data error: element in data statement cannot be placed in |
|||
the specified data area. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
E Expression error: expression is ill-formed and cannot be |
|||
computed at assembly time. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
L Label error: label cannot appear in this context; might be |
|||
duplicate label. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
N Not implemented: features that will appear in future ASM |
|||
versions. For example, macros are recognized, but flagged in this |
|||
version. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-9. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Error Code Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
O Overflow: expression is too complicated (too many |
|||
pending operators) to be computed and should be simplified. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
P Phase error: label does not have the same value on two |
|||
subsequent passes through the program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
R Register error: the value specified as a register is not |
|||
compatible with the operation code. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
S Syntax error: statement is not properly formed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
V Value error: operand encountered in expression is |
|||
improperly formed. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Table 3-10 lists the error messages that are due to terminal error |
|||
conditions. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-10. Error Messages |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
NO SOURCE FILE PRESENT |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
The file specified in the ASM command does not exist on disk. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
NO DIRECTORY SPACE |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
The disk directory is full; erase files that are not needed and retry. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
SOURCE FILE NAME ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
Improperly formed ASM filename, for example, it is specified with ? fields. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
SOURCE FILE READ ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
Source file cannot be read properly by the assembler; execute a |
|||
TYPE to determine the point of error. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-10. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
OUTPUT FILE WRITE ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
Output files cannot be written properly; most likely cause is a full |
|||
disk, erase and retry. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
CANNOT CLOSE FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
Output file cannot be closed; check to see if disk is write protected. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.7 A Sample Session |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.7 A Sample Session |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.7 A Sample Session |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following sample session shows interaction with the assembler and |
|||
debugger in the development of a simple assembly-language |
|||
program. The arrow represents a carriage return keystroke. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ll 90 |
|||
.nf |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM SORT \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Assemble SORT.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER - VER 1.0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
0015C Next free address |
|||
003H USE FACTOR Percent of table used 00 to ff (hexadecimal) |
|||
END OF ASSEMBLY |
|||
.sp |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR SORT.* |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
SORT ASM Source file |
|||
SORT BAK Back-up from last edit |
|||
SORT PRN Print file (contains tab characters) |
|||
SORT HEX Machine code file |
|||
.sp |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
TYPE SORT.PRN |
|||
.qs |
|||
Source line |
|||
.sp |
|||
; SORT PROGRAM IN CP/M ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE |
|||
; START AT THE BEGINNING OF THE TRANSIENT |
|||
PROGRAM AREA |
|||
.sp |
|||
Machine code location |
|||
0100 ORG 100H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Generated machine code |
|||
0100 214601 SORT: LXI H,SW ;ADDRESS SWITCH TOGGLE |
|||
0103 3601 MVI M,1 ;SET TO 1 FOR FIRST ITERATION |
|||
0105 214701 LXI H,I ;ADDRESS INDEX |
|||
0108 3600 MVI M,0 ;I=0 |
|||
; |
|||
; COMPARE I WITH ARRAY SIZE |
|||
010A 7E COMPL: MOV A,M ;A REGISTER = I |
|||
010B FE09 CPI N-1 ;CY SET IF I<(N-1) |
|||
010D D21901 JNC CONT ;CONTINUE IF I<=(N-2) |
|||
; |
|||
; END OF ONE PASS THROUGH DATA |
|||
0110 214601 LXI H,SW ;CHECK FOR ZERO SWITCHES |
|||
0113 7EB7C200001 MOV A, M! ORA A! JNZ SORT ;END OF SORT IF SW=0 |
|||
; |
|||
0118 FF RST 7 ;GO TO THE DEBUGGER INSTEAD OF REB |
|||
; |
|||
; CONTINUE THIS PASS |
|||
Truncated ; ADDRESSING I, SO LOAD AV(I) INTO REGISTERS |
|||
0119 |
|||
5F16002148CONT: MOV E, A! MVI D, 0! LXI H, AV! DAD D! DAD D |
|||
0121 4E792346 MOV C, M! MOV A, C! INX H! MOV B, M |
|||
; LOW ORDER BYTE IN A AND C, HIGH ORDER BYTE IN B |
|||
; |
|||
; MOV H AND L TO ADDRESS AV(I+1) |
|||
0125 23 INX H |
|||
; |
|||
; COMPARE VALUE WITH REGS CONTAINING AV (I) |
|||
0126 965778239E SUB M! MOV D, A! MOV A, B! INX H! SBB M ;SUBTRACT |
|||
; |
|||
; BORROW SET IF AV(I+1)>AV(I) |
|||
012B DA3F01 JC INCI ;SKIP IF IN PROPER ORDER |
|||
; |
|||
; CHECK FOR EQUAL VALUES |
|||
012E B2CA3F01 ORA D! JZ INCI ;SKIP IF AV(I) = AV(I+1) |
|||
0132 56702B5E MOV D, M! MOV M, B! DCX H! MOV E, M |
|||
0136 712B722B73 MOV M, C! DCX H! MOV M, D! DCX H! MOV M, E |
|||
; |
|||
; INCREMENT SWITCH COUNT |
|||
013B 21460134 LXI H,SW! INR M |
|||
; |
|||
; INCREMENT I |
|||
013F 21470134C3INCI:LXI H,I! INR M! JMP COMP |
|||
; |
|||
; DATA DEFINITION SECTION |
|||
0146 00 SW: DB 0 ;RESERVE SPACE FOR SWITCH COUNT |
|||
0147 I: DS 1 ;SPACE FOR INDEX |
|||
0148 050064001EAV: DW 5, 100, 30, 50, 20, 7, 1000, 300, 100, -32767 |
|||
000A = N EQU($-AV)/2 ;COMPUTE N INSTEAD OF PRE |
|||
015C END |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
TYPE SORT.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Equate value |
|||
|
|||
:10010000214601360121470136007EFE09D2190140 |
|||
:100110002146017EB7C20001FF5F16002148011988 Machine code in |
|||
:10012000194E79234623965778239EDA3F01B2CAA7 HEX format |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
|
|||
:100130003F0156702B5E712B722B732146013421C7 |
|||
:07014000470134C30A01006E Machine code in |
|||
:10014800050064001E00320014000700E8032C01BB HEX format |
|||
:0401580064000180BE |
|||
:0000000000 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SORT.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Start debug run |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
|
|||
16K DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
015C 0000 Default address (no address on END statement) |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0000 100 Change PC to 100 |
|||
|
|||
-UFFFF Untrace for 65535 steps |
|||
Abort with rubout |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 LXI H,0146*0100 |
|||
-T10 Trace 10\d16\u steps |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0100 LXI H, 0146 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0103 MVI M, 01 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0105 LXI H, 0147 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=0108 MVI M, 00 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=010A MOV A, M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=010B CPI 09 |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=010D JNC 0119 |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=0110 LXI H, 0146 |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0113 MOV A, M |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0114 ORA A |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0115 JNZ 0100 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0100 LXI H, 0146 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0103 MVI M, 01 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0105 LXI H, 0147 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=0108 MVI M, 00 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=01 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=010A MOV A, M*010B |
|||
-A10D Stopped at 10BH |
|||
|
|||
010D JC 119 Change to a jump on carry |
|||
0110 |
|||
|
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=010B 100 Reset program counter back to beginning of program |
|||
|
|||
-T10 Trace execution for 10H steps |
|||
|
|||
Altered instruction |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=0100 LXI H,0146 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0103 MVI M,01 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0146 S=0100 P=0105 LXI H,0147 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=0108 MVI M,00 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=010A MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=010B CPI 09 |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=010D JC 0119 |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=0119 MOV E,A |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=011A MVI D,00 |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0147 S=0100 P=011C LXI H,0148 |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0148 S=0100 P=011F DAD D |
|||
C0Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0148 S=0100 P=0120 DAD D |
|||
C0Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0148 S=0100 P=0121 MOV C,M |
|||
C0Z0M1E0I0 A=00 B=0005 D=0000 H=0148 S=0100 P=0122 MOV A,C |
|||
C0Z0M1E0I0 A=05 B=0005 D=0000 H=0148 S=0100 P=0123 INX H |
|||
C0Z0M1E0I0 A=05 B=0005 D=0000 H=0149 S=0100 P=0124 MOV B,M*0125 |
|||
-L100 Automatic breakpoint |
|||
|
|||
0100 LXI H,0146 |
|||
0103 MVI M,01 |
|||
0105 LXI H,0147 |
|||
0108 MVI M,00 |
|||
010A MOV A,M List some code |
|||
010B CPI 09 from 100H |
|||
010D JC 0119 |
|||
0110 LXI H,0146 |
|||
0113 MOV A,M |
|||
0114 ORA A |
|||
0115 JNZ 0100 |
|||
-L |
|||
|
|||
0118 RST 07 |
|||
0119 MOV E,A List more |
|||
011A MVI D,00 |
|||
011C LXI H,0148 |
|||
-Abort list with rubout |
|||
-G,11B Start program from current PC (0125H) |
|||
and run in real time to 11BH |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
*0127 Stopped with an external interrupt 7 from front panel |
|||
-T4 (program was looping indefinitely) |
|||
Look at looping program in trace mode |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=38 B=0064 D=0006 H=0156 S=0100 P=0127 MOV D,A |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=38 B=0064 D=3806 H=0156 S=0100 P=0128 MOV A,B |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0064 D=3806 H=0156 S=0100 P=0129 INX H |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0064 D=3806 H=0157 S=0100 P=012A SBB M*012B |
|||
-D148 |
|||
Data are sorted, but program does not stop. |
|||
0148 05 00 07 00 14 00 1E 00........ |
|||
0150 32 00 64 00 64 00 2C 01 E8 03 01 80 00 00 00 00 2.D.D.,........ |
|||
|
|||
0160 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00................ |
|||
|
|||
-G0 Return to CP/M |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SORT.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Reload the memory image |
|||
|
|||
16K DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
015C 0000 |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0000 100 Set PC to beginning of program |
|||
|
|||
-L10D List bad OPCODE |
|||
|
|||
010D JNC 0119 |
|||
0110 LXI H,0146 |
|||
-Abort list with rubout |
|||
-A10D Assemble new OPCODE |
|||
|
|||
010D JC 119 |
|||
|
|||
0110 |
|||
|
|||
-L100 List starting section of program |
|||
|
|||
0100 LXI H,0146 |
|||
0103 MVI M,01 |
|||
0105 LXI H,0147 |
|||
0108 MVI M,00 |
|||
-Abort list with rubout |
|||
-A103 Change switch initialization to 00 |
|||
|
|||
0103 MVI M,0 |
|||
|
|||
0105 |
|||
|
|||
-^C Return to CP/M with CTRL-C (G0 works as well) |
|||
|
|||
SAVE 1 SORT.COM Save 1 page (256 bytes, from 100H to 1ffH) on |
|||
disk in case there is need to reload later |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SORT.COM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Restart DDT with saved memory image |
|||
|
|||
16K DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
0200 0100 COM file always starts with address 100H |
|||
-G Run the program from PC=100H |
|||
|
|||
*0118 Programmed stop (RST 7) encountered |
|||
-D148 |
|||
|
|||
Data properly sorted |
|||
0148 05 00 07 00 14 00 1E 00........ |
|||
0150 32 00 64 00 64 00 2C 01 E8 03 01 80 00 00 00 00 2.D.D......... |
|||
|
|||
0160 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00................ |
|||
0170 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00................ |
|||
|
|||
-G0 Return to CP/M |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ED SORT.ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Make changes to original program |
|||
|
|||
*N,0^Z0TT Find next ,0 |
|||
MVI M,0 ;I = 0 |
|||
|
|||
*- Up one line in text |
|||
LXI H,I ;ADDRESS INDEX |
|||
.bp |
|||
*- Up another line |
|||
MVI M,1 ;SET TO 1 FOR FIRST ITERATION |
|||
|
|||
*KT Kill line and type next line |
|||
LXI H,I ;ADDRESS INDEX |
|||
|
|||
*I Insert new line |
|||
MVI M,0 ;ZERO SW |
|||
|
|||
*T |
|||
LXI H,I ;ADDRESS INDEX |
|||
|
|||
*NJNC^Z0T |
|||
JNC*T |
|||
CONT ;CONTINUE IF I<=(N-2) |
|||
|
|||
*-2DIC^Z0LT |
|||
JC CONT ;CONTINUE IF I<=(N-2) |
|||
|
|||
*E Source from disk A |
|||
HEX to disk A |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM SORT.AAZ \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Skip PRN file |
|||
|
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER - VER 1.0 |
|||
|
|||
015C Next address to assemble |
|||
003H USE FACTOR |
|||
END OF ASSEMBLY |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SORT.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Test program changes |
|||
|
|||
16K DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
015C 0000 |
|||
-G100 |
|||
|
|||
*0118 |
|||
-D148 |
|||
Data sorted |
|||
0148 05 00 07 00 14 00 1E 00........ |
|||
0150 32 00 64 00 64 00 2C 01 E8 03 01 80 00 00 00 00 2.D.D.......... |
|||
0160 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00................ |
|||
|
|||
-Abort with rubout |
|||
|
|||
-G0 Return to CP/M--program checks OK. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Section 3 |
|||
.nx foura |
|||
|
|||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ |
|||
@echo off |
|||
setlocal |
|||
|
|||
set TOOLS=..\..\..\Tools |
|||
|
|||
set PATH=%TOOLS%\zx;%PATH% |
|||
|
|||
set ZXBINDIR=%TOOLS%/cpm/bin/ |
|||
set ZXLIBDIR=%TOOLS%/cpm/lib/ |
|||
set ZXINCDIR=%TOOLS%/cpm/include/ |
|||
|
|||
rem set TEXOPT=-$D -$Q |
|||
|
|||
zx TEX21A PART1 %TEXOPT% |
|||
zx TEX21A PART2 %TEXOPT% |
|||
zx TEX21A PART3 %TEXOPT% |
|||
|
|||
echo Remove extraneous control codes and escape sequences |
|||
rem pause |
|||
|
|||
PowerShell .\Strip.ps1 |
|||
|
|||
call texify -p --clean "Main.ltx" |
|||
|
|||
if errorlevel 1 goto :eof |
|||
|
|||
move /Y Main.pdf "..\..\..\Doc\CPM 22 Manual.pdf" |
|||
@ -1,9 +0,0 @@ |
|||
@echo off |
|||
setlocal |
|||
|
|||
if exist *.pdf del *.pdf |
|||
if exist *.prn del *.prn |
|||
if exist *.ix del *.ix |
|||
if exist *.log del *.log |
|||
if exist part?.txt del part?.txt |
|||
if exist *.synctex.gz del *.synctex.gz |
|||
@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ |
|||
\documentclass[letterpaper,10pt,oneside]{book} |
|||
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} |
|||
%\usepackage[defaultmono]{droidmono} |
|||
\usepackage[scaled]{beramono} |
|||
\usepackage{fancyvrb} |
|||
\usepackage{geometry} |
|||
\usepackage{pdflscape} |
|||
%\usepackage{showframe} % Diagnostic |
|||
|
|||
% Suppress headers and footers completely |
|||
\pagestyle{empty} |
|||
|
|||
% portrait @ 66 lines per page |
|||
\geometry{top=0.0in, bottom=0.0in, left=1.0in, right=1.0in} |
|||
|
|||
%\RecustomVerbatimCommand{\VerbatimInput}{VerbatimInput}% |
|||
%{ |
|||
% commandchars=\\\{\} |
|||
%} |
|||
|
|||
\begin{document} |
|||
|
|||
% Part 1 (main document sections) |
|||
\VerbatimInput{part1.txt} |
|||
|
|||
% landscape @ 51 lines per page |
|||
\newgeometry{top=1.0in, bottom=1.0in, left=0.0in, right=0.0in} |
|||
\begin{landscape} |
|||
|
|||
% Part 2 (appendices A-G, source listings) |
|||
\VerbatimInput{part2.txt} |
|||
|
|||
% restore portrait @ 66 lines per page |
|||
\end{landscape} |
|||
\restoregeometry |
|||
|
|||
% Part 3 (appendices H-I, index) |
|||
\VerbatimInput{part3.txt} |
|||
|
|||
\end{document} |
|||
@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ |
|||
\documentclass[letterpaper,10pt,oneside]{book} |
|||
\usepackage[defaultmono]{droidmono} |
|||
\usepackage{verbatim} |
|||
\usepackage{geometry} |
|||
\usepackage{pdflscape} |
|||
%\usepackage{showframe} % Diagnostic |
|||
|
|||
% Suppress headers and footers completely |
|||
\pagestyle{empty} |
|||
|
|||
% 66 lines per page, portrait |
|||
%\geometry{top=0.0in, bottom=0.0in, left=1.0in, right=0.5in} |
|||
\geometry{top=0.0in, bottom=0.0in, left=0.5in, right=0.5in} |
|||
|
|||
\begin{document} |
|||
|
|||
% Part 1 (main document sections) |
|||
\hspace{1pt} \verbatiminput{part1.txt} |
|||
|
|||
% 51 lines per page, landscape |
|||
%\newgeometry{top=1.0in, bottom=0.5in, left=0.0in, right=0.0in} |
|||
\newgeometry{top=0.5in, bottom=0.5in, left=0.0in, right=0.0in} |
|||
\begin{landscape} |
|||
|
|||
% Part 2 (appendices A-G, source listings) |
|||
\hspace{1pt} \verbatiminput{part2.txt} |
|||
|
|||
% back to standard geometry |
|||
\end{landscape} |
|||
\restoregeometry |
|||
|
|||
% Part 3 (appendices H-I, index) |
|||
\hspace{1pt} \verbatiminput{part3.txt} |
|||
|
|||
\end{document} |
|||
@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ |
|||
function StripFile($Filename) |
|||
{ |
|||
$Content = Get-Content "${Filename}.prn" |
|||
# $Content = $Content -replace "\0", "" |
|||
# $Content = $Content -replace "\e.", "" |
|||
$Content = $Content -replace "\x1A", "" |
|||
Set-Content "${Filename}.txt" $Content[0..($Content.count - 3)] |
|||
} |
|||
|
|||
StripFile("part1") |
|||
StripFile("part2") |
|||
StripFile("part3") |
|||
|
|||
return |
|||
@ -1,716 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft A-% |
|||
Appendix A |
|||
|
|||
The Microcomputer Development System Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 ; mds-800 i/o drivers for cp/m 2.2 |
|||
2 ; (four drive single density version) |
|||
3 ; |
|||
4 ; version 2.2 february, 1980 |
|||
5 ; |
|||
6 0016 = vers equ 22 ;version 2.2 |
|||
7 ; |
|||
8 ; copyright (c) 1980 |
|||
9 ; digital research |
|||
10 ; box 579, pacific grove |
|||
11 ; california, 93950 |
|||
12 ; |
|||
13 ; |
|||
14 ffff = true equ 0fffh ;value of "true" |
|||
15 0000 = false equ not true ;"false" |
|||
16 0000 = test equ false ;true if test bios |
|||
17 ; |
|||
18 if test |
|||
19 bias equ 03400h ;base of ccp in test system |
|||
20 endif |
|||
21 if not test |
|||
22 0000 = bias equ 0000h ;generate relocatable cp/m system |
|||
23 endif |
|||
24 ; |
|||
25 1600 = patch equ 1600h |
|||
26 ; |
|||
27 1600 org patch |
|||
28 0000 = cpmb equ $-patch ;base of cpm console processor |
|||
29 0806 = bdos equ 806h+cpmb ;basic dos (resident portion) |
|||
30 1600 = cpml equ $-cpmb ;length (in bytes) of cpm system |
|||
31 002c = nsects equ cpml/128 ;number of sectors to load |
|||
32 0002 = offset equ 2 ;number of disk tracks used by cp/m |
|||
33 0004 = cdisk equ 0004h ;address of last logged disk on warm start |
|||
34 0080 = buff equ 0080h ;default buffer address |
|||
35 000a = retry equ 10 ;max retries on disk i/o before error |
|||
36 ; |
|||
37 ; perform following functions |
|||
38 ; boot cold start |
|||
39 ; wboot warm start (save i/o byte) |
|||
40 ; (boot and wboot are the same for mds) |
|||
41 ; const console status |
|||
42 ; reg-a = 00 if no character ready |
|||
43 ; reg-a = ff if character ready |
|||
44 ; conin console character in (result in reg-a) |
|||
45 ; conout console character out (char in reg-c) |
|||
46 ; list list out (char in reg-c) |
|||
47 ; punch punch out (char in reg-c) |
|||
48 ; reader paper tape reader in (result to reg-a) |
|||
49 ; home move to track 00 |
|||
50 ; |
|||
51 ; (the following calls set-up the io parameter block for the |
|||
52 ; mds, which is used to perform subsequent reads and writes) |
|||
53 ; seldsk select disk given by reg-c (0, 1, 2...) |
|||
54 ; settrk set track address (0,...76) for subsequent read-write |
|||
55 ; setsec set sector address (1,...,26) for subsequent read-write |
|||
56 ; setdma set subsequent dma address (initially 80h) |
|||
57 ; |
|||
58 ; (read and write assume previous calls to set up the io parameters) |
|||
59 ; read read track/sector to preset dma address |
|||
60 ; write track/sector from preset dma address |
|||
61 ; |
|||
62 ; jump vector for individual routines |
|||
63 1600 c3b316 jmp boot |
|||
64 1603 c3c316 wboote: jmp wboot |
|||
65 1606 c36117 jmp const |
|||
66 1609 c36417 jmp conin |
|||
67 160c c36a17 jmp conout |
|||
68 160f c36d17 jmp list |
|||
69 1612 c37217 jmp punch |
|||
70 1615 c37517 jmp reader |
|||
71 1618 c37817 jmp home |
|||
72 161b c37d17 jmp seldsk |
|||
73 161e c3a717 jmp settrk |
|||
74 1621 c3ac17 jmp setsec |
|||
75 1624 c3bb17 jmp setdma |
|||
76 1627 c3c117 jmp read |
|||
77 162a c3ca17 jmp write |
|||
78 162d c37017 jmp listst ;list status |
|||
79 1630 c3b117 jmp sectran |
|||
80 ; |
|||
81 maclib diskdef ;load the disk definition library |
|||
82 disks 4 ;four disks |
|||
83 1633+= dpbase equ $ ;base of disk parameter blocks |
|||
84 1633+82160000 dpe0: dw xlt0, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
85 1637+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
86 163b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb0 ;dir buff, parm block |
|||
87 163f+0d19ee18 dw csv0, alv0 ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
88 1643+82160000 dpe1: dw xlt1, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
89 1647+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
90 164b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb1 ;dir buff, parm block |
|||
91 164f+3c191d19 dw csv1, alv1 ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
92 1653+82160000 dpe2: dw xlt2, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
93 1657+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
94 165b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb2 ;dir buff, parm block |
|||
95 165f+6b194c19 dw csv2, alv2 ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
96 1663+82160000 dpe3: dw xlt3, 0000h ;translate table |
|||
97 1667+00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h ;scratch area |
|||
98 166b+6e187316 dw dirbuf, dpb3 ;check, alloc block |
|||
99 166f+9a197b19 dw csv3, alv3 ;dir buff, parm vectors |
|||
100 diskdef 0, 1, 26, 6, 1024, 243, 64, 64, offset |
|||
101 1673+= dpb0 equ $ ;disk parm block |
|||
102 1673+1a00 dw 26 ;sec per track |
|||
103 1675+03 db 3 ;block shift |
|||
104 1676+07 db 7 ;block mask |
|||
105 1677+00 db 0 ;extnt mask |
|||
106 1678+f200 dw 242 ;disk size-1 |
|||
107 167a+3f00 dw 63 ;directory max |
|||
108 167c+c0 db 192 ;alloc0 |
|||
109 167d+00 db 0 ;alloc1 |
|||
110 167e+1000 dw 16 ;check size |
|||
111 1680+0200 dw 2 ;offset |
|||
112 1682+= xlt0 equ $ ;translate table |
|||
113 1682+01 db 1 |
|||
114 1683+07 db 7 |
|||
115 1684+0d db 13 |
|||
116 1685+13 db 19 |
|||
117 1686+19 db 25 |
|||
118 1687+05 db 5 |
|||
119 1688+0b db 11 |
|||
120 1689+11 db 17 |
|||
121 168a+17 db 23 |
|||
122 168b+03 db 3 |
|||
123 168c+09 db 9 |
|||
124 168d+0f db 15 |
|||
125 168e+15 db 21 |
|||
126 168f+02 db 2 |
|||
127 1690+08 db 8 |
|||
128 1691+0e db 14 |
|||
129 1692+14 db 20 |
|||
130 1693+1a db 26 |
|||
131 1694+06 db 6 |
|||
132 1695+0c db 12 |
|||
133 1696+12 db 18 |
|||
134 1697+18 db 24 |
|||
135 1698+04 db 4 |
|||
136 1699+0a db 10 |
|||
137 169a+10 db 16 |
|||
138 169b+16 db 22 |
|||
139 diskdef 1,0 |
|||
140 1673+ = dpb1 equ dpb0 ;equivalent parameters |
|||
141 001f+ = als1 equ als0 ;same allocation vector size |
|||
142 0010+ = css1 equ css0 ;same checksum vector size |
|||
143 1682+ = xlt1 equ xlt0 ;same translate table |
|||
144 diskdef 2, 0 |
|||
145 1673+ = dpb2 equ dpb0 ;equivalent parameters |
|||
146 001f+ = als2 equ als0 ;same allocation vector size |
|||
147 0010+ = css2 equ css0 ;same checksum vector size |
|||
148 1682+ = xlt2 equ xlt0 ;same translate table |
|||
149 diskdef 3, 0 |
|||
150 1673+ = dpb3 equ dpb0 ;equivalent parameters |
|||
151 001f+ = als3 equ als0 ;same allocation vector size |
|||
152 0010+ = css3 equ css0 ;same checksum vector size |
|||
153 1682+ = xlt3 equ xlt0 ;same translate table |
|||
154 ; endef occurs at end of assembly |
|||
155 ; |
|||
156 ; end of controller--independent code, the remaining subroutines |
|||
157 ; are tailored to the particular operating environment, and must |
|||
158 ; be altered for any system which differs from the intel mds. |
|||
159 ; |
|||
160 ; the following code assumes the mds monitor exists at 0f800h |
|||
161 ; and uses the i/o subroutines within the monitor |
|||
162 ; |
|||
163 ; we also assume the mds system has four disk drives |
|||
164 00fd = revrt equ 0fdh ;interrupt revert port |
|||
165 00fc = intc equ 0fch ;interrupt mask port |
|||
166 00f3 = icon equ 0f3h ;interrupt control port |
|||
167 007E = inte equ 0111$1110b ;enable rst 0 (warm boot), rst 7 (monitor) |
|||
168 ; |
|||
169 ; mds monitor equates |
|||
170 f800 = mon80 equ 0f800h ;mds monitor |
|||
171 ff0f = rmon80 equ 0ff0fh ;restart mon80 (boot error) |
|||
172 f803 = ci equ 0f803h ;console character to reg-a |
|||
173 f806 = ri equ 0f806h ;reader in to reg-a |
|||
174 f809 = co equ 0f809h ;console char from c to console out |
|||
175 f80c = po equ 0f80ch ;punch char from c to punch device |
|||
176 f80f = lo equ 0f80fh ;list from c to list device |
|||
177 f812 = csts equ 0f812h ;console status 00/ff to register a |
|||
178 ; |
|||
179 ; disk ports and commands |
|||
180 0078 = base equ 78h ;base of disk command io ports |
|||
181 0078 = dstat equ base ;disk status (input) |
|||
182 0079 = rtype equ base+1 ;result type (input) |
|||
183 007b = rbyte equ base+3 ;result byte (input) |
|||
184 ; |
|||
185 0079 = ilow equ base+1 ;iopb low address (output) |
|||
186 007a = ihigh equ base+2 ;iopb high address (output) |
|||
187 ; |
|||
188 0004 = readf equ 4h ;read function |
|||
189 0006 = writf equ 6h ;write function |
|||
190 0003 = recal equ 3h ;recalibrate drive |
|||
191 0004 = iordy equ 4h ;i/o finished mask |
|||
192 000d = cr equ 0dh ;carriage return |
|||
193 000a = lf equ 0ah ;line-feed |
|||
194 ; |
|||
195 signon: ;signon message: xxk cp/m vers y.y |
|||
196 169c 0d0a0a db cr, lf, lf |
|||
197 if test |
|||
198 db '32' ;32k example bios |
|||
199 endif |
|||
200 if not test |
|||
201 169f 3030 db '00' ;memory size filled by relocator |
|||
202 endif |
|||
203 16a1 6b2043502f db 'k cp/m vers ' |
|||
204 16ad 322e32 db ver/10+'0', ',' vers mod 10+'0' |
|||
205 16b0 0d0a00 db cr, lf, 0 |
|||
206 ; |
|||
207 boot: ;print signon message and go to ccp |
|||
208 ; (note: mds boot initialized iobyte at 0003h) |
|||
209 16b3 310001 lxi sp, buff+80h |
|||
210 16b6 219c16 lxi h, signon |
|||
211 16b9 cdd317 call prmsg ;print message |
|||
212 16bc af xra a ;clear accumulator |
|||
213 16bd 320400 sta cdisk ;set initially to disk a |
|||
214 16c0 c30f17 jmp gocpm ;go to cp/m |
|||
215 ; |
|||
216 ; |
|||
217 wboot:; loader on track 0, sector 1, which will be skipped for warm |
|||
218 ; read cp/m from disk--assuming there is a 128 byte cold start |
|||
219 ; start |
|||
220 ; |
|||
221 16c3 318000 lxi sp, buff ;using dma--thus 80 thru ff available for stack |
|||
222 ; |
|||
223 16c6 0e0a mvi c, retry ;max retries |
|||
224 16c8 c5 push b |
|||
225 wboot0: ;enter here on error retries |
|||
226 16c9 010000 lxi b, cpmb ;set dma address to start of disk system |
|||
227 16cc cdbb17 call setdma |
|||
228 16cf 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;boot from drive 0 |
|||
229 16d1 cd7d17 call seldsk |
|||
230 16d4 0e00 mvi c, 0 |
|||
231 16d6 cda717 call settrk ;start with track 0 |
|||
232 16d9 0e02 mvi c, 2 ;start reading sector 2 |
|||
233 16db cdac17 call setsec |
|||
234 ; |
|||
235 ; read sectors, count nsects to zero |
|||
236 16de c1 pop b ;10-error count |
|||
237 16df 062c mvi b, nsects |
|||
238 rdsec: ;read next sector |
|||
239 16e1 c5 push b ;save sector count |
|||
240 16e2 cdc117 call read |
|||
241 16e5 c24917 jnz booterr ;retry if errors occur |
|||
242 16e8 2a6c18 lhld iod ;increment dma address |
|||
243 16eb 118000 lxi d, 128 ;sector size |
|||
244 16ee 19 dad d ;incremented dma address in hl |
|||
245 16ef 44 mov b, h |
|||
246 16f0 4d mov c, l ;ready for call to set dma |
|||
247 16f1 cdbb17 call setdma |
|||
248 16f4 3a6b18 lda ios ;sector number just read |
|||
249 16f7 fe1a cpi 26 ;read last sector? |
|||
250 16f9 da0517 jc rd1 |
|||
251 ; must be sector 26, zero and go to next track |
|||
252 16fc 3a6a18 lda iot ;get track to register a |
|||
253 16ff 3c inr a |
|||
254 1700 4f mov c, a ;read for call |
|||
255 1701 cda717 call settrk |
|||
256 1704 af xra a ;clear sector number |
|||
257 1705 3c rd1: inr a ;to next sector |
|||
258 1706 4f mov c, a ;ready for call |
|||
259 1707 cdac17 call setsec |
|||
260 170a c1 pop b ;recall sector count |
|||
261 170b 05 dcr b ;done? |
|||
262 170c c2e116 jnz rdsec |
|||
263 ; |
|||
264 ; done with the load, reset default buffer address |
|||
265 gocpm: ;(enter here from cold start boot) |
|||
266 ; enable rst0 and rst7 |
|||
267 170f f3 di |
|||
268 1710 3e12 mvi a, 12h ;initialize command |
|||
269 1712 d3fd out revrt |
|||
270 1714 af xra a |
|||
271 1715 d3fc out intc ;cleared |
|||
272 1717 3e7e mvi a, inte ;rst0 and rst7 bits on |
|||
273 1719 d3fc out intc |
|||
274 171b af xra a |
|||
275 171c d3f3 out icon ;interrupt control |
|||
276 ; |
|||
277 ; set default buffer address to 80h |
|||
278 171e 018000 lxi b, buff |
|||
279 1721 cdbb17 call setdma |
|||
280 ; |
|||
281 ; reset monitor entry points |
|||
282 1724 3ec3 mvi a, jmp |
|||
283 1726 320000 sta 0 |
|||
284 1729 210316 lxi h, wboote |
|||
285 172c 220100 shld 1 ;jump wboot at location 00 |
|||
286 172f 320500 sta 5 |
|||
287 1732 210608 lxi h, bdos |
|||
288 1735 220600 shld 6 ;jmp bdos at location 5 |
|||
289 if not test |
|||
290 1738 323800 sta 7*8 ;jmp to mon80 (may have changed by ddt) |
|||
291 173b 2100f8 lxi h, mon80 |
|||
292 173e 223900 shld 7*8+1 |
|||
293 endif |
|||
294 ; leave iobyte set |
|||
295 ; previously selected disk was b, send parameter to cpm |
|||
296 1741 3a0400 lda cdisk ;last logged disk number |
|||
297 1744 4f mov c, a ;send to ccp to log it in |
|||
298 1745 fb ei |
|||
299 1746 c30000 jmp cpmb |
|||
300 ; |
|||
301 ; error condition occurred, print message and retry |
|||
302 booterr: |
|||
303 1749 c1 pop b ;recall counts |
|||
304 174a 0d dcr c |
|||
305 174b ca5217 jz booter0 |
|||
306 ; try again |
|||
307 174e c5 push b |
|||
308 174f c3c916 jmp wboot0 |
|||
309 ; |
|||
310 booter0: |
|||
311 ; otherwise too many retries |
|||
312 1752 215b17 lxi h, bootmsg |
|||
313 1755 cdd317 call prmsg |
|||
314 1758 c30fff jmp rmon80 ;mds hardware monitor |
|||
315 ; |
|||
316 bootmsg: |
|||
317 175b 3f626f6f74 db '?boot', 0 |
|||
318 ; |
|||
319 ; |
|||
320 const: console status to reg-a |
|||
321 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
322 1761 c312f8 jmp csts |
|||
323 ; |
|||
324 conin: ;console character to reg-a |
|||
325 1764 cd03f8 call ci |
|||
326 1767 e67f ani 7fh ;remove parity bit |
|||
327 1769 c9 ret |
|||
328 ; |
|||
329 conout: ;console character from c to console out |
|||
330 176a c309f8 jmp co |
|||
331 ; |
|||
332 list: ;list device out |
|||
333 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
334 176d c30ff8 jmp lo |
|||
335 ; |
|||
336 listst: |
|||
337 ;return list status |
|||
338 1770 af xra a |
|||
339 1771 c9 ret ;always not ready |
|||
340 ; |
|||
341 punch: ;punch device out |
|||
342 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
343 1772 c30cf8 jmp po |
|||
344 ; |
|||
345 reader: ;reader character in to reg-a |
|||
346 ; (exactly the same as mds call) |
|||
347 1775 c306f8 jmp ri |
|||
348 ; |
|||
349 home: ;move to home position |
|||
350 ; treat as track 00 seek |
|||
351 1778 0e00 mvi c, 0 |
|||
352 177a c3a717 jmp settrk |
|||
353 ; |
|||
354 seldsk: ;select disk given by register c |
|||
355 177d 210000 lxi h, 0000h ;return 0000 if error |
|||
356 1780 79 mov a, c |
|||
357 1781 fe04 cpi ndisks ;too large? |
|||
358 1783 d0 rnc ;leave hl = 0000 |
|||
359 ; |
|||
360 1784 e602 ani 10b ;00 00 for drive 0, 1 and 10 10 for drive 2, 3 |
|||
361 1786 326618 sta dbank ;to select drive bank |
|||
362 1789 79 mov a, c ;00, 01, 10, 11 |
|||
363 178a e601 ani 1b ;mds has 0, 1 at 78, 2, 3 at 88 |
|||
364 178c b7 ora a ;result 00? |
|||
365 178d ca9217 jz setdrive |
|||
366 1790 3e30 mvi a, 00110000b ;selects drive 1 in bank |
|||
367 setdrive: |
|||
368 1792 47 mov b, a ;save the function |
|||
369 1793 216818 lxi h, iof ;io function |
|||
370 1796 7e mov a, m |
|||
371 1797 e6cf ani 11001111b ;mask out disk number |
|||
372 1799 b0 ora b ;mask in new disk number |
|||
373 179a 77 mov m, a ;save it in iopb |
|||
374 179b 69 mov l, c |
|||
375 179c 2600 mvi h, 0 ;hl=disk number |
|||
376 179e 29 dad h ;*2 |
|||
377 179f 29 dad h ;*4 |
|||
378 17a0 29 dad h ;*8 |
|||
379 17a1 29 dad h ;*16 |
|||
380 17a2 113316 lxi d, dpbase |
|||
381 17a5 19 dad d ;hl=disk header table address |
|||
382 17a6 c9 ret |
|||
383 ; |
|||
384 ; |
|||
385 settrk: ;set track address given by c |
|||
386 17a7 216a18 lxi h, iot |
|||
387 17aa 71 mov m, c |
|||
388 17ab c9 ret |
|||
389 ; |
|||
390 setsec: ;set sector number given by c |
|||
391 17ac 216b18 lxi h, ios |
|||
392 17af 71 mov m, c |
|||
393 17b0 c9 ret |
|||
394 sectran: |
|||
395 ;translate sector bc using table at de |
|||
396 17b1 0600 mvi b, 0 ;double-precision sector number in bc |
|||
397 17b3 eb xchg ;translate table address to hl |
|||
398 17b4 09 dad b ;translate (sector) address |
|||
399 17b5 7e mov a, m ;translated sector number to a |
|||
400 17b6 326b18 sta ios |
|||
401 17b9 6f mov l, a ;return sector number in l |
|||
402 17ba c9 ret |
|||
403 ; |
|||
404 setdma: ;set dma address given by regs b, c |
|||
405 17bb 69 mov l, c |
|||
406 17bc 60 mov h, b |
|||
407 17bd 226c18 shld iod |
|||
408 17c0 c9 ret |
|||
409 ; |
|||
410 read: ;read next disk record (assuming disk/trk/sec/dma set) |
|||
411 17c1 0e04 mvi c, readf ;set to read function |
|||
412 17c3 cde017 call setfunc |
|||
413 17c6 cdf017 call waitio ;perform read function |
|||
414 17c9 c9 ret ;may have error set in reg-a |
|||
415 ; |
|||
416 ; |
|||
417 write: ;disk write function |
|||
418 17ca 0e06 mvi c, writf |
|||
419 17cc cde017 call setfunc ;set to write function |
|||
420 17cf cdf017 call waitio |
|||
421 17d2 c9 ret ;may have error set |
|||
422 ; |
|||
423 ; |
|||
424 ; utility subroutines |
|||
425 prmsg: ;print message at h, l to 0 |
|||
426 17d3 7e mov a, m |
|||
427 17d4 b7 ora a zero? |
|||
428 17d5 c8 rz |
|||
429 ; more to print |
|||
430 17d6 e5 push h |
|||
431 17d7 4f mov c,a |
|||
432 17d8 cd6a17 call conout |
|||
433 17db e1 pop h |
|||
434 17dc 23 inx h |
|||
435 17dd c3d317 jmp prmsg |
|||
436 ; |
|||
437 setfunc: |
|||
438 ; set function for next i/o (command in reg-c) |
|||
439 17e0 216818 lxi h, iof ;io function address |
|||
440 17e3 7e mov a, m ;get it to accumulator for masking |
|||
441 17e4 e6f8 ani 11111000b ;remove previous command |
|||
442 17e6 b1 ora c ;set to new command |
|||
443 17e7 77 mov m, a ;replaced in iopb |
|||
444 ; the mds-800 controller requires disk bank bit in sector byte |
|||
445 ; mask the bit from the current i/o function |
|||
446 17e8 e620 ani 00100000b ;mask the disk select bit |
|||
447 17ea 216b18 lxi h, ios ;address the sector select byte |
|||
448 17ed b6 ora m ;select proper disk bank |
|||
449 17ee 77 mov m, a ;set disk select bit on/off |
|||
450 17ef c9 ret |
|||
451 ; |
|||
452 waitio: |
|||
453 17f0 0e0a mvi c, retry ;max retries before perm error |
|||
454 rewait: |
|||
455 ; start the i/o function and wait for completion |
|||
456 17f2 cd3f18 call intype ;in rtype |
|||
457 17f5 cd4c18 call inbyte ;clears the controller |
|||
458 ; |
|||
459 17f8 3a6618 lda dbank ;set bank flags |
|||
460 17fb b7 ora a ;zero if drive 0, 1 and nz if 2, 3 |
|||
461 17fc 3e67 mvi a, iopb and offh ;low address for iopb |
|||
462 17fe 0618 mvi b, iopb shr 8 ;high address for iopb |
|||
463 1800 c20b18 jnz iodr1 ;drive bank 1? |
|||
464 1803 d379 out ilow ;low address to controller |
|||
465 1805 78 mov a, b |
|||
466 1806 d37a out ihigh ;high address |
|||
467 1808 c31018 jmp waito ;to wait for complete |
|||
468 ; |
|||
469 iodr1: ;drive bank 1 |
|||
470 180b d389 out ilow+10h ;88 for drive bank 10 |
|||
471 180d 78 mov a, b |
|||
472 180e d38a out ihigh+10h |
|||
473 ; |
|||
474 1810 cd5918 waito: call instat ;wait for completion |
|||
475 1813 e604 ani iordy ;ready? |
|||
476 1815 ca1018 jz waito |
|||
477 ; |
|||
478 ; check io completion ok |
|||
479 1818 cd3f18 call intype ;must be io complete (00) unlinked |
|||
480 ; 00 unlinked i/o complete, 01 linked i/o complete (not used) |
|||
481 ; io disk status changed 11 (not used) |
|||
482 181b fe02 cpi 10b ;ready status change? |
|||
483 181d ca3218 jz wready |
|||
484 ; |
|||
485 ; must be 00 in the accumulator |
|||
486 1820 b7 ora a |
|||
487 1821 c23818 jnz werror ;some other condition, retry |
|||
488 ; |
|||
489 ; check i/o error bits |
|||
490 1824 cd4c18 call inbyte |
|||
491 1827 17 ral |
|||
492 1828 da3218 jc wready ;unit not ready |
|||
493 182b 1f rar |
|||
494 182c e6fe ani 11111110b ;any other errors? (deleted data ok) |
|||
495 182e c23818 jnz werror |
|||
496 ; |
|||
497 ; read or write is ok, accumulator contains zero |
|||
498 1831 c9 ret |
|||
499 ; |
|||
500 wready: ;not ready, treat as error for now |
|||
501 1832 cd4c18 call inbyte ;clear result byte |
|||
502 1835 c33818 jmp trycount |
|||
503 ; |
|||
504 werror: ;return hardware malfunction (crc, track, seek, etc.) |
|||
505 ; the mds controller has returned a bit in each position |
|||
506 ; of the accumulator, corresponding to the conditions: |
|||
507 ; 0 -deleted data (accepted as ok above) |
|||
508 ; 1 -crc error |
|||
509 ; 2 -seek error |
|||
510 ; 3 -address error (hardware malfunction) |
|||
511 ; 4 -data over/under flow (hardware malfunction) |
|||
512 ; 5 -write protect (treated as not ready) |
|||
513 ; 6 -write error (hardware malfunction) |
|||
514 ; j -not ready |
|||
515 ; (accumulator bits are numbered 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0) |
|||
516 ; |
|||
517 ; it may be useful to filter out the various conditions, |
|||
518 ; but we will get a permanent error message if it is not |
|||
519 ; recoverable. in any case, the not ready condition is |
|||
520 ; treated as a separated condition for later improvement |
|||
521 trycount: |
|||
522 ; register c contains retry count, decrement 'til zero |
|||
523 1838 0d dcr c |
|||
524 1839 c2f217 jnz rewait ;for another try |
|||
525 ; |
|||
526 ; cannot recover from error |
|||
527 183c 3e01 mvi a, 1 ;error code |
|||
528 183e c9 ret |
|||
529 ; |
|||
530 ; intype, inbyte, instat read drive bank 00 or 10 |
|||
531 183f 3a6618 intype: lda dbank |
|||
532 1842 b7 ora a |
|||
533 1843 c24918 jnz intyp1 ;skip to bank 10 |
|||
534 1846 db79 in rtype |
|||
535 1848 c9 ret |
|||
536 1849 db89 intyp1: in rtype+10h ;78 for 0, 1 88 for 2, 3 |
|||
537 184b c9 ret |
|||
538 ; |
|||
539 184c 3a6618 inbyte: lda dbank |
|||
540 184f b7 ora a |
|||
541 1850 c25618 jnz inbyt1 |
|||
542 1853 db7b in rbyte |
|||
543 1855 c9 ret |
|||
544 1856 db8b inbyt1: in rbyte+10h |
|||
545 1858 c9 ret |
|||
546 ; |
|||
547 1859 3a6618 instat: lda dbank |
|||
548 185c b7 ora a |
|||
549 185d c26318 jnz insta1 |
|||
550 1860 db78 in dstat |
|||
551 1862 c9 ret |
|||
552 1863 db88 insta1: in dstat+10h |
|||
553 1865 c9 ret |
|||
554 ; |
|||
555 ; |
|||
556 ; |
|||
557 ; data areas (must be in ram) |
|||
558 1866 00 dbank: db 0 ;disk bank 00 if drive 0, 1 |
|||
559 ; 10 if drive 2, 3 |
|||
560 iopb: ;io parameter block |
|||
561 1867 80 db 80h ;normal i/o operation |
|||
562 1868 04 iof: db readf ;io function, initial read |
|||
563 1869 01 ion: db 1 ;number of sectors to read |
|||
564 186a 02 iot: db offset ;track number |
|||
565 186b 01 ios: db 1 ;sector number |
|||
566 186c 8000 iod: dw buff ;io address |
|||
567 ; |
|||
568 ; |
|||
569 ; define ram areas for bdos operation |
|||
570 endef |
|||
571 186e+= begdat equ $ |
|||
572 186e+ dirbuf: ds 128 ;directory access buffer |
|||
573 18ee+ alv0: ds 31 |
|||
574 190d+ csv0: ds 16 |
|||
575 191d+ alv1: ds 31 |
|||
576 193c+ csv1: ds 16 |
|||
577 194c+ alv2: ds 31 |
|||
578 196b+ csv2: ds 16 |
|||
579 197b+ alv3: ds 31 |
|||
580 199a+ csv3: ds 16 |
|||
581 19aa+= enddat equ $ |
|||
582 013c+= datsiz equ $-begdat |
|||
583 19aa end |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
als1 001f 141# |
|||
als2 001f 146# |
|||
als3 001f 151# |
|||
alv0 18ee 87 573# |
|||
alv1 191d 91 575# |
|||
alv2 194c 95 577# |
|||
alv3 197b 99 579# |
|||
base 0078 180# 181 182 183 185 186 |
|||
bdos 0806 29# 287 |
|||
begdat 186e 571# 582 |
|||
bias 0000 19# 22# |
|||
boot 16b3 63 207# |
|||
booter0 1752 305 310# |
|||
booterr 1749 241 302# |
|||
bootmsg 175b 312 316# |
|||
buff 0080 34# 209 221 278 566 |
|||
cdisk 0004 33# 213 296 |
|||
ci f803 172# 325 |
|||
co f809 174# 330 |
|||
conin 1764 66 324# |
|||
conout 176a 67 329# 432 |
|||
const 1761 65 320# |
|||
cpmb 0000 28# 29 30 226 299 |
|||
cpml 1600 30# 31 |
|||
cr 000d 192# 196 205 |
|||
css1 0010 142# |
|||
css2 0010 147# |
|||
css3 0010 152# |
|||
csts f812 177# 322 |
|||
csv0 190d 87 574# |
|||
csv1 193c 91 576# |
|||
csv2 196b 95 578# |
|||
csv3 199a 99 580# |
|||
datsiz 013c 582# |
|||
dbank 1866 361 459 531 539 539 547 558# |
|||
dirbuf 186e 86 90 94 98 572# |
|||
dpb0 1673 86 101# 140 145 150 |
|||
dpb1 1673 90 140# |
|||
dpb2 1673 94 145# |
|||
dpb3 1673 98 150# |
|||
dpbase 1633 83# 380 |
|||
dpe0 1633 84# |
|||
dpe1 1643 88# |
|||
dpe2 1653 92# |
|||
dpe3 1663 96# |
|||
dstat 0078 181# 550 552 |
|||
enddat 19aa 581# |
|||
false 0000 15# 16 |
|||
gocpm 170f 214 265# |
|||
home 1778 71 349# |
|||
icon 00fe 166# 275 |
|||
ihigh 007a 186# 466 472 |
|||
ilow 0079 185# 464 470 |
|||
inbyt1 1856 541 544# |
|||
inbyte 184c 457 490 501 539# |
|||
insta1 1863 549 552# |
|||
instat 1859 474 547# |
|||
intc 00fc 165# 271 273 |
|||
inte 007e 167# 272 |
|||
intyp1 1849 533 536# |
|||
intype 183f 456 479 531# |
|||
iod 186c 242 407 566# |
|||
iodr1 180b 463 469# |
|||
iof 1868 369 439 562# |
|||
ion 1869 563# |
|||
iopb 1867 461 462 560# |
|||
iordy 0004 191# 475 |
|||
ios 186b 248 391 400 447 565# |
|||
iot 186a 252 386 564# |
|||
lf 000a 193# 196 196 205 |
|||
list 176d 68 332# |
|||
listst 1770 78 336# |
|||
lo f80f 176# 334 |
|||
mon80 f800 170# 291 |
|||
nsects 002c 31# 237 |
|||
offset 0002 32# 100 564 |
|||
patch 1600 25# 27 28 |
|||
po f80c 175# 343 |
|||
prmsg 17d3 211 313 425# 435 |
|||
punch 1772 69 341# |
|||
rbyte 007b 183# 542 544 |
|||
rd1 1705 250 257# |
|||
rdsec 16e1 238# 262 |
|||
read 17c1 76 240 410# |
|||
reader 1775 70 345# |
|||
readf 0004 188# 411 562 |
|||
recal 0003 190# |
|||
retry 000a 35# 223 453 |
|||
revrt 00fd 164# 269 |
|||
rewait 17f2 454# 524 |
|||
ri f806 173# 347 |
|||
rmon80 ff0f 171# 314 |
|||
rtype 0079 182# 534 536 |
|||
sectran 17b1 79 394# |
|||
seldsk 177d 72 229 354# |
|||
setdma 17bb 75 227 247 279 404# |
|||
setdrive 1792 365 367# |
|||
setfunc 17e0 412 419 437# |
|||
setsec 17ac 74 233 259 390# |
|||
settrk 17a7 73 231 255 352 385# |
|||
signon 169c 195# 210 |
|||
test 0000 16# 18 21 197 200 289 |
|||
true ffff 14# 15 |
|||
trycount 1838 502 521# |
|||
vers 0016 6# 204 204 |
|||
waito 1810 467 474# 476 |
|||
waitio 17f0 413 420 452# |
|||
wboot 16c3 64 217# |
|||
wboot0 16c9 225# 308 |
|||
wboote 1603 64# 284 |
|||
werror 1838 487 495 504# |
|||
wready 1832 483 492 500# |
|||
write 17ca 77 417# |
|||
writf 0006 189# 418 |
|||
xlt0 1682 84 112# 143 148 153 |
|||
xlt1 1682 88 143# |
|||
xlt2 1682 92 148# |
|||
xlt3 1682 96 153# |
|||
.nx appb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,371 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft B-% |
|||
Appendix B |
|||
|
|||
A Skeletal CBIOS |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 ; skeletal cbios for first level of cp/m 2.0 alteration |
|||
2 ; |
|||
3 0014 = msize equ 20 ;cp/m version memory size in kilobytes |
|||
4 ; |
|||
5 ; "bias" is address offset from 3400h for memory systems |
|||
6 ; than 16k (referred to as "b" throughout the text) |
|||
7 ; |
|||
8 0000 = bias equ (msize-20)*1024 |
|||
9 3400 = ccp equ 3400h+bias ;base of ccp |
|||
10 3c06 = bdos equ ccp+806h ;base of bdos |
|||
11 4a00 = bios equ ccp+1600h ;base of bios |
|||
12 0004 = cdisk equ 0004h ;current disk number 0=a,..., 15=p |
|||
13 0003 = iobyte equ 0003h ;intel i/o byte |
|||
14 ; |
|||
15 4a00 org bios ;origin of this program |
|||
16 002c = nsects equ ($-ccp)/128 ;warm start sector count |
|||
17 ; |
|||
18 ; jump vector for individual subroutines |
|||
19 4a00 c39c4a jmp boot ;cold start |
|||
20 4a03 c3a64a wboote: jmp wboot ;warm start |
|||
21 4a06 c3114b jmp const ;console status |
|||
22 4a09 c3244b jmp conin ;console character in |
|||
23 4a0c c3374b jmp conout ;console character out |
|||
24 4a0f c3494b jmp list ;list character out |
|||
25 4a12 c34d4b jmp punch ;punch character out |
|||
26 4a15 c34f4b jmp reader ;reader character out |
|||
27 4a18 c3544b jmp home ;move head to home position |
|||
28 4a1b c35a4b jmp seldsk ;select disk |
|||
29 4a1e c37d4b jmp settrk ;set track number |
|||
30 4a21 c3924b jmp setsec ;set sector number |
|||
31 4a24 c3ad4b jmp setdma ;set dma address |
|||
32 4a27 c3c34b jmp read ;read disk |
|||
33 4a2a c3d64b jmp write ;write disk |
|||
34 4a2d c34b4b jmp listst ;return list status |
|||
35 4a30 c3a74b jmp sectran ;sector translate |
|||
36 ; |
|||
37 ; fixed data tables for four-drive standard |
|||
38 ; ibm-compatible 8" disks |
|||
39 ; disk parameter header for disk 00 |
|||
40 4a33 734a0000 dpbase: dw trans, 0000h |
|||
41 4a37 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
42 4a3b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
43 4a3f ec4d704d dw chk00, all00 |
|||
44 ; disk parameter header for disk 01 |
|||
45 4a43 734a0000 dw trans, 0000h |
|||
46 4a47 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
47 4a4b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
48 4a4f fc4d8f4d dw chk01, all01 |
|||
49 ; disk parameter header for disk 02 |
|||
50 4a53 734a0000 dw trans, 0000h |
|||
51 4a57 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
52 4a5b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
53 4a5f 0c4eae4d dw chk02, all02 |
|||
54 ; disk parameter header for disk 03 |
|||
55 4a63 734a0000 dw trans, 0000h |
|||
56 4a67 00000000 dw 0000h, 0000h |
|||
57 4a6b f04c8d4a dw dirbf, dpblk |
|||
58 4a6f 1c4ecd4d dw chk03, all03 |
|||
59 ; |
|||
60 ; sector translate vector |
|||
61 4a73 01070d13 trans: db 1, 7, 13, 19 ;sectors 1, 2, 3, 4 |
|||
62 4a77 19050b11 db 25, 5, 11, 17 ;sectors 5, 6, 7, 8 |
|||
63 4a7b 1703090f db 23, 3, 9, 15 ;sectors 9, 10, 11, 12 |
|||
64 4a7f 1502080e db 21, 2, 8, 14 ;sectors 13, 14, 15, 16 |
|||
65 4a83 141a060c db 20, 26, 6, 12 ;sectors 17, 18, 19, 20 |
|||
66 4a87 1218040a db 18, 24, 4, 10 ;sectors 21, 22, 23, 24 |
|||
67 4a8b 1016 db 16, 22 ;sectors 25, 26 |
|||
68 ; |
|||
69 dpblk: ;disk parameter block, common to all disks |
|||
70 4a8d 1a00 dw 26 ;sectors per track |
|||
71 4a8f 03 db 3 ;block shift factor |
|||
72 4a90 07 db 7 ;block mask |
|||
73 4a91 00 db 0 ;null mask |
|||
74 4a92 f200 dw 242 ;disk size-1 |
|||
75 4a94 3f00 dw 63 ;directory max |
|||
76 4a96 c0 db 192 ;alloc 0 |
|||
77 4a97 00 db 0 ;alloc 1 |
|||
78 4a98 1000 dw 16 ;check size |
|||
79 4a9a 0200 dw 2 ;track offset |
|||
80 ; |
|||
81 ; end of fixed tables |
|||
82 ; |
|||
83 ; individual subroutines to perform each function |
|||
84 boot: ;simplest case is to just perform parameter initialization |
|||
85 4a9c af xra a ;zero in the accum |
|||
86 4a9d 320300 sta iobyte ;clear the iobyte |
|||
87 4aa0 320400 sta cdisk ;select disk zero |
|||
88 4aa3 c3ef4a jmp gocpm ;initialize and go to cp/m |
|||
89 ; |
|||
90 wboot: ;simplest case is to read the disk until all sectors loaded |
|||
91 4aa6 318000 lxi sp, 80h ;use space below buffer for stack |
|||
92 4aa9 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;select disk 0 |
|||
93 4aab cd5a4b call seldsk |
|||
94 4aae cd544b call home ;go to track 00 |
|||
95 ; |
|||
96 4ab1 062c mvi b, nsects ;b counts # of sectors to load |
|||
97 4ab3 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;c has the current track number |
|||
98 4ab5 1602 mvi d, 2 ;d has the next sector to read |
|||
99 ; note that we begin by reading track 0, sector 2 since sector 1 |
|||
100 ; contains the cold start loader, which is skipped in a warm start |
|||
101 4ab7 210034 lxi h, ccp ;base of cp/m (initial load point) |
|||
102 load1: ;load one more sector |
|||
103 4aba c5 push b ;save sector count, current track |
|||
104 4abb d5 push d ;save next sector to read |
|||
105 4abc e5 push h ;save dma address |
|||
106 4abd 4a mov c, d ;get sector address to register c |
|||
107 4abe cd924b call setsec ;set sector address from register c |
|||
108 4ac1 c1 pop b ;recall dma address to b, c |
|||
109 4ac2 c5 push b ;replace on stack for later recall |
|||
110 4ac3 cdad4b call setdma ;set dma address from b, c |
|||
111 ; |
|||
112 ; drive set to 0, track set, sector set, dma address set |
|||
113 4ac6 cdc34b call read |
|||
114 4ac9 fe00 cpi 00h ;any errors? |
|||
115 4acb c2a64a jnz wboot ;retry the entire boot if an error occurs |
|||
116 ; |
|||
117 ; no error, move to next sector |
|||
118 4ace e1 pop h ;recall dma address |
|||
119 4acf 118000 lxi d, 128 ;dma=dma+128 |
|||
120 4ad2 19 dad d ;new dma address is in h, l |
|||
121 4ad3 d1 pop d ;recall sector address |
|||
122 4ad4 c1 pop b ;recall number of sectors remaining, and current trk |
|||
123 4ad5 05 dcr b ;sectors=sectors-1 |
|||
124 4ad6 caef4a jz gocpm ;transfer to cp/m if all have been loaded |
|||
125 ; |
|||
126 ; more sectors remain to load, check for track change |
|||
127 4ad9 14 inr d |
|||
128 4ada 7a mov a,d ;sector=27?, if so, change tracks |
|||
129 4adb fe1b cpi 27 |
|||
130 4add daba4a jc load1 ;carry generated if sector<27 |
|||
131 ; |
|||
132 ; end of current track, go to next track |
|||
133 4ae0 1601 mvi d, 1 ;begin with first sector of next track |
|||
134 4ae2 0c inr c ;track=track+1 |
|||
135 ; |
|||
136 ; save register state, and change tracks |
|||
137 4ae3 c5 push b |
|||
138 4ae4 d5 push d |
|||
139 4ae5 e5 push h |
|||
140 4ae6 cd7d4b call settrk ;track address set from register c |
|||
141 4ae9 e1 pop h |
|||
142 4aea d1 pop d |
|||
143 4aeb c1 pop b |
|||
144 4aec c3ba4a jmp load1 ;for another sector |
|||
145 ; |
|||
146 ; end of load operation, set parameters and go to cp/m |
|||
147 gocpm: |
|||
148 4aef 3ec3 mvi a, 0c3h ;c3 is a jmp instruction |
|||
149 4af1 320000 sta 0 ;for jmp to wboot |
|||
150 4af4 21034a lxi h, wboote ;wboot entry point |
|||
151 4af7 220100 shld 1 ;set address field for jmp at 0 |
|||
152 ; |
|||
153 4afa 320500 sta 5 ;for jmp to bdos |
|||
154 4afd 21063c lxi h, bdos ;bdos entry point |
|||
155 4b00 220600 shld 6 ;address field of jump at 5 to bdos |
|||
156 ; |
|||
157 4b03 018000 lxi b, 80h ;default dma address is 80h |
|||
158 4b06 cdad4b call setdma |
|||
159 ; |
|||
160 4b09 fb ei ;enable the interrupt system |
|||
161 4b0a 3a0400 lda cdisk ;get current disk number |
|||
162 4b0d 4f mov c, a ;send to the ccp |
|||
163 4b0e c30034 jmp ccp ;go to cp/m for further processing |
|||
164 ; |
|||
165 ; |
|||
166 ; simple i/o handlers (must be filled in by user) |
|||
167 ; in each case, the entry point is provided, with space reserved |
|||
168 ; to insert your own code |
|||
169 ; |
|||
170 const: ;console status, return 0ffh if character ready, 00h if not |
|||
171 4b11 ds 10h ;space for status subroutine |
|||
172 4b21 3e00 mvi a, 00h |
|||
173 4b23 c9 ret |
|||
174 ; |
|||
175 conin: ;console character into register a |
|||
176 4b24 ds 10h ;space for input routine |
|||
177 4b34 e67f ani 7fh ;strip parity bit |
|||
178 4b36 c9 ret |
|||
179 ; |
|||
180 conout: ;console character output from register c |
|||
181 4b37 79 mov a, c ;get to accumulator |
|||
182 4b38 ds 10h ;space for output routine |
|||
183 4b48 c9 ret |
|||
184 ; |
|||
185 list: ;list character from register c |
|||
186 4b49 79 mov a, c ;character to register a |
|||
187 4b4a c9 ret ;null subroutine |
|||
188 ; |
|||
189 listst: ;return list status (0 if not ready, 1 if ready) |
|||
190 4b4b af xra a ;0 is always ok to return |
|||
191 4b4c c9 ret |
|||
192 ; |
|||
193 punch: ;punch character from register c |
|||
194 4b4d 79 mov a, c ;character to register a |
|||
195 4b4e c9 ret ;null subroutine |
|||
196 ; |
|||
197 ; |
|||
198 reader: ;reader character into register a from reader device |
|||
199 4b4f 3e1a mvi a, 1ah ;enter end of file for now (replace later) |
|||
200 4b51 e67f ani 7fh ;remember to strip parity bit |
|||
201 4b53 c9 ret |
|||
202 ; |
|||
203 ; |
|||
204 ; i/o drivers for the disk follow |
|||
205 ; for now, we will simply store the parameters away for use |
|||
206 ; in the read and write subroutines |
|||
207 ; |
|||
208 home: ;move to the track 00 position of current drive |
|||
209 ; translate this call into a settrk call with parameter 00 |
|||
210 4b54 0e00 mvi c, 0 ;select track 0 |
|||
211 4b56 cd7d4b call settrk |
|||
212 4b59 c9 ret ;we will move to 00 on first read/write |
|||
213 ; |
|||
214 seldsk: ;select disk given by register c |
|||
215 4b51 210000 lxi h, 0000h ;error return code |
|||
216 4b5d 79 mov a, c |
|||
217 4b5e 32ef4c sta diskno |
|||
218 4b61 fe04 cpi 4 ;must be between 0 and 3 |
|||
219 4b63 d0 rnc ;no carry if 4, 5,... |
|||
220 ; disk number is in the proper range |
|||
221 4b64 ds 10 ;space for disk select |
|||
222 ; compute proper disk parameter header address |
|||
223 4b6e 3aef4c lda diskno |
|||
224 4b71 6f mov l, a ;l=disk number 0, 1, 2, 3 |
|||
225 4b72 2600 mvi h, 0 ;high order zero |
|||
226 4b74 29 dad h ;*2 |
|||
227 4b75 29 dad h ;*4 |
|||
228 4b76 29 dad h ;*8 |
|||
229 4b77 29 dad h ;*16 (size of each header) |
|||
230 4b78 11334a lxi d, dpbase |
|||
231 4b7b 19 dad 0 ;hl=.dpbase (diskno*16) |
|||
232 4b7c c9 ret |
|||
233 ; |
|||
234 settrk: ;set track given by register c |
|||
235 4b7d 79 mov a, c |
|||
236 4b7e 32e94c sta track |
|||
237 4b81 ds 10h ;space for track select |
|||
238 4b91 c9 ret |
|||
239 ; |
|||
240 setsec: ;set sector given by register c |
|||
241 4b92 79 mov a, c |
|||
242 4b93 32eb4c sta sector |
|||
243 4b96 ds 10h ;space for sector select |
|||
244 4ba6 c9 ret |
|||
245 ; |
|||
246 sectran: |
|||
247 ;translate the sector given by bc using the |
|||
248 ;translate table given by de |
|||
249 4ba7 eb xchg ;hl=.trans |
|||
250 4ba8 09 dad b ;hl=.trans (sector) |
|||
251 4ba9 6e mov l, m ;l=trans (sector) |
|||
252 4baa 2600 mvi h, 0 ;hl=trans (sector) |
|||
253 4bac c9 ret ;with value in hl |
|||
254 ; |
|||
255 setdma: ;set dma address given by registers b and c |
|||
256 4bad 69 mov l, c ;low order address |
|||
257 4bae 60 mov h, b ;high order address |
|||
258 4baf 22ed4c shld dmaad ;save the address |
|||
259 4bb2 ds 10h ;space for setting the dma address |
|||
260 4bc2 c9 ret |
|||
261 ; |
|||
262 read: ;perform read operation (usually this is similar to write |
|||
263 ; so we will allow space to set up read command, then use |
|||
264 ; common code in write) |
|||
265 4bc3 ds 10h ;set up read command |
|||
266 4bd3 c3e64b jmp waitio ;to perform the actual i/o |
|||
267 ; |
|||
268 write: ;perform a write operation |
|||
269 4bd6 ds 10h ;set up write command |
|||
270 ; |
|||
271 waitio: ;enter here from read and write to perform the actual i/o |
|||
272 ; operation. return a 00h in register a if the operation completes |
|||
273 ; properly, and 01h if an error occurs during the read or write |
|||
274 ; |
|||
275 ; in this case, we have saved the disk number in 'diskno' (0, 1) |
|||
276 ; the track number in 'track' (0-76) |
|||
277 ; the sector number in 'sector' (1-26) |
|||
278 ; the dma address in 'dmaad' (0-65535) |
|||
279 4be6 ds 256 ;space reserved for i/o drivers |
|||
280 4ce6 3e01 mvi a, 1 ;error condition |
|||
281 4ce8 c9 ret ;replaced when filled-in |
|||
282 ; |
|||
283 ; the remainder of the cbios is reserved uninitialized |
|||
284 ; data area, and does not need to be a part of the |
|||
285 ; system memory image (the space must be available, |
|||
286 ; however, between "begdat" and "enddat"). |
|||
287 ; |
|||
288 4ce9 track: ds 2 ;two bytes for expansion |
|||
289 4ceb sector: ds 2 ;two bytes for expansion |
|||
290 4ced dmaad: ds 2 ;direct memory address |
|||
291 4cef diskno: ds 1 ;disk number 0-15 |
|||
292 ; |
|||
293 ; scratch ram area for bdos use |
|||
294 4cf0= begdat equ $ ;beginning of data area |
|||
295 4cf0 dirfb: ds 128 ;scratch directory area |
|||
296 4d70 all00: ds 31 ;allocation vector 0 |
|||
297 4d8f all01: ds 31 ;allocation vector 1 |
|||
298 4dae all02: ds 31 ;allocation vector 2 |
|||
299 4dcd all03: ds 31 ;allocation vector 3 |
|||
300 4dec chk00: ds 16 ;check vector 0 |
|||
301 4dfc chk01: ds 16 ;check vector 1 |
|||
302 4e0c chk02: ds 16 ;check vector 2 |
|||
303 4e1c chk03: ds 16 ;check vector 3 |
|||
304 ; |
|||
305 4e2c enddat equ $ ;end of data area |
|||
306 013c= datsiz equ $-begdat; ;size of data area |
|||
307 4e2c end |
|||
|
|||
all00 4d70 43 296# |
|||
all01 4d8f 48 297# |
|||
all02 4dae 53 298# |
|||
all03 4dcd 58 299# |
|||
bdos 3c06 10# 154 |
|||
begdat 4cf0 294# 306 |
|||
bias 0000 8# 9 |
|||
bios 4a00 11# 15 |
|||
boot 4a9c 19 84# |
|||
ccp 3400 9# 10 11 16 101 163 |
|||
cdisk 0004 12# 87 161 |
|||
chk00 4dec 43 300# |
|||
chk01 4dfc 48 301# |
|||
chk02 4e0c 53 302# |
|||
chk03 4e1c 58 303# |
|||
conin 4b24 22 175# |
|||
conout 4b37 23 180# |
|||
const 4b11 21 170# |
|||
datsiz 013c 306# |
|||
dirbf 4cf0 42 47 52 57 295# |
|||
diskno 4cef 217 223 291# |
|||
dmaad 4ced 258 290# |
|||
dpbase 4a33 40# 230 |
|||
dpblk 4a8d 42 47 52 57 69# |
|||
enddat 4e2c 305# |
|||
gocpm 4aef 88 124 147# |
|||
home 4b54 27 94 208# |
|||
iobyte 0003 13# 86 |
|||
list 4b49 24 185# |
|||
listst 4b4b 34 189# |
|||
load1 4aba 102# 130 144 |
|||
msize 0014 3# 8 |
|||
nsects 002c 16# 96 |
|||
punch 4b4d 25 193# |
|||
read 4bc3 32 113 262# |
|||
reader 4b4f 26 198# |
|||
sector 4ceb 242 289# |
|||
sectran 4ba7 35 246# |
|||
seldsk 4b5a 28 93 214# |
|||
setdma 4bad 31 110 158 255# |
|||
setsec 4b92 30 107 240# |
|||
settrk 4b7d 29 140 211 234# |
|||
track 4ce9 236 288# |
|||
trans 4a73 40 45 50 55 61# |
|||
waitio 4be6 266 271# |
|||
wboot 4aa6 20 90# 115 |
|||
wboote 4a03 20# 150 |
|||
write 4bd6 33 268# |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.nx appc |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft C-% |
|||
Appendix C |
|||
|
|||
A Skeletal GETSYS/PUTSYS Program |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
; combined getsys and putsys programs from |
|||
; Sec 6.4 |
|||
; Start the programs at the base of the TPA |
|||
|
|||
0100 org 0100h |
|||
|
|||
0014 = msize equ 20 ;size of cp/m in Kbytes |
|||
|
|||
;"bias" is the amount to add to addresses for > 20k |
|||
; (referred to as "b" throughout the text) |
|||
|
|||
0000 = bias equ (msize-20)*1024 |
|||
3400 = ccp equ 3400h+bias |
|||
3c00 = bdos equ ccp+0800h |
|||
4a00 = bios equ ccp+1600h |
|||
|
|||
; getsys programs tracks 0 and 1 to memory at |
|||
; 3880h + bias |
|||
|
|||
; register usage |
|||
; a (scratch register) |
|||
; b track count (0...76) |
|||
; c sector count (1...26) |
|||
; d,e (scratch register pair) |
|||
; h,l load address |
|||
; sp set to track address |
|||
|
|||
gstart: ;start of getsys |
|||
0100 318033 lxi sp,ccp-0080h ;convenient place |
|||
0103 218033 lxi h,ccp-0080h ;set initial load |
|||
0106 0600 mvi b 0 ;start with track |
|||
rd$trk: ;read next track |
|||
0108 0e01 mvi c,1 ;each track start |
|||
rd$sec: |
|||
010a cd0003 call read$sec ;get the next sector |
|||
010d 118000 lxi d,128 ;offset by one sector |
|||
0110 19 dad d ; (hl=hl+128) |
|||
0111 0c inr c ;next sector |
|||
0112 79 mov a,c ;fetch sector number |
|||
0113 felb cpi 27 ;and see if last |
|||
0115 da0a01 jc rdsec ;<, do one more |
|||
|
|||
;arrive here at end of track, move to next track |
|||
|
|||
0118 04 inr b ;track = track+1 |
|||
0119 78 mov a,b ;check for last |
|||
011a fe02 cpi 2 ;track = 2 ? |
|||
011c da0801 jc rd$trk ;<, do another |
|||
|
|||
;arrive here at end of load, halt for lack of anything |
|||
;better |
|||
|
|||
011f fb ei |
|||
0120 76 hlt |
|||
; putsys program, places memory image |
|||
; starting at |
|||
; 3880h + bias back to tracks 0 and 1 |
|||
; start this program at the next page boundary |
|||
0200 org ($+0100h) and 0ff00h |
|||
|
|||
put$sys: |
|||
0200 318033 lxi sp,ccp-0080h ;convenient place |
|||
0203 218033 lxi h,ccp-0080h ;start of dump |
|||
0206 0600 mvi b,0 ;start with track |
|||
wr$trk: |
|||
0208 0e01 mvi b,1 ;start with sector |
|||
wr$sec: |
|||
020a cd0004 call write$sec ;write one sector |
|||
020d 118000 lxi d,128 ;length of each |
|||
0210 19 dad d ;<hl>=<hl> + 128 |
|||
0211 0c inr c ; <c>=<c> + 1 |
|||
0212 79 mov a,c ;see if |
|||
0213 felb cpi 27 ;past end of track |
|||
0215 da0a02 jc wr$sec ;no, do another |
|||
|
|||
;arrive here at end of track, move to next track |
|||
|
|||
0218 04 inr b ;track = track+1 |
|||
0219 78 mov a,b ;see if |
|||
021a fe02 cpi 2 ;last track |
|||
021c da0802 jc wr$trk ;no, do another |
|||
|
|||
; done with putsys, halt for lack of anything |
|||
; better |
|||
|
|||
02lf fb ei |
|||
0220 76 hit |
|||
|
|||
;user supplied subroutines for sector read and write |
|||
|
|||
; move to next page boundary |
|||
|
|||
0300 org ($+0100h) and 0ff00h |
|||
|
|||
read$sec: |
|||
;read the next sector |
|||
;track in <b>, |
|||
;sector in <c> |
|||
;dmaaddr in <hl> |
|||
|
|||
0300 c5 push b |
|||
0301 e5 push h |
|||
|
|||
;user defined read operation goes here |
|||
0302 ds 64 |
|||
|
|||
0342 el pop h |
|||
0343 cl pop b |
|||
0344 c9 ret |
|||
|
|||
0400 org ($+0100h) and 0ff00h ;another page |
|||
;boundary |
|||
|
|||
write$sec: |
|||
|
|||
;same parameters as read$sec |
|||
|
|||
0400 c5 push b |
|||
0401 e5 push h |
|||
|
|||
;user defined write operation goes here |
|||
0402 ds 64 |
|||
|
|||
0442 el pop h |
|||
0443 cl pop b |
|||
0444 c9 ret |
|||
|
|||
;end of getsys/putsys program |
|||
|
|||
0445 end |
|||
|
|||
.nx appd |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft D-% |
|||
Appendix D |
|||
|
|||
The Microcomputer Development System-800 Cold Start Loader for CP/M 2 |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 title mds cold start loader at 3000h' |
|||
2 ; |
|||
3 ; mds-800 cold start loader for cp/m 2.0 |
|||
4 ; |
|||
5 ; version 2.0 august, 1979 |
|||
6 ; |
|||
7 0000 = false equ 0 |
|||
8 ffff true equ not false |
|||
9 0000 = testing equ false if true, then go to mon80 on errors |
|||
10 ; |
|||
11 if testing |
|||
12 bias equ 03400h |
|||
13 endif |
|||
14 if not testing |
|||
15 0000 = bias equ 0000h |
|||
16 endif |
|||
17 0000 = cpmb equ bias ;base of dos load |
|||
18 0806 = bdos equ 806h+bias ;entry to dos for calls |
|||
19 1880 = bdose equ 1880h+bias ;end of dos load |
|||
20 1600 = boot equ 1600h+bias ;cold start entry point |
|||
21 1603 = rboot equ boot+3 ;warm start entry point |
|||
22 ; |
|||
23 3000 org 03000h ;loaded down from hardware boot at 3000H |
|||
24 ; |
|||
25 1880 = bdosl equ bdose-cpmb |
|||
26 0002 = ntrks equ 2 ;number of tracks to read |
|||
27 0031 = bdoss equ bdosl/128 ;number of sectors in dos |
|||
28 0019 = bdoso equ 25 ;number of bdos sectors on track 0 |
|||
29 0018 = bdos1 equ bdoss-bdoso ;number of sectors on track 1 |
|||
30 ; |
|||
31 f800 = mon80 equ 0f800h ;intel monitor base |
|||
32 ff0f = rmon80 equ 0ff0fh ;restart location for mon80 |
|||
33 0078 = base equ 078h ;'base' used by controller |
|||
34 0079 = rtype equ base+1 ;result type |
|||
35 007b = rbyte equ base+3 ;result byte |
|||
36 007f = reset equ base+7 ;reset controller |
|||
37 ; |
|||
38 0078 = dstat equ base ;disk status port |
|||
39 0079 = ilow equ base+1 ;low iopb address |
|||
40 007a = ihigh equ base+2 ;high iopb address |
|||
41 00ff = bsw equ 0ffh ;boot switch |
|||
42 0003 = recal equ 3h ;recalibrate selected drive |
|||
43 0004 = readf equ 4h ;disk read function |
|||
44 0100 = stack equ 100h ;use end of boot for stack |
|||
45 ; |
|||
46 rstart: |
|||
47 3000 310001 lxi sp,stack; ;in case of call to mon80 |
|||
48 ; clear disk status |
|||
49 3003 db79 in rtype |
|||
50 3005 db7b in rbyte |
|||
51 ; check if boot switch if off |
|||
52 coldstart: |
|||
53 3007 dbff in bsw |
|||
54 3009 e602 ani 02h ;switch on? |
|||
55 300b c20730 jnz coldstart |
|||
56 ; clear the controller |
|||
57 300e d37f out reset ;logic cleared |
|||
58 ; |
|||
59 ; |
|||
60 3010 0602 mvi b,ntrks ;number of tracks to read |
|||
61 3012 214230 lxi h,iopbo |
|||
62 ; |
|||
63 start: |
|||
64 ; |
|||
65 ; read first/next track into cpmb |
|||
66 3015 7d mov a,l |
|||
67 3016 d379 out ilow |
|||
68 3018 7c mov a,h |
|||
69 3019 d37a out ihigh |
|||
70 301b db78 waito: in dstat |
|||
71 301d e604 ani 4 |
|||
72 301f ca1b30 jz waito |
|||
73 ; |
|||
74 ; check disk status |
|||
75 3022 db79 in rtype |
|||
76 3024 e603 ani 11b |
|||
77 3026 fe02 cpi 2 |
|||
78 ; |
|||
79 if testing |
|||
80 cnc rmon80 ;go to monitor if 11 or 10 |
|||
81 endif |
|||
82 if not testing |
|||
83 3028 d20030 jnc rstart ;retry the load |
|||
84 endif |
|||
85 ; |
|||
86 302b db7b in rbyte ;i/o complete, check status |
|||
87 ; if not ready, then go to mon80 |
|||
88 302d 17 ral |
|||
89 302e dc0fff cc rmon80 ;not ready bit set |
|||
90 3031 1f rar ;restore |
|||
91 3032 e61e ani 11110b ;overrun/addr err/seek/crc/xxxx |
|||
92 ; |
|||
93 if testing |
|||
94 cnz rmon80 ;go to monitor |
|||
95 endif |
|||
96 if not testing |
|||
97 3034 c20030 jnz rstart ;retry the load |
|||
98 endif |
|||
99 ; |
|||
100 ; |
|||
101 3037 110700 lxi d,iopbl ;length of iopb |
|||
102 303a 19 dad d ;addressing next iopb |
|||
103 303b 05 dcr b ;count down tracks |
|||
104 303c c21530 jnz start |
|||
105 ; |
|||
106 ; |
|||
107 ; jmp to boot to print initial message, and set up jmps |
|||
108 303f c30016 jmp boot |
|||
109 ; |
|||
110 ; parameter blocks |
|||
111 3042 80 iopbo: db 80h ;iocw, no update |
|||
112 3043 04 db readf ;read function |
|||
113 3044 19 db bdoso ;#sectors to read on track 0 |
|||
114 3045 00 db 0 ;track 0 |
|||
115 3046 02 db 2 ;start with sector 2 on track 0 |
|||
116 3047 0000 dw cpmb ;start at base of bdos |
|||
117 0007 = iopbl equ $-iopbo |
|||
118 ; |
|||
119 3049 80 iopb1: db 80h |
|||
120 304a 04 db readf |
|||
121 304b 18 db bdos1 ;sectors to read on track 1 |
|||
122 304c 01 db 1 ;track 1 |
|||
123 304d 01 db 1 ;sector 1 |
|||
124 304e 800c dw cmpb+bdos0*128;base of second read |
|||
125 ; |
|||
126 3050 end |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
base 0078 33# 34 35 36 38 39 40 |
|||
bdos 0806 18# |
|||
bdoso 0019 28# 29 113 124 |
|||
bdos1 0018 29# 121 |
|||
bdose 1880 19# 25 |
|||
bdosl 1880 25# 27 |
|||
bdoss 0031 27# 29 |
|||
bias 0000 12# 15# 17 18 19 20 |
|||
boot 1600 20# 21 108 |
|||
bsw 00ff 41# 53 |
|||
coldstart 3007 52# 55 |
|||
cpmb 0000 17# 25 116 124 |
|||
dstat 0078 38# 70 |
|||
false 0000 7# 8 9 |
|||
ihigh 007a 40# 69 |
|||
ilow 0079 39# 67 |
|||
iopbo 3042 61 111# 117 |
|||
iopb1 3049 119# |
|||
iopbl 0007 101 117# |
|||
mon80 f800 31# |
|||
ntrks 0002 26# 60 |
|||
rboot 1603 21# |
|||
rbyte 007b 35# 50 86 |
|||
readf 0004 43# 112 120 |
|||
recal 0003 42# |
|||
reset 007f 36# 57 |
|||
rmon80 ff0f 32# 80 89 94 |
|||
rstart 3000 46# 83 97 |
|||
rtype 0079 34# 49 75 |
|||
stack 0100 44# 47 |
|||
start 3015 63# 104 |
|||
testing 0000 9# 11 14 79 82 93 96 |
|||
true ffff 8# |
|||
waito 301b 70# 72 |
|||
|
|||
.nx appe |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft E-% |
|||
Appendix E |
|||
|
|||
A Skeletal Cold Start Loader |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
;this is a sample cold start loader, which, when |
|||
;modified |
|||
;resides on track 00, sector 01 (the first sector on the |
|||
;diskette). we assume that the controller has loaded |
|||
;this sector into memory upon system start-up (this |
|||
;program can be keyed-in, or can exist in read-only |
|||
;memory |
|||
;beyond the address space of the cp/m version you are |
|||
;running). the cold start loader brings the cp/m system |
|||
;into memory at "loadp" (3400h + "bias"). in a 20k |
|||
;memory system, the value of "bias" is 000h, with |
|||
;large |
|||
;values for increased memory sizes (see section 2). |
|||
;after |
|||
;loading the cp/m system, the cold start loader |
|||
;branches |
|||
;to the "boot" entry point of the bios, which beings at |
|||
;"bios" + "bias". the cold start loader is not used un- |
|||
;til the system is powered up again, as long as the bios |
|||
;is not overwritten. the origin is assumed at 0000h, and |
|||
;must be changed if the controller brings the cold start |
|||
;loader into another area, or if a read-only memory |
|||
;area |
|||
;is used. |
|||
|
|||
0000 org 0 ;base of ram in |
|||
;cp/m |
|||
|
|||
0014 = msize equ 20 ;min mem size in |
|||
;kbytes |
|||
0000 = bias equ (msize-20)*1024 ;offset from 20k |
|||
;system |
|||
3400 = ccp equ 3400h+bias ;base of the ccp |
|||
4a00 = bios equ ccp+1600h ;base of the bios |
|||
0300 = biosl equ 0300h ;length of the bios |
|||
4a00 = boot equ bios |
|||
1900 = size equ bios+biosl-ccp ;size of cp/m |
|||
;system |
|||
0032 = sects equ size/128 ;# of sectors to load |
|||
|
|||
; begin the load operation |
|||
|
|||
cold: |
|||
0000 010200 lxi b,2 ;b=0, c=sector 2 |
|||
0003 1632 mvi d,sects ;d=# sectors to |
|||
;load |
|||
0005 210034 lxi h,ccp ;base transfer |
|||
;address |
|||
lsect: ;load the next sector |
|||
|
|||
; insert inline code at this point to |
|||
; read one 128 byte sector from the |
|||
; track given in register b, sector |
|||
; given in register c, |
|||
; into the address given by <hl> |
|||
;branch to location "cold" if a read error occurs |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
; user supplied read operation goes |
|||
; here... |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
|
|||
0008 c36b00 jmp past$patch ;remove this |
|||
;when patched |
|||
000b ds 60h |
|||
|
|||
past$patch: |
|||
;go to next sector if load is incomplete |
|||
006b 15 dcr d ;sects=sects-1 |
|||
006c ca004a jz boot ;head for the bios |
|||
|
|||
; more sectors to load |
|||
; |
|||
;we aren't using a stack, so use <sp> as scratch |
|||
;register |
|||
; to hold the load address increment |
|||
|
|||
006f 318000 lxi sp,128 ;128 bytes per |
|||
;sector |
|||
0072 39 dad sp ;<hl> = <hl> + |
|||
128 |
|||
0073 0c inr c ;sector=sector + 1 |
|||
0074 79 mov a,c |
|||
0075 felb cpi 27 ;last sector of |
|||
;track? |
|||
0077 da0800 jc lsect ;no, go read |
|||
;another |
|||
|
|||
;end of track, increment to next track |
|||
|
|||
007a 0e01 mvi c,l ;sector = 1 |
|||
007c 04 inr b ;track = track + 1 |
|||
007d c30800 jmp lsect ;for another group |
|||
0080 end ;of boot loader |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.nx appf |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,263 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft F-% |
|||
Appendix F |
|||
|
|||
CP/M Disk Definition Library |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1:; CP/M 2.0 disk re-definition library |
|||
2:; |
|||
3:; Copyright (c) 1979 |
|||
4:; Digital Research |
|||
5:; Box 579 |
|||
6:; Pacific Grove, CA |
|||
7:; 93950 |
|||
8:; |
|||
9:; CP/M logical disk drives are defined using the |
|||
10:; macros given below, where the sequence of calls |
|||
11:; is: |
|||
12:; |
|||
13:; disks n |
|||
14:; diskdef parameter-list-0 |
|||
15:; diskdef parameter-list-1 |
|||
16:; ... |
|||
17:; diskdef parameter-list-n |
|||
18:; endef |
|||
19:; |
|||
20:; where n is the number of logical disk drives attached |
|||
21:; to the CP/M system, and parameter-list-i defines the |
|||
22:; characteristics of the ith drive (i=0,1,...,n-1) |
|||
23:; |
|||
24:; each parameter-list-i takes the form |
|||
25:; dn,fsc,lsc,[skf],bls,dks,dir,cks,ofs,[0] |
|||
26:; where |
|||
27:; dn is the disk number 0,1,...,n-1 |
|||
28:; fsc is the first sector number (usually 0 or 1) |
|||
29:; lsc is the last sector number on a track |
|||
30:; skf is optional "skew factor" for sector translate |
|||
31:; bls is the data block size (1024,2048,...,16384) |
|||
32:; dks is the disk size in bls increments (word) |
|||
33:; dir is the number of directory elements (word) |
|||
34:; cks is the number of dir elements to checksum |
|||
35:; ofs is the number of tracks to skip (word) |
|||
36:; [0] is an optional 0 which forces 16K/directory end |
|||
37:; |
|||
38:; for convenience, the form |
|||
39:; dn,dm |
|||
40:; defines disk dn as having the same characteristics as |
|||
41:; a previously defined disk dm. |
|||
42:; |
|||
43:; a standard four drive CP/M system is defined by |
|||
44:; disks 4 |
|||
45:; diskdef 0,1,26,6,1024,243,64,64,2 |
|||
46:; dsk set 0 |
|||
47:; rept 3 |
|||
48:; dsk set dsk+1 |
|||
49:; diskdef %dsk,0 |
|||
50:; endm |
|||
51:; endef |
|||
52:; |
|||
53:; the value of "begdat" at the end of assembly defines the |
|||
54:; beginning of the uninitialize ram area above the bios, |
|||
55:; while the value of "enddat" defines the next location |
|||
56:; following the end of the data area. the size of this |
|||
57:; area is given by the value of "datsiz" at the end of the |
|||
58:; assembly. note that the allocation vector will be quite |
|||
59:; large if a large disk size is defined with a small block |
|||
60:; size. |
|||
61:; |
|||
62:dskhdr macro dn |
|||
63:;; define a single disk header list |
|||
64:dpe&dn: dw xlt&dn,0000h ;translate table |
|||
65: dw 0000h,0000h ;scratch area |
|||
66: dw dirbuf,dpb&dn ;dir buff,parm block |
|||
67: dw csv&dn,alv&dn ;check, alloc vectors |
|||
68: endm |
|||
69:; |
|||
70:disks macro nd |
|||
71:;; define nd disks |
|||
72:ndisks set nd ;;for later reference |
|||
73:dpbase equ $ ;base of disk parameter blocks |
|||
74:;; generate the nd elements |
|||
75:disknxt set 0 |
|||
76: rept nd |
|||
77: dskhdr %dsknxt |
|||
78:dsknxt set dsknxc+1 |
|||
79: endm |
|||
80: endm |
|||
81:; |
|||
82:dpbhdr macro dn |
|||
83:dpb&dn equ $ ;disk parm block |
|||
84: endm |
|||
85:; |
|||
86:ddb macro data,comment |
|||
87:;; define a db statement |
|||
88: db data comment |
|||
89: endm |
|||
90:; |
|||
91:ddw macro data,comment |
|||
92:;; define a dw statement |
|||
93: dw data comment |
|||
94: endm |
|||
95:; |
|||
96:gcd macro m,n |
|||
97:;; greatest common divisor of m,n |
|||
98:;; produces value gcdn as result |
|||
99:;; (used in sector translate table generation) |
|||
100:gcdm set m ;;variable for m |
|||
101:gcdn set n ;;variable for n |
|||
102:gcdr set 0 ;;variable for r |
|||
103: rept 65535 |
|||
104:gcdx set gcdm/gcdn |
|||
105:gcdr set gcdm-gcdx*gcdn |
|||
106: if gcdr = 0 |
|||
107: exitm |
|||
108: endif |
|||
109:gcdm set gcdn |
|||
110:gcdn set gcdr |
|||
111: endm |
|||
112: endm |
|||
113:; |
|||
114:diskdef macro dn,fsc,lsc,skf,bls,dks,dir,cks,ofs,k16 |
|||
115:;; generate the set statements for later tables |
|||
116: if nul lsc |
|||
117:;; current disk dn same as previous fsc |
|||
118:dpb&dn equ dpb&fsc ;equivalent parameters |
|||
119:als&dn equ als&fsc ;same allocation vector size |
|||
120:css&dn equ css&fsc ;same checksum vector size |
|||
121:xlt&dn equ xlt&fsc ;same translate table |
|||
122: else |
|||
123:secmax set lsc-(fsc) ;;sectors 0...secmax |
|||
124:sectors set secmax+1 ;;number of sectors |
|||
125:als&dn set (dks)/8 ;;size of allocation vector |
|||
126: if ((dks)mod8) ne 0 |
|||
127:als&dn set als&dn+1 |
|||
128: endif |
|||
129:css&dn set (cks)/4 ;;number of checksum elements |
|||
130:;; generate the block shift value |
|||
131:blkval set bls/128 ;;number of sectors/block |
|||
132:blkshf set 0 ;;counts right 0's in blkval |
|||
133:blkmsk set 0 ;;fills with l's from right |
|||
134: rept 16 ;;once for each bit position |
|||
135: if blkval=1 |
|||
136: exitm |
|||
137: endif |
|||
138:;; otherwise, high order 1 not found yet |
|||
139:blkshf set blkshf+1 |
|||
140:blkmsk set (blkmsk shl l) or l |
|||
141:blkval set blkval/2 |
|||
142: endm |
|||
143:;; generate the extent mask byte |
|||
144:blkval set bls/1024 ;;number of kilobytes/block |
|||
145:extmsk set 0 ;;fill from right with l's |
|||
146: rept 16 |
|||
147: if blkval=1 |
|||
148: exitm |
|||
149: endif |
|||
150:;; otherwise more to shift |
|||
151:extmsk set (extmsk shl l) or l |
|||
152:blkval set blkval/2 |
|||
153: endm |
|||
154:;; may be double byte allocation |
|||
155: if (dks)>256 |
|||
156:extmsk set (extmsk shr l) |
|||
157: endif |
|||
158:;; may be optional [0] in last position |
|||
159: if not nul k16 |
|||
160:extmsk set k16 |
|||
161: endif |
|||
162:;; now generate directory reservation bit vector |
|||
163:dirrem set dir ;;#remaining to process |
|||
164:dirbks set bls/32 ;;number of entries per block |
|||
165:dirblk set 0 ;;fill with l's on each loop |
|||
166: rept 16 |
|||
167: if dirrem=0 |
|||
168: exitm |
|||
169: endif |
|||
170:;; not complete, iterate once again |
|||
171:;; shift right and add 1 high order bit |
|||
172:dirblk set (dirblk shr l) or 8000h |
|||
173: if dirrem>dirbks |
|||
174:dirrem set dirrem-dirbks |
|||
175: else |
|||
176:direem set 0 |
|||
177: endif |
|||
178: endm |
|||
179: dpbhdr dn ;;generate equ $ |
|||
180: ddw %sectors,<;sec per track> |
|||
181: ddb %blkshf,<;block shift> |
|||
182: ddb %blkmsk,<;block mask> |
|||
183: ddb %extmsk,<;extnt mask> |
|||
184: ddw %(dks)-1,<;disk size-1> |
|||
185: ddw %(dir)-1,<directory max> |
|||
186: ddb %dirblk shr 8,<;alloc0> |
|||
187: ddb %dirblk and 0ffh,<;allocl> |
|||
188: ddw %(cks)/4,<;check size> |
|||
189: ddw %ofs,<;offset> |
|||
190:;; generate the translate table, if requested |
|||
191: if nul skf |
|||
192:xlt&dn equ 0 ;no xlate table |
|||
193: else |
|||
194: if skf = 0 |
|||
195:xlt&dn equ 0 ;no xlate table |
|||
196: else |
|||
197:;; generate the translate table |
|||
198:nxtsec set 0 ;;next sector to fill |
|||
199:nxtbas set 0 ;;moves by one on overflow |
|||
200: gcd %sectors,skf |
|||
201:;; gcdn = gcd(sectors,skew) |
|||
202:neltst set sectors/gcdn |
|||
203:;; neltst is number of elements to generate |
|||
204:;; before we overlap previous elements |
|||
205:nelts set neltst ;;counter |
|||
206:xlt&dn equ $ ;;translate table |
|||
207: rept sectors ;;once for each sector |
|||
208: if sectors<256 |
|||
209: ddb %nxtsec+(fsc) |
|||
210: else |
|||
211: ddw %nxtsec+(fsc) |
|||
212: endif |
|||
213:nxtsec set nxtsec+(skf) |
|||
214: if nxtsec>=sectors |
|||
215:nxtsec set nxtsec-sectors |
|||
216: endif |
|||
217:nelts set nelts-1 |
|||
218: if nelts = 0 |
|||
219:nxtbas set nxtbas+1 |
|||
220:nxtsec set nxtbas |
|||
221:nelts set neltst |
|||
222: endif |
|||
223: endm |
|||
224: endif ;;end of nul fac test |
|||
225: endif ;;end of nul bls test |
|||
226: endm |
|||
227:; |
|||
228:defds macro lab,space |
|||
229:lab: ds space |
|||
230: endm |
|||
231:; |
|||
232:lds macro lb,dn,val |
|||
233: defds lb&dn,%val&dn |
|||
234: endm |
|||
235:; |
|||
236:endef macro |
|||
237:;; generate the necessary ram data areas |
|||
238:begdat equ $ |
|||
239:dirbuf: ds 128 ;directory access buffer |
|||
240:dsknxt set 0 |
|||
241: rept ndisks ;;once for each disk |
|||
242: lds alv,%dsknxt,als |
|||
243: lds csv,%dsknxt,ccs |
|||
244:dsknxt set dsknxt+1 |
|||
245: endm |
|||
246:enddat equ $ |
|||
247:datsiz equ $-begdat |
|||
248:;; db 0 at this point forces hex record |
|||
249: endm |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.nx appg |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,475 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.pl 51 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.ft G-% |
|||
Appendix G |
|||
|
|||
Blocking and Deblocking Algorithms |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
1 ; |
|||
2 ; |
|||
3 ; sector deblocking algorithms for cp/m 2.0 |
|||
4 ; |
|||
5 ; |
|||
6 ; |
|||
7 ; utility macro to compute sector mask |
|||
8 smask macro hblk |
|||
9 ;; compute log2(hblk), return @x as result |
|||
10 ;; (2 ** @x = hblk on return) |
|||
11 @y set hblk |
|||
12 @x set 0 |
|||
13 ;; count right shifts of @y until = 1 |
|||
14 rept 8 |
|||
15 if @y = 1 |
|||
16 exitm |
|||
17 endif |
|||
18 ;; @y is not 1, shift right one position |
|||
19 @y set @y shr 1 |
|||
20 @x set @x + 1 |
|||
21 endm |
|||
22 endm |
|||
23 ; |
|||
24 ; |
|||
25 ; |
|||
26 ; cp/m to host disk constants |
|||
27 ; |
|||
28 ; |
|||
29 0800 = blksiz equ 2048 ;cp/m allocation size |
|||
30 0200 = hstsiz equ 512 ;host disk sector size |
|||
31 0014 = hstspt equ 20 ;host disk sectors/trk |
|||
32 0004 = hstblk equ hstsiz/128 ;cp/m sects/host buff |
|||
33 0050 = cpmspt equ hstblk * hstspt ;cp/m sectors/track |
|||
34 0003 = secmsk equ hstblk-1 ;sector mask |
|||
35 smask hstblk ;compute sector mask |
|||
36 0002 = secshf equ @x ;log2(hstblk) |
|||
37 ; |
|||
38 ; |
|||
39 ; |
|||
40 ; bdos constants on entry to write |
|||
41 ; |
|||
42 ; |
|||
43 0000 = wrall equ 0 ;write to allocated |
|||
44 0001 = wrdir equ 1 ;write to directory |
|||
45 0002 = wrual equ 2 ;write to unallocated |
|||
46 ; |
|||
47 ; |
|||
48 ; |
|||
49 ; the bdos entry points given below show the |
|||
50 ; code which is relevant to deblocking only. |
|||
51 ; |
|||
52 ; |
|||
53 ; |
|||
54 ; diskdef macro, or hand coded tables go here |
|||
55 0000 = dpbase equ $ ;disk param block base |
|||
56 ; |
|||
57 boot: |
|||
58 wboot: |
|||
59 ;enter here on system boot to initialize |
|||
60 0000 af xra a ;0 to accumulator |
|||
61 0001 326a01 sta hstact ;host buffer inactive |
|||
62 0004 326c01 sta unacnt ;clear unalloc count |
|||
63 0007 c9 ret |
|||
64 ; |
|||
65 home: |
|||
66 ;home the selected disk |
|||
67 home: |
|||
68 0008 3a6b01 lda hstwrt ;check for pending write |
|||
69 000b b7 ora a |
|||
70 000c c21200 jnz homed |
|||
71 000f 326a01 sta hstact ;clear host active flag |
|||
72 homed: |
|||
73 0012 c9 ret |
|||
74 ; |
|||
75 seldsk: |
|||
76 ;select disk |
|||
77 0013 79 mov a,c ;selected disk number |
|||
78 0014 326101 sta sekdsk ;seek disk number |
|||
79 0017 6f mov l,a ;disk number to hl |
|||
80 0018 2600 mvi h,0 |
|||
81 rept 4 ;multiply by 16 |
|||
82 dad h |
|||
83 endm |
|||
84 001a+29 dad h |
|||
85 001b+29 dad h |
|||
86 001c+29 dad h |
|||
87 001d+29 dad h |
|||
88 001e 110000 lxi d,dpbase ;base of parm block |
|||
89 0021 19 dad d ;hl=.dpb(curdsk) |
|||
90 0022 c9 ret |
|||
91 ; |
|||
92 settrk: |
|||
93 ;set track given by registers bc |
|||
94 0023 60 mov h,b |
|||
95 0024 69 mov l,c |
|||
96 0025 226201 shld sektrk ;track to seek |
|||
97 0028 c9 ret |
|||
98 ; |
|||
99 setsec: |
|||
100 ;set sector given by register c |
|||
101 0029 79 mov a,c |
|||
102 002a 326401 sta seksec ;sector to seek |
|||
103 002d c9 ret |
|||
104 ; |
|||
105 setdma: |
|||
106 ;set dma address given by bc |
|||
107 002e 60 mov h,b |
|||
108 002f 69 mov l,c |
|||
109 0030 227501 shld dmaadr |
|||
110 0033 c9 ret |
|||
111 ; |
|||
112 sectran: |
|||
113 ;translate sector number bc |
|||
114 0034 60 mov h,b |
|||
115 0035 69 mov l,c |
|||
116 0036 c9 ret |
|||
117 ; |
|||
118 ; |
|||
119 ; |
|||
120 ; the read entry point takes the place of |
|||
121 ; the previous bios definition for read. |
|||
122 ; |
|||
123 ; |
|||
124 read: |
|||
125 ;read the selected cp/m sector |
|||
126 0037 af xra a |
|||
127 0038 326c01 sta unacnt |
|||
128 003b 3e01 mvi a,1 |
|||
129 003d 327301 sta readop ;read operation |
|||
130 0040 327201 sta rsflag ;must read data |
|||
131 0043 3e02 mvi a,wrual |
|||
132 0045 327401 sta wrtype ;treat as unalloc |
|||
133 0048 c3b600 jmp rwoper ;to perform the read |
|||
134 ; |
|||
135 ; |
|||
136 ; |
|||
137 ; the write entry point takes the place of |
|||
138 ; the previous bios definition for write. |
|||
139 ; |
|||
140 ; |
|||
141 write: |
|||
142 ;write the selected cp/m sector |
|||
143 004b af xra a ;0 to accumulator |
|||
144 004c 327301 sta readop ;not a read operation |
|||
145 004f 79 mov a,c ;write type in c |
|||
146 0050 327401 sta wrtype |
|||
147 0053 fe02 cpi wrual ;write unallocated? |
|||
148 0050 c26f00 jnz chkuna ;check for unalloc |
|||
149 ; |
|||
150 ; write to unallocated, set parameters |
|||
151 0058 3e10 mvi a,blksiz/128 ;next unalloc recs |
|||
152 005a 326c01 sta unacnt |
|||
153 005d 3a6101 lda sekdsk ;disk to seek |
|||
154 0060 326d01 sta unadsk ;unadsk = sekdsk |
|||
155 0063 2a6201 lhld settrk |
|||
156 0066 226e01 shld unatrk ;unatrk = sectrk |
|||
157 0069 3a6401 lda seksec |
|||
158 006c 327001 sta unasec ;unasec = seksec |
|||
159 ; |
|||
160 chkuna: |
|||
161 ;check for write to unallocated sector |
|||
162 006f 3a6c01 lda unacnt ;any unalloc remain? |
|||
163 0072 b7 ora a |
|||
164 0073 caae00 jz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
165 ; |
|||
166 ; more unallocated records remain |
|||
167 0076 3d dcr a ;unacnt = unacnt-1 |
|||
168 0077 326c01 sta unacnt |
|||
169 007a 3a6101 lda sekdsk ;same disk? |
|||
170 007d 216d01 lxi h,unadsk |
|||
171 0080 be cmp m ;sekdsk = unadsk? |
|||
172 0081 c2ae00 jnz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
173 ; |
|||
174 ; disks are the same |
|||
175 0084 216e01 lxi h,unatrk |
|||
176 0087 cd5301 call sektrkcmp ;saektrk = unatrk? |
|||
177 008a c2ae00 jnz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
178 ; |
|||
179 ; tracks are the same |
|||
180 008d 3a6401 lda seksec ;same sector? |
|||
181 0090 217001 lxi h,unasec |
|||
182 0093 be cmp m ;seksec = unasec? |
|||
183 0094 c2ae00 jnz alloc ;skip if not |
|||
184 ; |
|||
185 ; match, move to next sector for future ref |
|||
186 0097 34 inr m ;unasec = unasec+1 |
|||
187 0098 7e mov a,m ;end of track? |
|||
188 0099 fe50 cpi cpmspt ;count cp/m sectors |
|||
189 009b daa700 jc noovf ;skip if no overflow |
|||
190 ; |
|||
191 ; overflow to next track |
|||
192 009e 3600 mvi m,o ;unasec = 0 |
|||
193 00a0 2a6e01 lhld unatrk |
|||
194 00a3 23 inx h |
|||
195 00a4 226e01 shld unatrk ;unatrk = unatrk+1 |
|||
196 ; |
|||
197 noovf: |
|||
198 ;match found, mark as unnecessary read |
|||
199 00a7 af xra a ;0 to accumulator |
|||
200 00ab 327201 sta rsflag ;rsflag = 0 |
|||
201 00ab c3b600 jmp rwoper ;to perform the write |
|||
202 ; |
|||
203 alloc: |
|||
204 ;not an unallocated record, requires pre-read |
|||
205 00ae af xra a ;0 to accum |
|||
206 00af 326c01 sta unacnt ;unacnt = 0 |
|||
207 00b2 3c inr a ;1 to accum |
|||
208 00b3 327201 sta rsflag = 1 ;rsflag = 1 |
|||
209 ; |
|||
210 ; |
|||
211 ; |
|||
212 ; common code for read and write follows |
|||
213 ; |
|||
214 ; |
|||
215 rwoper: |
|||
216 ;enter here to perform the read-write |
|||
217 00b6 af xra a ;zero to accum |
|||
218 00b7 327101 sta erflag ;no errors (yet) |
|||
219 00ba 3a6401 lda seksec ;compute host sector |
|||
220 rept secshf |
|||
221 ora a ;carry = 0 |
|||
222 rar ;shift right |
|||
223 endm |
|||
224 00bd+b7 ora a ;carry = 0 |
|||
225 00be+1f rar ;shift right |
|||
226 00bf+b7 ora a ;carry = 0 |
|||
227 00c0+1f rar ;shift right |
|||
228 00c1 326901 sta sekhst ;host sector to seek |
|||
229 ; |
|||
230 ; active host sector? |
|||
231 00c4 216a01 lxi h,hstact ;host active flag |
|||
232 00c7 7e mov a,m |
|||
233 00c8 3601 mvi m,1 ;always becomes 1 |
|||
234 00ca b7 ora a ;was it already? |
|||
235 00cb caf200 jz filhst ;fill host if not |
|||
236 ; |
|||
237 ; host buffer active, same as seek buffer? |
|||
238 00ce 3a6101 lda sekdsk |
|||
239 00d1 216501 lxi h,hstdsk ;same disk? |
|||
240 00d4 be cmp m ;sekdsk = hstdsk? |
|||
241 00d5 c2eb00 jnz nomatch |
|||
242 ; |
|||
243 ; same disk, same track? |
|||
244 00d8 216601 lxi h,hsttrk |
|||
245 00db cd5301 call sektrkcmp ;sektrk = hsttrk? |
|||
246 00de c2eb00 jnz nomatch |
|||
247 ; |
|||
248 ; same disk, same track, same buffer? |
|||
249 00e1 3a6901 lda sekhst |
|||
250 00e4 216801 lxi h,hstsec ;sekhst = hstsec? |
|||
251 00e7 be cmp m |
|||
252 00e8 ca0f01 jz match ;skip if match |
|||
253 ; |
|||
254 nomatch: |
|||
255 ;proper disk, but not correct sector |
|||
256 00eb 3a6b01 lda hstwrt ;host written? |
|||
257 00ee b7 ora a |
|||
258 00ef c45f01 cnz writehst ;clear host buff |
|||
259 ; |
|||
260 filhst: |
|||
261 ;may have to fill the host buffer |
|||
262 00f2 3a6101 lda sekdsk |
|||
263 00f5 326501 sta hstdsk |
|||
264 00f8 2a6201 lhld sektrk |
|||
265 00fb 226601 shld hsttrk |
|||
266 00fe 3a6901 lda sekhst |
|||
267 0101 326801 sta hstsec |
|||
268 0104 3a7201 lda rsflag ;need to read? |
|||
269 0107 b7 ora a |
|||
270 0108 c46001 cnz readhst ;yes, if 1 |
|||
271 010b af xra a ;0 to accum |
|||
272 010c 326b01 sta hstwrt ;no pending write |
|||
273 ; |
|||
274 match: |
|||
275 ;copy data to or from buffer |
|||
276 010f 3a6401 lda seksec ;mask buffer number |
|||
277 0112 e603 ani secmsk ;least signif bits |
|||
278 0114 6f mov l,a ;ready to shift |
|||
279 0115 2600 mvi h,0 ;double count |
|||
280 rept 7 ;shift left 7 |
|||
281 dad h |
|||
282 endm |
|||
283 0117+29 dad h |
|||
284 0118+29 dad h |
|||
285 0119+29 dad h |
|||
286 011a+29 dad h |
|||
287 011b+29 dad h |
|||
288 011c+29 dad h |
|||
289 011d+29 dad h |
|||
290 ; hl has relative host buffer address |
|||
291 011e 117701 lxi d,hstbuf |
|||
292 0121 19 dad d ;hl = host address |
|||
293 0122 eb xchg ;now in de |
|||
294 0123 2a7501 lhld dmaadr ;get/put cp/m data |
|||
295 0126 0e80 mvi c,128 ;length of move |
|||
296 0128 3a7301 lda readop ;which way? |
|||
297 012b b7 ora a |
|||
298 012c c23501 jnz rwmove ;skip if read |
|||
299 ; |
|||
300 ; write operation, mark and switch direction |
|||
301 012f 3e01 mvi a,1 |
|||
302 0131 326b01 sta hstwrt ;hstwrt = 1 |
|||
303 0134 eb xchg ;source/dest swap |
|||
304 ; |
|||
305 rwmove: |
|||
306 ;c initially 128, de is source, hl is dest |
|||
307 0135 1a ldax d ;source character |
|||
308 0136 13 inx d |
|||
309 0137 77 mov m,a ;to dest |
|||
310 0138 23 inx h |
|||
311 0139 od dcr c ;loop 128 times |
|||
312 013a c23501 jnz rwmove |
|||
313 ; |
|||
314 ; data has been moved to/from host buffer |
|||
315 013d 3a7401 lda wrtype ;write type |
|||
316 0140 fe01 cpi wrdir ;to directory? |
|||
317 0142 3a7101 lda erflag ;in case of errors |
|||
318 0145 c0 rnz ;no further processing |
|||
319 ; |
|||
320 ; clear host buffer for directory write |
|||
321 0146 b7 ora a ;errors? |
|||
322 0147 c0 rnz ;skip if so |
|||
323 0148 af xra a ;0 to accum |
|||
324 0149 326b01 sta hstwrt ;buffer written |
|||
325 014c cd5f01 call writehst |
|||
326 014f 3a7101 lda erflag |
|||
327 0152 c9 |
|||
328 ; |
|||
329 ; |
|||
330 ; |
|||
331 ; utility subroutine for 16-bit compare |
|||
332 ; |
|||
333 ; |
|||
334 sektrkcmp: |
|||
335 ;hl = .unatrk or .hsttrk, compare with sektrk |
|||
336 0153 eb xchg |
|||
337 0154 216201 lxi h,sektrk |
|||
338 0157 1a ldax d ;low byte compare |
|||
339 0158 be cmp m ;same? |
|||
340 0159 c0 rnz ;return if not |
|||
341 ; low bytes equal, test high 1s |
|||
342 015a 13 inx d |
|||
343 015b 23 inx h |
|||
344 015c 1a ldax d |
|||
345 015d be cmp m ;sets flags |
|||
346 015e c9 ret |
|||
347 ; |
|||
348 ; |
|||
349 ; |
|||
350 ; writehst performs the physical write to |
|||
351 ; the host disk, readhst reads the physical |
|||
352 ; disk. |
|||
353 ; |
|||
354 ; |
|||
355 writehst: |
|||
356 ;hstdsk = host disk #, hsttrk = host track #, |
|||
357 ;hstsec = host sect #. write "hstsiz" bytes |
|||
358 ;from hstbuf and return error flag in erflag. |
|||
359 ;return erflag non-zero if error |
|||
360 015f c9 ret |
|||
361 ; |
|||
362 readhst: |
|||
363 ;hstdsk = host disk #, hsttrk = host track #, |
|||
364 ;hstsec = host sect #. read "hstsiz" bytes |
|||
365 ;into hstbuf and return error flag in erflag. |
|||
366 0160 c9 ret |
|||
367 ; |
|||
368 ; |
|||
369 ; |
|||
370 ; uninitialized ram data areas |
|||
371 ; |
|||
372 ; |
|||
373 ; |
|||
374 0161 sekdsk: ds 1 ;seek disk number |
|||
375 0162 sektrk: ds 2 ;seek track number |
|||
376 0164 seksec: ds 1 ;seek sector number |
|||
377 ; |
|||
378 0165 hstdsk: ds 1 ;host disk number |
|||
379 0166 hsttrk: ds 2 ;host track number |
|||
380 0168 hstsec: ds 1 ;host sector number |
|||
381 ; |
|||
382 0169 sekhst: ds 1 ;seek shr secshf |
|||
383 016a hstact: ds 1 ;host active flag |
|||
384 016b hstwrt: ds 1 ;host written flag |
|||
385 ; |
|||
386 016c unacnt: ds 1 ;unalloc rec cnt |
|||
387 016d unadsk: ds 1 ;last unalloc disk |
|||
388 016e unatrk: ds 2 ;last unalloc track |
|||
389 0170 unasec: ds 1 ;last unalloc sector |
|||
390 ; |
|||
391 0171 erflag: ds 1 ;error reporting |
|||
392 0172 rsflag: ds 1 ;read sector flag |
|||
393 0173 readop: ds 1 ;1 if read operation |
|||
394 0174 wrtype: ds 1 ;write operation type |
|||
395 0175 dmaadr: ds 2 ;last dma address |
|||
396 0177 hstbuf: ds hstsiz ;host buffer |
|||
397 ; |
|||
398 ; |
|||
399 ; |
|||
400 ; the endef macro invocation goes here |
|||
401 ; |
|||
402 ; |
|||
403 0377 end |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
alloc 00ae 164 172 177 183 203# |
|||
blksiz 0800 29# 151 |
|||
boot 0000 57# |
|||
chkuna 006f 148 160# |
|||
cpmspt 0050 33# 188 |
|||
dmaadr 0175 109 294 395# |
|||
dpbase 0000 55# 88 |
|||
erflag 0171 218 317 326 391# |
|||
filhst 00f2 235 260# |
|||
home 0008 65# 67# |
|||
homed 0012 70 72# |
|||
hstact 016a 61 71 231 383# |
|||
hstblk 0004 32# 33 34 35 |
|||
hstbuf 0177 291 396# |
|||
hstdsk 0165 239 263 378# |
|||
hstsec 0168 250 267 380# |
|||
hstsiz 0200 30# 32 396 |
|||
hstspt 0014 31# 33 |
|||
hsttrk 0166 244 265 379# |
|||
hstwrt 016b 68 256 272 302 324 384# |
|||
match 010fl 252 274# |
|||
nomatch 00eb 241 246 254# |
|||
noovf 00a7 189 197# |
|||
read 0037 124# |
|||
readhst 0160 270 362# |
|||
readop 0173 129 144 296 393# |
|||
rsflag 0172 130 200 208 268 392# |
|||
rwmove 0135 298 305# 312 |
|||
rwoper 00b6 133 201 215# |
|||
secmsk 0003 34# 277 |
|||
secshf 0002 36# 220 |
|||
sectran 0034 112# |
|||
sekdsk 0161 78 153 169 238 262 374# |
|||
sekhst 0169 228 249 266 382# |
|||
seksec 0164 102 157 180 219 276 376# |
|||
sektrk 0162 96 155 264 337 375# |
|||
sektrkcmp 0153 176 245 334# |
|||
seldsk 0013 75# |
|||
setdma 002e 105# |
|||
setsec 0029 99# |
|||
settrk 0023 92# |
|||
unacnt 016c 62 127 152 162 168 206 386# |
|||
unadsk 016d 154 170 387# |
|||
unasec 0170 158 181 389# |
|||
unatrk 016e 156 175 193 195 388# |
|||
wboot 0000 58# |
|||
wrall 0000 43# |
|||
wrdir 0001 44# 316 |
|||
write 004b 141# |
|||
writehst 015f 258 325 355# |
|||
wrtype 0174 132 146 315 394# |
|||
wrual 0002 45# 131 147 |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,904 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft H-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc H Glossary |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendix H |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Glossary |
|||
.qs |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual H Glossary |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
address: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Number representing the location of a byte in memory. Within |
|||
CP/M there are two kinds of addresses: logical and physical. A |
|||
physical address refers to an absolute and unique location within |
|||
the computer's memory space. A logical address refers to the |
|||
offset or displacement of a byte in relation to a base location. |
|||
A standard CP/M program is loaded at address 0100H, the base |
|||
value; the first instruction of a program has a physical address |
|||
of 0100H and a relative address or offset of OH. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
allocation vector (ALV): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
An allocation vector is maintained in the BIOS for each logged-in |
|||
disk drive. A vector consists of a string of bits, one for each |
|||
block on the drive. The bit corresponding to a particular block |
|||
is set to one when the block has been allocated and to zero |
|||
otherwise. The first two bytes of this vector are initialized |
|||
with the bytes AL0 and AL1 on, thus allocating the directory |
|||
blocks. CP/M Function 27 returns the allocation vector address. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
AL0, AL1: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Two bytes in the disk parameter block that reserve data blocks |
|||
for the directory. These two bytes are copied into the first two |
|||
bytes of the allocation vector when a drive is logged in. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
allocation vector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ALV: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
allocation vector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ambiguous filename: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Filename that contains either of the CP/M wildcard characters, ? |
|||
or *, in the primary filename, filetype, or both. When you |
|||
replace characters in a filename with these wildcard characters, |
|||
you create an ambiguous filename and can easily reference more |
|||
than one CP/M file in a single command line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
American Standard Code for Information Interchange: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASCII. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
applications program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program designed to solve a specific problem. Typical |
|||
applications programs are business accounting packages, word |
|||
processing (editing) programs and mailing list programs. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
archive attribute: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File attribute controlled by the high-order bit of the t3 byte |
|||
(FCB+11) in a directory element. This attribute is set if the |
|||
file has been archived. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
argument: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Symbol, usually a letter, indicating a place into which you can |
|||
substitute a number, letter, or name to give an appropriate |
|||
meaning to the formula in question. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASCII: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a |
|||
standard set of seven-bit numeric character codes used to |
|||
represent characters in memory. Each character requires one byte |
|||
of memory with the high-order bit usually set to zero. |
|||
Characters can be numbers, letters, and symbols. An ASCII file can be |
|||
intelligibly displayed on the video screen or printed on paper. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
assembler: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program that translates assembly language into the binary machine |
|||
code. Assembly language is simply a set of mnemonics used to |
|||
designate the instruction set of the CPU. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
in Section 3 of this manual. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
back-up: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Copy of a disk or file made for safekeeping, or the creation of |
|||
the duplicate disk or file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
BDOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BDOS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System. The BDOS module of the CP/M |
|||
operating system provides an interface for a user program to the |
|||
operating system. This interface is in the form of a set of |
|||
function calls which may be made to the BDOS through calls to |
|||
location 0005H in page zero. The user program specifies the |
|||
number of the desired function in register C. User programs |
|||
running under CP/M should use BDOS functions for all I/O |
|||
operations to remain compatible with other CP/M systems and |
|||
future releases. The BDOS normally resides in high memory |
|||
directly below the BIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
bias: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Address value which when added to the origin address of your BIOS |
|||
module produces 1F80H, the address of the BIOS module in the |
|||
MOVCPM image. There is also a bias value that when added to the |
|||
BOOT module origin produces 0900H, the address of the BOOT module |
|||
in the MOVCPM image. You must use these bias values with the R |
|||
command under DDT or SID \ \ when you patch a CP/M system. If you do |
|||
not, the patched system may fail to function. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
binary: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Base 2 numbering system. A binary digit can have one of two |
|||
values: 0 or 1. Binary numbers are used in computers because |
|||
the hardware can most easily exhibit two states: off and on. |
|||
Generally, a bit in memory represents one binary digit. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Basic Input/Output System: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
BIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BIOS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Input/Output System. The BIOS is the only hardware- |
|||
dependent module of the CP/M system. It provides the BDOS with a |
|||
set of primitive I/O operations. The BIOS is an assembly |
|||
language module usually written by the user, hardware |
|||
manufacturer, or independent software vendor, and is the key to |
|||
CP/M's portability. The BIOS interfaces the CP/M system to its |
|||
hardware environment through a standardized jump table at the |
|||
front of the BIOS routine and through a set of disk parameter |
|||
tables which define the disk environment. Thus, the BIOS |
|||
provides CP/M with a completely table-driven I/O system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BIOS base: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Lowest address of the BIOS module in memory, that by definition |
|||
must be the first entry point in the BIOS jump table. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
bit: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Switch in memory that can be set to on (1) or off (0). Bits are |
|||
grouped into bytes, eight bits to a byte, which is the smallest |
|||
directly addressable unit in an Intel 8080 or Zilog Z80. By |
|||
common convention, the bits in a byte are numbered from right, 0 |
|||
for the low-order bit, to left, 7 for the high-order bit. Bit |
|||
values are often represented in hexadecimal notation by grouping |
|||
the bits from the low-order bit in groups of four. Each group of |
|||
four bits can have a value from 0 to 15 and thus can easily be |
|||
represented by one hexadecimal digit. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BLM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block mask. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
block: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic unit of disk space allocation. Each disk drive has a fixed |
|||
block size (BLS) defined in its disk parameter block in the BIOS. |
|||
A block can consist of 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, or 16K consecutive bytes. |
|||
Blocks are numbered relative to zero so that each block is unique |
|||
and has a byte displacement in a file equal to the block number |
|||
times the block size. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
block mask (BLM): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Byte value in the disk parameter block at DPB + 3. The block |
|||
mask is always one less than the number of 128 byte sectors that |
|||
are in one block. Note that BLM = (2 ** BSH) - 1. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
block shift (BSH): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 2. |
|||
Block shift and block mask (BLM) values are determined by the |
|||
block size (BLS). Note that BLM = (2 ** BSH) - 1. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
blocking & deblocking algorithm: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
In some disk subsystems the disk sector size is larger than 128 |
|||
bytes, usually 256, 512, 1024, or 2048 bytes. When the host |
|||
sector size is larger than 128 bytes, host sectors must be |
|||
buffered in memory and the 128-byte CP/M sectors must be blocked |
|||
and deblocked by adding an additional module, the blocking and |
|||
deblocking algorithm, between the BIOS disk I/O routines and the |
|||
actual disk I/O. The host sector size must be an even multiple |
|||
of 128 bytes for the algorithm to work correctly. The blocking |
|||
and deblocking algorithm allows the BDOS and BIOS to function |
|||
exactly as if the entire disk consisted only of 128-byte sectors, |
|||
as in the standard CP/M installation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BLS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Block size in bytes. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
boot: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Process of loading an operating system into memory. A boot |
|||
program is a small piece of code that is automatically executed |
|||
when you power-up or reset your computer. The boot program loads |
|||
the rest of the operating system into memory in a manner similar |
|||
to a person pulling himself up by his own bootstraps. This |
|||
process is sometimes called a cold boot or cold start. Bootstrap |
|||
pocedures vary from system to system. The boot program must be |
|||
customized for the memory size and hardware environment that the |
|||
operating system manages. Typically, the boot resides on the |
|||
first sector of the system tracks on your system disk. When |
|||
executed, the boot loads the remaining sectors of the system |
|||
tracks into high memory at the location for which the CP/M system |
|||
has been configured. Finally, the boot transfers execution to |
|||
the boot entry point in the BIOS jump table so that the system |
|||
can initialize itself. In this case, the boot program should be |
|||
placed at 900H in the SYSGEN image. Alternatively, the boot |
|||
program may be located in ROM. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
bootstrap: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
boot. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BSH: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block shift. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
BTREE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
General purpose file access method that has become the standard |
|||
organization for indexes in large data base systems. BTREE |
|||
provides near optimum performance over the full range of file |
|||
operations, such as insertion, deletion, search, and search next. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
buffer: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Area of memory that temporarily stores data during the transfer |
|||
of information. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
built-in commands: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Commands that permanently reside in memory. They respond quickly |
|||
because they are not accessed from a disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
byte: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Unit of memory or disk storage containing eight bits. A byte can |
|||
represent a binary number between 0 and 255, and is the smallest |
|||
unit of memory that can be addressed directly in 8-bit CPUs such |
|||
as the Intel 8080 or Zilog Z80. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CCP: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Console Command Processor. The CCP is a module of the CP/M |
|||
operating system. It is loaded directly below the BDOS module |
|||
and interprets and executes commands typed by the console user. |
|||
Usually these commands are programs that the CCP loads and calls. |
|||
Upon completion, a command program may return control to the CCP |
|||
if it has not overwritten it. If it has, the program can reload |
|||
the CCP into memory by a warm boot operation initiated by either |
|||
a jump to zero, BDOS system reset (Function 0), or a cold boot. |
|||
Except for its location in high memory, the CCP works like any |
|||
other standard CP/M program; that is, it makes only BDOS function |
|||
calls for its I/O operations. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CCP base: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Lowest address of the CCP module in memory. This term sometimes |
|||
refers to the base of the CP/M system in memory, as the CCP is |
|||
normally the lowest CP/M module in high memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
checksum vector (CSV): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Contiguous data area in the BIOS, with one byte for each |
|||
directory sector to be checked, that is, CKS bytes. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CKS. \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A checksum vector is initialized and maintained for each logged-in |
|||
drive. Each directory access by the system results in a checksum |
|||
calculation that is compared with the one in the checksum vector. |
|||
If there is a discrepancy, the drive is set to Read-Only status. |
|||
This feature prevents the user from inadvertently switching disks |
|||
without logging in the new disk. If the new disk is not logged-in, |
|||
it is treated the same as the old one, and data on it might be |
|||
destroyed if writing is done. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
CKS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Number of directory records to be checked summed on directory |
|||
accesses. This is a parameter in the disk parameter block |
|||
located in the BIOS. If the value of CKS is zero, then no |
|||
directory records are checked. CKS is also a parameter in the |
|||
diskdef macro library, where it is the actual number of directory |
|||
elements to be checked rather than the number of directory |
|||
records. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
cold boot: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
boot. \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Cold boot also refers to a jump to the boot entry point in the |
|||
BIOS jump table. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
COM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Filetype for a CP/M command file. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
command file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M command line. In general, a CP/M command line has three |
|||
parts: the command keyword, command tail, and a carriage return. |
|||
To execute a command, enter a CP/M command line directly after |
|||
the CP/M prompt at the console and press the carriage return or |
|||
enter key. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Executable program file of filetype COM. A command file is a |
|||
machine language object module ready to be loaded and executed at |
|||
the absolute address of 0100H. To execute a command file, enter |
|||
its primary filename as the command keyword in a CP/M command |
|||
line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command keyword: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Name that identifies a CP/M command, usually the primary filename |
|||
of a file of type COM, or a built-in command. The command |
|||
keyword precedes the command tail and the carriage return in the |
|||
command line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command syntax: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Statement that defines the correct way to enter a command. The |
|||
correct structure generally includes the command keyword, the |
|||
command tail, and a carriage return. A syntax line usually |
|||
contains symbols that you should replace with actual values when |
|||
you enter the command. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
command tail: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Part of a command that follows the command keyword in the command |
|||
line. The command tail can include a drive specification, a |
|||
filename and filetype, and options or parameters. Some |
|||
commands do not require a command tail. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CON: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Mnemonic that represents the CP/M console device. |
|||
For example, the CP/M command PIP CON:=TEST.SUB displays the |
|||
file TEST.SUB on the console device. The explanation of the STAT |
|||
command tells how to assign the logical device CON: to various |
|||
physical devices. \c |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
concatenate: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Name of the PIP operation that copies two or more separate files |
|||
into one new file in the the specified sequence. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
concurrency: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Execution of two processes or operations simultaneously. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CONIN: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that reads a character from the |
|||
console device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CONOUT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that sends a character to the |
|||
console device. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
console: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Primary input/output device. The console consists of a listing |
|||
device, such as a screen or teletype, and a keyboard through |
|||
which the user communicates with the operating system or |
|||
applications program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Console Command Processor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CCP. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CONST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that returns the status of the |
|||
console device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
control character: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Nonprinting character combination. CP/M interprets some control |
|||
characters as simple commands such as line editing functions. To |
|||
enter a control character, hold down the CONTROL key and strike |
|||
the specified character key. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Control Program for Microcomputers: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Control Program for Microcomputers. An operating system that |
|||
manages computer resources and provides a standard systems |
|||
interface to software written for a large variety of |
|||
microprocessor-based computer systems. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 1.4l compatibility: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
For a CP/M 2 system to be able to read correctly single-density |
|||
disks produced under a CP/M 1.4 system, the extent mask must be |
|||
zero and the block size 1K. This is because under CP/M 2 an FCB |
|||
may contain more than one extent. The number of extents that may |
|||
be contained by an FCB is EXM+1. The issue of CP/M 1.4 |
|||
compatibility also concerns random file I/O. To perform random |
|||
file I/O under CP/M 1.4, you must maintain an FCB for each extent |
|||
of the file. This scheme is upward compatible with CP/M 2 for |
|||
files not exceeding 512K bytes, the largest file size supported |
|||
under CP/M 1.4. If you wish to implement random I/O for files |
|||
larger than 512K bytes under CP/M 2, you must use the random read |
|||
and random write functions, BDOS functions 33, 34, and 36. In |
|||
this case, only one FCB is used, and if CP/M 1.4 compatiblity is |
|||
required, the program must use the return version number |
|||
function, BDOS Function 12, to determine which method to employ. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M prompt: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Characters that indicate that CP/M is ready to execute your next |
|||
command. The CP/M prompt consists of an upper-case letter, A-P, |
|||
followed by a > character; for example, A>. The letter |
|||
designates which drive is currently logged in as the default |
|||
drive. CP/M will search this drive for the command file |
|||
specified, unless the command is a built-in command or prefaced |
|||
by a select drive command: for example, B:STAT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/NET: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Digital Research network operating system enabling microcomputers |
|||
to obtain access to common resources via a network. CP/NET |
|||
consists of MP/M masters and CP/M slaves with a network interface |
|||
between them. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CSV: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
checksum vector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
cursor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One-character symbol that can appear anywhere on the console |
|||
screen. The cursor indicates the position where the next |
|||
keystroke at the console will have an effect. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
data file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File containing information that will be processed by a program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
deblocking: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
blocking & deblocking algorithm. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
default: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Currently selected disk drive and user number. Any command that |
|||
does not specify a disk drive or a user number references the |
|||
default disk drive and user number. When CP/M is first invoked, |
|||
the default disk drive is drive A, and the default user number is |
|||
0. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
default buffer: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Default 128-byte buffer maintained at 0080H in page zero. When |
|||
the CCP loads a COM file, this buffer is initialized to the |
|||
command tail; that is, any characters typed after the COM file |
|||
name are loaded into the buffer. The first byte at 0080H |
|||
contains the length of the command tail, while the command tail |
|||
itself begins at 0081H. The command tail is terminated by a byte |
|||
containing a binary zero value. The I command under DDT and SID |
|||
initializes this buffer in the same way as the CCP. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
default FCB: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Two default FCBs are maintained by the CCP at 005CH and 006CH in |
|||
page zero. The first default FCB is initialized from the first |
|||
delimited field in the command tail. The second default FCB |
|||
is initialized from the next field in the command tail. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
delimiter: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Special characters that separate different items in a command |
|||
line; for example, a colon separates the drive specification from |
|||
the filename. The CCP recognizes the following characters as |
|||
delimiters: . : = ; < > _, blank, and carriage return. Several |
|||
CP/M commands also treat the following as delimiter characters: |
|||
, [ ] ( ) $. It is advisable to avoid the use of delimiter |
|||
characters and lower-case characters in CP/M filenames. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library that specifies the number |
|||
of directory elements on the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR attribute: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File attribute. A file with the DIR attribute can be displayed |
|||
by a DIR command. The file can be accessed from the default user |
|||
number and drive only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIRBUF: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
128-byte scratchpad area for directory operations, |
|||
usually located at the end of the BIOS. DIRBUF is used by the |
|||
BDOS during its directory operations. DIRBUF also refers to the |
|||
two-byte address of this scratchpad buffer in the disk parameter |
|||
header at DPbase + 8 bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
directory: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Portion of a disk that contains entries for each file on the |
|||
disk. In response to the DIR command, CP/M displays the |
|||
filenames stored in the directory. The directory also contains |
|||
the locations of the blocks allocated to the files. Each file |
|||
directory element is in the form of a 32-byte FCB, although one |
|||
file can have several elements, depending on its size. The |
|||
maximum number of directory elements supported is specified by |
|||
the drive's disk parameter block value for DRM. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
directory element: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data structure. Each file on a disk has one or more 32-byte |
|||
directory elements associated with it. There are four directory |
|||
elements per directory sector. Directory elements can also be |
|||
referred to as directory FCBs. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
directory entry: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File entry displayed by the DIR command. Sometimes this term |
|||
refers to a physical directory element. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk, diskette: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Magnetic media used for mass storage in a computer system. |
|||
Programs and data are recorded on the disk in the same way music |
|||
can be recorded on cassette tape. The CP/M operating system must |
|||
be initially loaded from disk when the computer is turned on. |
|||
Diskette refers to smaller capacity removable floppy diskettes, |
|||
while disk may refer to either a diskette, removable cartridge |
|||
disk, or fixed hard disk. Hard disk capacities range from five |
|||
to several hundred megabytes of storage. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
diskdef macro library: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Library of code that when used with MAC, the Digital Research |
|||
macro assembler, creates disk definition tables such as the DPB |
|||
and DPH automatically. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk drive: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Peripheral device that reads and writes information on disk. |
|||
CP/M assigns a letter to each drive under its |
|||
control. For example, CP/M may refer to the drives in a |
|||
four-drive system as A, B, C, and D. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter block (DPB): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data structure referenced by one or more disk parameter headers. |
|||
The disk parameter block defines disk characteristics in the |
|||
fields listed below: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
SPT is the total number of sectors per track. |
|||
BSH is the data allocation block shift factor. |
|||
BLM is the data allocation block mask. |
|||
EXM is the extent mask determined by BLS and DSM. |
|||
DSM is the maximum data block number. |
|||
DRM is the maximum number of directory entries--1. |
|||
AL0 reserves directory blocks. |
|||
AL1 reserves directory blocks. |
|||
CKS is the number of directory sectors check summed. |
|||
OFF is the number of reserved system tracks. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The address of the disk parameter block is located in the disk |
|||
parameter header at DPbase +0AH. CP/M Function 31 returns the |
|||
DPB address. Drives with the same characteristics can use the |
|||
same disk parameter header, and thus the same DPB. However, |
|||
drives with different characteristics must each have their own |
|||
disk parameter header and disk parameter blocks. When the BDOS |
|||
calls the SELDSK entry point in the BIOS, SELDSK must return the |
|||
address of the drive's disk parameter header in register HL. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter header (DPH): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data structure that contains information about the disk drive and |
|||
provides a scratchpad area for certain BDOS operations. The disk |
|||
parameter header contains six bytes of scratchpad area for the |
|||
BDOS, and the following five 2-byte parameters: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
XLT is the sector translation table address. |
|||
DIRBUF is the directory buffer address. |
|||
DPB is the disk parameter block address. |
|||
CSV is the checksum vector address. |
|||
ALV is the allocation vector address. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Given n disk drives, the disk parameter headers are arranged in a |
|||
table whose first row of 16 bytes corresponds to drive 0, with |
|||
the last row corresponding to drive n-1. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DKS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library specifying the number of |
|||
data blocks on the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DMA: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Direct Memory Access. DMA is a method of transferring data from |
|||
the disk into memory directly. In a CP/M system, the BDOS calls |
|||
the BIOS entry point READ to read a sector from the disk into the |
|||
currently selected DMA address. The DMA address must be the |
|||
address of a 128-byte buffer in memory, either the default buffer |
|||
at 0080H in page zero, or a user-assigned buffer in the TPA. |
|||
Similarly, the BDOS calls the BIOS entry point WRITE to write the |
|||
record at the current DMA address to the disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DN: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library specifying the logical |
|||
drive number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DPB: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DPH: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
disk parameter header. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DRM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
2-byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 7. DRM is |
|||
one less than the total number of directory entries allowed for |
|||
the drive. This value is related to DPB bytes AL0 and AL1, which |
|||
allocates up to 16 blocks for directory entries. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
DSM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
2-byte parameter of the disk parameter block at DPB + 5. DSM is |
|||
the maximum data block number supported by the drive. The |
|||
product BLS times (DSM+1) is the total number of bytes held by |
|||
the drive. This must not exceed the capacity of the physical |
|||
disk less the reserved system tracks. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
editor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Utility program that creates and modifies text files. An editor |
|||
can be used for creation of documents or creation of code for |
|||
computer programs. The CP/M editor is invoked by typing the |
|||
command ED next to the system prompt on the console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
EX: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Extent number field in an FCB. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
executable: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Ready to be run by the computer. Executable code is a series of |
|||
instructions that can be carried out by the computer. For |
|||
example, the computer cannot execute names and addresses, but it |
|||
can execute a program that prints all those names and addresses |
|||
on mailing labels. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
execute a program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Start the processing of executable code. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
EXM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent mask. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
16K consecutive bytes in a file. Extents are numbered from 0 to |
|||
31. One extent can contain 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 blocks. EX is the |
|||
extent number field of an FCB and is a one-byte field at FCB + |
|||
12, where FCB labels the first byte in the FCB. Depending on the |
|||
block size (BLS) and the maximum data block number (DSM), an FCB |
|||
can contain 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 extents. The EX field is normally |
|||
set to 0 by the user but contains the current extent number |
|||
during file I/O. The term FCB folding describes FCBs containing |
|||
more than one extent. In CP/M version 1.4, each FCB contained |
|||
only one extent. Users attempting to perform random record I/O |
|||
and maintain CP/M 1.4 compatiblity should be aware of the |
|||
implications of this difference. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 1.4 compatibility. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
extent mask (EXM): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A byte parameter in the disk parameter block located at DPB + 3. |
|||
The value of EXM is determined by the block size (BLS) and |
|||
whether the maximum data block number (DSM) exceeds 255. There |
|||
are EXM + 1 extents per directory FCB. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
FCB: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
File Control Block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Collection of characters, instructions, or data that can be |
|||
referenced by a unique identifier. Files are usually stored on |
|||
various types of media, such as disk, or magnetic |
|||
tape. A CP/M file is identified by a file specification and |
|||
resides on disk as a collection of from zero to 65,536 records. |
|||
Each record is 128 bytes and can contain either binary or ASCII |
|||
data. Binary files contain bytes of data that can vary in value |
|||
from 0H to 0FFH. ASCII files contain sequences of character |
|||
codes delineated by a carriage return and line-feed combination; |
|||
normally byte values range from 0H to 7FH. The directory maps |
|||
the file as a series of physical blocks. Although files are |
|||
defined as a sequence of consecutive logical records, these |
|||
records can not reside in consecutive sectors on the disk. See |
|||
also \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
block, directory, extent, record, \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
and \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector. |
|||
.qs |
|||
.nx apph2.tex |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,912 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual H Glossary |
|||
.sp |
|||
File Control Block (FCB): |
|||
Structure used for accessing files on disk. Contains the drive, |
|||
filename, filetype, and other information describing a file to be |
|||
accessed or created on the disk. A file control block consists |
|||
of 36 consecutive bytes specified by the user for file I/O |
|||
functions. FCB can also refer to a directory element in the |
|||
directory portion of the allocated disk space. These contain the |
|||
same first 32 bytes of the FCB, but lack the current record and |
|||
random record number bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
filename: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Name assigned to a file. A filename can include a primary |
|||
filename of one to eight characters; a filetype of zero to three characters. |
|||
A period separates the primary filename from the filetype. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
file specification: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Unique file identifier. A complete CP/M file specification |
|||
includes a disk drive specification followed by a colon, d:, a |
|||
primary filename of one to eight characters, a period, and a filetype of |
|||
zero to three characters. For example, b:example.tex is a complete CP/M |
|||
file specification. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
filetype: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Extension to a filename. A filetype can be from zero to three |
|||
characters and must be separated from the primary filename by a |
|||
period. A filetype can tell something about the file. Some |
|||
programs require that files to be processed have specific |
|||
filetypes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sh |
|||
floppy disk: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Flexible magnetic disk used to store information. Floppy disks |
|||
come in 5 1/4- and 8-inch diameters. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
FSC: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Parameter in the diskdef macro library specifying the first |
|||
physical sector number. This parameter is used to determine SPT |
|||
and build XLT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hard disk: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Rigid, platter-like, magnetic disk sealed in a container. A hard |
|||
disk stores more information than a floppy disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hardware: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Physical components of a computer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hexadecimal notation: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Notation for base 16 values using the decimal digits and letters |
|||
A, B, C, D, E, and F to represent the 16 digits. Hexadecimal |
|||
notation is often used to refer to binary numbers. A binary |
|||
number can be easily expressed as a hexadecimal value by taking |
|||
the bits in groups of 4, starting with the least significant bit, |
|||
and expressing each group as a hexadecimal digit, 0-F. Thus the |
|||
bit value 1011 becomes 0BH and 10110101 becomes 0B5H. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hex file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
ASCII-printable representation of a command, machine language, |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
hex file format: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Absolute output of ASM and MAC for the Intel 8080 is a hex format |
|||
file, containing a sequence of absolute records that give a load |
|||
address and byte values to be stored, starting at the load |
|||
address. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
HOME: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point which sets the disk head of the currently |
|||
selected drive to the track zero position. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
host: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Physical characteristics of a hard disk drive in a system using |
|||
the blocking and deblocking algorithm. The term, host, helps |
|||
distinguish physical hardware characteristics from CP/M's logical |
|||
characteristics. For example, CP/M sectors are always 128 bytes, |
|||
although the host sector size can be a multiple of 128 bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
input: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data going into the computer, usually from an operator typing at |
|||
the terminal or by a program reading from the disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
input/output: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
I/O. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
interface: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Object that allows two independent systems to communicate with |
|||
each other, as an interface between hardware and software in a |
|||
microcomputer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
I/O: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Abbreviation for input/output. Usually refers to input/output |
|||
operations or routines handling the input and output of data in |
|||
the computer system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
IOBYTE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A one-byte field in page zero, currently at location 0003H, that |
|||
can support a logical-to-physical device mapping for I/O. |
|||
However, its implementation in your BIOS is purely optional and |
|||
might or might not be supported in a given CP/M system. The IOBYTE |
|||
is easily set using the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
STAT <logical device> = <physical device> |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
The CP/M logical devices are CON:, RDR:, PUN:, and LST:; each of |
|||
these can be assigned to one of four physical devices. The IOBYTE |
|||
can be initialized by the BOOT entry point of the BIOS and |
|||
interpreted by the BIOS I/O entry points CONST, CONIN, CONOUT, |
|||
LIST, PUNCH, and READER. Depending on the setting of the IOBYTE, |
|||
different I/O drivers can be selected by the BIOS. For example, |
|||
setting LST:=TTY: might cause LIST output to be directed to a |
|||
serial port, while setting LST:=LPT: causes LIST output to be |
|||
directed to a parallel port. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
K: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Abbreviation for kilobyte. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
kilobyte. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
keyword: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
command keyword. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
kilobyte (K): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
1024 bytes or 0400H bytes of memory. This is a standard unit of |
|||
memory. For example, the Intel 8080 supports up to 64K of memory |
|||
address space or 65,536 bytes. 1024 kilobytes equal one megabyte, |
|||
or over one million bytes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
linker: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Utility program used to combine relocatable object modules into |
|||
an absolute file ready for execution. For example, LINK-80 \ \ |
|||
creates either a COM or PRL file from relocatable REL files, such |
|||
as those produced by PL/I-80 \ \ . |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LIST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A BIOS entry point to a routine that sends a character to the |
|||
list device, usually a printer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
list device: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Device such as a printer onto which data can be listed or |
|||
printed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LISTST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that returns the ready status of |
|||
the list device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
loader: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Utility program that brings an absolute program image into memory |
|||
ready for execution under the operating system, or a utility used |
|||
to make such an image. For example, LOAD prepares an absolute |
|||
COM file from the assembler hex file output that is ready to be |
|||
executed under CP/M. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logged in: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Made known to the operating system, in reference to drives. A |
|||
drive is logged in when it is selected by the user or an |
|||
executing process. It remains selected or logged in until you |
|||
change disks in a floppy disk drive or enter CTRL-C at the |
|||
command level, or until a BDOS Function 0 is executed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logical: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Representation of something that might or might not be the same |
|||
in its actual physical form. For example, a hard disk can occupy |
|||
one physical drive, yet you can divide the available storage on |
|||
it to appear to the user as if it were in several different |
|||
drives. These apparent drives are the logical drives. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logical sector: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
logical-to-physical sector translation table: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
XLT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LSC: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Diskdef macro library parameter specifying the last physical |
|||
sector number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
LST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Logical CP/M list device, usually a printer. The CP/M list |
|||
device is an output-only device referenced through the LIST and |
|||
LISTST entry points of the BIOS. The STAT command allows |
|||
assignment of LST: to one of the physical devices: TTY:, CRT:, |
|||
LPT:, or UL1:, provided these devices and the IOBYTE are |
|||
implemented in the LIST and LISTST entry points of your CP/M BIOS |
|||
module. The CP/NET command NETWORK allows assignment of LST: to |
|||
a list device on a network master. For example, PIP LST:=TEST.SUB |
|||
prints the file TEST.SUB on the list device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
macro assembler: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Assembler code translator providing macro processing facilities. |
|||
Macro definitions allow groups of instructions to be stored and |
|||
substituted in the source program as the macro names are |
|||
encountered. Definitions and invocations can be nested and macro |
|||
parameters can be formed to pass arbitrary strings of text to a |
|||
specific macro for substitution during expansion. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
megabyte: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Over one million bytes; 1024 kilobytes. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
byte, \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
and \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
kilobyte. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
microprocessor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Silicon chip that is the central processing unit (CPU) of the |
|||
microcomputer. The Intel 8080 and the Zilog Z80 are |
|||
microprocessors commonly used in CP/M systems. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
MOVCPM image: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Memory image of the CP/M system created by MOVCPM. This image |
|||
can be saved as a disk file using the SAVE command or placed on |
|||
the system tracks using the SYSGEN command without specifying a |
|||
source drive. This image varies, depending on the presence of a |
|||
one-sector or two-sector boot. If the boot is less than 128 |
|||
bytes (one sector), the boot begins at 0900H, the CP/M system at |
|||
0980H, and the BIOS at 1F80H. Otherwise, the boot is at 0900H, |
|||
the CP/M system at 1000H, and the BIOS at 2000H. In a CP/M 1.4 |
|||
system with a one-sector boot, the addresses are the same as for |
|||
the CP/M 2 system--except that the BIOS begins at 1E80H instead |
|||
of 1F80H. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
MP/M: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Multi-Programming Monitor control program. A microcomputer |
|||
operating system supporting multi-terminal access with multi- |
|||
programming at each terminal. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
multi-programming: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
The capability of initiating and executing more than one program |
|||
at a time. These programs, usually called processes, are time-shared, |
|||
each receiving a slice of CPU time on a round-robin |
|||
basis. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
concurrency. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
nibble: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One half of a byte, usually the high-order or low-order 4 bits in |
|||
a byte. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
OFF: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Two-byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 13 bytes. |
|||
This value specifies the number of reserved system tracks. The |
|||
disk directory begins in the first sector of track OFF. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
OFS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Diskdef macro library parameter specifying the number of reserved |
|||
system tracks. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
OFF. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
operating system: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Collection of programs that supervises the execution of other |
|||
programs and the management of computer resources. An operating |
|||
system provides an orderly input/output environment between the |
|||
computer and its peripheral devices. It enables user-written |
|||
programs to execute safely. An operating system standardizes the |
|||
use of computer resources for the programs running under it. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
option: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One of many parameters that can be part of a command tail. Use |
|||
options to specify additional conditions for a command's |
|||
execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
output: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data that is sent to the console, disk, or printer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
page: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
256 consecutive bytes in memory beginning on a page boundary, |
|||
whose base address is a multiple of 256 (100H) bytes. In hex |
|||
notation, pages always begin at an address with a least |
|||
significant byte of zero. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
page relocatable program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
PRL. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
page zero: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Memory region between 0000H and 0100H used to hold critical |
|||
system parameters. Page zero functions primarily as an interface |
|||
region between user programs and the CP/M BDOS module. Note that |
|||
in non-standard systems this region is the base page of the |
|||
system and represents the first 256 bytes of memory used by the |
|||
CP/M system and user programs running under it. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
parameter: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Value in the command tail that provides additional information |
|||
for the command. Technically, a parameter is a required element |
|||
of a command. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
peripheral devices: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Devices external to the CPU. For example, terminals, printers, |
|||
and disk drives are common peripheral devices that are not part |
|||
of the processor but are used in conjunction with it. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
physical: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Characteristic of computer components, generally hardware, that |
|||
actually exist. In programs, physical components can be |
|||
represented by logical components. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
primary filename: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
First 8 characters of a filename. The primary filename is a |
|||
unique name that helps the user identify the file contents. A |
|||
primary filename contains one to eight characters and can include any |
|||
letter or number and some special characters. The primary |
|||
filename follows the optional drive specification and precedes |
|||
the optional filetype. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
PRL: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Page relocatable program. A page relocatable program is stored |
|||
on disk with a PRL filetype. Page relocatable programs are |
|||
easily relocated to any page boundary and thus are suitable for |
|||
execution in a nonbanked MP/M system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
program: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Series of coded instructions that performs specific tasks when |
|||
executed by a computer. A program can be written in a |
|||
processor-specific language or a high-level language that can be |
|||
implemented on a number of different processors. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
prompt: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Any characters displayed on the video screen to help the user |
|||
decide what the next appropriate action is. A system prompt is a |
|||
special prompt displayed by the operating |
|||
system. The alphabetic character indicates the default drive. Some |
|||
applications programs have their own special prompts. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M prompt. |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
PUN: |
|||
Logical CP/M punch device. The punch device is an output-only |
|||
device accessed through the PUNCH entry point of the BIOS. In |
|||
certain implementations, PUN: can be a serial device such as a |
|||
modem. |
|||
.sp |
|||
PUNCH: |
|||
BIOS entry point to a routine that sends a character to the punch |
|||
device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
RDR: |
|||
Logical CP/M reader device. The reader device is an input-only |
|||
device accessed through the READER entry point in the BIOS. |
|||
See |
|||
PUN:. |
|||
.sp |
|||
READ: |
|||
Entry point in the BIOS to a routine that reads 128 bytes from |
|||
the currently selected drive, track, and sector into the current |
|||
DMA address. |
|||
.sp |
|||
READER: |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that reads the next |
|||
character from the currently assigned reader device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Read-Only (R/O): |
|||
Attribute that can be assigned to a disk file or a disk drive. |
|||
When assigned to a file, the Read-Only attribute allows you to |
|||
read from that file but not write to it. When assigned to a |
|||
drive, the Read-Only attribute allows you to read any file on the |
|||
disk, but prevents you from adding a new file, erasing or changing |
|||
a file, renaming a file, or writing on the disk. The STAT |
|||
command can set a file or a drive to Read-Only. Every file and |
|||
drive is either Read-Only or Read-Write. The default setting for |
|||
drives and files is Read-Write, but an error in resetting the |
|||
disk or changing media automatically sets the drive to Read-Only |
|||
until the error is corrected. See also \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ROM. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Read-Write (R/W): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Attribute that can be assigned to a disk file or a disk drive. |
|||
The Read-Write attribute allows you to read from and write to a |
|||
specific Read-Write file or to any file on a disk that is in a |
|||
drive set to Read-Write. A file or drive can be set to either |
|||
Read-Only or Read-Write. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
record: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Group of bytes in a file. A physical record consists of 128 |
|||
bytes and is the basic unit of data transfer between the |
|||
operating system and the application program. A logical record |
|||
might vary in length and is used to represent a unit of |
|||
information. Two 64-byte employee records can be stored in one |
|||
128-byte physical record. Records are grouped together to form a |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
recursive procedure: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Code that can call itself during execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
reentrant procedure: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Code that can be called by one process while another is already |
|||
executing it. Thus, reentrant code can be shared between |
|||
different users. Reentrant procedures must not be self- |
|||
modifying; that is, they must be pure code and not contain data. |
|||
The data for reentrant procedures can be kept in a separate data |
|||
area or placed on the stack. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
restart (RST): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
One-byte call instruction usually used during interrupt sequences |
|||
and for debugger break pointing. There are eight restart |
|||
locations, RST 0 through RST 7, whose addresses are given by the |
|||
product of 8 times the restart number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
R/O: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
Read-Only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ROM: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Read-Only memory. This memory can be read but not written and so |
|||
is suitable for code and preinitialized data areas only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
RST: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
restart. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
R/W: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
Read-Write. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
In a CP/M system, a sector is always 128 consecutive bytes. A |
|||
sector is the basic unit of data read and written on the disk by |
|||
the BIOS. A sector can be one 128-byte record in a file or a |
|||
sector of the directory. The BDOS always requests a logical |
|||
sector number between 0 and (SPT-1). This is typically |
|||
translated into a physical sector by the BIOS entry point |
|||
SECTRAN. In some disk subsystems, the disk sector size is larger |
|||
than 128 bytes, usually a power of two, such as 256, 512, 1024, or |
|||
2048 bytes. These disk sectors are always referred to as host |
|||
sectors in CP/M documentation and should not be confused with |
|||
other references to sectors, in which cases the CP/M 128-byte |
|||
sectors should be assumed. When the host sector size is larger |
|||
than 128 bytes, host sectors must be buffered in memory and the |
|||
128-byte CP/M sectors must be blocked and deblocked from them. |
|||
This can be done by adding an additional module, the blocking and |
|||
deblocking algorithm, between the BIOS disk I/O routines and the |
|||
actual disk I/O. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
sectors per track (SPT): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A two-byte parameter in the disk parameter block at DPB + 0. The |
|||
BDOS makes calls to the BIOS entry point SECTRAN with logical |
|||
sector numbers ranging between 0 and (SPT - 1) in register BC. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SECTRAN: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that performs |
|||
logical-to-physical sector translation for the BDOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SELDSK: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SETDMA: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected DMA address. The DMA address is the address of a |
|||
128-byte buffer region in memory that is used to transfer data to |
|||
and from the disk in subsequent reads and writes. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SETSEC: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected sector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SETTRK: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that sets the currently |
|||
selected track. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
skew factor: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Factor that defines the logical-to-physical sector number |
|||
translation in XLT. Logical sector numbers are used by the BDOS |
|||
and range between 0 and (SPT - 1). Data is written in |
|||
consecutive logical 128-byte sectors grouped in data blocks. The |
|||
number of sectors per block is given by BLS/128. Physical |
|||
sectors on the disk media are also numbered consecutively. If |
|||
the physical sector size is also 128 bytes, a one-to-one |
|||
relationship exists between logical and physical sectors. The |
|||
logical-to-physical translation table (XLT) maps this |
|||
relationship, and a skew factor is typically used in generating |
|||
the table entries. For instance, if the skew factor is 6, XLT |
|||
will be: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Logical: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ... 25 |
|||
Physical: 1 7 13 19 25 5 11 ... 22 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The skew factor allows time for program processing without |
|||
missing the next sector. Otherwise, the system must wait for an |
|||
entire disk revolution before reading the next logical sector. |
|||
The skew factor can be varied, depending on hardware speed and |
|||
application processing overhead. Note that no sector translation |
|||
is done when the physical sectors are larger than 128 bytes, as |
|||
sector deblocking is done in this case. See also \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sector, SKF, \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
and \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
XLT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SKF: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A diskdef macro library parameter specifying the skew factor to |
|||
be used in building XLT. If SKF is zero, no translation table is |
|||
generated and the XLT byte in the DPH will be 0000H. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
software: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Programs that contain machine-readable instructions, as opposed |
|||
to hardware, which is the actual physical components of a |
|||
computer. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
source file: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
ASCII text file usually created with an editor that is an input |
|||
file to a system program, such as a language translator or text |
|||
formatter. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SP: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Stack pointer. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
stack. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
spooling: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Process of accumulating printer output in a file while the |
|||
printer is busy. The file is printed when the printer becomes |
|||
free; a program does not have to wait for the slow printing |
|||
process. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SPT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
sectors per track. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
stack: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Reserved area of memory where the processor saves the return |
|||
address when a call instruction is received. When a return |
|||
instruction is encountered, the processor restores the current |
|||
address on the stack to the program counter. Data such as the |
|||
contents of the registers can also be saved on the stack. The |
|||
push instruction places data on the stack and the pop instruction |
|||
removes it. An item is pushed onto the stack by decrementing the |
|||
stack pointer (SP) by 2 and writing the item at the SP address. |
|||
In other words, the stack grows downward in memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
syntax: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Format for entering a given command. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SYS: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
system attribute. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
SYSGEN image: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Memory image of the CP/M system created by SYSGEN when a |
|||
destination drive is not specified. This is the same as the |
|||
MOVCPM image that can be read by SYSGEN if a source drive is |
|||
not specified. See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
MOVCPM image. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
system attribute (SYS): \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
File attribute. You can give a file the system attribute by |
|||
using the SYS option in the STAT command or by using the set file |
|||
attributes function, BDOS Function 12. A file with the SYS |
|||
attribute is not displayed in response to a DIR command. If you |
|||
give a file with user number 0 the SYS attribute, you can read |
|||
and execute that file from any user number on the same drive. |
|||
Use this feature to make your commonly used programs available |
|||
under any user number. |
|||
.sp |
|||
system prompt: |
|||
Symbol displayed by the operating system indicating that the |
|||
system is ready to receive input. |
|||
See prompt and CP/M prompt. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
system tracks: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Tracks reserved on the disk for the CP/M system. The number of |
|||
system tracks is specified by the parameter OFF in the disk |
|||
parameter block (DPB). The system tracks for a drive always |
|||
precede its data tracks. The command SYSGEN copies the CP/M |
|||
system from the system tracks to memory, and vice versa. The |
|||
standard SYSGEN utility copies 26 sectors from track 0 and 26 |
|||
sectors from track 1. When the system tracks contain additional |
|||
sectors or tracks to be copied, a customized SYSGEN must be used. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
terminal: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
TPA: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Transient Program Area. Area in memory where user programs run |
|||
and store data. This area is a region of memory beginning at |
|||
0100H and extending to the base of the CP/M system in high |
|||
memory. The first module of the CP/M system is the CCP, which |
|||
can be overwritten by a user program. If so, the TPA is extended |
|||
to the base of the CP/M BDOS module. If the CCP is overwritten, |
|||
the user program must terminate with either a system reset |
|||
(Function 0) call or a jump to location zero in page zero. The |
|||
address of the base of the CP/M BDOS is stored in location 0006H |
|||
in page zero least significant byte first. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
track: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Data on the disk media is accessed by combination of track and |
|||
sector numbers. Tracks form concentric rings on the disk; the |
|||
standard IBM single-density disks have 77 tracks. Each track |
|||
consists of a fixed number of numbered sectors. Tracks are |
|||
numbered from zero to one less than the number of tracks on the |
|||
disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Transient Program Area: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
TPA. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
upward compatible: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Term meaning that a program created for the previously released |
|||
operating system, or compiler, runs under the newly released |
|||
version of the same operating system. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
USER: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Term used in CP/M and MP/M systems to distinguish distinct |
|||
regions of the directory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
user number: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Number assigned to files in the disk directory so that different |
|||
users need only deal with their own files and have their own |
|||
directories, even though they are all working from the same disk. |
|||
In CP/M, files can be divided into 16 user groups. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
utility: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Tool. Program that enables the user to perform certain |
|||
operations, such as copying files, erasing files, and editing |
|||
files. The utilities are created for the convenience of |
|||
programmers and users. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
vector: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Location in memory. An entry point into the operating system |
|||
used for making system calls or interrupt handling. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
warm start: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program termination by a jump to the warm start vector at |
|||
location 0000H, a system reset (BDOS Function 0), or a CTRL-C |
|||
typed at the keyboard. A warm start reinitializes the disk |
|||
subsystem and returns control to the CP/M operating system at the |
|||
CCP level. The warm start vector is simply a jump to the WBOOT |
|||
entry point in the BIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
WBOOT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS used when a warm start |
|||
occurs. A warm start is performed when a user program branches |
|||
to location 0000H, when the CPU is reset from the front panel, or |
|||
when the user types CTRL-C. The CCP and BDOS are reloaded from |
|||
the system tracks of drive A. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
wildcard characters: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Special characters that match certain specified items. In CP/M |
|||
there are two wildcard characters: ? and *. The ? can be |
|||
substituted for any single character in a filename, and the * can |
|||
be substituted for the primary filename, the filetype, or both. |
|||
By placing wildcard characters in filenames, the user creates an |
|||
ambiguous filename and can quickly reference one or more files. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
word: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
16-bit or two-byte value, such as an address value. Although the |
|||
Intel 8080 is an 8-bit CPU, addresses occupy two bytes and are |
|||
called word values. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
WRITE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Entry point to a routine in the BIOS that writes the record at |
|||
the currently selected DMA address to the currently selected |
|||
drive, track, and sector. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
XLT: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Logical-to-physical sector translation table located in the BIOS. |
|||
SECTRAN uses XLT to perform logical-to-physical sector number |
|||
translation. XLT also refers to the two-byte address in the disk |
|||
parameter header at DPBASE + 0. If this parameter is zero, no |
|||
sector translation takes place. Otherwise this parameter is the |
|||
address of the translation table. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
ZERO PAGE: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
See \c |
|||
.sh |
|||
page zero. |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Appendix H |
|||
.nx appi |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,939 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft I-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc I CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendix I |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.qs |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual I CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Messages come from several different sources. CP/M displays |
|||
error messages when there are errors in calls to the Basic Disk |
|||
Operating System (BDOS). CP/M also displays messages when there |
|||
are errors in command lines. Each utility supplied with CP/M has |
|||
its own set of messages. The following lists CP/M messages and |
|||
utility messages. One might see messages other than those listed |
|||
here if one is running an application program. Check the |
|||
application program's documentation for explanations of those |
|||
messages. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. CP/M Error Messages |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
? |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. This message has four possible meanings: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 23 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o DDT does not understand the assembly language instruction. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o The file cannot be opened. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o A checksum error occurred in a HEX file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o The assembler/disassembler was overlayed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ABORTED |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You stopped a PIP operation by pressing a key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ASM Error Messages |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
D Data error: data statement element cannot be placed in |
|||
specified data area. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
E Expression error: expression cannot be evaluated during |
|||
assembly. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
L Label error: label cannot appear in this context (might be |
|||
duplicate label). |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM Error Messages (continued) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
N Not implemented: unimplemented features, such as macros, are |
|||
trapped. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
O Overflow: expression is too complex to evaluate. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
P Phase error: label value changes on two passes through |
|||
assembly. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
R Register error: the value specified as a register is |
|||
incompatible with the code. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
S Syntax error: improperly formed expression. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
U Undefined label: label used does not exist. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
V Value error: improperly formed operand encountered in an |
|||
expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
BAD DELIMITER |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. Check command line for typing errors. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bad Load |
|||
.sp |
|||
CCP error message, or SAVE error message. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: |
|||
.sp |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System error on the designated drive: CP/M |
|||
replaces d: with the drive specification of the drive where the |
|||
error occurred. This message is followed by one of the four |
|||
phrases in the situations described below. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: Bad Sector |
|||
.sp |
|||
This message appears when CP/M finds no disk in the drive, when |
|||
the disk is improperly formatted, when the drive latch is open, |
|||
or when power to the drive is off. Check for one of these |
|||
situations and try again. This could also indicate a hardware |
|||
problem or a worn or improperly formatted disk. Press ^C to |
|||
terminate the program and return to CP/M, or press RETURN |
|||
to ignore the error. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: File R/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
You tried to erase, rename, or set file attributes on a Read-Only |
|||
file. The file should first be set to Read-Write (R/W) with the |
|||
command: STAT filespec $R/W. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err On d: R/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
Drive has been assigned Read-Only status with a STAT command, or |
|||
the disk in the drive has been changed without being initialized |
|||
with a ^C. CP/M terminates the current program as soon as you |
|||
press any key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Bdos Err on d: Select |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M received a command line specifying a nonexistent drive. |
|||
CP/M terminates the current program as soon as you press any key. |
|||
Press RETURN or CTRL-C to recover. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Break "x" at c |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. "x" is one of the symbols described below and c is the |
|||
command letter being executed when the error occurred. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
# Search failure. ED cannot find the string specified in an F, |
|||
S, or N command. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
? Unrecognized command letter c. ED does not recognize the |
|||
indicated command letter, or an E, H, Q, or O command is not |
|||
alone on its command line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
O The file specified in an R command cannot be found. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
> Buffer full. ED cannot put any more characters in the memory |
|||
buffer, or the string specified in an F, N, or S command is too |
|||
long. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
E Command aborted. A keystroke at the console aborted command |
|||
execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Break "x" at c (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
F Disk or directory full. This error is followed by either the |
|||
disk or directory full message. Refer to the recovery procedures |
|||
listed under these messages. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CANNOT CLOSE DESTINATION FILE--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. An output file cannot be closed. You should take |
|||
appropriate action after checking to see if the correct disk is |
|||
in the drive and that the disk is not write-protected. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
Cannot close, R/O |
|||
CANNOT CLOSE FILES |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M cannot write to the file. This usually occurs because the |
|||
disk is write-protected. |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. An output file cannot be closed. This is a fatal error |
|||
that terminates ASM execution. Check to see that the disk is in |
|||
the drive, and that the disk is not write-protected. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
DDT. The disk file written by a W command cannot be closed. |
|||
This is a fatal error that terminates DDT execution. Check if |
|||
the correct disk is in the drive and that the disk is not write-protected. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. This error can occur during SUBMIT file processing. |
|||
Check if the correct system disk is in the A drive and that the |
|||
disk is not write-protected. The SUBMIT job can be restarted |
|||
after rebooting CP/M. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CANNOT READ |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP cannot read the specified source. Reader cannot be |
|||
implemented. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CANNOT WRITE |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The destination specified in the PIP command is illegal. |
|||
You probably specified an input device as a destination. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Checksum error |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. A HEX record checksum error was encountered. The HEX |
|||
record that produced the error must be corrected, probably by |
|||
recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
CHECKSUM ERROR |
|||
LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
ERROR ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
BYTES READ: |
|||
hhhh: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. File contains incorrect data. Regenerate HEX file from |
|||
the source. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Command Buffer Overflow |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The SUBMIT buffer allows up to 2048 characters in the |
|||
input file. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Command too long |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. A command in the SUBMIT file cannot exceed 125 |
|||
characters. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
CORRECT ERROR, TYPE RETURN OR CTRL-Z |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. A HEX record checksum was encountered during the transfer |
|||
of a HEX file. The HEX file with the checksum error should be |
|||
corrected, probably by recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
DESTINATION IS R/O, DELETE (Y/N)? |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The destination file specified in a PIP command already |
|||
exists and it is Read-Only. If you type Y, the destination file |
|||
is deleted before the file copy is done. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Directory full |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. There is not enough directory space for the file being |
|||
written to the destination disk. You can use the OXfilespec |
|||
command to erase any unnecessary files on the disk without |
|||
leaving the editor. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. There is not enough directory space to write the $$$.SUB |
|||
file used for processing SUBMITs. Erase some files or select a |
|||
new disk and retry. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Disk full |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. There is not enough disk space for the output file. This |
|||
error can occur on the W, E, H, or X commands. If it occurs with |
|||
X command, you can repeat the command prefixing the filename with |
|||
a different drive. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
DISK READ ERROR--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The input disk file specified in a PIP command cannot be |
|||
read properly. This is usually the result of an unexpected end-of-file. |
|||
Correct the problem in your file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
DISK WRITE ERROR--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. A disk write operation cannot be successfully performed |
|||
during a W command, probably due to a full disk. You should |
|||
either erase some unnecessary files or get another disk with more |
|||
space. |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. A disk write operation cannot be successfully performed |
|||
during a PIP command, probably due to a full disk. You should |
|||
either erase some unnecessary files or get another disk with more |
|||
space and execute PIP again. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The SUBMIT program cannot write the $$$.SUB file to the |
|||
disk. Erase some files, or select a new disk and try again. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: BAD PARAMETER |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You entered an illegal parameter in a PIP command. Retype |
|||
the entry correctly. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: CANNOT OPEN SOURCE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Displayed if LOAD cannot find the specified file or if no |
|||
filename is specified. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: CANNOT CLOSE FILE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Caused by an error code returned by a BDOS function call. |
|||
Disk might be write-protected. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: CANNOT OPEN SOURCE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Cannot find source file. Check disk directory. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: DISK READ, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Caused by an error code returned by a BDOS function call. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: DISK WRITE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Destination disk is full. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: INVERTED LOAD ADDRESS, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. The address of a record was too far from the address of |
|||
the previously-processed record. This is an internal limitation |
|||
of LOAD, but it can be circumvented. Use DDT to read the HEX |
|||
file into memory, then use a SAVE command to store the memory |
|||
image file on disk. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
ERROR: NO MORE DIRECTORY SPACE, LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. Disk directory is full. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Error on line nnn message |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The SUBMIT program displays its messages in the format |
|||
shown above, where nnn represents the line number of the SUBMIT |
|||
file. Refer to the message following the line number. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
FILE ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. Disk or directory is full, and ED cannot write anything more |
|||
on the disk. This is a fatal error, so make sure there is enough |
|||
space on the disk to hold a second copy of the file before |
|||
invoking ED. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
FILE EXISTS |
|||
.sp |
|||
You have asked CP/M to create or rename a file using a file |
|||
specification that is already assigned to another file. Either |
|||
delete the existing file or use another file specification. |
|||
.sp |
|||
REN. The new name specified is the name of a file that already |
|||
exists. You cannot rename a file with the name of an existing |
|||
file. If you want to replace an existing file with a newer |
|||
version of the same file, either rename or erase the existing |
|||
file, or use the PIP utility. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
File exists, erase it |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. The destination filename already exists when you are placing |
|||
the destination file on a different disk than the source. It |
|||
should be erased or another disk selected to receive the output |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
** FILE IS READ/ONLY ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. The file specified in the command to invoke ED has the |
|||
Read-Only attribute. Ed can read the file so that the user can |
|||
examine it, but ED cannot change a Read-Only file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
File Not Found |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M cannot find the specified file. Check that you have entered |
|||
the correct drive specification or that you have the correct disk |
|||
in the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. ED cannot find the specified file. Check that you have |
|||
entered the correct drive specification or that you have the |
|||
correct disk in the drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. STAT cannot find the specified file. The message might |
|||
appear if you omit the drive specification. Check to see if the |
|||
correct disk is in the drive. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
FILE NOT FOUND--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
PIP. An input file that you have specified does not exist. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Filename required |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED. You typed the ED command without a filename. Reenter the ED |
|||
command followed by the name of the file you want to edit or |
|||
create. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
hhhh??=dd |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. The ?? indicates DDT does not know how to represent the |
|||
hexadecimal value dd encountered at address hhhh in 8080 assembly |
|||
language. dd is not an 8080 machine instruction opcode. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Insufficient memory |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. There is not enough memory to load the file specified in an |
|||
R or E command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid Assignment |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. You specified an invalid drive or file assignment, or |
|||
misspelled a device name. This error message might be followed |
|||
by a list of the valid file assignments that can follow a |
|||
filename. If an invalid drive assignment was attempted the |
|||
message Use: d:=RO is displayed, showing the proper syntax for |
|||
drive assignments. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid control character |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. The only valid control characters in the SUBMIT files of |
|||
the type SUB are ^ A through ^ Z. Note that in a SUBMIT file the |
|||
control character is represented by typing the circumflex, ^, not |
|||
by pressing the control key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID DIGIT--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. An invalid HEX digit has been encountered while reading a |
|||
HEX file. The HEX file with the invalid HEX digit should be |
|||
corrected, probably by recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid Disk Assignment |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. Might appear if you follow the drive specification with |
|||
anything except =R/O. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID DISK SELECT |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M received a command line specifying a nonexistent drive, or |
|||
the disk in the drive is improperly formatted. CP/M terminates |
|||
the current program as soon as you press any key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID DRIVE NAME (Use A, B, C, or D) |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. SYSGEN recognizes only drives A, B, C, and D as valid |
|||
destinations for system generation. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Invalid File Indicator |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. Appears if you do not specify RO, RW, DIR, or SYS. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID FORMAT |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The format of your PIP command is illegal. See the |
|||
description of the PIP command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
INVALID HEX DIGIT |
|||
LOAD ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
ERROR ADDRESS hhhh |
|||
BYTES READ: |
|||
hhhh |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
LOAD. File contains incorrect HEX digit. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID MEMORY SIZE |
|||
.sp |
|||
MOVCPM. Specify a value less than 64K or your computer's actual |
|||
memory size. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID SEPARATOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You have placed an invalid character for a separator |
|||
between two input filenames. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
INVALID USER NUMBER |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. You have specified a user number greater than 15. User |
|||
numbers are in the range 0 to 15. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
n? |
|||
.sp |
|||
USER. You specified a number greater than fifteen for a user |
|||
area number. For example, if you type USER 18<cr>, the screen |
|||
displays 18?. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO DIRECTORY SPACE |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The disk directory is full. Erase some files to make room |
|||
for PRN and HEX files. The directory can usually hold only 64 |
|||
filenames. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO DIRECTORY SPACE--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. There is not enough directory space for the output file. |
|||
You should either erase some unnecessary files or get another |
|||
disk with more directory space and execute PIP again. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO FILE--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
DIR, ERA, REN, PIP. CP/M cannot find the specified file, or no |
|||
files exist. |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The indicated source or include file cannot be found on the |
|||
indicated drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT. The file specified in an R or E command cannot be found on |
|||
the disk. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO INPUT FILE PRESENT ON DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
DUMP. The file you requested does not exist. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
No memory |
|||
.sp |
|||
There is not enough (buffer?) memory available for loading the |
|||
program specified. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO SOURCE FILE ON DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. SYSGEN cannot find CP/M either in CPMxx.com form or on |
|||
the system tracks of the source disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO SOURCE FILE PRESENT |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The assembler cannot find the file you specified. Either |
|||
you mistyped the file specification in your command line, or the |
|||
filetype is not ASM. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NO SPACE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SAVE. Too many files are already on the disk, or no room is left |
|||
on the disk to save the information. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
No SUB file present |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. For SUBMIT to operate properly, you must create a file |
|||
with filetype of SUB. The SUB file contains usual CP/M commands. |
|||
Use one command per line. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NOT A CHARACTER SOURCE |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The source specified in your PIP command is illegal. You |
|||
have probably specified an output device as a source. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
** NOT DELETED ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP did not delete the file, which might have had the R/O |
|||
attribute. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
NOT FOUND |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP cannot find the specified file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
OUTPUT FILE WRITE ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. You specified a write-protected disk as the destination for |
|||
the PRN and HEX files, or the disk has no space left. Correct |
|||
the problem before assembling your program. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Parameter error |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. Within the SUBMIT file of type sub, valid parameters are |
|||
$0 through $9. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
PARAMETER ERROR, TYPE RETURN TO IGNORE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. If you press RETURN, SYSGEN proceeds without processing |
|||
the invalid parameter. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
QUIT NOT FOUND |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The string argument to a Q parameter was not found in your |
|||
input file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Read error |
|||
.sp |
|||
TYPE. An error occurred when reading the file specified in the |
|||
type command. Check the disk and try again. The STAT filespec |
|||
command can diagnose trouble. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
READER STOPPING |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. Reader operation interrupted. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Record Too Long |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. PIP cannot process a record longer than 128 bytes. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Requires CP/M 2.0 or later |
|||
.sp |
|||
XSUB. XSUB requires the facilities of CP/M 2.0 or newer version. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Requires CP/M 2.0 or new for operation |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. This version of PIP requires the facilities of CP/M 2.0 or |
|||
newer version. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
START NOT FOUND |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. The string argument to an S parameter cannot be found in |
|||
the source file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SOURCE FILE INCOMPLETE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN. SYSGEN cannot use your CP/M source file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SOURCE FILE NAME ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. When you assemble a file, you cannot use the wildcard |
|||
characters * and ? in the filename. Only one file can be |
|||
assembled at a time. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SOURCE FILE READ ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
ASM. The assembler cannot understand the information in the file |
|||
containing the assembly-language program. Portions of another |
|||
file might have been written over your assembly-language file, or |
|||
information was not properly saved on the disk. Use the TYPE |
|||
command to locate the error. Assembly-language files contain the |
|||
letters, symbols, and numbers that appear on your keyboard. If |
|||
your screen displays unrecognizable output or behaves strangely, |
|||
you have found where computer instructions have crept into your |
|||
file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
SYNCHRONIZATION ERROR |
|||
.sp |
|||
MOVCPM. The MOVCPM utility is being used with the wrong CP/M |
|||
system. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
"SYSTEM" FILE NOT ACCESSIBLE |
|||
.sp |
|||
You tried to access a file set to SYS with the STAT command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
** TOO MANY FILES ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. There is not enough memory for STAT to sort the files |
|||
specified, or more than 512 files were specified. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
UNEXPECTED END OF HEX FILE--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. An end-of-file was encountered prior to a termination HEX |
|||
record. The HEX file without a termination record should be |
|||
corrected, probably by recreating the HEX file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Unrecognized Destination |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. Check command line for valid destination. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Use: STAT d:=RO |
|||
.sp |
|||
STAT. An invalid STAT drive command was given. The only valid |
|||
drive assignment in STAT is STAT d:=RO. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
VERIFY ERROR:--{filespec} |
|||
.sp |
|||
PIP. When copying with the V option, PIP found a difference when |
|||
rereading the data just written and comparing it to the data in |
|||
its memory buffer. Usually this indicates a failure of either |
|||
the destination disk or drive. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
WRONG CP/M VERSION (REQUIRES 2.0) |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
XSUB ACTIVE |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. XSUB has been invoked. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table I-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Message Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 20 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
XSUB ALREADY PRESENT |
|||
.sp |
|||
SUBMIT. XSUB is already active in memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
Your input? |
|||
.sp |
|||
If CP/M cannot find the command you specified, it returns the |
|||
command name you entered followed by a question mark. Check that |
|||
you have typed the command line correctly, or that the command |
|||
you requested exists as a .COM file on the default or specified |
|||
disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Appendix I |
|||
|
|||
Binary file not shown.
@ -1,671 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 5-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 5 |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.qs |
|||
.tc 5 CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.1 Introduction |
|||
.tc 5.1 Introduction |
|||
5.1 Introduction |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
This chapter describes CP/M (release 2) system organization including the |
|||
structure of memory and system entry points. This section provides |
|||
the information you need to write programs that operate under CP/M and |
|||
that use the peripheral and disk I/O facilities of the system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M is logically divided into four parts, called the Basic Input/Output |
|||
System (BIOS), the Basic Disk Operating System (BDOS), the Console Command |
|||
Processor (CCP), and the Transient Program Area (TPA). The BIOS is a |
|||
hardware-dependent module that defines the exact low level interface with a |
|||
particular computer system that is necessary for peripheral device I/O. |
|||
Although a standard BIOS is supplied by Digital Research, explicit |
|||
instructions are provided for field reconfiguration of the BIOS to match |
|||
nearly any hardware environment, see Section 6. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The BIOS and BDOS are |
|||
logically combined into a single module with a common entry point and |
|||
referred to as the FDOS. The CCP is a distinct program that uses the FDOS to |
|||
provide a human-oriented interface with the information that is cataloged on |
|||
the back-up storage device. The TPA is an area of memory, |
|||
not used by the FDOS and CCP, where various nonresident operating |
|||
system commands and user programs are executed. The lower portion of memory |
|||
is reserved for system information and is detailed in later sections. Memory |
|||
organization of the CP/M system is shown in Figure 5-1. |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
High |
|||
Memory FDOS (BDOS+BIOS) |
|||
FBASE: |
|||
|
|||
CCP |
|||
CBASE: |
|||
|
|||
TPA |
|||
TBASE: |
|||
|
|||
System Parameters |
|||
BOOT: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figure 5-1. CP/M Memory Organization |
|||
.qs |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The exact memory addresses corresponding to BOOT, TBASE, CBASE, and FBASE |
|||
vary from version to version and are described fully in Section 6. All |
|||
standard CP/M versions assume BOOT=0000H, which is the base of |
|||
random access memory. The machine code found at location BOOT performs a |
|||
system warm start, which loads and initializes the programs and variables |
|||
necessary to return control to the CCP. Thus, transient programs need only |
|||
jump to location BOOT to return control to CP/M at the command level. |
|||
Further, the standard versions assume TBASE=BOOT+0100H, which is normally |
|||
location 0100H. The principal entry point to the FDOS is at location |
|||
BOOT+0005H (normally 0005H) where a jump to FBASE is found. The address |
|||
field at BOOT+0006H (normally 0006H) contains the value of FBASE and can be |
|||
used to determine the size of available memory, assuming that the CCP is |
|||
being overlaid by a transient program. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Transient programs are loaded into the TPA and executed as follows. The |
|||
operator communicates with the CCP by typing command lines following each |
|||
prompt. Each command line takes one of the following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
command |
|||
command file1 |
|||
command file1 file2 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where command is either a built-in function, such as DIR or TYPE, or the name |
|||
of a transient command or program. If the command is a built-in function of |
|||
CP/M, it is executed immediately. Otherwise, the CCP searches the currently |
|||
addressed disk for a file by the name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
command.COM |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the file is found, it is assumed to be a memory image of a program that |
|||
executes in the TPA and thus implicity originates at TBASE in memory. The |
|||
CCP loads the COM file from the disk into memory starting at TBASE and can |
|||
extend up to CBASE. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the command is followed by one or two file specifications, the CCP prepares |
|||
one or two File Control Block (FCB) names in the system |
|||
parameter area. These optional FCBs are in the form necessary to |
|||
access files through the FDOS and are described in Section 5.2. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The transient program receives control from the CCP and begins |
|||
execution, using the I/O facilities of the FDOS. The transient |
|||
program is called from the CCP. Thus, it can simply return to the CCP upon |
|||
completion of its processing, or can jump to BOOT to pass control back to |
|||
CP/M. In the first case, the transient program must not use memory above |
|||
CBASE, while in the latter case, memory up through FBASE-1 can be used. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The transient program can use the CP/M I/O facilities to communicate with the |
|||
operator's console and peripheral devices, including the disk subsystem. The |
|||
I/O system is accessed by passing a function number and an information address |
|||
to CP/M through the FDOS entry point at BOOT+0005H. In the case of a disk |
|||
read, for example, the transient program sends the number corresponding to a |
|||
disk read, along with the address of an FCB to the CP/M FDOS. The FDOS, in |
|||
turn, performs the operation and returns with either a disk read completion |
|||
indication or an error number indicating that the disk read was unsuccessful. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 5.2 Operating System Call Conventions |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.2 Call Conventions |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.2 Operating System Call Conventions |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
This section provides detailed information for performing direct operating |
|||
system calls from user programs. Many of the functions listed below, however, |
|||
are accessed more simply through the I/O macro library provided with the |
|||
MAC macro assembler and listed in the Digital Research manual |
|||
entitled, \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
Programmer's Utilities Guide for the CP/M Family of Operating Systems. |
|||
.qu |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M facilities that are available for access by transient programs fall into |
|||
two general categories: simple device I/O and disk file I/O. The simple |
|||
device operations are |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o read a console character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o write a console character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o read a sequential character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o write a sequential character |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o get or set I/O status |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o print console buffer |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o interrogate console ready |
|||
.sp |
|||
The following FDOS operations perform disk I/O: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o disk system reset |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o drive selection |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file creation |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file close |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o directory search |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file delete |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o file rename |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o random or sequential read |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o random or sequential write |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o interrogate available disks |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o interrogate selected disk |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o set DMA address |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o set/reset file indicators. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
As mentioned above, access to the FDOS functions is accomplished by passing |
|||
a function number and information address through the primary point at |
|||
location BOOT+0005H. In general, the function number is passed in register C |
|||
with the information address in the double byte pair DE. Single byte values |
|||
are returned in register A, with double byte values returned in HL, a zero |
|||
value is returned when the function number is out of range. For reasons of |
|||
compatibility, register A = L and register B = H upon return in all cases. |
|||
Note that the register passing conventions of CP/M agree with |
|||
those of the Intel PL/M systems programming language. CP/M functions and |
|||
their numbers are listed below. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
O System Reset 19 Delete File |
|||
1 Console Input 20 Read Sequential |
|||
2 Console Output 21 Write Sequential |
|||
3 Reader Input 22 Make File |
|||
4 Punch Output 23 Rename File |
|||
5 List Output 24 Return Login Vector |
|||
6 Direct Console I/O 25 Return Current Disk |
|||
7 Get I/O Byte 26 Set DMA Address |
|||
8 Set I/O Byte 27 Get Addr(Alloc) |
|||
9 Print String 28 Write Protect Disk |
|||
10 Read Console Buffer 29 Get R/0 Vector |
|||
11 Get Console Status 30 Set File Attributes |
|||
12 Return Version Number 31 Get Addr(Disk Parms) |
|||
13 Reset Disk System 32 Set/Get User Code |
|||
14 Select Disk 33 Read Random |
|||
15 Open File 34 Write Random |
|||
16 Close File 35 Compute File Size |
|||
17 Search for First 36 Set Random Record |
|||
18 Search for Next 37 Reset Drive |
|||
40 Write Random with Zero Fill |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Functions 28 and 32 should be avoided in application programs to |
|||
maintain upward compatibility with CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon entry to a transient program, the CCP leaves the stack |
|||
pointer set to an eight-level stack area with the CCP return |
|||
address pushed onto the stack, leaving seven levels before |
|||
overflow occurs. Although this stack is usually not used by a |
|||
transient program (most transients return to the CCP |
|||
through a jump to location 0000H) it is large enough to |
|||
make CP/M system calls because the FDOS switches to a local stack |
|||
at system entry. For example, the assembly-language program segment below |
|||
reads characters continuously until an asterisk is |
|||
encountered, at which time control returns to the CCP, assuming a |
|||
standard CP/M system with BOOT = 0000H. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
BDOS EQU 0005H ;STANDARD CP/M ENTRY |
|||
CONIN EQU 1 ;CONSOLE INPUT FUNCTION |
|||
; |
|||
ORG 0100H ;BASE OF TPA |
|||
NEXTC: MVI C,CONIN ;READ NEXT CHARACTER |
|||
CALL BDOS ;RETURN CHARACTER IN <A> |
|||
CPI '*' ;END OF PROCESSING? |
|||
JNZ NEXTC ;LOOP IF NOT |
|||
RET ;RETURN TO CCP |
|||
END |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M implements a named file structure on each disk, providing a |
|||
logical organization that allows any particular file to contain |
|||
any number of records from completely empty to the full capacity |
|||
of the drive. Each drive is logically distinct with a disk |
|||
directory and file data area. The disk filenames are in three |
|||
parts: the drive select code, the filename (consisting of one to |
|||
eight nonblank characters), and the filetype (consisting of zero |
|||
to three nonblank characters). The filetype names the generic |
|||
category of a particular file, while the filename distinguishes |
|||
individual files in each category. The filetypes listed in Table 5-1 |
|||
name a few generic categories that have been established, |
|||
although they are somewhat arbitrary. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-1. CP/M Filetypes |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Filetype Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 30 |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
ASM Assembler Source |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
PRN Printer Listing |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
HEX Hex Machine Code |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
BAS Basic Source File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
INT Intermediate Code |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
COM Command File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
PLI PL/I Source File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
REL Relocatable Module |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
TEX TEX Formatter Source |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
BAK ED Source Backup |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
SYM SID Symbol File |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
$$$ Temporary File |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Source files are treated as a sequence of ASCII characters, where |
|||
each line of the source file is followed by a carriage return, and |
|||
line-feed sequence (0DH followed by 0AH). Thus, one 128-byte CP/M |
|||
record can contain several lines of source text. The end of an |
|||
ASCII file is denoted by a CTRL-Z character (1AH) or a real |
|||
end-of-file returned by the CP/M read operation. CTRL-Z characters embedded |
|||
within machine code files (for example, COM files) are ignored and |
|||
the end-of-file condition returned by CP/M is used to terminate |
|||
read operations. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Files in CP/M can be thought of as a sequence of up to 65536 |
|||
records of 128 bytes each, numbered from 0 through 65535, thus |
|||
allowing a maximum of 8 megabytes per file. Note, however, |
|||
that although the records may be considered logically |
|||
contiguous, they may not be physically contiguous in the disk |
|||
data area. Internally, all files are divided into 16K byte |
|||
segments called logical extents, so that counters are easily |
|||
maintained as 8-bit values. The division into extents is |
|||
discussed in the paragraphs that follow: however, they are not |
|||
particularly significant for the programmer, because each extent is |
|||
automatically accessed in both sequential and random access |
|||
modes. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the file operations starting with Function 15, DE |
|||
usually addresses a FCB. Transient programs |
|||
often use the default FCB area reserved by CP/M at |
|||
location BOOT+005CH (normally 005CH) for simple file operations. |
|||
The basic unit of file information is a 128-byte record used for |
|||
all file operations. Thus, a default location for disk I/O is |
|||
provided by CP/M at location BOOT+0080H (normally 0080H) which |
|||
is the initial default DMA address. See Function 26. |
|||
.pp |
|||
All directory operations take place in a reserved area that does not |
|||
affect write buffers as was the case in release 1, with the |
|||
exception of Search First and Search Next, where compatibility is |
|||
required. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The FCB data area consists of a sequence of 33 bytes for |
|||
sequential access and a series of 36 bytes in the case when the |
|||
file is accessed randomly. The default FCB, normally located at |
|||
005CH, can be used for random access files, because the three bytes |
|||
starting at BOOT+007DH are available for this purpose. Figure 5-2 shows |
|||
the FCB format with the following fields. |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
dr f1 f2 / / f8 t1 t2 t3 ex s1 s2 rc d0 / / dn cr r0 r1 r2 |
|||
00 01 02 ... 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ... 31 32 33 34 35 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figure 5-2. File Control Block Format |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
The following table lists and describes each of the fields in the File Control |
|||
Block figure. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-2. File Control Block Fields |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Field Definition |
|||
.sp |
|||
dr drive code (0-16) |
|||
0 = use default drive for file |
|||
1 = auto disk select drive A, |
|||
2 = auto disk select drive B, |
|||
. |
|||
. |
|||
. |
|||
16= auto disk select drive P. |
|||
.sp |
|||
f1...f8 contain the filename in ASCII |
|||
upper-case, with high bit = 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
t1, t2, t3 contain the filetype in ASCII |
|||
upper-case, with high bit = 0 |
|||
t1', t2', and t3' denote the |
|||
bit of these positions, |
|||
t1' = 1 =>Read-Only file, |
|||
t2' = 1 =>SYS file, no DIR list |
|||
.sp |
|||
ex contains the current extent |
|||
number, normally set to 00 by |
|||
the user, but in range 0-31 |
|||
during file I/O |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-2. (continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Field Definition |
|||
.sp |
|||
s1 reserved for internal system use |
|||
.sp |
|||
s2 reserved for internal system use, |
|||
set to zero on call to OPEN, MAKE, |
|||
SEARCH |
|||
.sp |
|||
rc record count for extent ex; |
|||
takes on values from 0-127 |
|||
.sp |
|||
d0...dn filled in by CP/M; reserved for |
|||
system use |
|||
.sp |
|||
cr current record to read or write in |
|||
a sequential file operation; |
|||
normally set to zero by user |
|||
.sp |
|||
r0, r1, r2 optional random record number in |
|||
the range 0-65535, with overflow |
|||
to r2, r0, r1 constitute a 16-bit |
|||
value with low byte r0, and high |
|||
byte r1 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Each file being accessed through CP/M must have a corresponding |
|||
FCB, which provides the name and allocation information for all |
|||
subsequent file operations. When accessing files, it is the |
|||
programmer's responsibility to fill the lower 16 bytes of the FCB |
|||
and initialize the cr field. Normally, bytes 1 through 11 are |
|||
set to the ASCII character values for the filename and filetype, |
|||
while all other fields are zero. |
|||
.pp |
|||
FCBs are stored in a directory area of the disk, and are brought |
|||
into central memory before the programmer proceeds with file |
|||
operations (see the OPEN and MAKE functions). The memory copy of |
|||
the FCB is updated as file operations take place and later |
|||
recorded permanently on disk at the termination of the file |
|||
operation, (see the CLOSE command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CCP constructs the first 16 bytes of two optional FCBs for a |
|||
transient by scanning the remainder of the line following the |
|||
transient name, denoted by file1 and file2 in the prototype |
|||
command line described above, with unspecified fields set to |
|||
ASCII blanks. The first FCB is constructed at location |
|||
BOOT+005CH and can be used as is for subsequent file operations. |
|||
The second FCB occupies the d0...dn portion of the first FCB and |
|||
must be moved to another area of memory before use. If, for |
|||
example, the following command line is typed: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PROGNAME B:X.ZOT Y.ZAP |
|||
.bp |
|||
the file PROGNAME.COM is loaded into the TPA, and the default FCB |
|||
at BOOT+005CH is initialized to drive code 2, filename X, and |
|||
filetype ZOT. The second drive code takes the default value 0, |
|||
which is placed at BOOT-006CH, with the filename Y placed into |
|||
location BOOT+006DH and filetype ZAP located 8 bytes later at |
|||
BOOT+0075H. All remaining fields through cr are set to zero. |
|||
Note again that it is the programmer's |
|||
responsibility to move this second filename and filetype to another |
|||
area, usually a separate file control block, before opening the |
|||
file that begins at BOOT+005CH, because the open operation |
|||
overwrites the second name and type. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If no filenames are specified in the original command, the |
|||
fields beginning at BOOT+005DH and BOOT+006DH contain blanks. In |
|||
all cases, the CCP translates lower-case alphabetics to upper-case |
|||
to be consistent with the CP/M file naming conventions. |
|||
.pp |
|||
As an added convenience, the default buffer area at location |
|||
BOOT+0080H is initialized to the command line tail typed by the |
|||
operator following the program name. The first position contains |
|||
the number of characters, with the characters themselves |
|||
following the character count. Given the above command line, the |
|||
area beginning at BOOT+0080H is initialized as follows: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
BOOT+0080H: |
|||
.sp |
|||
+00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +A +B +C +D +E |
|||
E '' 'B' ':' 'X' '.' 'Z' 'O' 'T' '' 'Y' '.' 'Z' 'A' 'P' |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
where the characters are translated to upper-case ASCII with |
|||
uninitialized memory following the last valid character. Again, |
|||
it is the responsibility of the programmer to extract the |
|||
information from this buffer before any file operations are |
|||
performed, unless the default DMA address is explicitly changed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Individual functions are described in detail in the pages that |
|||
follow. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 0: SYSTEM RESET |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 00H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The System Reset function returns control to the CP/M operating |
|||
system at the CCP level. The CCP reinitializes the disk |
|||
subsystem by selecting and logging-in disk drive A. This |
|||
function has exactly the same effect as a jump to location BOOT. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 1: CONSOLE INPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 01H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Console Input function reads the next console character to |
|||
register A. Graphic characters, along with carriage return, line-feed, |
|||
and back space (CTRL-H) are echoed to the console. Tab |
|||
characters, CTRL-I, move the cursor to the next tab stop. A check |
|||
is made for start/stop scroll, CTRL-S, and start/stop printer echo, |
|||
CTRL-P. The FDOS does not return to the calling program until a |
|||
character has been typed, thus suspending execution if a |
|||
character is not ready. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 2: CONSOLE OUTPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters |
|||
Register C: 02H |
|||
Register E: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ASCII character from register E is sent to the console |
|||
device. As in Function 1, tabs are expanded and checks are made |
|||
for start/stop scroll and printer echo. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 3: READER INPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 03H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Reader Input function reads the next character from the |
|||
logical reader into register A. See the IOBYTE definition in |
|||
Chapter 6. Control does not return until the character has been |
|||
read. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 4: PUNCH OUTPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 04H |
|||
register E: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Punch Output function sends the character from register E to |
|||
the logical punch device. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 5: LIST OUTPUT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 05H |
|||
Register E: ASCII Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The List Output function sends the ASCII character in register E |
|||
to the logical listing device. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 6: DIRECT CONSOLE I/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 06H |
|||
Register E: 0FFH (input) or |
|||
char (output) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: char or status |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Direct Console I/O is supported under CP/M for those specialized |
|||
applications where basic console input and output are required. |
|||
Use of this function should, in general, be avoided since it |
|||
bypasses all of the CP/M normal control character functions (for example, |
|||
CTRL-S and CTRL-P). Programs that perform direct I/O |
|||
through the BIOS under previous releases of CP/M, however, should |
|||
be changed to use direct I/O under BDOS so that they can be fully |
|||
supported under future releases of MP/M \ and CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon entry to Function 6, register E either contains hexadecimal |
|||
FF, denoting a console input request, or an ASCII character. If |
|||
the input value is FF, Function 6 returns A = 00 if no character |
|||
is ready, otherwise A contains the next console input character. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the input value in E is not FF, Function 6 assumes that E |
|||
contains a valid ASCII character that is sent to the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 6 must not be used in conjunction with other console I/O |
|||
functions. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 7: GET I/O BYTE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 07H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: I/O Byte Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Get I/O Byte function returns the current value of IOBYTE in |
|||
register A. See Chapter 6 for IOBYTE definition. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 8: SET I/O BYTE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 08H |
|||
Register E: I/O Byte Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SET I/O Byte function changes the IOBYTE value to that given |
|||
in register E. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 9: PRINT STRING |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 09H |
|||
Registers DE: String Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Print String function sends the character string stored in |
|||
memory at the location given by DE to the console device, until a |
|||
$ is encountered in the string. Tabs are expanded as in Function |
|||
2, and checks are made for start/stop scroll and printer echo. |
|||
.nx fiveb.tex |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,806 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 10: READ CONSOLE BUFFER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0AH |
|||
Registers DE: Buffer Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Console Characters in Buffer |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Read Buffer functions reads a line of edited console input |
|||
into a buffer addressed by registers DE. Console input is |
|||
terminated when either input buffer overflows or a carriage return |
|||
or line-feed is typed. The Read Buffer takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DE:+0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 . . .+n |
|||
.sp |
|||
mx nc c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7 ... ?? |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where mx is the maximum number of characters that the buffer will |
|||
hold, 1 to 255, and nc is the number of characters read (set by |
|||
FDOS upon return) followed by the characters read from the |
|||
console. If nc < mx, then uninitialized positions follow the |
|||
last character, denoted by ?? in the above figure. A number of |
|||
control functions, summarized in Table 5-3, are recognized during |
|||
line editing. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 5-3. Edit Control Characters |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Character Edit Control Function |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
rub/del removes and echoes the last character |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-C reboots when at the beginning of line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-E causes physical end of line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-H backspaces one character position |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-J (line feed) terminates input line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-M (return) terminates input line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-R retypes the current line after new line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-U removes current line |
|||
.sp |
|||
CTRL-X same as CTRL-U |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The user should also note that certain functions that return the |
|||
carriage to the leftmost position (for example, CTRL-X) do so only to the |
|||
column position where the prompt ended. In earlier releases, the |
|||
carriage returned to the extreme left margin. This convention |
|||
makes operator data input and line correction more legible. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 11: GET CONSOLE STATUS |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0BH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Console Status |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Console Status function checks to see if a character has been |
|||
typed at the console. If a character is ready, the value 0FFH is |
|||
returned in register A. Otherwise a 00H value is returned. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 12: RETURN VERSION NUMBER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0CH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: Version Number |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 12 provides information that allows version independent |
|||
programming. A two-byte value is returned, with H = 00 |
|||
designating the CP/M release (H = 01 for MP/M) and L = 00 for |
|||
all releases previous to 2.0. CP/M 2.0 returns a hexadecimal 20 |
|||
in register L, with subsequent version 2 releases in the |
|||
hexadecimal range 21,22, through 2F. Using Function 12, for |
|||
example, the user can write application programs that provide |
|||
both sequential and random access functions. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 13: RESET DISK SYSTEM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0DH |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Reset Disk function is used to programmatically restore the |
|||
file system to a reset state where all disks are set to |
|||
Read-Write. See functions 28 and 29, only disk drive A is |
|||
selected, and the default DMA address is reset to BOOT+0080H. |
|||
This function can be used, for example, by an application program |
|||
that requires a disk change without a system reboot. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 14: SELECT DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0EH |
|||
Register E: Selected Disk |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Select Disk function designates the disk drive named in register |
|||
E as the default disk for subsequent file operations, with E = O |
|||
for drive A, 1 for drive B, and so on through 15, corresponding to drive |
|||
P in a full 16 drive system. The drive is placed in an on-line |
|||
status, which activates its directory until the next cold start, |
|||
warm start, or disk system reset operation. If the disk medium |
|||
is changed while it is on-line, the drive automatically goes to |
|||
a Read-Only status in a standard CP/M environment, see Function |
|||
28. FCBs that specify drive code zero (dr = 00H) automatically |
|||
reference the currently selected default drive. Drive code |
|||
values between 1 and 16 ignore the selected default |
|||
drive and directly reference drives A through P. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 15: OPEN FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 0FH |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Open File operation is used to activate a file that currently |
|||
exists in the disk directory for the currently active user |
|||
number. The FDOS scans the referenced disk directory for a match |
|||
in positions 1 through 14 of the FCB referenced by DE (byte s1 is |
|||
automatically zeroed) where an ASCII question mark (3FH) matches |
|||
any directory character in any of these positions. Normally, no |
|||
question marks are included, and bytes ex and s2 of the FCB are |
|||
zero. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If a directory element is matched, the relevant directory |
|||
information is copied into bytes d0 through dn of FCB, thus |
|||
allowing access to the files through subsequent read and write |
|||
operations. The user should note that an existing file must not |
|||
be accessed until a successful open operation is completed. Upon |
|||
return, the open function returns a directory code with the value |
|||
0 through 3 if the open was successful or 0FFH (255 decimal) if |
|||
the file cannot be found. If question marks occur in the FCB, |
|||
the first matching FCB is activated. Note that the current |
|||
record, (cr) must be zeroed by the program if the file is to be |
|||
accessed sequentially from the first record. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 16: CLOSE FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 10H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Close File function performs the inverse of the Open File |
|||
function. Given that the FCB addressed by DE has been previously |
|||
activated through an open or make function, the close function |
|||
permanently records the new FCB in the reference disk directory |
|||
see functions 15 and 22. The FCB matching process for the close |
|||
is identical to the open function. The directory code returned |
|||
for a successful close operation is 0, 1, 2, or 3, while a 0FFH |
|||
(255 decimal) is returned if the filename cannot be found in the |
|||
directory. A file need not be closed if only read operations |
|||
have taken place. If write operations have occurred, the close |
|||
operation is necessary to record the new directory information |
|||
permanently. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 17: SEARCH FOR FIRST |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 11H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Search First scans the directory for a match with the file given |
|||
by the FCB addressed by DE. The value 255 (hexadecimal FF) is |
|||
returned if the file is not found; otherwise, 0, 1, 2, or 3 is |
|||
returned indicating the file is present. When the file is found, |
|||
the current DMA address is filled with the record containing the |
|||
directory entry, and the relative starting position is A *32 |
|||
(that is, rotate the A register left 5 bits, or ADD A five times). |
|||
Although not normally required for application programs, the |
|||
directory information can be extracted from the buffer at this |
|||
position. |
|||
.pp |
|||
An ASCII question mark (63 decimal, 3F hexadecimal) in any |
|||
position from f1 through ex matches the corresponding field of |
|||
any directory entry on the default or auto-selected disk drive. |
|||
If the dr field contains an ASCII question mark, the auto disk |
|||
select function is disabled and the default disk is searched, |
|||
with the search function returning any matched entry, allocated |
|||
or free, belonging to any user number. This latter function is |
|||
not normally used by application programs, but it allows complete |
|||
flexibility to scan all current directory values. If the dr |
|||
field is not a question mark, the s2 byte is automatically |
|||
zeroed. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 18: SEARCH FOR NEXT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 12H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Search Next function is similar to the Search First function, except |
|||
that the directory scan continues from the last matched entry. |
|||
Similar to Function 17, Function 18 returns the decimal value 255 |
|||
in A when no more directory items match. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 19: DELETE FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 13H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Delete File function removes files that match the FCB |
|||
addressed by DE. The filename and type may contain ambiguous |
|||
references (that is, question marks in various positions), but the |
|||
drive select code cannot be ambiguous, as in the Search and |
|||
Search Next functions. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 19 returns a decimal 255 if the referenced file or files |
|||
cannot be found; otherwise, a value in the range 0 to 3 returned. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 20: READ SEQUENTIAL |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 14H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Given that the FCB addressed by DE has been activated through an |
|||
Open or Make function, the Read Sequential function reads the |
|||
next 128-byte record from the file into memory at the current DMA |
|||
address. The record is read from position cr of the extent, and |
|||
the cr field is automatically incremented to the next record |
|||
position. If the cr field overflows, the next logical extent is |
|||
automatically opened and the cr field is reset to zero in |
|||
preparation for the next read operation. The value 00H is |
|||
returned in the A register if the read operation was successful, |
|||
while a nonzero value is returned if no data exist at the next |
|||
record position (for example, end-of-file occurs). |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 21: WRITE SEQUENTAIL |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 15H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Given that the FCB addressed by DE has been activated through an |
|||
Open or Make function, the Write Sequential |
|||
function writes the 128-byte data record at the current DMA |
|||
address to the file named by the FCB. The record is placed at |
|||
position cr of the file, and the cr field is automatically |
|||
incremented to the next record position. If the cr field |
|||
overflows, the next logical extent is automatically opened and |
|||
the cr field is reset to zero in preparation for the next write |
|||
operation. Write operations can take place into an existing |
|||
file, in which case, newly written records overlay those that |
|||
already exist in the file. Register A = 00H upon return from a |
|||
successful write operation, while a nonzero value indicates an |
|||
unsuccessful write caused by a full disk. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 22: MAKE FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 16H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Make File operation is similar to the Open File operation |
|||
except that the FCB must name a file that does not exist in the |
|||
currently referenced disk directory (that is, the one named |
|||
explicitly by a nonzero dr code or the default disk if dr is |
|||
zero). The FDOS creates the file and initializes both the |
|||
directory and main memory value to an empty file. The programmer |
|||
must ensure that no duplicate filenames occur, and a preceding |
|||
delete operation is sufficient if there is any possibility of |
|||
duplication. Upon return, register A = 0, 1, 2, or 3 if the |
|||
operation was successful and 0FFH (255 decimal) if no more |
|||
directory space is available. The Make function has the side |
|||
effect of activating the FCB and thus a subsequent open is not |
|||
necessary. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 23: RENAME FILE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 17H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Rename function uses the FCB addressed by DE to change all |
|||
occurrences of the file named in the first 16 bytes to the file |
|||
named in the second 16 bytes. The drive code dr at postion 0 is |
|||
used to select the drive, while the drive code for the new |
|||
filename at position 16 of the FCB is assumed to be zero. Upon |
|||
return, register A is set to a value between 0 and 3 if the |
|||
rename was successful and 0FFH (255 decimal) if the first |
|||
filename could not be found in the directory scan. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 24: RETURN LOG-IN VECTOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 18H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: Log-in Vector |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The log-in vector value returned by CP/M is a 16-bit value in HL, where the |
|||
least significant bit of L corresponds to the first drive A and |
|||
the high-order bit of H corresponds to the sixteenth drive, |
|||
labeled P. A 0 bit indicates that the drive is not on-line, |
|||
while a 1 bit marks a drive that is actively on-line as a result |
|||
of an explicit disk drive selection or an implicit drive select |
|||
caused by a file operation that specified a nonzero dr field. |
|||
The user should note that compatibility is maintained with |
|||
earlier releases, because registers A and L contain the same values |
|||
upon return. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 25: RETURN CURRENT DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 19H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Current Disk |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 25 returns the currently selected default disk number in |
|||
register A. The disk numbers range from 0 through 15 |
|||
corresponding to drives A through P. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 26: SET DMA ADDRESS |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1AH |
|||
Registers DE: DMA Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
DMA is an acronym for Direct Memory Address, which is often used |
|||
in connection with disk controllers that directly access the |
|||
memory of the mainframe computer to transfer data to and from the |
|||
disk subsystem. Although many computer systems use non-DMA |
|||
access (that is, the data is transferred through programmed I/O |
|||
operations), the DMA address has, in CP/M, come to mean the |
|||
address at which the 128-byte data record resides before a disk |
|||
write and after a disk read. Upon cold start, warm start, or |
|||
disk system reset, the DMA address is automatically set to |
|||
BOOT+0080H. The Set DMA function can be used to change |
|||
this default value to address another area of memory where the |
|||
data records reside. Thus, the DMA address becomes the value |
|||
specified by DE until it is changed by a subsequent Set DMA |
|||
function, cold start, warm start, or disk system reset. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 27: GET ADDR (ALLOC) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1BH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: ALLOC Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
An allocation vector is maintained in main memory for each on- |
|||
line disk drive. Various system programs use the information |
|||
provided by the allocation vector to determine the amount of |
|||
remaining storage (see the STAT program). Function 27 returns |
|||
the base address of the allocation vector for the currently |
|||
selected disk drive. However, the allocation information might be |
|||
invalid if the selected disk has been marked Read-Only. Although |
|||
this function is not normally used by application programs, |
|||
additional details of the allocation vector are found in Chapter |
|||
6. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 28: WRITE PROTECT DISK |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1CH |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Write Protect Disk function provides temporary write |
|||
protection for the currently selected disk. Any attempt to write |
|||
to the disk before the next cold or warm start operation produces |
|||
the message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS ERR on d:R/O |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 29: GET READ-ONLY VECTOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1DH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: R/O Vector Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Function 29 returns a bit vector in register pair HL, which |
|||
indicates drives that have the temporary Read-Only bit set. As |
|||
in Function 24, the least significant bit corresponds to drive A, |
|||
while the most significant bit corresponds to drive P. The R/O |
|||
bit is set either by an explicit call to Function 28 or by the |
|||
automatic software mechanisms within CP/M that detect changed |
|||
disks. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 30: SET FILE ATTRIBUTES |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1EH |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Directory Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Set File Attributes function allows programmatic manipulation |
|||
of permanent indicators attached to files. In particular, the R/O |
|||
and System attributes (t1' and t2') can be set or reset. The DE |
|||
pair addresses an unambiguous filename with the appropriate |
|||
attributes set or reset. Function 30 searches for a match and |
|||
changes the matched directory entry to contain the selected |
|||
indicators. Indicators f1' through f4' are not currently used, |
|||
but may be useful for applications programs, since they are not |
|||
involved in the matching process during file open and close |
|||
operations. Indicators f5' through f8' and t3' are reserved for |
|||
future system expansion. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 31: GET ADDR (DISK PARMS) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 1FH |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Registers HL: DPB Address |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The address of the BIOS resident disk parameter block is returned |
|||
in HL as a result of this function call. This address can be |
|||
used for either of two purposes. First, the disk parameter |
|||
values can be extracted for display and space computation |
|||
purposes, or transient programs can dynamically change the values |
|||
of current disk parameters when the disk environment changes, if |
|||
required. Normally, application programs will not require this |
|||
facility. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 32: SET/GET USER CODE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 20H |
|||
Register E: OFFH (get) or |
|||
User Code (set) |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Current Code or |
|||
(no value) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
An application program can change or interrogate the currently |
|||
active user number by calling Function 32. If register E = 0FFH, |
|||
the value of the current user number is returned in register A, |
|||
where the value is in the range of 0 to 15. If register E is not |
|||
0FFH, the current user number is changed to the value of E, |
|||
modulo 16. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 33: READ RANDOM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 21H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Return Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Read Random function is similar to the sequential file read |
|||
operation of previous releases, except that the read operation |
|||
takes place at a particular record number, selected by the 24-bit |
|||
value constructed from the 3-byte field following the FCB (byte |
|||
positions r0 at 33, r1 at 34, and r2 at 35). The user should |
|||
note that the sequence of 24 bits is stored with least |
|||
significant byte first (r0), middle byte next (r1), and high byte |
|||
last (r2). CP/M does not reference byte r2, except in computing |
|||
the size of a file (Function 35). Byte r2 must be zero, however, |
|||
since a nonzero value indicates overflow past the end of file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Thus, the r0, r1 byte pair is treated as a double-byte, or word |
|||
value, that contains the record to read. This value ranges from |
|||
0 to 65535, providing access to any particular record of the 8- |
|||
megabyte file. To process a file using random access, the base |
|||
extent (extent 0) must first be opened. Although the base extent |
|||
might or might not contain any allocated data, this ensures that the |
|||
file is properly recorded in the directory and is visible in DIR |
|||
requests. The selected record number is then stored in the |
|||
random record field (r0, r1), and the BDOS is called to read the |
|||
record. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon return from the call, register A either contains an error |
|||
code, as listed below, or the value 00, indicating the operation |
|||
was successful. In the latter case, the current DMA address |
|||
contains the randomly accessed record. Note that |
|||
contrary to the sequential read operation, the record number is |
|||
not advanced. Thus, subsequent random read operations continue |
|||
to read the same record. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon each random read operation, the logical extent and current |
|||
record values are automatically set. Thus, the file can be |
|||
sequentially read or written, starting from the current randomly |
|||
accessed position. However, note that, in this |
|||
case, the last randomly read record will be reread as one |
|||
switches from random mode to sequential read and the last record |
|||
will be rewritten as one switches to a sequential write operation. |
|||
The user can simply advance the random record |
|||
position following each random read or write to obtain the effect |
|||
of sequential I/O operation. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Error codes returned in register A following a random read are |
|||
listed below. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
01 reading unwritten data |
|||
.sp |
|||
02 (not returned in random mode) |
|||
.sp |
|||
03 cannot close current extent |
|||
.sp |
|||
04 seek to unwritten extent |
|||
.sp |
|||
05 (not returned in read mode) |
|||
.sp |
|||
06 seek past physical end of disk |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Error codes 01 and 04 occur when a random read operation accesses |
|||
a data block that has not been previously written or an extent |
|||
that has not been created, which are equivalent conditions. |
|||
Error code 03 does not normally occur under proper system |
|||
operation. If it does, it can be cleared by simply rereading or |
|||
reopening extent zero as long as the disk is not physically write |
|||
protected. Error code 06 occurs whenever byte r2 is nonzero |
|||
under the current 2.0 release. Normally, nonzero return codes |
|||
can be treated as missing data, with zero return codes indicating |
|||
operation complete. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 34: WRITE RANDOM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 22H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Return Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Write Random operation is initiated similarly to the Read |
|||
Random call, except that data is written to the disk from the |
|||
current DMA address. Further, if the disk extent or data block |
|||
that is the target of the write has not yet been allocated, the |
|||
allocation is performed before the write operation continues. As |
|||
in the Read Random operation, the random record number is not |
|||
changed as a result of the write. The logical extent number and |
|||
current record positions of the FCB are set to correspond to the |
|||
random record that is being written. Again, sequential read or |
|||
write operations can begin following a random write, with the |
|||
notation that the currently addressed record is either read or |
|||
rewritten again as the sequential operation begins. You can |
|||
also simply advance the random record position following each |
|||
write to get the effect of a sequential write operation. |
|||
Note that reading or writing the last record of an extent in |
|||
random mode does not cause an automatic extent switch as it does |
|||
in sequential mode. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The error codes returned by a random write are identical to the |
|||
random read operation with the addition of error code 05, which |
|||
indicates that a new extent cannot be created as a result of |
|||
directory overflow. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 35: COMPUTE FILE SIZE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 23H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Random Record Field Set |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
When computing the size of a file, the DE register pair addresses |
|||
an FCB in random mode format (bytes r0, r1, and r2 are present). |
|||
The FCB contains an unambiguous filename that is used in the |
|||
directory scan. Upon return, the random record bytes contain the |
|||
virtual file size, which is, in effect, the record address of |
|||
the record following the end of the file. Following a call to |
|||
Function 35, if the high record byte r2 is 01, the file contains |
|||
the maximum record count 65536. Otherwise, bytes r0 and r1 |
|||
constitute a 16-bit value as before (r0 is the least significant byte), |
|||
which is the file size. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Data can be appended to the end of an existing file by simply |
|||
calling Function 35 to set the random record position to the end |
|||
of file and then performing a sequence of random writes starting |
|||
at the preset record address. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The virtual size of a file corresponds to the physical size when |
|||
the file is written sequentially. If the file was created in |
|||
random mode and holes exist in the allocation, the file might |
|||
contain fewer records than the size indicates. For example, |
|||
if only the last record of an 8-megabyte file is written in |
|||
random mode (that is, record number 65535), the virtual size is |
|||
65536 records, although only one block of data is actually |
|||
allocated. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 36: SET RANDOM RECORD |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 24H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Random Record Field Set |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Set Random Record function causes the BDOS automatically |
|||
to produce the random record position from a file that has been |
|||
read or written sequentially to a particular point. The function |
|||
can be useful in two ways. |
|||
.pp |
|||
First, it is often necessary initially to read and scan a |
|||
sequential file to extract the positions of various key fields. |
|||
As each key is encountered, Function 36 is called to compute the |
|||
random record position for the data corresponding to this key. If |
|||
the data unit size is 128 bytes, the resulting record position is |
|||
placed into a table with the key for later retrieval. After |
|||
scanning the entire file and tabulating the keys and their record |
|||
numbers, the user can move instantly to a particular keyed record |
|||
by performing a random read, using the corresponding random |
|||
record number that was saved earlier. The scheme is easily |
|||
generalized for variable record lengths, because the program need |
|||
only store the buffer-relative byte position along with the key |
|||
and record number to find the exact starting position of the |
|||
keyed data at a later time. |
|||
.pp |
|||
A second use of Function 36 occurs when switching from a |
|||
sequential read or write over to random read or write. A file is |
|||
sequentially accessed to a particular point in the file, Function |
|||
36 is called, which sets the record number, and subsequent random |
|||
read and write operations continue from the selected point in the |
|||
file. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 37: RESET DRIVE |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 25H |
|||
Registers DE: Drive Vector |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: 00H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Reset Drive function allows resetting of specified drives. |
|||
The passed parameter is a 16-bit vector of drives to be reset; |
|||
the least significant bit is drive A:. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To maintain compatibility with MP/M, CP/M returns a zero value. |
|||
.sp 6 |
|||
.nf |
|||
FUNCTION 40: WRITE RANDOM WITH ZERO FILL |
|||
.sp |
|||
Entry Parameters: |
|||
Register C: 28H |
|||
Registers DE: FCB Address |
|||
.sp |
|||
Returned Value: |
|||
Register A: Return Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Write With Zero Fill operation is similar to Function 34, |
|||
with the exception that a previously unallocated block is filled |
|||
with zeros before the data is written. |
|||
.nx fivec |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,444 +0,0 @@ |
|||
|
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.3 A Sample Copy Program |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following program provides a relatively simple example of file |
|||
operations. The program source file is created as COPY.ASM using |
|||
the CP/M ED program and then assembled using ASM or MAC, resulting |
|||
in a HEX file. The LOAD program is used to produce a COPY.COM |
|||
file that executes directly under the CCP. The program begins |
|||
by setting the stack pointer to a local area and proceeds to move |
|||
the second name from the default area at 006CH to a 33-byte File |
|||
Control Block called DFCB. The DFCB is then prepared for file |
|||
operations by clearing the current record field. At this point, |
|||
the source and destination FCBs are ready for processing, because |
|||
the SFCB at 005CH is properly set up by the CCP upon entry to the |
|||
COPY program. That is, the first name is placed into the default |
|||
FCB, with the proper fields zeroed, including the current record |
|||
field at 007CH. The program continues by opening the source |
|||
file, deleting any existing destination file, and creating the destination |
|||
file. If all this is successful, the program loops at the label |
|||
COPY until each record is read from the source file and placed into the |
|||
destination file. Upon completion of the data transfer, the |
|||
destination file is closed and the program returns to the |
|||
CCP command level by jumping to BOOT. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
; sample file-to-file copy program |
|||
; |
|||
; at the ccp level, the command |
|||
; |
|||
; copy a:x.y b:u.v |
|||
; |
|||
; copies the file named x.y from drive |
|||
; a to a file named u.v. on drive b. |
|||
; |
|||
0000 = boot equ 0000h ;system reboot |
|||
0005 = bdos equ 0005h ;bdos entry point |
|||
005c = fcbl equ 005ch ;first file name |
|||
005c = sfcb equ fcbl ;source fcb |
|||
006c = fcb2 equ 006ch ;second file name |
|||
0080 = dbuff equ 0080h ;default buffer |
|||
0100 = tpa equ 0100h ;beginning of tpa |
|||
; |
|||
0009 = printf equ 9 ;print buffer func# |
|||
000f = openf equ 15 ;open file func# |
|||
0010 = closef equ 16 ;close file func# |
|||
0013 = deletef equ 19 ;delete file func# |
|||
0014 = readf equ 20 ;sequential read |
|||
0015 = writef equ 21 ;sequential write |
|||
0016 = makef equ 22 ;make file func# |
|||
; |
|||
0100 org tpa ;beginning of tpa |
|||
0100 311b02 lxi sp,stack ;local stack |
|||
; |
|||
; move second file name to dfcb |
|||
0103 0e10 mvi c,16 ;half an fcb |
|||
0105 116c00 lxi d,fcb2 ;source of move |
|||
0108 21da01 lxi h,dfcb ;destination fcb |
|||
010b 1a mfcb: Idax d ;source fcb |
|||
010c 13 inx d ;ready next |
|||
010d 77 mov m,a ;dest fcb |
|||
010e 23 inx h ;ready next |
|||
010f 0d dcr c ;count 16...0 |
|||
0110 c10b01 jnz mfcb ;loop 16 times |
|||
; |
|||
; name has been removed, zero cr |
|||
0113 af xra a ;a = 00h |
|||
0114 32fa01 sta dfcbcr ;current rec = 0 |
|||
; |
|||
; source and destination fcb's ready |
|||
; |
|||
0117 115c00 lxi d,sfcb ;source file |
|||
011a cd6901 call open ;error if 255 |
|||
011d 118701 lxi d,nofile ;ready message |
|||
0120 3c inr a ;255 becomes 0 |
|||
0121 cc6101 cz finis ;done if no file |
|||
; |
|||
; source file open, prep destination |
|||
0124 11da01 lxi d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
0127 cd7301 call delete ;remove if present |
|||
; |
|||
012a 11da01 lxi d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
012d cd8201 call make ;create the file |
|||
0130 119601 lxi d,nodir ;ready message |
|||
0133 3c inr a ;255 becomes 0 |
|||
0134 cc6101 cz finis ;done if no dir space |
|||
; |
|||
; source file open, dest file open |
|||
; copy until end of file on source |
|||
; |
|||
0137 115c00 copy: lxi d,sfcb ;source |
|||
013a cd7801 call read ;read next record |
|||
013d b7 ora a ;end of file? |
|||
013e c25101 jnz eofile ;skip write if so |
|||
; |
|||
; not end of file, write the record |
|||
0141 11da01 lix d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
0144 cd7d01 call write ;write record |
|||
0147 11a901 lxi d,space ;ready message |
|||
014a b7 ora a ;00 if write ok |
|||
014b c46101 cnz finis ;end if so |
|||
014e c33701 jmp copy ;loop until eof |
|||
; |
|||
eofile: ;end of file, close destination |
|||
0151 11da01 lxi d,dfcb ;destination |
|||
0154 cd6e01 call close ;255 if error |
|||
0157 21bb01 lxi h,wrprot ;ready message |
|||
015a 3c inr a ;255 becomes 00 |
|||
015b cc6101 cz finis ;shouldn't happen |
|||
; |
|||
; copy operation complete, end |
|||
015e 11cc01 lxi d,normal ;ready message |
|||
; |
|||
finis ;write message given by de, reboot |
|||
0161 0e09 mvi c,printf |
|||
0163 cd0500 call bdos ;write message |
|||
0166 c30000 jmp boot ;reboot system |
|||
; |
|||
; system interface subroutines |
|||
; (all return directly from bdos) |
|||
; |
|||
0169 0e0f open: mvi c,openf |
|||
016b c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
016e 0e10 close: mvi c,closef |
|||
0170 c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
0173 0e13 delete mvi c,deletef |
|||
0175 c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
0178 0e14 read: mvi c,readf |
|||
017a c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
017d 0e15 write: mvi c,writef |
|||
017f c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
0182 0e16 make: mvi c,makef |
|||
0184 c30500 jmp bdos |
|||
; |
|||
; console messages |
|||
0187 6e6f20f nofile: db 'no source file$' |
|||
0196 6e6f209 nodir: db 'no directory space$' |
|||
01a9 6f7574f space: db 'out of dat space$' |
|||
01bb 7772695 wrprot: db 'write protected?$' |
|||
01cc 636f700 normal: db 'copy complete$' |
|||
; |
|||
; data areas |
|||
01da dfcb: ds 33 ;destination fcb |
|||
01fa dfcbcr equ dfcb+32 ;current record |
|||
; |
|||
01fb ds 32 ;16 level stack |
|||
stack: |
|||
021b end |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that there are several simplifications in this |
|||
particular program. First, there are no checks for invalid filenames |
|||
that could contain ambiguous references. This |
|||
situation could be detected by scanning the 32-byte default area |
|||
starting at location 005CH for ASCII question marks. A check |
|||
should also be make to ensure that the filenames have |
|||
been included (check locations 005DH and 006DH for nonblank ASCII |
|||
characters). Finally, a check should be made to ensure that the |
|||
source and destination filenames are different. An improvement |
|||
in speed could be obtained by buffering more data on each read |
|||
operation. One could, for example, determine the size of memory |
|||
by fetching FBASE from location 0006H and using the entire |
|||
remaining portion of memory for a data buffer. In this case, the |
|||
programmer simply resets the DMA address to the next successive |
|||
128-byte area before each read. Upon writing to the destination |
|||
file, the DMA address is reset to the beginning of the buffer and |
|||
incremented by 128 bytes to the end as each record is |
|||
transferred to the destination file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility |
|||
.tc 5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following file dump program is slightly more complex than |
|||
the simple copy program given in the previous section. The dump |
|||
program reads an input file, specified in the CCP command line, |
|||
and displays the content of each record in hexadecimal format at |
|||
the console. Note that the dump program saves the CCP's stack |
|||
upon entry, resets the stack to a local area, and restores the |
|||
CCP's stack before returning directly to the CCP. Thus, the |
|||
dump program does not perform and warm start at the end of |
|||
processing. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
x.in 5 |
|||
;DUMP program reads input file and displays |
|||
hex data |
|||
; |
|||
0100 org 100h |
|||
0005 = bdos equ 0005h = ;bdos entry point |
|||
0001 = cons equ 1 ;read console |
|||
0002 = typef equ 2 ;type function |
|||
0009 = printf equ 9 ;buffer print entry |
|||
000b = brkf equ 11 ;break key function |
|||
;(true if char |
|||
000f = openf equ 15 ;file open |
|||
0014 = readf equ 20 ;read function |
|||
; |
|||
005c = fcb equ 5ch ;file control block |
|||
;address |
|||
0080 = buff equ 80h ;input disk buffer |
|||
;address |
|||
; |
|||
; non graphic characters |
|||
000d = cr equ 0dh ;carriage return |
|||
000a = If equ 0ah ;line feed |
|||
; |
|||
; file control block definitions |
|||
005c = fcbdn equ fcb+0 ;disk name |
|||
005d = fcbfn equ fcb+1 ;file name |
|||
0065 = fcbft equ fcb+9 ;disk file type (3 |
|||
;characters) |
|||
0068 = fcbrl equ fcb+12 ;file's current reel |
|||
;number |
|||
006b = fcbrc equ fcb+15 ;file's record count (0 to |
|||
;128)128) |
|||
007c = fcbcr' equ fcb+32 ;current (next) record |
|||
;number (0 |
|||
007d = fcbin equ fcb+33 ;fcb length |
|||
; |
|||
; set up stack |
|||
0100 210000 lxi h,0 |
|||
0103 39 dad sp |
|||
; entry stack pointer in hl from the ccp |
|||
0104 221502 shld oldsp |
|||
; set sp to local stack area (restored at |
|||
; finis) |
|||
0107 315702 lxi sp,stktop |
|||
; read and print successive buffers |
|||
010a cdc101 call setup ;set up input file |
|||
010d feff cpi 255 ;255 if file not present |
|||
010f c21b01 jnz openok ;skip if open is ok |
|||
; |
|||
; file not there, give error message and |
|||
; return |
|||
0112 11f301 lxi d,opnmsg |
|||
0115 cd9c01 call err |
|||
0118 c35101 jmp finis ;to return |
|||
; |
|||
openok: ;open operation ok, set buffer index to |
|||
;end |
|||
011b 3e80 mvi a,80h |
|||
011d 321302 sta ibp ;set buffer pointer to 80h |
|||
; hl contains next address to print |
|||
0120 210000 lxi h,0 ;start with 0000 |
|||
; |
|||
gloop: |
|||
0123 e5 push h ;save line position |
|||
0124 cda201 call gnb |
|||
0127 e1 pop h ;recall line position |
|||
0138 da5101 jc finis ;carry set by gnb if end |
|||
;file |
|||
012b 47 mov b,a |
|||
; print hex values |
|||
; check for line fold |
|||
012c 7d |
|||
mov a,l |
|||
012d e60f ani 0fh ;check low 4 bits |
|||
012f c24401 jnz nonum |
|||
; print line number |
|||
0132 cd7201 call crlf |
|||
; |
|||
; check for break key |
|||
0135 cd5901 call break |
|||
; accum lsb = 1 if character ready |
|||
0138 0f rrc ;into carry |
|||
0139 da5101 jc finis ;don't print any more |
|||
; |
|||
013c 7c mov a,h |
|||
013d cd8f01 call phex |
|||
0140 7d mov a,l |
|||
0141 cd8f01 call phex |
|||
nonum |
|||
0144 23 inx h ;to next line number |
|||
0145 3e20 mvi a,'' |
|||
0147 cd6501 call pchar |
|||
014a 78 mov a,b |
|||
014b cd8f01 call phex |
|||
014e c32301 jmp gloop |
|||
; |
|||
finis |
|||
; end of dump, return to cco |
|||
; (note that a jmp to 0000h reboots) |
|||
0151 cd7201 call crif |
|||
0154 2a1502 lhld oldsp |
|||
0157 f9 sphl |
|||
; stack pointer contains ccp's stack |
|||
; location |
|||
0158 c9 ret ;to the ccp |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
; subroutines |
|||
; |
|||
break: ;check break key (actually any key will |
|||
;do) |
|||
0159 e5d5c5 push h! push d! push b; environment |
|||
;saved |
|||
015c 0e0b mvi c,brkf |
|||
015e cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0161 c1d1e1 pop b! pop d! pop h; environment |
|||
restored |
|||
0164 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
pchar: ;print a character |
|||
0165 e5d5c5 push h! push d! push b; saved |
|||
0168 0e02 mvi c, typef |
|||
016a 5f mov e,a |
|||
016b cd0500 call bdos |
|||
016e c1d1e1 pop b! pop d! pop h; restored |
|||
0171 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
crlf |
|||
0172 3e0d mvi a,cr |
|||
0174 cd6501 call pchar |
|||
0177 3e0a mvi a,lf |
|||
0179 cd6501 call pchar |
|||
017c c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
pnib: ;print nibble in reg a |
|||
017d e60f ani ofh ;low 4 bits |
|||
017f fe0a cpi 10 |
|||
0181 d28901 jnc p10 |
|||
; less than or equal to 9 |
|||
0184 c630 adi '0' |
|||
0186 c38b01 jmp prn |
|||
; |
|||
; greater or equal to 10 |
|||
0189 c637 p10: adi 'a' - 10 |
|||
018b cd6501 prn: call pchar |
|||
018e c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
phex ;print hex char in reg a |
|||
018f f5 pushpsw |
|||
0190 0f rrc |
|||
0191 0f rrc |
|||
0192 0f rrc |
|||
0193 0f rrc |
|||
0194 cd7d01 call pnib ;print nibble |
|||
0197 f1 pop psw |
|||
0198 cd7d01 call pnip |
|||
019b c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
err: ;print error message |
|||
; d,e addresses message ending with "$" |
|||
019c 0e09 mvi c,printf ;print buffer |
|||
;function |
|||
019e cd0500 call bdos |
|||
01a1 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
gnb: ;get next byte |
|||
01a2 3a1302 lda ibp |
|||
01a5 fe80 cpi 80h |
|||
01a7 c2b301 jnz g0 |
|||
; read another buffer |
|||
; |
|||
; |
|||
01aa cdce01 call diskr |
|||
01ad b7 ora a ;zero value if read ok |
|||
01ae cab301 jz g0 ;for another byte |
|||
; end of data, return with carry set for eof |
|||
01b1 37 stc |
|||
01b2 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
g0: ;read the byte at buff+reg a |
|||
01b3 5f mov e,a ;Is byte of buffer index |
|||
01b4 1600 mvi d,0 ;double precision |
|||
;index to de |
|||
01b6 3c inr a ;index=index+1 |
|||
01b7 321302 sta ibp ;back to memory |
|||
; pointer is incremented |
|||
; save the current file address |
|||
01ba 218000 lxi h,buff |
|||
01bd 19 dad d |
|||
; absolute character address is in hl |
|||
01be 7e mov a,m |
|||
; byte is in the accumulator |
|||
01bf b7 ora a ;reset carry bit |
|||
01c0 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
setup: ;set up file |
|||
; open the file for input |
|||
01c1 af xra a ;zero to accum |
|||
01c2 327c00 sta fcbcr ;clear current record |
|||
; |
|||
01c5 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
01c8 0e0f mvi c,openf |
|||
01ca cd0500 call bdos |
|||
; 255 in accum if open error |
|||
01cd c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
diskr: ;read disk file record |
|||
01ce e5d5c5 push h! push d! push b |
|||
01d1 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
01d4 0e14 mvi c,readf |
|||
01d6 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
01d9 c1d1e1 pop b! pop d! pop h |
|||
01dc c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
; fixed message area |
|||
01dd 46494c0 signon: db 'file dump version 2.0$' |
|||
01f3 0d0a4e0 opnmsg: db cr,lf,'no input file present on |
|||
disk$' |
|||
|
|||
; variable area |
|||
0213 ibp: ds 2 ;input buffer pointer |
|||
0215 oldsp: ds 2 ;entry sp value from ccp |
|||
; |
|||
; stack area |
|||
0217 ; ds 64 ;reserve 32 level stack |
|||
stktop: |
|||
; |
|||
0257 end |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.nx fived |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,497 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.5 Sample Random Access Program |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.5 A Sample Random Access Program |
|||
.qs |
|||
.tc 5.5 A Sample Random Access Program |
|||
.pp |
|||
This chapter concludes with an extensive example of random access operation. |
|||
The program listed below performs the simple function of reading or writing |
|||
random records upon command from the terminal. When a |
|||
program has been created, assembled, and placed into a file |
|||
labeled RANDOM.COM, the CCP level command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
RANDOM X.DAT |
|||
.sp |
|||
starts the test program. The program looks for a file by the |
|||
name X.DAT and, if found, proceeds to prompt the console for |
|||
input. If not found, the file is created before the prompt is |
|||
given. Each prompt takes the form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
next command? |
|||
.sp |
|||
and is followed by operator input, followed by a carriage |
|||
return. The input commands take the form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
nW nR Q |
|||
.sp |
|||
where n is an integer value in the range 0 to 65535, and W, R, |
|||
and Q are simple command characters corresponding to random |
|||
write, random read, and quit processing, respectively. If the W |
|||
command is issued, the RANDOM program issues the prompt |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
type data: |
|||
.sp |
|||
The operator then responds by typing up to 127 characters, |
|||
followed by a carriage return. RANDOM then writes the character |
|||
string into the X.DAT file at record n. If the R command is |
|||
issued, RANDOM reads record number n and displays the string |
|||
value at the console, If the Q command is issued, the X.DAT file |
|||
is closed, and the program returns to the CCP. In the interest |
|||
of brevity, the only error message is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
error, try again. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The program begins with an initialization section where the input |
|||
file is opened or created, followed by a continuous loop at the |
|||
label ready where the individual commands are interpreted. The |
|||
DFBC at 005CH and the default buffer at 0080H are used in all |
|||
disk operations. The utility subroutines then follow, which |
|||
contain the principal input line processor, called readc. This |
|||
particular program shows the elements of random access |
|||
processing, and can be used as the basis for further program |
|||
development. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Sample Random Access Program for CP/M 2.0 |
|||
.qs |
|||
|
|||
0100 org 100h ;base of tpa |
|||
; |
|||
0000 = reboot equ 0000h ;system reboot |
|||
0005 = bdos equ 0005h ;bdos entry point |
|||
; |
|||
0001 = coninp equ 1 ;console input function |
|||
0002 = conout equ 2 ;console output function |
|||
0009 = pstring equ 9 ;print string until '$' |
|||
000a = rstring equ 10 ;read console buffer |
|||
000c = version equ 12 ;return version number |
|||
000f = openf equ 15 ;file open function |
|||
0010 = closef equ 16 ;close function |
|||
0016 = makef equ 22 ;make file function |
|||
0021 = readr equ 33 ;read random |
|||
0022 = writer equ 34 ;write random |
|||
; |
|||
005c = fcb equ 005ch ;default file control |
|||
;block |
|||
007d = ranrec equ fcb+33 ;random record position |
|||
007f = ranovf equ fcb+35 ;high order (overflow) |
|||
;byte |
|||
0080 = buff equ 0080h ;buffer address |
|||
; |
|||
000d = cr equ 0dh ;carriage return |
|||
000a = lf equ 0ah ;line feed |
|||
; |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
.sh |
|||
Load SP, Set-Up File for Random Access |
|||
.qs |
|||
|
|||
0100 31bc00 lxi sp,stack |
|||
; |
|||
; version 2.0 |
|||
0103 0e0c mvi c,version |
|||
0105 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0108 fe20 cpi 20h ;version 2.0 or better? |
|||
010a d21600 jnc versok |
|||
; bad version, message and go back |
|||
010d 111b00 lxi d,badver |
|||
0110 cdda00 call print |
|||
0113 c30000 jmp reboot |
|||
; |
|||
versok: |
|||
; correct versionm for random access |
|||
0116 0e0f mvi c,openf ;open default fcb |
|||
0118 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
011b cd 0500 call bdos |
|||
011e 3c inr a ;err 255 becomes zero |
|||
011f c23700 jnz ready |
|||
; |
|||
; connot open file, so create it |
|||
0122 0e16 mvi c,makef |
|||
0124 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
0127 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
012a 3c inr a ;err 255 becomes zero |
|||
012b c23700 jnz ready |
|||
; |
|||
; cannot create file, directory full |
|||
012e 113a00 lxi d,nospace |
|||
0131 cdda00 call print |
|||
0134 c30000 jmp reboot ;back to ccp |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Loop Back to Ready After Each Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
ready: |
|||
; file is ready for processing |
|||
; |
|||
0137 cde500 call readcom ;read next command |
|||
013a 227d00 shld ranrec ;store input record# |
|||
013d 217f00 lxi h,ranovf |
|||
0140 3600 mvi m,0 ;clear high byte if set |
|||
0142 fe51 cpi 'Q' ;quit? |
|||
0144 c25600 jnz notq |
|||
; |
|||
; quit processing, close file |
|||
0147 0e10 mvi c,closef |
|||
0149 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
014c cd0500 call bdos |
|||
014f 3c inr a ;err 255 becomes 0 |
|||
0150 cab900 jz error ;error message, retry |
|||
0153 c30000 jmp reboot ;back to ccp |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
End of Quit Command, Process Write |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
notq: |
|||
; not the quit command, random write? |
|||
0156 fe57 cpi 'W' |
|||
0158 c28900 jnz notw |
|||
; |
|||
; this is a random write, fill buffer untill cr |
|||
015b 114d00 lxi d,datmsg |
|||
015e cdda00 call print ;data prompt |
|||
0161 0e7f mvi c,127 ;up to 127 characters |
|||
0163 218000 lxi h,buff ;destination |
|||
rloop: ;read next character to buff |
|||
0166 c5 push b ;save counter |
|||
0167 e5 push h ;next destination |
|||
0168 cdc200 call getchr ;character to a |
|||
016b e1 pop h ;restore counter |
|||
016c c1 pop b ;restore next to fill |
|||
016d fe0d cpi cr ;end of line? |
|||
016f ca7800 jz erloop |
|||
; not end, store character |
|||
0172 77 mov m,a |
|||
0173 23 inx h ;next to fill |
|||
0174 0d dcr c ;counter goes down |
|||
0175 c26600 jnz rloop ;end of buffer? |
|||
erloop: |
|||
; end of read loop, store 00 |
|||
0178 3600 mvi m,0 |
|||
; |
|||
; write the record to selected record number |
|||
017a 0e22 mvi c,writer |
|||
017c 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
017c cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0182 b7 ora a ;erro code zero? |
|||
0183 c2b900 jnz error ;message if not |
|||
0186 c33700 jmp ready ;for another record |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
End of Write Command, Process Read |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
notw: |
|||
; not a write command, read record? |
|||
0189 fe52 cpi 'R' |
|||
018b c2b900 jnz error ;skip if not |
|||
; |
|||
; read random record |
|||
018e 0e21 mvi c,readr |
|||
0190 115c00 lxi d,fcb |
|||
0193 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
0196 b7 ora a ;return code 00? |
|||
0197 c2b900 jnz error |
|||
; |
|||
; read was successful, write to console |
|||
019a cdcf00 call crlf ;new line |
|||
019d 0e80 mvi c,128 ;max 128 characters |
|||
019f 218000 lxi h,buff ;next to get |
|||
wloop: |
|||
01a2 7e mov a,m ;next character |
|||
01a3 23 inx h ;next to get |
|||
01a4 e67f ani 7fh ;mask parity |
|||
01a6 ca3700 jz ready ;for another command |
|||
;if 00 |
|||
01a9 c5 push b ;save counter |
|||
01aa e5 push h ;save next to get |
|||
01ab fe20 cpi '' ;graphic? |
|||
01ad d4c800 cnc putchr ;skip output if not |
|||
01b0 e1 pop h |
|||
01b1 c1 pop b |
|||
01b2 0d dcr c ;count=count-1 |
|||
01b3 c2a200 jnz wloop |
|||
01b6 c33700 jmp ready |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
End of Read Command, All Errors End Up Here |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
error: |
|||
01b9 115900 lxi d,errmsg |
|||
01bc cdda00 call print |
|||
01bf c33700 jmp ready |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Utility Subroutines for Console I/O |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
getchr: |
|||
;read next console character to a |
|||
01c2 0e01 mvi c,coninp |
|||
01c4 cd0500 call bdos |
|||
01c7 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
putchr: |
|||
;write character from a to console |
|||
01c8 0e02 mvi c,conout |
|||
01ca 5f mov e,a ;character to send |
|||
01cb cd0500 call bdos ;send character |
|||
01ce c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
crlf: |
|||
;send carriage return line feed |
|||
01cf 3e0d mvi a,cr ;carriage return |
|||
01d1 cdc800 call putchr |
|||
01d4 3e0a mvi a,lf ;line feed |
|||
01d6 cdc800 call putchr |
|||
01d9 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
print: |
|||
;print the buffer addressed by de untill $ |
|||
01da d5 push d |
|||
01db cdcf00 call crlf |
|||
01de d1 pop d ;new line |
|||
01df 0e09 mvi c,pstring |
|||
01e0 cd0500 call bdos ;print the string |
|||
01e4 c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
readcom: |
|||
;read the next command line to the conbuf |
|||
01e5 116b00 lxi d,prompt |
|||
01e8 cdda00 call print ;command? |
|||
01eb 0e0a mvi c,rstring |
|||
01ed 117a00 lxi d,conbuf |
|||
01f0 cd0500 call bdos ;read command line |
|||
; command line is present, scan it |
|||
01f3 210000 lxi h,0 ;start with 0000 |
|||
01f6 117c00 lxi d,conlin ;command line |
|||
01f9 1a readc: ldax d ;next command |
|||
;character |
|||
01fa 13 inx d ;to next command |
|||
;position |
|||
01fb b7 ora a ;cannot be end of |
|||
;command |
|||
01fc c8 rz |
|||
; not zero, numeric? |
|||
01fd d630 sui '0' |
|||
01ff fe0a cpi 10 ;carry if numeric |
|||
0201 d21300 jnc endrd |
|||
; add-in next digit |
|||
0204 29 dad h ;*2 |
|||
0205 4d mov c,l |
|||
0206 44 mov b,h ;bc = value * 2 |
|||
0207 29 dad h ;*4 |
|||
0208 29 dad h ;*8 |
|||
0209 09 dad b ;*2 + *8 = *10 |
|||
020a 85 add l ;*digit |
|||
020b 6f mov l,a |
|||
020c d2f900 jnc readc ;for another char |
|||
020f24 inr h ;overflow |
|||
0210 c3f900 jmp readc ;for another char |
|||
endrd: |
|||
; end of read, restore value in a |
|||
0213 c630 adi '0' ;command |
|||
0215 fe61 cpi 'a' ;translate case? |
|||
0217 d8 rc |
|||
; lower case, mask lower case bits |
|||
0218 e65f ani 101$1111b |
|||
021a c9 ret |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
String Data Area for Console Messages |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
badver: |
|||
021b 536f79 db 'sorry, you need cp/m version 2$' |
|||
nospace: |
|||
023a 4e6f29 db 'no directory space$' |
|||
datmsg: |
|||
024d 547970 db 'type data: $' |
|||
errmsg: |
|||
0259 457272 db 'error, try again.$' |
|||
prompt: |
|||
026b 4e6570 db 'next command? $' |
|||
; |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Fixed and Variable Data Area |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
027a 21 conbuf: db conlen ;length of console buffer |
|||
027b consiz: ds 1 ;resulting size after read |
|||
027c conlin: ds 32 ;length 32 buffer |
|||
0021 = conlen equ $-consiz |
|||
; |
|||
029c ds 32 ;16 level stack |
|||
stack: |
|||
02bc end |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
Major improvements could be made to this particular program to enhance |
|||
its operation. In fact, with some work, this program could |
|||
evolve into a simple data base management system. One could, for |
|||
example, assume a standard record size of 128 bytes, consisting |
|||
to arbitrary fields within the record. A program, called GETKEY, |
|||
could be developed that first reads a sequential file and |
|||
extracts a specific field defined by the operator. For example, |
|||
the command |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
GETKEY NAMES.DAT LASTNAME 10 20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
would cause GETKEY to read the data base file NAMES.DAT and |
|||
extract the LAST-NAME field from each record, starting in |
|||
position 10 and ending at character 20. GETKEY builds a table in |
|||
memory consisting of each particular LASTNAME field, along with |
|||
its 16-bit record number location within the file. The GETKEY |
|||
program then sorts this list and writes a new file, called |
|||
LASTNAME.KEY, which is an alphabetical list of LASTNAME fields |
|||
with their corresponding record numbers. This list is called an |
|||
inverted index in information retrieval parlance. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the programmer were to rename the program shown above as QUERY |
|||
and modify it so that it reads a sorted key file into memory, |
|||
the command line might appear as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
QUERY NAMES.DAT LASTNAME.KEY |
|||
.sp |
|||
Instead of reading a number, the QUERY program reads an |
|||
alphanumeric string that is a particular key to find in the |
|||
NAMES.DAT data base. Because the LASTNAME.KEY list is sorted, one |
|||
can find a particular entry rapidly by performing a binary |
|||
search, similar to looking up a name in the telephone book. |
|||
Starting at both ends of the list, one examines the |
|||
entry halfway in between and, if not matched, splits either the |
|||
upper half or the lower half for the next search. You will |
|||
quickly reach the item you are looking for and find the |
|||
corresponding record number. You should fetch and display |
|||
this record at the console, just as was done in the program shown |
|||
above. |
|||
.pp |
|||
With some more work, you can allow a fixed grouping size |
|||
that differs from the 128-byte record shown above. This is |
|||
accomplished by keeping track of the record number and the |
|||
byte offset within the record. Knowing the group size, you |
|||
randomly access the record containing the proper group, offset |
|||
to the beginning of the group within the record read sequentially |
|||
until the group size has been exhausted. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Finally, you can improve QUERY considerably by allowing boolean |
|||
expressions, which compute the set of records that satisfy |
|||
several relationships, such as a LASTNAME between HARDY and |
|||
LAUREL and an AGE lower than 45. Display all the records that |
|||
fit this description. Finally, if your lists are getting |
|||
too big to fit into memory, randomly access key |
|||
files from the disk as well. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 5.6 System Function Summary |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 5.6 System Function Summary |
|||
.sh |
|||
5.6 System Function Summary |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Function Function Input Output |
|||
Number Name |
|||
.sp |
|||
Decimal Hex |
|||
.sp |
|||
0 0 System Reset C = 00H none |
|||
1 1 Console Input C = 01H A = ASCII char |
|||
2 2 Console Output E = char none |
|||
3 3 Reader Input A = ASCII char |
|||
4 4 Punch Output E = char none |
|||
5 5 List Output E = char none |
|||
6 6 Direct Console I/O C = 06H A = char or status |
|||
|
|||
E = 0FFH (input) or (no value) |
|||
0FEH (status) or |
|||
char (output) |
|||
7 7 Get I/O Byte none A = I/O byte |
|||
Value |
|||
8 8 Set I/O Byte E = I/O Byte none |
|||
9 9 Print String DE = Buffer Address none |
|||
10 A Read Console Buffer DE = Buffer Console |
|||
Characters |
|||
in Buffer |
|||
11 B Get Console Status none A = 00/non zero |
|||
12 C Return Version Number none HL: Version |
|||
Number |
|||
13 D Reset Disk System none none |
|||
14 E Select Disk E = Disk Number none |
|||
15 F Open File DE = FCB Address FF if not found |
|||
16 10 Close File DE = FCB Address FF if not found |
|||
17 11 Search For First DE = FCB Address A = Directory |
|||
Code |
|||
18 12 Search For Next none A = Directory |
|||
Code |
|||
19 13 Delete File DE = FCB Address A = none |
|||
20 14 Read Sequential DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
21 15 Write Sequential DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
22 16 Make File DE = FCB Address A = FF if no DIR |
|||
Space |
|||
23 17 Rename File DE = FCB Address A = FF in not |
|||
found |
|||
24 18 Return Login Vector none HL = Login |
|||
Vector* |
|||
25 19 Return Current Disk none A = Current Disk |
|||
Number |
|||
26 1A Set DMA Address DE = DMA Address none |
|||
27 1B Get ADDR (ALLOC) none HL = ALLOC |
|||
Address* |
|||
28 1C Write Protect Disk none none |
|||
29 1D Get Read/only Vector none HL = R/O |
|||
Vector Value* |
|||
30 1E Set File Attributes DE = FCB Address A = none |
|||
31 1F Get ADDR (Disk Parms) none HL = DPB |
|||
Address |
|||
32 20 Set/Get User Code E = 0FFH for Get User Number |
|||
E = 00 to 0FH for Set |
|||
33 21 Read Random DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
34 22 Write Random DE = FCB Address A = Error Code |
|||
35 23 Compute File Size DE = FCB Address r0, r1, r2 |
|||
36 24 Set Random Record DE = FCB Address r0, r1, r2 |
|||
37 25 Reset Drive DE = Drive Vector A = 0 |
|||
38 26 Access Drive not supported |
|||
39 27 Free Drive not supported |
|||
40 28 Write Random with Fill DE = FCB A = Error Code |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
*Note that A = L, and B = H upon return. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Section 5 |
|||
.nx sixa |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,693 +0,0 @@ |
|||
|
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 4-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 4 CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.qs |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 4.1 Introduction |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.1 Introduction |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The DDT program allows dynamic interactive testing and debugging of |
|||
programs generated in the CP/M environment. Invoke the debugger with |
|||
a command of one of the following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DDT |
|||
DDT filename.HEX |
|||
DDT filename.COM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where filename is the name of the program to be loaded and |
|||
tested. In both cases, the DDT program is brought into main |
|||
memory in place of the Console Command Processor (CCP) and resides |
|||
directly below the Basic Disk Operating System (BDOS) |
|||
portion of CP/M. Refer to Section 5 for standard memory |
|||
organization. The BDOS |
|||
starting address, located in the address field of the |
|||
JMP instruction at location 5H, is altered to reflect the |
|||
reduced Transient Program Area (TPA) size. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second and third forms of the DDT command perform the same |
|||
actions as the first, except there is a subsequent automatic load |
|||
of the specified HEX or COM file. The action is identical to the |
|||
following sequence of commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DDT |
|||
Ifilename.HEX or Ifilename.COM |
|||
R |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the I and R commands set up and read the specified program |
|||
to test. See the explanation of the I and R |
|||
commands below for exact details. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon initiation, DDT prints a sign-on message in the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT VER m.m |
|||
.sp |
|||
where m.m is the revision number. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Following the sign-on message, DDT prompts you with the |
|||
hyphen character, -, and waits for input commands from the |
|||
console. You can type any of several single-character commands, |
|||
followed by a carriage return to execute the command. Each |
|||
line of input can be line-edited using the following standard |
|||
CP/M controls: |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-1. Line-editing Controls |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Control Result |
|||
.sp |
|||
rubout removes the last character typed |
|||
|
|||
CTRL-U removes the entire line, ready for retyping |
|||
|
|||
CTRL-C reboots system |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Any command can be up to 32 characters in length. An automatic |
|||
carriage return is inserted as character 33, where the |
|||
first character determines the command type. Table 4-2 describes DDT |
|||
commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-2. DDT Commands |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Command Result |
|||
Character |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 57 |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
A enters assembly-language mnemonics with operands. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
D displays memory in hexadecimal and ASCII. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
F fills memory with constant data. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
G begins execution with optional breakpoints. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
I sets up a standard input File Control Block. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
L lists memory using assembler mnemonics. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
M moves a memory segment from source to destination. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
R reads a program for subsequent testing. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
S substitutes memory values. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
T traces program execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
U untraced program monitoring. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -9 |
|||
X examines and optionally alters the CPU state. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The command character, in some cases, is followed by zero, one, |
|||
two, or three hexadecimal values, which are separated by commas |
|||
or single blank characters. All DDT numeric output is in |
|||
hexadecimal form. The commands are not execution until the |
|||
carriage return is typed at the end of the command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
At any point in the debug run, you can stop execution of |
|||
DDT by using either a CTRL-C or G0 (jump to location 0000H) and |
|||
save the current memory image by using a SAVE command of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE n filename. COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
where n is the number of pages (256 byte blocks) to be saved on |
|||
disk. The number of blocks is determined by taking the high-order |
|||
byte of the address in the TPA and converting this number to |
|||
decimal. For example, if the highest address in the TPA is 134H, |
|||
the number of pages is 12H or 18 in decimal. You could type a |
|||
CTRL-C during the debug run, returning to the CCP level, followed |
|||
by |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE 18 X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
The memory image is saved as X.COM on the disk and can be |
|||
directly executed by typing the name X. If further testing is |
|||
required, the memory image can be recalled by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
which reloads the previously saved program from location 100H |
|||
through page 18, 23FFH. The CPU state is not a part of the COM |
|||
file; thus, the program must be restarted from the beginning to |
|||
test it properly. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2 DDT Commands |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.2 DDT Commands |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2 DDT Commands |
|||
.pp |
|||
The individual commands are detailed below. In each case, the |
|||
operator must wait for the hyphen prompt character before entering |
|||
the command. If control is passed to a program under test, and |
|||
the program has not reached a breakpoint, control can be returned |
|||
to DDT by executing a RST 7 from the front panel. In the |
|||
explanation of each command, the command letter is shown in some |
|||
cases with numbers separated by commas, the the numbers are |
|||
represented by lower-case letters. These numbers are always |
|||
assumed to be in a hexadecimal radix and from one to four digits |
|||
in length. Longer numbers are automatically truncated on the |
|||
right. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Many of the commands operate upon a CPU state that corresponds |
|||
to the program under test. The CPU state holds the registers of |
|||
the program being debugged and initially contains zeros for all |
|||
registers and flags except for the program counter, P, and stack |
|||
pointer, S, which default to 100H. The program counter is |
|||
subsequently set to the starting address given in the last record |
|||
of a HEX file if a file of this form is loaded, see the I and R |
|||
commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
DDT allows in-line assembly language to be inserted into the |
|||
current memory image using the A command, which takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
As |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the hexadecimal starting address for the in-line |
|||
assembly. DDT prompts the console with the address of the next |
|||
instruction to fill and reads the console, looking for assembly-language |
|||
mnemonics followed by register references and operands in |
|||
absolute hexadecimal form. See the \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
Intel 8080 Assembly Language Reference Card \c |
|||
.qu |
|||
for a list of mnemonics. Each |
|||
successive load address is printed before reading the console. |
|||
The A command terminates when the first empty line is input from |
|||
the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon completion of assembly language input, you can |
|||
review the memory segment using the DDT disassembler (see the L |
|||
command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that the assembler/disassembler portion of |
|||
DDT can be overlaid by the transient program being tested, in |
|||
which case the DDT program responds with an error condition when |
|||
the A and L commands are used. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.2 The D (Display) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.2 The D (Display) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The D command allows you to view the contents of memory |
|||
in hexadecimal and ASCII formats. The D command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
D |
|||
Ds |
|||
Ds,f |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the first form, memory is displayed from the current display |
|||
address, initially 100H, and continues for 16 display lines. |
|||
Each display line takes the followng form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
aaaa bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb cccccccccccccccc |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where aaaa is the display address in hexadecimal and bb |
|||
represents data present in memory starting at aaaa. The ASCII |
|||
characters starting at aaaa are to the right (represented by the |
|||
sequence of character c) where nongraphic characters are printed as a |
|||
period. You should note that both upper- and lower-case |
|||
alphabetics are displayed, and will appear as upper-case symbols |
|||
on a console device that supports only upper-case. Each display |
|||
line gives the values of 16 bytes of data, with the first line |
|||
truncated so that the next line begins at an address that is a |
|||
multiple of 16. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form of the D command is similar to the first, except |
|||
that the display address is first set to address s. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The third form causes the display to continue from address s |
|||
through address f. In all cases, the display address is set to |
|||
the first address not displayed in this command, so that a |
|||
continuing display can be accomplished by issuing successive D |
|||
commands with no explicit addresses. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Excessively long displays can be aborted by pressing the return key. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The F command takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Fs,f,c, |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the starting address, f is the final address, and c is |
|||
a hexadecimal byte constant. DDT stores the constant c at |
|||
address s, increments the value of s and test against f. If s |
|||
exceeds f, the operation terminates, otherwise the operation is |
|||
repeated. Thus, the fill command can be used to set a memory |
|||
block to a specific constant value. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.4 The G (Go) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.4 The G (Go) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
A program is executed using the G command, with up to two |
|||
optional breakpoint addresses. The G command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
G |
|||
Gs |
|||
Gs,b |
|||
Gs,b,c |
|||
G,b |
|||
G,b,c |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The first form executes the program at the current value of the |
|||
program counter in the current machine state, with no breakpoints |
|||
set. The only way to regain control in DDT is through a RST 7 |
|||
execution. The current program counter can be viewed by typing |
|||
an X or XP command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form is similar to the first, except that the program |
|||
counter in the current machine state is set to address s before |
|||
execution begins. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The third form is the same as the second, except that program |
|||
execution stops when address b is encountered (b must be in the |
|||
area of the program under test). The instruction at location b is |
|||
not executed when the breakpoint is encountered. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The fourth form is identical to the third, except that two |
|||
breakpoints are specified, one at b and the other at c. |
|||
Encountering either breakpoint causes execution to stop, and both |
|||
breakpoints are cleared. The last two forms take the program |
|||
counter from the current machine state and set one and two |
|||
breakpoints, respectively. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Execution continues from the starting address in real-time to the |
|||
next breakpoint. There is no intervention between the starting |
|||
address and the break address by DDT. If the program under test |
|||
does not reach a breakpoint, control cannot return to DDT without |
|||
executing a RST 7 instruction. Upon encountering a breakpoint, |
|||
DDT stops execution and types |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*d |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d is the stop address. The machine state can be examined |
|||
at this point using the X (Examine) command. You must |
|||
specify breakpoints that differ from the program counter address |
|||
at the beginning of the G command. Thus, if the current program |
|||
counter is 1234H, then the following commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
G,1234 |
|||
G400,400 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
both produce an immediate breakpoint without executing any |
|||
instructions. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.5 The I (Input) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.5 The I (Input) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The I command allows you to insert a filename into the default |
|||
File Control Block (FCB) at 5CH. The FCB created by CP/M for |
|||
transient programs is placed at this location (see Section 5). |
|||
The default FCB can be used by the program under test as if it |
|||
had been passed by the CP/M Console Processor. Note that this |
|||
filename is also used by DDT for reading additional HEX and COM |
|||
files. The I command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Ifilename |
|||
Ifilename.typ |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
If the second form is used and the filetype is either HEX or COM, |
|||
subsequent R commands can be used to read the pure binary or hex |
|||
format machine code. Section 4.2.8 gives further details. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.6 The L (List) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.6 The L (List) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The L command is used to list assembly-language mnemonics in a |
|||
particular program region. The L command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
L |
|||
Ls |
|||
Ls,f |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The first form lists twelve lines of disassembled machine code |
|||
from the current list address. The second form sets the list |
|||
address to s and then lists twelve lines of code. The last form |
|||
lists disassembled code from s through address f. In all three |
|||
cases, the list address is set to the next unlisted location in |
|||
preparation for a subsequent L command. Upon encountering an |
|||
execution breakpoint, the list address is set to the current |
|||
value of the program counter (G and T commands). Again, long |
|||
typeouts can be aborted by pressing RETURN during the list |
|||
process. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.7 The M (Move) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.7 The M (Move) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The M command allows block movement of program or data areas from |
|||
one location to another in memory. The M command takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Ms,f,d |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the start address of the move, f is the final address, |
|||
and d is the destination address. Data is first removed from s |
|||
to d, and both addresses are incremented. If s exceeds f, the |
|||
move operation stops; otherwise, the move operation is repeated. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.8 The R (Read) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.8 The R (Read) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The R command is used in conjunction with the I command to read |
|||
COM and HEX files from the disk into the transient program |
|||
area in preparation for the debug run. The R command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
R |
|||
RB |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where b is an optional bias address that is added to each program |
|||
or data address as it is loaded. The load operation must not |
|||
overwrite any of the system parameters from 000H through 0FFH |
|||
(that is, the first page of memory). If b is omitted, then |
|||
b=0000 is assumed. The R command requires a previous I command, |
|||
specifying the name of a HEX or COM file. The load address for |
|||
each record is obtained from each individual HEX record, while an |
|||
assumed load address of 100H is used for COM files. Note that |
|||
any number of R commands can be issued following the I command to |
|||
reread the program under test, assuming the tested program does |
|||
not destroy the default area at 5CH. Any file specified with the |
|||
filetype COM is assumed to contain machine code in pure binary |
|||
form (created with the LOAD or SAVE command), and all others are |
|||
assumed to contain machine code in Intel hex format (produced, |
|||
for example, with the ASM command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
Recall that the command, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT filename.filetype |
|||
.sp |
|||
which initiates the DDT program, equals to the following commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DDT |
|||
-Ifilename.filetype |
|||
-R |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Whenever the R command is issued, DDT responds with either the |
|||
error indicator ? (file cannot be opened, or a checksum error |
|||
occurred in a HEX file) or with a load message. The load message |
|||
takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
nnnn pppp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where nnnn is the next address following the loaded program and |
|||
pppp is the assumed program counter (100H for COM files, or |
|||
taken from the last record if a HEX file is specified). |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.9 The S (Set) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.9 The S (Set) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The S command allows memory locations to be examined and |
|||
optionally altered. The S command takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Ss |
|||
.sp |
|||
where s is the hexadecimal starting address for examination and |
|||
alteration of memory. DDT responds with a numeric prompt, giving |
|||
the memory location, along with the data currently held in |
|||
memory. If you type a carriage return, the data is |
|||
not altered. If a byte value is typed, the value is stored at |
|||
the prompted address. In either case, DDT continues to prompt |
|||
with successive addresses and values until you type either a period |
|||
or an invalid input value is detected. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.10 The T (Trace) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.10 The T (Trace) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The T command allows selective tracing of program execution for 1 |
|||
to 65535 program steps. The T command takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
T |
|||
Tn |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the first form, the CPU state is displayed and the next |
|||
program step is executed. The program terminates immediately, |
|||
with the termination address displayed as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*hhhh |
|||
.sp |
|||
where hhhh is the next address to execute. The display address |
|||
(used in the D command) is set to the value of H and L, and the |
|||
list address (used in the L command) is set to hhhh. The CPU |
|||
state at program termination can then be examined using the X |
|||
command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form of the T command is similar to the first, except |
|||
that execution is traced for n steps (n is a hexadecimal value) |
|||
before a program breakpoint occurs. A breakpoint can be forced |
|||
in the trace mode by typing a rubout character. The CPU state is |
|||
displayed before each program step is taken in trace mode. The |
|||
format of the display is the same as described in the X command. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
You should note that program tracing is discontinued at the |
|||
CP/M interface and resumes after return from CP/M to the program |
|||
under test. Thus, CP/M functions that access I/O devices, such |
|||
as the disk drive, run in real-time, avoiding I/O timing |
|||
problems. Programs running in trace mode execute approximately |
|||
500 times slower than real-time because DDT gets control after each |
|||
user instruction is executed. Interrupt processing routines can |
|||
be traced, but commands that use the breakpoint facility (G, T, |
|||
and U) accomplish the break using an RST 7 instruction, which |
|||
means that the tested program cannot use this interrupt location. |
|||
Further, the trace mode always runs the tested program with |
|||
interrupts enabled, which may cause problems if asynchronous |
|||
interrupts are received during tracing. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To get control back to DDT during trace, press RETURN rather than |
|||
executing an RST 7. This ensures that the trace for current |
|||
instruction is completed before interruption. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The U command is identical to the T command, except that |
|||
intermediate program steps are not displayed. The untrace mode |
|||
allows from 1 to 65535, (0FFFFH) steps to be executed in monitored |
|||
mode and is used principally to retain control of an executing |
|||
program while it reaches steady state conditions. All conditions |
|||
of the T command apply to the U command. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command |
|||
.pp |
|||
The X command allows selective display and alteration of the |
|||
current CPU state for the program under test. The X command |
|||
takes the forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
X |
|||
Xr |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where r is one of the 8080 CPU registers listed in the following table. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-3. CPU Registers |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Register Meaning Value |
|||
.sp |
|||
C Carry flag (0/1) |
|||
Z Zero flag (0/1) |
|||
M Minus flag (0/1) |
|||
E Even parity flag (0/1) |
|||
I Interdigit carry (0/1) |
|||
A Accumulator (0-FF) |
|||
B BC register pair (0-FFFF) |
|||
D DE register pair (0-FFFF) |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 4-3. (continued) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Register Meaning Value |
|||
.sp |
|||
H HL register pair (0-FFFF) |
|||
S Stack pointer (0-FFFF) |
|||
P Program counter (0-FFFF) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
In the first case, the CPU register state is displayed in the |
|||
format: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
CfZfMfEflf A=bb B=dddd D=dddd H=dddd S=dddd P=dddd inst |
|||
.sp |
|||
where f is a 0 or 1 flag value, bb is a byte value, and dddd is a |
|||
double-byte quantity corresponding to the register pair. The |
|||
inst field contains the disassembled instruction, that occurs at |
|||
the location addressed by the CPU state's program counter. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second form allows display and optional alteration of |
|||
register values, where r is one of the registers given above (C, |
|||
Z, M, E, I, A, B, D, H, S, or P). In each case, the flag or |
|||
register value is first displayed at the console. The DDT |
|||
program then accepts input from the console. If a carriage |
|||
return is typed, the flag or register value is not altered. If |
|||
a value in the proper range is typed, the flag or register value |
|||
is altered. You should note that BC, DE, and HL are |
|||
displayed as register pairs. Thus, you must type the entire |
|||
register pair when B, C, or the BC pair is altered. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.3 Implementation Notes |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.3 Implementation Notes |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.3 Implementation Notes |
|||
.pp |
|||
The organization of DDT allows certain nonessential portions to |
|||
be overlaid to gain a larger transient program area for debugging |
|||
large programs. The DDT program consists of two parts: the DDT |
|||
nucleus and the assembler/disassembler module. The DDT nucleus |
|||
is loaded over the CCP and, although loaded with the DDT nucleus, |
|||
the assembler/disassembler is overlayable unless used to assemble |
|||
or disassemble. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In particular, the BDOS address at location 6H (address field of |
|||
the JMP instruction at location 5H) is modified by DDT to address |
|||
the base location of the DDT nucleus, which, in turn, contains a |
|||
JMP instruction to the BDOS. Thus, programs that use this |
|||
address field to size memory see the logical end of memory at the |
|||
base of the DDT nucleus rather than the base of the BDOS. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The assembler/disassembler module resides directly below the DDT |
|||
nucleus in the transient program area. If the A, L, T, or X |
|||
commands are used during the debugging process, the DDT program |
|||
again alters the address field at 6H to include this module, |
|||
further reducing the logical end of memory. If a program loads |
|||
beyond the beginning of the assembler/disassembler module, the A |
|||
and L commands are lost (their use produces a ? in response) |
|||
and the trace and display (T and X) commands list the inst field |
|||
of the display in hexadecimal, rather than as a decoded |
|||
instruction. |
|||
.nx fourb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,583 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 4.4 A Sample Program |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 4.4 A Sample Program |
|||
.sh |
|||
4.4 A Sample Program |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following example shows an edit, assemble, and debug for a |
|||
simple program that reads a set of data values and determines the |
|||
largest value in the set. The largest value is taken from the |
|||
vector and stored into LARGE at the termination of the program. |
|||
.ll 75 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ED SCAN.ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Create source program; |
|||
" " represents carriage return. |
|||
*I |
|||
ORG 1-00H ;START OF TRANSIENT |
|||
;AREA |
|||
MVI B, LEN ;LENGTH OF VECTOR TO SCAN |
|||
MVI C, 0 ;LARGER_RST VALUE SO FAR |
|||
LOOP LXI H, VECT ;BASE OF VECTOR |
|||
LOOP: MOV A, M ;GET VALUE |
|||
SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT |
|||
;FOUND |
|||
; NEW LARGEST VALUE, STORE IT TO C |
|||
MOV C, A |
|||
NFOUND INX H ;TO NEXT ELEMENT |
|||
DCR B ;MORE TO SCAN? |
|||
JNZ LOOP ;FOR ANOTHER |
|||
; |
|||
; END OF SCAN, STORE C |
|||
MOV A, C ;GET LARGEST VALUE |
|||
STA LARGE |
|||
JMP 0 ;REBOOT |
|||
; |
|||
; TEST DATA |
|||
VECT: DB 2,0,4,3,5,6,1,5 |
|||
LEN EQU $-VECT ;LENGTH |
|||
LARGE: DS 1 ;LARGEST VALUE ON EXIT |
|||
END |
|||
|
|||
.bp |
|||
^-Z |
|||
*B0P |
|||
ORG 100H ;START OF TRANSIENT AREA |
|||
MVI B,LEN ;LENGTH OF VECTOR TO SCAN |
|||
MVI C,0 ;LARGEST VALUE SO FAR |
|||
LXI H,VECT ;BASE OF VECTOR |
|||
LOOP: MOV A,M ;GET VALUE |
|||
SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT |
|||
;FOUND |
|||
; NEW LARGEST VALUE, STORE IT TO C |
|||
MOV C,A |
|||
NFOUND: INX H ;TO NEXT ELEMENT |
|||
DCR B ;MORE TO SCAN? |
|||
JNZ LOOP ;FOR ANOTHER |
|||
; END OF SCAN, STORE C |
|||
MOV A,C ;GET LARGEST VALUE |
|||
STA LARGE |
|||
JMP 0 ;REBOOT |
|||
; |
|||
; TEST DATA |
|||
|
|||
VECT: DB 2,0,4,3,5,6,1,5 |
|||
LEN EQU $-VECT ;LENGTH |
|||
LARGE: DS 1 ;LARGEST VALUE ON EXIT |
|||
END |
|||
*E <--End of edit |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM SCAN \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Start Assembler |
|||
|
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER - VER 1.0 |
|||
|
|||
0122 |
|||
002H USE FACTOR |
|||
END OF ASSEMBLY Assembly complete; lock at program listing |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
TYPE SCAN.PRN |
|||
.qs |
|||
Code address Source program |
|||
0100 ORG 100H ;START OF TRANSIENT AREA |
|||
0100 0608 MVI B,LEN ;LENGTH OF VECTOR TO SCAN |
|||
0102 0E00 Machine code MVI C,0 ;LARGEST VALUE SO FAR |
|||
0104 211901 LXI H,VECT. ;BASE OF VECTOR |
|||
0107 7E LOOP: MOV A,M ;GET VALUE |
|||
0108 91 SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
0109 D20D01 JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT |
|||
;FOUND |
|||
; NEW LARGEST VALUE, STORE IT TO C |
|||
010C 4F MOV C,A |
|||
.bp |
|||
010D 23 NFOUND: INX H ;TO NEXT ELEMENT |
|||
010E 05 DCR B ;MORE TO SCAN? |
|||
010F C20701 JNZ LOOP ;FOR ANOTHER |
|||
; |
|||
; END OF SCAN, STORE C |
|||
0112 79 MOV A,C ;GET LARGEST VALUE |
|||
0113 322101 STA LARGE |
|||
|
|||
0116 C30000 JMP 0 ;REBOOT |
|||
Code--data listing; |
|||
truncated ; TEST DATA |
|||
0119 0200040305 VECT: DB 2,0,4,3,5,6,1,5 |
|||
0008 = Value of LEN EQU $-VECT ;LENGTH |
|||
0121 equate LARGE: DS 1 ;LARGEST VALUE ON EXIT |
|||
0122 END |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Start debugger using hex format machine code |
|||
|
|||
DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC Next instruction |
|||
0121 0000 to execute at |
|||
-X Last load address + 1 PC=0 |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0000 OUT 7F |
|||
-XP Examine registers before debug run |
|||
|
|||
P=0000 100 Change PC to 100 |
|||
|
|||
-X Look at registers again |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
-L100 |
|||
PC changed Next instruction |
|||
to execute at PC=100 |
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C Disassembled machine |
|||
0109 JNC 010D code at 100H |
|||
010C MOV C,A (see source listing |
|||
010D INX H for comparison) |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-L |
|||
.bp |
|||
0113 STA 0121 |
|||
0116 JMP 0000 |
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
011A NOP A little more machine |
|||
011B INR B code. Note that pro- |
|||
011C INX B gram ends at location |
|||
011D DCR B 116 with a JMP to |
|||
011E MVI B,01 0000. Remainder of |
|||
0120 DCR B listing is assembly of |
|||
0121 LXI D,2200 data. |
|||
0124 LXI H,0200 |
|||
-A116 Enter in-line assembly mode to change the JMP to 0000 into a RST 7, |
|||
which will cause the program under test to return to DDT if 116H is |
|||
ever executed. |
|||
0116 RST 7 |
|||
|
|||
0117 (Single carriage return stops assemble mode) |
|||
|
|||
-L113 List code at 113H to check that RST 7 was properly inserted |
|||
|
|||
0113 STA 0121 |
|||
0116 RST 07 in place of JMP |
|||
0117 NOP |
|||
0118 NOP |
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
011A NOP |
|||
011B INR B |
|||
011C INX B |
|||
- |
|||
|
|||
-X Look at registers |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
-T |
|||
Execute Program for one stop. Initial CPU state, before is executed |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08*0102 |
|||
Automatic breakpoint |
|||
|
|||
Trace one step again (note O8H in B) |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00*0104 |
|||
-T |
|||
Trace again (Register C is cleared) |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119*0107 |
|||
-T3 Trace three steps |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D*010D |
|||
-D119 |
|||
Display memory starting at 119H. Automatic breakpoint at 10DH |
|||
|
|||
0119 02 00 04 03 05 06 01.Program data Lower-case x |
|||
0120 05 11 00 22 21 00 02 7E EB 77 13 23 EB 0B 78 B1 ..."!.. . W .#..X. |
|||
0130 C2 27 01 C3 03 29 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ...' ...)......... |
|||
0140 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
0150 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
0160 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Data are displayed |
|||
0170 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 in ASCI with a "." |
|||
0180 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 in the position of |
|||
0190 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 nongraphic........ |
|||
01A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 characters........ |
|||
01B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
01C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .................. |
|||
-X |
|||
Current CPU state |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
-T5 |
|||
Trace 5 steps from current CPU state |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
|
|||
U5 |
|||
Automatic breakpoint |
|||
Trace without listing intermediate states |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D*0108 |
|||
-X |
|||
CPU state at end of U5 |
|||
C0Z0M0E1I1 A=04 B=0600 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
-G Run program from current PC until completion (in real-time) |
|||
|
|||
*0116 breakpoint at 116H, caused by executing RST 7 in machine code. |
|||
|
|||
-X |
|||
CPU state at end of program |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0116 RST 07 |
|||
-XP |
|||
Examine and change program counter |
|||
|
|||
P=0116 100 |
|||
|
|||
-X |
|||
|
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
-T10 |
|||
|
|||
First data element |
|||
Current largest value |
|||
Subtract for comparison C |
|||
Trace 10 (hexadecimal) steps |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JNC 010D |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=00 B=0700 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E1I1 A=00 B=0600 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E1I1 A=00 B=0600 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M*0108 |
|||
-A109 |
|||
Insert a "hot patch" into Program should have moved the |
|||
the machine code value from A into C since A>C. |
|||
0109 JC 10D to change the Since this code was not executed, |
|||
JNC to JC it appears that the JNC should |
|||
010C have been a JC instruction |
|||
|
|||
Stop DDT so that a version of |
|||
-G0 the patched program can be saved |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
SAVE 1 SCAN.COM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Program resides on first |
|||
page, so save 1 page. |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.COM |
|||
.qs |
|||
Restart DDT with the save memory |
|||
DDT VER 1.0 image to continue testing |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
0200 0100 |
|||
|
|||
-L100 List some code |
|||
|
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C |
|||
0109 JC 010D Previous patch is present in X.COM |
|||
010C MOV C,A |
|||
010D INX H |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0100 |
|||
|
|||
-T10 |
|||
Trace to see how patched version operates Data is moved from A to C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0000 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0000 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=00 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I0 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010C MOV C,A |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010D INX H |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010E DCR B |
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=FE B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107*0107 |
|||
-X Breakpoint after 16 steps |
|||
|
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=FE B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M |
|||
-G,108 Run from current PC and breakpoint at 108H |
|||
|
|||
*0108 |
|||
-X |
|||
Next data item |
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=04 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0108 SUB C |
|||
-T |
|||
Single step for a few cycles |
|||
C1Z0M0E1I1 A=04 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D*010C |
|||
-X |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0602 D=0000 H=011B S=0100 P=010C MOV C,A |
|||
-G Run to completion |
|||
|
|||
*0116 |
|||
-X |
|||
|
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0003 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0116 RST 07 |
|||
-S121 Look at the value of "LARGE" |
|||
|
|||
0121 03 Wrong value! |
|||
|
|||
0122 00 |
|||
|
|||
0123 22 |
|||
|
|||
0124 21 |
|||
|
|||
0125 00 |
|||
|
|||
0126 02 |
|||
|
|||
0127 7E _\b. End of the S command |
|||
|
|||
-L100 |
|||
|
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C |
|||
0109 JC 010D |
|||
010C MOV C,A |
|||
010D INX H |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-L Review the code |
|||
|
|||
0113 STA 0121 |
|||
0116 RST 07 |
|||
0117 NOP |
|||
0118 NOP |
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
011A NOP |
|||
011B INR B |
|||
011C INX B |
|||
011D DCR B |
|||
011E MVI B,01 |
|||
0120 DCR B |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0116 100 Reset the PC |
|||
|
|||
-T |
|||
Single step, and watch data values |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0003 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0100 MVI B,08*0102 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0803 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0102 MVI C,00*0104 |
|||
-T |
|||
Count set Largest set |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0800 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0104 LXI H,0119*0107 |
|||
-T |
|||
Base address of data set |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=03 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M*0108 |
|||
-T |
|||
First data item brought to A |
|||
C0Z1M0E1I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D*010C |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0800 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010C MOV C,A*010D |
|||
-T |
|||
First data item moved to C correctly |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=0119 S=0100 P=010D INX H*010E |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0802 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010E DCR B*010F |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010F JNZ 0107*0107 |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=02 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0107 MOV A,M*0108 |
|||
-T |
|||
Second data item brought to A |
|||
C0Z0M0E0I1 A=00 B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0108 SUB C*0109 |
|||
-T |
|||
Subtract destroys data value that was loaded! |
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=0109 JC 010D*010D |
|||
-T |
|||
|
|||
C1Z0M1E0I0 A=FE B=0702 D=0000 H=011A S=0100 P=010D INX H*010E |
|||
-L100 |
|||
|
|||
0100 MVI B,08 |
|||
0102 MVI C,00 |
|||
0104 LXI H,0119 |
|||
0107 MOV A,M |
|||
0108 SUB C This should have been a CMP so that register A |
|||
0109 JC 010D would not be destroyed. |
|||
010C MOV C,A |
|||
010D INX H |
|||
010E DCR B |
|||
010F JNZ 0107 |
|||
0112 MOV A,C |
|||
-A108 |
|||
|
|||
0108 CMP C Hot patch at 108H changes SUB to CMP |
|||
|
|||
0109 |
|||
|
|||
-G0 Stop DDT for SAVE |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
SAVE 1 SCAN.COM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Save memory image |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.COM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Restart DDT |
|||
|
|||
DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
0200 0100 |
|||
-XP |
|||
|
|||
P=0100 |
|||
|
|||
-L116 |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
|
|||
0116 RST 07 |
|||
0117 NOP |
|||
0118 NOP Look at code to see if it was properly loaded |
|||
0119 STAX B (long typeout aborted with rubout) |
|||
011A NOP |
|||
- |
|||
|
|||
-G,116 Run from 100H to completion |
|||
|
|||
*0116 |
|||
-XC Look at carry (accidental typo) |
|||
C1 |
|||
-X Look at CPU state |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
|
|||
C1Z1M0E1I1 A=06 B=0006 D=0000 H=0121 S=0100 P=0116 RST 07 |
|||
-S121 Look at "large"--it appears to be correct. |
|||
|
|||
0121 06 |
|||
|
|||
0122 00 |
|||
|
|||
0123 22 |
|||
|
|||
-G0 Stop DDT |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ED SCAN.ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Re-edit the source program, and make both changes |
|||
|
|||
*NSUB |
|||
*0LT |
|||
CTRL-Z SUB C ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
*SSUB^\b|ZCMP^\b|Z0LT |
|||
CMP D ;LARGER VALUE IN C? |
|||
* |
|||
JNC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT FOUND |
|||
*SNC^\b|ZC^\b|Z0LT |
|||
JC NFOUND ;JUMP IF LARGER VALUE NOT FOUND |
|||
*E |
|||
Reassemble, selecting source from disk A |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
ASM SCAN.AAZ \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
<--- Hex to disk A |
|||
Print to Z (selects no print file) |
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER VER 1.0 |
|||
|
|||
0122 |
|||
002H USE FACTOR |
|||
END OF ASSEMBLY |
|||
|
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DDT SCAN.HEX \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Rerun debugger to check changes |
|||
|
|||
DDT VER 1.0 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
0121 0000 |
|||
-L116 |
|||
|
|||
0116 JMP 0000 Check to ensure end is still at 116H |
|||
|
|||
0119 STAX B |
|||
|
|||
011A NOP |
|||
011B INR B |
|||
|
|||
-(rubout) |
|||
|
|||
-G100,116 Go from beginning with breakpoint at end |
|||
|
|||
*0116 Breakpoint reached |
|||
-D121 Look at "LARGE" |
|||
Correct value computed |
|||
0121 06 00 22 21 00 02 7E EB 77 13 23 EB 0B 78 B1 .. '!... W .#..X. |
|||
0130 C2 27 01 C3 03 29 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .'...)........ |
|||
0140 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .............. |
|||
|
|||
-(rubout) Aborts long typeout |
|||
|
|||
G0 Stop DDT, debug session complete. |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Section 4 |
|||
.nx fivea |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,447 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.op |
|||
.sp 15 |
|||
.ce 100 |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Operating System |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Manual |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.sp 10 |
|||
Copyright (c) 1982 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
P.O. Box 579 |
|||
160 Central Avenue |
|||
Pacific Grove, CA 93950 |
|||
(408) 649-3896 |
|||
TWX 910 360 5001 |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
All Rights Reserved |
|||
.ce 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.po 17 |
|||
.ll 50 |
|||
.ce |
|||
COPYRIGHT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copyright (c) 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1982, 1983, and 1984 by |
|||
Digital Research Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this |
|||
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored |
|||
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or |
|||
computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, |
|||
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior |
|||
written permission of Digital Research Inc., Post Office Box 579, |
|||
Pacific Grove, California, 93950. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Thus, readers are granted permission to include the example |
|||
programs, either in whole or in part, in their own programs. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
DISCLAIMER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research Inc. makes no representations or warranties with |
|||
respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims |
|||
any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for |
|||
any particular purpose. Further, Digital Research Inc. reserves the |
|||
right to revise this publication and to make changes from |
|||
time to time in the content hereof without obligation of |
|||
Digital Research Inc. to notify any person of such revision or |
|||
changes. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
TRADEMARKS |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M, CP/NET, and Digital Research and its logo are registered |
|||
trademarks of Digital Research. ASM, DESPOOL, DDT, LINK-80, MAC, |
|||
MP/M, PL/I-80 and SID are trademarks of Digital Research. IBM is |
|||
a registered trademark of International Business Machines. Intel |
|||
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. TI Silent 700 is |
|||
a trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated. Zilog and Z80 are |
|||
registered trademarks of Zilog, Inc. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
The \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
CP/M Operating System Manual \c |
|||
.qu |
|||
was prepared using the Digital Research TEX Text Formatter and printed |
|||
in the United States of America. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce 6 |
|||
********************************* |
|||
* First Edition: 1976 * |
|||
* Second Edition: July 1982 * |
|||
* Third Edition: March 1983 * |
|||
* Fourth Edition: March 1984 * |
|||
********************************* |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft iii |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
1 CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2.1 General Command Structure . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
1.2.2 File References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.3 Switching Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 |
|||
1.4 Built-in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.4.1 ERA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
1.4.2 DIR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 |
|||
1.4.3 REN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.4 SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.5 TYPE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
1.4.6 USER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.5 Line Editing and Output Control . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6 Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6.1 STAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 |
|||
1.6.2 ASM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 |
|||
1.6.3 LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 |
|||
1.6.4 PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 |
|||
1.6.5 ED Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 |
|||
1.6.6 SYSGEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 |
|||
1.6.7 SUBMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 |
|||
1.6.8 DUMP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
1.6.9 MOVCPM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.7 BDOS Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
2 The CP/M Editor |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1 Introduction to ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1.1 ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
2.1.2 Text Transfer Functions . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2.1.3 Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
2.1.4 Line Numbers and ED Start-up . . . . . . . . 2-5 |
|||
2.1.5 Memory Buffer Operation . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2.1.6 Command Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2.1.7 Text Search and Alteration . . . . . . . . . 2-10 |
|||
2.1.8 Source Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2.1.9 Repetitive Command Execution . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft iv |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
2.2 ED Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.3 Control Characters and Commands . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
3 CP/M Assembler |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.2 Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3 Forming the Operand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3.1 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
3.3.2 Numeric Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.3 Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.4 String Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3.3.6 Precedence of Operators . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4 Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4.1 The ORG Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.2 The END Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.3 The EQU Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.4 The SET Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives . . . . . . . . 3-12 |
|||
3.4.6 The DB Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 |
|||
3.4.7 The DW Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
3.4.8 The DS Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5 Operation Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5.1 Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3.5.2 Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.3 Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.4 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3.5.5 Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . 3-19 |
|||
3.5.6 Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.6 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.7 A Sample Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft v |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
4 CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2 DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
4.2.2 The D (Display) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 |
|||
4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.4 The G (Go) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.5 The I (Input) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.6 The L (List) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.7 The M (Move) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.8 The R (Read) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.9 The S (Set) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.1- The T (Trace) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.3 Implementation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.4 A Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
5 CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.2 Operating System Call Conventions . . . . . . . . . 5-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program . . . . . . . . 5-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.5 A Sample Random Access Program . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.6 System Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
6 CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.2 First-level System Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.3 Second-level System Generation . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vi |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
6.5 Disk Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.6 The BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.7 A Sample BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.8 A Sample Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.9 Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.10 Disk Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.11 The DISKDEF Macro Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.12 Sector Blocking and Deblocking . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendixes |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
A \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
B \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal CBIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
C \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal GETSYS/PUTSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
D \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
The Model 800 Cold Start Loader for CP/M 2 . . . . . . D-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
E \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
F \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Disk Definition Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
G \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Blocking and Deblocking Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . G-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
H \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
I \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft viii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
1-1. Line-editing Control Characters . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
1-2. CP/M Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
1-3. Physical Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 |
|||
1-4. PIP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. ED Text Transfer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2-2. Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2-3. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2-4. Error Message Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2-5. ED Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
2-6. ED Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3-1. Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3-2. Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3-3. Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
3-4. Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3-5. Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . . 3-16 |
|||
3-6. Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-7. Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-8. Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3-9. Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 |
|||
3-10. Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4-1. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-2. DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-3. CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Filetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
5-3. Edit Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. Standard Memory Size Values . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
6-2. Common Values for CP/M Systems . . . . . . . . 6-7 |
|||
6-3. CP/M Disk Sector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
6-4. IOBYTE Field Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-5. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 |
|||
6-6. Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
6-7. Disk Parameter Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-8. BSH and BLM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-9. EXM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-10. BLS Tabluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 |
|||
.sp |
|||
I-1. CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. Overall ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
2-2. Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft ix |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-3. Logical Organization of Memory Buffer . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. IOBYTE Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-2. Disk Parameter Header Format . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
6-3. Disk Parameter Header Table . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-4. Disk Parameter Block Format . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 |
|||
6-5. AL0 and AL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. GETSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
6-2. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.nx onea |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,468 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft Index-% |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Index |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
A |
|||
.qs |
|||
Absolute line number, 36 |
|||
Access mode, 13 |
|||
afn (ambiguous file |
|||
reference), 3, 4, 6 |
|||
Allocation vector, 105 |
|||
Ambiguous file reference |
|||
(afn), 3, 4, 6 |
|||
ASM, 15, 47 |
|||
Assembler, 15, 47 |
|||
Assembler/disassembler module |
|||
(DDT), 77 |
|||
Assembler errors, 62 |
|||
Assembly language mnemonics |
|||
in DDT, 71, 74 |
|||
Assembly language program, 49 |
|||
Assembly language statement, 49 |
|||
Automatic command |
|||
processing, 25 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
B |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Base, 50 |
|||
Basic Disk Operating System |
|||
(BDOS), 2, 89, 127 |
|||
Basic I/O System (BIOS), |
|||
2, 89, 127 |
|||
BDOS (Basic Disk Operating |
|||
System), 2, 89, 127 |
|||
Binary constants, 50 |
|||
BIOS (Basic I/O System), |
|||
2, 89, 127 |
|||
BIOS disk definition, 137, 148 |
|||
subroutines |
|||
Block move command, 74 |
|||
bls parameter, 149 |
|||
BOOT, 90, 136, 140 |
|||
entry point |
|||
Break point, 71, 73 |
|||
Built-in commands, 3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
C |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Case translation, 5, 6, 20, |
|||
37, 39, 44, 45, 51, 95 |
|||
CCP (Console Command |
|||
Processor), 2, 69, 89, 127 |
|||
CCP Stack, 92 |
|||
Character pointer, 35 |
|||
CKS parameter, 149 |
|||
Close File function, 101 |
|||
Code and data areas, 144 |
|||
Cold start loader, 136, |
|||
140, 143 |
|||
Combine files, 17 |
|||
Command, 3 |
|||
Command line, 90 |
|||
Comment field, 49 |
|||
Compute File Size |
|||
function, 108 |
|||
Condition flags, 58, 77 |
|||
Conditional assembly, 56 |
|||
CONIN, 140 |
|||
CONOUT, 141 |
|||
CONSOLE, 138 |
|||
Console Command Processor |
|||
(CCP), 2, 69, 89, 127 |
|||
Console Input function, 95 |
|||
Console Output function, 96 |
|||
CONST, 140 |
|||
Constant, 50 |
|||
Control characters, 9, |
|||
Control functions, 9 |
|||
CTRL-Z character, 93 |
|||
Copy files, 17 |
|||
CPU state, 71 |
|||
cr (carriage return), 39 |
|||
Create files, 23 |
|||
Create system disk, 24 |
|||
Creating COM files, 16 |
|||
Currently logged disk, |
|||
3, 5, 10, 17, 25 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
D |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Data allocation size, 147 |
|||
Data block number, 147 |
|||
DB statement, 57 |
|||
DDT commands, 70, 133 |
|||
DDT nucleus, 77 |
|||
DDT prompt, 70 |
|||
DDT sign-on message, 69 |
|||
Decimal constant, 50 |
|||
Default FCB, 73 |
|||
Delete File function, 102 |
|||
DESPOOL, 138 |
|||
Device assignment, 11 |
|||
DIR, 6 |
|||
DIR attribute, 14 |
|||
dir parameter, 149 |
|||
Direct console I/O |
|||
function, 97 |
|||
Direct Memory Address, 104 |
|||
Directory, 6 |
|||
Directory code, 100, 101, |
|||
102, 103 |
|||
Disassembler, 71, 77 |
|||
Disk attributes, 11 |
|||
Disk drive name, 5 |
|||
Disk I/O functions, 99-110 |
|||
Disk parameter block, 146 |
|||
Disk parameter header, 145 |
|||
Disk parameter table, 145 |
|||
Disk statistics, 10 |
|||
Disk-to-disk copy, 18 |
|||
DISKDEF macro, 149 |
|||
Diskette format, 31 |
|||
DISKS macro, 150, 186 |
|||
Display file contents, 8 |
|||
dks parameter, 149 |
|||
DMA, 104 |
|||
DMA address, 93 |
|||
dn parameter, 149 |
|||
DPBASE, 146 |
|||
Drive characteristics, 14 |
|||
Drive select code, 94 |
|||
Drive specification, 5 |
|||
DS statement, 57 |
|||
DUMP, 27, 113 |
|||
DW statement, 57 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
E |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
ED, 23, 33-45, 131 |
|||
ED commands, 38, 44 |
|||
ED errors, 43 |
|||
Edit command line, 9 |
|||
8080 CPU registers, 76 |
|||
8080 registers, 51 |
|||
end-of-file, 19, 93 |
|||
END statement, 49, 54 |
|||
EMDEF macro, 150 |
|||
ENDIF statement, 56 |
|||
EQU statement, 55 |
|||
ERA, 6 |
|||
Erase files, 6 |
|||
Error messages, 29, 43, |
|||
62, 153 |
|||
Expression, 49 |
|||
Extents, 13 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
F |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
FBASE, 89 |
|||
FCB, 93, 94 |
|||
FCB format, 93, 94 |
|||
FDOS (operations), 89, 91 |
|||
File attributes, 14 |
|||
File compatibility, 23 |
|||
File control block (FCB), |
|||
93, 94 |
|||
File expansion, 128 |
|||
File extent, 93 |
|||
File indicators, 14 |
|||
File names, 3 |
|||
File reference, 3 |
|||
File statistics, 10, 13 |
|||
Filetype, 93 |
|||
Find command, 39 |
|||
fsc parameter, 149 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
G |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Get ADDR (Alloc) function, |
|||
105 |
|||
Get ADDR (Disk Parms) |
|||
function, 106 |
|||
Get Console Status, 99 |
|||
Get I/O Byte function, 97 |
|||
Get Read/Only Vector |
|||
function, 105 |
|||
GETSYS, 128, 134 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
H |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Hexadecimal, 49, 50 |
|||
Hex files, 16, 19, 20, 47 |
|||
HOME subroutine, 139, 141 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
I |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Identifier, 49, 50 |
|||
IF statement, 56 |
|||
Initialized storage areas, 57 |
|||
In-line assembly language, 71 |
|||
Insert mode, 37 |
|||
Insert String, 40 |
|||
IOBYTE function, 138, 139 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
J |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Jump vector, 137 |
|||
Juxtaposition command,41 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
K |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Key fields, 109 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
L |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Label field, 49 |
|||
Labels, 48, 49, 58 |
|||
Library read command, 42 |
|||
Line-editing control |
|||
characters, 38, 70, 98 |
|||
Line-editing functions, 9 |
|||
Line numbers, 36 |
|||
LIST, 138, 141 |
|||
List Output function, 96 |
|||
LISTST, 142 |
|||
LOAD, 16 |
|||
Logged in, 3 |
|||
Logical devices, 11, 18, 138 |
|||
Logical extents, 93 |
|||
Logical-physical assignments, |
|||
12, 139 |
|||
Logical to physical device |
|||
mapping, 138 |
|||
Logical to physical sector |
|||
translation, 143, 149 |
|||
Isc parameter, 149 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
M |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Machine executable code, 16 |
|||
Macro command, 42 |
|||
Make File function, 103 |
|||
Memory buffer, 33, 34, 35, 37 |
|||
Memory image, 71, 131, 132 |
|||
Memory image file, 16 |
|||
Memory size, 27, 128, 132 |
|||
MOVCPM, 27, 131, 132 |
|||
Multiple command |
|||
processing, 25 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
N |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
{o} parameter, 149 |
|||
Octal constant, 50 |
|||
ofs parameter, 150 |
|||
On-line status, 100 |
|||
Open File function, 100 |
|||
Operand field, 49-51 |
|||
Operation field, 49-58 |
|||
Operators, 52, 53, 58 |
|||
ORG directive, 54 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
P |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Page zero, 144 |
|||
Patching the CP/M system, 128 |
|||
Peripheral devices, 138 |
|||
Physical devices, 12, 18, 139 |
|||
Physical file size, 109 |
|||
Physical to logical device |
|||
assignment, 12, 139 |
|||
PIP, 17 |
|||
PIP devices, 19 |
|||
PIP parameters, 20 |
|||
Print String function, 98 |
|||
PRN file, 47 |
|||
Program counter, 71, 73, 76 |
|||
Program tracing, 75 |
|||
Prompt, 3 |
|||
Pseudo-operation, 53 |
|||
PUNCH, 138, 141 |
|||
Punch Output function, 96 |
|||
PUTSYS, 129, 135 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
R |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Radix indicators, 50 |
|||
Random access, 107, 108, 117 |
|||
Random record number, 108 |
|||
READ, 142 |
|||
Read Console Buffer |
|||
function, 98 |
|||
Read only, 14 |
|||
Read/only status, 14 |
|||
Read random error codes, 107 |
|||
Read Random function, 107 |
|||
READ routine, 139 |
|||
Read Sequential function, 102 |
|||
Read/write, 14 |
|||
READER, 138, 141 |
|||
Reader Input function, 96 |
|||
REN, 7 |
|||
Rename file function, 104 |
|||
Reset Disk function, 99 |
|||
Reset Drive function, 109 |
|||
Reset state, 99 |
|||
Return Current Disk |
|||
function, 104 |
|||
Return Log-in Vector |
|||
function, 104 |
|||
Return Version Number |
|||
function, 99 |
|||
R/O, 14 |
|||
R/O, attribute, 106 |
|||
R/O bit, 105 |
|||
R/W, 14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
S |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
SAVE, 7 |
|||
SAVE command, 70 |
|||
Search for First function, 101 |
|||
Search for Next function, 102 |
|||
Search strings, 39 |
|||
Sector allocation, 136 |
|||
SECTRAN, 143 |
|||
SELDSK, 139, 141, 146 |
|||
Select Disk function, 100 |
|||
Sequential access, 93 |
|||
Set DMA address function, 104 |
|||
Set File Attributes |
|||
function, 106 |
|||
Set/GET User Code |
|||
function, 106 |
|||
Set I/O Byte function, 97 |
|||
Set Random Record |
|||
function, 109 |
|||
SET statement, 55 |
|||
SETDMA, 142 |
|||
SETSEC, 142 |
|||
SETTRK, 141 |
|||
Simple character I/O, 138 |
|||
Size in records, 13 |
|||
skf parameter, 149, 150 |
|||
Source files, 93 |
|||
Stack pointer, 92 |
|||
STAT, 10, 139, 151 |
|||
Stop console output, 9 |
|||
String substitutions, 40 |
|||
SUBMIT, 25 |
|||
SYS attribute, 14 |
|||
SYSGEN, 24, 134 |
|||
System attribute, 44, 106 |
|||
System parameters, 140 |
|||
System (re)initialization, 138 |
|||
System Reset function, 95 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
T |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Testing and debugging of |
|||
programs, 69 |
|||
Text transfer commands, 35 |
|||
TPA (Transient Program Area), |
|||
2, 89 |
|||
Trace mode, 76 |
|||
Transient commands, 3, 9 |
|||
Transient Program Area |
|||
(TPA), 2, 89 |
|||
Translate table, 150 |
|||
Translation vectors, 146 |
|||
TYPE, 8 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
U |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
ufn, 3, 6 |
|||
Unambiguous file reference, |
|||
3, 6 |
|||
Uninitialized memory, 57 |
|||
Untrace mode, 76 |
|||
USER, 8 |
|||
USER numbers, 8, 15, 106 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
V |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Verify line numbers command, |
|||
37, 45 |
|||
Version independent |
|||
programming, 99 |
|||
Virtual file size, 108 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
W |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Warm start, 90, 140 |
|||
WBOOT entry point, 140 |
|||
WRITE, 142 |
|||
Write Protect Disk |
|||
function, 105 |
|||
Write random error codes, 108 |
|||
Write Random function, 108 |
|||
Write Random with Zero Fill |
|||
function, 110 |
|||
Write routine, 142 |
|||
Write Sequential function, 103 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
X |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
XSOB, 26 |
|||
.fi |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,990 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 1-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 1 CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.1 Introduction |
|||
.tc 1.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.1 Introduction |
|||
.qs |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
CP/M \ is a monitor control program for microcomputer system development that |
|||
uses floppy disks or Winchester hard disks for backup storage. Using a |
|||
computer system based on the Intel \ 8080 microcomputer, CP/M provides an |
|||
environment for program construction, storage, and editing, along |
|||
with assembly and program check-out facilities. CP/M can be easily |
|||
altered to execute with any computer |
|||
configuration that uses a Zilog \ Z80 \ or an Intel 8080 Central Processing |
|||
Unit (CPU) and has at least 20K bytes of main memory with up to 16 disk |
|||
drives. A detailed discussion of the modifications required for any |
|||
particular hardware environment is given in Section 6. Although the |
|||
standard Digital Research version operates on a single-density |
|||
Intel Model 800, microcomputer development system several different |
|||
hardware manufacturers support their own input-output (I/O) drivers for CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CP/M monitor provides rapid access to programs through a comprehensive |
|||
file management package. The file subsystem supports a named file structure, |
|||
allowing dynamic allocation of file space as well as sequential and random |
|||
file access. Using this file system, a large number of programs can be |
|||
stored in both source and machine-executable form. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M 2 is a high-performance, single console operating system that uses |
|||
table-driven techniques to allow field reconfiguration to match a wide |
|||
variety of disk capacities. All fundamental file restrictions are removed, |
|||
maintaining upward compatibility from previous versions of release 1. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Features of CP/M 2 include field specification of one to sixteen logical |
|||
drives, each containing up to eight megabytes. Any particular file can |
|||
reach the full drive size with the capability of expanding to thirty-two |
|||
megabytes in future releases. The directory size can be field-configured to |
|||
contain any reasonable number of entries, and each file is optionally tagged |
|||
with Read-Only and system attributes. Users of CP/M 2 are physically |
|||
separated by user numbers, with facilities for file copy operations from one |
|||
user area to another. Powerful relative-record random access functions are |
|||
present in CP/M 2 that provide direct access to any of the 65536 records of |
|||
an eight-megabyte file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M also supports ED, a powerful context editor, ASM , an Intel-compatible |
|||
assembler, and DDT , debugger subsystems. Optional software includes a |
|||
powerful |
|||
Intel-compatible macro assembler, symbolic debugger, along with various |
|||
high-level languages. When coupled with CP/M's Console Command |
|||
Processor (CCP), |
|||
the resulting facilities equal or exceed similar large computer facilities. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M is logically divided into several distinct parts: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
o BIOS (Basic I/O System), hardware-dependent |
|||
o BDOS (Basic Disk Operating System) |
|||
o CCP (Console Command Processor) |
|||
o TPA (Transient Program Area) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The BIOS provides the primitive operations necessary to access the disk |
|||
drives and to interface standard peripherals: teletype, CRT, paper tape |
|||
reader/punch, and user-defined peripherals. You can tailor |
|||
peripherals for any particular hardware environment by patching this |
|||
portion of |
|||
CP/M. The BDOS provides disk management by controlling one or more disk |
|||
drives containing independent file directories. The BDOS implements disk |
|||
allocation strategies that provide fully dynamic file construction while |
|||
minimizing head movement across the disk during access. The BDOS has entry |
|||
points that include the following primitive operations, which the |
|||
program accesses: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o SEARCH looks for a particular disk file by name. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o OPEN opens a file for further operations. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o CLOSE closes a file after processing. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o RENAME changes the name of a particular file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o READ reads a record from a particular file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o WRITE writes a record to a particular file. |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o SELECT selects a particular disk drive for further operations. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CCP provides a symbolic interface between your console and the |
|||
remainder of the CP/M system. The CCP reads the console device and |
|||
processes commands, which include listing the file directory, printing the |
|||
contents of files, and controlling the operation of transient programs, such |
|||
as assemblers, editors, and debuggers. The standard commands that are |
|||
available in the CCP are listed in Section 1.2.1. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The last segment of CP/M is the area called the Transient Program |
|||
Area (TPA). The TPA holds programs that are loaded from the disk under |
|||
command of the CCP. During program editing, for example, the TPA holds |
|||
the CP/M text editor machine code and data areas. Similarly, programs |
|||
created under CP/M can be checked out by loading and executing these |
|||
programs in the TPA. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Any or all of the CP/M component subsystems can be overlaid by an |
|||
executing program. That is, once a user's program is loaded into the TPA, |
|||
the CCP, BDOS, and BIOS areas can be used as the program's data area. |
|||
A bootstrap loader is programmatically accessible whenever the BIOS portion |
|||
is not overlaid; thus, the user program need only branch to the bootstrap |
|||
loader at the end of execution and the complete CP/M monitor is reloaded |
|||
from disk. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CP/M operating system is partitioned into distinct modules, including |
|||
the BIOS portion that defines the hardware environment in which CP/M is |
|||
executing. Thus, the standard system is easily modified to any nonstandard |
|||
environment by changing the peripheral drivers to handle the custom system. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 1.2 Functional Description |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.2 Functional Description |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.2 Functional Description |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
You interact with CP/M primarily through the CCP, which reads and |
|||
interprets commands entered through the console. In general, the CCP |
|||
addresses one of several disks that are on-line. The standard system |
|||
addresses up to sixteen different disk drives. These disk drives are |
|||
labeled A through P. A disk is logged-in if the CCP is currently |
|||
addressing the disk. To clearly indicate which disk is the currently logged |
|||
disk, the CCP always prompts the operator with the disk name followed by the |
|||
symbol >, indicating that the CCP is ready for another command. Upon |
|||
initial start-up, the CP/M system is loaded from disk A, and the CCP |
|||
displays the following message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
CP/M VER x.x |
|||
.sp |
|||
where x.x is the CP/M version number. All CP/M systems are initially set |
|||
to operate in a 20K memory space, but can be easily reconfigured to fit any |
|||
memory size on the host system (see Section 1.6.9). Following system |
|||
sign-on, CP/M automatically logs in disk A, prompts you with the |
|||
symbol A>, indicating that CP/M is currently addressing disk A, and |
|||
waits for a command. The commands are implemented at two levels: built-in |
|||
commands and transient commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.2.1 General Command Structure |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.2.1 General Command Structure |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Built-in commands are a part of the CCP program, while transient |
|||
commands are loaded into the TPA from disk and executed. The |
|||
following are built-in commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
o ERA erases specified files. |
|||
o DIR lists filenames in the directory. |
|||
o REN renames the specified file. |
|||
o SAVE saves memory contents in a file. |
|||
o TYPE types the contents of a file on the logged disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
Most of the commands reference a particular file or group of files. The |
|||
form of a file reference is specified in Section 1.2.2. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.2.2 File References |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.2.2 File References |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
A file reference identifies a particular file or group of files on a |
|||
particular disk attached to CP/M. These file references are |
|||
either unambiguous (ufn) or ambiguous (afn). An unambiguous file |
|||
reference uniquely identifies a single file, while an ambiguous file |
|||
reference is satisfied by a number of different files. |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
File references consist of two parts: the primary filename and the |
|||
filetype. Although the filetype is optional, it usually is |
|||
generic. For example, the filetype ASM is used to denote that the file is an |
|||
assembly language source file, while the primary filename distinguishes each |
|||
particular source file. The two names are separated by a period, as shown |
|||
in the following example: |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.typ |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
In this example, filename is the primary filename of eight characters or |
|||
less, and typ |
|||
is the filetype of no more than three characters. As mentioned above, the |
|||
name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename |
|||
.sp |
|||
is also allowed and is equivalent to a filetype consisting of |
|||
three blanks. The characters used in specifying an unambiguous |
|||
file reference cannot contain any of the following special |
|||
characters: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
< > . , ; : = ? * [ ] _ % | ( ) / \\ |
|||
.sp |
|||
while all alphanumerics and remaining special characters are allowed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
An ambiguous file reference is used for directory search and pattern |
|||
matching. The form of an ambiguous file reference is similar to an |
|||
unambiguous reference, except the symbol ? can be interspersed throughout |
|||
the primary and secondary names. In various commands throughout CP/M, |
|||
the ? symbol matches any character of a filename in the ? position. |
|||
Thus, the ambiguous reference |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X?Z.C?M |
|||
.sp |
|||
matches the following unambiguous filenames |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
XYZ.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
and |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X3Z.CAM |
|||
.sp |
|||
The * wildcard character can also be used in an ambiguous file |
|||
reference. The * character replaces all or part of a filename or |
|||
filetype. Note that |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*.* |
|||
.sp |
|||
equals the ambiguous file reference |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
????????.??? |
|||
.sp |
|||
while |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.* |
|||
.sp |
|||
and |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*.typ |
|||
.sp |
|||
are abbreviations for |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.??? |
|||
.sp |
|||
and |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
????????.typ |
|||
.sp |
|||
respectively. As an example, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR *.* |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
is interpreted by the CCP as a command to list the names of all disk files |
|||
in the directory. The following example searches only for a file |
|||
by the name X.Y: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR X,Y |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Similarly, the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR X?Y.C?M |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
causes a search for all unambiguous filenames on the disk that satisfy |
|||
this ambiguous reference. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following file references are valid unambiguous file references: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
X |
|||
X.Y |
|||
XYZ |
|||
XYZ.COM |
|||
GAMMA |
|||
GAMMA.1 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
As an added convenience, the programmer can generally specify the disk drive |
|||
name along with the filename. In this case, the drive name is given as a |
|||
letter A through P followed by a colon (:). The specified drive is |
|||
then logged-in before the file operation occurs. Thus, the following are |
|||
valid file references with disk name prefixes: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
A:X.Y |
|||
P:XYZ.COM |
|||
B:XYZ |
|||
B:X.A?M |
|||
C:GAMMA |
|||
C:*.ASM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
All alphabetic lower-case letters in file and drive names are translated to |
|||
upper-case when they are processed by the CCP. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.3 Switching Disks |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.3 Switching Disks |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.3 Switching Disks |
|||
.qs |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operator can switch the currently logged disk by typing the disk drive |
|||
name, A through P, followed by a colon when the CCP is waiting for |
|||
console input. The following sequence of prompts and commands |
|||
can occur after the CP/M system is loaded from disk A: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
CP/M VER 2.2 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
List all files on disk A. |
|||
A:SAMPLE ASM SAMPLE PRN |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
B: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Switch to disk B. |
|||
B>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
DIR *.ASM \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
List all ASM files on B. |
|||
B:DUMP ASM FILES ASM |
|||
b>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
A: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Switch back to A. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4 Built-in Commands |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.4 Built-in Commands |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4 Built-in Commands |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The file and device reference forms described can now be used to fully |
|||
specify the structure of the built-in commands. Assume the following |
|||
abbreviations in the description below: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
ufn unambiguous file reference |
|||
afn ambiguous file reference |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Recall that the CCP always translates lower-case characters to upper-case |
|||
characters internally. Thus, lower-case alphabetics are treated as if they |
|||
are upper-case in command names and file references. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4.1 ERA Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.1 ERA Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ERA afn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ERA (erase) command removes files from the currently logged-in |
|||
disk, for example, the disk name currently prompted by CP/M preceding the >. |
|||
The files that are erased are those that satisfy the ambiguous file |
|||
reference afn. The following examples illustrate the use of ERA: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA X.Y The file named X.Y on the currently logged disk is removed |
|||
from the disk directory and the space is returned. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA X.* All files with primary name X are removed from the current |
|||
disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA *.ASM All files with secondary name ASM are removed from the |
|||
current disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA X?Y.C?M All files on the current disk that satisfy the ambiguous |
|||
reference X?Y.C?M are deleted. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA *.* Erase all files on the current disk. In this |
|||
case, the CCP prompts the console with the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
ALL FILES (Y/N)? |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
which requires a Y response before files are actually removed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ERA b:*.PRN All files on drive B that satisfy the ambiguous |
|||
reference ????????.PRN are deleted, independently of the currently |
|||
logged disk. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 1.4.2 DIR Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.2 DIR Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DIR afn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DIR (directory) command causes the names of all files that satisfy the |
|||
ambiguous filename afn to be listed at the console device. As a special |
|||
case, the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DIR |
|||
.sp |
|||
lists the files on the currently logged disk (the command DIR is |
|||
equivalent to the command DIR *.*). The following are valid DIR |
|||
commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DIR X.Y |
|||
DIR X?Z.C?M |
|||
DIR ??.Y |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
Similar to other CCP commands, the afn can be preceded by a drive name. |
|||
The following DIR commands cause the selected drive to be addressed before |
|||
the directory search takes place: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
DIR B: |
|||
DIR B:X.Y |
|||
DIR B:*.A?M |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
If no files on the selected disk satisfy the directory request, the |
|||
message NO FILE appears at the console. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 1.4.3 REN Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.3 REN Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
REN ufn1=ufn2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The REN (rename) command allows you to change the names of files on |
|||
disk. The file satisfying ufn2 is changed to ufn1. The currently logged |
|||
disk is assumed to contain the file to rename (ufn2). You can also |
|||
type a left-directed arrow instead of the equal sign if the console supports |
|||
this graphic character. The following are examples of the REN |
|||
command: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN X.Y=Q.R The file Q.R is changed to X.Y. |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
.sp |
|||
REN XYZ.COM=XYZ.XXX The file XYZ.XXX is changed to XYZ.COM. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operator precedes either ufn1 or ufn2 (or both) by an optional drive |
|||
address. If ufn1 is preceded by a drive name, then ufn2 is assumed to exist |
|||
on the same drive. Similarly, if ufn2 is preceded by a drive name, then |
|||
ufn1 is assumed to exist on the drive as well. The same drive must be |
|||
specified in both cases if both ufn1 and ufn2 are preceded by drive names. |
|||
The following REN commands illustrate this format: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN A:X.ASM=Y.ASM The file Y.ASM is changed to X.ASM on drive A. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN B:ZAP.BAS=ZOT.BAS The file ZOT.BAS is changed to ZAP.BAS on drive B. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
REN B:A.ASM=B:A.BAK The file A.BAK is renamed to A.ASM on drive B. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
If ufn1 is already present, the REN command responds with the |
|||
error FILE EXISTS and not perform the change. If ufn2 does not exist on |
|||
the specified disk, the message NO FILE is printed at the console. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4.4 SAVE Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.4 SAVE Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE n ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SAVE command places n pages (256-byte blocks) onto disk from the TPA |
|||
and names this file ufn. In the CP/M distribution system, the TPA starts |
|||
at 100H (hexadecimal) which is the second page of memory. The SAVE command |
|||
must specify 2 pages of memory if the user's program occupies the area |
|||
from 100H through 2FFH. The machine code file can be subsequently loaded |
|||
and executed. The following are examples of the SAVE command: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 3X.COM Copies 100H through 3FFH to X.COM. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 40 Q Copies 100H through 28FFH to Q. Note that 28 is the |
|||
page count in 28FFH, and that 28H = 2*16+8=40 decimal. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 4 X.Y Copies 100H through 4FFH to X.Y. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The SAVE command can also specify a disk drive in the ufn portion of the |
|||
command, as shown in the following example: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
SAVE 10 B:ZOT.COM Copies 10 pages, 100H through 0AFFH, to the |
|||
file ZOT.COM on drive B. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 1.4.5 TYPE Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.5 TYPE Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
TYPE ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The TYPE command displays the content of the ASCII source file ufn on the |
|||
currently logged disk at the console device. The following are valid |
|||
TYPE commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TYPE X.Y |
|||
TYPE X.PLM |
|||
TYPE XXX |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
The TYPE command expands tabs, CTRL-I characters, assuming tab positions are |
|||
set at every eighth column. The ufn can also reference a drive name. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
TYPE B:X.PRN The file X.PRN from drive B is displayed. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.4.6 USER Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.4.6 USER Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
USER n |
|||
.pp |
|||
The USER command allows maintenance of separate files in the same |
|||
directory. In the syntax line, n is an integer value in the range 0 to |
|||
15. On cold start, the operator is automatically logged into user |
|||
area number 0, which is |
|||
compatible with standard CP/M 1 directories. You can issue the |
|||
USER command at any time to move to another logical area within the same |
|||
directory. Drives that are logged-in while addressing one user number are |
|||
automatically active when the operator moves to another. A user number is |
|||
simply a prefix that accesses particular directory entries on the active |
|||
disks. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The active user number is maintained until changed by a subsequent USER |
|||
command, or until a cold start when user 0 is again assumed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.5 Line Editing and Output Control |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.5 Line Editing and Output Control |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.5 Line Editing and Output Control |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CCP allows certain line-editing functions while typing command lines. |
|||
The CTRL-key sequences are obtained by pressing the control and letter keys |
|||
simultaneously. Further, CCP command lines are generally up to 255 |
|||
characters in length; they are not acted upon until the carriage return key |
|||
is pressed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-1. Line-editing Control Characters |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Character Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 18 |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-C Reboots CP/M system when pressed at start of line. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-E Physical end of line; carriage is returned, but line is not sent |
|||
until the carriage return key is pressed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-H Backspaces one character position. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-J Terminates current input (line feed). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-M Terminates current input (carriage return). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-P Copies all subsequent console output to the currently |
|||
assigned list device (see Section 1.6.1). Output is sent to the list device |
|||
and the console device until the next CTRL-P is pressed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-R Retypes current command line; types a clean line following |
|||
character deletion with rubouts. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-S Stops the console output temporarily. Program execution and |
|||
output continue when you press any character at the console, for |
|||
example another CTRL-S. This feature stops output on high speed consoles, |
|||
such as CRTs, in order to view a segment of output before continuing. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-1. (continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Character Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 18 |
|||
.ti-12 |
|||
CTRL-U Deletes the entire line typed at the console. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-X Same as CTRL-U. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
CTRL-Z Ends input from the console (used in PIP and ED). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -12 |
|||
RUB/DEL Deletes and echoes the last character typed at the console. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Transient commands are loaded from the currently logged disk and executed in |
|||
the TPA. The transient commands for execution under the CCP are below. |
|||
Additional functions are easily defined by the user (see Section 1.6.3). |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-2. CP/M Transient Commands |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Command Function |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
STAT Lists the number of bytes of storage remaining on the currently |
|||
logged disk, provides statistical information about particular files, and |
|||
displays or alters device assignment. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
ASM Loads the CP/M assembler and assembles the specified program from |
|||
disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
LOAD Loads the file in Intel HEX machine code format and produces a |
|||
file in machine executable form which can be loaded into the TPA. This loaded |
|||
program becomes a new command under the CCP. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
DDT Loads the CP/M debugger into TPA and starts execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
PIP Loads the Peripheral Interchange Program for subsequent disk file |
|||
and peripheral transfer operations. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti-11 |
|||
ED Loads and executes the CP/M text editor program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
SYSGEN Creates a new CP/M system disk. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-2. (continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Command Function |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 16 |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
SUBMIT Submits a file of commands for batch processing. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
DUMP Dumps the contents of a file in hex. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -11 |
|||
MOVCPM Regenerates the CP/M system for a particular memory size. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Transient commands are specified in the same manner as built-in commands, and |
|||
additional commands are easily defined by the user. For convenience, the |
|||
transient command can be preceded by a drive name which causes the transient |
|||
to be loaded from the specified drive into the TPA for execution. Thus, the |
|||
command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
B:STAT |
|||
.sp |
|||
causes CP/M to temporarily log in drive B for the source of the STAT |
|||
transient, and then return to the original logged disk for subsequent |
|||
processing. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.1 STAT Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.1 STAT Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
STAT |
|||
STAT "command line" |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The STAT command provides general statistical information about file storage |
|||
and device assignment. Special forms of the command line allow the current |
|||
device assignment to be |
|||
examined and altered. The various command lines that can be specified are |
|||
shown with an explanation of each form to the right. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT If you type an empty command line, the STAT transient |
|||
calculates the storage remaining on all active drives, and prints |
|||
one of the following messages: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
d: R/W, SPACE: nnnK |
|||
.sp |
|||
d: R/O, SPACE: nnnK |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
for each active drive d:, where R/W indicates the drive can be read or |
|||
written, and R/O indicates the drive is Read-Only (a drive becomes R/O by |
|||
explicitly setting it to Read-Only, as shown below, or by inadvertently |
|||
changing disks without performing a warm start). The space remaining on |
|||
the disk in drive d: is given in kilobytes by nnn. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT d: If a drive name is given, then the drive is selected before |
|||
the storage is computed. Thus, the command STAT B: could be issued while |
|||
logged into drive A, resulting in the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
BYTES REMAINING ON B: nnnK |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT afn The command line can also specify a set of files to be |
|||
scanned by STAT. The files that satisfy afn are listed in alphabetical |
|||
order, with storage requirements for each file under the heading: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
RECS BYTES EXT D:FILENAME.TYP |
|||
rrrr bbbK ee d:filename.typ |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where rrrr is the number of 128-byte records allocated to the file, bbb is |
|||
the number of kilobytes allocated to the file (bbb=rrrr*128/1024), ee is the |
|||
number of 16K extensions (ee=bbb/16), d is the drive name containing the |
|||
file (A...P), filename is the eight-character primary filename, and |
|||
typ is the three-character filetype. After listing the individual |
|||
files, the storage usage is summarized. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT d:afn The drive name can be given ahead of the afn. The specified |
|||
drive is first selected, and the form STAT afn is executed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
STAT d:=R/O This form sets the drive given by d to Read-Only, remaining |
|||
in effect until the next warm or cold start takes place. When a disk is |
|||
Read-Only, the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
BDOS ERR ON d: Read-Only |
|||
.sp |
|||
appears if there is an attempt to write to the Read-Only disk. CP/M |
|||
waits until a key is pressed before performing an automatic |
|||
warm start, at |
|||
which time the disk becomes R/W. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The STAT command allows you to control the physical-to-logical device |
|||
assignment. See the IOBYTE function described in Sections 5 and 6. There |
|||
are four logical peripheral devices that are, at any particular instant, each |
|||
assigned one of several physical peripheral devices. The |
|||
following is a list of the four logical devices: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o CON: is the system console device, used by CCP for communication with the |
|||
operator. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o RDR: is the paper tape reader device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o PUN: is the paper tape punch device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o LST: is the output list device. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The actual devices attached to any particular computer system are driven by |
|||
subroutines in the BIOS portion of CP/M. Thus, the logical RDR: device, for |
|||
example, could actually be a high speed reader, teletype reader, or cassette |
|||
tape. To allow some flexibility in device naming and assignment, several |
|||
physical devices are defined in Table 1-3. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-3. Physical Devices |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Device Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 14 |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
TTY: Teletype device (slow speed console) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
CRT: Cathode ray tube device (high speed console) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
BAT: Batch processing (console is current RDR:, output goes to current |
|||
LST: device) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UC1: User-defined console |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
PTR: Paper tape reader (high speed reader) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UR1: User-defined reader #1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UR2: User-defined reader #2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
PTP: Paper tape punch (high speed punch) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UP1: User-defined punch #1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UP2: User-defined punch #2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
LPT: Line printer |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -8 |
|||
UL1: User-defined list device #1 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.nx oneb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
@ -1,915 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.ft 1-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
It is emphasized that the physical device names might not actually |
|||
correspond to devices that the names imply. That is, you can |
|||
implement the PTP: device as a cassette write operation. The exact |
|||
correspondence and driving subroutine is defined in the BIOS portion of |
|||
CP/M. In the standard distribution version of CP/M, these devices correspond |
|||
to their names on the Model 800 development system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The command, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT VAL: |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces a summary of the available status commands, resulting in |
|||
the output: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Temp R/O Disk d:$R/O |
|||
Set Indicator: filename.typ $R/O $R/W $SYS $DIR |
|||
Disk Status: DSK: d:DSK |
|||
Iobyte Assign: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
which gives an instant summary of the possible STAT commands and shows the |
|||
permissible logical-to-physical device assignments: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
CON: = TTY: CRT: BAT: UC1: |
|||
RDR: = TTY: PTR: UR1: UR2: |
|||
PUN: = TTY: PTP: UP1: UP2: |
|||
LST: = TTY: CRT: LPT: UL1: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The logical device to the left takes any of the four physical assignments |
|||
shown to the right. The current logical-to-physical mapping is displayed by |
|||
typing the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT DEV: |
|||
.sp |
|||
This command produces a list of each logical device to the left and |
|||
the current |
|||
corresponding physical device to the right. For example, the list might |
|||
appear as follows: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
CON: = CRT: |
|||
RDR: = UR1: |
|||
PUN: = PTP: |
|||
LST: = TTY: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The current logical-to-physical device assignment is changed by typing a STAT |
|||
command of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT ld1 = pd1, ld2 = pd2, ... , ldn = pdn |
|||
.sp |
|||
where ld1 through ldn are logical device names and pd1 through pdn are |
|||
compatible physical device names. For example, ldi and pdi appear on the |
|||
same line |
|||
in the VAL: command shown above. The following example shows valid STAT |
|||
commands that change the |
|||
current logical-to-physical device assignments: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
STAT CON:=CRT: |
|||
STAT PUN:=TTY:, LST:=LPT:, RDR:=TTY: |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
The command form, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $S |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d: is an optional drive name and filename.typ is an unambiguous or |
|||
ambiguous filename, produces the following output display format: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
Size Recs Bytes Ext Acc |
|||
.sp |
|||
48 48 6K 1 R/O A:ED.COM |
|||
55 55 12K 1 R/O (A:PIP.COM) |
|||
65536 128 16K 2 R/W A:X.DAT |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
where the $S parameter causes the Size field to be displayed. Without the |
|||
$S, the Size field is skipped, but the remaining fields are displayed. The |
|||
Size field lists the virtual file size in records, while the Recs field |
|||
sums the number of virtual records in each extent. For files constructed |
|||
sequentially, the Size and Recs fields are identical. The Bytes field |
|||
lists the actual number of bytes allocated to the corresponding file. The |
|||
minimum allocation unit is determined at configuration time; thus, the number |
|||
of bytes corresponds to the record count plus the remaining unused space in |
|||
the last allocated block for sequential files. Random access files are given |
|||
data areas only when written, so the Bytes field contains the only accurate |
|||
allocation figure. In the case of random access, the Size field gives the |
|||
logical end-of-file record position and the Recs field counts the logical |
|||
records of each extent. Each of these extents, however, can contain |
|||
unallocated holes even though they are added into the record count. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Ext field counts the number of physical extents allocated to the file. |
|||
The Ext count corresponds to the number of directory entries given to the |
|||
file. Depending on allocation size, there can be up to 128K |
|||
bytes (8 logical extents) directly addressed by a single directory entry. In a special case, |
|||
there are actually 256K bytes that can be directly addressed by a physical |
|||
extent. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The Acc field gives the R/O or R/W file indicator, which you can |
|||
change using the commands shown. The four command forms, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $R/O |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $R/W |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $SYS |
|||
STAT d:filename.typ $DIR |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
set or reset various permanent file indicators. The R/O indicator places the |
|||
file, or set of files, in a Read-Only status until changed by a subsequent |
|||
STAT command. The R/O status is recorded in the directory with the file so |
|||
that it remains R/O through intervening cold start operations. The R/W |
|||
indicator places the file in a permanent Read-Write status. The SYS |
|||
indicator attaches the system indicator to the file, while the DIR command |
|||
removes the system indicator. The filename.typ may be ambiguous or |
|||
unambiguous, but files whose attributes are changed are listed at the console |
|||
when the change occurs. The drive name denoted by d: is optional. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When a file is marked R/O, subsequent attempts to erase or write into the |
|||
file produce the following BDOS message at your screen: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS Err on d: File R/O |
|||
.sp |
|||
lists the drive characteristics of the disk named by d: that is in the range |
|||
A:, B:,...,P:. The drive characteristics are listed in the |
|||
following format: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
d: Drive Characteristics |
|||
65536: 128 Byte Record Capacity |
|||
8192: Kilobyte Drive Capacity |
|||
128: 32 Byte Directory Entries |
|||
0: Checked Directory Entries |
|||
1024: Records/Extent |
|||
128: Records/Block |
|||
58: Sectors/Track |
|||
2: Reserved Tracks |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d: is the selected drive, followed by the total record capacity |
|||
(65536 is an eight-megabyte drive), followed by the total capacity listed in |
|||
kilobytes. The directory size is listed next, followed by the checked |
|||
entries. The number of checked entries is usually identical to the directory |
|||
size for removable media, because this mechanism is used to detect changed |
|||
media during CP/M operation without an intervening warm start. For fixed |
|||
media, the number is usually zero, because the media are not changed without |
|||
at least a cold or warm start. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The number of records per extent determines |
|||
the addressing capacity of each directory entry (1024 times 128 bytes, or |
|||
128K in the previous example). The number of records per block shows the |
|||
basic allocation size (in the example, 128 records/block times 128 bytes per |
|||
record, or 16K bytes per block). The listing is then followed by the number |
|||
of physical sectors per track and the number of reserved tracks. |
|||
.pp |
|||
For logical |
|||
drives that share the same physical disk, the number of reserved tracks can |
|||
be quite large because this mechanism is used to skip lower-numbered disk |
|||
areas allocated to other logical disks. The command form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT DSK: |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces a drive characteristics table for all currently active drives. The |
|||
final STAT command form is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
STAT USR: |
|||
.sp |
|||
which produces a list of the user numbers that have files on the currently |
|||
addressed disk. The display format is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Active User: 0 |
|||
Active Files: 0 1 3 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the first line lists the currently addressed user number, as set by the |
|||
last CCP USER command, followed by a list of user numbers scanned from the |
|||
current directory. In this case, the active user number is 0 (default at cold |
|||
start) with three user numbers that have active files on the current disk. |
|||
The operator can subsequently examine the directories of the other user |
|||
numbers by logging in with USER 1 or USER 3 commands, followed by a DIR |
|||
command at the CCP level. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.2 ASM Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.2 ASM Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ASM command loads and executes the CP/M 8080 assembler. The ufn |
|||
specifies a source file containing assembly language statements, where the |
|||
filetype is assumed to be ASM and is not specified. The following ASM |
|||
commands are valid: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
ASM X |
|||
ASM GAMMA |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
The two-pass assembler is automatically executed. Assembly errors that occur |
|||
during the second pass are printed at the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The assembler produces a file: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.PRN |
|||
.sp |
|||
where X is the primary name specified in the ASM command. The PRN file |
|||
contains a listing of the source program with embedded tab characters if |
|||
present in the source program, along with the machine code generated for |
|||
each statement and diagnostic error messages, if any. The PRN file is listed |
|||
at the console using the TYPE command, or sent to a peripheral device |
|||
using PIP (see Section 1.6.4). Note that the PRN file |
|||
contains the original source program, augmented by miscellaneous assembly |
|||
information in the leftmost 16 columns; for example, program addresses and |
|||
hexadecimal |
|||
machine code. The PRN file serves as a backup for the original |
|||
source file. If the source file is accidentally removed or destroyed, the |
|||
PRN file can be edited by removing the leftmost 16 characters |
|||
of each line (see Section 2). This is done by issuing a single editor macro |
|||
command. |
|||
The resulting file is identical to the original source file and can be |
|||
renamed from PRN to ASM for subsequent editing and assembly. The file |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.HEX |
|||
.sp |
|||
is also produced, which contains 8080 machine language in Intel HEX format |
|||
suitable for subsequent loading and execution (see Section 1.6.3). For |
|||
complete details of CP/M's assembly language program, see Section 3. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The source file for assembly is taken from an alternate disk by prefixing the |
|||
assembly language filename by a disk drive name. The command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM B:ALPHA |
|||
.sp |
|||
loads the assembler from the currently logged drive and processes the source |
|||
program ALPHA.ASM on drive B. The HEX and PRN files are also placed on |
|||
drive B in this case. |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.3 LOAD Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.3 LOAD Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
LOAD ufn |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The LOAD command reads the file ufn, which is assumed to contain HEX format |
|||
machine code, and produces a memory image file that can subsequently be |
|||
executed. The filename ufn is assumed to be of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.HEX |
|||
.sp |
|||
and only the filename X need be specified in the command. The LOAD command |
|||
creates a file named |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
that marks it as containing machine executable code. The file is actually |
|||
loaded into memory and executed when the user types the filename X |
|||
immediately after the prompting character > printed by the CCP. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Generally, the CCP reads the filename X following the prompting character and |
|||
looks for a built-in function name. If no function name is found, the CCP |
|||
searches the system disk directory for a file by the name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.COM |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
If found, the machine code is loaded into the TPA, and the program executes. |
|||
Thus, the user need only LOAD a hex file once; it can be subsequently |
|||
executed any number of times by typing the primary name. This |
|||
way, you can invent new commands in the CCP. Initialized disks contain |
|||
the transient commands as COM files, which are optionally deleted. The |
|||
operation takes place on an alternate drive if the filename is prefixed |
|||
by a drive name. Thus, |
|||
.bp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
LOAD B:BETA |
|||
.sp |
|||
brings the LOAD program into the TPA from the currently logged disk and |
|||
operates on drive B after execution begins. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
the BETA.HEX file must contain valid Intel format |
|||
hexadecimal machine code records (as produced by the ASM program, for |
|||
example) that begin at 100H of the TPA. The addresses in the hex records |
|||
must be in ascending order; gaps in unfilled memory regions are filled with |
|||
zeroes by the LOAD command as the hex records are read. Thus, LOAD must be |
|||
used only for creating CP/M standard COM files that operate in the TPA. |
|||
Programs that occupy regions of memory other than the TPA are loaded under |
|||
DDT. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.4 PIP |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.4 PIP |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
PIP |
|||
PIP destination=source#1, source#2, ..., source #n |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP is the CP/M Peripheral Interchange Program that implements the basic |
|||
media conversion operations necessary to load, print, punch, copy, and |
|||
combine disk files. The PIP program is initiated by typing one of the |
|||
following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
PIP |
|||
PIP command line |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
In both cases PIP is loaded into the TPA and executed. In the |
|||
first form, PIP reads command lines directly from the console, prompted with |
|||
the * character, until an empty command line is typed (for example, a single |
|||
carriage return is issued by |
|||
the operator). Each successive command line causes some media conversion |
|||
to take place according to the rules shown below. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In the second form, the PIP |
|||
command is equivalent to the first, except that the single command line |
|||
given with the PIP command is automatically executed, and PIP terminates |
|||
immediately with no further prompting of the console for input command |
|||
lines. The form of each command line is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
destination = source#1, source#2, ..., source#n |
|||
.sp |
|||
where destination is the file or peripheral device to receive the |
|||
data, |
|||
and source#1, ..., source#n is a series of one or more files or devices |
|||
that are copied from left to right to the destination. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When multiple files are given in the command line (for example, |
|||
n>1), the individual |
|||
files are assumed to contain ASCII characters, with an assumed CP/M |
|||
end-of-file character (CTRL-Z) at the end of each file (see the O parameter |
|||
to override this assumption). Lower-case ASCII alphabetics are internally |
|||
translated to upper-case to be consistent with CP/M file and device name |
|||
conventions. Finally, the total command line length cannot exceed 255 |
|||
characters. CTRL-E can be used to force a physical carriage return for lines |
|||
that exceed the console width. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The destination and source elements are unambiguous references to CP/M source |
|||
files with or without a preceding disk drive name. That is, any file can be |
|||
referenced with a preceding drive name (A: through P:) that defines the |
|||
particular drive where the file can be obtained or stored. When the drive |
|||
name is not included, the currently logged disk is assumed. The |
|||
destination file can also appear as one or more of the source files, in |
|||
which case the source file is not altered until the entire concatenation is |
|||
complete. If it already exists, the destination file is removed if the |
|||
command line is properly formed. It is not removed if an error condition |
|||
arises. The following command lines, with explanations to the |
|||
right, are |
|||
valid as input to PIP: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 31 |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
X=Y Copies to file X from file Y, where X and Y are |
|||
unambiguous filenames; Y remains unchanged. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
X=Y,Z Concatenates files Y and z and copies to file X, |
|||
with Y and Z unchanged. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
X.ASM=Y.ASM,Z.ASM Creates the file X.ASM from the concatenation of the |
|||
Y and Z.ASM files. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
NEW.ZOT=B:OLD.ZAP Moves a copy of OLD.ZAPP from drive B to the currently |
|||
logged disk; names the file NEW.ZOT. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -23 |
|||
B:A.U=B:B.V,A:C.W,D.X Concatenates file B.V from drive B with C.W from drive |
|||
a and D.X from the logged disk; creates the file A.U on drive b. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
For convenience, PIP allows abbreviated commands for transferring files |
|||
between disk drives. The abbreviated PIP forms are |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
PIP d:=afn |
|||
PIP d\d1\u=d\d2\u:afn |
|||
PIP ufn = d\d2\u: |
|||
PIP d\d1\u:ufn = d\d2\u: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The first form copies all files from the currently logged disk that satisfy |
|||
the afn to the same files on drive d, where d = A...P. The second form is |
|||
equivalent to the first, where the source for the copy is drive |
|||
d\d2\u, where d\d2\u = A...P. The third form is equivalent to the command PIP |
|||
d\d1\u:ufn=d\d2\u:ufn which copies the file given by ufn from drive |
|||
d\d2\u to the file ufn on drive d\d1\u:. The fourth form is equivalent to |
|||
the third, where the source disk is explicitly given by d\d2\u:. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The source and destination disks must be different in all of these cases. |
|||
If an afn is specified, PIP lists each ufn that satisfies the afn as it |
|||
is being copied. If a file exists by the same name as the destination file, |
|||
it is removed after successful completion of the copy and replaced by the |
|||
copied file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following PIP commands give examples of valid disk-to-disk copy operations: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:=*.COM Copies all files that have the secondary name COM to |
|||
drive B from the current drive. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
A:=B:ZAP.* Copies all files that have the primary name ZAP to |
|||
drive A from drive B. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
ZAP.ASM=B: Same as ZAP.ASM=B:ZAP.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:ZOT.COM=A: Same as B:ZOT.COM=A:ZOT.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:=GAMMA.BAS Same as B:GAMMA.BAS=GAMMA.BAS |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -16 |
|||
B:=A:GAMMA.BAS Same as B:GAMMA.BAS=A:GAMMA.BAS |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP allows reference to physical and logical devices that are attached to the |
|||
CP/M system. The device names are the same as given under the STAT command, |
|||
along with a number of specially named devices. The following is |
|||
a list of logical devices given in the STAT command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
CON: (console) |
|||
RDR: (reader) |
|||
PUN: (punch) |
|||
LST: (list) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
while the physical devices are |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TTY: (console), reader, punch, or list) |
|||
CRT: (console, or list), UC1: (console) |
|||
PTR: (reader), UR1: (reader), UR2: (reader) |
|||
PTP: (punch), UP1: (punch), UP2: (punch) |
|||
LPT: (list), UL1: (list) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The BAT: physical device is not included, because this assignment is used |
|||
only to indicate that the RDR: and LST: devices are used for console |
|||
input/output. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The RDR, LST, PUN, and CON devices are all defined within the BIOS portion of |
|||
CP/M, and are easily altered for any particular I/O system. The current |
|||
physical device mapping is defined by IOBYTE; see Section 6 for a discussion |
|||
of this function. The destination device must be capable of |
|||
receiving data, for example, data cannot be sent to the punch, and the |
|||
source devices must be |
|||
capable of generating data, for example, the LST: device cannot be read. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following list describes additional device names that can be used in |
|||
PIP commands. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o NUL: sends 40 nulls (ASCII 0s) to the device. This can be issued |
|||
at the end of punched output. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o EOF: sends a CP/M end-of-file (ASCII CTRL-Z) to the destination |
|||
device (sent automatically at the end of all ASCII data transfers through PIP). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o INP: is a special PIP input source that can be patched into the PIP |
|||
program. PIP gets the input data character-by-character, by CALLing location |
|||
103H, with data returned in location 109H (parity bit must be zero). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o OUT: is a special PIP output destination that can be patched into the |
|||
PIP program. PIP CALLs location 106H with data in register C for each |
|||
character to transmit. Note that locations 109H through |
|||
1FFH of the PIP memory image are not used and can be replaced by special |
|||
purpose drivers using DDT (see Section 4). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o PRN: is the same as LST:, except that tabs are expanded at every eighth |
|||
character position, lines are numbered, and page ejects are inserted every |
|||
60 lines with an initial eject (same as using PIP options [t8np]). |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
File and device names can be interspersed in the PIP commands. In each case, |
|||
the specific device is read until end-of-file (CTRL-Z for ASCII files, and |
|||
end-of-data for non-ASCII disk files). Data from each device or file are |
|||
concatenated from left to right until the last data source has been read. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The destination device or file is written using the data from the source |
|||
files, and an end-of-file character, CTRL-Z, is appended to the result |
|||
for ASCII files. If the destination is a disk file, a temporary file is |
|||
created ($$$ secondary name) that is changed to the actual filename only |
|||
on successful completion of the copy. Files with the extension COM are |
|||
always assumed to be non-ASCII. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The copy operation can be aborted at any time by pressing any key on the |
|||
keyboard. PIP responds with the message ABORTED to |
|||
indicate that the operation has not been completed. If any operation is |
|||
aborted, or if an error occurs during processing, PIP removes any pending |
|||
commands that were set up while using the SUBMIT command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP performs a special function if the destination is a disk file with type |
|||
HEX (an Intel hex-formatted machine code file), and the source is an |
|||
external peripheral device, such as a paper tape reader. In this case, the |
|||
PIP program checks to ensure that the source file contains a properly formed |
|||
hex file, with legal hexadecimal values and checksum records. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When an |
|||
invalid input record is found, PIP reports an error message at the console |
|||
and waits for corrective action. Usually, you can open the reader |
|||
and rerun a section of the tape (pull the tape back about 20 inches). When |
|||
the tape is ready for the reread, a single carriage return is typed at the |
|||
console, and PIP attempts another read. If the tape position cannot be |
|||
properly read, continue the read by typing a return following the |
|||
error message, and enter the record manually with the ED program after |
|||
the disk file is constructed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
PIP allows the end-of-file to |
|||
be entered from the console if the source file is an RDR: device. In |
|||
this case, the PIP program reads the device and monitors the keyboard. If |
|||
CTRL-Z is typed at the keyboard, the read operation is terminated normally. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following are valid PIP commands: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP LST: = X.PRN |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies X.PRN to the LST device and |
|||
terminates the PIP program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP |
|||
.sp |
|||
Starts PIP for a sequence of |
|||
commands. PIP prompts with *. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*CON:=X.ASM,Y.ASM,Z.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
Concatenates three ASM files and copies to |
|||
the CON device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
*X.HEX=CON:,Y.HEX,PTR: |
|||
.sp |
|||
Creates a HEX file by reading the CON |
|||
until a CTRL-Z is typed, followed by data from Y.HEX and PTR until |
|||
a CTRL-Z is encountered. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP PUN:=NUL:,X.ASM,EOF:,NUL: |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Sends 40 nulls to the punch device; copies the X.ASM file to the punch, |
|||
followed by an end-of-file, CTRL-Z, and 40 more null characters. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(carriage return) |
|||
.sp |
|||
A single carriage return stops PIP. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can also specify one or more PIP parameters, enclosed in left and |
|||
right square brackets, separated by zero or more blanks. Each parameter |
|||
affects the copy operation, and the enclosed list of parameters must |
|||
immediately follow the affected file or device. Generally, each parameter |
|||
can be followed by an optional decimal integer value (the S and Q parameters |
|||
are exceptions). Table 1-4 describes valid PIP parameters. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-4. PIP Parameters |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Parameter Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 17 |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
B Blocks mode transfer. Data are buffered by PIP until an ASCII x-off |
|||
character, CTRL-S, is received from the source device. This allows transfer |
|||
of data to a disk file from a continuous reading device, such as a cassette |
|||
reader. Upon receipt of the x-off, PIP clears the disk buffers and returns |
|||
for more input data. The amount of data that can be buffered depends on the |
|||
memory size of the host system. PIP issues an error message if the |
|||
buffers overflow. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Dn Deletes characters that extend past column n in the transfer of data |
|||
to the destination from the character source. This parameter is generally |
|||
used to truncate long lines that are sent to a narrow printer or |
|||
console device. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
E Echoes all transfer operations to the console as they are being |
|||
performed. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
F Filters form-feeds from the file. All embedded form-feeds are |
|||
removed. The P parameter can be used simultaneously to insert new form-feeds. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Gn Gets file from user number n (n in the range 0-15). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
H Transfers HEX data. All data are checked for proper Intel hex file |
|||
format. Nonessential characters between hex records are removed during the |
|||
copy operation. The console is prompted for corrective action in case |
|||
errors occur. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
I Ignores :00 records in the transfer of Intel hex format |
|||
file. The I parameter automatically sets the H parameter. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-4. (continued) |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Parameter Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 17 |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
L Translates upper-case alphabetics to lower-case. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
N Adds line numbers to each line transferred to the destination, |
|||
starting at one and incrementing by 1. Leading zeroes are suppressed, and |
|||
the number is followed by a colon. If N2 is specified, leading zeroes are |
|||
included and a tab is inserted following the number. The tab is expanded if |
|||
T is set. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
O Transfers non-ASCII object files. The normal CP/M end-of-file is |
|||
ignored. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Pn Includes page ejects at every n lines with an initial page eject. |
|||
If n = 1 or is excluded altogether, page ejects occur every 60 lines. If |
|||
the F parameter is used, form-feed suppression takes place before the new |
|||
page ejects are inserted. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Qs^Z Quits copying from the source device or file when the |
|||
string s, terminated by CTRL-Z, is encountered. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
R Reads system files. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Ss^Z Start copying from the source device when the string |
|||
s, terminated by CTRL-Z, is encountered. The S and Q parameters can be used |
|||
to abstract a particular section of a file, such as a subroutine. The |
|||
start and quit strings are always included in the copy operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
If you specify a command line after the PIP command keyword, the CCP |
|||
translates strings |
|||
following the S and Q parameters to upper-case. If you do not |
|||
specify a command line, PIP does not perform the automatic upper-case |
|||
translation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Tn Expands tabs, CTRL-I characters, to every nth column during the |
|||
transfer of characters to the destination from the source. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
U Translates lower-case alphabetics to upper-case during the copy |
|||
operation. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 1-4. (continued) |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sp |
|||
Parameter Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 17 |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
V Verifies that data have been copied correctly by rereading after the |
|||
write operation (the destination must be a disk file). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
W Writes over R/O files without console interrogation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -10 |
|||
Z Zeros the parity bit on input for each ASCII character. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following examples show valid PIP commands that specify parameters in |
|||
the file transfer. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP X.ASM=B:[v] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies X.ASM from drive B to the current drive and verifies that the data were |
|||
properly copied. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP LPT:=X.ASM[nt8u] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies X.ASM to the LPT: device; numbers each line, expands tabs to every |
|||
eighth column, and translates lower-case alphabetics to upper-case. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP PUN:=X.HEX[i],Y.ZOT[h] |
|||
.sp |
|||
First copies X.HEX to the PUN: device |
|||
and ignores the trailing :00 record in X.HEX; continues the transfer of data |
|||
by reading Y.ZOT, which contains HEX records, including any :00 records |
|||
it contains. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP X.LIB=Y.ASM[sSUBRI:^z qJMP L3^z] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copies from the file Y.ASM into the |
|||
file X.LIB. The command starts the copy when the string SUBR1: has been |
|||
found, and quits copying after the string JMP L3 is encountered. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP PRN:=X.ASM[p50] |
|||
.sp |
|||
Sends X.ASM to the LST: device with |
|||
line numbers, expands tabs to every eighth column, and ejects |
|||
pages at every |
|||
50th line. The assumed parameter list for a PRN file is nt8p60; p50 |
|||
overrides the default value. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Under normal operation, PIP does not overwrite a file that is set to a |
|||
permanent R/O status. If an attempt is made to overwrite an R/O file, the |
|||
following prompt appears: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DESTINATION FILE IS R/O, DELETE (Y/N)? |
|||
.sp |
|||
If you type Y, the file is overwritten. Otherwise, the following response |
|||
appears: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
** NOT DELETED ** |
|||
.sp |
|||
The file transfer is skipped, and PIP continues with the next |
|||
operation in sequence. To avoid the prompt and response in the case of R/O |
|||
file overwrite, the command line can include the W parameter, as |
|||
shown in this example: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP A:=B:*.COM[W] |
|||
.sp |
|||
The W parameter copies all nonsystem files to the A drive from the B drive and |
|||
overwrites any R/O files in the process. If the operation involves several |
|||
concatenated files, the W parameter need only be included with the last file |
|||
in the list, as in this example: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP A.DAT=B.DAT,F:NEW.DAT,G:OLD.DAT[W] |
|||
.pp |
|||
Files with the system attribute can be included in PIP transfers if the R |
|||
parameter is included; otherwise, system files are not |
|||
recognized. For example, the command line: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP ED.COM=B:ED.COM[R] |
|||
.sp |
|||
reads the ED.COM file from the B drive, even if it has been |
|||
marked as an R/O and system file. The system file attributes are copied, if |
|||
present. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Downward compatibility with previous versions of CP/M is only maintained if |
|||
the file does not exceed one megabyte, no file attributes are set, and the |
|||
file is created by user 0. If compatibility is required with |
|||
nonstandard, for example, double-density versions of 1.4, it |
|||
might be |
|||
necessary to select 1.4 |
|||
compatibility mode when constructing the internal disk parameter block. See |
|||
Section 6 and refer to Section 6.10, which describes BIOS differences. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
to copy files into another user area, PIP.COM must be located in that user |
|||
area. Use the following procedure to make a copy of PIP.COM in another |
|||
user area. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
USER 0 Log in user 0. |
|||
|
|||
DDT PIP.COM (note PIP size s) Load PIP to memory. |
|||
|
|||
GO Return to CCP. |
|||
|
|||
USER 3 Log in user 3. |
|||
|
|||
SAVEs PIP.COM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
In this procedure, s is the integral number of memory pages, 256-byte |
|||
segments, occupied |
|||
by PIP. The number s can be determined when PIP.COM is loaded under DDT, |
|||
by referring to the value under the NEXT display. If, for example, the next |
|||
available address is 1D00, then PIP.COM requires 1C hexadecimal |
|||
pages, or |
|||
1 times 16 + 12 = 28 pages, and the value of s is 28 in the subsequent |
|||
save. Once PIP is copied in this manner, it can be copied to another disk |
|||
belonging to the same user number through normal PIP transfers. |
|||
.nx onec |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,683 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.6 Transient Commands |
|||
.ft 1-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.5 ED Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.5 ED Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED ufn |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The ED program is the CP/M system context editor that allows creation and |
|||
alteration of ASCII files in the CP/M environment. Complete details of |
|||
operation are given in Section 2. ED allows the operator to create and |
|||
operate upon source files that are organized as a sequence of ASCII |
|||
characters, separated by end-of-line characters (a carriage |
|||
return/line-feed |
|||
sequence). There is no practical restriction on line length (no single |
|||
line can exceed the size of the working memory) that is defined by the |
|||
number of characters typed between carriage returns. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ED program has |
|||
a number of commands for character string searching, replacement, and |
|||
insertion that are useful for creating and correcting programs or text |
|||
files under CP/M. Although the CP/M has a limited memory work |
|||
space area (approximately 5000 characters in a 20K CP/M system), the file |
|||
size that |
|||
can be edited is not limited, since data are easily paged through this |
|||
work area. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If it does not exist, ED creates the specified source file and opens the |
|||
file for access. If the source file does exist, the |
|||
programmer appends data for editing (see the A command). The appended data |
|||
can then be |
|||
displayed, altered, and written from the work area back to the |
|||
disk (see the W command). Particular points in the program can be |
|||
automatically paged and |
|||
located by context, allowing easy access to particular |
|||
portions of a large file (see the N command). |
|||
.pp |
|||
If you type the following command line: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED X.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
the ED program creates an intermediate work file with the name |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X.$$$ |
|||
.sp |
|||
to hold the edited data during the ED run. Upon completion of ED, the |
|||
X.ASM file (original file) is renamed to X.BAK, and the edited work file is |
|||
renamed to X.ASM. Thus, the X.BAK file contains the original unedited |
|||
file, and the X.ASM file contains the newly edited file. The operator can |
|||
always return to the previous version of a file by removing the most recent |
|||
version and renaming the previous version. If the current X.ASM file has |
|||
been improperly edited, the following sequence of commands reclaim the |
|||
back-up file. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DIR X.* Checks to see that BAK file is |
|||
available. |
|||
|
|||
ERA X.ASM Erases most recent version. |
|||
|
|||
REN X.ASM=X.BAK Renames the BAK file to ASM. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
You can abort the edit at any point (reboot, power failure, CTRL-C, |
|||
or CTRL-Q command) without destroying the original file. In this case, the |
|||
BAK file is not created and the original file is always intact. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ED program allows the user to edit the source on one disk and create the |
|||
back-up file on another disk. This form of the ED command is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED ufn d: |
|||
.sp |
|||
where ufn is the name of the file to edit on the currently logged disk and d |
|||
is the name of an alternate drive. The ED program reads and processes the |
|||
source file and writes the new file to drive d using the name ufn. After |
|||
processing, the original file becomes the back-up file. If the operator is |
|||
addressing disk A, the following command is valid. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ED X.ASM b: |
|||
.sp |
|||
This edits the file X.ASM on drive A, creating the new file X.$$$ on |
|||
drive B. After a successful edit, A:X.ASM is renamed to A:X.BAK, and |
|||
B:X.$$$ is renamed to B:X.ASM. For convenience, the currently logged disk |
|||
becomes drive B at the end of the edit. Note that if a file |
|||
named B:X.ASM exists before the editing begins, the following |
|||
message appears on the screen: |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
FILE EXISTS |
|||
.sp |
|||
This message is a precaution against accidentally destroying |
|||
a source file. You should first erase the existing file and then restart |
|||
the edit operation. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Similar to other transient commands, editing can take place on a drive |
|||
different from the currently logged disk by preceding the source filename |
|||
by a drive name. The following are examples of valid edit |
|||
requests: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 25 |
|||
.ti -17 |
|||
ED A:X.ASM Edits the file X.ASM on drive A, with new file and back-up |
|||
on drive A. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -17 |
|||
ED B:X.ASM A: Edits the file X.ASM on drive B to the temporary file X.$$$ |
|||
on drive A. After editing, this command changes X.ASM on drive B to X.BAK |
|||
and changes X.$$$ on drive A to X.ASM. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.6 SYSGEN Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.6 SYSGEN Command |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SYSGEN |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SYSGEN transient command allows generation of an initialized disk |
|||
containing the CP/M operating system. The SYSGEN program prompts the |
|||
console for commands by interacting as shown. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SYSGEN <cr> |
|||
.sp |
|||
Initiates the SYSGEN program. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SYSGEN VERSION x.x |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN sign-on message. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
SOURCE DRIVE NAME |
|||
(OR RETURN TO SKIP) |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
Respond with the drive name (one of the letters A, B, C, or D) of the |
|||
disk containing a CP/M system, usually A. If a copy of CP/M already exists |
|||
in memory due to a MOVCPM command, press only a carriage return. Typing a |
|||
drive name d causes the response: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SOURCE ON d THEN TYPE RETURN |
|||
.sp |
|||
Place a disk containing the CP/M operating |
|||
system on drive d (d is one of A, B, C, or D). Answer by pressing a carriage |
|||
return when ready. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
FUNCTION COMPLETE |
|||
.sp |
|||
System is copied to memory. SYSGEN then prompts with the following: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
If a disk is being initialized, place the new disk into a drive |
|||
and answer with the drive name. Otherwise, press a carriage return |
|||
and the system reboots from drive A. Typing drive name d causes |
|||
SYSGEN to prompt with the following message: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
DESTINATION ON d |
|||
THEN TYPE RETURN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Place new disk into drive d; press return when ready. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
FUNCTION COMPLETE |
|||
.sp |
|||
New disk is initialized in drive d. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
The DESTINATION prompt is repeated until a single carriage return is |
|||
pressed at the console, so that more than one disk can be initialized. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Upon completion of a successful system generation, the new disk contains |
|||
the operating system, and only the built-in commands are available. An |
|||
IBM-compatible disk appears to CP/M as a disk with an |
|||
empty directory; therefore, the operator must copy the appropriate COM files |
|||
from an existing CP/M disk to the newly constructed disk using the |
|||
PIP transient. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can copy all files from an existing disk by typing the following |
|||
PIP command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
PIP B: = A:*.*[v] |
|||
.bp |
|||
This command copies all files from disk drive A to disk drive B and verifies |
|||
that |
|||
each file has been copied correctly. The name of each file is displayed at |
|||
the console as the copy operation proceeds. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that a SYSGEN does not destroy the files that already |
|||
exist on a disk; it only constructs a new operating system. If a |
|||
disk is being used only on drives B through P and will never be the |
|||
source of a bootstrap operation on drive A, the SYSGEN need not take place. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.7 SUBMIT Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.7 SUBMIT Command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SUBMIT ufn parm#1 ... parm#n |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SUBMIT command allows CP/M commands to be batched for automatic |
|||
processing. The ufn given in the SUBMIT command must be the filename of a |
|||
file that exists on the currently logged disk, with an assumed file type of |
|||
SUB. The SUB file contains CP/M prototype commands with possible parameter |
|||
substitution. The actual parameters parm#1 ... parm#n are substituted into |
|||
the prototype commands, and, if no errors occur, the file of substituted |
|||
commands are processed sequentially by CP/M. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The prototype command file is created using the ED program, with |
|||
interspersed $ parameters of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
$1 $2 $3 ...$n |
|||
.sp |
|||
corresponding to the number of actual parameters that will be included when |
|||
the file is submitted for execution. When the SUBMIT transient is executed, |
|||
the actual parameters parm#1 ... parm#n are paired with the formal parameters |
|||
$1 ... $n in the prototype commands. If the numbers of formal and actual |
|||
parameters do not correspond, the SUBMIT function is aborted with an error |
|||
message at the console. The SUBMIT function creates a file of substituted |
|||
commands with the name |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
$$$.SUB |
|||
.sp |
|||
on the logged disk. When the system reboots, at the termination of the |
|||
SUBMIT, this command file is read by the CCP as a source of input rather |
|||
than the console. If the SUBMIT function is performed on any disk other |
|||
than drive A, the commands are not processed until the disk is inserted into |
|||
drive A and the system reboots. You can abort command processing at |
|||
any time by pressing the rubout key when the command is read and echoed. In |
|||
this case, the $$$.SUB file is removed and the subsequent commands come |
|||
from the console. Command processing is also aborted if the CCP detects an |
|||
error in any of the commands. Programs that execute under CP/M can abort |
|||
processing of command files when error conditions occur by erasing any |
|||
existing $$$.SUB file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To introduce dollar signs into a SUBMIT file, you can type a $$ |
|||
which reduces to a single $ within the command file. A caret, |
|||
^, precedes an alphabetic character s, which produces a single CTRL-X |
|||
character within the file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The last command in a SUB file can initiate another SUB file, allowing |
|||
chained batch commands: |
|||
.pp |
|||
Suppose the file ASMBL.SUB exists on disk and contains the prototype commands |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
ASM $1 |
|||
DIR $1.* |
|||
ERA *.BAK |
|||
PIP $2:=$1.PRN |
|||
ERA $1.PRN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
then, you issue the following command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SUBMIT ASMBL X PRN |
|||
.sp |
|||
The SUBMIT program reads the ASMBL.SUB file, |
|||
substituting X: for all occurrences of $1 and PRN for all occurrences of |
|||
$2. This results in a $$$.SUB file containing the commands: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
ASM X |
|||
DIR X.* |
|||
ERA *.BAK |
|||
PIP PRN:=X.PRN |
|||
ERA X.PRN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
which are executed in sequence by the CCP. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SUBMIT function can access a SUB file on an alternate drive by preceding |
|||
the filename by a drive name. Submitted files are only acted upon when |
|||
they appear on drive A. Thus, it is possible to create a submitted file |
|||
on drive B that is executed at a later time when inserted in drive A. |
|||
.pp |
|||
An additional utility program called XSUB extends the power of the SUBMIT |
|||
facility to include line input to programs as well as the CCP. The XSUB |
|||
command is included as the first line of the SUBMIT |
|||
file. When it is executed, XSUB self-relocates directly below the CCP. All |
|||
subsequent SUBMIT command lines are processed by XSUB so that programs that |
|||
read buffered console input, BDOS Function 10, receive their input directly |
|||
from the SUBMIT file. For example, the file SAVER.SUB can contain the |
|||
following SUBMIT lines: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
XSUB |
|||
DDT |
|||
|$1.COM |
|||
R |
|||
GO |
|||
SAVE 1 $2.COM |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
a subsequent SUBMIT command, such as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A>\c |
|||
.sh |
|||
SUBMIT SAVER PIP Y |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
substitutes X for $1 and Y for $2 in the command stream. The XSUB |
|||
program loads, followed by DDT, which is sent to the command lines PIP.COM, |
|||
R, and G0, thus returning to the CCP. The final command SAVE 1 Y.COM is |
|||
processed by the CCP. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The XSUB program remains in memory and prints the message |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(xsub active) |
|||
.sp |
|||
on each warm start operation to indicate its presence. Subsequent SUBMIT |
|||
command streams do not require the XSUB, unless an intervening cold start |
|||
occurs. Note that XSUB must be loaded after the optional |
|||
CP/M DESPOOL utility, if both are to run simultaneously. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.8 DUMP Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.8 DUMP Command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DUMP ufn |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DUMP program types the contents of the disk file (ufn) at the console in |
|||
hexadecimal form. The file contents are listed sixteen bytes at a time, |
|||
with the absolute byte address listed to the left of each line in |
|||
hexadecimal. Long typeouts can be aborted by pressing the rubout key during |
|||
printout. The source listing of the DUMP program is given in Section 5 as |
|||
an example of a program written for the CP/M environment. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 1.6.9 MOVCPM Command |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.6.9 MOVCPM Command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ul |
|||
Syntax: |
|||
.qu |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
MOVCPM |
|||
.pp |
|||
The MOVCPM program allows you to reconfigure the CP/M system for any |
|||
particular memory size. Two optional parameters can be used to indicate the |
|||
desired size of the new system and the disposition of the new system at |
|||
program termination. If the first parameter is omitted or an * is given, |
|||
the MOVCPM program reconfigures the system to its maximum size, based |
|||
upon the kilobytes of contiguous RAM in the host system (starting at 0000H). |
|||
If the second parameter is omitted, the system is executed, but not |
|||
permanently recorded; if * is given, the system is left in memory, ready |
|||
for a SYSGEN operation. The MOVCPM program relocates a memory image of CP/M |
|||
and places this image in memory in preparation for a system generation |
|||
operation. The following is a list of MOVCPM command forms: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 23 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM Relocates and executes CP/M for management of the current |
|||
memory |
|||
configuration (memory is examined for contiguous RAM, starting at 100H). |
|||
On completion of the relocation, the new system is executed but not |
|||
permanently recorded on the disk. The system that is constructed |
|||
contains a BIOS for the Intel microcomputer development system 800. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM n Creates a relocated CP/M system for management of an n kilobyte |
|||
system (n must be in the range of 20 to 64), and executes the system as |
|||
described. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM * * Constructs a relocated memory image for the current memory |
|||
configuration, but leaves the memory image in memory in preparation for a |
|||
SYSGEN operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM n * Constructs a relocated memory image for an n kilobyte memory |
|||
system, and leaves the memory image in preparation for a SYSGEN operation. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
For example, the command, |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
MOVCPM * * |
|||
.sp |
|||
constructs a new version of the CP/M system and leaves it in |
|||
memory, ready for a SYSGEN operation. The message |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
READY FOR 'SYSGEN' OR |
|||
'SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM' |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
appears at the console upon completion, where xx is the current memory |
|||
size in kilobytes. You can then type the following sequence: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 35 |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
SYSGEN This starts the system generation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
SOURCE DRIVE NAME Respond with a carriage return |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
(OR RETURN TO SKIP) to skip the CP/M read operation, because the |
|||
system is already in memory as a result of the previous MOVCPM operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME Respond with B to write new |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) system to the disk in drive B. SYSGEN |
|||
prompts with the following message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
DESTINATION ON B, Place the new disk on drive B |
|||
.sp 0 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.ti -27 |
|||
THEN TYPE RETURN and press the RETURN key when ready. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
If you respond with A rather than B above, the system is |
|||
written to drive A rather than B. SYSGEN continues to print this |
|||
prompt: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME (OR RETURN TO REBOOT) |
|||
.sp |
|||
until you respond with a single carriage return, which stops the |
|||
SYSGEN program with a system reboot. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can then go through the reboot process with the old or new |
|||
disk. Instead of performing the SYSGEN operation, you can |
|||
type a command of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
at the completion of the MOVCPM function, where xx is the value indicated |
|||
in the SYSGEN message. The CP/M memory image on the currently logged disk is |
|||
in a form that can be patched. This is necessary when operating in a |
|||
nonstandard environment where the BIOS must be altered for a particular |
|||
peripheral device configuration, as described in Section 6. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following are valid MOVCPM commands: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 23 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM 48 Constructs a 48K version of CP/M and starts execution. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM 48 * Constructs a 48K version of CP/M in preparation for permanent |
|||
recording; the response is |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
READY FOR 'SYSGEN' OR |
|||
'SAVE 34 CPM48.COM' |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -15 |
|||
MOVCPM * * Constructs a maximum memory version of CP/M and |
|||
starts execution. |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The newly created system is serialized with the number attached to the |
|||
original disk and is subject to the conditions of the Digital Research |
|||
Software Licensing Agreement. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.7 BDOS Error Messages |
|||
.tc 1.7 BDOS Error Messages |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.7 BDOS Error Messages |
|||
.qs |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
There are three error situations that the Basic Disk Operating System |
|||
intercepts during file processing. When one of these conditions is detected, |
|||
the BDOS prints the message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS ERR ON d: error |
|||
.bp |
|||
where d is the drive name and error is one of the three error messages: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
BAD SECTOR |
|||
SELECT |
|||
READ ONLY |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The BAD SECTOR message indicates that the disk controller electronics has |
|||
detected an error condition in reading or writing the disk. This |
|||
condition is generally caused by a malfunctioning disk controller or an |
|||
extremely worn disk. If you find that CP/M reports this |
|||
error more than once a month, the state of the controller electronics and the |
|||
condition of the media should be checked. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You can also encounter this condition in reading files generated |
|||
by a controller produced by a different manufacturer. Even |
|||
though controllers claim to be IBM..-compatible, one |
|||
often finds small differences in recording formats. The Model 800 controller, |
|||
for example, requires two bytes of one's following the data CRC byte, which |
|||
is not required in the IBM format. As a result, disks generated by the |
|||
Intel microcomputer development system can be read by almost all |
|||
other IBM-compatible system, while disk files generated on other |
|||
manufacturers' equipment produce the BAD SECTOR message when read |
|||
by the microcomputer development system. To recover from this |
|||
condition, press a CTRL-C to reboot (the safest course), or a |
|||
return, which ignores the bad sector in the file operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
pressing a return might destroy disk integrity if the |
|||
operation is a directory write. Be sure you have adequate |
|||
back-ups in this case. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SELECT error occurs when there is an attempt to address a drive beyond |
|||
the range supported by the BIOS. In this case, the value of d in the error |
|||
message gives the selected drive. The system reboots following any input |
|||
from the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The READ ONLY message occurs when there is an attempt to write to a |
|||
disk or file that has been designated as Read-Only in a STAT command or |
|||
has been set to Read-Only by the BDOS. Reboot CP/M by |
|||
using the warm start procedure, CTRL-C, or by performing a cold start |
|||
whenever the disks are changed. If a changed disk is to be read but |
|||
not written, BDOS allows the disk to be changed without the warm or |
|||
cold start, but internally marks the drive as Read-Only. The status of the |
|||
drive is subsequently changed to Read-Write if a warm or cold start occurs. |
|||
On issuing this message, CP/M waits for input from the console. An automatic |
|||
warm start takes place following any input. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 1.8 Operation of CP/M on the Model 800 |
|||
.tc 1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 |
|||
.sh |
|||
1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 |
|||
.pp |
|||
This section gives operating procedures for using CP/M on the |
|||
Intel Model 800 microcomputer development system microcomputer development |
|||
system. Basic knowledge of the microcomputer development system |
|||
hardware and software systems is assumed. |
|||
.pp |
|||
CP/M is initiated in essentially the same manner as the Intel ISIS operating |
|||
system. The disk drives are labeled 0 through 3 on the |
|||
microcomputer development system, corresponding |
|||
to CP/M drives A through D, respectively. The CP/M system disk is |
|||
inserted into drive 0, and the BOOT and RESET switches are pressed in |
|||
sequence. The interrupt 2 light should go on at this point. The space bar |
|||
is then pressed on the system console, and the light should go |
|||
out. If it does not, the user should check connections and baud rates. The |
|||
BOOT |
|||
switch is turned off, and the CP/M sign-on message should appear at the |
|||
selected console device, followed by the A> system prompt. You |
|||
can then issue the various resident and transient commands. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CP/M system can be restarted (warm start) at any time by pushing the |
|||
INT 0 switch on the front panel. The built-in Intel ROM monitor can be |
|||
initiated by pushing the INT 7 switch, which generates an RST 7, except when |
|||
operating under DDT, in which case the DDT program gets control instead. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Diskettes can be removed from the drives at any time, and the system can be |
|||
shut down during operation without affecting data integrity. Do |
|||
not remove a disk and replace it with another without rebooting the |
|||
system (cold or warm start) unless the inserted disk is Read-Only. |
|||
.pp |
|||
As a result of hardware hang-ups or malfunctions, CP/M might |
|||
print the following message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
BDOS ERR ON d: BAD SECTOR |
|||
.sp |
|||
where d is the drive that has a permanent error. This error can occur when |
|||
drive doors are opened and closed randomly, followed by disk operations, or |
|||
can be caused by a disk, drive, or controller failure. You can |
|||
optionally elect to ignore the error by pressing a single return at the |
|||
console. The error might produce a bad data record, requiring |
|||
reinitialization |
|||
of up to 128 bytes of data. You can reboot the CP/M system and try |
|||
the operation again. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Termination of a CP/M session requires no special action, except that it is |
|||
necessary to remove the disks before turning the power off to avoid |
|||
random transients that often make their way to the drive electronics. |
|||
.pp |
|||
You should use IBM-compatible disks rather than disks |
|||
that have previously been used with any ISIS version. In particular, the |
|||
ISIS FORMAT operation produces nonstandard sector numbering throughout the |
|||
disk. This nonstandard numbering seriously degrades the performance of |
|||
CP/M, and causes CP/M to operate noticeably slower than the distribution |
|||
version. If it becomes necessary to reformat a disk, which |
|||
should not be the case for standard disks, a program can be |
|||
written under CP/M that causes the Model 800 controller to |
|||
reformat with sequential sector numbering (1-26) on each track. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Generally, IBM-compatible 8-inch disks do not need to be formatted. |
|||
However, 5 1/4-inch disks need to be formatted. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
End of Section 1 |
|||
.nx two |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.nx front |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.nx appa.tex |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.nx apph.tex |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,807 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 6-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 6 CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 6 |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 6.1 Introduction |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.1 Introduction |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The standard CP/M system assumes operation on an Intel Model |
|||
800 microcomputer development system , but is designed so you can alter a |
|||
specific set of subroutines that define the hardware operating |
|||
environment. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Although standard CP/M 2 is configured for single-density floppy |
|||
disks, field-alteration features allow adaptation to a wide |
|||
variety of disk subsystems from single-drive minidisks to |
|||
high-capacity, hard disk systems. To simplify the following |
|||
adaptation process, it is assumed that CP/M 2 is first |
|||
configured for single-density floppy disks where minimal editing |
|||
and debugging tools are available. If an earlier version of CP/M |
|||
is available, the customizing process is eased considerably. In |
|||
this latter case, you might want to review the system |
|||
generation process and skip to later sections that discuss system |
|||
alteration for nonstandard disk systems. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To achieve device independence, CP/M is separated into three |
|||
distinct modules: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o BIOS is the Basic I/O System, which is environment dependent. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o BDOS is the Basic Disk Operating System, which is not dependent upon the |
|||
hardware configuration. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -2 |
|||
o CCP is the Console Command Processor, which uses the BDOS. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Of these modules, only the BIOS is dependent upon the particular |
|||
hardware. You can patch the distribution version |
|||
of CP/M to provide a new BIOS that provides a customized |
|||
interface between the remaining CP/M modules and the |
|||
hardware system. This document provides a step-by-step |
|||
procedure for patching a new BIOS into CP/M. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.pp |
|||
All disk-dependent portions of CP/M 2 are placed into a BIOS, a |
|||
resident disk parameter block, which is either hand coded or |
|||
produced automatically using the disk definition macro library |
|||
provided with CP/M 2. The end user need only specify the maximum |
|||
number of active disks, the starting and ending sector numbers, |
|||
the data allocation size, the maximum extent of the logical disk, |
|||
directory size information, and reserved track values. |
|||
The macros use this information to generate |
|||
the appropriate tables and table references for use during CP/M 2 |
|||
operation. Deblocking information is provided, which aids in |
|||
assembly or disassembly of sector sizes that are multiples of the |
|||
fundamental 128-byte data unit, and the system alteration manual |
|||
includes general purpose subroutines that use the deblocking |
|||
information to take advantage of larger sector sizes. Use of |
|||
these subroutines, together with the table-drive data access |
|||
algorithms, makes CP/M 2 a universal data management system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
File expansion is achieved by providing up to 512 logical file |
|||
extents, where each logical extent contains 16K bytes of data. |
|||
CP/M 2 is structured, however, so that as much as 128K bytes of |
|||
data are addressed by a single physical extent, corresponding to a |
|||
single directory entry, maintaining compatibility with previous |
|||
versions while taking advantage of directory space. |
|||
.pp |
|||
If CP/M is being tailored to a computer system for the first |
|||
time, the new BIOS requires some simple software development and |
|||
testing. The standard BIOS is listed in Appendix A and can be |
|||
used as a model for the customized package. A skeletal version |
|||
of the BIOS given in Appendix B can serve as the basis for a |
|||
modified BIOS. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
In addition to the BIOS, you must write a simple memory |
|||
loader, called GETSYS, which brings the operating system into |
|||
memory. To patch the new BIOS into CP/M, you must write the |
|||
reverse of GETSYS, called PUTSYS, which places an altered version |
|||
of CP/M back onto the disk. PUTSYS can be derived from GETSYS by |
|||
changing the disk read commands into disk write commands. Sample |
|||
skeletal GETSYS and PUTSYS programs are described in Section 6.4 |
|||
and listed in Appendix C. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To make the CP/M system load automatically, you must also |
|||
supply a cold start loader, similar to the one provided with |
|||
CP/M, listed in Appendixes A and D. A skeletal form of a cold |
|||
start loader is given in Appendix E, which serves as a model for |
|||
the loader. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 6.2 First-level System Regeneration |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.2 First-level Regeneration |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.2 First-level System Regeneration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The procedure to patch the CP/M system is given below. Address |
|||
references in each step are shown with H denoting the |
|||
hexadecimal radix, and are given for a 20K CP/M system. For |
|||
larger CP/M systems, a bias is added to each address that is |
|||
shown with a +b following it, where b is equal to the memory |
|||
size-20K. Values for b in various standard memory sizes are listed in |
|||
Table 6-1. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 6-1. Standard Memory Size Values |
|||
|
|||
.nf |
|||
Memory Size Value |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 13 |
|||
24K: b = 24K - 20K = 4K = 1000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
32K: b = 32K - 20K = 12K = 3000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
40K: b = 40K - 20K = 20K = 5000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
48K: b = 48K - 20K = 28K = 7000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
56K: b = 56K - 20K = 36K = 9000H |
|||
.sp |
|||
62K: b = 62K - 20K = 42K = A800H |
|||
.sp |
|||
64K: b = 64K - 20K = 44K = B000H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that the standard distribution version of CP/M is set for |
|||
operation within a 20K CP/M system. Therefore, you must first bring up |
|||
the 20K CP/M system, then configure it for actual |
|||
memory size (see Section 6.3). |
|||
.pp |
|||
Follow these steps to patch your CP/M system: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
1) Read Section 6.4 and write a GETSYS program that reads the |
|||
first two tracks of a disk into memory. The program from the |
|||
disk must be loaded starting at location 3380H. GETSYS is coded |
|||
to start at location 100H (base of the TPA) as shown in Appendix |
|||
C. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
2) Test the GETSYS program by reading a blank disk into memory, |
|||
and check to see that the data has been read properly and that |
|||
the disk has not been altered in any way by the GETSYS program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
3) Run the GETSYS program using an initialized CP/M disk to see |
|||
if GETSYS loads CP/M starting at 3380H (the operating system |
|||
actually starts 128 bytes later at 3400H). |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
4) Read Section 6.4 and write the PUTSYS program. This writes |
|||
memory starting at 3380H back onto the first two tracks of the |
|||
disk. The PUTSYS program should be located at 200H, as shown in |
|||
Appendix C. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
5) Test the PUTSYS program using a blank, uninitialized disk by |
|||
writing a portion of memory to the first two tracks; clear memory |
|||
and read it back using GETSYS. Test PUTSYS completely, because |
|||
this program will be used to alter CP/M on disk. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
6) Study Sections 6.5, 6.6, and 6.7 along with the distribution |
|||
version of the BIOS given in Appendix A and write a simple |
|||
version that performs a similar function for the customized |
|||
environment. Use the program given in Appendix B as a model. |
|||
Call this new BIOS by name CBIOS (customized BIOS). Implement |
|||
only the primitive disk operations on a single drive and simple |
|||
console input/output functions in this phase. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
7) Test CBIOS completely to ensure that it properly performs |
|||
console character I/O and disk reads and writes. Be careful to |
|||
ensure that no disk write operations occur during read operations |
|||
and check that the proper track and sectors are addressed on all |
|||
reads and writes. Failure to make these checks might cause |
|||
destruction of the initialized CP/M system after it is patched. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
8) Referring to Table 6-3 in Section 6.5, note that the BIOS is |
|||
placed between locations 4A00H and 4FFFH. Read the CP/M system |
|||
using GETSYS and replace the BIOS segment by the CBIOS developed |
|||
in step 6 and tested in step 7. This replacement is done in |
|||
memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -3 |
|||
9) Use PUTSYS to place the patched memory image of CP/M onto the |
|||
first two tracks of a blank disk for testing. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
10) Use GETSYS to bring the copied memory image from the test |
|||
disk back into memory at 3380H and check to ensure that it has |
|||
loaded back properly (clear memory, if possible, before the |
|||
load). Upon successful load, branch to the cold start code at |
|||
location 4A00H. The cold start routine initializes page |
|||
zero, then jumps to the CCP at location 3400H, which calls the |
|||
BDOS, which calls the CBIOS. The CCP asks the CBIOS to read |
|||
sixteen sectors on track 2, and CP/M types A>, the system |
|||
prompt. |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
If difficulties are encountered, use whatever debug facilities |
|||
are available to trace and breakpoint the CBIOS. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
11) Upon completion of step 10, CP/M has prompted the console for |
|||
a command input. To test the disk write operation, type |
|||
.sp |
|||
SAVE 1 X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
All commands must be followed by a carriage return. CP/M |
|||
responds with another prompt after several disk accesses: |
|||
.sp |
|||
A> |
|||
.sp |
|||
If it does not, debug the disk write functions and retry. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
12) Test the directory command by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
DIR |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M responds with |
|||
.sp |
|||
A:X COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
13) Test the erase command by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
ERA X.COM |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M responds with the A prompt. This is now an operational |
|||
system that only requires a bootstrap loader to function |
|||
completely. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
14) Write a bootstrap loader that is similar to GETSYS and place |
|||
it on track 0, sector 1, using PUTSYS (again using the test disk, |
|||
not the distribution disk). See Sections 6.5 and 6.8 for more |
|||
information on the bootstrap operation. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
15) Retest the new test disk with the bootstrap loader installed |
|||
by executing steps 11, 12, and 13. Upon completion of these |
|||
tests, type a CTRL-C. The system executes a warm start, which |
|||
reboots the system, and types the A prompt. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
16) At this point, there is probably a good version of the |
|||
customized CP/M system on the test disk. Use GETSYS to load CP/M |
|||
from the test disk. Remove the test disk, place the distribution |
|||
disk, or a legal copy, into the drive, and use PUTSYS to |
|||
replace the distribution version with the customized version. |
|||
Do not make this replacement if you are unsure of the patch |
|||
because this step destroys the system that was obtained from |
|||
Digital Research. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
17) Load the modified CP/M system and test it by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
DIR |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M responds with a list of files that are provided on the |
|||
initialized disk. The file DDT.COM is the memory image for the |
|||
debugger. Note that from now on, you must always reboot the |
|||
CP/M system (CTRL-C is sufficient) when the disk is removed and |
|||
replaced by another disk, unless the new disk is to be Read-Only. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
18) Load and test the debugger by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT |
|||
.sp |
|||
See Chapter 4 for operating procedures. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
19) Before making further CBIOS modifications, practice using the |
|||
editor (see Chapter 2), and assembler (see Chapter 3). Recode |
|||
and test the GETSYS, PUTSYS, and CBIOS programs using ED, ASM, |
|||
and DDT. Code and test a COPY program that does a sector-to-sector |
|||
copy from one disk to another to obtain back-up copies of |
|||
the original disk. Read the CP/M Licensing Agreement specifying |
|||
legal responsibilities when copying the CP/M system. Place the |
|||
following copyright notice: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Copyright (c), 1983 |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
on each copy that is made with the COPY program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -4 |
|||
20) Modify the CBIOS to include the extra functions for punches, |
|||
readers, and sign-on messages, and add the facilities for |
|||
additional disk drives, if desired. These changes can be made |
|||
with the GETSYS and PUTSYS programs or by referring to the |
|||
regeneration process in Section 6.3. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
You should now have a good copy of the customized CP/M |
|||
system. Although the CBIOS portion of CP/M belongs to the user, |
|||
the modified version cannot be legally copied. |
|||
.pp |
|||
It should be noted that the system remains file-compatible with |
|||
all other CP/M systems (assuming media compatibility) which |
|||
allows transfer of nonproprietary software between CP/M users. |
|||
.tc 6.3 Second-level System Generation |
|||
.bp |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.3 Second-level System Generation |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.3 Second-level System Generation |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Once the system is running, the next step is to configure CP/M |
|||
for the desired memory size. Usually, a memory image is first |
|||
produced with the MOVCPM program (system relocator) and then |
|||
placed into a named disk file. The disk file can then be loaded, |
|||
examined, patched, and replaced using the debugger and the |
|||
system generation program (refer to Chapter 1). |
|||
.pp |
|||
The CBIOS and BOOT are modified using ED and assembled using ASM, |
|||
producing files called CBIOS.HEX and BOOT.HEX, which contain the |
|||
code for CBIOS and BOOT in Intel hex format. |
|||
.pp |
|||
To get the memory image of CP/M into the TPA configured for the |
|||
desired memory size, type the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
MOVCPM xx* |
|||
.sp |
|||
where xx is the memory size in decimal K bytes, for example, 32 |
|||
for 32K. The response is as follows: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
CONSTRUCTING xxK CP/M VERS 2.0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
READY FOR "SYSGEN" OR |
|||
.sp |
|||
"SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM" |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
An image of CP/M in the TPA is configured for the requested |
|||
memory size. The memory image is at location 0900H through |
|||
227FH, that is, the BOOT is at 0900H, the CCP is at 980H, the |
|||
BDOS starts at 1180H, and the BIOS is at 1F80H. Note that the |
|||
memory image has the standard Model 800 BIOS and BOOT on it. It is now |
|||
necessary to save the memory image in a file so that you can |
|||
patch the CBIOS and CBOOT into it: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
SAVE 34 CPMxx.COM |
|||
.pp |
|||
The memory image created by the MOVCPM program is offset by a |
|||
negative bias so that it loads into the free area of the TPA, and |
|||
thus does not interfere with the operation of CP/M in higher |
|||
memory. This memory image can be subsequently loaded under DDT |
|||
and examined or changed in preparation for a new generation of |
|||
the system. DDT is loaded with the memory image by typing: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
DDT CPMxx.COM Loads DDT, then reads the CP/M image. |
|||
.sp |
|||
DDT should respond with the following: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
NEXT PC |
|||
2300 0100 |
|||
- The DDT prompt |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
You can then give the display and disassembly commands to examine |
|||
portions of the memory image between 900H and 227FH. |
|||
Note, however, that to find any particular address |
|||
within the memory image, you must apply the negative bias to the |
|||
CP/M address to find the actual address. Track 00, sector 01, is |
|||
loaded to location 900H (the user should find the cold start |
|||
loader at 900H to 97FH); track 00, sector 02, is loaded into 980H |
|||
(this is the base of the CCP); and so on through the entire CP/M |
|||
system load. In a 20K system, for example, the CCP resides at |
|||
the CP/M address 3400H, but is placed into memory at 980H by the |
|||
SYSGEN program. Thus, the negative bias, denoted by n, satisfies |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
3400H + n = 980H, or n =980H - 3400H |
|||
.sp |
|||
Assuming two's complement arithmetic, n = D580H, which can be |
|||
checked by |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
3400H + D580H = 10980H = 0980H (ignoring high-order |
|||
overflow). |
|||
.fi |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that for larger systems, n satisfies |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
(3400H+b) + n = 980H, or |
|||
n = 980H - (3400H + b), or |
|||
n = D580H - b |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The value of n for common CP/M systems is given below. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 6-2. Common Values for CP/M Systems |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Memory Size BIAS b Negative Offset n |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 13 |
|||
20K 0000H D580H - 0000H = D580H |
|||
24K 1000H D580H - 1000H = C580H |
|||
32K 3000H D580H - 3000H = A580H |
|||
40K 5000H D580H - 5000H = 8580H |
|||
48K 7000H D580H - 7000H = 6580H |
|||
56K 9000H D580H - 9000H = 4580H |
|||
62K A800H D580H - A800H = 2D80H |
|||
64K B000H D580H - B000H = 2580H |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
If you want to locate the address x within the memory image |
|||
loaded under DDT in a 20K system, first type |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Hx,n Hexadecimal sum and difference |
|||
.sp |
|||
and DDT responds with the value of x+n (sum) and x-n |
|||
(difference). The first number printed by DDT is the actual memory |
|||
address in the image where the data or code is located. For example, |
|||
the following DDT command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
H3400,D580 |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces 980H as the sum, which is where the CCP |
|||
is located in the memory image under DDT. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Type the L command to disassemble portions of the |
|||
BIOS located at (4A00H+b)-n, which, when one uses the H command, |
|||
produces an actual address of 1F80H. The disassembly command |
|||
would thus be as follows: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
L1F80 |
|||
.sp |
|||
It is now necessary to patch in the CBOOT and CBIOS routines. The BOOT |
|||
resides at location 0900H in the memory image. If the actual |
|||
load address is n, then to calculate the bias (m), |
|||
type the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
H900,n Subtract load address from target address. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The second number typed by DDT in response to the command is the |
|||
desired bias (m). For example, if the BOOT executes at 0080H, |
|||
the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
H900,80 |
|||
.sp |
|||
produces |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
0980 0880 Sum and difference in hex. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Therefore, the bias m would be 0880H. To read-in the BOOT, give the command: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ICBOOT.HEX Input file CBOOT.HEX |
|||
.sp |
|||
Then |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Rm Read CBOOT with a bias of m (=900H-n). |
|||
.sp |
|||
Examine the CBOOT with |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
L900 |
|||
.sp |
|||
You are now ready to replace the CBIOS by examining the area at |
|||
1F80H, where the original version of the CBIOS resides, and then |
|||
typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ICBIOS.HEX Ready the hex file for loading. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Assume that the CBIOS is being integrated into a 20K |
|||
CP/M system and thus originates at location 4A00H. To locate the |
|||
CBIOS properly in the memory image under DDT, you must apply the |
|||
negative bias n for a 20K system when loading the hex file. This |
|||
is accomplished by typing |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
RD580 Read the file with bias D580H. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Upon completion of the read, reexamine the area |
|||
where the CBIOS has been loaded (use an L1F80 command) to ensure |
|||
that it is properly loaded. When you are satisfied that the change has |
|||
been made, return from DDT using a CTRL-C or, G0 command. |
|||
.pp |
|||
SYSGEN is used to replace the patched memory image back onto a |
|||
disk (you use a test disk until sure of the |
|||
patch) as shown in the following interaction: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
SYSGEN Start the SYSGEN program. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SYSGEN VERSION 2.0 Sign-on message from SYSGEN. |
|||
.sp |
|||
SOURCE DRIVE NAME Respond with a carriage return |
|||
(OR RETURN TO SKIP) to skip the CP/M read operation |
|||
because the system is already |
|||
in memory. |
|||
.sp |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME Respond with B to write the new |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) system to the disk in drive B. |
|||
|
|||
.sp |
|||
DESTINATION ON B, Place a scratch disk in drive |
|||
THEN TYPE RETURN B, then press RETURN. |
|||
.sp |
|||
FUNCTION COMPLETE |
|||
DESTINATION DRIVE NAME |
|||
(OR RETURN TO REBOOT) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Place the scratch disk in drive A, then |
|||
perform a cold start to bring up the newly-configured CP/M |
|||
system. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The new CP/M system is then tested and the Digital Research |
|||
copyright notice is placed on the disk, as specified in the |
|||
Licensing Agreement: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
Copyright (c), 1979 |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The following program provides a framework for the GETSYS and |
|||
PUTSYS programs referenced in Sections 6.1 and 6.2. To read and |
|||
write the specific sectors, you must insert the READSEC and WRITESEC |
|||
subroutines. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
; GETSYS PROGRAM -- READ TRACKS 0 AND 1 TO MEMORY AT 3380H |
|||
; REGISTER USE |
|||
.sp |
|||
; A (SCRATCH REGISTER) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; B TRACK COUNT (0, 1) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; C SECTOR COUNT (1,2,...,26) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; DE (SCRATCH REGISTER PAIR) |
|||
.sp |
|||
; HL LOAD ADDRESS |
|||
.sp |
|||
; SP SET TO STACK ADDRESS |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
START: LXI SP,3380H ;SET STACK POINTER TO SCRATCH |
|||
;AREA |
|||
LXI H,3380H ;SET BASE LOAD ADDRESS |
|||
MVI B,0 ;START WITH TRACK 0 |
|||
RDTRK: ;READ NEXT TRACK (INITIALLY 0) |
|||
MVI C,1 ;READ STARTING WITH SECTOR 1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
RDSEC: ;READ NEXT SECTOR |
|||
CALL READSEC ;USER-SUPPLIED SUBROUTINE |
|||
LXI D,128 ;MOVE LOAD ADDRESS TO NEXT 1/2 |
|||
;PAGE |
|||
DAD D ;HL = HL + 128 |
|||
INR C ;SECTOR = SECTOR + 1 |
|||
MOV A,C ;CHECK FOR END OF TRACK |
|||
CPI 27 |
|||
JC RDSEC ;CARRY GENERATED IF SECTOR <27 |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
; ARRIVE HERE AT END OF TRACK, MOVE TO NEXT TRACK |
|||
INR B |
|||
MOV A,B ;TEST FOR LAST TRACK |
|||
CPI 2 |
|||
JC RDTRK ;CARRY GENERATED IF TRACK <2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
; USER-SUPPLIED SUBROUTINE TO READ THE DISK |
|||
READSEC: |
|||
; ENTER WITH TRACK NUMBER IN REGISTER B, |
|||
SECTOR NUMBER IN REGISTER C, AND |
|||
.sp |
|||
; ADDRESS TO FILL IN HL |
|||
.sp |
|||
; |
|||
PUSH B ;SAVE B AND C REGISTERS |
|||
PUSH H ;SAVE HL REGISTERS |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listing 6-1. GETSYS Program |
|||
.bp |
|||
................................................. |
|||
perform disk read at this point, branch to |
|||
label START if an error occurs |
|||
................................................. |
|||
POP H ;RECOVER HL |
|||
POP B ;RECOVER B AND C REGISTERS |
|||
RET ;BACK TO MAIN PROGRAM |
|||
.sp |
|||
END START |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listing 6-1. (continued) |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.pp |
|||
This program is assembled and listed in Appendix B for reference |
|||
purposes, with an assumed origin of 100H. The hexadecimal |
|||
operation codes that are listed on the left might be useful if the |
|||
program has to be entered through the panel switches. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The PUTSYS program can be constructed from GETSYS by changing |
|||
only a few operations in the GETSYS program given above, as shown |
|||
in Appendix C. The register pair HL becomes the dump address, |
|||
next address to write, and operations on these registers do not |
|||
change within the program. The READSEC subroutine is replaced by |
|||
a WRITESEC subroutine, which performs the opposite function; data |
|||
from address HL is written to the track given by register B |
|||
and sector given by register C. It is often useful to combine |
|||
GETSYS and PUTSYS into a single program during the test and |
|||
development phase, as shown in Appendix C. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 6.5 Disk Organization |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 6.5 Disk Organization |
|||
.sh |
|||
6.5 Disk Organization |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The sector allocation for the standard distribution version of |
|||
CP/M is given here for reference purposes. The first sector contains |
|||
an optional software boot section (see the table on the following |
|||
page. Disk controllers are often set up to bring track 0, |
|||
sector 1, into memory at a specific location, often location |
|||
0000H. The program in this sector, called BOOT, has the |
|||
responsibility of bringing the remaining sectors into memory |
|||
starting at location 3400H+b. If the controller does not |
|||
have a built-in sector load, the program in track 0, sector 1 can |
|||
be ignored. In this case, load the program from track 0, sector |
|||
2, to location 3400H+b. |
|||
.pp |
|||
As an example, the Intel Model 800 |
|||
hardware cold start loader brings track 0, sector 1, into |
|||
absolute address 3000H. Upon loading this sector, control |
|||
transfers to location 3000H, where the bootstrap operation |
|||
commences by loading the remainder of track 0 and all of track 1 |
|||
into memory, starting at 3400H+b. Note that this bootstrap |
|||
loader is of little use in a non-microcomputer development system |
|||
environment, although it is useful to examine it because some of |
|||
the boot actions will have to be duplicated in the user's cold |
|||
start loader. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 6-3. CP/M Disk Sector Allocation |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Track # Sector Page# Memory Address CP/M Module name |
|||
.sp |
|||
00 01 (boot address) Cold Start Loader |
|||
00 02 00 3400H+b CCP |
|||
' 03 ' 3480H+b ' |
|||
' 04 01 3500H+b ' |
|||
' 05 ' 3580H+b ' |
|||
' 06 02 3600H+b ' |
|||
' 07 ' 3680H+b ' |
|||
' 08 03 3700H+b ' |
|||
' 09 ' 3780H+b ' |
|||
' 10 04 3800H+b ' |
|||
' 11 ' 3880H+b ' |
|||
' 12 05 3900H+b ' |
|||
' 13 ' 3980H+b ' |
|||
' 14 06 3A00H+b ' |
|||
' 15 ' 3A80H+b ' |
|||
' 16 07 3B00H+b ' |
|||
00 17 ' 3B80H+b CCP |
|||
00 18 08 3C00H+b BDOS |
|||
' 19 ' 3C80H+b ' |
|||
' 20 09 3D00H+b ' |
|||
' 21 ' 3D80H+b ' |
|||
' 22 10 3E00H+b ' |
|||
' 23 ' 3E80H+b ' |
|||
' 24 11 3F00H+b ' |
|||
' 25 ' 3F80H+b ' |
|||
' 26 12 4000H+b ' |
|||
01 01 ' 4080H+b ' |
|||
' 02 13 4100H+b ' |
|||
' 03 ' 4180H+B ' |
|||
' 04 14 4200H+b ' |
|||
' 05 ' 4280H+b ' |
|||
' 06 15 4300H+b ' |
|||
' 07 ' 4380H+b ' |
|||
' 08 16 4400H+b ' |
|||
' 09 ' 4480H+b ' |
|||
' 10 17 4500H+b ' |
|||
' 11 ' 4580H+b ' |
|||
' 12 18 4600H+b ' |
|||
' 13 ' 4680H+b ' |
|||
' 14 19 4700H+b ' |
|||
' 15 ' 4780H+b ' |
|||
' 16 20 4800H+b ' |
|||
' 17 ' 4880H+b ' |
|||
' 18 21 4900H+b ' |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
01 19 ' 4900H+b BDOS |
|||
07 20 22 4A00H+b BIOS |
|||
' 21 ' 4A80H+b ' |
|||
' 22 23 4B00H+b ' |
|||
' 23 ' 4B80H+b ' |
|||
' 24 24 4C00H+b ' |
|||
01 25 ' 4C80H+b BIOS |
|||
01 26 25 4D00H+b BIOS |
|||
02-76 01-26 (directory and data) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.nx sixb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
File diff suppressed because it is too large
@ -1,447 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.op |
|||
.sp 15 |
|||
.ce 100 |
|||
.bo 5 |
|||
CP/M |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Operating System |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Manual |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.sp 10 |
|||
Copyright (c) 1982 |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research |
|||
P.O. Box 579 |
|||
160 Central Avenue |
|||
Pacific Grove, CA 93950 |
|||
(408) 649-3896 |
|||
TWX 910 360 5001 |
|||
.sp 4 |
|||
All Rights Reserved |
|||
.ce 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.po 17 |
|||
.ll 50 |
|||
.ce |
|||
COPYRIGHT |
|||
.sp |
|||
Copyright (c) 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1982, 1983, and 1984 by |
|||
Digital Research Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this |
|||
publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored |
|||
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or |
|||
computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, |
|||
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior |
|||
written permission of Digital Research Inc., Post Office Box 579, |
|||
Pacific Grove, California, 93950. |
|||
.sp |
|||
Thus, readers are granted permission to include the example |
|||
programs, either in whole or in part, in their own programs. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
DISCLAIMER |
|||
.sp |
|||
Digital Research Inc. makes no representations or warranties with |
|||
respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims |
|||
any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for |
|||
any particular purpose. Further, Digital Research Inc. reserves the |
|||
right to revise this publication and to make changes from |
|||
time to time in the content hereof without obligation of |
|||
Digital Research Inc. to notify any person of such revision or |
|||
changes. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
TRADEMARKS |
|||
.sp |
|||
CP/M, CP/NET, and Digital Research and its logo are registered |
|||
trademarks of Digital Research. ASM, DESPOOL, DDT, LINK-80, MAC, |
|||
MP/M, PL/I-80 and SID are trademarks of Digital Research. IBM is |
|||
a registered trademark of International Business Machines. Intel |
|||
is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. TI Silent 700 is |
|||
a trademark of Texas Instruments Incorporated. Zilog and Z80 are |
|||
registered trademarks of Zilog, Inc. |
|||
.mb 4 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
The \c |
|||
.ul |
|||
CP/M Operating System Manual \c |
|||
.qu |
|||
was prepared using the Digital Research TEX Text Formatter and printed |
|||
in the United States of America. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce 6 |
|||
********************************* |
|||
* First Edition: 1976 * |
|||
* Second Edition: July 1982 * |
|||
* Third Edition: March 1983 * |
|||
* Fourth Edition: March 1984 * |
|||
********************************* |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft iii |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
1 CP/M Features and Facilities |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.2.1 General Command Structure . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
1.2.2 File References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.3 Switching Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 |
|||
1.4 Built-in Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.4.1 ERA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 |
|||
1.4.2 DIR Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 |
|||
1.4.3 REN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.4 SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 |
|||
1.4.5 TYPE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
1.4.6 USER Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.5 Line Editing and Output Control . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6 Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.6.1 STAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 |
|||
1.6.2 ASM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 |
|||
1.6.3 LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 |
|||
1.6.4 PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 |
|||
1.6.5 ED Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 |
|||
1.6.6 SYSGEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 |
|||
1.6.7 SUBMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 |
|||
1.6.8 DUMP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
1.6.9 MOVCPM Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.7 BDOS Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 |
|||
.sp |
|||
1.8 CP/M Operation on the Model 800 . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
2 The CP/M Editor |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1 Introduction to ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.1.1 ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 |
|||
2.1.2 Text Transfer Functions . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2.1.3 Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
2.1.4 Line Numbers and ED Start-up . . . . . . . . 2-5 |
|||
2.1.5 Memory Buffer Operation . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2.1.6 Command Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2.1.7 Text Search and Alteration . . . . . . . . . 2-10 |
|||
2.1.8 Source Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2.1.9 Repetitive Command Execution . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft iv |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
2.2 ED Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2.3 Control Characters and Commands . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
3 CP/M Assembler |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.2 Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3 Forming the Operand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.3.1 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 |
|||
3.3.2 Numeric Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.3 Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 |
|||
3.3.4 String Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3.3.6 Precedence of Operators . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4 Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.4.1 The ORG Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.2 The END Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 |
|||
3.4.3 The EQU Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.4 The SET Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 |
|||
3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives . . . . . . . . 3-12 |
|||
3.4.6 The DB Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 |
|||
3.4.7 The DW Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
3.4.8 The DS Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5 Operation Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.5.1 Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3.5.2 Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.3 Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3.5.4 Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3.5.5 Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . 3-19 |
|||
3.5.6 Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.6 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3.7 A Sample Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft v |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
4 CP/M Dynamic Debugging Tool |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2 DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.2.1 The A (Assembly) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 |
|||
4.2.2 The D (Display) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 |
|||
4.2.3 The F (Fill) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.4 The G (Go) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 |
|||
4.2.5 The I (Input) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.6 The L (List) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 |
|||
4.2.7 The M (Move) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.8 The R (Read) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 |
|||
4.2.9 The S (Set) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.1- The T (Trace) Command . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 |
|||
4.2.11 The U (Untrace) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
4.2.12 The X (Examine) Command . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.3 Implementation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4.4 A Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
5 CP/M 2 System Interface |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.2 Operating System Call Conventions . . . . . . . . . 5-3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.3 A Sample File-to-File Copy Program . . . . . . . . 5-35 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.4 A Sample File Dump Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.5 A Sample Random Access Program . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5.6 System Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
6 CP/M 2 Alteration |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.2 First-level System Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.3 Second-level System Generation . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.4 Sample GETSYS and PUTSYS Programs . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vi |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table of Contents |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
6.5 Disk Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.6 The BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.7 A Sample BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.8 A Sample Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.9 Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.10 Disk Parameter Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.11 The DISKDEF Macro Library . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6.12 Sector Blocking and Deblocking . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft vii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Appendixes |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
A \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
B \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal CBIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
C \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal GETSYS/PUTSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
D \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
The Model 800 Cold Start Loader for CP/M 2 . . . . . . D-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
E \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
A Skeletal Cold Start Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
F \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Disk Definition Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
G \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Blocking and Deblocking Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . G-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
H \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
I \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft viii |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
1-1. Line-editing Control Characters . . . . . . . . 1-10 |
|||
1-2. CP/M Transient Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 |
|||
1-3. Physical Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 |
|||
1-4. PIP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. ED Text Transfer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 |
|||
2-2. Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 |
|||
2-3. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 |
|||
2-4. Error Message Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 |
|||
2-5. ED Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 |
|||
2-6. ED Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 |
|||
.sp |
|||
3-1. Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 |
|||
3-2. Arithmetic and Logical Operators . . . . . . . 3-7 |
|||
3-3. Assembler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 |
|||
3-4. Jumps, Calls, and Returns . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 |
|||
3-5. Immediate Operand Instructions . . . . . . . . 3-16 |
|||
3-6. Increment and Decrement Instructions . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-7. Data Movement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 |
|||
3-8. Arithmetic Logic Unit Operations . . . . . . . 3-18 |
|||
3-9. Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 |
|||
3-10. Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 |
|||
.sp |
|||
4-1. Line-editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-2. DDT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 |
|||
4-3. CPU Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Filetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
5-3. Edit Control Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. Standard Memory Size Values . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 |
|||
6-2. Common Values for CP/M Systems . . . . . . . . 6-7 |
|||
6-3. CP/M Disk Sector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 |
|||
6-4. IOBYTE Field Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-5. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 |
|||
6-6. Reserved Locations in Page Zero . . . . . . . . 6-21 |
|||
6-7. Disk Parameter Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-8. BSH and BLM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-9. EXM Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
6-10. BLS Tabluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 |
|||
.sp |
|||
I-1. CP/M Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-1. Overall ED Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
2-2. Memory Buffer Organization . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ft ix |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Tables, Figures, and Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
(continued) |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Figures |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
2-3. Logical Organization of Memory Buffer . . . . . 2-4 |
|||
.sp |
|||
5-1. CP/M Memory Organization . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 |
|||
5-2. File Control Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. IOBYTE Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 |
|||
6-2. Disk Parameter Header Format . . . . . . . . . 6-22 |
|||
6-3. Disk Parameter Header Table . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 |
|||
6-4. Disk Parameter Block Format . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 |
|||
6-5. AL0 and AL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Listings |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp |
|||
6-1. GETSYS Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 |
|||
6-2. BIOS Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 |
|||
.nx onea |
|||
|
|||
@ -1,938 +0,0 @@ |
|||
.bp 1 |
|||
.op |
|||
.cs 5 |
|||
.mt 5 |
|||
.mb 6 |
|||
.pl 66 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.po 10 |
|||
.hm 2 |
|||
.fm 2 |
|||
.he |
|||
.ft 3-% |
|||
.pc 1 |
|||
.tc 3 CP/M Assembler |
|||
.ce 2 |
|||
.sh |
|||
Section 3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.sh |
|||
CP/M Assembler |
|||
.qs |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.1 Introduction |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.1 Introduction |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.1 Introduction |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp 5 |
|||
The CP/M assembler reads assembly-language source files from the |
|||
disk and produces 8080 machine language in Intel hex format. |
|||
To start the CP/M assembler, type a command in one of the |
|||
following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
ASM filename |
|||
ASM filename.parms |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
In both cases, the assembler assumes there is a file on the |
|||
disk with the name: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.ASM |
|||
.sp |
|||
which contains an 8080 assembly-language source file. The first |
|||
and second forms shown above differ only in that the second form |
|||
allows parameters to be passed to the assembler to control source |
|||
file access and hex and print file destinations. |
|||
.pp |
|||
In either case, the CP/M assembler loads and prints the message: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
CP/M ASSEMBLER VER n.n |
|||
.sp |
|||
where n.n is the current version number. In the case of the |
|||
first command, the assembler reads the source file with assumed |
|||
filetype ASM and creates two output files |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
filename.HEX |
|||
filename.PRN |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
The HEX file contains the machine code corresponding to the |
|||
original program in Intel hex format, and the PRN file contains |
|||
an annotated listing showing generated machine code, error flags, |
|||
and source lines. If errors occur during translation, they are |
|||
listed in the PRN file and at the console. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The form ASM filename parms is used to redirect input and |
|||
output files from their defaults. In this case, the parms |
|||
portion of the command is a three-letter group that specifies the |
|||
origin of the source file, the destination of the hex file, and |
|||
the destination of the print file. The form is |
|||
.bp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
filename.p1p2p3 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where p1, p2, and p3 are single letters. P1 can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A,B, ...,P |
|||
.sp |
|||
which designates the disk name that contains the source file. P2 |
|||
can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A,B, ...,P |
|||
.sp |
|||
which designates the disk name that will receive the hex file; or, P2 |
|||
can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Z |
|||
.sp |
|||
which skips the generation of the hex file. |
|||
.pp |
|||
P3 can be |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
A,B, ...,P |
|||
.sp |
|||
which designates the disk name that will receive the |
|||
print file. P3 can also be specified as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
X |
|||
.sp |
|||
which places the listing at the console; or |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
Z |
|||
.sp |
|||
which skips generation of the print file. Thus, the command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X.AAA |
|||
.sp |
|||
indicates that the source, X.HEX, and print, X.PRN, files |
|||
are also to be created on disk A. This form of the command is |
|||
implied if the assembler is run from disk A. Given that you are |
|||
currently addressing disk A, the above command is the same as |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X |
|||
.sp |
|||
The command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X.ABX |
|||
.sp |
|||
indicates that the source file is to be taken from disk A, the |
|||
hex file is to be placed on disk B, and the listing file is to be |
|||
sent to the console. The command |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ASM X.BZZ |
|||
.sp |
|||
takes the source file from disk B and skips the generation of the |
|||
hex and print files. This command is useful for fast execution of |
|||
the assembler to check program syntax. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The source program format is compatible with the Intel 8080 |
|||
assembler. Macros are not implemented in ASM; see the optional |
|||
MAC macro assembler. There are certain extensions in the CP/M |
|||
assembler that make it somewhat easier to use. These extensions |
|||
are described below. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.2 Program Format |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.2 Program Format |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.2 Program Format |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
An assembly-language program acceptable as input to the assembler |
|||
consists of a sequence of statements of the form |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
line# label operation operand ;comment |
|||
.sp |
|||
where any or all of the fields may be present in a particular |
|||
instance. Each assembly-language statement is terminated with a |
|||
carriage return and line-feed (the line-feed is inserted |
|||
automatically by the ED program), or with the character !, which |
|||
is treated as an end-of-line by the assembler. Thus, multiple |
|||
assembly-language statements can be written on the same physical |
|||
line if separated by exclamation point symbols. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The line# is an optional decimal integer value representing the |
|||
source program line number, and ASM ignores this field if |
|||
present. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The label field takes either of the following forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
identifier |
|||
identifier: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
The label field is optional, except where noted in particular statement |
|||
types. The identifier is a sequence of alphanumeric characters |
|||
where the first character is alphabetic. Identifiers can be |
|||
freely used by the programmer to label elements such as program |
|||
steps and assembler directives, but cannot exceed 16 characters |
|||
in length. All characters are significant in an identifier, |
|||
except for the embedded dollar symbol $, which can be used to |
|||
improve readability of the name. Further, all lower-case |
|||
alphabetics are treated as upper-case. The |
|||
following are all valid instances of labels: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
x xy long$name |
|||
|
|||
x: yxl: longer$named$data: |
|||
|
|||
X1Y2 X1x2 x234$5678$9012$3456: |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operation field contains either an assembler directive or |
|||
pseudo operation, or an 8080 machine operation code. The pseudo |
|||
operations and machine operation codes are described in Section |
|||
3.3. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Generally, the operand field of the statement contains an |
|||
expression formed out of constants and labels, along with |
|||
arithmetic and logical operations on these elements. Again, the |
|||
complete details of properly formed expressions are given in |
|||
Section 3.3. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The comment field contains arbitrary characters following the |
|||
semicolon |
|||
symbol until the next real or logical end-of-line. These |
|||
characters are read, listed, and otherwise ignored by the |
|||
assembler. The CP/M assembler also treats statements that begin |
|||
with an * in column one as comment statements that are listed |
|||
and ignored in the assembly process. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The assembly-language program is formulated as a sequence of |
|||
statements of the above form, terminated by an optional END |
|||
statement. All statements following the END are ignored by the |
|||
assembler. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3 Forming the Operand |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Manual 3.3 Forming the Operand |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3 Forming the Operand |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
To describe the operation codes and pseudo operations completely, |
|||
it is necessary first to present the form of the operand field, |
|||
since it is used in nearly all statements. Expressions in the |
|||
operand field consist of simple operands, labels, constants, and |
|||
reserved words, combined in properly formed subexpressions by |
|||
arithmetic and logical operators. The expression computation is |
|||
carried out by the assembler as the assembly proceeds. Each |
|||
expression must produce a 16-bit value during the assembly. |
|||
Further, the number of significant digits in the result must not |
|||
exceed the intended use. If an expression is to be used |
|||
in a byte move immediate instruction, the most significant 8 bits |
|||
of the expression must be zero. The restriction on the |
|||
expression significance is given with the individual |
|||
instructions. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.1 Labels |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.1 Labels |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
As discussed above, a label is an identifier that occurs on a |
|||
particular statement. In general, the label is given a value |
|||
determined by the type of statement that it precedes. If the |
|||
label occurs on a statement that generates machine code or |
|||
reserves memory space (for example, a MOV instruction or a |
|||
DS pseudo operation), the label is given the value of the program address |
|||
that it labels. If the label precedes an EQU or SET, the label |
|||
is given the value that results from evaluating the operand |
|||
field. Except for the SET statement, an identifier can label |
|||
only one statement. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When a label appears in the operand field, its value is |
|||
substituted by the assembler. This value can then be combined |
|||
with other operands and operators to form the operand field for a |
|||
particular instruction. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 3.3.2 Numeric Constants |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.2 Numeric Constants |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
A numeric constant is a 16-bit value in one of several bases. |
|||
The base, called the radix of the constant, is denoted by a |
|||
trailing radix indicator. The following are radix indicators: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 3 |
|||
.nf |
|||
o B is a binary constant (base 2). |
|||
o O is a octal constant (base 8). |
|||
o Q is a octal constant (base 8). |
|||
o D is a decimal constant (base 10). |
|||
o H is a hexadecimal constant (base 16). |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.pp |
|||
Q is an alternate radix indicator for octal numbers because the |
|||
letter O is easily confused with the digit 0. Any numeric |
|||
constant that does not terminate with a radix indicator is |
|||
a decimal constant. |
|||
.pp |
|||
A constant is composed as a sequence of digits, followed by |
|||
an optional radix indicator, where the digits are in the |
|||
appropriate range for the radix. Binary constants must |
|||
be composed of 0 and 1 digits, octal constants can contain digits |
|||
in the range 0-7, while decimal constants contain decimal digits. |
|||
Hexadecimal constants contain decimal digits as well as |
|||
hexadecimal digits A(10D), B(11D), C(12D), D(13D), E(14D), and |
|||
F(15D). Note that the leading digit of a |
|||
hexadecimal constant must be a decimal digit to avoid confusing a |
|||
hexadecimal constant with an identifier. A leading 0 will always |
|||
suffice. A constant composed in this manner must evaluate to a |
|||
binary number that can be contained within a 16-bit counter, |
|||
otherwise it is truncated on the right by the assembler. |
|||
.pp |
|||
Similar |
|||
to identifiers, embedded $ signs are allowed within constants to |
|||
improve their readability. Finally, the radix indicator is |
|||
translated to upper-case if a lower-case letter is encountered. |
|||
The following are all valid instances of numeric constants: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
1234 1234D 1100B 1111$0000$1111$0000B |
|||
.sp |
|||
1234H OFFEH 3377O 33$77$22Q |
|||
.sp |
|||
3377o Ofe3h 1234d Offffh |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.3 Reserved Words |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.3 Reserved Words |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
There are several reserved character sequences that have |
|||
predefined meanings in the operand field of a statement. The |
|||
names of 8080 registers are given below. When they are |
|||
encountered, they produce the values shown to the right. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-1. Reserved Characters |
|||
.sp |
|||
Character Value |
|||
|
|||
A 7 |
|||
B 0 |
|||
C 1 |
|||
D 2 |
|||
E 3 |
|||
H 4 |
|||
L 5 |
|||
M 6 |
|||
SP 6 |
|||
PSW 6 |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Again, lower-case names have the same values as their upper-case |
|||
equivalents. Machine instructions can also be used in the |
|||
operand field; they evaluate to their internal codes. In the case |
|||
of instructions that require operands, where the specific operand |
|||
becomes a part of the binary bit pattern of the instruction, |
|||
for example, MOV A,B, the value of the instruction, in this case MOV, |
|||
is the bit pattern of the instruction with zeros in the optional |
|||
fields, for example, MOV produces 40H. |
|||
.pp |
|||
When the symbol $ occurs in the operand field, not embedded |
|||
within identifiers and numeric constants, its value becomes the |
|||
address of the next instruction to generate, not including the |
|||
instruction contained within the current logical line. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.4 String Constants |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.4 String Constants |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
String constants represent sequences of ASCII characters and are |
|||
represented by enclosing the characters within apostrophe symbols. |
|||
All strings must be fully contained within the current |
|||
physical line (thus allowing exclamation point symbols within |
|||
strings) and must |
|||
not exceed 64 characters in length. The apostrophe character |
|||
itself can be included within a string by representing it as a |
|||
double apostrophe (the two keystrokes ''), which becomes a single |
|||
apostrophe when read by the assembler. In most cases, the string |
|||
length is restricted to either one or two characters (the DB |
|||
pseudo operation is an exception), in which case the string |
|||
becomes an 8- or 16-bit value, respectively. Two-character |
|||
strings become a 16-bit constant, with the second character as |
|||
the low-order byte, and the first character as the high-order |
|||
byte. |
|||
.pp |
|||
The value of a character is its corresponding ASCII code. There |
|||
is no case translation within strings; both upper- and |
|||
lower-case characters can be represented. You should note |
|||
that only graphic printing ASCII characters are |
|||
allowed within strings. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Valid strings: How assembler reads strings: |
|||
|
|||
'A' 'AB' 'ab' 'c' A AB ab c |
|||
'' 'a''' '''' '''' a' ' ' |
|||
'Walla Walla Wash.' Walla Walla Wash. |
|||
'She said ''Hello'' to me.' She said ''Hello'' to me |
|||
'I said ''Hello'' to her.' I said ''Hello'' to her |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.5 Arithmetic and Logical Operators |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The operands described in Section 3.3 can be combined in normal algebraic |
|||
notation using any combination of properly formed operands, |
|||
operators, and parenthesized expressions. The operators |
|||
recognized in the operand field are described in Table 3-2. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.ce |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-2. Arithmetic and Logical Operators |
|||
.ll 60 |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
Operators Meaning |
|||
.sp |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 19 |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a + b unsigned arithmetic sum of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a - b unsigned arithmetic difference between a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
+ b unary plus (produces b) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
- b unary minus (identical to 0 - b) |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a * b unsigned magnitude multiplication of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a / b unsigned magnitude division of a by b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a MOD b remainder after a / b. |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
NOT b logical inverse of b (all 0s become 1s, 1s become |
|||
0s), where b is considered a 16-bit value |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a AND b bit-by-bit logical and of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a OR b bit-by-bit logical or of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a XOR b bit-by-bit logical exclusive or of a and b |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a SHL b the value that results from shifting a to the left |
|||
by an amount b, with zero fill |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti -13 |
|||
a SHR b the value that results from shifting a to the |
|||
right by an amount b, with zero fill |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.ll 65 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
In each case, a and b represent simple operands (labels, numeric |
|||
constants, reserved words, and one- or two-character strings) or |
|||
fully enclosed parenthesized subexpressions, like those shown in |
|||
the following examples: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
10+20 10h+37Q LI/3 (L2+4) SHR 3 |
|||
|
|||
('a' and 5fh) + '0' ('B'+B) OR (PSW+M) |
|||
|
|||
(1+(2+c)) shr (A-(B+1)) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Note that all computations are performed at assembly time as 16-bit |
|||
unsigned operations. Thus, -1 is computed as 0-1, which |
|||
results in the value 0ffffh (that is, all 1s). The resulting |
|||
expression must fit the operation code in which it is used. For |
|||
example, if the expression is used in an ADI (add immediate) |
|||
instruction, the high-order 8 bits of the expression must be |
|||
zero. As a result, the operation ADI-1 produces an error message |
|||
(-1 becomes 0ffffh, which cannot be represented as an 8-bit |
|||
value), while ADI(-1) AND 0FFH is accepted by the assembler |
|||
because the AND operation zeros the high-order bits of the |
|||
expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.3.6 Precedence of Operators |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.3.6 Precedence of Operators |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
As a convenience to the programmer, ASM assumes that operators |
|||
have a relative precedence of application that allows the |
|||
programmer to write expressions without nested levels of |
|||
parentheses. The resulting expression has assumed parentheses |
|||
that are defined by the relative precedence. The order of |
|||
application of operators in unparenthesized expressions is listed |
|||
below. Operators listed first have highest precedence (they are |
|||
applied first in an unparenthesized expression), while operators |
|||
listed last have lowest precedence. Operators listed on the same |
|||
line have equal precedence, and are applied from left to right as |
|||
they are encountered in an expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.mb 5 |
|||
.fm 1 |
|||
.nf |
|||
* / MOD SHL SHR |
|||
|
|||
- + |
|||
|
|||
NOT |
|||
|
|||
AND |
|||
|
|||
OR XOR |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Thus, the expressions shown to the left below are interpreted by |
|||
the assembler as the fully parenthesized expressions shown to the |
|||
right. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 5 |
|||
a*b+c (a*b)+c |
|||
|
|||
a+b*c a+(b*c) |
|||
|
|||
a MOD b*c SHL d ((a MOD b)*c) SHL d |
|||
|
|||
a OR b AND NOT c+d SHL e a OR (b AND (NOT (c+(d SHL e)))) |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
Balanced, parenthesized subexpressions can always be used to |
|||
override the assumed parentheses; thus, the last expression above |
|||
could be rewritten to force application of operators in a |
|||
different order, as shown: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(a OR b) AND (NOT c)+ d SHL e |
|||
.sp |
|||
This results in these assumed parentheses: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
(a OR b) AND ((NOT c) + (d SHL e)) |
|||
.pp |
|||
An unparenthesized expression is well-formed only if the |
|||
expression that results from inserting the assumed parentheses is |
|||
well-formed. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4 Assembler Directives |
|||
.he CP/M Operating System Guide 3.4 Assembler Directives |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4 Assembler Directives |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
Assembler directives are used to set labels to specific values |
|||
during the assembly, perform conditional assembly, define storage |
|||
areas, and specify starting addresses in the program. Each |
|||
assembler directive is denoted by a pseudo operation that appears |
|||
in the operation field of the line. The acceptable pseudo operations |
|||
are shown in Table 3-3. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.sh |
|||
Table 3-3. Assembler Directives |
|||
.sp |
|||
Directive Meaning |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
ORG set the program or data origin |
|||
.sp |
|||
END end program, optional start address |
|||
.sp |
|||
EQU numeric equate |
|||
.sp |
|||
SET numeric set |
|||
.sp |
|||
IF begin conditional assembly |
|||
.sp |
|||
ENDIF end of conditional assembly |
|||
.sp |
|||
DB define data bytes |
|||
.sp |
|||
DW define data words |
|||
.sp |
|||
DS define data storage area |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 3.4.1 The ORG Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.1 The ORG Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The ORG statement takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label ORG expression |
|||
.sp |
|||
where label is an optional program identifier and expression is |
|||
a 16-bit expression, consisting of operands that are defined |
|||
before the ORG statement. The assembler begins machine code |
|||
generation at the location specified in the expression. There |
|||
can be any number of ORG statements within a particular program, |
|||
and there are no checks to ensure that the programmer is not |
|||
defining overlapping memory areas. Note that |
|||
most programs written for the CP/M system begin with an ORG |
|||
statement of the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
ORG 100H |
|||
.sp |
|||
which causes machine code generation to begin at the base of the |
|||
CP/M transient program area. If a label is specified in the ORG |
|||
statement, the label is given the value of the expression. This |
|||
label can then be used in the operand field of other statements |
|||
to represent this expression. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.2 The END Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.2 The END Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The END statement is optional in an assembly-language program, |
|||
but if it is present it must be the last statement. All |
|||
subsequent statements are ignored in the assembly. The END |
|||
statement takes the following two forms: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
label END |
|||
|
|||
label END expression |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the label is again optional. If the first form is used, |
|||
the assembly process stops, and the default starting address of |
|||
the program is taken as 0000. Otherwise, the expression is |
|||
evaluated, and becomes the program starting address. This |
|||
starting address is included in the last record of the Intel-formatted |
|||
machine code hex file that results from the |
|||
assembly. Thus, most CP/M assembly-language programs end with |
|||
the statement: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
END 100H |
|||
.sp |
|||
resulting in the default starting address of 100H (beginning of |
|||
the transient program area). |
|||
.bp |
|||
.tc 3.4.3 The EQU Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.3 The EQU Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The EQU (equate) statement is used to set up synonyms for |
|||
particular numeric values. The EQU statement takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
label EQU expression |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the label must be present and must not label any other |
|||
statement. The assembler evaluates the expression and assigns |
|||
this value to the identifier given in the label field. The |
|||
identifier is usually a name that describes the value in a more |
|||
human-oriented manner. Further, this name is used throughout the |
|||
program to place parameters on certain functions. Suppose data |
|||
received from a teletype appears on a particular input port, and |
|||
data is sent to the teletype through the next output port in |
|||
sequence. For example, you can use this series of equate statements |
|||
to define these ports for a particular hardware environment: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TTYBASE EQU 10H ;BASE PORT NUMBER FOR TTY |
|||
|
|||
TTYIN EQU TTYBASE ;TTY DATA IN |
|||
|
|||
TTYOUT EQU TTYBASE+1 ;TTY DATA OUT |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
At a later point in the program, the statements that access the |
|||
teletype can appear as follows: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 7 |
|||
.nf |
|||
IN TTYIN ;READ TTY DATA TO REG-A |
|||
|
|||
... |
|||
|
|||
OUT TTYOUT ;WRITE DATA TO TTY FROM REG-A |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
making the program more readable than if the absolute I/O ports |
|||
are used. Further, if the hardware environment is redefined |
|||
to start the teletype communications ports at 7FH instead of 10H, |
|||
the first statement need only be changed to |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
TTYBASE EQU 7FH ;BASE PORT NUMBER FOR TTY |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
and the program can be reassembled without changing any other |
|||
statements. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.4 The SET Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.4 The SET Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The SET statement is similar to the EQU, taking the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label SET expression |
|||
.sp |
|||
except that the label can occur on other SET statements within |
|||
the program. The expression is evaluated and becomes the current |
|||
value associated with the label. Thus, the EQU statement defines |
|||
a label with a single value, while the SET statement defines a |
|||
value that is valid from the current SET statement to the point |
|||
where the label occurs on the next SET statement. The use of the |
|||
SET is similar to the EQU statement, but is used most often in |
|||
controlling conditional assembly. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.5 The IF and ENDIF Directives |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The IF and ENDIF statements define a range of assembly-language |
|||
statements that are to be included or excluded during the |
|||
assembly process. These statements take on the form: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
IF expression |
|||
|
|||
statement#1 |
|||
|
|||
statement#2 |
|||
|
|||
... |
|||
|
|||
statement#n |
|||
|
|||
ENDIF |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp |
|||
.pp |
|||
When encountering the IF statement, the assembler evaluates the |
|||
expression following the IF. All operands in the expression must |
|||
be defined ahead of the IF statement. If the expression |
|||
evaluates to a nonzero value, then statement#1 through |
|||
statement#n are assembled. If the expression evaluates to zero, |
|||
the statements are listed but not assembled. Conditional |
|||
assembly is often used to write a single generic program that |
|||
includes a number of possible run-time environments, with only a |
|||
few specific portions of the program selected for any particular |
|||
assembly. The following program segments, for example, might be |
|||
part of a program that communicates with either a teletype or a |
|||
CRT console (but not both) by selecting a particular value for |
|||
TTY before the assembly begins. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
TRUE EQU OFFFFH ;DEFINE VALUE OF TRUE |
|||
FALSE EQU NOT TRUE ;DEFINE VALUE OF FALSE |
|||
; |
|||
TTY EQU TRUE ;TRUE IF TTY, FALSE IF CRT |
|||
; |
|||
TTYBASE EQU 10H ;BASE OF TTY I/O PORTS |
|||
CRTBASE EQU 20H ;BASE OF CRT I/O PORTS |
|||
IF TTY ;ASSEMBLE RELATIVE TO |
|||
;TTYBASE |
|||
CONIN EQU TTYBASE ;CONSOLE INPUT |
|||
CONOUT EQU TTYBASE+1 ;CONSOLE OUTPUT |
|||
ENDIF |
|||
|
|||
; IF NOT TTY ;ASSEMBLE RELATIVE TO |
|||
;CRTBASE |
|||
CONIN EQU CRTBASE ;CONSOLE INPUT |
|||
CONOUT EQU CRTBASE+1 ;CONSOLE OUTPUT |
|||
|
|||
ENDIF |
|||
... |
|||
IN CONIN ;READ CONSOLE DATA |
|||
... |
|||
OUT CONTOUT ;WRITE CONSOLE DATA |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
In this case, the program assembles for an environment where |
|||
a teletype is connected, based at port 10H. The statement |
|||
defining TTY can be changed to |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
TTY EQU FALSE |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
and, in this case, the program assembles for a CRT based at |
|||
port 20H. |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.tc 3.4.6 The DB Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.6 The DB Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DB directive allows the programmer to define initialized |
|||
storage areas in single-precision byte format. The DB statement |
|||
takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label DB e#1, e#2, ..., e#n |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where e#1 through e#n are either expressions that evaluate to 8-bit |
|||
values (the high-order bit must be zero) or are ASCII strings |
|||
of length no greater than 64 characters. There is no practical |
|||
restriction on the number of expressions included on a single |
|||
source line. The expressions are evaluated and placed |
|||
sequentially into the machine code file following the last |
|||
program address generated by the assembler. String characters |
|||
are similarly placed into memory starting with the first |
|||
character and ending with the last character. Strings of length |
|||
greater than two characters cannot be used as operands in more |
|||
complicated expressions. |
|||
.bp |
|||
.sh |
|||
Note: \c |
|||
.qs |
|||
ASCII |
|||
characters are always placed in memory with the parity bit reset |
|||
(0). Also, there is no translation from lower- to upper-case |
|||
within strings. The optional label can be used to reference the |
|||
data area throughout the remainder of the program. The following |
|||
are examples of valid DB statements: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
data: DB 0,1,2,3,4,5 |
|||
DB data and 0ffh,5,377Q,1+2+3+4 |
|||
|
|||
sign-on: DB 'please type your name',cr,lf,0 |
|||
DB 'AB' SHR 8, 'C', 'DE' AND 7FH |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.4.7 The DW Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.7 The DW Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DW statement is similar to the DB statement except double-precision |
|||
two-byte words of storage are initialized. The DW statement |
|||
takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
label DW e#1, e#2, ..., e#n |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where e#1 through e#n are expressions that evaluate to 16-bit |
|||
results. Note that ASCII strings of one or two |
|||
characters are allowed, but strings longer than two characters |
|||
are disallowed. In all cases, the data storage is consistent |
|||
with the 8080 processor; the least significant byte of the |
|||
expression is stored first in memory, followed by the most |
|||
significant byte. The following are examples of DW statements: |
|||
.sp 2 |
|||
.in 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
doub: DW 0ffefh,doub+4,signon-$,255+255 |
|||
DW 'a', 5, 'ab', 'CD', 6 shl 8 or llb. |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.sp 3 |
|||
.tc 3.4.8 The DS Directive |
|||
.sh |
|||
3.4.8 The DS Directive |
|||
.qs |
|||
.pp |
|||
The DS statement is used to reserve an area of uninitialized |
|||
memory, and takes the form: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.ti 8 |
|||
.nf |
|||
label DS expression |
|||
.fi |
|||
.sp |
|||
where the label is optional. The assembler begins subsequent |
|||
code generation after the area reserved by the DS. Thus, the DS |
|||
statement given above has exactly the same effect as the following |
|||
statement: |
|||
.sp |
|||
.nf |
|||
.in 7 |
|||
label: EQU $ ;LABEL VALUE IS CURRENT CODE LOCATION |
|||
ORG $+expression ;MOVE PAST RESERVED AREA |
|||
.fi |
|||
.in 0 |
|||
.nx threeb |
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
|
|||
Some files were not shown because too many files changed in this diff
Loading…
Reference in new issue